JP7834566B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

This invention relates to a gaming machine that performs variable display of first or second identification information based on the fulfillment of starting conditions, and can control the machine to a favorable state for the player when the variable display shows a specific display result.

Conventional gaming machines have been proposed that display a title indicating the type of reach animation at the start of a reach animation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Furthermore, some machines can perform a step-up animation where the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device changes in stages. This animation involves treating the display screen of the liquid crystal display device as glass, displaying cracks (a glass plate as an image indicating impending breakage), and then displaying multiple fragment images to make the display screen appear as if it has broken (see, for example, Patent Document 2).

Japanese Patent Publication No. 2019-118411 Japanese Patent Publication No. 2020-127593

However, there was room to improve the marketability of gaming machines having the functions and configurations described in Patent Documents 1 and 2.

This invention was made in consideration of the above circumstances and aims to provide a gaming machine with enhanced marketability.

The gaming machine according to claim 1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display of specific identification information, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, is capable of controlling the player to an advantageous state,
Game control means,
A means of controlling the performance,
Display means and
It comprises a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means ,
The aforementioned game control means is
Based on the fact that the game medium has entered the starting area, it is determined whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state.
The aforementioned specific identification information can be displayed in a variable manner.
Based on the result of the above determination, it is possible to determine one of a plurality of variation patterns, including a first variation pattern which is controlled to the advantageous state, a second variation pattern which is not controlled to the advantageous state, a third variation pattern which is controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth variation pattern which is not controlled to the advantageous state.
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command can be sent to the performance control means.
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command can be sent to the performance control means.
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command can be sent to the performance control means.
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command can be sent to the performance control means.
The aforementioned performance control means is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will be controlled to the advantageous state in the first reach.
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach will not control the advantageous state.
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will be controlled to the advantageous state in the second reach.
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach will not control the advantageous state,
The execution time of the title display corresponding to the first reach and the execution time of the title display corresponding to the second reach are different,
The title display corresponding to the first reach and the title display corresponding to the second reach are:
The first part is from the start of the title display corresponding to the first reach or the title display corresponding to the second reach until it is displayed in a specific area,
A second part in which a title display corresponding to the first reach or a title display corresponding to the second reach is displayed in the specific area,
It consists of a third part which terminates the display of the title corresponding to the first reach or the title corresponding to the second reach,
The aforementioned display means is
In the title display corresponding to the first reach, the title display corresponding to the first reach is displayed such that the second part is longer than the first part and the third part, and the first part is longer than the third part.
In the title display corresponding to the second reach, the title display corresponding to the second reach is displayed such that the second part is longer than the first part and the third part, and the first part is longer than the third part .
After notification that the system will be controlled to the aforementioned advantageous state, it is possible to display the name of the advantageous state corresponding to the controlled advantageous state.
The aforementioned advantageous state name display is displayed larger than the title display corresponding to the first reach and the title display corresponding to the second reach.
In the first reach, the light-emitting means is controlled using a first reach luminance data table composed of luminance data.
In the second reach, the light-emitting means is controlled using a second reach luminance data table composed of luminance data.
When the title display corresponding to the first reach is executed, the title display brightness data table corresponding to the first reach is used.
In the introductory part following the title display corresponding to the first reach, the brightness data table for the first reach introductory part is used.
When the title display corresponding to the second reach is executed, the title display brightness data table corresponding to the second reach is used.
In the introductory part following the title display corresponding to the second reach, the brightness data table for the second reach introductory part is used.
It is possible to display fragment images and perform predetermined effects that suggest the system is controlled to the advantageous state,
The display patterns for the fragment images in the aforementioned predetermined performance include a first pattern in which the fragment images are displayed after the image indicating impending breakage is displayed, and a second pattern in which the fragment images are displayed without displaying the image indicating impending breakage.
In the first pattern, when the fragment image is displayed, a predetermined sound corresponding to the fragment image is output, whereas in the second pattern, when the fragment image is displayed, the predetermined sound is not output.
In the first pattern, the object image can be displayed before the fragment image is displayed.
The effect image can be displayed before the object image is displayed.
There are cases where the object image is displayed after the effect image is displayed, and cases where the object image is not displayed.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
When an error occurs, the light-emitting means is controlled using an error brightness data table.
If the error occurs while the light-emitting means is being controlled using the first reach brightness data table, the light-emitting means is controlled using the error brightness data table, and the timer value corresponding to the first reach brightness data table is updated.
If the error occurs while the light-emitting means is being controlled using the second reach brightness data table, the light-emitting means is controlled using the error brightness data table, and the timer value corresponding to the second reach brightness data table is updated.
It is characterized by the following.

Furthermore, the present invention may have only the inventive features described in the claims of the present invention, or it may have the inventive features described in the claims of the present invention along with other features not described therein.

This is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. This is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. This is a diagram showing the various control boards and other components installed in a pachinko gaming machine. This flowchart shows an example of the main game control process. This flowchart shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. This is a flowchart showing an example of the special pattern processing. This is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table. This diagram shows the numerical range for a jackpot and the numerical range for a miss with time reduction in the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal state or time reduction state. This is a flowchart showing an example of the main processing for controlling the visual effects. This flowchart shows an example of the performance control process. This is a front view showing a pachinko game machine in the feature section 131SG. This is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and other components mounted on the pachinko game machine in the feature section 131SG. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing each random number, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table, (C1) and (C2) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table, and (D) is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of each jackpot. This is an explanatory diagram showing a table that determines the number of time reductions for each transition trigger. This is an explanatory diagram of the fluctuation pattern. This is an explanatory diagram of the fluctuation pattern. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern type determination table. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern determination table. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern determination table. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern determination table. This is an explanatory diagram showing the expected probability of a Super Reach's reach animation. This is an explanatory diagram showing the difference in expected value between the reach animations of a Super Reach. This diagram illustrates the effects control commands. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a data storage area for game control. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a data storage area for performance control. This is a flowchart showing an example of the process for determining whether a player has entered the competition at the start of the competition. This is a flowchart showing an example of the random value determination process when winning a prize. This flowchart shows an example of the main game control process. This flowchart shows an example of the normal processing of special symbols. This flowchart shows an example of the normal processing of special symbols. This is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stopping process. This is a state transition diagram used to explain state transitions. This flowchart shows an example of the performance control process. This is an explanatory diagram showing the execution rate of pre-announcement effects. This flowchart shows an example of the variable display start setting process. This is an explanatory diagram showing the determination ratio of the stopping symbols. This is an explanatory diagram showing the control patterns for different variation patterns. This is an explanatory diagram showing the control patterns for different variation patterns. This diagram shows the flow of the effects during variable display in the normal state. This diagram shows the flow of the display during variable display in the time-saving state A and the probability variation state. This diagram shows the flow of the effects during variable display in time-saving state B. This figure shows the progression of images during the execution of the low-base weak reach A演出 (performance/animation). This is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low-base weak reach A演出 (performance/animation). This figure shows the progression of images during the execution of the low-base weak reach B演出 (performance/animation). This is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low-base weak reach B effect. This figure shows the progression of images during the execution of the low-base strong reach A演出 (performance/animation). This is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low-base strong reach A演出 (performance/effect). This diagram shows the progression of images illustrating a bad example of a low-base strong reach A演出 (performance/animation). This diagram shows the progression of images during the execution of the low-base strong reach B effect. This is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low-base strong reach A演出 (performance/effect). This diagram shows the progression of images during the execution of the low-base strongest reach animation. This is a timing chart showing the execution status of the strongest low-base reach animation. This figure shows the image progression in a modified version of the title display section. This diagram shows the progression of images during the execution of the high-base super reach A to D effects. This is a timing chart showing the execution status of high-base super reach A to D effects. This figure shows the position where title characters are displayed within the display area of an image display device. This is an explanatory diagram showing the duration of the Super Reach animation. This is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the durations of the Super Reach animation sequences. This is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the title text and decorative symbols in the Super Reach animation. This is an explanatory diagram showing the status of the expected value indication display. This diagram shows the progression of images during the execution of a selection animation. This diagram illustrates the number of operations required to switch to the next title during the selection sequence, and the percentage of times a super reach sequence is executed when the selection sequence is performed. This is an explanatory diagram of the effects that can be executed while the display is variable. This is an explanatory diagram showing the execution rate of effects that can be performed while the display is variable. This figure shows the display status of the explanatory text shown in the explanatory text display animation. This is a timing chart showing the display status of the explanatory text shown in the explanatory text display animation. This diagram shows the status of the title color change effect. This diagram shows the timing of the title text's color change during the title color change effect. This diagram shows the execution status of the action to facilitate operation A. This diagram shows the execution status of the operation promotion effect B. This diagram shows the execution status of the action prompting C. This diagram shows the execution status of the operation acceleration effect D. This figure shows the display configuration of the operation guidance image. This diagram shows the execution status of the jackpot start animation. This diagram shows the remaining number of spins until the bonus time is reached. This diagram shows the execution status of the bonus time start animation. There is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the title text and explanatory text of the Super Reach演出 (Super Reach演出), the title text and operation prompt text of the Jackpot Start演出 (Jackpot Start演出), and the operation prompt text. There is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the title text of the Super Reach演出 (Super Reach演出) and the title text of the Playtime Start演出 (Playtime Start演出). This diagram shows the arrangement of the game effect lamps. This diagram explains the mechanism of output to the LED driver. This diagram illustrates an example of lamp control using a luminance data table. This diagram illustrates an example of lamp control using a grandchild table with timer management in the child table. This figure shows the brightness data table used in the Super Reach animation. This diagram shows the settings for the parent table of common titles in the weak reach series. This diagram shows the settings for the subtable of the common titles in the weak reach series. This diagram shows the settings for the grandchild table of the common titles in the weak reach series. This diagram shows the settings for the grandchild table of the common titles in the weak reach series. This diagram shows the settings for the grandchild table of the common titles in the weak reach series. This diagram shows the settings for the parent table of the title's common chance-up red. This diagram shows the settings for the red child table, which is a common chance-up feature for all titles. This diagram shows the settings for the red grandchild table, which is a common chance-up feature for all titles. This diagram shows the settings for the red grandchild table, which is a common chance-up feature for all titles. This diagram shows the settings for the red grandchild table, which is a common chance-up feature for all titles. This diagram shows the settings for the parent table of the title-common chance-up gold. This diagram shows the settings for the title-specific chance-up gold child table. This diagram shows the settings for the title-common chance-up gold grandchild table. This diagram shows the settings for the title-common chance-up gold grandchild table. This diagram shows the settings for the title-common chance-up gold grandchild table. This diagram shows the settings for the parent table when introducing the weak reach type, weak reach A. This diagram shows the settings of the sub-table for introducing the weak reach type weak reach A. This diagram shows the settings for the sub-table of the weak reach type weak reach A introduction. This diagram shows the settings for the sub-table of the weak reach type weak reach A introduction. This diagram shows the settings for the sub-table of the weak reach type weak reach A introduction. This diagram shows the settings for the sub-table of the weak reach type weak reach A introduction. This diagram shows the settings for the sub-table of the weak reach type weak reach A introduction. This diagram shows the settings for the parent table when introducing the weak reach type weak reach B. This diagram shows the settings of the sub-table for introducing the weak reach type weak reach B. This diagram shows the settings for the sub-table of the weak reach type weak reach B introduction. This diagram shows the settings for the sub-table of the weak reach type weak reach B introduction. This diagram shows the settings for the sub-table of the weak reach type weak reach B introduction. This diagram shows the settings for the sub-table of the weak reach type weak reach B introduction. This diagram shows the settings for the sub-table of the weak reach type weak reach B introduction. This diagram shows the settings for the sub-table of the weak reach type weak reach B introduction. This diagram shows the settings for the parent table of the common titles in the strong reach series. This diagram shows the settings for the subtable of the common titles in the strong reach series. This diagram shows the settings for the grandchild table of the common titles in the strong reach series. This diagram shows the settings for the grandchild table of the common titles in the strong reach series. This diagram shows the settings for the grandchild table of the common titles in the strong reach series. This diagram shows the settings for the grandchild table of the common titles in the strong reach series. This diagram shows the settings for the parent table when introducing the Strong Reach A type. This diagram shows the settings for the sub-table of the Strong Reach A introduction. This diagram shows the settings for the grandchild table of the Strong Reach A introduction. This diagram shows the settings for the grandchild table of the Strong Reach A introduction. This diagram shows the settings for the grandchild table of the Strong Reach A introduction. This diagram shows the settings for the grandchild table of the Strong Reach A introduction. This diagram shows the settings for the grandchild table of the Strong Reach A introduction. This diagram shows the settings for the grandchild table of the Strong Reach A introduction. This diagram shows the settings for the parent table when introducing the Strong Reach B type. This diagram shows the settings for the sub-table of the Strong Reach B introduction. This diagram shows the settings for the grandchild table when introducing the strong reach type, strong reach B. This diagram shows the settings for the grandchild table when introducing the strong reach type, strong reach B. This diagram shows the settings for the grandchild table when introducing the strong reach type, strong reach B. This diagram shows the settings for the grandchild table when introducing the strong reach type, strong reach B. This diagram shows the settings for the grandchild table when introducing the strong reach type, strong reach B. This diagram shows the settings for the parent table when introducing the strongest reach series strongest reach title. This diagram shows the settings for the sub-table of the strongest reach series, introducing the strongest reach title. This diagram shows the settings for the grandchild table of the strongest reach series, introducing the strongest reach title. This diagram shows the settings for the grandchild table of the strongest reach series, introducing the strongest reach title. This diagram shows the settings for the grandchild table of the strongest reach series, introducing the strongest reach title. This diagram shows the settings for the grandchild table of the strongest reach series, introducing the strongest reach title. This diagram shows the settings for the grandchild table of the strongest reach series, introducing the strongest reach title. This diagram shows the settings for the grandchild table of the strongest reach series, introducing the strongest reach title. This diagram shows the settings for the grandchild table of the strongest reach series, introducing the strongest reach title. This diagram shows the settings for the grandchild table of the strongest reach series, introducing the strongest reach title. This diagram shows the settings for the grandchild table of the strongest reach series, introducing the strongest reach title. This diagram shows the settings of the parent table for common titles with a high base reach system. This diagram shows the settings for the subtable of a common title with a high base reach. This diagram shows the settings for the grandchild table of a common title with a high base reach. This diagram shows the settings for the grandchild table of a common title with a high base reach. This diagram shows the settings for the grandchild table of a common title with a high base reach. This diagram shows the settings of the parent table for introducing the high-base reach type reach A. This diagram shows the settings of the sub-table for introducing the high-base reach type reach A. This diagram shows the settings for the grandchild table when introducing the high-base reach type reach A. This diagram shows the settings for the grandchild table when introducing the high-base reach type reach A. This diagram shows the settings for the grandchild table when introducing the high-base reach type reach A. This diagram shows the settings of the parent table for introducing the high-base reach type reach B. This diagram shows the settings for the subtable of the high-base reach-type reach B introduction. This diagram shows the settings of the parent table for introducing the high-base reach type reach C. This diagram shows the settings for the sub-table of the high-base reach type reach C introduction. This diagram shows the settings of the parent table for introducing the high-base reach type reach D. This diagram shows the settings for the subtable of the high-base reach-type reach D introduction. This diagram shows the relationship between the components that make up the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects and the brightness data. This is a front view showing the gaming machine in the embodiment. This is a diagram showing the various control boards and other components installed in a pachinko gaming machine. This is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of VRAM. This is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of VRAM. This is an explanatory diagram showing the layer configuration. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating example command formats for controlling the performance. This is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. This is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the jackpot type determination table, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the jackpot types. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the fluctuation pattern in the normal state, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the fluctuation pattern in the time-saving state or the probability-changing state. (A) to (F) are explanatory diagrams of the variation pattern determination table. This is an explanatory diagram showing the data storage area for game control. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the data storage area for performance control, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the command buffer received when a prize is won at the start. This flowchart shows an example of the main game control process. This flowchart shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. This is a flowchart showing an example of the special pattern processing. This is a flowchart showing an example of the process for determining whether a player has entered the competition at the start of the competition. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the random value determination process when winning, and (B) is a diagram showing the fluctuating categories. This flowchart shows an example of the normal processing of special symbols. This is a flowchart showing an example of the process for setting the variation pattern. This is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stopping process. This is a flowchart showing an example of the process that ends after a big win. This is a flowchart showing an example of the main processing for controlling the visual effects. This flowchart shows an example of the performance control process. This diagram explains whether or not the pending display animation is executed and the proportion of the animation pattern that determines it. This flowchart shows an example of the variable display start setting process. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the determination ratio for whether or not to execute the continuous crackle effect in the normal state. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the dialogue preview effect setting process, (B) is an explanatory diagram of whether or not the dialogue preview effect is executed in the normal state and the effect pattern determination ratio, and (C) is an explanatory diagram of the effect patterns. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing whether or not a background change is performed and the proportion of the background change effect pattern that is determined; (B) is an explanatory diagram showing whether or not a reach suggestion effect is performed and the proportion of the effect pattern that is determined; and (C) is an explanatory diagram showing whether or not a cut-in effect is performed and the proportion of the effect pattern that is determined. This diagram explains the types of effects that can be performed under normal conditions and the patterns of the crack effect. This diagram explains the types of effects that can be performed under normal conditions and the patterns of the crack effect. This is a diagram illustrating the types of effects that can be performed during the time-saving and probability-changing states, as well as the patterns of the crack effect. This diagram explains the approximate execution timing and duration for each variation pattern of the performance. This diagram explains the approximate execution timing and duration for each variation pattern of the performance. This diagram explains the approximate execution timing and duration for each variation pattern of the performance. This diagram explains the approximate execution timing and duration for each variation pattern of the performance. This diagram shows the sequence of events in Super Reach α. This diagram shows the sequence of events in Super Reach α. This diagram shows the sequence of events in Super Reach α. This diagram shows the sequence of events in Super Reach β. This diagram shows the sequence of events in Super Reach β. This diagram shows the details of an example of the operation of the first consecutive crack effect. This diagram shows the details of an example of the operation of the second consecutive crack effect. This diagram shows a detailed example of how the dialogue preview effect works. This diagram shows a detailed example of the operation of background change effect A. This diagram shows a detailed example of the operation of background change effect A. This diagram shows the details of an example of background change effect B in operation. This diagram shows details of some examples of how the pseudo-consecutive win animation works. This diagram shows a detailed example of how the reach indication effect works. This diagram shows a detailed example of how the reach indication effect works. This diagram shows the details of an example of how a weak development effect works. This diagram shows the details of some examples of operations in the strong development sequence A. This diagram shows the details of an example of the operation of the strong development effect B. This diagram shows the details of an example of the operation of the strong development effect B. This diagram shows a detailed example of how the cut-in animation works. This diagram shows a detailed example of how the result notification animation works when the variable display result is a jackpot. This diagram shows a detailed example of how the result notification animation works when the variable display result is a jackpot. This diagram shows a detailed example of how the result notification animation works when the variable display result is incorrect. This diagram compares the details of each performance. This diagram compares the details of each performance. This is a timing chart showing the details of the first and second consecutive crack effects. This is a timing chart showing the details of the dialogue preview effect. This is a timing chart showing the details of background change effect A. This is a timing chart showing the details of background change effect B. This is a timing chart showing the details of the pseudo-consecutive win animation. This is a timing chart showing the details of the reach-indicating animations. This is a timing chart showing the details of the weak development sequence. This is a timing chart showing the details of the strong development sequence A. This is a timing chart showing the details of the strong development sequence B. This is a timing chart showing the details of the cut-in animation. This is a timing chart showing the details of the result notification sequence. This is an explanatory diagram showing the changes in the speed of the fragment images in each effect. This diagram shows the crack patterns used in crack effects. This figure shows examples of how each cracking pattern is displayed. This figure shows examples of display with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern A. This figure shows examples of display with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern B. This figure shows examples of display with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern C. This figure shows examples of display with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern D. This figure shows examples of display with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern E. This figure shows examples of display with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern F. This figure shows examples of display with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern G. (A) shows the fragment images displayed during the pseudo-consecutive animation, and (B) shows the fragment images displayed during the cut-in animation. (A) shows the fragment images displayed during background change effect A, and (B) shows the fragment images displayed during strong development effect B. This figure shows a modified example 1 of the present invention. This figure shows a modified example 2 of the present invention. This figure shows a modified example 3 of the present invention. This figure shows a modified example 4 of the present invention. This figure shows a modified example 5 of the present invention. This figure shows a modified example 6 of the present invention. This figure shows a modified example of the present invention, part 7. This figure shows a modified example of the present invention, part 8. This figure shows a modified example 9 of the present invention. This figure shows a modified example 9 of the present invention. This figure shows a modified example 10 of the present invention.

[Form 1]
The gaming machine of form 1-1 is,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information, a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") is derived, thereby controlling the machine to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
Game control means (microcomputer 100 for game control),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120),
It comprises a display means (image display device 5),
The aforementioned game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is,
When a game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting prize entry point, second starting prize entry point), it is determined whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state).
The variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (First Special Drawing, Second Special Drawing) is performed.
Based on the result of the above determination, one of a plurality of variation patterns is determined from among a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state.
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern specification command that specifies a winning variation pattern) is sent to the performance control means.
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern specification command specifying a losing variation pattern) is sent to the performance control means.
The aforementioned performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during a specific reach (super reach animation).
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the specific reach (super reach performance),
The aforementioned specific reach (super reach effect) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled.
The display means (image display device 5) is
It is possible to display a variable display of decorative identification information (decorative pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (first special drawing, second special drawing),
The system is characterized by displaying decorative identification information (decorative symbols) in a reach pattern before the title display part of the aforementioned specific reach (super reach performance), and displaying a title display (title text) corresponding to the specific reach in the title display part of the specific reach using the display position of the decorative identification information (decorative symbols) in the reach pattern.
According to this feature, when decorative identification information is displayed in a reach state, the player will focus on which decorative identification information caused the reach state. Therefore, by using the display position of the decorative identification information that caused the reach state in the title display part of a specific reach to display the title corresponding to that specific reach, the player's attention can be naturally drawn to the title display as well, resulting in a suitable title display.

The gaming machine of form 1-2 is the gaming machine described in form 1-1,
The aforementioned specific reach (super reach performance) is characterized in that, before the title display part, decorative identification information is displayed in a reach pattern of a first size (decorative symbol (large)), and thereafter the decorative identification information (decorative symbol (large)) displayed in the reach pattern is displayed in a second size (decorative symbol (small)) which is smaller than the first size, and the title display (title text) corresponding to the aforementioned specific reach (super reach performance) is displayed using the display position of the decorative identification information (decorative symbol (small)) displayed in the second size.
This feature allows decorative identification information, which was previously displayed in the first size, to attract the player's attention by becoming the second size. By using the display position of the second-size decorative identification information to display the title corresponding to a specific reach, it becomes easier to draw attention to the title display.

The gaming machine of form 1-3 is the gaming machine described in form 1-1 or 1-2,
In the title display part of the aforementioned specific reach, the title display (title text) corresponding to the specific reach is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative identification information (decorative pattern) that has been displayed in the reach state.
According to this feature, in the title display part of a specific reach, when decorative identification information that has become a reach is displayed, the title display corresponding to that specific reach is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative identification information that has become a reach, making it easier to draw attention to the title display.

A gaming machine of form 1-4 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 1-1 to 1-3,
The aforementioned specific reach (super reach performance) includes a first reach (low-base weak reach A and B performances) and a second reach (low-base strong reach A to C performances) which has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach.
The title display corresponding to the first reach and the title display corresponding to the second reach are characterized in that they appear overlapping with one of the decorative identification information (the decorative pattern on the left) of the decorative identification information that has reached.
According to this feature, the title display corresponding to the first reach and the title display corresponding to the second reach appear overlapping with one of the decorative identification information in the reach state, making it easier to draw attention to the title display.

The gaming machine of form 1-5 is the gaming machine described in form 1-4,
The aforementioned specific reach (super reach effect) includes a third reach (low-base strongest reach effect) which has a higher probability of being controlled to the advantageous state than the second reach (low-base strong reach effects A to C),
The title display corresponding to the third reach is characterized by appearing in a state where it overlaps with the decorative identification information (decorative patterns on both sides) of both sides that have entered the reach state.
According to this feature, the title display corresponding to the third reach, which has a higher probability of being controlled to a more advantageous state than the first and second reaches, appears overlapping with the decorative identification information of both reach patterns, thus allowing the title display corresponding to the third reach to be displayed in a more impactful manner.

The gaming machine of form 1-6 is the gaming machine described in form 1-5,
The title display corresponding to the first reach (low-base weak reach A and B effects), the title display corresponding to the second reach (low-base strong reach A to C effects), and the title display corresponding to the third reach (low-base strongest reach effect) are characterized in that they appear overlapping with one of the decorative identification information (the decorative symbol on the left) or both decorative identification information (the decorative symbols on both sides) of the decorative identification information that has become a reach, and are displayed in a fixed position, and even during the period that they are displayed in the fixed position, they are displayed overlapping with a part of the decorative identification information (the decorative symbols on both sides) that has become a reach.
This feature makes it easier to draw attention to the title even after it has been displayed in its designated position.

[Form 2]
The gaming machine of type 2-1 is,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information, a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") is derived, thereby controlling the machine to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
Game control means (microcomputer 100 for game control),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120),
A means of display, and comprising,
The aforementioned game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is,
When a game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting prize entry point, second starting prize entry point), it is determined whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state described above.
The variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (First Special Drawing, Second Special Drawing) is performed.
Based on the result of the above determination, one of the following multiple fluctuation patterns is determined: a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state; a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state; a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to 10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state; and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to 12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state.
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-JA and PB1-JB) is sent to the performance control means.
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-2 and PA2-3) is sent to the performance control means.
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-2 to 10) is sent to the performance control means.
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-4 to PA2-12) is sent to the performance control means.
The aforementioned performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance),
The first reach (low-base weak reach A and B effects) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
The second reach (low-base strong reach A to C performance) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
The display means (image display device 5) is
It is possible to display a variable display of decorative identification information (decorative pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (first special drawing, second special drawing),
In the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the first decorative identification information (odd-numbered decorative symbols) is displayed in a reach pattern before the title display part, and in the title display part, the title display (title text) is displayed using the display position of the first decorative identification information (odd-numbered decorative symbols) in the reach pattern.
In the first reach (low base weak reach A and B performance), the second decorative identification information (even-numbered decorative symbols) is displayed in a reach pattern before the title display part, and in the title display part, the title display (title text) is displayed using the display position of the second decorative identification information (even-numbered decorative symbols) in the reach pattern.
In the second reach (low-base strong reach A to C performance), the first decorative identification information (odd-numbered decorative symbols) is displayed in a reach pattern before the title display part, and in the title display part, the title display (title text) is displayed using the display position of the first decorative identification information (odd-numbered decorative symbols) in the reach pattern.
The second reach (low-base strong reach A to C performance) is characterized in that, before the title display part, the second decorative identification information (even-numbered decorative symbols) is displayed in a reach pattern, and in the title display part, the title display (title text) is displayed using the display position of the second decorative identification information (even-numbered decorative symbols) in the reach pattern.
According to this feature, when decorative identification information is displayed in a reach state, the player will focus on which decorative identification information caused the reach state. Therefore, by using the display position of the decorative identification information that caused the reach state in the title display part of the first reach and the second reach to display the title display corresponding to the first reach and the second reach, the player's attention can be naturally drawn to the title display as well, and as a result, the title can be displayed effectively.

The gaming machine of form 2-2 is the gaming machine described in form 2-1,
The feature is that the expected probability of being controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) differs depending on whether the first decorative identification information (odd-numbered decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach pattern or the second decorative identification information (even-numbered decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach pattern.
This feature means that when decorative identification information is displayed in a reach state, the expected degree to which the reach state is triggered differs depending on which decorative identification information triggers the reach state, making it easier to draw attention to the title display.

[Form 3]
The gaming machine of form 3-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information, a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") is derived, thereby controlling the machine to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
Game control means (microcomputer 100 for game control),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120),
A means of display, and comprising,
The aforementioned game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is,
When a game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting prize entry point, second starting prize entry point), it is determined whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state described above.
The variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (First Special Drawing, Second Special Drawing) is performed.
Based on the result of the above determination, one of the following multiple fluctuation patterns is determined: a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state; a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state; a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to 10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state; a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to 12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state; a fifth fluctuation pattern (PB1-11 to 13) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state; and a sixth fluctuation pattern (PA2-13 to 15) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state.
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-JA and PB1-JB) is sent to the performance control means.
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-2 and PA2-3) is sent to the performance control means.
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-2 to 10) is sent to the performance control means.
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-4 to PA2-12) is sent to the performance control means.
When the fifth variation pattern is determined, a fifth command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-11 to 13) is sent to the performance control means.
When the sixth variation pattern is determined, a sixth command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-13 to PA2-15) is sent to the performance control means.
The aforementioned performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance),
When the fifth command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the third reach (low base strongest reach performance),
When the sixth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low-base strongest reach performance) will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low-base weak reach A and B effects) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
The second reach (low-base strong reach A to C performance) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
The third reach (low base strongest reach performance) comprises a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the third reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled.
The display means (image display device 5) is
It is possible to display a variable display of decorative identification information (decorative pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (first special drawing, second special drawing),
In the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the first decorative identification information (odd-numbered decorative symbols) is displayed in a reach pattern before the title display part, and in the title display part, the title display (title text) is displayed using the display position of the first decorative identification information (odd-numbered decorative symbols) in the reach pattern.
In the first reach (low base weak reach A and B performance), the second decorative identification information (even-numbered decorative symbols) is displayed in a reach pattern before the title display part, and in the title display part, the title display (title text) is displayed using the display position of the second decorative identification information (even-numbered decorative symbols) in the reach pattern.
In the second reach (low-base strong reach A to C performance), the first decorative identification information (odd-numbered decorative symbols) is displayed in a reach pattern before the title display part, and in the title display part, the title display (title text) is displayed using the display position of the first decorative identification information (odd-numbered decorative symbols) in the reach pattern.
In the second reach (low-base strong reach A to C performance), the second decorative identification information (even-numbered decorative symbols) is displayed in a reach pattern before the title display part, and in the title display part, the title display (title text) is displayed using the display position of the second decorative identification information (even-numbered decorative symbols) in the reach pattern.
In the third reach (low base strongest reach performance), the first decorative identification information (odd-numbered decorative symbols) is displayed in a reach pattern before the title display part, and in the title display part, the title display (title text) is displayed using the display position of the first decorative identification information (odd-numbered decorative symbols) in the reach pattern.
The third reach (low base strongest reach performance) is characterized in that, before the title display part, the second decorative identification information (even-numbered decorative symbols) is displayed in a reach pattern, and in the title display part, the title display (title text) is displayed using the display position of the second decorative identification information (even-numbered decorative symbols) in the reach pattern.
According to this feature, when decorative identification information is displayed in a reach state, the player will focus on which decorative identification information caused the reach state. Therefore, by using the display position of the decorative identification information that caused the reach state in the title display part of the first reach, second reach, and third reach, the title display corresponding to the first reach, second reach, and third reach can be displayed, the player's attention can be naturally drawn to the title display as well, and as a result, the title can be displayed effectively.

[Form 4]
The gaming machine of form 4-1 is,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information, a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") is derived, thereby controlling the machine to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
Game control means (microcomputer 100 for game control),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
Multiple light-emitting means (frame LED LWL1 to LWL12, frame LED LWR2 to LWR12, logo LED LL1 to LL4, decorative LED LS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
It includes a light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is,
When a game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting prize entry point, second starting prize entry point), it is determined whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state).
The variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (First Special Drawing, Second Special Drawing) is performed.
Based on the result of the above determination, one of a plurality of variation patterns is determined from among a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state.
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern specification command that specifies a winning variation pattern) is sent to the performance control means.
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern specification command specifying a losing variation pattern) is sent to the performance control means.
The aforementioned performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during a specific reach (super reach animation).
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the specific reach (super reach performance),
The aforementioned specific reach (super reach effect) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled.
The display means (image display device 5) is
It is possible to display a variable display of decorative identification information (decorative pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (first special drawing, second special drawing),
Before the title display part of the aforementioned specific reach (super reach performance), decorative identification information (decorative symbols) is displayed in the reach pattern, and in the title display part of the specific reach, the title display (title text) corresponding to the specific reach is displayed using the display position of the decorative identification information (decorative symbols) in the reach pattern.
The aforementioned light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
The light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table composed of luminance data.
In the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach type, common title for strong reach type, common title for high base reach type).
The aforementioned introduction part is characterized by controlling the light-emitting means using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach type weak reach A introduction, weak reach type weak reach B introduction, strong reach type strong reach A introduction, strong reach type strong reach B introduction, strong reach type strong reach C introduction, high base reach type reach A introduction, high base reach type reach B introduction, high base reach type reach C introduction, high base reach type reach D introduction).
According to this feature, when decorative identification information is displayed in a reach pattern, the player will focus on which decorative identification information caused the reach pattern. Therefore, by displaying the title display corresponding to the specific reach using the display position of the decorative identification information that caused the reach pattern in the title display part of a specific reach, the player's attention can be naturally drawn to the title display as well. Furthermore, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a different luminance data table for title display than the luminance data table for the introduction part, so the light-emitting means can be illuminated in a suitable light-emitting pattern according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed effectively.

[Form 5]
The gaming machine of type 5-1 is,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information, a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") is derived, thereby controlling the machine to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
Game control means (microcomputer 100 for game control),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120),
It comprises a display means (image display device 5),
The aforementioned game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is,
When a game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting prize entry point, second starting prize entry point), it is determined whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state described above.
The variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (First Special Drawing, Second Special Drawing) is performed.
Based on the result of the above determination, one of a plurality of variation patterns is determined from among a first variation pattern (PB1-JB) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second variation pattern (PA2-3) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a third variation pattern (PB1-5 to PB1-7) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth variation pattern (PA2-7 to PB2-9) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state.
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-JB) is sent to the performance control means.
When the second variation pattern (a variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-3) is determined, the second command is sent to the performance control means.
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-5 to PB7) is sent to the performance control means.
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-7 to PA2-9) is sent to the performance control means.
The aforementioned performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the first reach (low base weak reach B performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the first reach (low base weak reach B performance),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base strong reach B performance),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the second reach (low base strong reach B performance),
The first reach (low base weak reach B performance) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
The second reach (low-base strong reach B performance) comprises a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
The second reach (low base strong reach B effect) has a higher probability of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base weak reach B effect),
The first reach (low base weak reach B effect) and the second reach (low base strong reach B effect) are reaches that use multiple characters.
The first reach (low base weak reach B production) is a reach in which the first character (ally character "Yumeyume") and the second character (enemy character "Boingo") in the first reach are used, and it is announced that the first character (ally character "Yumeyume") will control the game to the advantageous state.
The second reach (low base strong reach B production) is a reach in which the first character (ally characters "Jam" and "Nana") and the second character (enemy character "Robo") in the second reach are used, and it is announced that the advantageous state is controlled by the first character (ally characters "Jam" and "Nana"),
The display means (image display device 5) is
The introductory part of the second reach (low base strong reach B production) begins with a display in which the first character in the second reach (ally characters "Jam" and "Nana") is positioned in the foreground and the second character in the second reach (enemy character "Robo") is positioned in the background.
The introductory part of the first reach (low base weak reach B production) is characterized in that the display starts from a position where the first character in the first reach (ally character "Yumeyume") is not on the foreground side and the second character in the second reach (enemy character "Boingo") is not on the background side.
According to this feature, for the second reach, which has a relatively high expectation level, the first character that notifies the player that the game will be controlled to a favorable state is placed in the foreground, and the second character is placed in the background. This arrangement allows the player to empathize with the game and makes it easier for the player to intuitively recognize that the game has a high expectation level, resulting in a more favorable title display.

The gaming machine of form 5-2 is the gaming machine described in form 5-1,
The aforementioned first character is a character (ally character "Jam" and "Nana") who receives a benefit when they win a battle.
The aforementioned second character is a character (enemy character "Robot") that does not receive any benefits upon winning a battle.
In the second reach (low base strong reach B production), at the start of the introductory part, the first character (ally characters "Jam" and "Nana") is displayed with their backs turned to the viewer at the front, and the second character (enemy character "Robo") is displayed facing the viewer at the back, with the first character and the second character facing each other.
According to this feature, for the second reach, which has a relatively high expectation level, the player's direction and the first character's direction are the same, making it easier for the player to empathize with the character and to recognize that the expectation level is high.

The gaming machine of form 5-3 is the gaming machine described in form 5-1 or 5-2,
In the introductory part of the second reach (low base strong reach B production), the first character (ally characters "Jam" and "Nana") and the second character (enemy character "Robo") are displayed in a position that includes the display area where the title display (title text) was displayed in the title display part.
This feature means that players who were initially focused on the title display will naturally shift their attention to the first and second characters once the title display disappears.

[Form 6]
The gaming machine of type 6-1 is,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information, a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") is derived, thereby controlling the machine to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
Game control means (microcomputer 100 for game control),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120),
It comprises a display means (image display device 5),
The aforementioned game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is,
When a game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting prize entry point, second starting prize entry point), it is determined whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state described above.
The variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (First Special Drawing, Second Special Drawing) is performed.
Based on the result of the above determination, one of the following multiple fluctuation patterns is determined: a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state; a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state; a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to 10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state; and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to 12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state.
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-JA and PB1-JB) is sent to the performance control means.
When the second variation pattern (a variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-2 and PA2-3) is determined, the second command is sent to the performance control means.
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-2 to 10) is sent to the performance control means.
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-4 to PA2-12) is sent to the performance control means.
The aforementioned performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance),
The first reach (low-base weak reach A and B effects) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
The second reach (low-base strong reach A to C performance) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
The second reach (low-base strong reach A to C effects) has a higher probability of being controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) than the first reach (low-base weak reach A and B effects),
The aforementioned second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) has a longer execution time than the aforementioned first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects),
The first reach and the second reach are reaches in which dialogue subtitles are used.
The display means (image display device 5) is
In the title display part of the first reach (low base weak reach A and B performance), the title display (title text) and dialogue subtitles are displayed.
In the introductory part of the first reach (low base weak reach A and B production), the dialogue subtitles that were displayed in the title display part of the first reach are continued to be displayed.
In the title display part of the aforementioned second reach (low base strong reach A to C production), a characteristic feature is that dialogue subtitles are not displayed, and only the title display (title text) is shown.
According to this feature, for the second reach, which has a relatively high expectation and a long execution time, the title display and dialogue subtitles are displayed in a way that avoids overlapping as much as possible. On the first reach, which has a relatively low expectation and a short execution time, even if the dialogue subtitles and title display overlap, the title display can be completed first to draw attention to the dialogue subtitles, making it possible to provide the player with both the title display and dialogue subtitles appropriately, and as a result, the title display can be performed appropriately.

The gaming machine of form 6-2 is the gaming machine described in form 6-1,
In the title display part of the first reach (low-base weak reach A and B performances), if the title display (title text) and dialogue subtitles corresponding to the first reach are displayed, the performance scene will not be switched in the subsequent introductory part until the display of the dialogue subtitles that were displayed simultaneously with the title display (title text) has finished.
According to this feature, if the title display part of the first reach shows the title display and dialogue subtitles corresponding to the first reach, the scene in the subsequent introductory part will not switch until the display of the dialogue subtitles that were displayed simultaneously with the title display has finished. This allows the viewer to focus on the title display first, and then on the dialogue subtitles.

The gaming machine of form 6-3 is the gaming machine described in form 6-1 or 6-2,
In the title display part of the first reach (low-base weak reach A and B effects), when the title display (title text) and dialogue subtitles corresponding to the first reach are displayed, the audio corresponding to the dialogue subtitles is output, while the audio corresponding to the title display (title text) is not output.
According to this feature, when the title and dialogue subtitles are displayed simultaneously, the audio corresponding to the dialogue subtitles is output, while the audio corresponding to the title is not, making it easier to hear the audio corresponding to the dialogue subtitles.

[Form 7]
The gaming machine of type 7-1 is,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information, a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") is derived, thereby controlling the machine to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
Game control means (microcomputer 100 for game control),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
Multiple light-emitting means (frame LED LWL1 to LWL12, frame LED LWR2 to LWR12, logo LED LL1 to LL4, decorative LED LS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
It includes a light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is,
When a game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting prize entry point, second starting prize entry point), it is determined whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state).
The variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (First Special Drawing, Second Special Drawing) is performed.
Based on the result of the above determination, one of a plurality of variation patterns is determined from among a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state.
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern specification command that specifies a winning variation pattern) is sent to the performance control means.
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern specification command specifying a losing variation pattern) is sent to the performance control means.
The aforementioned performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (low base strongest reach演出, high base reach A to D演出),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the specific reach (low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performances),
The aforementioned specific reach (low-base strongest reach performance, high-base reach A to D performances) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the success or failure of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is announced.
The titles displayed for the aforementioned specific reach sequences (low-base strongest reach sequence, high-base reach sequences A-D) consist of multiple characters ("Catch the Bakuchu with 6 people!", "Battle Reach A (Battle Reach B-D)"),
The display means (image display device 5) starts displaying the title display (title characters) of the specific reach in the title display part of the specific reach at a first size (enlarged size) in which only a portion of the multiple characters is visible, and then gradually reduces the display size from the first size to a second size (reduced size) in which all of the multiple characters are visible, and displays the title display (title characters) of the specific reach in this manner.
The aforementioned light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
The light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table composed of luminance data.
In the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (strongest reach series strongest reach title, high base reach series common title),
The aforementioned introduction part is characterized by controlling the light emission means using a brightness data table for the introduction part (strongest reach system strongest reach introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction (high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction)).
This feature allows the title display in a specific reach sequence to be displayed in a first size where only parts of the characters are visible, and then the size gradually decreases until all characters are visible, thus drawing the player's attention to the title display. Furthermore, in the title display sequence, the light-emitting means is controlled using a different luminance data table for the title display than the luminance data table for the introduction sequence, allowing the light-emitting means to emit light in a suitable mode corresponding to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed effectively.

The gaming machine of form 7-2 is the gaming machine described in form 7-1,
Before the title display part of the aforementioned specific reach (low base strongest reach performance) begins, the movable part (movable body 32) is moved to overlap the front side of the display means (image display device 5),
The invention is characterized in that, during the period from when the movable object moves until it returns to its initial position (falling effect), a background corresponding to the movement of the movable object (a background specifically for the falling effect) is displayed, and when the movable object returns to its initial position, the display of the title (title text) begins at a first size (enlarged size) in which multiple characters are not all visible and the display area of the display means is filled, making the background invisible, and thereafter the title display at a second size (reduced size) and a background corresponding to the title display (a background specifically for the title display) are displayed.
This feature allows for an impactful display of the reach title while simultaneously and seamlessly switching the background, effectively showcasing the title to the player.

[Form 8]
The gaming machine of type 8-1 is,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information, a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") is derived, thereby controlling the machine to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
Game control means (microcomputer 100 for game control),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
Multiple light-emitting means (frame LED LWL1 to LWL12, frame LED LWR2 to LWR12, logo LED LL1 to LL4, decorative LED LS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
It includes a light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is,
When a game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting prize entry point, second starting prize entry point), it is determined whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state).
The variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (First Special Drawing, Second Special Drawing) is performed.
Based on the result of the above determination, one of a plurality of variation patterns is determined from among a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state.
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern specification command that specifies a winning variation pattern) is sent to the performance control means.
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern specification command specifying a losing variation pattern) is sent to the performance control means.
The aforementioned performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (low base strongest reach演出, high base reach A to D演出),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the specific reach (low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performances),
The aforementioned specific reach (low-base strongest reach performance, high-base reach A to D performances) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the success or failure of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is announced.
The titles displayed for the aforementioned specific reach sequences (low-base strongest reach sequence, high-base reach sequences A-D) consist of multiple characters ("Catch the Bakuchu with 6 people!", "Battle Reach A (Battle Reach B-D)"),
The display means (image display device 5) terminates the title display part in the title display part of the specific reach by enlarging the display of multiple characters from a state where multiple characters are displayed (a state where they are displayed in a fixed position at a reduced size) (enlarging them until the entire display area is filled with a part of the title characters), and displays the display corresponding to the introduction part of the specific reach (the background at the start of the introduction part) so that it can be seen.
The aforementioned light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
The light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table composed of luminance data.
In the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (strongest reach series strongest reach title, high base reach series common title),
The aforementioned introduction part is characterized by controlling the light emission means using a brightness data table for the introduction part (strongest reach system strongest reach introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction (high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction)).
This feature allows the player to focus on the title display during the title display phase, and to use this title display effectively to seamlessly transition to the display corresponding to the next introductory phase. Furthermore, in the title display phase, the light-emitting means is controlled using a different luminance data table for the title display than that used for the introductory phase, allowing the light-emitting means to emit light in a suitable mode corresponding to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed effectively.

[Form 9]
The gaming machine of type 9-1 is,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information, a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") is derived, thereby controlling the machine to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
Game control means (microcomputer 100 for game control),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120),
It comprises a display means (image display device 5),
The aforementioned game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is,
When a game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting prize entry point, second starting prize entry point), it is determined whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state described above.
The variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (First Special Drawing, Second Special Drawing) is performed.
Based on the result of the above determination, one of the following multiple fluctuation patterns is determined: a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state; a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state; a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to 10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state; and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to 12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state.
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-JA and PB1-JB) is sent to the performance control means.
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-2 and PA2-3) is sent to the performance control means.
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-2 to 10) is sent to the performance control means.
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-4 to PA2-12) is sent to the performance control means.
The aforementioned performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance),
The first reach (low-base weak reach A and B effects) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
The second reach (low-base strong reach A to C performance) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
Unlike the execution time of the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A and B effects) (T1-1 to T2) and the execution time of the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) (T2-1 to T2),
The aforementioned title display part consists of a first part (title start period) from when the title display starts until it is displayed in the fixed position, a second part (title display period) when the title is displayed in the fixed position, and a third part (title end period) from when the title is displayed in the fixed position until the display ends.
The display means (image display device 5) is
In the title display part of the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production), the title display (title text) is displayed such that the second part (title display period) is longer than the first part (title start period) and the third part (title end period), and the first part (title start period) is longer than the third part (title end period).
In the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), the title display (title text) is characterized in that the second part (title display period) is longer than the first part (title start period) and the third part (title end period), and the first part (title start period) is longer than the third part (title end period).
This feature allows for different execution times for the title display part between the first and second reaches, but by making the second part, which is displayed in a fixed position, the longest, attention can be drawn to the type of title display. Also, even if the execution times for the title display part differ between the first and second reaches, by making the first part, which is displayed in a fixed position, longer than the third part, which is displayed from the fixed position until the display ends, it can create suspense about which title display will be shown. Furthermore, even if the execution times for the title display part differ between the first and second reaches, by making the relationship between the execution times of the first, second, and third parts the same, the title display part can be made easier to understand.

[Form 10]
The gaming machine of form 10-1 is,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information, a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") is derived, thereby controlling the machine to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
Game control means (microcomputer 100 for game control),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120),
It comprises a display means (image display device 5),
The aforementioned game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is,
When a game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting prize entry point, second starting prize entry point), it is determined whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state described above.
The variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (First Special Drawing, Second Special Drawing) is performed.
Based on the result of the above determination, one of the following multiple variation patterns is determined: a first variation pattern (a big win variation pattern in the normal state) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state; a second variation pattern (a losing variation pattern in the normal state) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state; a third variation pattern (a big win variation pattern in the probability variation state) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state; and a fourth variation pattern (a losing variation pattern in the probability variation state) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state.
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern specification command that specifies the jackpot variation pattern in the normal state) is sent to the performance control means.
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern specification command that specifies a losing variation pattern in the normal state) is sent to the performance control means.
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern specification command that specifies the big win variation pattern in the probability variation state) is sent to the performance control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern specification command that specifies a losing variation pattern in the probability variation state) is sent to the performance control means,
The aforementioned performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the first reach (super reach performance in the normal state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the first reach (super reach performance in the normal state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will be controlled to the advantageous state in the second reach (super reach performance in the probability variation state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the second reach (super reach performance in the probability variation state),
The first reach (super reach performance in the normal state) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
The second reach (super reach performance in the probability variation state) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
Unlike the execution time of the title display part in the first reach (super reach performance in normal state) (T1-1 to 2, T2-1 to 3, T3) and the execution time of the title display part in the second reach (super reach performance in probability variation state) (T4),
The first reach (super reach animation in normal state) is a reach that is performed in normal state, and the second reach (super reach animation in probability variation state) is a reach that is performed in a special state (probability variation state) which is more advantageous than normal state.
The aforementioned title display part consists of a first part (title start period) from when the title display starts until it is displayed in the fixed position, a second part (title display period) when the title is displayed in the fixed position, and a third part (title end period) from when the title is displayed in the fixed position until the display ends.
The display means (image display device 5) is
In the title display part of the first reach (super reach performance in normal state), the title display (title text) is displayed such that the second part (title display period) is longer than the first part (title start period) and the third part (title end period), and the first part (title start period) is longer than the third part (title end period).
In the title display part of the second reach (super reach performance in the probability variation state), the title display (title text) is displayed such that the second part (title display period) is longer than the first part (title start period) and the third part (title end period), and the first part (title start period) is longer than the third part (title end period).
This feature allows for different execution times for the title display part in the first reach (executed under normal conditions) and the second reach (executed under special conditions). By making the second part, which is displayed in a fixed position, the longest, attention can be drawn to the type of title display. Furthermore, even if different execution times for the title display part in the first reach (executed under normal conditions) and the second reach (executed under special conditions), the first part, which is displayed in a fixed position, longer than the third part, which is displayed from the fixed position until the display ends, can heighten anticipation for which title display will be shown. Additionally, even if different execution times for the title display part in the first reach (executed under normal conditions) and the second reach (executed under special conditions), the relationship between the execution times of the first, second, and third parts can be made consistent, making the title display part easier to understand.

The gaming machine of form 10-2 is the gaming machine described in form 10-1,
The execution time (T4) of the title display part in the second reach (super reach performance in the probability variation state) is shorter than the execution time (T1-1 to 2, T2-1 to 3, T3) of the title display part in the first reach (super reach performance in the normal state).
This characteristic allows for a relatively short execution time for the title display part during the second reach in the special state, enabling a smooth progression through the special state. Conversely, the relatively longer execution time for the title display part during the first reach in the normal state allows for a more thorough build-up of excitement.

[Form 11]
The gaming machine of form 11-1 is,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information, a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") is derived, thereby controlling the machine to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
Game control means (microcomputer 100 for game control),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
Multiple light-emitting means (frame LED LWL1 to LWL12, frame LED LWR2 to LWR12, logo LED LL1 to LL4, decorative LED LS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
It includes a light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is,
When a game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting prize entry point, second starting prize entry point), it is determined whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state).
The variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (First Special Drawing, Second Special Drawing) is performed.
Based on the result of the above determination, one of a plurality of variation patterns is determined from among a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state.
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern specification command that specifies a winning variation pattern) is sent to the performance control means.
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern specification command specifying a losing variation pattern) is sent to the performance control means.
The aforementioned performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during a specific reach (super reach animation).
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the specific reach (super reach performance),
The aforementioned specific reach (super reach effect) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled.
The aforementioned title display part consists of a first part (title start period) from when the title display starts until it is displayed in the fixed position, a second part (title display period) when the title is displayed in the fixed position, and a third part (title end period) from when the title is displayed in the fixed position until the display ends.
The display means (image display device 5) displays the title display (title characters) in the title display part of the specific reach (super reach performance) such that the second part (title display period) is longer than the first part (title start period) and the third part (title end period), and the first part (title start period) is longer than the third part (title end period).
The light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table composed of luminance data.
In the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach type, common title for strong reach type, common title for high base reach type).
The aforementioned introduction part is characterized by controlling the light-emitting means using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach type weak reach A introduction, weak reach type weak reach B introduction, strong reach type strong reach A introduction, strong reach type strong reach B introduction, strong reach type strong reach C introduction, high base reach type reach A introduction, high base reach type reach B introduction, high base reach type reach C introduction, high base reach type reach D introduction).
This feature allows the viewer to focus on the type of title display by making the second part, which is displayed in a fixed position, the longest. Furthermore, by making the first part, which is displayed in a fixed position, longer than the third part, which is displayed from the fixed position until the display ends, the viewer can anticipate which title display will be shown. Additionally, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a different luminance data table for the title display than the luminance data table for the introductory part, allowing the light-emitting means to emit light in a suitable mode corresponding to the title display. As a result, the title display can be performed effectively.

[Form 12]
The gaming machine of form 12-1 is,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information, a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") is derived, thereby controlling the machine to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
Game control means (microcomputer 100 for game control),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
Multiple light-emitting means (frame LED LWL1 to LWL12, frame LED LWR2 to LWR12, logo LED LL1 to LL4, decorative LED LS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
It includes a light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is,
When a game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting prize entry point, second starting prize entry point), it is determined whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state).
The variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (First Special Drawing, Second Special Drawing) is performed.
Based on the result of the above determination, one of a plurality of variation patterns is determined from among a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state.
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern specification command that specifies a winning variation pattern) is sent to the performance control means.
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern specification command specifying a losing variation pattern) is sent to the performance control means.
The aforementioned performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach performance),
The aforementioned specific reach (low-base strong reach A to C effects, low-base strongest reach effect) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the success or failure of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is announced.
The aforementioned display means is
The title display (title text) corresponding to the aforementioned specific reach (low-base strong reach A to C effects, low-base strongest reach effect) can be displayed in a first form (white form) and the title display corresponding to the aforementioned specific reach can be displayed in a second form (red form) which has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first form.
In the title display part (the title display part shown in Figure 11-43) of the aforementioned specific reach (low-base strong reach A to C effects, low-base strongest reach effect), the expectation level indication display corresponding to the specific reach is displayed in a first size, and then the title display (title text) corresponding to the specific reach is displayed in a second size that is larger than the first size.
In both cases, when the title display (title text) corresponding to the specific reach is displayed in the first mode (white mode) and when the title display (title text) corresponding to the specific reach is displayed in the second mode (red mode), the expectation indication display is displayed in a common mode.
The aforementioned light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
The light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table composed of luminance data.
In the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (strongest reach title, strong reach common title),
The aforementioned introduction part is characterized by controlling the light emission means using a brightness data table for the introduction part (Strong Reach System Strong Reach C Introduction, Strongest Reach System Strongest Reach Introduction, Strong Reach System Strong Reach B Introduction).
According to this feature, the title display corresponding to a specific reach is larger in size than the expectation level indication display, and the expectation level is indicated by its appearance, thus attracting the player's attention. However, by displaying the expectation level indication display before the title display, attention can be drawn to the expectation level indication first. Furthermore, since the expectation level indication display is performed in a common manner regardless of whether the title display is shown in the first or second manner, attention can be drawn to the subsequent manner of the title display.

[Form 13]
The gaming machine of form 13-1 is,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information, a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") is derived, thereby controlling the machine to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
Game control means (microcomputer 100 for game control),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
Multiple light-emitting means (frame LED LWL1 to LWL12, frame LED LWR2 to LWR12, logo LED LL1 to LL4, decorative LED LS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
It includes a light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is,
When a game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting prize entry point, second starting prize entry point), it is determined whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state).
The variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (First Special Drawing, Second Special Drawing) is performed.
Based on the result of the above determination, one of the following multiple fluctuation patterns is determined from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns, including a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-5 to 7) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-7 to 9) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-8 to 10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-10 to 12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state.
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-5 to PB7) is sent to the performance control means.
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-7 to PA2-9) is sent to the performance control means.
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-8 to 10) is sent to the performance control means.
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-10 to PA2-12) is sent to the performance control means.
The aforementioned performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the first reach (low base strong reach B performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the first reach (low base strong reach B performance).
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the second reach (low base strong reach C performance),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the second reach (low base strong reach C performance),
The first reach (low-base strong reach B performance) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
The second reach (low-base strong reach C performance) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
The second reach (low-base strong reach C effect) has a higher probability of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low-base strong reach B effect),
The aforementioned display means is
In the title display part of the first reach (low base strong reach B performance), the expectation level indication is displayed in the first form (3.5 stars),
In the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach C production), the expectation level indication is displayed in the second form (4 stars),
The expected value indication display in the title display part of the first reach (low-base strong reach B production) and the expected value indication display in the title display part of the second reach (low-base strong reach C production) are displayed in a common manner, with the same emphasis display.
The aforementioned light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
The light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table composed of luminance data.
In the title display part of the first reach (low base strong reach B performance), the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display part of the first reach (strong reach type strong reach B title),
In the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach C performance), the light-emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the title display part of the second reach (strong reach type strong reach C title),
In the introductory part of the first reach (low base strong reach B effect), the light-emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the introductory part of the first reach (strong reach system strong reach B introduction),
In the introduction part of the second reach (low base strong reach C performance), the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part of the second reach (strong reach system strong reach C introduction).
This feature allows for a reduction in development costs by using the same highlighting method whether the expectation level indication is displayed in the first mode in the title display part of the first reach, or in the second mode in the title display part of the second reach. Furthermore, in the title display parts of the first and second reaches, the light-emitting means are controlled using different luminance data tables for the title display of the first and second reaches, which are different from the luminance data tables for the introduction parts of the first and second reaches, respectively. This allows the light-emitting means to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode corresponding to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed effectively.

The gaming machine of form 13-2 is the gaming machine described in form 13-1,
The aforementioned expectation indication display is composed of multiple objects (star-shaped objects),
The first reach (low base strong reach B effect) is indicated by N (where N is an integer) + 0.5 (3.5) objects,
The aforementioned second reach (low base strong reach C effect) is indicated by N+1 (4) objects,
The aforementioned expectation indication display is characterized by the fact that each object (star-shaped object) is highlighted, and the highlighting is performed in a common manner whether one object is highlighted or 0.5 objects are highlighted.
This feature allows for consistent highlighting regardless of whether one object or 0.5 objects are being highlighted, thereby reducing development costs.

The gaming machine of form 13-3 is the gaming machine described in form 13-2,
The aforementioned expectation indication display is characterized by the fact that the time it takes for one object (star-shaped object) to be highlighted and the time it takes for 0.5 objects (star-shaped objects) to be highlighted are the same.
This feature allows for a reduction in development costs by making the time it takes to highlight one object the same as the time it takes to highlight 0.5 objects.

The gaming machine of form 13-4 is the gaming machine described in form 13-2 or 13-3,
The aforementioned expectation level indication display is characterized in that a common emphasis sound (expectation level indication sound) is output whether one object (star-shaped object) is highlighted or 0.5 objects (star-shaped objects) are highlighted.
This feature allows for the output of the same audio whether one object is being highlighted or 0.5 objects are being highlighted, thereby reducing development costs.

[Form 14]
The gaming machine of form 14-1 is,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information, a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") is derived, thereby controlling the machine to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
Game control means (microcomputer 100 for game control),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120),
It comprises a display means (image display device 5),
The aforementioned game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is,
When a game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting prize entry point, second starting prize entry point), it is determined whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state).
The variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (First Special Drawing, Second Special Drawing) is performed.
Based on the result of the above determination, one of a plurality of variation patterns is determined from among a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state.
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern specification command that specifies a winning variation pattern) is sent to the performance control means.
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern specification command specifying a losing variation pattern) is sent to the performance control means.
The aforementioned performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performance),
The aforementioned specific reach (low-base strong reach A to C performance, low-base strongest reach performance, high-base reach A to D performance) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the success or failure of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is announced.
The display means (image display device 5) is
In the title display part of the aforementioned specific reach (low-base strong reach A to C effects, low-base strongest reach effect, high-base reach A to D effects), it is possible to display an expectation level indication consisting of multiple objects (star-shaped objects).
In the title display part of the aforementioned specific reach (low-base strong reach A to C performance, low-base strongest reach performance, high-base reach A to D performance), the expected value indication display is characterized by highlighting the first object (star-shaped object), then continuing to highlight the first object (star-shaped object) while highlighting the second object (star-shaped object), then ending the highlighting of the first object (star-shaped object), and then highlighting the third object (star-shaped object).
This feature allows for the display of an expected probability indicator consisting of multiple objects in the title display section during a specific reach. In this indicator, the highlighting of the second object begins before the highlighting of the first object ends, but the highlighting of the third object does not begin until the highlighting of the first object has finished. This makes it easier to recognize the number of objects indicating the expected probability.

The gaming machine of form 14-2 is the gaming machine described in form 14-1,
The aforementioned expectation level indication display is characterized in that, each time an object (star-shaped object) is highlighted, an emphasis sound (expectation level indication sound) is output, and after the output of the emphasis sound (expectation level indication sound) for the highlighting of one object (star-shaped object) has finished, the emphasis sound (expectation level indication sound) for the highlighting of the next object is output.
This feature ensures that the emphasis sound for one object does not overlap with the emphasis sound for the next object, making it easier to recognize the number of objects that indicate the level of expectation.

The gaming machine of form 14-3 is the gaming machine described in form 14-1 or 14-2,
The aforementioned expectation level indication display consists of multiple objects (star-shaped objects) and text (text "Expectation Level"),
The highlighting of the object (the star-shaped object) is characterized by being applied at a size that overlaps with the text (the text "Expectation Level").
This feature allows for drawing attention to both the multiple objects and the text that make up the expectation indication display through object highlighting.

[Form 15]
The gaming machine of form 15-1 is,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information, a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") is derived, thereby controlling the machine to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
Game control means (microcomputer 100 for game control),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
Multiple light-emitting means (frame LED LWL1 to LWL12, frame LED LWR2 to LWR12, logo LED LL1 to LL4, decorative LED LS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
It includes a light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is,
When a game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting prize entry point, second starting prize entry point), it is determined whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state).
The variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (First Special Drawing, Second Special Drawing) is performed.
Based on the result of the above determination, one of a plurality of variation patterns is determined from among a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state.
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern specification command that specifies a winning variation pattern) is sent to the performance control means.
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern specification command specifying a losing variation pattern) is sent to the performance control means.
The aforementioned performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performance),
The aforementioned specific reach (low-base strong reach A to C performance, low-base strongest reach performance, high-base reach A to D performance) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the success or failure of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is announced.
The display means (image display device 5) is
It is possible to display multiple pending displays that correspond to variable displays that have not yet been started.
In the title display part of the aforementioned specific reach (low-base strong reach A to C effects, low-base strongest reach effect, high-base reach A to D effects), it is possible to display an expectation level indication consisting of multiple objects (star-shaped objects).
In the title display part of the aforementioned specific reach (low-base strong reach A to C performance, low-base strongest reach performance, high-base reach A to D performance), the aforementioned expectation indication display is not displayed at the same time as the aforementioned hold display.
The aforementioned light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
The light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table composed of luminance data.
In the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (common title for strong reach series, strongest reach series strongest reach title, common title for high base reach series).
The aforementioned introduction part is characterized by controlling the light emission means using a brightness data table for the introduction part (Strong Reach System Strong Reach A Introduction, Strong Reach System Strong Reach B Introduction, Strong Reach System Strong Reach C Introduction, Strongest Reach System Strongest Reach Introduction, High Base Reach System Reach A Introduction, High Base Reach System Reach B Introduction, High Base Reach System Reach C Introduction, High Base Reach System Reach D Introduction).
This feature allows for the display of an expected probability indicator consisting of multiple objects in the title display part during a specific reach, while preventing the display of a pending indicator from being mistakenly identified as an expected probability indicator by not displaying a pending indicator simultaneously with the expected probability indicator. Furthermore, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a different luminance data table for title display than that used for the introduction part, allowing the light-emitting means to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode corresponding to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed effectively.

The gaming machine of form 15-2 is the gaming machine described in form 15-1,
The maximum number of active displays corresponding to the pending display and the activated variable display is characterized by being the same as the maximum number (5) of objects (star-shaped objects) that constitute the expectation indication display.
This feature prevents the system from mistakenly recognizing that the maximum number of objects constituting the expectation indicator display are being displayed, even when a specific reach occurs while the maximum number of pending and active indicators are being displayed.

The gaming machine of form 15-3 is the gaming machine described in form 15-1 or 15-2,
The feature is that the hold display is terminated when the display means (image display device 5) displays in monochrome before the start of the title display part.
This feature allows for the display of pending items to be terminated without any sense of unease.

[Form 16]
The gaming machine of form 16-1 is,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information, a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") is derived, thereby controlling the machine to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
Game control means (microcomputer 100 for game control),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120),
It comprises a display means (image display device 5),
The aforementioned game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is,
When a game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting prize entry point, second starting prize entry point), it is determined whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state described above.
The variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (First Special Drawing, Second Special Drawing) is performed.
Based on the result of the above determination, one of the following multiple fluctuation patterns is determined: a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to 4/PB1-14) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to 6/PA2-16) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-5 to 7/PB1-15) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-7 to 9/PA2-17) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a fifth fluctuation pattern (PB1-8 to 10/PB1-16) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a sixth fluctuation pattern (PA2-10 to 12/PA2-18) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state.
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-2 to 4/PB1-14) is sent to the performance control means.
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-4 to PA2-6/PA2-16) is sent to the performance control means.
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-5 to 7/PB1-15) is sent to the performance control means.
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-7 to PA2-9/PA2-17) is sent to the performance control means.
When the fifth variation pattern is determined, a fifth command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-8 to 10/PB1-16) is sent to the performance control means.
When the sixth variation pattern is determined, a sixth command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-10 to 12/PA2-18) is sent to the performance control means.
The aforementioned performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the first reach (low base strong reach A performance/high base reach A performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low-base strong reach A performance/high-base reach A performance) will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base strong reach B performance/high base reach B performance),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low-base strong reach B performance/high-base reach B performance) will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fifth command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the third reach (low base strong reach C performance/high base reach C performance),
When the sixth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strong reach C performance/high base reach C performance) will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low-base strong reach A performance/high-base reach A performance) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled.
The second reach (low-base strong reach B performance/high-base reach B performance) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled.
The third reach (low-base strong reach C performance/high-base reach C performance) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the third reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
The display means (image display device 5) is
In the title display part of the first reach (low-base strong reach A performance/high-base reach A performance), it is possible to display an expectation level indication consisting of a first number (3) object (star-shaped object),
In the title display part of the second reach (low-base strong reach B performance/high-base reach B performance), it is possible to display an expectation level indication consisting of a second number (3.5) of objects (star-shaped objects) which is greater than the first number.
In the title display part of the third reach (low-base strong reach C effect/high-base reach C effect), it is possible to display an expectation level indication consisting of a third number (4) of objects (star-shaped objects) which is greater than the second number.
The difference between the first number and the second number is the same as the difference between the second number and the third number (0.5).
The difference between the expected probability of being controlled to the advantageous state when the third reach (low-base strong reach C production/high-base reach C production) is executed and the expected probability of being controlled to the advantageous state when the second reach (low-base strong reach B production/high-base reach B production) is executed is greater than the difference between the expected probability of being controlled to the advantageous state when the second reach (low-base strong reach B production/high-base reach B production) is executed and the expected probability of being controlled to the advantageous state when the first reach (low-base strong reach A production/high-base reach A production) is executed.
According to this feature, when the number of objects displayed as an indication of expectation in the title display part increases from the first number to the second number, and when it increases from the second number to the third number, the amount of increase in the number of objects is the same. However, when it increases from the second number to the third number, the amount of increase in the expectation of being controlled to a favorable state is greater than when it increases from the first number to the second number. Therefore, the more the number of objects increases, the more expectation is made that the control will be controlled to a favorable state beyond the number of increased objects, while a small number of objects does not lead to excessive expectations of being controlled to a favorable state.

The gaming machine of form 16-2 is the gaming machine described in form 16-1,
The plurality of variation patterns include a seventh variation pattern (PB1-11 to 13/PB1-17) which is a variation pattern controlled to the favorable state, and an eighth variation pattern (PA2-13 to 15/PA2-19) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the favorable state.
Game control means (microcomputer 100 for game control),
When the seventh variation pattern is determined, a seventh command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-11 to 13/PB1-17) is sent to the performance control means.
When the eighth variation pattern is determined, an eighth command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-13 to 15/PA2-19) is sent to the performance control means.
The aforementioned performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the seventh command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the fourth reach (low base strongest reach performance/high base reach D performance),
When the eighth command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (low-base strongest reach performance/high-base reach D performance) will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The fourth reach (low-base strongest reach performance/high-base reach D performance) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the fourth reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
The display means is capable of displaying an expectation level indication in the title display part of the fourth reach (low base strongest reach performance/high base reach D performance) consisting of a fourth number (4.5) object (star-shaped object) which is greater than the third number,
The difference between the third number and the fourth number (0.5) is smaller than the difference between the first number and the third number (1).
The difference between the expected probability of being controlled to the advantageous state when the fourth reach (low-base strongest reach production/high-base reach D production) is executed and the expected probability of being controlled to the advantageous state when the third reach (low-base strong reach C production/high-base reach C production) is executed is greater than the difference between the expected probability of being controlled to the advantageous state when the third reach (low-base strong reach C production/high-base reach C production) is executed and the expected probability of being controlled to the advantageous state when the first reach (low-base strong reach A production/high-base reach A production) is executed.
According to this feature, in the title display section, the increase in the number of objects displayed as an indication of expectation is smaller when increasing from the third to the fourth number than when increasing from the first to the third number. However, the increase in the expectation of being controlled to a favorable state is larger when increasing from the third to the fourth number than when increasing from the first to the third number. Therefore, the more objects are displayed, the more expectation is made that the game will be controlled to a favorable state, even if the increase in the number of objects is small.

The gaming machine of form 16-3 is the gaming machine described in form 16-2,
The difference between the third number and the fourth number is 0.5, and the difference between the first number and the third number is 1.
According to this feature, when the number of objects displayed as an indication of expectation in the title display part increases from the first number to the third number by 0.5 to the fourth number, it can create the expectation that the game will be controlled to a more favorable state than when it increases from the third number to the third number by 1.
The gaming machine of form 16-4 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 16-1 to 16-3,
The difference between the expected probability of being controlled to the advantageous state when the third reach (high-base reach C performance) is executed in a special state (probability variation state) which is more advantageous than the normal state, and the expected probability of being controlled to the advantageous state when the second reach (high-base reach B performance) is executed, is greater than the difference between the expected probability of being controlled to the advantageous state when the third reach (low-base strong reach C performance) is executed in the normal state, and the expected probability of being controlled to the advantageous state when the second reach (low-base strong reach B performance) is executed.
This feature suggests that a special state, which is more advantageous than the normal state, can be expected to be controlled to an advantageous state if the number of objects displayed as an indication of expectation in the title display part increases.

[Form 17]
The gaming machine of form 17-1 is,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information, a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") is derived, thereby controlling the machine to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
Game control means (microcomputer 100 for game control),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
Multiple light-emitting means (frame LED LWL1 to LWL12, frame LED LWR2 to LWR12, logo LED LL1 to LL4, decorative LED LS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
It includes a light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is,
When a game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting prize entry point, second starting prize entry point), it is determined whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state).
The variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (First Special Drawing, Second Special Drawing) is performed.
Based on the result of the above determination, one of the following multiple fluctuation patterns is determined: a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state; a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state; a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to 10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state; and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to 12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state.
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-JA and PB1-JB) is sent to the performance control means.
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-2 and PA2-3) is sent to the performance control means.
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-2 to 10) is sent to the performance control means.
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-4 to PA2-12) is sent to the performance control means.
The aforementioned performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance),
The first reach (low-base weak reach A and B effects) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
The second reach (low-base strong reach A to C performance) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
Both the first reach (low-base weak reach A and B effects) and the second reach (low-base strong reach A to C effects) are reaches that are performed in the normal state, and the second reach (low-base strong reach A to C effects) has a higher probability of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low-base weak reach A and B effects).
The title display part in the second reach (low-base strong reach A to C production) is longer than the title display part in the first reach (low-base weak reach A, B production).
The display means (image display device 5) is
In the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), an expectation level indication is displayed.
In the title display part of the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the expected value indication display is not displayed.
The aforementioned light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
The light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table composed of luminance data.
In the title display part of the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display part of the first reach (common title for weak reach series),
In the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), the light-emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the title display part of the second reach (common title for strong reach series),
In the introductory part of the first reach (low-base weak reach A and B effects), the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part of the first reach (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction),
In the introductory part of the second reach (low-base strong reach A to C effects), the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part of the second reach (strong reach A introduction, strong reach B introduction, strong reach C introduction).
This feature allows the title display portion in the second reach, which has a relatively higher expectation level, to be longer than the title display portion in the first reach, which has a relatively lower expectation level. Furthermore, an expectation level indication is displayed in the title display portion of the second reach, while no such indication is displayed in the title display portion of the first reach. This allows the user to intuitively perceive that the second reach has a higher expectation level than the first reach. In addition, in the title display portions of the first and second reaches, the light-emitting means are controlled using different luminance data tables for the title display of the first and second reaches, respectively, which are different from the luminance data tables used for the introduction portions of the first and second reaches. This allows the light-emitting means to emit light in a suitable mode of emission according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed effectively.

The gaming machine of form 17-2 is the gaming machine described in form 17-1,
The title display part in the aforementioned second reach (low base strong reach A to C production) consists of a prologue part (prologue display period) and a text display part (title start period, title display period, title end period),
The title display part in the aforementioned first reach (low-base weak reach A and B production) does not have a prologue part (prologue display period), and consists only of a text display part (title start period, title display period, title end period).
A key feature is that the text display portion of the title display part in the second reach (low-base strong reach A to C production) is longer than the text display portion of the title display part in the first reach (low-base weak reach A and B production).
Based on this characteristic, the fact that the text display portion of the title display in the second reach is longer than the text display portion of the title display in the first reach allows players to intuitively perceive that the second reach has a higher probability of success than the first reach.

The gaming machine of form 17-3 is the gaming machine described in form 17-1 or 17-2,
This is a reach performed in the normal state, and includes a third reach (low-base strongest reach performance) which has a higher probability of being controlled to the advantageous state than the second reach (low-base strong reach A to C performance),
The title display part in the aforementioned second reach (low base strong reach A to C production) consists of a prologue part (prologue display period) and a text display part (title start period, title display period, title end period),
In the aforementioned third reach (low-base strongest reach production), the title display part lacks a prologue part (prologue display period) and consists only of a text display part (title start period, title display period, title end period).
A key feature of the third reach (low-base strongest reach production) is that the text display portion of the title display is longer than the text display portion of the second reach (low-base strong reach productions A to C).
Based on this characteristic, the fact that the text display portion of the title display in the third reach is longer than the text display portion of the title display in the second reach allows players to intuitively perceive that the third reach has a higher probability of success than the second reach.

[Form 18]
The gaming machine of form 18-1 is,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information, a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") is derived, thereby controlling the machine to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
Game control means (microcomputer 100 for game control),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
Multiple light-emitting means (frame LED LWL1 to LWL12, frame LED LWR2 to LWR12, logo LED LL1 to LL4, decorative LED LS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
It includes a light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is,
When a game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting prize entry point, second starting prize entry point), it is determined whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state).
The variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (First Special Drawing, Second Special Drawing) is performed.
Based on the result of the above determination, one of the following variation patterns is determined from among a plurality of variation patterns, including a first variation pattern (PB1-2, 5, 8) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second variation pattern (PA2-2 to 3) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a third variation pattern (PB1-2 to 10) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth variation pattern (PA2-4 to 12) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state.
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-2, 5, and 8) is sent to the performance control means.
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-2 to PA2-3) is sent to the performance control means.
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-2 to 10) is sent to the performance control means.
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-4 to PA2-12) is sent to the performance control means.
The aforementioned performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the aforementioned first command is received, the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) can be executed.
When the second command is received, the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) can be executed.
When the aforementioned third command is received, the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) can be executed.
When the fourth command is received, the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) can be executed.
The first reach (low-base weak reach A and B effects) and the second reach (low-base strong reach A to C effects) are both reaches that are performed in the normal state.
The first reach (low-base weak reach A and B effects) is a reach in which, as a result of the effect, it is not announced that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state), and as a result of the effect, it is announced that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state), and another reach (super reach effect) is executed.
The second reach (low-base strong reach A to C performance) is a reach in which, as a result of the performance, it is announced that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state), or that it will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state).
The first reach (low-base weak reach A and B effects) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the other reaches will be performed.
The second reach (low-base strong reach A to C performance) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
The display means (image display device 5) is
In the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), an expectation level indication is displayed.
In the title display part of the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the expected value indication display is not displayed.
The aforementioned light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
The light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table composed of luminance data.
In the title display part of the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display part of the first reach (common title for weak reach series),
In the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), the light-emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the title display part of the second reach (common title for strong reach series),
In the introductory part of the first reach (low-base weak reach A and B effects), the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part of the first reach (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction),
In the introductory part of the second reach (low-base strong reach A to C effects), the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part of the second reach (strong reach A introduction, strong reach B introduction, strong reach C introduction).
This feature allows for the display of an expected level indicator in the title display part of the second reach, where the player may be directly informed that they will be controlled to a favorable state, while the display of an expected level indicator is not displayed in the title display part of the first reach, where the player is not directly informed that they will be controlled to a favorable state. This prevents the first reach from creating an excessive sense of expectation. Furthermore, in the title display parts of the first and second reaches, the light-emitting means are controlled using different luminance data tables for the title display of the first and second reaches, respectively, which are different from the luminance data tables for the introduction parts of the first and second reaches. This allows the light-emitting means to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed effectively.

The gaming machine of form 18-2 is the gaming machine described in form 18-1,
The title display part in the first reach (low-base weak reach A and B effects) is characterized by the ability to display a title (title text) in a confirmed manner (gold) that confirms the execution of another reach (super reach effect).
This feature allows the game to capture the player's attention even during the title display part of the first reach, where no indication of expected outcome is displayed.

[Form 19]
The gaming machine of form 19-1 is,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information, a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") is derived, thereby controlling the machine to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
Game control means (microcomputer 100 for game control),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120),
It comprises a display means (image display device 5),
The aforementioned game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is,
When a game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting prize entry point, second starting prize entry point), it is determined whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state).
The variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (First Special Drawing, Second Special Drawing) is performed.
Based on the result of the above determination, one of a plurality of variation patterns is determined from among a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state.
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern specification command that specifies a winning variation pattern) is sent to the performance control means.
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern specification command specifying a losing variation pattern) is sent to the performance control means.
The aforementioned performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach),
The aforementioned specific reach (low-base strong reach A to C effects, low-base strongest reach) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the success or failure of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is announced.
The aforementioned specific reach (low-base strong reach A to C effects, low-base strongest reach) may be executed via a selection effect using title displays (title characters) corresponding to multiple reaches (super reach effects) including the said specific reach.
The aforementioned display means is
In the title display part of the aforementioned specific reach (low-base strong reach A to C performance, low-base strongest reach) and in the aforementioned selection performance, it is possible to display an expectation level indication along with the title display (title text).
When displaying the expected probability indication display in the title display part of the aforementioned specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach), the expected probability indication display, which consists of multiple objects (star-shaped objects), is displayed in stages.
In the aforementioned selection presentation, when displaying the expected level indication, the expected level indication, which is composed of multiple objects (star-shaped objects), is not displayed in stages.
According to this feature, when displaying an indication of the expected probability in the title display part of a specific reach, the indication of the expected probability, which is composed of multiple objects, is displayed in stages. However, when displaying an indication of the expected probability in the selection sequence, the indication of the expected probability, which is composed of multiple objects, is not displayed in stages. Therefore, the annoyance caused by the indication of the expected probability being displayed in stages not only in the title display part but also in the preceding selection sequence can be eliminated.

The gaming machine of form 19-2 is the gaming machine described in form 19-1,
The aforementioned selection effect is an effect that changes in stages from a low-probability reach (super reach effect) to a high-probability reach (super reach effect) by operating the effect operation means (push button 31B).
A key feature of the selection animation is that the time required for one stage change (the minimum time required to switch to the title image of the next super reach animation) may be shorter than the time required for one stage to be displayed in the expectation indication display in the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C animations, low base strongest reach) (the time required for the star-shaped object to change from black to highlighted and then to gold).
This feature allows for a sense of speed in the gradual changes during the selection process.

The gaming machine of form 19-3 is the gaming machine described in form 19-2,
The aforementioned selection animation is characterized by changing to a reach (super reach animation) with a one-step higher expectation level than the current reach (super reach animation) at each step, and by increasing the number of operations of the animation operation means (push button 31B) required to change to the next step with each step change.
According to this feature, the higher the expectation of a winning combination, the more you can keep the player on edge.

The gaming machine of form 19-4 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 19-1 to 19-3,
A key feature is that if the aforementioned selection animation selects one of the specified reach animations (low-base strong reach animations A to C, low-base strongest reach animation), the game will start from the title display part.
This feature makes it easier for players to determine which reach was ultimately executed, even when a specific reach is performed via a selection animation, as it starts from the title display part.

[Form 20]
The gaming machine of form 20-1 is,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information, a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") is derived, thereby controlling the machine to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
Game control means (microcomputer 100 for game control),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
Multiple light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4),
It includes a light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is,
When a game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting prize entry point, second starting prize entry point), it is determined whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state).
The variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (First Special Drawing, Second Special Drawing) is performed.
Based on the result of the above determination, one of a plurality of variation patterns is determined from among a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state.
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern specification command that specifies a winning variation pattern) is sent to the performance control means.
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern specification command specifying a losing variation pattern) is sent to the performance control means.
The aforementioned performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during a specific reach (super reach animation).
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the specific reach (super reach performance),
The aforementioned specific reach (super reach effect) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled.
The display means (image display device 5) is
After notification that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state by the aforementioned specific reach (super reach animation), it is possible to display the name of the advantageous state corresponding to the controlled advantageous state (title text of the jackpot start animation),
The aforementioned advantageous state name display (title text for the jackpot start animation) is displayed in a manner with greater movement than the title display corresponding to the specific reach (title text for the super reach animation),
The aforementioned light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
The light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table composed of luminance data.
In the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach type, common title for strong reach type, common title for high base reach type).
The aforementioned introduction part is characterized by controlling the light-emitting means using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach type weak reach A introduction, weak reach type weak reach B introduction, strong reach type strong reach A introduction, strong reach type strong reach B introduction, strong reach type strong reach C introduction, high base reach type reach A introduction, high base reach type reach B introduction, high base reach type reach C introduction, high base reach type reach D introduction).
According to this feature, the situation in which the title is displayed during a specific reach is one in which it is still unknown whether or not the game will be controlled to a favorable state, whereas the situation in which the name of the favorable state is displayed is one in which it has already been announced that the game will be controlled to a favorable state, and by moving the name of the favorable state more dramatically, it is possible to celebrate being controlled to a favorable state. Furthermore, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a different brightness data table for title display than the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting manner according to the title display, and as a result the title can be displayed effectively.

The gaming machine of form 20-2 is the gaming machine described in form 20-1,
In the title display part of the aforementioned specific reach (low-base strong reach B and C effects, low-base strongest reach effect, high-base reach A to D), a background specifically for the title display is displayed when the title display (title text) is shown.
The background for the aforementioned advantageous state name display (the title text for the jackpot start animation) is characterized by being displayed in a manner with greater movement than the background specifically for the title display.
This feature allows for greater movement of the background when displaying the name of the advantageous state, thus celebrating the fact that the player is controlled to an advantageous state.

[Form 21]
The gaming machine of form 21-1 is,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information, a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") is derived, thereby controlling the machine to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
Game control means (microcomputer 100 for game control),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
Multiple light-emitting means (frame LED LWL1 to LWL12, frame LED LWR2 to LWR12, logo LED LL1 to LL4, decorative LED LS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
It includes a light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is,
When a game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting prize entry point, second starting prize entry point), it is determined whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state).
The variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (First Special Drawing, Second Special Drawing) is performed.
Based on the result of the above determination, one of a plurality of variation patterns is determined from among a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state.
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern specification command that specifies a winning variation pattern) is sent to the performance control means.
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern specification command specifying a losing variation pattern) is sent to the performance control means.
The aforementioned performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during a specific reach (super reach animation).
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the specific reach (super reach performance),
The aforementioned specific reach (super reach effect) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled.
The display means (image display device 5) is
In the introductory part (operation prompting effects B and D) of the aforementioned specific reach (super reach effect), prompting text (small operation prompting text) can be displayed to encourage the player to take action.
The aforementioned prompt text display (operation prompt text (small)) is displayed in a manner that exhibits greater movement than the title display (title text) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect),
The aforementioned light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
The light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table composed of luminance data.
In the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach type, common title for strong reach type, common title for high base reach type).
The aforementioned introduction part is characterized by controlling the light-emitting means using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach type weak reach A introduction, weak reach type weak reach B introduction, strong reach type strong reach A introduction, strong reach type strong reach B introduction, strong reach type strong reach C introduction, high base reach type reach A introduction, high base reach type reach B introduction, high base reach type reach C introduction, high base reach type reach D introduction).
According to this feature, the prompt text displayed in the introduction section encourages the player to take action, and by moving it more dramatically than the title display in the title display section, it is possible to intuitively encourage the player to take action. Furthermore, in the title display section, the light-emitting means is controlled using a different brightness data table for the title display than the brightness data table for the introduction section, so the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable mode corresponding to the title display, and as a result, the title can be displayed effectively.

The gaming machine of form 21-2 is the gaming machine described in form 21-1,
In the introductory part of the aforementioned specific reach (super reach performance), it is possible to display special prompting characters (large operation prompting characters) that encourage the player to take action and suggest a more favorable situation than the aforementioned prompting characters (small operation prompting characters),
Both the aforementioned promotional text display (small operation promotional text) and the aforementioned special promotional text display (large operation promotional text) are characterized by being displayed in a manner with greater movement than the title display (title text) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect).
This feature allows for intuitive guidance from the player by making both promotional text displays and special promotional text displays move more dramatically than the title display in the title display section.

The gaming machine of form 21-3 is the gaming machine described in form 21-1 or 21-2,
The number of characters (3) in the aforementioned prompt text display (small operation prompt text) is less than the number of characters (7 to 13) in the aforementioned title display (title text).
This feature means that the number of characters displayed as prompt text is less than the number of characters displayed as title, allowing the content of the text to be recognized even when the viewer moves significantly.

[Form 22]
The gaming machine of form 22-1 is,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information, a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") is derived, thereby controlling the machine to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
Game control means (microcomputer 100 for game control),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
Multiple light-emitting means (frame LED LWL1 to LWL12, frame LED LWR2 to LWR12, logo LED LL1 to LL4, decorative LED LS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
It includes a light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is,
When a game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting prize entry point, second starting prize entry point), it is determined whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state).
The variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (First Special Drawing, Second Special Drawing) is performed.
Based on the result of the above determination, one of a plurality of variation patterns is determined from among a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state.
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern specification command that specifies a winning variation pattern) is sent to the performance control means.
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern specification command specifying a losing variation pattern) is sent to the performance control means.
The aforementioned performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during a specific reach (super reach animation).
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the specific reach (super reach performance),
The aforementioned specific reach (super reach effect) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled.
The display means (image display device 5) is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during a specific reach (super reach animation).
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the specific reach (super reach performance),
The aforementioned specific reach (super reach effect) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled.
The display means (image display device 5) is
It is possible to display a display that is different from the title display (title text) corresponding to the aforementioned specific reach (super reach effect) and that explains the content of the specific reach (explanatory text),
The explanatory text display (explanatory text) is displayed in a manner that exhibits greater movement than the title display (title text) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect),
The aforementioned light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
The light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table composed of luminance data.
In the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach type, common title for strong reach type, common title for high base reach type).
The aforementioned introduction part is characterized by controlling the light-emitting means using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach type weak reach A introduction, weak reach type weak reach B introduction, strong reach type strong reach A introduction, strong reach type strong reach B introduction, strong reach type strong reach C introduction, high base reach type reach A introduction, high base reach type reach B introduction, high base reach type reach C introduction, high base reach type reach D introduction).
This feature allows the additional explanatory text to be displayed with greater movement than the title display, thereby drawing attention to the addition of explanatory text in addition to the title display. Furthermore, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a different luminance data table for the title display than the luminance data table for the introduction part, so the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting manner according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed effectively.

The gaming machine of form 22-2 is the gaming machine described in form 22-1,
The aforementioned explanatory text display (explanatory text) is characterized by its content suggesting that the particular reach (super reach effect) is advantageous.
This feature allows us to draw further attention to the fact that explanatory text has been added.

[Form 23]
The gaming machine of form 23-1 is,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information, a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") is derived, thereby controlling the machine to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
Game control means (microcomputer 100 for game control),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
Multiple light-emitting means (frame LED LWL1 to LWL12, frame LED LWR2 to LWR12, logo LED LL1 to LL4, decorative LED LS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
It includes a light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is,
When a game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting prize entry point, second starting prize entry point), it is determined whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state).
The variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (First Special Drawing, Second Special Drawing) is performed.
Based on the result of the above determination, one of the following multiple fluctuation patterns is determined: a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state; a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state; a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to 10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state; and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to 12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state.
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-JA and PB1-JB) is sent to the performance control means.
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-2 and PA2-3) is sent to the performance control means.
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-2 to 10) is sent to the performance control means.
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-4 to PA2-12) is sent to the performance control means.
The aforementioned performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance),
The first reach (low-base weak reach A and B effects) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
The second reach (low-base strong reach A to C performance) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
The second reach (low-base strong reach A to C effects) has a higher probability of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low-base weak reach A, B effects),
The display means (image display device 5) is
The title display (title text) corresponding to the second reach (low-base strong reach A to C effects) is displayed in a larger font size than the title display (title text) corresponding to the first reach (low-base weak reach A, B effects).
The aforementioned light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
The light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table composed of luminance data.
In the title display part of the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display part of the first reach (common title for weak reach series),
In the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), the light-emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the title display part of the second reach (common title for strong reach series),
In the introductory part of the first reach (low-base weak reach A and B effects), the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part of the first reach (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction),
In the introductory part of the second reach (low-base strong reach A to C effects), the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part of the second reach (strong reach A introduction, strong reach B introduction, strong reach C introduction).
This feature allows the title display corresponding to the second reach, which has a relatively higher expectation level, to be displayed with a larger font size than the title display corresponding to the first reach, which has a relatively lower expectation level. Therefore, even just from the title display, the user can intuitively perceive that the second reach has a higher expectation level than the first reach. Furthermore, in the title display parts of the first and second reaches, the light-emitting means are controlled using different luminance data tables for the title displays of the first and second reaches, respectively, which are different from the luminance data tables used for the introductory parts of the first and second reaches. This allows the light-emitting means to emit light in a suitable mode corresponding to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed effectively.

The gaming machine of form 23-2 is the gaming machine described in form 23-1,
The number of characters (10) that make up the title display (title text) corresponding to the first reach (low-base weak reach A and B effects) is greater than the number of characters (7 and 8) that make up the title display (title text) corresponding to the second reach (low-base strong reach B and C effects), but the display area (display area size) of the title display (title text) corresponding to the second reach (low-base strong reach B and C effects) is larger than the display area (display area size) of the title display (title text) corresponding to the first reach (low-base weak reach A and B effects).
This feature means that the title display corresponding to the second reach occupies a larger display area per character, allowing players to intuitively perceive that the second reach has a higher probability of success than the first reach.

[Form 24]
The gaming machine of form 24-1 is,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information, a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") is derived, thereby controlling the machine to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
Game control means (microcomputer 100 for game control),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
Multiple light-emitting means (frame LED LWL1 to LWL12, frame LED LWR2 to LWR12, logo LED LL1 to LL4, decorative LED LS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
It includes a light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is,
When a game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting prize entry point, second starting prize entry point), it is determined whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state).
The variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (First Special Drawing, Second Special Drawing) is performed.
Based on the result of the above determination, one of a plurality of variation patterns is determined from among a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state.
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern specification command that specifies a winning variation pattern) is sent to the performance control means.
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern specification command specifying a losing variation pattern) is sent to the performance control means.
The aforementioned performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during a specific reach (super reach animation).
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the specific reach (super reach performance),
The aforementioned specific reach (super reach effect) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled.
The title display (title text) corresponding to the aforementioned specific reach (super reach effect) consists of multiple characters,
The display means (image display device 5) is
It is possible to display a variable display of decorative identification information (decorative pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (first special drawing, second special drawing),
In the aforementioned specific reach (super reach performance), the first size of the decorative identification information (decorative symbol (large)) is displayed in a reach pattern before the title display part, and thereafter, the second size of the decorative identification information (decorative symbol (small)), which is smaller than the first size, is displayed in a reach pattern.
At least one character of the title display (title text) corresponding to the aforementioned specific reach (super reach effect) is displayed in a size larger than the second size (decorative pattern (small)),
The aforementioned light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
The light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table composed of luminance data.
In the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach type, common title for strong reach type, common title for high base reach type).
The aforementioned introduction part is characterized by controlling the light-emitting means using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach type weak reach A introduction, weak reach type weak reach B introduction, strong reach type strong reach A introduction, strong reach type strong reach B introduction, strong reach type strong reach C introduction, high base reach type reach A introduction, high base reach type reach B introduction, high base reach type reach C introduction, high base reach type reach D introduction).
This feature ensures that at least one character of the title display corresponding to a specific reach is displayed in a larger size than the decorative identification information reduced to a second size, thereby drawing attention to the title display in the title display section. Furthermore, in the title display section, the light-emitting means is controlled using a different luminance data table for the title display than the luminance data table for the introduction section, allowing the light-emitting means to emit light in a suitable emission mode corresponding to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed effectively.

The gaming machine of form 24-2 is the gaming machine described in form 24-1,
The characteristic feature is that all characters in the title display (title text) corresponding to the aforementioned specific reach (super reach effect) are displayed in a size smaller than the first size (decorative pattern (large)) and larger than the second size (decorative pattern (small)).
This feature ensures that decorative identification information is reliably recognized when the viewer is in reach mode. After that, the decorative identification information is reduced in size, and each character constituting the title display is displayed in a larger size than the decorative identification information, thus drawing attention to the title display in the title display section.

[Form 25]
The gaming machine of form 25-1 is,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information, a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") is derived, thereby controlling the machine to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
Game control means (microcomputer 100 for game control),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
Multiple light-emitting means (frame LED LWL1 to LWL12, frame LED LWR2 to LWR12, logo LED LL1 to LL4, decorative LED LS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
It includes a light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is,
When a game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting prize entry point, second starting prize entry point), it is determined whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state).
The variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (First Special Drawing, Second Special Drawing) is performed.
Based on the result of the above determination, one of a plurality of variation patterns is determined from among a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state.
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern specification command that specifies a winning variation pattern) is sent to the performance control means.
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern specification command specifying a losing variation pattern) is sent to the performance control means.
The aforementioned performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during a specific reach (super reach animation).
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the specific reach (super reach performance),
The aforementioned specific reach (super reach effect) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled.
The display means (image display device 5) is
In the introductory part (operation prompting effects B and D) of the aforementioned specific reach (super reach effect), prompting text (small operation prompting text) can be displayed to encourage the player to take action.
After notification that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state by the aforementioned specific reach (super reach animation), it is possible to display the name of the advantageous state corresponding to the controlled advantageous state (title text of the jackpot start animation),
The aforementioned advantageous state name display (title text of the jackpot start animation) is displayed larger than the aforementioned promotion text display (operation promotion text (small)),
The aforementioned light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
The light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table composed of luminance data.
In the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach type, common title for strong reach type, common title for high base reach type).
The aforementioned introduction part is characterized by controlling the light-emitting means using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach type weak reach A introduction, weak reach type weak reach B introduction, strong reach type strong reach A introduction, strong reach type strong reach B introduction, strong reach type strong reach C introduction, high base reach type reach A introduction, high base reach type reach B introduction, high base reach type reach C introduction, high base reach type reach D introduction).
According to this feature, the situation in which promotional text is displayed during a specific reach is one in which it is still unknown whether or not the game will be controlled to a favorable state, whereas the situation in which the name of the favorable state is displayed is one in which it has already been announced that the game will be controlled to a favorable state. By displaying the name of the favorable state larger than the promotional text, it is possible to celebrate the fact that the game will be controlled to a favorable state. Furthermore, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a different luminance data table for title display than the luminance data table for the introduction part, so the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting manner according to the title display, and as a result, the title can be displayed effectively.

The gaming machine of form 25-2 is the gaming machine described in form 25-1,
The aforementioned advantageous state name display (the title text of the jackpot start animation) consists of a first string ("BIG" or "REGULAR") and a second string ("BONUS").
After the first string ("BIG" or "REGULAR") is displayed at the first position (top of the fixed position), the second string ("BONUS") is displayed at the second position (bottom of the fixed position).
After the second string ("BONUS") is displayed at the second position (below the fixed position), the first string ("BIG" or "REGULAR") displayed at the first position (above the fixed position) and the second string ("BONUS") displayed at the second position (below the fixed position) are gradually enlarged.
The first string ("BIG" or "REGULAR") and the second string ("BONUS") are displayed in the smallest possible font size when displayed at the first position (top of fixed position) and the second position (bottom of fixed position),
The first string ("BIG" or "REGULAR") and the second string ("BONUS") are characterized in that when they are displayed at the first position (upper fixed position) and the second position (lower fixed position), the size of the characters is larger than the size of the characters that make up the prompt character display (small operation prompt character).
According to this feature, the characters that make up the advantageous state name display are always displayed larger than the characters that make up the promotion character display, thus more effectively celebrating being controlled into an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of form 25-3 is the gaming machine described in form 25-1 or 25-2,
The smallest character in the string that constitutes the advantageous state name display (title text for the jackpot start animation) is larger than the largest character in the string that constitutes the promotion text display (small operation promotion text).
According to this feature, the smallest character in the string that makes up the advantageous state name display is displayed larger than the largest character in the string that makes up the promotion character display. Therefore, no matter which character you focus on, the advantageous state name display will be displayed larger than the promotion character display, allowing you to celebrate being controlled in an advantageous state more effectively.

The gaming machine of form 25-4 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 25-1 to 25-3,
It is possible to display special prompting characters (large prompting characters) that suggest a more favorable situation than the aforementioned prompting characters (small prompting characters),
The special promotional text display (large operation promotional text) is characterized by being displayed larger than the advantageous state name display (title text for the jackpot start animation).
According to this feature, special promotional text displays that suggest a more favorable situation than regular promotional text displays can be displayed larger than the advantageous state name displays, allowing players to perceive that advantageous situation.

The gaming machine of form 25-5 is the gaming machine described in form 25-4,
The smallest character in the string that makes up the special promotion character display (large operation promotion character) is larger than the largest character in the string that makes up the advantageous state name display (title character for the jackpot start animation).
According to this feature, the smallest character in the string that makes up the special promotional text display is displayed larger than the largest character in the string that makes up the advantageous state name display. Therefore, no matter which character is focused on, the special promotional text display will be displayed larger than the advantageous state name display, allowing the player to perceive that advantageous situation.

[Form 26]
The gaming machine of form 26-1 is,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information, a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") is derived, thereby controlling the machine to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
Game control means (microcomputer 100 for game control),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
Multiple light-emitting means (frame LED LWL1 to LWL12, frame LED LWR2 to LWR12, logo LED LL1 to LL4, decorative LED LS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
It includes a light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is,
When a game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting prize entry point, second starting prize entry point), it is determined whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state).
The variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (First Special Drawing, Second Special Drawing) is performed.
Based on the result of the above determination, one of a plurality of variation patterns is determined from among a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state.
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern specification command that specifies a winning variation pattern) is sent to the performance control means.
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern specification command specifying a losing variation pattern) is sent to the performance control means.
The aforementioned performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during a specific reach (super reach animation).
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the specific reach (super reach performance),
The aforementioned specific reach (super reach effect) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled.
The display means (image display device 5) is
After notification that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state by the aforementioned specific reach (super reach animation), it is possible to display the name of the advantageous state corresponding to the controlled advantageous state (title text of the jackpot start animation),
The aforementioned advantageous state name display (title text of the jackpot start animation) is displayed larger than the title display (title text) corresponding to the aforementioned specific reach (super reach animation),
The aforementioned light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
The light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table composed of luminance data.
In the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach type, common title for strong reach type, common title for high base reach type).
The aforementioned introduction part is characterized by controlling the light-emitting means using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach type weak reach A introduction, weak reach type weak reach B introduction, strong reach type strong reach A introduction, strong reach type strong reach B introduction, strong reach type strong reach C introduction, high base reach type reach A introduction, high base reach type reach B introduction, high base reach type reach C introduction, high base reach type reach D introduction).
According to this feature, the situation in which the title is displayed during a specific reach is one in which it is still unknown whether or not the game will be controlled to a favorable state, whereas the situation in which the name of the favorable state is displayed is one in which it has already been announced that the game will be controlled to a favorable state. By displaying the name of the favorable state larger than the title, it is possible to celebrate the fact that the game will be controlled to a favorable state. Furthermore, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a different luminance data table for title display than the luminance data table for the introduction part, so the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting manner according to the title display, and as a result, the title can be displayed effectively.

The gaming machine of form 26-2 is the gaming machine described in form 26-1,
The aforementioned specific reach (super reach effect) includes multiple types of specific reaches with different title displays (title text),
The aforementioned advantageous state name display (title text for the jackpot start animation) is characterized by being displayed larger than the title display (title text) corresponding to any type of specific reach (super reach animation).
According to this feature, the display of the advantageous state name is shown larger than the title display corresponding to any type of specific reach, which can be seen as a way of celebrating being controlled into an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of form 26-3 is the gaming machine described in form 26-2,
The smallest character in the string that makes up the advantageous state name display (title text for the jackpot start animation) is larger than the largest character in the string that makes up the title display (title text) corresponding to any type of specific reach (super reach animation).
According to this feature, the smallest character in the string that makes up the advantageous state name display is displayed larger than the largest character in the string that makes up the title display corresponding to any type of specific reach. Therefore, no matter which character you focus on, the advantageous state name display will be displayed larger than the title display corresponding to the specific reach, allowing you to celebrate being controlled in an advantageous state more effectively.

[Form 27]
The gaming machine of form 27-1 is,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information, a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") is derived, thereby controlling the machine to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
Game control means (microcomputer 100 for game control),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
Multiple light-emitting means (frame LED LWL1 to LWL12, frame LED LWR2 to LWR12, logo LED LL1 to LL4, decorative LED LS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
It includes a light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is,
When a game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting prize entry point, second starting prize entry point), it is determined whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state).
The variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (First Special Drawing, Second Special Drawing) is performed.
Based on the result of the above determination, one of a plurality of variation patterns is determined from among a first variation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state.
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern specification command specifying (PA2-2, PA2-3)) is sent to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-2 and PA2-3) is sent to the performance control means.
The aforementioned performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
The aforementioned specific reach (low-base weak reach A and B effects) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled.
The display means (image display device 5) is
In the aforementioned specific reach (low-base weak reach A and B effects), it is possible to display prompt text (small prompt text) that encourages the player to take action before the title display part (operation prompt effect A),
The title display (title text) corresponding to the aforementioned specific reach (low-base weak reach A and B effects) is displayed larger than the aforementioned prompt text display (operation prompt text (small)),
The aforementioned light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
The light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table composed of luminance data.
In the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach type),
The aforementioned introduction part is characterized by controlling the light-emitting means using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach type weak reach A introduction, weak reach type weak reach B introduction).
This feature allows for the display of promotional text before the title display section, and then displays the title display larger than the promotional text to draw attention to the title display. Furthermore, in the title display section, the light-emitting means is controlled using a different luminance data table for the title display than the luminance data table for the introduction section. This allows the light-emitting means to emit light in a suitable mode corresponding to the title display, resulting in a more effective title display.

The gaming machine of form 27-2 is the gaming machine described in form 27-1,
The feature is that after the aforementioned prompt text display (small operation prompt text) is displayed, the game progresses to the aforementioned specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), and the title display part of the aforementioned specific reach begins.
This feature allows for the display of promotional text before the title display part in a sequence of events, and then the title display that follows is made larger than the promotional text to draw attention to the title display.

The gaming machine of form 27-3 is the gaming machine described in form 27-1 or 27-2,
The smallest character in the string of characters that constitutes the title display (title text) corresponding to the aforementioned specific reach (low base weak reach A and B effects) is larger than the largest character in the string of characters that constitute the aforementioned prompt text display (operation prompt text (small)).
This feature ensures that the smallest character in the string that makes up the title display corresponding to a specific reach is displayed larger than the largest character in the string that makes up the promotional text display, thus drawing attention to the title display regardless of which character the user focuses on.

[Form 28]
The gaming machine of form 28-1 is,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information, a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") is derived, thereby controlling the machine to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
Game control means (microcomputer 100 for game control),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
Multiple light-emitting means (frame LED LWL1 to LWL12, frame LED LWR2 to LWR12, logo LED LL1 to LL4, decorative LED LS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
It includes a light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is,
When a game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting prize entry point, second starting prize entry point), it is determined whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state).
The variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (First Special Drawing, Second Special Drawing) is performed.
Based on the result of the above determination, one of a plurality of variation patterns is determined from among a first variation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state.
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern specification command specifying (PA2-2, PA2-3)) is sent to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-2 and PA2-3) is sent to the performance control means.
The aforementioned performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
The aforementioned specific reach (low-base weak reach A and B effects) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled.
The display means (image display device 5) is
In the aforementioned specific reach (low-base weak reach A and B effects), it is possible to display prompt text (small prompt text) that encourages the player to take action before the title display part (operation prompt effect A),
After it is announced that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state by the aforementioned specific reach (low-base weak reach A and B effects), it is possible to display the name of the advantageous state corresponding to the controlled advantageous state (the title text of the jackpot start effect),
The aforementioned advantageous state name display (title text of the jackpot start animation) is displayed larger than the title display (title text) corresponding to the aforementioned specific reach (low base weak reach A and B animations),
The title display (title text) corresponding to the aforementioned specific reach (low-base weak reach A and B effects) is displayed larger than the aforementioned prompt text display (operation prompt text (small)),
The aforementioned light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
The light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table composed of luminance data.
In the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach type),
The aforementioned introduction part is characterized by controlling the light-emitting means using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach type weak reach A introduction, weak reach type weak reach B introduction).
According to this feature, the situation in which the title is displayed during a specific reach is one in which it is still unknown whether or not the game will be controlled to a favorable state, whereas the situation in which the name of the favorable state is displayed is one in which it has already been announced that the game will be controlled to a favorable state. By displaying the name of the favorable state larger than the title, it is possible to celebrate being controlled to a favorable state. In addition, by displaying promotional text before the title display part and then displaying the title display, which is displayed afterward, larger than the promotional text, attention can be drawn to the title display. Furthermore, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a different luminance data table for title display than the luminance data table for the introduction part, so the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title can be displayed effectively.

The gaming machine of form 28-2 is the gaming machine described in form 28-1,
The system is characterized in that, after the aforementioned prompt text display (small operation prompt text) is displayed, the game progresses to the aforementioned specific reach (low-base weak reach A and B performances), the title display part of the aforementioned specific reach begins, and after it is announced that the game is controlled to the advantageous state by the aforementioned specific reach (low-base weak reach A and B performances), the advantageous state name display (title text of the jackpot start performance) is displayed.
According to this feature, in the sequence of events, a promotional text is displayed before the title display part, and the title display that follows is made larger than the promotional text to draw attention to the title display. After the announcement that the player will be controlled to an advantageous state by a specific reach, the name of the advantageous state is displayed larger than the title display to celebrate being controlled to an advantageous state.

[Form 29]
The gaming machine of form 29-1 is,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information, a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") is derived, thereby controlling the machine to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
Game control means (microcomputer 100 for game control),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
Multiple light-emitting means (frame LED LWL1 to LWL12, frame LED LWR2 to LWR12, logo LED LL1 to LL4, decorative LED LS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
It includes a light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is,
When a game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting prize entry point, second starting prize entry point), it is determined whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state).
The variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (First Special Drawing, Second Special Drawing) is performed.
Based on the result of the above determination, one of a plurality of variation patterns is determined from among a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state.
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern specification command that specifies a winning variation pattern) is sent to the performance control means.
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern specification command specifying a losing variation pattern) is sent to the performance control means.
The aforementioned performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during a specific reach (super reach animation).
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the specific reach (super reach performance),
The aforementioned specific reach (super reach effect) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled.
The aforementioned display means (image display device 5)
After notification that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state by the aforementioned specific reach (super reach animation), it is possible to display the name of the advantageous state corresponding to the controlled advantageous state (title text of the jackpot start animation),
The aforementioned advantageous state name display (title text of the jackpot start animation) is displayed for a longer period of time than the title display (title text) corresponding to the aforementioned specific reach (super reach animation).
The aforementioned light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
The light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table composed of luminance data.
In the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach type, common title for strong reach type, common title for high base reach type).
The aforementioned introduction part is characterized by controlling the light-emitting means using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach type weak reach A introduction, weak reach type weak reach B introduction, strong reach type strong reach A introduction, strong reach type strong reach B introduction, strong reach type strong reach C introduction, high base reach type reach A introduction, high base reach type reach B introduction, high base reach type reach C introduction, high base reach type reach D introduction).
According to this feature, the situation in which the title is displayed during a specific reach is one in which it is still unknown whether or not the game will be controlled to a favorable state, whereas the situation in which the name of the favorable state is displayed is one in which it has already been announced that the game will be controlled to a favorable state. By displaying the name of the favorable state for a longer period of time than the title, it is possible to celebrate the fact that the game will be controlled to a favorable state. Furthermore, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a different luminance data table for title display than the luminance data table for the introduction part, so the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting manner according to the title display, and as a result, the title can be displayed effectively.

The gaming machine of form 29-2 is the gaming machine described in form 29-1,
The time from when all the characters constituting the advantageous state name display (title characters for the jackpot start animation) are displayed until at least a portion of those characters disappear is longer than the time from when a portion of the characters constituting the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach animation) is displayed until all of those characters disappear.
This feature allows for a longer duration for players to see the advantageous state name, which signifies a blessing, than for the title display, which aims to encourage the possibility of being controlled into an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of form 29-3 is the gaming machine described in form 29-1 or 28-2,
After the advantageous state name display (title text of the jackpot start animation) is displayed, the advantageous state name display is switched to an operation suggestion display (small right-shooting promotion image and large right-shooting promotion image) that suggests the operation method during the advantageous state, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the switch to the operation suggestion display, control is performed that makes the player advantageous by operating according to the operation method suggested by the operation suggestion display (an operation method of shooting the game ball toward the right game area 2R).
The time it takes to switch from the advantageous state name display (title text for the jackpot start animation) to the operation suggestion display (small right-hand play promotion image and large right-hand play promotion image) is shorter than the time it takes to end the title display (title text) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach animation).
This feature allows for a quick switch from displaying the name of the advantageous state to displaying an operation suggestion. Subsequently, after a predetermined period has elapsed, the system will be controlled in a way that is advantageous if the player operates according to the operation suggestion displayed. This prevents the player from being disadvantaged by changing their operation method before the advantageous state name display ends.

[Form 30]
The gaming machine of form 30-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information, a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") is derived, thereby controlling the machine to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
Game control means (microcomputer 100 for game control),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
Multiple light-emitting means (frame LED LWL1 to LWL12, frame LED LWR2 to LWR12, logo LED LL1 to LL4, decorative LED LS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
It includes a light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is,
When a game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting prize entry point, second starting prize entry point), it is determined whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state).
The variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (First Special Drawing, Second Special Drawing) is performed.
Based on the result of the above determination, one of a plurality of variation patterns is determined from among a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state.
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern specification command that specifies a winning variation pattern) is sent to the performance control means.
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern specification command specifying a losing variation pattern) is sent to the performance control means.
The aforementioned performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during a specific reach (super reach animation).
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the specific reach (super reach performance),
The aforementioned specific reach (super reach effect) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled.
The display means (image display device 5) is
In the introductory part (operation prompting effects B and D) of the aforementioned specific reach (super reach effect), prompting text (small operation prompting text) can be displayed to encourage the player to take action.
After notification that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state by the aforementioned specific reach (super reach animation), it is possible to display the name of the advantageous state corresponding to the controlled advantageous state (title text of the jackpot start animation),
The aforementioned advantageous state name display (title text of the jackpot start animation) is displayed for a longer period of time than the aforementioned promotion text display (operation promotion text (small)).
The aforementioned light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
The light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table composed of luminance data.
In the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach type, common title for strong reach type, common title for high base reach type).
The aforementioned introduction part is characterized by controlling the light-emitting means using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach type weak reach A introduction, weak reach type weak reach B introduction, strong reach type strong reach A introduction, strong reach type strong reach B introduction, strong reach type strong reach C introduction, high base reach type reach A introduction, high base reach type reach B introduction, high base reach type reach C introduction, high base reach type reach D introduction).
According to this feature, the situation in which promotional text is displayed during a specific reach is one in which it is still unknown whether or not the game will be controlled to a favorable state, whereas the situation in which the name of the favorable state is displayed is one in which it has already been announced that the game will be controlled to a favorable state. By displaying the name of the favorable state for a longer period of time than the promotional text, it is possible to celebrate the fact that the game will be controlled to a favorable state. Furthermore, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a different luminance data table for title display than the luminance data table for the introduction part, so the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title can be displayed effectively.

The gaming machine of form 30-2 is the gaming machine described in form 30-1,
The aforementioned prompt text display (small prompt text) is displayed until the prompted action is performed or until the time for which the prompted action is valid has elapsed.
The advantage state name display (title text for the jackpot start animation) is characterized by being displayed for a longer period of time than the period of time after the prompt text display (small operation prompt text) is displayed until the prompt action is not performed and the period of time during which the prompt action is effective has elapsed.
According to this feature, after the prompt text is displayed, the advantageous state name can be displayed for a longer period of time than the time the prompt action is not performed, thereby celebrating being controlled into an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of form 30-3 is the gaming machine described in form 30-1 or 30-2,
The time from when all the characters constituting the advantageous state name display (title characters for the jackpot start animation) are displayed until at least a portion of the characters disappear is longer than the time the prompt character display (small operation prompt character) is displayed.
This feature allows for a longer viewing time of the advantageous state name display, which conveys a sense of celebration, than the viewing time of the promotional text display, which is intended to prompt the player to take action, thereby providing the player with a sense of satisfaction.

The gaming machine of form 30-4 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 30-1 to 30-3,
It is possible to display special prompting characters (large prompting characters) that suggest a more favorable situation than the aforementioned prompting characters (small prompting characters),
The aforementioned prompt text display (operation prompt text (small)) displays prompt text (text prompting operation) without accompanying prompt introduction display (prompt introduction effect).
The aforementioned special operation prompt display (operation prompt text (large)) is displayed after the prompt introduction display (prompt introduction effect) is displayed, and prompt text (text prompting operation) is displayed.
The advantage state name display (title text for the jackpot start animation) is characterized by being displayed for a longer period of time than the special promotion text display (large operation promotion text).
This feature allows for a longer duration for displaying the advantageous state name, which signifies a blessing, compared to the duration for displaying special promotional text accompanied by promotional introduction indicators, thereby providing players with a sense of satisfaction.

[Form 31]
The gaming machine of form 31-1 is,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information, a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") is derived, thereby controlling the machine to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
Game control means (microcomputer 100 for game control),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
Multiple light-emitting means (frame LED LWL1 to LWL12, frame LED LWR2 to LWR12, logo LED LL1 to LL4, decorative LED LS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
It includes a light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is,
When a game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting prize entry point, second starting prize entry point), it is determined whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state).
The variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (First Special Drawing, Second Special Drawing) is performed.
Based on the result of the above determination, one of a plurality of variation patterns is determined from among a first variation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state.
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern specification command specifying (PA2-2, PA2-3)) is sent to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-2 and PA2-3) is sent to the performance control means.
The aforementioned performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
The aforementioned specific reach (low-base weak reach A and B effects) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled.
The display means (image display device 5) is
In the aforementioned specific reach (low-base weak reach A and B effects), it is possible to display prompt text (small prompt text) that encourages the player to take action before the title display part (operation prompt effect A),
The title display (title text) corresponding to the aforementioned specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is displayed for a longer period of time than the aforementioned prompt text display (operation prompt text (small)),
The aforementioned light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
The light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table composed of luminance data.
In the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach type),
The aforementioned introduction part is characterized by controlling the light-emitting means using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach type weak reach A introduction, weak reach type weak reach B introduction).
This feature allows for the display of promotional text before the title display section, and then displays the title display for a longer period than the promotional text, thereby drawing attention to the title display. Furthermore, in the title display section, the light-emitting means is controlled using a different luminance data table for the title display than the luminance data table for the introduction section. This allows the light-emitting means to emit light in a suitable mode corresponding to the title display, resulting in a more effective title display.

The gaming machine of form 31-2 is the gaming machine described in form 31-1,
The time from when all the characters constituting the title display (title text) are displayed until at least a portion of the characters disappears is longer than the time the prompt character display (small operation prompt character) is displayed.
This feature allows the title display to be clearly visible for a longer period than the time that prompts the player to take action, thereby drawing attention to the title display.

The gaming machine of form 31-3 is the gaming machine described in form 31-1 or 31-2,
It is possible to display special prompting characters (large prompting characters) that suggest a more favorable situation than the aforementioned prompting characters (small prompting characters),
The aforementioned prompt text display (operation prompt text (small)) displays prompt text (text prompting operation) without accompanying prompt introduction display (prompt introduction effect).
The aforementioned special operation prompt display (operation prompt text (large)) is displayed after the prompt introduction display (prompt introduction effect) is displayed, and prompt text (text prompting operation) is displayed.
The aforementioned title display (title text) is characterized by being displayed for a longer period than the aforementioned special prompt text display (operation prompt text (large)) is displayed.
This feature allows the title display to be shown for a longer period than the special promotional text display accompanied by the promotional introduction, thereby drawing attention to the title display.

[Form 32]
The gaming machine of form 32-1 is,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information, a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") is derived, thereby controlling the machine to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
Game control means (microcomputer 100 for game control),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
Multiple light-emitting means (frame LED LWL1 to LWL12, frame LED LWR2 to LWR12, logo LED LL1 to LL4, decorative LED LS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
It includes a light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is,
When a game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting prize entry point, second starting prize entry point), it is determined whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state).
The variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (First Special Drawing, Second Special Drawing) is performed.
Based on the result of the above determination, one of a plurality of variation patterns is determined from among a first variation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state.
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern specification command specifying (PA2-2, PA2-3)) is sent to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-2 and PA2-3) is sent to the performance control means.
The aforementioned performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
The aforementioned specific reach (low-base weak reach A and B effects) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled.
The display means (image display device 5) is
In the aforementioned specific reach (low-base weak reach A and B effects), it is possible to display prompt text (small prompt text) that encourages the player to take action before the title display part (operation prompt effect A),
After it is announced that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state by the aforementioned specific reach (low-base weak reach A and B effects), it is possible to display the name of the advantageous state corresponding to the controlled advantageous state (the title text of the jackpot start effect),
The aforementioned advantageous state name display (title text of the jackpot start animation) is displayed for a longer period of time than the title display (title text) corresponding to the aforementioned specific reach (low base weak reach A and B animations),
The title display (title text) corresponding to the aforementioned specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is displayed for a longer period of time than the aforementioned prompt text display (operation prompt text (small)),
The aforementioned light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
The light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table composed of luminance data.
In the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach type),
The aforementioned introduction part is characterized by controlling the light-emitting means using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach type weak reach A introduction, weak reach type weak reach B introduction).
According to this feature, the situation in which the title is displayed during a specific reach is one in which it is still unknown whether or not the game will be controlled to a favorable state, whereas the situation in which the name of the favorable state is displayed is one in which it has already been announced that the game will be controlled to a favorable state. By displaying the name of the favorable state for a longer period of time than the title, it is possible to celebrate being controlled to a favorable state. In addition, by displaying promotional text before the title display part and displaying the title that follows for a longer period of time than the promotional text, attention can be drawn to the title display. Furthermore, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a different luminance data table for title display than the luminance data table for the introduction part, so the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title can be displayed effectively.

[Form 33]
The gaming machine of form 33-1 is,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information, a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") is derived, thereby controlling the machine to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
Game control means (microcomputer 100 for game control),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120),
It comprises a display means (image display device 5),
The aforementioned game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is,
When a game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting prize entry point, second starting prize entry point), it is determined whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state).
The variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (First Special Drawing, Second Special Drawing) is performed.
Based on the result of the above determination, one of the following multiple fluctuation patterns is determined: a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state; a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state; a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to 10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state; a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to 12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state; a fifth fluctuation pattern (PB1-14) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state; a sixth fluctuation pattern (PA2-16) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state; a seventh fluctuation pattern (PB1-15 to 17) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state; and an eighth fluctuation pattern (PA2-17 to 19) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state.
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-JA and PB1-JB) is sent to the performance control means.
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-2 and PA2-3) is sent to the performance control means.
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-2 to 10) is sent to the performance control means.
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-4 to PA2-12) is sent to the performance control means.
When the fifth variation pattern is determined, a fifth command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-14) is sent to the performance control means.
When the sixth variation pattern is determined, a sixth command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-16) is sent to the performance control means.
When the seventh variation pattern is determined, a seventh command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-15 to 17) is sent to the performance control means.
When the eighth variation pattern is determined, the eighth command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-17 to PA2-19) is sent to the performance control means.
The aforementioned performance control means is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance),
When the fifth command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the third reach (high base reach A performance),
When the sixth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (high base reach A performance) will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the seventh command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the fourth reach (high base reach B to D performance).
When the eighth command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the fourth reach (high base reach B to D performance),
The first reach (low-base weak reach A and B effects) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
The second reach (low-base strong reach A to C performance) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
The third reach (high base reach A performance) comprises a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the third reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
The fourth reach (high base reach B to D performance) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the fourth reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
The first reach (low-base weak reach A and B effects) and the second reach (low-base strong reach A to C effects) are reaches that are performed in the normal state.
The third reach (high-base reach A performance) and the fourth reach (high-base reach B to D performances) are reaches that are performed in a special state (probability variation state) which is more advantageous than the normal state.
The second reach (low-base strong reach A to C effects) has a higher probability of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low-base weak reach A, B effects),
The fourth reach (high base reach B to D effects) has a higher probability of being controlled to the advantageous state than the third reach (high base reach A effect),
The third reach (high base reach A performance) has a higher probability of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base weak reach A and B performances),
The aforementioned display means is
In the title display part of the second reach (low-base strong reach A to C performance), it is possible to display an expectation level indication consisting of multiple objects (star-shaped objects),
In the title display part of the third reach (high base reach A performance), the expected value indication display can be displayed.
In the title display part of the fourth reach (high base reach A performance), the expected value indication display can be displayed.
The feature is that the expected probability indication display is not shown in the title display part of the first reach (low base weak reach A and B performance).
According to this feature, the first reach in the normal state has a lower probability of success than the second reach in the normal state. Therefore, a probability indicator is displayed for the second reach, but not for the first reach. This prevents players from having excessive expectations that the first reach will control them into a favorable state. On the other hand, the third reach in the special state, which is more favorable than the normal state, has a lower probability of success than the fourth reach in the special state, but a higher probability of success than the first reach in the normal state. Therefore, by displaying a probability indicator for both the third and fourth reaches, players can expect to be controlled into a favorable state in both cases.

[Form 34]
The gaming machine of form 34-1 is,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information, a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") is derived, thereby controlling the machine to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
Game control means (microcomputer 100 for game control),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
Multiple light-emitting means (frame LED LWL1 to LWL12, frame LED LWR2 to LWR12, logo LED LL1 to LL4, decorative LED LS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
It includes a light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is,
When a game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting prize entry point, second starting prize entry point), it is determined whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state).
The variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (First Special Drawing, Second Special Drawing) is performed.
Based on the result of the above determination, one of the following multiple variation patterns is determined: a first variation pattern (a big win variation pattern in the normal state) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state; a second variation pattern (a losing variation pattern in the normal state) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state; a third variation pattern (a big win variation pattern in the probability variation state) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state; and a fourth variation pattern (a losing variation pattern in the probability variation state) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state.
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern specification command that specifies the jackpot variation pattern in the normal state) is sent to the performance control means.
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern specification command that specifies a losing variation pattern in the normal state) is sent to the performance control means.
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern specification command that specifies the big win variation pattern in the probability variation state) is sent to the performance control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern specification command that specifies a losing variation pattern in the probability variation state) is sent to the performance control means,
The aforementioned performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the first reach (super reach performance in the normal state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the first reach (super reach performance in the normal state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will be controlled to the advantageous state in the second reach (super reach performance in the probability variation state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the second reach (super reach performance in the probability variation state),
The first reach (super reach performance in the normal state) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
The second reach (super reach performance in the probability variation state) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
The aforementioned first reach (super reach animation in normal state) is a reach that is performed in normal state,
The second reach (super reach performance in the probability variation state) is a reach that is performed in a special state (probability variation state) which is more advantageous than the normal state,
The title display part in the second reach (super reach performance in the probability variation state) is shorter than the title display part in the first reach (super reach performance in the normal state),
The aforementioned light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
The light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table composed of luminance data.
In the title display part of the first reach (super reach performance in the normal state), the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display part of the first reach (common title for weak reach series, common title for strong reach series),
In the title display part of the second reach (super reach performance in the probability variation state), the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display part of the second reach (common title for high base reach system),
In the introductory part of the first reach (super reach performance in normal state), the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part of the first reach (weak reach type weak reach A introduction, weak reach type weak reach B introduction, strong reach type strong reach A introduction, strong reach type strong reach B introduction, strong reach type strong reach C introduction),
In the introduction part of the second reach (super reach performance in the probability variation state), the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part of the second reach (introduction of high-base reach type reach A, introduction of high-base reach type reach B, introduction of high-base reach type reach C, introduction of high-base reach type reach D).
This feature allows the title display part of the second reach in the special state to be shorter than the title display part of the first reach in the normal state, enabling a smoother progression through the special state. Furthermore, in the title display parts of the first and second reaches, the light-emitting means are controlled using different luminance data tables for the title display of the first and second reaches, respectively, which are different from the luminance data tables used for the introductory parts of the first and second reaches. This allows the light-emitting means to emit light in a suitable mode corresponding to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed effectively.

The gaming machine of form 34-2 is the gaming machine described in form 34-1,
The characteristic feature is that the frequency of the second reach (super reach performance in the probability variation state) occurring in the special state (probability variation state) is higher than the frequency of the first reach (super reach performance in the normal state) occurring in the normal state.
This feature allows you to progress through the special state smoothly, even if the frequency of reaching the second reach increases during the special state.

[Form 35]
The gaming machine of form 35-1 is,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information, a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") is derived, thereby controlling the machine to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
Game control means (microcomputer 100 for game control),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120),
It comprises a display means (image display device 5),
The aforementioned game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is,
When a game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting prize entry point, second starting prize entry point), it is determined whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state described above.
The variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (First Special Drawing, Second Special Drawing) is performed.
Based on the result of the above determination, one of the following multiple fluctuation patterns is determined from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns, including a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to 10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to 12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-11 to 13) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-13 to 15) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state.
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-2 to 10) is sent to the performance control means.
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-4 to PA2-12) is sent to the performance control means.
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-11 to 13) is sent to the performance control means.
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-13 to PA2-15) is sent to the performance control means.
It is possible to control the game into multiple states, including a normal state, a state in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the normal state, and a special state after reaching a specific number of executions (Shortened Time State B (Play Time)) which is controlled based on the fact that a variable display in which the result does not become a specific display result (the special display result of "Big Win") has been executed a specific number of times (900 times).
The aforementioned performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the first reach (low base strong reach A to C performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the first reach (low base strong reach A to C performance),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base strongest reach performance),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base strongest reach performance),
The first reach (low-base strong reach A to C performance) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
The aforementioned second reach (low base strongest reach performance) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
The aforementioned second reach (low base strongest reach production) has a higher probability of resulting in the aforementioned advantageous state than the aforementioned first reach (low base strong reach productions A to C),
The display means (image display device 5) is
In the title display part of the first reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), the title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach is displayed in the first display operation mode (a display mode in which the title characters are displayed while moving from the left side of the display area to the center),
In the title display part of the second reach (low base strongest reach performance), the title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach is displayed in a second display operation mode that is different from the first display operation mode (a display mode in which the title characters are displayed in a reduced size instead of enlarged),
When the system is controlled to enter a special state (Shortened Time State B (Playtime)) after reaching the specified number of times, a display indicating that the system is controlled to enter a special state after reaching the specified number of times (the title text of the Playtime start animation) is displayed in the second display operation mode (a display mode in which the title text is displayed in a reduced size from an enlarged display).
According to this feature, when the game is controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of rounds, the display indicating that the game is controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of rounds is displayed using the same second display operation mode as the title display for the second reach, which has a relatively high expectation level. This allows the player to recognize that the special state after reaching a specific number of rounds is highly advantageous.

The gaming machine of form 35-2 is the gaming machine described in form 35-1,
The feature is that when the display indicating that the game will be controlled to a special state (Shortened Time State B (Playtime)) after reaching the specified number of times (the title text of the Playtime start animation) is terminated, it is terminated in the same manner as when the title display (title text) of the title display part in the second reach (low base strongest reach animation) is terminated (the display manner in which the title text is erased while being enlarged).
According to this feature, when ending the display indicating that the game will be controlled to a special state after reaching a certain number of rounds, the display operation will be the same as when ending the title display for the second reach, which has a relatively high expectation level. Therefore, the special state after reaching a certain number of rounds can be perceived as having a high degree of advantage.

[Form 36]
The gaming machine of form 36-1 is,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information, a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") is derived, thereby controlling the machine to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
Game control means (microcomputer 100 for game control),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
Multiple light-emitting means (frame LED LWL1 to LWL12, frame LED LWR2 to LWR12, logo LED LL1 to LL4, decorative LED LS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
It includes a light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is,
When a game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting prize entry point, second starting prize entry point), it is determined whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state).
The variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (First Special Drawing, Second Special Drawing) is performed.
Based on the result of the above determination, one of a plurality of variation patterns is determined from among a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state.
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern specification command that specifies a winning variation pattern) is sent to the performance control means.
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern specification command specifying a losing variation pattern) is sent to the performance control means.
It is possible to control the game into multiple states, including a normal state, a state in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the normal state, and a special state after reaching a specific number of executions (Shortened Time State B (Play Time)) which is controlled based on the fact that a variable display in which the result does not become a specific display result (the special display result of "Big Win") has been executed a specific number of times (900 times).
The aforementioned performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during a specific reach (super reach animation).
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the specific reach (super reach performance),
The aforementioned specific reach (super reach effect) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled.
The aforementioned display means (image display device 5)
When the system is controlled to a special state (Shortened Time State B (Playtime)) after reaching the specified number of times, it is possible to display an indication that the system is controlled to a special state after reaching the specified number of times (the title text of the Playtime start animation).
The size of the characters that make up the display indicating that the game will be controlled to a special state after reaching the specified number of times (title text of the playtime start animation) is larger than the size of the characters that make up the title display (title text) corresponding to the specified reach (super reach animation).
The aforementioned light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
The light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table composed of luminance data.
In the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach type, common title for strong reach type, common title for high base reach type).
The aforementioned introduction part is characterized by controlling the light-emitting means using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach type weak reach A introduction, weak reach type weak reach B introduction, strong reach type strong reach A introduction, strong reach type strong reach B introduction, strong reach type strong reach C introduction, high base reach type reach A introduction, high base reach type reach B introduction, high base reach type reach C introduction, high base reach type reach D introduction).
According to this feature, the situation in which a title is displayed during a specific reach is one in which it is still unknown whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, whereas the display indicating that the game will be controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of rounds is one in which the game will be controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of rounds. By making the size of the characters that make up the display indicating that the game will be controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of rounds larger than the size of the characters that make up the title display corresponding to the specific reach, it is possible to celebrate the fact that the game will be controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of rounds. Furthermore, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a different luminance data table for title display than the luminance data table for the introduction part, so the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title can be displayed effectively.

The gaming machine of form 36-2 is the gaming machine described in form 36-1,
The aforementioned specific reach (super reach effect) includes multiple types of specific reaches with different title displays (title text),
The characters that make up the display indicating that the game will be controlled to a special state after reaching the aforementioned specific number of times (the title text of the playtime start animation) are larger than the characters that make up the title display (title text) corresponding to any type of specific reach (super reach animation).
According to this feature, the characters that make up the display indicating that the game will be controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of plays will be displayed larger than the characters that make up the title display corresponding to any type of specific reach, thus celebrating the fact that the game will be controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of plays.

The gaming machine of form 36-3 is the gaming machine described in form 36-2,
The smallest character in the string of characters that constitutes the display indicating that the game will be controlled to a special state after reaching the specified number of times (the title character of the playtime start animation) is larger than the largest character in the string of characters that constitutes the title display (title character) corresponding to any type of specific reach (super reach animation).
According to this feature, the smallest character in the string that makes up the display indicating that the game will be controlled to a special state after reaching a certain number of plays will be displayed larger than the largest character in the string that makes up the title display corresponding to any type of specific reach. Therefore, no matter which character you focus on, the display indicating that the game will be controlled to a special state after reaching a certain number of plays will be displayed larger than the title display corresponding to the specific reach, thus allowing you to celebrate reaching a special state more effectively.

[Form 37]
The gaming machine of form 37-1 is,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information, a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") is derived, thereby controlling the machine to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
Game control means (microcomputer 100 for game control),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
Multiple light-emitting means (frame LED LWL1 to LWL12, frame LED LWR2 to LWR12, logo LED LL1 to LL4, decorative LED LS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
It includes a light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is,
When a game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting prize entry point, second starting prize entry point), it is determined whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state).
The variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (First Special Drawing, Second Special Drawing) is performed.
Based on the result of the above determination, one of a plurality of variation patterns is determined from among a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state.
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern specification command that specifies a winning variation pattern) is sent to the performance control means.
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern specification command specifying a losing variation pattern) is sent to the performance control means.
It is possible to control the game into multiple states, including a normal state, a state in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the normal state, and a special state after reaching a specific number of executions (Shortened Time State B (Play Time)) which is controlled based on the fact that a variable display in which the result does not become a specific display result (the special display result of "Big Win") has been executed a specific number of times (900 times).
The aforementioned performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during a specific reach (super reach animation).
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the specific reach (super reach performance),
The aforementioned specific reach (super reach effect) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled.
The display means (image display device 5) is
When the system is controlled to a special state (Shortened Time State B (Playtime)) after reaching the specified number of times, it is possible to display an indication that the system is controlled to a special state after reaching the specified number of times (the title text of the Playtime start animation).
The display time of the indication that the game will be controlled to a special state after reaching the specified number of times (title text of the playtime start animation) is longer than the display time of the title display (title text) corresponding to the specified reach (super reach animation).
The aforementioned light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
The light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table composed of luminance data.
In the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach type, common title for strong reach type, common title for high base reach type).
The aforementioned introduction part is characterized by controlling the light-emitting means using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach type weak reach A introduction, weak reach type weak reach B introduction, strong reach type strong reach A introduction, strong reach type strong reach B introduction, strong reach type strong reach C introduction, high base reach type reach A introduction, high base reach type reach B introduction, high base reach type reach C introduction, high base reach type reach D introduction).
According to this feature, the situation in which a title is displayed during a specific reach is one in which it is still unknown whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, whereas the display indicating that the game will be controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of rounds indicates that the game will be controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of rounds. By displaying the display indicating that the game will be controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of rounds for a longer period than the title display corresponding to the specific reach, it is possible to celebrate the fact that the game will be controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of rounds. Furthermore, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a different luminance data table for title display than the luminance data table for the introduction part, so the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting manner according to the title display, and as a result, the title can be displayed effectively.

The gaming machine of form 37-2 is the gaming machine described in form 37-1,
The time from when all the characters constituting the display indicating that the game will be controlled to a special state after reaching the specified number of times (title characters for the playtime start animation) are displayed until at least a portion of those characters disappear is longer than the time from when a portion of the characters constituting the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specified reach (super reach animation) is displayed until all of those characters disappear.
This feature allows for a longer duration for players to see the display indicating that a special state will be activated after reaching a certain number of celebratory events, compared to the duration for which the title display, intended to encourage the possibility of being activated to a favorable state, is shown.

[Form 38]
The gaming machine of form 38-1 is,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information, a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") is derived, thereby controlling the machine to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
Game control means (microcomputer 100 for game control),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
Multiple light-emitting means (frame LED LWL1 to LWL12, frame LED LWR2 to LWR12, logo LED LL1 to LL4, decorative LED LS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
It includes a light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is,
When a game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting prize entry point, second starting prize entry point), it is determined whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state).
The variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (First Special Drawing, Second Special Drawing) is performed.
Based on the result of the above determination, one of a plurality of variation patterns is determined from among a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state.
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern specification command that specifies a winning variation pattern) is sent to the performance control means.
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern specification command specifying a losing variation pattern) is sent to the performance control means.
It is possible to control the game into multiple states, including a normal state, a state in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the normal state, and a special state after reaching a specific number of executions (Shortened Time State B (Play Time)) which is controlled based on the fact that a variable display in which the result does not become a specific display result (the special display result of "Big Win") has been executed a specific number of times (900 times).
The aforementioned performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during a specific reach (super reach animation).
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the specific reach (super reach performance),
The aforementioned specific reach (super reach effect) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled.
The display means (image display device 5) is
In the normal state, it is possible to display an indication of the remaining number of plays until the special state is reached after the specified number of plays has been reached (the number of plays remaining until playtime).
The size of the characters that make up the title display (title text) corresponding to the aforementioned specific reach (super reach effect) is larger than the size of the characters that make up the display indicating the remaining number of turns until the special state after reaching the aforementioned specific number of turns (remaining number of turns until playtime text).
The aforementioned light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
The light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table composed of luminance data.
In the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach type, common title for strong reach type, common title for high base reach type).
The aforementioned introduction part is characterized by controlling the light-emitting means using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach type weak reach A introduction, weak reach type weak reach B introduction, strong reach type strong reach A introduction, strong reach type strong reach B introduction, strong reach type strong reach C introduction, high base reach type reach A introduction, high base reach type reach B introduction, high base reach type reach C introduction, high base reach type reach D introduction).
This feature allows the title display corresponding to a specific reach to be made larger than the characters that make up the display showing the remaining number of spins until a special state is reached after a specific number of spins has been achieved, thereby drawing attention to the title display corresponding to the specific reach. Furthermore, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a different luminance data table for the title display than the luminance data table for the introduction part, so the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed effectively.

The gaming machine of form 38-2 is the gaming machine described in form 38-1,
The aforementioned specific reach (super reach performance) includes a first reach (low-base weak reach A and B performances) and a second reach (low-base strong reach A to C performances) which has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach.
The display showing the remaining number of plays until the special state is reached after the specified number of plays (the number of plays remaining until playtime) is displayed during the execution of the first reach (low-base weak reach A and B effects) and is not displayed during the execution of the second reach (low-base strong reach A to C effects).
This feature allows players to focus on the remaining number of spins until a special state is reached after reaching a specific number of spins in the first reach, which has a low expectation of success. On the other hand, in the second reach, which has a high expectation of success, the remaining number of spins until a special state is reached after reaching a specific number of spins is not displayed, allowing players to focus on the animation and mitigating the player's disappointment if the number of spins until a special state is reached is small.

The gaming machine of form 38-3 is the gaming machine described in form 38-2,
When it is announced that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state in the second reach (low-base strong reach A to C performance), the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) without displaying again the remaining number of plays until the special state after reaching the specified number of plays.
The system is characterized in that, if it is not reported that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state during the second reach (low-base strong reach A to C performance), the system will display again the number of remaining turns until the special state is reached after the specific number of turns (number of turns remaining until playtime) after the end of the second reach (low-base strong reach A to C performance).
This feature allows for a reduction in the player's disappointment if the number of plays remaining until the special state is low after reaching a specific number of plays, by not displaying the remaining plays until the special state is low after reaching a specific number of plays when the player is notified that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state during the second reach. Additionally, if the player is notified that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state during the second reach, the number of plays remaining until the special state is low after reaching a specific number of plays will be displayed again after the second reach ends, allowing for a quicker sense of relief if the number of plays remaining until the special state is low after reaching a specific number of plays.

[Form 39]
The gaming machine of form 39-1 is,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information, a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") is derived, thereby controlling the machine to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
Game control means (microcomputer 100 for game control),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
Multiple light-emitting means (frame LED LWL1 to LWL12, frame LED LWR2 to LWR12, logo LED LL1 to LL4, decorative LED LS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
It includes a light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is,
When a game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting prize entry point, second starting prize entry point), it is determined whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state).
The variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (First Special Drawing, Second Special Drawing) is performed.
Based on the result of the above determination, one of a plurality of variation patterns is determined from among a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state.
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern specification command that specifies a winning variation pattern) is sent to the performance control means.
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern specification command specifying a losing variation pattern) is sent to the performance control means.
It is possible to control the game into multiple states, including a normal state, a state in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the normal state, and a special state after reaching a specific number of executions (Shortened Time State B (Play Time)) which is controlled based on the fact that a variable display in which the result does not become a specific display result (the special display result of "Big Win") has been executed a specific number of times (900 times).
The aforementioned performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during a specific reach (super reach animation).
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the specific reach (super reach performance),
The aforementioned specific reach (super reach effect) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled.
The display means (image display device 5) is
At the timings related to the aforementioned specific reach (super reach effect) (operation prompt effect A to D), prompt text (small operation prompt text) can be displayed to encourage the player to take action.
In the normal state, it is possible to display an indication of the remaining number of plays until the special state is reached after the specified number of plays has been reached (the number of plays remaining until playtime).
The size of the characters constituting the aforementioned prompt character display (operation prompt character (small)) is larger than the size of the characters constituting the display indicating the remaining number of turns until the special state after reaching the specified number of turns (remaining number of turns until playtime character).
The aforementioned light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
The light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table composed of luminance data.
In the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach series, common title for strong reach series).
The aforementioned introduction part is characterized by controlling the light-emitting means using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach type weak reach A introduction, weak reach type weak reach B introduction, strong reach type strong reach A introduction, strong reach type strong reach B introduction, strong reach type strong reach C introduction).
This feature allows the size of the characters that make up the prompt text display, which encourages the player to take action at timings related to a specific reach, to be larger than the size of the characters that make up the display showing the remaining number of turns until a special state is reached after a specific number of turns. This draws attention to the prompt text display and effectively encourages the player to take action. Furthermore, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a different luminance data table for title display than the luminance data table for the introduction part. This allows the light-emitting means to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, resulting in a favorable title display.

The gaming machine of form 39-2 is the gaming machine described in form 39-1,
If the aforementioned promotion text display (small operation promotion text) is displayed before the title display part (operation promotion effect A) in the aforementioned specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effect), then a display indicating the remaining number of turns until the special state after reaching the aforementioned specific number of turns (remaining number of turns until playtime text) is displayed at the same time.
In the introductory part (operation-promoting effect D) of the aforementioned specific reach (low-base strong reach A to C effects), when the promotion text display (operation-promoting text (small)) is displayed, the display indicating the remaining number of turns until the special state after reaching the specified number of turns (remaining number of turns until playtime text) is not displayed.
According to this feature, before developing into a specific reach, the remaining number of turns until a special state is reached after reaching a specific number of turns is displayed simultaneously with the promotional text, making the player aware of the remaining number of turns until a special state is reached after reaching a specific number of turns. In the operation promotion display in the introductory part, the remaining number of turns until a special state is reached after reaching a specific number of turns is not displayed, thus indicating whether or not the player is being controlled to an advantageous state.

[Form 40]
The gaming machine of form 40-1 is,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information, a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") is derived, thereby controlling the machine to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
Game control means (microcomputer 100 for game control),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
Multiple light-emitting means (frame LED LWL1 to LWL12, frame LED LWR2 to LWR12, logo LED LL1 to LL4, decorative LED LS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
It includes a light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is,
When a game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting prize entry point, second starting prize entry point), it is determined whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state).
The variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (First Special Drawing, Second Special Drawing) is performed.
Based on the result of the above determination, one of a plurality of variation patterns is determined from among a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state.
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern specification command that specifies a winning variation pattern) is sent to the performance control means.
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern specification command specifying a losing variation pattern) is sent to the performance control means.
It is possible to control the game into multiple states, including a normal state, a state in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the normal state, and a special state after reaching a specific number of executions (Shortened Time State B (Play Time)) which is controlled based on the fact that a variable display in which the result does not become a specific display result (the special display result of "Big Win") has been executed a specific number of times (900 times).
The aforementioned performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during a specific reach (super reach animation).
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the specific reach (super reach performance),
The aforementioned specific reach (super reach effect) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled.
The display means (image display device 5) is
After notification that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state by the aforementioned specific reach (super reach animation), it is possible to display the name of the advantageous state corresponding to the controlled advantageous state (title text of the jackpot start animation),
In the normal state, it is possible to display an indication of the remaining number of plays until the special state is reached after the specified number of plays has been reached (the number of plays remaining until playtime).
Before displaying the name of the advantageous state (the title text of the jackpot start animation), the display showing the remaining number of turns until the special state after reaching the specified number of turns (the text indicating the remaining number of turns until playtime) is terminated.
The size of the characters that make up the advantageous state name display (title text of the jackpot start animation) is larger than the size of the characters that make up the display indicating the remaining number of turns until the special state after reaching a specific number of turns (remaining number of turns until playtime).
The aforementioned light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
The light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table composed of luminance data.
In the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach series, common title for strong reach series).
The aforementioned introduction part is characterized by controlling the light-emitting means using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach type weak reach A introduction, weak reach type weak reach B introduction, strong reach type strong reach A introduction, strong reach type strong reach B introduction, strong reach type strong reach C introduction).
According to this feature, the situation in which the advantageous state name is displayed is after the player has already been notified that they will be controlled to an advantageous state. Therefore, there is no need to display the remaining number of turns until the special state after reaching a specific number of turns. Thus, before displaying the advantageous state name, the display showing the remaining number of turns until the special state after reaching a specific number of turns is terminated, and the size of the characters that make up the advantageous state name display is made larger than the size of the characters that make up the display showing the remaining number of turns until the special state after reaching a specific number of turns, thereby celebrating being controlled to an advantageous state. Furthermore, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a different luminance data table for title display than the luminance data table for the introduction part. As a result, the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, and the title can be displayed effectively.

The gaming machine of form 40-2 is the gaming machine described in form 40-1,
Regardless of the number of remaining spins until the special state (Shortened Time State B (Play Time)) after reaching the specified number of spins, the size of the characters that make up the display indicating the number of remaining spins until the special state (the characters indicating the number of spins remaining until Play Time) is the same.
The size of the characters that make up the advantageous state name display (title characters for the jackpot start animation) is larger than the size of the characters that make up the display indicating the remaining number of spins until the special state is reached after reaching a specific number of spins (characters indicating the remaining number of spins until playtime).
According to this feature, regardless of the number of remaining turns until a special state is reached after a specific number of turns, the size of the characters that make up the advantageous state name display can be made larger than the size of the characters that make up the display indicating the number of remaining turns until a special state is reached after a specific number of turns has been reached, thereby celebrating being controlled to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of form 40-3 is the gaming machine described in form 40-1 or 40-2,
The aforementioned game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is characterized by determining a special variation pattern (time-saving state B start variation pattern) when a game medium (game ball) first enters the starting area (first starting prize entry, second starting prize entry) in a special state (time-saving state B (play time)) after a specific number of times has been reached.
According to this feature, when the game medium first enters the starting area in a special state after reaching a certain number of times, a special effect corresponding to a specific variation pattern can be executed.

[Form 41]
The gaming machine of form 41-1 is,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information, a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") is derived, thereby controlling the machine to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
Game control means (microcomputer 100 for game control),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
Multiple light-emitting means (frame LED LWL1 to LWL12, frame LED LWR2 to LWR12, logo LED LL1 to LL4, decorative LED LS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
It includes a light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is,
When a game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting prize entry point, second starting prize entry point), it is determined whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state).
The variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (First Special Drawing, Second Special Drawing) is performed.
Based on the result of the above determination, one of a plurality of variation patterns is determined from among a first variation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state.
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern specification command specifying (PA2-2, PA2-3)) is sent to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-2 and PA2-3) is sent to the performance control means.
The aforementioned performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
The aforementioned specific reach (low-base weak reach A and B effects) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled.
The display means (image display device 5) is
It is possible to change the title display (title text) corresponding to the aforementioned specific reach (low base weak reach A and B effects) from the first form (white form) to the second form (red or gold form),
In the title display part that displays a title display (title text) corresponding to the specified reach (low-base weak reach A, B performance), when the title display (title text) corresponding to the specified reach (low-base weak reach A, B performance) is changed from the first form (white form) to the second form (red or gold form), the time during which the title display (title text) corresponding to the specified reach (low-base weak reach A, B performance) is displayed in the second form (red or gold form) is longer than the time during which the title display (title text) corresponding to the specified reach (low-base weak reach A, B performance) is displayed in the first form (white form).
The aforementioned light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
The light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table composed of luminance data.
In the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach type),
The aforementioned introduction part is characterized by controlling the light-emitting means using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach type weak reach A introduction, weak reach type weak reach B introduction).
According to this feature, when changing the title display corresponding to a specific reach from a first mode to a second mode in the title display part that displays the title display corresponding to the specific reach, the time during which the title display corresponding to the specific reach is displayed in the second mode is made longer than the time during which the title display corresponding to the specific reach is displayed in the first mode, thereby ensuring that the change to the second mode is reliably recognized. Furthermore, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for title display that is different from the luminance data table for the introduction part, so the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode corresponding to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed effectively.

The gaming machine of form 41-2 is the gaming machine described in form 41-1,
In the title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the aforementioned specific reach (low-base weak reach A, B performance), there are cases in which the title display (title text) corresponding to the aforementioned specific reach (low-base weak reach A, B performance) is changed from the first form (white form) to the second form (red or gold form), and cases in which it remains unchanged in the first form (white form).
When changing the title display (title text) corresponding to the aforementioned specific reach (low-base weak reach A, B performance) from the first form (white form) to the second form (red or gold form), the change from the first form (white form) to the second form (red or gold form) occurs at a specific timing (when time t1 has elapsed from the start of the title display period), and a specific sound effect (specific sound) is output.
If the title display (title text) corresponding to the specified reach (low-base weak reach A and B effects) remains unchanged in the first form (white form), the specified sound effect (specified sound) is output when the specified timing occurs (when time t1 has elapsed from the start of the title display period) without changing from the first form (white form).
According to this feature, a specific sound effect is output when the title display corresponding to a specific reach changes from the first form to the second form at a specific timing, and also when it does not change from the first form at a specific timing. Therefore, the output of the specific sound effect can create the expectation that it will change to the second form.

The gaming machine of form 41-3 is the gaming machine described in form 41-1 or 41-2,
The second embodiment includes multiple types of embodiments (red and gold embodiments),
When changing the title display (title text) corresponding to the aforementioned specific reach (low-base weak reach A and B effects) from the first form (white form) to the second form (red and gold form), a specific sound effect (specific sound) is output regardless of which type of the second form (red and gold form) is used.
According to this feature, when the title display corresponding to a specific reach changes from the first form to the second form at a specific timing, a specific sound effect is output regardless of which type of second form is used. Therefore, the output of the specific sound effect draws attention to which type of second form is used.

[Form 42]
The gaming machine of form 42-1 is,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information, a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") is derived, thereby controlling the machine to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
Game control means (microcomputer 100 for game control),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120),
It comprises a display means (image display device 5),
The aforementioned game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is,
When a game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting prize entry point, second starting prize entry point), it is determined whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state).
The variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (First Special Drawing, Second Special Drawing) is performed.
Based on the result of the above determination, one of a plurality of variation patterns is determined from among a first variation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state.
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern specification command specifying (PA2-2, PA2-3)) is sent to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-2 and PA2-3) is sent to the performance control means.
The aforementioned performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
The aforementioned specific reach (low-base weak reach A and B effects) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled.
The display means (image display device 5) is
It is possible to change the title display (title text) corresponding to the aforementioned specific reach (low base weak reach A and B effects) from the first form (white form) to the second form (red form),
It is possible to change the title display (title text) corresponding to the aforementioned specific reach (low-base weak reach A and B effects) from the first mode (white mode) to a third mode (gold mode) which has a higher expectation of being controlled to a more advantageous state than the second mode (red mode), and display it in this manner.
In the title display part that displays the title display (title text) corresponding to the specified reach (low-base weak reach A and B performance), in any case when changing the title display (title text) corresponding to the specified reach (low-base weak reach A and B performance) from the first form (white form) to the second form (red form) or the third form (gold form), the display is characterized in that it is changed from the first form (white form) to a common display form (a form that appears to glow) before changing to the second form (red form) or the third form (gold form).
According to this feature, in the title display part that displays the title corresponding to a specific reach, whether the title display corresponding to the specific reach is changed from the first form to the second form, or from the first form to the third form, it is changed to a common display form before changing to the second or third form. Therefore, by changing from the first form to the common display form, it is possible to maintain the expectation until the very end that it will change to the third form, which has a higher probability of success than the second form, until it changes from the common display form to the second or third form.

The gaming machine of form 42-2 is the gaming machine described in form 42-1,
The aforementioned common display mode is a mode in which the characters constituting the title display (title characters) are illuminated, and is characterized in that it changes to the second mode (red mode) or the third mode (gold mode) when the light is clear.
This feature allows the characters that make up the title display to light up, thereby creating the illusion of a change to a second or third form.

[Form 43]
The gaming machine of form 43-1 is,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information, a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") is derived, thereby controlling the machine to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
Game control means (microcomputer 100 for game control),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
Multiple light-emitting means (frame LED LWL1 to LWL12, frame LED LWR2 to LWR12, logo LED LL1 to LL4, decorative LED LS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
It includes a light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is,
When a game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting prize entry point, second starting prize entry point), it is determined whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state).
The variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (First Special Drawing, Second Special Drawing) is performed.
Based on the result of the above determination, one of the following multiple fluctuation patterns is determined: a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state.
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-JA) is sent to the performance control means.
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-2) is sent to the performance control means.
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-JB) is sent to the performance control means.
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-3) is sent to the performance control means.
The aforementioned performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the first reach (low base weak reach A performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the first reach (low base weak reach A performance),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the second reach (low base weak reach B performance),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the second reach (low base weak reach B performance).
The first reach (low base weak reach A performance) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
The second reach (low-base weak reach B performance) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
The aforementioned light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
The light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table composed of luminance data.
In the title display part of the first reach (low-base weak reach A performance) and the title display part of the second reach (low-base weak reach B performance), the light-emitting means is controlled using a common brightness data table for the title display part (weak reach common title),
In the introductory part of the first reach (low base weak reach A performance), the light-emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the introductory part of the first reach (weak reach system weak reach A introduction),
In the introduction part of the second reach (low-base weak reach B performance), the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part of the second reach (weak reach system weak reach B introduction).
According to this feature, by using a common brightness data table for the title display part for two different reach stages, it is possible to prevent increases in cost and capacity. By using a separate brightness data table for each stage for the introductory part, it is possible to appropriately build anticipation until the player is notified whether or not they are in a favorable state, resulting in a suitable title display.

[Form 44]
The gaming machine of form 44-1 is,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information, a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") is derived, thereby controlling the machine to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
Game control means (microcomputer 100 for game control),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
Multiple light-emitting means (frame LED LWL1 to LWL12, frame LED LWR2 to LWR12, logo LED LL1 to LL4, decorative LED LS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
It includes a light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is,
When a game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting prize entry point, second starting prize entry point), it is determined whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state).
The variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (First Special Drawing, Second Special Drawing) is performed.
Based on the result of the above determination, one of the following multiple fluctuation patterns is determined: a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA) which is controlled to the advantageous state; a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) which is not controlled to the advantageous state; a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-JB) which is controlled to the advantageous state; a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) which is not controlled to the advantageous state; a fifth fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to 4) which is controlled to the advantageous state; a sixth fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to 6) which is not controlled to the advantageous state; a seventh fluctuation pattern (PB1-5 to 7 / PB1-8 to 10) which is controlled to the advantageous state; and an eighth fluctuation pattern (PA2-7 to 9 / PA2-10 to 12) which is not controlled to the advantageous state.
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-JA) is sent to the performance control means.
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-2) is sent to the performance control means.
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-JB) is sent to the performance control means.
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-3) is sent to the performance control means.
When the fifth variation pattern is determined, a fifth command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-2 to PB4) is sent to the performance control means.
When the sixth variation pattern is determined, a sixth command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-4 to PA2-6) is sent to the performance control means.
When the seventh variation pattern is determined, a seventh command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-5 to 7 / PB1-8 to 10) is sent to the performance control means.
When the eighth variation pattern is determined, an eighth command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-7 to 9 / PA2-10 to 12) is sent to the performance control means.
The aforementioned performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the first reach (low base weak reach A performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the first reach (low base weak reach A performance),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the second reach (low base weak reach B performance),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the second reach (low base weak reach B performance).
When the fifth command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the third reach (low base strong reach A performance),
When the sixth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strong reach A performance) will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the seventh command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the fourth reach (low base strong reach B performance/low base strong reach C performance),
When the eighth command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (low-base strong reach B performance/low-base strong reach C performance) will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A performance) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
The second reach is comprised of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the second reach (low base weak reach B performance), and an introduction part that is announced until it is determined whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
The third reach is comprised of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the third reach (low-base strong reach A performance), and an introduction part that is announced until it is determined whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
The fourth reach is comprised of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the fourth reach (low-base strong reach B performance/low-base strong reach C performance), and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
The third reach (low-base strong reach A effect) and the fourth reach (low-base strong reach B effect/low-base strong reach C effect) have a higher probability of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low-base weak reach A effect) and the second reach (low-base weak reach B effect),
The aforementioned light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
The light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table composed of luminance data.
In the title display part of the first reach (low-base weak reach A performance) and the title display part of the second reach (low-base weak reach B performance), the light-emitting means is controlled using a common brightness data table for the first title display part (weak reach common title),
In the title display part of the third reach (low-base strong reach A performance) and the title display part of the fourth reach (low-base strong reach B performance/low-base strong reach C performance), the light-emitting means is controlled using a common brightness data table for the second title display part (strong reach common title),
In the introductory part of the first reach (low base weak reach A performance), the light-emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the introductory part of the first reach (weak reach system weak reach A introduction),
In the introductory part of the second reach (low base weak reach B performance), the light-emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the introductory part of the second reach (weak reach system weak reach B introduction),
In the introductory part of the third reach (low base strong reach A performance), the light-emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the introductory part of the third reach (strong reach system strong reach A introduction),
In the introduction part of the fourth reach (low-base strong reach B production/low-base strong reach C production), the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part of the fourth reach (strong reach system strong reach B introduction/strong reach system strong reach C introduction).
According to this feature, by using the same brightness data table for the title display part for both the high-probability 2-reach and the low-probability 2-reach, it is possible to prevent increases in cost and capacity. By using separate brightness data tables for the introductory part, it is possible to appropriately build anticipation until the player is notified whether or not they are in a favorable state, resulting in a suitable title display.

[Form 45]
The gaming machine of form 45-1 is,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information, a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") is derived, thereby controlling the machine to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
Game control means (microcomputer 100 for game control),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
Multiple light-emitting means (frame LED LWL1 to LWL12, frame LED LWR2 to LWR12, logo LED LL1 to LL4, decorative LED LS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
It includes a light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is,
When a game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting prize entry point, second starting prize entry point), it is determined whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state).
The variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (First Special Drawing, Second Special Drawing) is performed.
Based on the result of the above determination, a first variation pattern (PB1-JA) is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second variation pattern (PA2-2) is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a third variation pattern (PB1-JB) is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a fourth variation pattern (PA2-3) is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a fifth variation pattern (PB1-2 to PB4) is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a sixth variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. A variation pattern is determined from among a plurality of variation patterns, including dynamic patterns (PA2-4 to 6), seventh variation patterns (PB1-5 to 7/PB1-8 to 10) which are variation patterns controlled to the advantageous state, eighth variation patterns (PA2-7 to 9/PA2-10 to 12) which are variation patterns not controlled to the advantageous state, ninth variation patterns (PB1-11 to 13) which are variation patterns controlled to the advantageous state, and tenth variation patterns (PA2-13 to 15) which are variation patterns not controlled to the advantageous state.
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-JA) is sent to the performance control means.
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-2) is sent to the performance control means.
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-JB) is sent to the performance control means.
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-3) is sent to the performance control means.
When the fifth variation pattern is determined, a fifth command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-2 to PB4) is sent to the performance control means.
When the sixth variation pattern is determined, a sixth command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-4 to PA2-6) is sent to the performance control means.
When the seventh variation pattern is determined, a seventh command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-5 to 7 / PB1-8 to 10) is sent to the performance control means.
When the eighth variation pattern is determined, an eighth command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-7 to 9 / PA2-10 to 12) is sent to the performance control means.
When the ninth variation pattern is determined, a ninth command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PB1-11 to 13) is sent to the performance control means.
When the tenth variation pattern is determined, the tenth command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-13 to 15) is sent to the performance control means.
The aforementioned performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the first reach (low base weak reach A performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the first reach (low base weak reach A performance),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the second reach (low base weak reach B performance),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) during the second reach (low base weak reach B performance).
When the fifth command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the third reach (low base strong reach A performance),
When the sixth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strong reach A performance) will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the seventh command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the fourth reach (low base strong reach B performance/low base strong reach C performance),
When the eighth command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (low-base strong reach B performance/low-base strong reach C performance) will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the ninth command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the fifth reach (low base strongest reach performance),
When the 10th command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the 5th reach (low base strongest reach performance),
The first reach (low base weak reach A performance) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
The second reach is comprised of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the second reach (low base weak reach B performance), and an introduction part that is announced until it is determined whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
The third reach is comprised of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the third reach (low-base strong reach A performance), and an introduction part that is announced until it is determined whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
The fourth reach is comprised of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the fourth reach (low-base strong reach B performance/low-base strong reach C performance), and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
The fifth reach is comprised of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the fifth reach (low base strongest reach performance), and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled.
The third reach (low-base strong reach A effect) and the fourth reach (low-base strong reach B effect/low-base strong reach C effect) have a higher probability of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low-base weak reach A effect) and the second reach (low-base weak reach B effect),
The fifth reach (low base strongest reach effect) has a higher probability of being controlled to the advantageous state than any of the first reach (low base weak reach A effect), the second reach (low base weak reach B effect), the third reach (low base strong reach A effect), and the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect/low base strong reach C effect),
The aforementioned light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
The light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table composed of luminance data.
In the title display part of the first reach (low-base weak reach A performance) and the title display part of the second reach (low-base weak reach B performance), the light-emitting means is controlled using a common brightness data table for the first title display part (weak reach common title),
In the title display part of the third reach (low-base strong reach A performance) and the title display part of the fourth reach (low-base strong reach B performance/low-base strong reach C performance), the light-emitting means is controlled using a common brightness data table for the second title display part (strong reach common title),
In the title display part of the fifth reach (low base strongest reach performance), the light-emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the third title display part for the fifth reach (strongest reach series strongest reach title),
In the introductory part of the first reach (low base weak reach A performance), the light-emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the introductory part of the first reach (weak reach system weak reach A introduction),
In the introductory part of the second reach (low base weak reach B performance), the light-emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the introductory part of the second reach (weak reach system weak reach B introduction),
In the introductory part of the third reach (low base strong reach A performance), the light-emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the introductory part of the third reach (strong reach system strong reach A introduction),
In the introduction part of the fourth reach (low-base strong reach B production/low-base strong reach C production), the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part of the fourth reach (strong reach system strong reach B introduction/strong reach system strong reach C introduction),
In the introductory part of the fifth reach (low base strongest reach performance), the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part of the fifth reach (strongest reach system strongest reach introduction).
According to this feature, by using the same brightness data table for the title display part for the two high-probability and two low-probability reaches, costs and capacity increases can be prevented. By using a separate brightness data table for the introduction part, the period until whether or not a favorable state is announced can be appropriately built up. Furthermore, the reach with the highest probability of success can be enhanced by having dedicated brightness data tables for both the title display part and the introduction part, resulting in a more suitable title display.

[Form 46]
The gaming machine of form 46-1 is,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information, a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") is derived, thereby controlling the machine to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
Game control means (microcomputer 100 for game control),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
Multiple light-emitting means (frame LED LWL1 to LWL12, frame LED LWR2 to LWR12, logo LED LL1 to LL4, decorative LED LS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
It includes a light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is,
When a game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting prize entry point, second starting prize entry point), it is determined whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state).
The variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (First Special Drawing, Second Special Drawing) is performed.
Based on the result of the above determination, one of a plurality of variation patterns is determined from among a first variation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state.
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern specification command specifying (PA2-2, PA2-3)) is sent to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-2 and PA2-3) is sent to the performance control means.
The aforementioned performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
The aforementioned specific reach (low-base weak reach A and B effects) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled.
The display means (image display device 5) is
It is possible to change the title display (title text) corresponding to the aforementioned specific reach (low base weak reach A and B effects) from the first form (white) to the second form (red or gold) and display it accordingly.
The aforementioned light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
The light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table composed of luminance data.
In the title display part of the aforementioned specific reach (low-base weak reach A and B effects), if the title display (title text) is not changed to the second form (red or gold), the light-emitting means is controlled using the first brightness data table (common title for weak reach series (white)).
In the title display part of the aforementioned specific reach (low-base weak reach A and B effects), when changing the title display (title text) to a second form (red or gold), the light-emitting means is controlled using a second brightness data table (weak reach common title (red) or weak reach common title (gold)).
In the introductory part of the aforementioned specific reach (low-base weak reach A and B effects), the light-emitting means is controlled using a common brightness data table for the introductory part (weak reach series weak reach A introduction, weak reach series weak reach B introduction), regardless of whether the title display (title text) corresponding to the aforementioned specific reach has changed to the second form (red or gold).
According to this feature, whether the title display in the title display part of a specific reach is changed to the second form or not, the brightness data table corresponding to the introduction part is common, thereby preventing an increase in cost and capacity. By using a brightness data table corresponding to each part of the title display, the title display can be optimally presented in both cases, resulting in a suitable title display.

[Form 47]
The gaming machine of form 47-1 is,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and as a result of the variable display of said specific identification information, a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") is derived, thereby controlling the machine to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
Game control means (microcomputer 100 for game control),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
Multiple light-emitting means (frame LED LWL1 to LWL12, frame LED LWR2 to LWR12, logo LED LL1 to LL4, decorative LED LS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
It includes a light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The aforementioned game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is,
When a game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting prize entry point, second starting prize entry point), it is determined whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state).
The variable display of the aforementioned specific identification information (First Special Drawing, Second Special Drawing) is performed.
Based on the result of the above determination, one of a plurality of variation patterns is determined from among a first variation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state.
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern specification command specifying (PA2-2, PA2-3)) is sent to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern specification command specifying PA2-2 and PA2-3) is sent to the performance control means.
The aforementioned performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) with a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
The aforementioned specific reach (low-base weak reach A and B effects) is composed of a title display part that displays a title (title text) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled.
The title display part in the aforementioned specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) is as follows:
The first part (title start period) is from the start of displaying the title corresponding to the aforementioned specific reach until it is displayed in the fixed position,
The program consists of a second part (title display period, title end period) after the title display corresponding to the aforementioned specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is displayed in the aforementioned fixed position,
The aforementioned performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
The light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table composed of luminance data.
In the first part (title start period) of the title display part in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the light-emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the first part (weak reach title start),
In the second part (title display period, title end period) of the title display part in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the light-emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the second part (weak reach title display),
In the introduction part of the aforementioned specific reach (low-base weak reach A and B effects), the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach type weak reach A introduction, weak reach type weak reach B introduction).
According to this feature, by using a luminance data table corresponding to the first part from when the title display starts until it is displayed in its fixed position in a specific reach, a luminance data table corresponding to the second part after the title display is displayed in its fixed position, and a luminance data table corresponding to the introductory part, the period during which the title is displayed and the period until whether or not a favorable state is announced can be appropriately heightened, and as a result, a suitable title display can be achieved.

[Examples]
Embodiments for implementing the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on examples.

[Basic System]
First, we will explain the basic configuration and control of pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a typical pachinko gaming machine).

[Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1]
Figure 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of its main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game surface, and a game machine frame (frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls, which serve as the game medium, are launched from a predetermined ball launching device and fired into this game area.

Furthermore, "variable display" of special symbols refers to, for example, the display of multiple types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/shrinking one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and the regular symbols described later, multiple types of special symbols or regular symbols are displayed in an updated manner. In the variation of decorative symbols described later, multiple types of decorative symbols are displayed in a scrolling or updated manner, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/shrinked. Note that variation also includes the display of a symbol blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is displayed as a stopped display (also called derivation or derivation display, etc.) (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that variable display may also be expressed as variable display or variation.

Furthermore, the special symbols displayed variably in the first special symbol display device 4A are also referred to as "first special symbols," and the special symbols displayed variably in the second special symbol display device 4B are also referred to as "second special symbols." Additionally, a special symbol game using the first special symbols is called a "first special symbol game," and a special symbol game using the second special symbols is called a "second special symbol game." Furthermore, only one type of special symbol display device is required for the variable display of special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (electroluminescence) display, and displays various visual effects. The image display device 5 may also consist of a projector and a screen. Various visual effects are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative symbols (such as symbols showing numbers) that serve as decorative identification information distinct from the special symbols is performed in synchronization with the first and second special symbol games. Here, in synchronization with the first or second special symbol game, the decorative symbols are displayed variably (e.g., vertical scrolling or updating) in the left, center, and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, respectively. The synchronous execution of the special symbol games and the variable display of decorative symbols are collectively referred to simply as "variable display."

The image display device 5 may have display areas on its screen for displaying pending displays corresponding to variable displays whose execution is currently suspended, and active displays corresponding to variable displays that are currently running. The pending displays and active displays are collectively referred to as variable display-compatible displays.

The number of variable displays that are currently being held is also called the held memory count. The number of held memory corresponding to the first special feature game is called the first held memory count, and the number of held memory corresponding to the second special feature game is called the second held memory count. The sum of the first and second held memory counts is also called the total held memory count.

A first reserve indicator 25A and a second reserve indicator 25B, each composed of multiple LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first reserve indicator 25A displays the first reserve memory count based on the number of lit LEDs. The second reserve indicator 25B displays the second reserve memory count based on the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a prize ball device 6A is provided, and to the right of the prize ball device 6A, a variable prize ball device 6B is provided.

The prize ball entry device 6A forms a first starting prize entry opening, which is kept in a constant open state, allowing game balls to enter at all times, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting prize entry opening, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 3) are dispensed, and the first special game may be started.

The variable prize ball device 6B (a standard electric mechanism) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see Figure 3). The variable prize ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-type mechanism having a pair of movable pieces. When the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable pieces are in a vertical position, so the tips of the movable pieces approach the prize ball device 6A, resulting in a closed state where game balls cannot enter the second starting prize opening (this is also said to be the second starting prize opening being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable pieces of the variable prize ball device 6B are in a tilted position, resulting in an open state where game balls can enter the second starting prize opening (this is also said to be the second starting prize opening being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second starting prize opening, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 3) are dispensed, and the second special game may be started. Furthermore, the variable prize ball device 6B only needs to be one that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one equipped with an electric tulip-shaped mechanism.

General prize slots 10 are provided at predetermined locations on the game board 2 (in the example shown in Figure 1, three locations in the lower left of the game area and one location above the variable prize ball device 6B) and are kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when a ball enters any of the general prize slots 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are dispensed as prize balls.

Between the prize ball device 6A and the variable prize ball device 6B, a special variable prize ball device 7 with a large prize opening is provided. The special variable prize ball device 7 includes a large prize opening door driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 3), forming a large prize opening as a specific region that changes between an open state and a closed state.

For example, in the special variable prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric mechanism) is in the off state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, preventing game balls from entering (passing through) it. On the other hand, in the special variable prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the on state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize slot, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14) are dispensed as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize slot, more prize balls are dispensed than when a game ball enters, for example, the first starting prize slot, the second starting prize slot, or the general prize slot 10.

The entry of a game ball into any of the prize-winning slots, including the general prize-winning slot 10, is also referred to as "winning a prize." In particular, winning a prize in the starting slots (first starting prize-winning slot, second starting prize-winning slot) is also called a "starting prize."

A standard symbol display unit 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in Figure 1, the lower left of the game area). For example, the standard symbol display unit 20 consists of a 7-segment LED and displays a variable representation of multiple types of standard symbols as general identification information, distinct from special symbols. Standard symbols are represented by lighting patterns such as numbers "0" through "9" or "-". The standard symbols may also include a pattern where all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of standard symbols is also called a standard symbol game.

To the right of the image display device 5, a passage gate 41 is provided through which the game ball can pass. The game is executed based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41.

Below the regular symbol display unit 20, a regular symbol hold indicator unit 25C is provided. The regular symbol hold indicator unit 25C is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of regular symbol hold memories (the number of regular symbol games currently in a pending state) by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is equipped with windmills and numerous obstacle pins that change the direction and speed of the game balls. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet for game balls that do not enter any of the winning slots.

Speakers 8L and 8R for playing and outputting sound effects are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided to the left and right of the main lamp 9a, surrounding the game area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided near the special variable prize ball device 7 in the game board 2.

A movable body 32, described later, is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (above the image display device 5 in Figure 1), which operates according to the effects. A movable body lamp 9d is also provided on the movable body 32. The movable body lamp 9d, along with the aforementioned main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and attacker lamp 9c, are sometimes collectively referred to as the game effect lamp 9. Note that these main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are all composed of LEDs.

A ball-launching handle (operating knob) 30 is provided at the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3. This handle is operated by the player or other user to launch the game balls towards the game area using a ball-launching device.

A ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided at a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, for holding (storing) game balls dispensed as prize balls or game balls dispensed by a designated ball dispenser so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a dispensing section (ball supply tray) separate from the upper tray, from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A, which can be grasped and tilted by the player, is mounted at a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is equipped with a trigger button that the player can press. Operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see Figure 3).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, allowing the player to perform predetermined instruction operations by pressing it. Operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see Figure 3).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

Figure 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine 1. The main board 11, housed in a circuit board case 201, is mounted on the rear of the pachinko game machine 1. The main board 11 is equipped with a setting key 51 and a setting change switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching between the setting change state and the setting confirmation state. The setting change switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing setting values such as the probability of winning a jackpot and the payout rate when the setting change state is active. The setting key 51 and the setting change switch 52 may be mounted externally to the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined location on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is positioned in the center of the back of the main board 11, and a display switching switch 31 is positioned to the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 can be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display switching switch 31 are positioned in front of the main board 11 when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the game machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as the consecutive win ratio, the payout ratio, and the base rate. The consecutive win ratio is the proportion of the total number of winning balls that come from winning in the large winning slot (attacker). The payout ratio is the proportion of the total number of winning balls that come from winning in the second starting winning slot (electric chute) and the number of winning balls that come from winning in the large winning slot (attacker). The base rate is the proportion of the total number of winning balls relative to the number of game balls launched. When the settings are changed or confirmed, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values of the pachinko machine 1. The display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display the setting values that are being changed or confirmed when the settings are changed or confirmed.

The setting key 51 and setting switch 52 are inoperable from the front of the pachinko machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The gaming machine frame 3 is rotatably equipped with a glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and the gaming area can be opened and closed using the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the gaming area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a, which is formed in a vertically elongated rectangular frame shape. When the game machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the circuit board case 201, including the setting key 51 and the setting switch 52, from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a roughly L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and can be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

[Outline of game progression]
The player rotates the ball-shooting handle 30 on the pachinko game machine 1, launching the game ball towards the game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the regular symbol game is started using the regular symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the execution of the previous regular symbol game (i.e., the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the regular symbol game based on that passage cannot be executed immediately), the regular symbol game based on that passage is held up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this regular symbol game, if a specific regular symbol (a regular symbol that results in a win) stops and is displayed, the display result for the regular symbol becomes "Regular Symbol Win." On the other hand, if a regular symbol other than the regular symbol that results in a win (a regular symbol that results in a loss) stops and is displayed, the display result for the regular symbol becomes "Regular Symbol Loss." When a "Regular Symbol Win" occurs, the variable prize ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time (the second starting prize entry point becomes open).

When a game ball enters the first starting prize entry opening formed in the prize ball entry device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second starting prize entry opening formed in the variable prize ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

Furthermore, if a game ball enters (wins) the starting entry slot during the execution of a special feature game, or during the period when the game is controlled to a jackpot state as described later (i.e., if a starting entry occurs but the special feature game based on that entry cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special feature game based on that entry will be suspended until a predetermined maximum number of entries (for example, 4) are reached.

In the special feature game, if a specific special symbol (a winning symbol, such as "7," although the actual symbol will differ depending on the type of win described later) stops and is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it results in a "jackpot." If a special symbol other than the winning symbol (a losing symbol, such as "-") stops and is displayed, it results in a "miss." Furthermore, in this pachinko machine 1, "misses" include "misses with time-saving features," where the game is controlled to a high-base state (time-saving state) from the next variable display without going through a jackpot game.

After the display result in the special game is "Big Win," the game is controlled to a "Big Win Game" state, which is advantageous for the player.

In a jackpot state, the large prize winning slot formed by the special variable prize ball entry device 7 opens in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until the earlier of the following two timings: the elapsed time of a predetermined period (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) or the time when the number of game balls entering the large prize winning slot reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9 balls). The predetermined period is the upper limit period for which the large prize winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit period. One cycle in which the large prize winning slot is open in this manner is called a round (round game). In a jackpot state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In a jackpot state, players can win prize balls by getting them into the jackpot slot. Therefore, a jackpot state is advantageous for the player. The more rounds there are in a jackpot state, and the longer the maximum opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

Furthermore, each "jackpot" has a designated jackpot type. For example, multiple types of opening mechanisms for the jackpot (number of rounds and maximum opening period) and game states after a jackpot (normal state, time-saving state, probability-increasing state, etc.) are provided, and the jackpot type is determined accordingly. It is also possible to have jackpot types that award many prize balls, types that award few prize balls, or types that award almost no prize balls.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a probability-increasing state, depending on the type of jackpot.

In the time-saving mode, a control mechanism (time-saving control) is implemented that shortens the average special symbol variation time (the period during which the special symbols vary) compared to the normal state. In the time-saving mode, a control mechanism (high-open control, high-base control) is also implemented that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize entry point, such as by shortening the average normal symbol variation time (the period during which the normal symbols vary) or increasing the probability of a "normal symbol win" in the normal symbol game. Since the time-saving mode improves the variation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol), it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the probability variation state, in addition to the time-saving control, probability variation control is implemented that increases the probability of the displayed result being "Big Win" compared to the normal state. The probability variation state is even more advantageous for the player because it improves the efficiency of special symbol variations and makes "Big Win" more likely.

The time-saving mode and the probability-increasing mode continue until one of the following termination conditions is met first: either a predetermined number of special symbol games have been played, or the next jackpot game state has begun. When the termination condition is the predetermined number of special symbol games played, it is also called a "count-restricted time-saving mode" (count-restricted time-saving mode, count-restricted probability-increasing mode, etc.).

The "normal state" refers to any game state other than advantageous states such as the jackpot state, the time-saving state, or the probability-increasing state. It is a state in which the pachinko machine 1 is controlled to the same settings as its initial state (for example, when a system reset is performed, or when a predetermined recovery process is not executed after power-on).

The state in which probability variation control is being performed is also called the high probability state, and the state in which probability variation control is not being performed is also called the low probability state. The state in which time reduction control is being performed is also called the high base state, and the state in which time reduction control is not being performed is also called the low base state. Combining these, the time reduction state is sometimes called the low probability/high base state, the probability variation state is called the high probability/high base state, and the normal state is called the low probability/low base state. A state that is both high probability and low base is also called the high probability/low base state.

Furthermore, the game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the jackpot entry point) during a jackpot game state. For example, when a game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a probability variation state after the jackpot game state.

[Progress of the performance, etc.]
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects that notify the progress of the game or enhance the excitement of the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. These effects are described below. These effects are performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of these displays, they may also be performed using sound output from speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting and extinguishing of game effect lamps 9, the operation of movable parts 32, or any effect device that includes some or all of these.

As a performance effect executed in accordance with the progress of the game, the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5, designated as "left," "center," and "right," begin displaying variable decorative symbols in response to the start of the first or second special symbol game. At the timing when the display result (also called the confirmed special symbol) is displayed in the first or second special symbol game, the confirmed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols, is also displayed (derived).

During the period from the start to the end of the variable display of decorative symbols, the mode of variable display of decorative symbols may become a predetermined "reach" mode (a reach is achieved). Here, a "reach" mode refers to a mode in which, when the stopped display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5 constitutes part of the jackpot combination described later, the variable display of decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped continues.

Furthermore, a reach animation is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach pattern occurring during the variable display of decorative symbols. In pachinko machine 1, multiple types of reach animations are executed, each with a different probability (also called the jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special symbol game or the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols) resulting in a "jackpot." Reach animations include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is "Big Win," the image display device 5 displays a predetermined combination of decorative symbols as the result of the variable display of decorative symbols (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols is "Big Win"). For example, identical decorative symbols (e.g., "7") are aligned and displayed on predetermined active lines in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

If it's a "probability-increasing jackpot" where the game state is controlled to a probability-increasing state after the jackpot state ends, odd-numbered decorative symbols (e.g., "7") may be displayed when the symbols line up. If it's a "non-probability-increasing jackpot (regular jackpot)" where the game state is not controlled to a probability-increasing state after the jackpot state ends, even-numbered decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed when the symbols line up. In this case, odd-numbered decorative symbols are also called probability-increasing symbols, and even-numbered decorative symbols are also called non-probability-increasing symbols (regular symbols). After a reach-out sequence with non-probability-increasing symbols, an upgrade sequence that ultimately results in a "probability-increasing jackpot" may be executed.

If the display result of the special game is "miss," the variable display mode of the decorative symbols may not become a reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a confirmed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination (also called "non-reach miss") (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols will be "non-reach miss"). Also, if the display result is "miss," if the variable display mode of the decorative symbols becomes a reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a confirmed decorative symbol of a predetermined reach combination that is not a winning combination (also called "reach miss") (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols will be "reach miss").

The Pachinko game machine 1 can perform various effects, including displaying the variable display-compatible displays (such as hold displays and active displays). Other effects, such as a prediction effect that foreshadows the probability of a big win, are performed during the variable display of decorative symbols. These prediction effects include those that foreshadow the probability of a big win in the variable display currently being performed, and those that foreshadow the probability of a big win in the variable display before execution (variable displays whose execution is pending). As a pre-read prediction effect, the machine may also perform an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display-compatible displays (such as hold displays and active displays) to a mode different from the normal mode.

Furthermore, in the image display device 5, a pseudo-consecutive display effect may be implemented by temporarily pausing the display of the decorative pattern during its variable display and then resuming the variable display, thereby making a single variable display appear as if it were multiple variable displays.

Even during a jackpot game, a jackpot-related animation is performed to indicate the jackpot state. This animation may include announcing the number of rounds or an upgrade animation indicating an increase in the value of the jackpot state.

Furthermore, when, for example, a special game is not being played, a demo image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer-waiting demo is performed).

[Board configuration]
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and other components, as shown in Figure 3. In addition, various other boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also installed. The term "various control boards" is a concept that includes not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on an electronic circuit board.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17. By operating the power switch 91 (turning it ON), power from an AC power source such as AC 100V from an external power source like a commercial power supply can be supplied from the power supply board 17 to electrical components, including the main board 11 and various control boards such as the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting AC to DC, and a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (e.g., DC 12V or DC 5V).

The main board 11 is the main control board and has the function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of special symbol games (including management of reserves), execution of regular symbol games (including management of reserves), jackpot game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a single-chip microcomputer and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 controls the progress of the game (implementing the functions of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as the variable patterns described later, the performance control commands described later, and various tables referenced when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains its contents for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is interrupted, either partially or entirely. Alternatively, all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 continuously counts and updates numerical data representing various random values (game-specific random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. These game-specific random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (i.e., updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal pattern hold indicator 25C, etc., and solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (such as detection signals indicating that a game ball has passed through or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start switch (first start switch 22A and second start switch 22B), count switch 23) and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signals indicates that the passage or entry of a game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 receives reset signals, power-off signals, and clear signals from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal used to stop the control circuits, such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer IC, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal turns off when the predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period during which the predetermined power supply voltage remains below the predetermined value exceeds the power-off reference time. The clear signal turns on, for example, in response to a press operation on the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (for example, signals to turn on solenoids 81 and 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to solenoid 81 for the regular electric mechanism and solenoid 82 for the large prize door.

The main board 11 is connected to a display monitor 29, a display switching switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting switching switch 52, and a door opening sensor 90. The door opening sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies performance control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the performance control board 12 as part of the control of the game's progress. The performance control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the performance control board 12. These performance control commands include, for example, commands specifying various decision results from the main board 11 (e.g., display results of the special feature game (including the type of jackpot), the variation pattern used when executing the special feature game (details described later)), the game status (e.g., start and end of variable display, opening status of the jackpot opening, occurrence of a jackpot, number of reserved balls, game state), and the occurrence of errors.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11. It receives performance control commands and executes performances (various performances corresponding to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable parts 32, error notifications, and power outage recovery notifications) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, ROM 121, RAM 122, display control unit 123, random number circuit 124, and I/O 125.

The CPU 120 for performance control executes the program stored in the ROM 121, and together with the display control unit 123, performs processing to execute the performance (processing to realize the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining which performance to execute). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 121 (data such as various tables) is used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation may also instruct the display control unit 123 to execute the presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals output when player operation is detected, indicating the operation content as appropriate).

The display control unit 123 is equipped with a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the animation based on animation execution instructions from the animation control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123, based on the execution instructions for the performance control CPU 120, supplies video signals corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5, thereby displaying the performance image on the image display device 5. Furthermore, the display control unit 123 supplies sound specification signals (signals specifying the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and lamp signals (signals specifying the on/off mode of the lamps) to the lamp control board 14 in order to synchronize audio output with the display of the performance image and to turn the game effect lamps 9 on/off. The display control unit 123 also supplies signals to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or the drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving speakers 8L and 8R. Based on the specified audio signal, it drives speakers 8L and 8R and outputs the audio specified by the audio signal from speakers 8L and 8R.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9. Based on the lamp signal, it drives the game effect lamp 9 and turns it on/off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the on/off status of the lamp.

Furthermore, the control of audio output, lamp on/off (supply of sound specification signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals to operate the movable body 32, etc.) may be performed by the performance control CPU 120.

The random number circuit 124 keeps an updatable count of numerical data representing various random values (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. These random numbers for effects may be updated by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (i.e., updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for receiving performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound specification signals, lamp signals).

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As in the pachinko machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or the sub-boards of machine 1 may be configured to have multiple functions.

[Operation]
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be explained.

[Main operations of the main board 11]
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power is supplied to the pachinko game machine 1, the game control microcomputer 100 starts up, and the main game control processing is executed by the CPU 103. Figure 4 is a flowchart showing the main game control processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the main game control process shown in Figure 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to disabled (step S1). Next, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). These initial settings include setting the stack pointer, setting the registers of built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to an accessible state.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are met (step S3). The recovery conditions are met when the clear signal is in the off state, backup data exists, and the backup RAM is functioning correctly. When power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, for example, if the clear switch on the power supply board 17 is pressed, an ON clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an ON clear signal is input, it is sufficient to determine in step S3 that the recovery conditions are not met. Backup data only needs to be storable in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors are checked or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery conditions are met (Step S3; Yes), the recovery process (Step S4) is executed, followed by the setting confirmation process (Step S5). The recovery process in Step S4 sets the work area based on the contents of RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state is restored to what it was when the power supply was interrupted. For example, if a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the special symbol change can be resumed from the state before the interruption.

If the recovery conditions are not met (Step S3; No), the initialization process (Step S6) is executed, followed by the configuration change process (Step S7). The initialization process in Step S6 includes a clear process that clears the flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102. The execution of the clear process sets initial values in the work area.

In step S5, the setting confirmation process determines whether the predetermined setting confirmation conditions have been met. For example, the setting confirmation conditions are met when, at the start of power supply, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON. Step S5 is executed only if the recovery conditions, including the clear signal being OFF, are met in step S3. Therefore, the setting confirmation conditions can only be met when the clear signal is OFF; thus, the clear signal being OFF can also be included as a setting confirmation condition.

In step S5, if the setting confirmation conditions are met, the pachinko machine 1 enters a setting confirmation state where the set values can be checked, and a setting confirmation start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting confirmation state, the set values set in the pachinko machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may also be set to a game stop state, halting the progress of the game. In the game stop state, the launch of game balls by operating the ball-shooting handle, the detection of game balls by various switches, etc., are stopped. Furthermore, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 should be controlled to stop displaying losing symbols, or to display symbols corresponding to a different game stop state than the losing symbols. When the setting confirmation state ends, the associated game stop state should also end.

In step S7, the setting change process determines whether a predetermined setting change condition has been met. For example, the setting change condition is met when, at the start of power supply, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON. The setting change condition may also include the condition that the clear signal is ON.

If the setting change conditions are met during the setting change process in step S7, the pachinko machine 1 enters a setting change state where the set value can be changed, and a setting change start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting change state, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the displayed value is sequentially updated each time the setting switch 52 is operated. Subsequently, based on the setting key 51 being turned off by an employee of the gaming hall, the set value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is turned off. When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When pachinko machine 1 is in the setting change state, it may be put into the game stop state, similar to when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the associated game stop state should also end.

On the performance control board 12 side, upon receiving a setting confirmation start command or a setting change start command, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or changed. For example, the image display device 5 may display a predetermined image, the speakers 8L and 8R may output a predetermined sound, or light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned ON, for example, by pressing the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON, if the clear switch is ON, the initialization process in step S6 and the setting change process in step S7 are executed, allowing control to the setting change state. If the clear switch is OFF, the recovery process in step S4 and the setting confirmation process in step S5 are executed, allowing control to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is OFF, or if the setting key 51 is OFF, if the clear switch is ON, the initialization process in step S6 is executed, but the control to the setting change state is not performed. If the clear switch is OFF, the recovery process in step S4 is executed, but the control to the setting confirmation state is not performed.

After performing a setting confirmation process or a setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, it sets the registers of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at predetermined intervals (e.g., 2 ms) (step S9), and enables the interrupt (step S10). After that, it enters a loop process. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (e.g., 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

The CPU 103, which has executed the main game control processing, receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request. Upon receiving the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of Figure 5. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 5 begins, the CPU 103 first performs a predetermined switch process to determine whether detection signals have been received from various switches, such as the gate switch 21, the first start switch 22A, the second start switch 22B, and the count switch 23, via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, it performs a predetermined main-side error processing to diagnose an abnormality in the pachinko game machine 1, and, if necessary, generates a warning based on the diagnosis result (step S22). After this, it performs a predetermined information output process to output data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.), start information (information indicating the number of start-up wins, etc.), and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the game entered a probability variation state, etc.), which are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output processing, the main board 11 performs a game random number update process to update at least a portion of the random numbers used for gameplay via software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing each time a timer interrupt occurs, the execution and management of special symbol games, control of the jackpot game state, and control of the game state are realized.

Following the special symbol processing, the normal symbol processing is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol processing each time a timer interrupt occurs, enabling the execution and management of the normal symbol game based on detection signals from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of a game ball through the gate 41), as well as the opening control of the variable prize ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol win." The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal symbol holds is displayed by lighting the normal symbol hold display 25C.

After the normal pattern processing is executed, the following may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing: processing when a power outage occurs, processing for dispensing prize balls, etc. Then, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set to transmit performance control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, the set performance control commands are transmitted to a sub-control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, interrupts are enabled, and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 5 as part of the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes the start-up prize determination process (step S101).

In the start-up prize determination process, the occurrence of a start-up prize is detected, and a process is executed to store the reserved information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and update the reserved memory count. When a start-up prize occurs, a random value is extracted to determine the display result (including the type of jackpot) and the variation pattern, and this is stored as reserved information. Alternatively, a process may be executed to predict the display result and variation pattern based on the extracted random value. After storing the reserved information and the reserved memory count, a transmission setting is made to send a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the occurrence of a start-up prize, the reserved memory count, and the prediction judgment results. The performance control command for a start-up prize, thus set for transmission, is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special symbol process is completed, by executing the command control process in step S27 shown in Figure 4.

After executing the start-up prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag in RAM 102. In each of the special symbol process processes (steps S110 to S120), transmission settings are made to send the corresponding performance control command to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on a random value for determining the display result, it is determined (pre-determined) whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol will be a "jackpot," and if so, the type of jackpot, before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) to be displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1," and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special symbol game using the second special symbol may be executed with priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol (also called special symbol 2 priority processing). Furthermore, the order in which the game balls enter the first and second starting prize slots may be memorized, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in that order (also known as "sequential execution").

When making various decisions based on random values, the various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which the decision values compared with the random values are assigned to the decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, the various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special feature process flag is "1". This variation pattern setting process includes determining one of several variation patterns using a random value for variation pattern determination, based on a pre-determined result such as whether the display result should be "jackpot" or not. When the variation pattern is determined during the variation pattern setting process, the value of the special feature process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process terminates.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special feature game (special feature variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not a reach occurs, etc.), and the content of the effects during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach effect, etc.). It is also called the variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes setting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to vary the special symbols, and measuring the elapsed time since the special symbols began to vary. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special symbol variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. When the elapsed time since the special symbols began to vary reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process terminates.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". This special symbol stop process includes stopping the variation of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and setting the display to stop (derive) the confirmed special symbol that will be the display result of the special symbols. If the display result is "Big Win", the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4". If the display result is "Miss", and the game is controlled in a time-saving state or a probability variation state, and the end of the number of spins is achieved, the game state is also updated. Once the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

Step S114, the pre-jackpot opening process, is executed when the value of the special feature process flag is "4". This pre-jackpot opening process includes settings to start round execution and open the jackpot opening in the jackpot game state, based on factors such as the display result being "jackpot". When opening the jackpot opening, a solenoid drive signal is supplied to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door. At this time, for example, the maximum opening period and the maximum number of rounds executed are set, corresponding to the type of jackpot. Once these settings are complete, the value of the special feature process flag is updated to "5", and the pre-jackpot opening process ends.

Step S115, the jackpot opening process, is executed when the value of the special feature process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening was opened, and determining whether it is time to return the jackpot opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When returning the jackpot opening to the closed state, the process includes stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door, then updating the value of the special feature process flag to "6", and ending the jackpot opening process.

Step S116, the post-jackpot opening processing, is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "6". This post-jackpot opening processing includes determining whether the number of rounds in which the jackpot opening is open has reached the set upper limit, and setting the game to terminate the jackpot game state if the upper limit has been reached. If the number of rounds has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "5". If the number of rounds has reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "7". Once the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the post-jackpot opening processing ends.

The jackpot termination process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special feature process flag is "7". This jackpot termination process includes waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the duration of the ending sequence (a visual effect indicating the end of the jackpot game state) has elapsed, and various settings for initiating probability variation control and time reduction control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When these settings are completed, the value of the special feature process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot termination process ends.

Pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a jackpot and the payout rate change according to the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol processing, the probability of winning a jackpot and the payout rate change by using a display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. For example, the set value consists of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning a jackpot, and the probability of winning a jackpot decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In this example, when the set value is set to 6, it is the most advantageous for the player, and the advantage decreases in stages as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. If the probability of winning a jackpot changes according to the set value, the payout rate may also change according to the set value. The probability of winning a jackpot is constant regardless of the set value, while the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change according to the set value. The pachinko game machine 1 only needs to be configured to allow the player to set one of several setting values that offer different levels of advantage. The setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is notified to the performance control board 12 by a setting value specification command being sent from the main board 11.

Figure 7 shows an example of the display result determination table configuration. Figure 7(A) shows an example of the display result determination table configuration for the first special symbol, used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and Figure 7(B) shows an example of the display result determination table configuration for the second special symbol, used when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the winning determination value, which is compared with the random value MR1 according to the set value, is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol. The random value MR1 is a random value for determining the display result, and its value is randomly updated within the range of 0 to 65535. A common display result determination table may be used for both the first and second special symbols.

As shown in Figure 7(A), when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, if the setting value is 1 and the game state is normal or time-saving state, the value can take on a range of 0 to 65535. Of the winning judgment values compared with the random value MR1 used for determining the special symbol display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "Big Win," 65317 to 65535 are assigned to "Time-Saving Miss," and the remaining numerical ranges are assigned to "Miss." Furthermore, when the setting value is 1 and the game state is probability-changing state, of the aforementioned winning judgment values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "Big Win," and the remaining numerical ranges are assigned to "Miss." Note that when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the setting value is 2 to 6, and the game state is normal or time-saving state, as shown in Figure 7(A).

As shown in Figure 7(B), when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, if the setting value is 1 and the game state is normal or time-saving state, the value can take on a range of 0 to 65535. Of the winning judgment values compared with the random value MR1 used for determining the special symbol display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "Big Win," 65317 to 65425 are assigned to "Time-Saving Miss," and the remaining numerical ranges are assigned to "Miss." Furthermore, when the setting value is 1 and the game state is probability-changing state, of the aforementioned winning judgment values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "Big Win," and the remaining numerical ranges are assigned to "Miss." Note that when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the setting value is 2 to 6, and the game state is normal or time-saving state, as shown in Figure 7(B).

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the winning judgment values assigned to "Big Win" and "Short Time Loss" in each display result judgment table, as shown in Figure 8, in the first special display result judgment table when the game state is normal or short time, the range of 1020 to 1237 among the winning judgment values is set as the common numerical range of the big win judgment value for determining a big win regardless of the setting value.

Furthermore, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range for determining a jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot"). However, for settings 2 through 6, a non-common numerical range for the jackpot determination value is set, starting from 1238 and continuing from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value according to each setting value. This non-common numerical range for the jackpot determination value is set as follows: 1238 to 1253 for setting 2, 1238 to 1272 for setting 3, 1238 to 1292 for setting 4, 1238 to 1317 for setting 5, and 1238 to 1346 for setting 6.

In other words, in the first special symbol display result judgment table when the game state is normal or shortened time, if the setting value is 1, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) among the possible winning judgment values (0 to 65535) are assigned to "Big Win." On the other hand, if the setting value is 2 or higher, the values within the range of the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to "Big Win." Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the setting value increases.

Therefore, the probability of hitting the jackpot increases as the setting value increases, with 1020 serving as the baseline value for the jackpot determination (jackpot baseline value). This increase is due to the expansion of non-common numerical ranges that are continuous within the common numerical range.

Furthermore, in the first special symbol display result determination table when the game state is either the normal state or the time-saving state, the range of 65317 to 65535 among the win determination values is set as a common numerical range for the time-saving loss determination value, regardless of the setting value, for determining a time-saving loss. Focusing on the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, the range of 1020 to 1346 among the win determination values is set as the numerical range for the jackpot determination value. However, the time-saving loss determination value is set in a different numerical range from the jackpot determination value range (1020 to 1346) for setting value 6, with 65317 as the reference value for a time-saving loss (time-saving loss reference value), within the range of 65317 to 65535. This prevents the numerical range of the time-saving loss determination value from overlapping with the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each setting value.

Furthermore, in the first special symbol display result determination table when the game state is in a probability variation state, the range of 1020 to 1346 among the win determination values is set as a common numerical range for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range for determining a jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot"). However, for settings 2 through 6, a non-common numerical range for the jackpot determination value is set, starting from 1347 and corresponding to each setting value, continuing from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range for the jackpot determination value is set as follows: 1347 to 1383 for setting 2, 1347 to 1429 for setting 3, 1347 to 1487 for setting 4, 1347 to 1556 for setting 5, and 1347 to 1674 for setting 6.

In other words, in the first special symbol display result judgment table when the game state is in a probability variation state, if the setting value is 1, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) among the win judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 are assigned to "Big Win." On the other hand, if the setting value is 2 or higher, among the win judgment values, the values within the range of the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to "Big Win." Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1347 as the setting value increases.

Therefore, the probability of hitting the jackpot increases as the setting value increases, with 1020 serving as the baseline value for the jackpot determination (jackpot baseline value). This increase is due to the expansion of non-common numerical ranges that are continuous within the common numerical range.

In the second special symbol display result determination table when the game state is normal or shortened time state, the range of 1020 to 1237 among the win determination values is set as a common numerical range for determining a win, regardless of the setting value.

Furthermore, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range for determining a jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot"). However, for settings 2 through 6, a non-common numerical range for the jackpot determination value is set, starting from 1238 and continuing from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value according to each setting value. This non-common numerical range for the jackpot determination value is set as follows: 1238 to 1253 for setting 2, 1238 to 1272 for setting 3, 1238 to 1292 for setting 4, 1238 to 1317 for setting 5, and 1238 to 1346 for setting 6.

In other words, in this pachinko machine 1, when the game state is either the normal state or the time-saving state, in the second special symbol display result judgment table, if the setting value is 1, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) among the possible winning judgment values (0 to 65535) are assigned to "Big Win." On the other hand, if the setting value is 2 or higher, the values within the range of the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to "Big Win." Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the setting value increases.

Therefore, the probability of hitting the jackpot increases as the setting value increases, with 1020 serving as the baseline value for the jackpot determination (jackpot baseline value). This increase is due to the expansion of non-common numerical ranges that are continuous within the common numerical range.

Furthermore, in the second special symbol display result determination table when the game state is either the normal state or the time-saving state, the range of 65317 to 65425 among the win determination values is set as a common numerical range for the time-saving loss determination value, regardless of the setting value, for determining a time-saving loss. Focusing on the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, the range of 1020 to 1346 among the win determination values is set as the numerical range for the jackpot determination value. However, the time-saving loss determination value is set in a different numerical range from the jackpot determination value range (1020 to 1346) for setting value 6, with 65317 as the reference value for a time-saving loss (time-saving loss reference value), within the range of 65317 to 65425. This prevents the numerical range of the time-saving loss determination value from overlapping with the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each setting value.

In the second special symbol display result determination table when the game state is in a probability variation state, the range of 1020 to 1346 among the win determination values is set as a common numerical range for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. Other features of the second special symbol display result determination table are the same as those of the first special symbol display result determination table.

As described above, in this pachinko game machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the range of 65317 to 65535 is set as the common numerical range for a time-saving miss, regardless of the setting value, whether the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state. When the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set as the common numerical range for a time-saving miss, regardless of the setting value, whether the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state. In other words, when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the proportion of variable display results that are time-saving misses is the same for all setting values, thus preventing excessive gambling depending on the setting value. Furthermore, for time-saving misses, to which a common judgment value number is assigned for each setting value, the numerical range is set to be continuous from 65317, which is the standard value for time-saving misses, regardless of the setting value, thus reducing the processing load on the CPU 103 related to the judgment of whether the variable display result is a time-saving miss.

Furthermore, while this pachinko machine 1 has six configurable settings (1 through 6), the number of configurable settings for pachinko machine 1 may be five or fewer, or seven or more. Additionally, the smaller the setting value set for pachinko machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player.

The type of jackpot may be determined at different rates depending on the setting value, based on the assignment of judgment values in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the type of jackpot may be determined at a common rate regardless of the setting value. The variation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the setting value, based on the assignment of judgment values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the setting value. The execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may differ depending on the setting value, and the setting value may be suggested by the frequency of normal reaches and super reaches being executed. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may be the same regardless of the setting value. In addition, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting-suggesting effects at different rates depending on the setting value.

[Main operations of the performance control board 12]
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be explained. When the performance control board 12 receives power voltage from the power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the main performance control processing as shown in the flowchart of Figure 9. When the main performance control processing shown in Figure 9 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first performs a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clearing the RAM 122, setting various initial values, and setting the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. It also executes initial operation control processing (step S72). In the initial operation control processing, controls are executed to perform the initial operations of the movable body 32, such as controls to drive the movable body 32 back to the origin position and controls to perform predetermined operation checks.

Subsequently, a determination is made as to whether the timer interrupt flag is on or off (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) based on, for example, the CTC register setting. If the timer interrupt flag is off at this time (step S73; No), the process in step S73 is repeated and the system waits.

Furthermore, on the performance control board 12, in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs at predetermined intervals, an interrupt occurs to receive performance control commands from the main board 11. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 turns ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal turning ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets to interrupt disable. However, if a CPU that does not automatically set to interrupt disable is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt disable instruction (DI instruction). In response to the interrupt caused by the performance control INT signal turning ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt processing. In this command reception interrupt processing, the performance control command is received from a predetermined input port among the input ports included in I/O 125 that receives control signals transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The performance control command received at this time is stored, for example, in a performance control command reception buffer provided in RAM 122. Subsequently, the CPU 120 for performance control sets itself to enable interrupts and then terminates the command reception interrupt processing.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis processing, for example, various performance control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11 and stored in the performance control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read performance control commands are performed. For example, to allow the performance control process to confirm which performance control command was received and what the performance control command identifies, the read performance control command is stored in a predetermined area of RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in RAM 122 is turned on. Furthermore, if the performance control command identifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, various performance devices are controlled, such as the display operation of performance images in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. Furthermore, the control content of the performance operations using the various performance devices is determined, decided, and set according to the performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process in step S76, the random number update process for performances is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the random numbers used by the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to step S73.

Figure 10 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of Figure 9 as part of the performance control process. In the performance control process shown in Figure 10, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-announcement setting process (step S161). In the pre-announcement setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, and settings are made for executing the pre-announcement performance based on the performance control command transmitted from the main board 11 at the time of the start-up win. Furthermore, processing is executed to display the hold indicator based on the number of hold memories specified from the performance control command.

After executing the process in step S161, the CPU 120 for performance control selects and executes one of the processes in steps S170 to S175, for example, according to the value of the performance process flag provided in RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process to determine whether or not to start the variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5, based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display results and variation patterns identified by the performance control command, the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols (confirmed decorative symbols), the mode of the variable display of decorative symbols, and the presence or absence of various performances such as reach performances and various予告 (pre-announcement) performances, as well as their mode and start timing, are determined. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute performances) is set, reflecting these determinations. Afterward, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process ends. Upon receiving the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of decorative symbols, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, drive the movable body 32, output sound and sound effects from speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14, and performs various effect controls during the variable display of decorative symbols. After performing these effect controls, the CPU 120 stops displaying the confirmed decorative symbols, which are the display result of the decorative symbols, in response to, for example, when an exit code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative symbols is read from the effect control pattern, or when a command is received from the main board 11 specifying that the confirmed decorative symbols should be stopped displaying. When the confirmed decorative symbol is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3," and the variable display performance processing ends.

The special symbol win waiting process in step S173 is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "3". In this special symbol win waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has received a performance control command from the main board 11 specifying the start of the jackpot game state. If it receives a performance control command specifying the start of the jackpot game state, it updates the value of the performance process flag to "4". If it does not receive a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state and the waiting time for such a command has elapsed, it determines that the display result in the special symbol game was "miss" and updates the value of the performance process flag to its initial value of "0". After updating the value of the performance process flag, the special symbol win waiting process terminates.

The jackpot animation processing in step S174 is executed when the value of the animation process flag is "6". In this jackpot animation processing, the animation control CPU 120 sets, for example, an animation control pattern corresponding to the animation content in the jackpot game state, and executes various animation controls in the jackpot game state based on that setting. Furthermore, in the jackpot animation processing, in response to receiving, for example, a command from the main board 11 specifying the termination of the jackpot game state, the value of the animation process flag is updated to "5", which corresponds to the ending animation processing, and the jackpot animation processing ends.

The ending sequence processing in step S175 is executed when the value of the sequence process flag is "7". In this ending sequence processing, the sequence control CPU 120 sets sequence control patterns corresponding to events such as the end of a jackpot game state, and executes various sequence controls for the ending sequence at the end of the jackpot game state based on these settings. Afterward, the value of the sequence process flag is updated to its initial value of "0", and the ending sequence processing ends.

[Examples of basic explanations]
This invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko game machine 1 described above was a payout-type game machine that dispensed a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning combinations. However, it may also be a sealed-type game machine that encloses game media and awards points based on the occurrence of winning combinations.

During the variable display of special symbols, only one type of symbol (for example, a "-" symbol) may be displayed, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing this symbol. Furthermore, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, it does not need to be displayed when the variable display stops (the "-" symbol does not need to be displayed as a result).

In the basic description above, a pachinko machine 1 was shown as an example of a gaming machine. However, the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (for example, slot machines equipped with one or more of the following: Big Bonus, Regular Bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter referred to as Bonus, etc.)) that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of tokens are dispensed to the player when tokens are inserted, a predetermined number of tokens are set, multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the player's operation of the lever, and the symbols are stopped according to the player's operation of the stop button, resulting in a specific combination of symbols being dispensed to the player.

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed and provided via a removable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1, but may also be distributed by pre-installing them on the storage device of the computer device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention may also be distributed by downloading them from other devices on a network connected via a communication line, etc., by providing a communication processing unit.

Furthermore, the execution method of the game is not limited to execution by attaching a removable storage medium. It may also be a form where downloaded programs and data are temporarily stored in internal memory, etc., and then executed. Alternatively, it may be a form where the game is executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line, etc. Moreover, it is also possible to execute the game by exchanging data with other computer devices, etc., via a network.

Furthermore, in this specification, expressions comparing various percentages, such as the percentage of performance execution (expressions like "high," "low," "different," etc.), may include cases where one of the percentages is "0%." For example, this includes cases where one percentage is "0%" and the other is "100%" or less than "100%."

[Explanation of feature section 131SG]
Next, the pachinko game machine 1 with respect to the feature section 131SG will be described. In the description of each step in the flowchart of the feature section 131SG, for example, "Step S1" may be abbreviated as "S1" or "131SGS1,""NormalReach" may be abbreviated as "N Reach," and "Super Reach" may be abbreviated as "SP Reach." Also, in the feature section 131SG, "Variation" may be referred to as "Variable Display." Furthermore, for configurations that are the same as the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description, or have the same function but differ in form or arrangement, the same reference numerals will be used, and detailed explanations will be omitted. In the following, the front side of Figure 11-1 will be the front (front, front view) side of the pachinko game machine 1, and the back side will be the rear (rear view) side, and the explanation will be based on the up, down, left, and right directions when viewing the pachinko game machine 1 from the front side. In this embodiment, the front of the pachinko game machine 1 is the surface facing the player who is playing the game on the pachinko game machine 1.

Unlike the description in Figure 7, the pachinko game machine 1 in this embodiment does not allow setting one of several setting values (for example, 1 to 6) that differ in the proportion of times the jackpot display result is shown. Instead, it does not have a "time-saving miss" option as a variable display result, and is described as a game machine with a jackpot probability set to approximately 1/319.

Furthermore, after powering on the gaming machine (when a RAM clear process is performed) or after a jackpot occurs, if a variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (900 times in this embodiment) in a low probability state but no further jackpot occurs, the machine may be controlled to one of several types of time-saving states, specifically time-saving state B (also called rescue time-saving state or rescue time-saving). This rescue time-saving state is provided to rescue players who have played for a long period of time but have not experienced a jackpot (for example, to reduce the amount of money invested in the game), and in this embodiment, it is also called "playtime."

In this embodiment, if the game state is controlled to be Jackpot A among the multiple types of jackpots, 110 variable displays are performed in Shortened Time State A (low probability/high base state), resulting in 790 variable displays remaining from the end of Shortened Time State A until the rescue short-time state is reached. On the other hand, if the game state is controlled to be either Jackpot B or Jackpot C among the multiple types of jackpots, 110 variable displays are performed in the Probability Variation State (high probability/high base state), resulting in 900 variable displays remaining from the end of the Probability Variation State until the rescue short-time state is reached. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the number of variable displays in Shortened Time State B (low probability/high base state), based on the rescue short-time state counter value becoming "0", is 1100.

In this embodiment, as shown in Figure 11-1, the lower left of the image display device 5 is provided with a first special symbol hold memory display area 130SG005D capable of displaying a hold display corresponding to a first special symbol hold memory that has been triggered but whose variable display has not yet been executed. The lower right of the image display device 5 is provided with a second special symbol hold memory display area 130SG005U capable of displaying a hold display corresponding to a second special symbol hold memory that has been triggered but whose variable display has not yet been executed. Furthermore, the lower center of the image display device 5 is provided with an active display area 130SG005F for displaying a hold display corresponding to an ongoing variable display as an active display.

Furthermore, the right side of the image display device 5 can display a fourth symbol 131SG005J to inform the player that variable display is in progress, and a small symbol 131SG005M that performs variable display similarly to the decorative symbol in the center of the image display device 5. The upper right side of the image display device 5 can display a rescue time-saving state remaining count indicator 131SG005Z, which shows the remaining number of variable displays until the system enters the time-saving state B (rescue time-saving state), as described later.

Furthermore, the left side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 is formed as a left game area 2L through which game balls can flow, and the right side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 is formed as a right game area 2R through which game balls can flow. Game balls launched weakly by the launching device flow down the first path, which is the left game area 2L, and game balls launched strongly by the launching device flow down the second path, which is the right game area 2R.

Furthermore, the lower left of the image display device 5 is provided with a first reserved memory display area 131SG005D, which indicates the number of reserved special feature reserved items by the number of reserved display items. The lower right of the image display device 5 is provided with a second reserved memory display area 131SG005U, which indicates the number of reserved special feature reserved items by the number of reserved display items. Additionally, the lower center of the image display device 5 is provided with an active display area 131SG005F, which displays the reserved display corresponding to the currently running variable display as an active display.

In this embodiment, the special variable prize ball device 7 has a first large prize opening and a second large prize opening formed along the direction of the flow of game balls. The first large prize opening can be changed between an open state allowing game balls to enter and a closed state preventing game balls from entering by driving a large prize opening door (not shown) via solenoid 131SG082A (see Figure 11-2). The second large prize opening can also be changed between an open state allowing game balls to enter and a closed state preventing game balls from entering by driving a large prize opening door (not shown) via solenoid 131SG082B (see Figure 11-2).

Furthermore, a first count switch 131SG023A capable of detecting game balls is provided inside the first large prize winning slot, and a second count switch 131SG023B capable of detecting game balls is provided inside the second large prize winning slot.

In other words, game balls flowing down the left game area 2L (first path) can enter the general prize entry point 10 and the first starting prize entry point formed by the prize ball entry device 6A, while game balls flowing down the right game area 2R (second path) can enter the second starting prize entry point formed by the variable prize ball entry device 6B, the general prize entry point 10, and the first or second large prize entry point formed by the special variable prize ball entry device 7, and can also pass through the passage gate 41.

In this embodiment, the switch circuit 110 is connected to the first count switch 131SG023A, the second count switch 131SG023B, and the jackpot start switch 131SG024, which is built into the jackpot start gate 131SG042.

Multiple obstructing pins are positioned between the prize ball entry device 6A, the variable prize ball entry device 6B, and the special variable prize ball entry device 7. Therefore, game balls flowing down the left game area 2L cannot enter the second starting prize entry point or the large prize entry point, and game balls flowing down the right game area 2R cannot enter the first starting prize entry point.

As shown in Figure 11-2, in this embodiment, a first special symbol display device 131SG004A capable of variable display of the first special symbol, a second special symbol display device 131SG004B capable of variable display of the second special symbol, a first reserve indicator 131SG025A capable of displaying the first reserve memory count, a second reserve indicator 131SG025B capable of displaying the second reserve memory count, a normal symbol indicator 131SG020 capable of variable display of normal symbols, a normal symbol reserve indicator 131SG025C capable of displaying the normal symbol reserve memory count, and a jackpot A game information display unit is provided, which includes a round indicator 131SG131 capable of displaying the number of rounds (type of jackpot) of the jackpot game during gameplay, a right-shooting lamp 131SG132 that lights up when the game balls are shot towards the right game area 2R, such as in a jackpot game state, high probability/high base state (probability variation state), or low probability/high base state (time reduction state), a probability variation lamp 131SG133 that lights up when in a high probability/high base state (probability variation state), and a time reduction lamp 131SG134 that lights up in both the high probability/high base state (probability variation state) and the low probability/high base state (time reduction state). Note that, in the case of a normal game state, the right-shooting lamp 131SG132 exceptionally lights up from the moment the variable display stops if the variable display result is a jackpot.

As shown in Figure 11-2, the main board 11 is equipped with an information output circuit that outputs game information (signals) to external devices such as the management computer of the amusement facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, via a terminal board (not shown).

In this embodiment, the second large prize opening is provided with a V-prize opening and an outlet located downstream of the V-prize opening. Furthermore, a variable V-prize ball device (V-lid) is provided upstream of the V-prize opening. The variable V-prize ball device changes between a closed state and an open state via a solenoid. In other words, game balls flowing down the second large prize opening can pass through the V-prize opening when the variable V-prize ball device is in the open state, and cannot pass through the V-prize opening when the variable V-prize ball device is in the closed state, instead flowing down to the outlet.

As shown in Figure 11-2, the main board 11 is equipped with a V-switch 131SG023B1, which can detect when a game ball has passed through the V-prize opening located downstream of the second large prize opening, via a switch circuit 110, and a discharge switch 131SG023B2, which can detect when a game ball has passed through the discharge opening.

Furthermore, the performance control board 12 is connected to a vibration motor 61 built into the push button 31B and a movable body motor 207 for operating the movable body 32. The lamp control board 14 is connected to a right-hand shooting LED 131SG031 to prompt right-hand shooting, a first special symbol LED 131SG032 that lights up during the variable display of the first special symbol, a second special symbol LED 131SG033 that lights up during the variable display of the second special symbol, a first reserve LED 131SG034A that lights up when the first reserve memory count is 1 to 2, and a first reserve LED 1 that lights up when the first reserve memory count is 3 to 4. The following are connected: 31SG034B, the second reserve LED 131SG035A which lights up when the second reserve memory count is 1 to 2, the second reserve LED 131SG035B which lights up when the second reserve memory count is 3 to 4, the button LED 62 built into the push button 31B, the movable body LED 208 built into the movable body 32, and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 provided on the gaming machine frame 3.

Figure 11-3(A) is an explanatory diagram illustrating the random values counted on the main board 11. As shown in Figure 11-3(A), in this embodiment, on the main board 11, numerical data representing the random values MR1 for determining the special display result, MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, MR3 for determining the type of variation pattern, MR4 for determining the variation pattern, MR5 for determining the result of the regular display, and MR6 for determining the initial value of MR5 are controlled to be countable. In addition, other random values may be used to enhance the game effect. These random values MR1 to MR6 may be counted by the CPU 103 using different random counters and updated by software, or they may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built into the game control microcomputer 100, or it may be configured as a random number circuit chip separate from the game control microcomputer 100. The random numbers used to control the progress of these games are also called game-specific random numbers.

In this embodiment, the random values MR1 to MR6 are exemplified as being within the ranges shown in Figure 11-3(A). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the ranges of these random values MR1 to MR6 may differ depending on the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to perform various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, the CPU 103 is capable of generating all types of random numbers used on the main board 11 by executing a random number generation program.

The ROM 101 of the game control microcomputer 100 stores not only game control programs but also various table data used to control the progress of the game. For example, ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes multiple judgment tables prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various judgments and decisions. Furthermore, ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes multiple control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, as well as a variable pattern judgment table that stores multiple types of variable display patterns for each symbol in variable displays such as special symbols and regular symbols.

Figure 11-3(B) shows an example of the configuration of the special drawing display result determination table stored in ROM 101. In this embodiment, a common special drawing display result determination table is used for both the first and second special drawings. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and separate special drawing display result determination tables may be used for the first and second special drawings.

The special symbol display result determination table is a table referenced in special symbol games using the first special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the confirmed special symbol resulting in a variable display is derived and displayed, this table determines, based on the random value MR1 used for special symbol display result determination, whether or not to control the game into a jackpot state as a "jackpot."

In this embodiment, the special symbol display result determination table assigns a numerical value (determination value) to the special symbol display result of "jackpot" or "miss," depending on whether the game state of the pachinko machine 1 is the normal state, the time-saving state (low probability state), or the probability variation state (high probability state).

In the special symbol display result determination table, the table data showing the determination value compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is determination data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the game state to a jackpot as a "jackpot" based on the special symbol display result. In the special symbol display result determination table in this embodiment, when the game state is a probability variation state (high probability state), more determination values are assigned to the special symbol display result of "jackpot" than when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in the probability variation state (high probability state) in which probability variation control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability of determining to control the game state to a jackpot as a "jackpot" based on the special symbol display result is higher (approximately 1/80.02 in this embodiment) compared to the probability of determining to control the game state to a jackpot as a "jackpot" based on the special symbol display result when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) (approximately 1/319.68 in this embodiment). In other words, in the special display result determination table, the determination data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the game to a jackpot state, such that when the game state of the pachinko machine 1 is a probability variation state (high probability state), the probability of determining whether or not to control the game to a jackpot state is higher compared to when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

The judgment tables stored in ROM 101 include, in addition to the first special symbol display result judgment table and the second special symbol display result judgment table shown in Figure 7, the jackpot type judgment table (for the first special symbol) shown in Figure 11-3 (C1), the jackpot type judgment table (for the second special symbol) shown in Figure 11-3 (C2), as well as a variation pattern type judgment table, a variation pattern judgment table, a normal symbol display result judgment table (not shown), and a normal symbol variation pattern determination table (not shown).

Furthermore, while the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning a jackpot (payout rate) does not change according to the setting value, it may also be configured such that the probability of winning a jackpot (payout rate) changes according to the setting value.

[Big Win Type Determination Table]
Figures 11-3(C1) and 11-3(C2) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in ROM 101. Of these, Figure 11-3(C1) is the table used when determining the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball entering the first starting prize slot (i.e., when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). Also, Figure 11-3(C1) is the table used when determining the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball entering the second starting prize slot (i.e., when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed).

The jackpot type determination table is a table referenced when a determination is made to make the variable display result a jackpot symbol. It uses a random number (MR2) for jackpot type determination to determine whether the jackpot is one of jackpots A through C.

Here, the types of jackpots in this embodiment will be explained using Figure 11-3(D). In this embodiment, the jackpot types include Jackpot A, Jackpot B, and Jackpot C, in which time-saving control is executed for up to 110 variable displays after the jackpot game state ends. Furthermore, Jackpots A, B, and C are also jackpots in which, after the first round of the jackpot game state, the game ball enters the second large prize slot and then the V prize slot, resulting in probability-changing control being executed for up to 110 variable displays after the jackpot game ends.

In this embodiment, the variable V-prize ball device (V-lid) has two open states: a short open state (e.g., 0.1 seconds) and a long open state (e.g., 15 seconds). For jackpot A, the variable V-prize ball device is in the short open state during the first round of the jackpot game state. For jackpots B and C, the variable V-prize ball device is in the long open state during the first round of the jackpot game state.

The "Big Win A" jackpot state is a normal opening jackpot where the second large prize slot is opened to a player-favorable state in the first round, and the first large prize slot is opened to a player-favorable state from the second to the sixth round. Furthermore, in "Big Win A," the variable V-prize ball device is in a short-open state in the first round, making it extremely difficult to get the ball into the V-prize slot. Therefore, the probability variation control cannot be expected to be executed, effectively making it a normal jackpot.

The "Big Win B" jackpot state is a normal opening jackpot where the second large prize slot is opened to a player-favorable state in the first round, and the first large prize slot is opened to a player-favorable state from the second to the sixth round. Furthermore, in "Big Win B," the variable V-prize ball device is in a long-open state in the first round, making it extremely easy to get the ball into the V-prize slot. Since this can be expected to trigger the probability variation control, it effectively becomes a probability variation jackpot.

The "Big Win C" jackpot state is a normal opening jackpot where the second large prize slot is opened to a player-favorable state in the first round, and the first large prize slot is opened to a player-favorable state from the second to the tenth round. Furthermore, in "Big Win C," the variable V-prize ball device is in a long-open state in the first round, making it extremely easy to get the ball into the V-prize slot. Since this can be expected to trigger the probability variation control, it effectively becomes a probability variation jackpot.

In this embodiment, we have illustrated a configuration with three types of jackpots, A through C. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and there may be two or fewer types of jackpots, or four or more types.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-3 (C1), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), within the range of MR2 determination values from 0 to 299, values from 0 to 149 are assigned to jackpot A, and values from 150 to 299 are assigned to jackpot B. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 11-3 (C2), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), within the range of MR2 determination values from 0 to 299, values from 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot B, and values from 100 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C.

In other words, in this embodiment, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, there is a 50% chance that the game ball will be more likely to enter the V-entry slot during the first round of the jackpot game, resulting in both probability variation control and time reduction control being implemented after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, there is a 100% chance that the game ball will be more likely to enter the V-entry slot during the first round of the jackpot game, resulting in both probability variation control and time reduction control being implemented after the jackpot game ends.

In this embodiment, even if a jackpot A occurs, it is extremely rare for the ball to enter the V-zone when the V-lid is in a short-open state. Therefore, in the case of jackpot A, it is explained that the ball does not enter the V-zone and the probability variation control is not executed. Similarly, even if a jackpot B or jackpot C occurs, it is extremely rare for the ball to not enter the V-zone when the V-lid is in a long-open state. Therefore, in the case of jackpot B or jackpot C, it is explained that the ball enters the V-zone and the probability variation control is executed.

In this embodiment, the type of jackpot is determined using MR2, a random value used for determining the type of jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of jackpot may also be determined using MR1, a random value used for determining the special display result.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, for example, a configuration is shown in which there are jackpot types B and C for the second special symbol, in which 110 rounds of probability variation control and time reduction control can be performed after the jackpot game state ends. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a jackpot D may be provided in which time reduction control is performed 1009 times (probability variation state: 110 times + time reduction state A: 899 times) after the jackpot game state ends. By doing so, the next jackpot is almost certain, thus increasing the level of excitement. Moreover, even if the probability variation control ends without a jackpot occurring during the 110 rounds of probability variation state after the jackpot ends, the game will perform 899 variable displays without a jackpot occurring in time reduction state A (low probability/high base state), and then after performing one variable display in the normal state, it will be controlled to time reduction state B (rescue time reduction state) described later, further increasing the level of excitement.

[Number of time-saving measures]
Figure 11-4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the number of time-saving rounds for each transition trigger. As shown in Figure 11-4, in this embodiment, when a jackpot A occurs and the game ball does not enter the probability variation area, (1) time-saving control is performed 110 times, and (2) low probability control is performed 110 times, resulting in a time-saving state A (in this embodiment, it is controlled to a Battle Rush with 110 time-saving rounds). Also, when either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the game ball enters the probability variation area, (1) time-saving control is performed 110 times, and (2) probability variation control is performed 110 times, resulting in a probability variation state (in this embodiment, it is controlled to an Extreme Battle Rush with 110 time-saving rounds). It is controlled to RUSH). Also, if the variable display is performed 900 times in a low probability state without being controlled to a jackpot, it is controlled to a time-saving state B (in this embodiment, a playtime with 1100 time-saving rounds) in which (1) time-saving control is performed 1100 times and (2) low probability control is performed 1100 times. However, even if the variable display is performed again 900 times in a low probability state without being controlled to a jackpot after the end of time-saving state B, it will not be controlled to time-saving state B again based on this.

Furthermore, the rescue time reduction rate is the percentage of times the game is controlled to a time reduction state via the rescue time reduction. Since the time reduction state via the rescue time reduction is controlled by performing a variable display n times (900 times in this embodiment) without being controlled to a jackpot game state, the rescue time reduction rate K can be calculated as follows.

K={(1-ML)^n}×100
(K = probability of reaching the rescue time reduction, ML = probability of winning the jackpot, n = number of variable display counts)

Specifically, for example, if the jackpot probability ML in this embodiment is approximately 1/319, the rescue time-saving mode reach rate K will be 5.9%. Furthermore, in the case of a gaming machine where the setting value can be adjusted, if the rescue time-saving mode reach rate increases as the jackpot probability is set to a lower value, players can be rescued even with a low jackpot probability setting.

[Variation Pattern]
Figures 11-5 and 11-6 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of variation patterns in this embodiment. The variation patterns in this embodiment are broadly composed of a losing variation pattern where the variable display result is a loss, and a winning variation pattern where the variable display result is a big win.

As shown in Figure 11-5, the losing fluctuation patterns can be broadly classified into: non-reach losing fluctuation patterns (fluctuation pattern type is non-reach), normal reach fluctuation patterns (fluctuation pattern type is normal reach), low-base weak super reach fluctuation patterns (fluctuation pattern type is low-base weak super reach), and normal state (low base state) (low base state). In the normal state (low base state), the reach animation for Low Base Strong Super Reach A is ultimately executed and results in a loss. This is the variation pattern of Low Base Strong Super Reach A (the variation pattern type is Low Base Strong Super Reach A variation pattern), in the normal state (low base state), the reach animation for Low Base Strong Super Reach B is ultimately executed and results in a loss. This is the variation pattern of Low Base Strong Super Reach B (the variation pattern type is Low Base Strong Super Reach B variation pattern), in the normal state (low base state), the reach animation for Low Base Strong Super Reach C is ultimately executed and results in a loss. - A variation pattern of the strongest super reach C), in the normal state (low base state), the variation pattern of the strongest low base super reach (variation pattern type is a variation pattern of the strongest low base super reach), in the time-saving state A or probability change state (high base state), the variation pattern of the high base super reach A (variation pattern type is a variation pattern of the high base super reach A), in the time-saving state A or probability change state (high base state), the variation pattern of the high base super reach A (variation pattern type is a variation pattern of the high base super reach A) The following variations are provided: a variation pattern for High Base Super Reach B that results in a miss (variation pattern type is High Base Super Reach B variation pattern); a variation pattern for High Base Super Reach C that results in a miss when the reach animation for High Base Super Reach C is executed in Time-Saving State A or Probability-Boosting State (High Base State); and a variation pattern for High Base Super Reach D that results in a miss when the reach animation for High Base Super Reach D is executed in Time-Saving State A or Probability-Boosting State (High Base State) (variation pattern type is High Base Super Reach D variation pattern).

The following four types of non-reach variation patterns are provided: PA1-1, where the special symbol variation time is 12,000 ms and no reach animation is executed when the number of reserved special symbols for variable display is 2 or less in the normal state; PA1-2, where the special symbol variation time is 5,000 ms and no reach animation is executed when the number of reserved special symbols for variable display is 3 in the normal state; PA1-3, where the special symbol variation time is 2,000 ms and no reach animation is executed during time-saving control (time-saving state A or probability variation state); and PA1-4, where the special symbol variation time is 500 ms and no reach animation is executed during time-saving control (time-saving state B).

For the variation pattern type of a normal reach, there is one variation pattern, PA2-1, where the special symbol variation time is 20,000 ms, and the normal reach animation is executed but the result is a loss.

The variation pattern type for low-base weak super reach includes two variations: PA2-2, where the special symbol variation time is 43,000 ms and the reach animation for low-base weak super reach A is executed but the result is a loss; and PA2-3, where the special symbol variation time is 53,000 ms and the reach animation for low-base weak super reach B is executed but the result is a loss.

The variation pattern type for Low Base Strong Super Reach A includes three variations: PA2-4, where the special symbol variation time is 63,000 ms, and the reach animation for Low Base Weak Super Reach A is performed before the reach animation for Low Base Strong Super Reach A, resulting in a loss; PA2-5, where the special symbol variation time is 73,000 ms, and the reach animation for Low Base Weak Super Reach B is performed before the reach animation for Low Base Strong Super Reach A, resulting in a loss; and PA2-6, where the special symbol variation time is 40,000 ms, and the reach animation for Low Base Strong Super Reach A is performed without the reach animations for Low Base Weak Super Reach A or Low Base Weak Super Reach B being performed, resulting in a loss.

The variation pattern type for Low Base Strong Super Reach B includes three variations: PA2-7, where the special symbol variation time is 78,000 ms, and the reach animation for Low Base Weak Super Reach A is executed before the reach animation for Low Base Strong Super Reach B, resulting in a loss; PA2-8, where the special symbol variation time is 83,000 ms, and the reach animation for Low Base Weak Super Reach B is executed before the reach animation for Low Base Strong Super Reach B, resulting in a loss; and PA2-9, where the special symbol variation time is 45,000 ms, and the reach animation for Low Base Strong Super Reach B is executed without the reach animations for Low Base Weak Super Reach A or Low Base Weak Super Reach B being executed, resulting in a loss.

The variation pattern type for Low Base Strong Super Reach C includes three variations: PA2-10, where the special symbol variation time is 88,000 ms, and the reach animation for Low Base Weak Super Reach A is executed before the reach animation for Low Base Strong Super Reach C, resulting in a loss; PA2-11, where the special symbol variation time is 93,000 ms, and the reach animation for Low Base Weak Super Reach B is executed before the reach animation for Low Base Strong Super Reach C, resulting in a loss; and PA2-12, where the special symbol variation time is 50,000 ms, and the reach animation for Low Base Strong Super Reach C is executed without the reach animations for Low Base Weak Super Reach A or Low Base Weak Super Reach B, resulting in a loss.

The following three types of variation patterns are provided for the Low-Base Strongest Super Reach variation pattern: PA2-13, where the special symbol variation time is 98,000 ms, and the reach animation of Low-Base Weak Super Reach A is executed before the reach animation of Low-Base Strongest Super Reach is executed, resulting in a loss; PA2-14, where the special symbol variation time is 103,000 ms, and the reach animation of Low-Base Weak Super Reach B is executed before the reach animation of Low-Base Strongest Super Reach is executed, resulting in a loss; and PA2-15, where the special symbol variation time is 60,000 ms, and the reach animation of Low-Base Strongest Super Reach is executed without the reach animations of Low-Base Weak Super Reach A or Low-Base Weak Super Reach B being executed, resulting in a loss.

For variation patterns of type High Base Super Reach A, there is one variation pattern, PA2-16, in which the special symbol variation time is 30,000 ms, and the reach animation of High Base Super Reach A is executed but the result is a loss. For variation patterns of type High Base Super Reach B, there is one variation pattern, PA2-17, in which the special symbol variation time is 30,000 ms, and the reach animation of High Base Super Reach B is executed but the result is a loss. For variation patterns of type High Base Super Reach C, there is one variation pattern, PA2-18, in which the special symbol variation time is 30,000 ms, and the reach animation of High Base Super Reach C is executed but the result is a loss. For variation patterns of type High Base Super Reach D, there is one variation pattern, PA2-19, in which the special symbol variation time is 30,000 ms, and the reach animation of High Base Super Reach D is executed but the result is a loss.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-6, the winning variation patterns are similar to the losing variation patterns, with the following variation pattern types: non-reach, normal reach, low-base strong super reach A, low-base strong super reach B, low-base strong super reach C, low-base strongest super reach, high-base super reach A, high-base super reach B, high-base super reach C, and high-base super reach D.

More specifically, as shown in Figure 11-6, one type of variation pattern, PB1-18, is provided as a variation pattern of the non-reach type, where the special symbol variation time is 500 ms + 15000 ms, and no reach animations are executed during the time-saving control (time-saving state B).

For the variation pattern type of a normal reach, there is one variation pattern called PB1-1, where the special symbol variation time is 20,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the normal reach animation is executed, resulting in a jackpot.

The variation pattern type for Low Base Strong Super Reach A includes three variations: PB1-2, where the special symbol variation time is 63,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and a jackpot is achieved after the Low Base Weak Super Reach A reach animation is performed; PB1-3, where the special symbol variation time is 73,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and a jackpot is achieved after the Low Base Weak Super Reach B reach animation is performed; and PB-4, where the special symbol variation time is 40,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and a jackpot is achieved after the Low Base Strong Super Reach A reach animation is performed without the Low Base Weak Super Reach A or Low Base Weak Super Reach B reach animations being performed.

The variation patterns for the Low Base Strong Super Reach B type include three variations: PB1-5, where the special symbol variation time is 78,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and a jackpot is achieved after the Low Base Weak Super Reach A reach animation is performed; PB1-6, where the special symbol variation time is 83,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and a jackpot is achieved after the Low Base Weak Super Reach B reach animation is performed; and PB1-7, where the special symbol variation time is 45,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and a jackpot is achieved after the Low Base Strong Super Reach B reach animation is performed without the Low Base Weak Super Reach A or Low Base Weak Super Reach B reach animations being performed.

The variation pattern type for Low Base Strong Super Reach C includes three variations: PB1-8, where the special symbol variation time is 88,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and a jackpot is achieved after the Low Base Weak Super Reach A reach animation is performed; PB1-9, where the special symbol variation time is 93,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and a jackpot is achieved after the Low Base Weak Super Reach B reach animation is performed; and PB1-10, where the special symbol variation time is 50,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and a jackpot is achieved after the Low Base Strong Super Reach C reach animation is performed without the Low Base Weak Super Reach A or Low Base Weak Super Reach B reach animations being performed.

The following three types of variation patterns are provided for the Low-Base Strongest Super Reach variation pattern: PB1-11, where the special symbol variation time is 98,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the Low-Base Weak Super Reach A reach animation is performed before the Low-Base Strongest Super Reach reach animation is performed, resulting in a jackpot; PB1-12, where the special symbol variation time is 103,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the Low-Base Weak Super Reach B reach animation is performed before the Low-Base Strongest Super Reach reach animation is performed, resulting in a jackpot; and PB1-13, where the special symbol variation time is 60,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the Low-Base Weak Super Reach A and Low-Base Weak Super Reach B reach animations are not performed before the Low-Base Strongest Super Reach reach animation is performed, resulting in a jackpot.

For variation patterns of type High Base Super Reach A, there is one variation pattern PB1-14 in which the special symbol variation time is 30,000 ms + 15,000 ms and the reach animation of High Base Super Reach A is executed, resulting in a jackpot. For variation patterns of type High Base Super Reach B, there is one variation pattern PB1-15 in which the special symbol variation time is 30,000 ms + 15,000 ms and the reach animation of High Base Super Reach B is executed, resulting in a jackpot. For variation patterns of type High Base Super Reach C, there is one variation pattern PB1-16 in which the special symbol variation time is 30,000 ms + 15,000 ms and the reach animation of High Base Super Reach C is executed, resulting in a jackpot. For the variation pattern type High Base Super Reach D, there is one variation pattern, PB1-17, where the special symbol variation time is 30,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the High Base Super Reach D reach animation is executed, resulting in a jackpot.

[Variation Pattern Type Determination Table / Variation Pattern Determination Table]
The judgment table stored in ROM101 includes multiple variable pattern type judgment tables for determining the type of variable pattern according to the game state and variable display results, as well as multiple variable pattern type judgment tables for determining the variable pattern according to the variable pattern determined in the variable pattern type judgment table, the game state, the variable display results, and the number of reserved special symbols that execute the variable display (number of reserved symbols that are subject to variable display).

In this embodiment, the variable pattern setting process selects a variable pattern type determination table according to the game state and variable display results. Next, the selected variable pattern type determination table is compared with the random value MR3 read in step 131SGS55 of the special symbol normal processing to determine the variable pattern type.

For example, if the game state is normal and the variable display result is a loss, the loss pattern determination table A shown in Figure 11-7(A) is selected, and the type of variation pattern is determined by comparing the loss pattern determination table A with the value of the random number MR3. If the random value MR3 is in the range of 0 to 3299, the variation pattern type is determined to be "Non-Reach". If the random value MR3 is in the range of 3300 to 4053, the variation pattern type is determined to be "Normal Reach". If the random value MR3 is in the range of 4054 to 4073, the variation pattern type is determined to be "Low Base Weak Super Reach". If the random value MR3 is in the range of 4074 to 4081, the variation pattern type is determined to be "Low Base Strong Super Reach A". If the random value MR3 is in the range of 4082 to 4089, the variation pattern type is determined to be "Low Base Strong Super Reach B". If the random value MR3 is in the range of 4090 to 4094, the variation pattern type is determined to be "Low Base Strong Super Reach C". If the random value MR3 is in the range of 4095, the variation pattern type is determined to be "Low Base Strongest Super Reach".

Furthermore, if the game state is either time-saving state A or probability variation state and the variable display result is a miss, the miss variation pattern determination table B shown in Figure 11-7(B) is selected, and the variation pattern type is determined by comparing the value of the random value MR3 with the miss variation pattern determination table B. If the random value MR3 is in the range of 0 to 3849, the variation pattern type is determined to be "Non-Reach". If the random value MR3 is in the range of 3850 to 4048, the variation pattern type is determined to be "Normal Reach". If the random value MR3 is in the range of 4049 to 4066, the variation pattern type is determined to be "High Base Super Reach A". If the random value MR3 is in the range of 4067 to 4083, the variation pattern type is determined to be "High Base Super Reach B". If the random value MR3 is in the range of 4084 to 4094, the variation pattern type is determined to be "High Base Super Reach C". If the random value MR3 is in the range of 4095, the variation pattern type is determined to be "High Base Super Reach D".

Furthermore, if the game state is time-saving state B and the variable display result is a miss, the miss pattern determination table C shown in Figure 11-7(C) is selected, and the type of variation pattern is determined by comparing the value of the random value MR3 with the value of the miss pattern determination table C. If the value of the random value MR3 is in the range of 0 to 4095, the variation pattern type is determined to be "non-reach".

Furthermore, if the game state is normal and the variable display result is a jackpot, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A shown in Figure 11-7(D) is selected, and the variation pattern type is determined by comparing the value of the random value MR3 with the value of the jackpot variation pattern determination table A. If the value of the random value MR3 is in the range of 0 to 1298, the variation pattern type is determined to be "Normal Reach". If the value of the random value MR3 is in the range of 1299 to 1934, the variation pattern type is determined to be "Low Base Strong Super Reach A". If the value of the random value MR3 is in the range of 1935 to 2676, the variation pattern type is determined to be "Low Base Strong Super Reach B". If the value of the random value MR3 is in the range of 2677 to 3706, the variation pattern type is determined to be "Low Base Strong Super Reach C". If the value of the random value MR3 is in the range of 3707 to 4095, the variation pattern type is determined to be "Low Base Strongest Super Reach".

Furthermore, if the game state is either Time-Saving State A or Probability-Variable State and the variable display result is a miss, the Jackpot Variation Pattern Determination Table B shown in Figure 11-7(E) is selected, and the Variation Pattern Type is determined by comparing the value of the Jackpot Variation Pattern Determination Table B with the value of the random number MR3. If the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 0 to 25, the Variation Pattern Type is determined to be "Normal Reach." If the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 26 to 975, the Variation Pattern Type is determined to be "High Base Super Reach A." If the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 976 to 2075, the Variation Pattern Type is determined to be "High Base Super Reach B." If the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 2076 to 3380, the Variation Pattern Type is determined to be "High Base Super Reach C." If the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 3381 to 4095, the Variation Pattern Type is determined to be "High Base Super Reach D."

Furthermore, if the game state is time-saving state B and the variable display result is a miss, the jackpot variation pattern determination table C shown in Figure 11-7(F) is selected, and the variation pattern type is determined by comparing the value of the random number MR3 with the value of the miss variation pattern determination table C. If the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 0 to 4095, the variation pattern type is determined to be "non-reach".

After determining the variation pattern type as described above, one of the variation pattern determination tables shown in Figures 11-8 to 11-10 is selected according to the game state, the variable display result, and the number of reserved special symbols that execute the variable display (number of reserved symbols for variable display). The selected variation pattern determination table is then compared with the random value MR3 read in step 131SGS55 of the special symbol normal processing to determine the variation pattern type.

For example, if the variable display result is a miss, the game state is normal, and the number of variable display target reserved memories is 0 to 2, the miss variation pattern determination table A shown in Figure 11-8(A) is selected, and the variation pattern is determined by comparing this miss variation pattern determination table A with the value of the random value MR4. At this time, if the determined variation pattern type is not a reach, the variation pattern is determined to be PA1-1 if the value of the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined variation pattern type is a normal reach, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-1 if the value of the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined variation pattern type is a low-base weak super reach, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-2 if the value of the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 199, and the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-3 if the value of the random value MR4 is within the range of 200 to 255.

If the determined variation pattern type is Low Base Strong Super Reach A, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-4 if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, PA2-4 if the random value MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, and PA2-5 if the random value MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255. If the determined variation pattern type is Low Base Strong Super Reach B, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-7 if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, PA2-8 if the random value MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, and PA2-9 if the random value MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255.

If the determined variation pattern type is Low Base Strong Super Reach C, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-10 if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, PA2-11 if the random value MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, and PA2-12 if the random value MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255. If the determined variation pattern type is Low Base Strongest Super Reach, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-13 if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, PA2-14 if the random value MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, and PA2-15 if the random value MR4 is within the range of 1743 to 255.

Furthermore, if the variable display result is a miss, the game state is normal, and the number of variable display target reserved memories is 3, the miss variation pattern determination table B shown in Figure 11-8(B) is selected, and the variation pattern is determined by comparing this miss variation pattern determination table B with the value of the random value MR4. In this case, if the determined variation pattern type is non-reach, the variation pattern is determined to PA1-2 if the value of the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined variation pattern type is normal reach, the variation pattern is determined to PA2-1 if the value of the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255.

If the determined variation pattern type is Low Base Strong Super Reach A, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-4 if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, PA2-4 if the random value MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, and PA2-5 if the random value MR4 is within the range of 173 to 255. If the determined variation pattern type is Low Base Strong Super Reach B, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-7 if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, PA2-8 if the random value MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, and PA2-9 if the random value MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255.

If the determined variation pattern type is Low Base Strong Super Reach C, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-10 if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, PA2-11 if the random value MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, and PA2-12 if the random value MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255. If the determined variation pattern type is Low Base Strongest Super Reach, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-13 if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, PA2-14 if the random value MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, and PA2-15 if the random value MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255.

Furthermore, if the variable display result is a miss and the game state is either Time-Saving State A or Probability-Boosting State, the miss variation pattern determination table C shown in Figure 11-9(A) is selected, and the variation pattern is determined by comparing the value of the miss variation pattern determination table C with the value of the random number MR4. In this case, if the determined variation pattern type is not a reach, and the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PA1-3. If the determined variation pattern type is a normal reach, and the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-1.

If the determined variation pattern type is High Base Super Reach A, and the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-16. If the determined variation pattern type is High Base Super Reach B, and the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-17. If the determined variation pattern type is High Base Super Reach C, and the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-18. If the determined variation pattern type is High Base Super Reach D, and the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-19.

Furthermore, if the variable display result is a miss and the game state is time-saving state B, the miss variation pattern determination table D shown in Figure 11-9(B) is selected, and the variation pattern is determined by comparing the value of the miss variation pattern determination table D with the value of the random number MR4. At this time, if the determined variation pattern type is not a reach, and the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PA1-4.

Furthermore, if the variable display result is a jackpot and the game state is normal, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A shown in Figure 11-10(A) is selected, and the variation pattern is determined by comparing the value of the random number MR4 with the value of the jackpot variation pattern determination table A. At this time, if the determined variation pattern type is a normal reach, and the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-1.

If the determined variation pattern type is Low Base Strong Super Reach A, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-2 if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 81, to be PB1-3 if the random value MR4 is within the range of 82 to 166, and to be PB1-4 if the random value MR4 is within the range of 167 to 255. If the determined variation pattern type is Low Base Strong Super Reach B, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-5 if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 81, to be PB1-6 if the random value MR4 is within the range of 82 to 166, and to be PB1-7 if the random value MR4 is within the range of 167 to 255.

If the determined variation pattern type is Low Base Strong Super Reach C, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-8 if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 81, to be PB1-9 if the random value MR4 is within the range of 82 to 166, and to be PB1-10 if the random value MR4 is within the range of 167 to 255. If the determined variation pattern type is Low Base Strongest Super Reach, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-11 if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 81, to be PB1-12 if the random value MR4 is within the range of 82 to 166, and to be PB1-13 if the random value MR4 is within the range of 167 to 255.

Furthermore, if the variable display result is a jackpot and the game state is either Time-Saving State A or Probability-Variable State, the jackpot variation pattern determination table B shown in Figure 11-10(B) is selected, and the variation pattern is determined by comparing the value of the jackpot variation pattern determination table B with the value of the random number MR4. At this time, if the determined variation pattern type is a normal reach, and the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-1.

If the determined variation pattern type is High Base Super Reach A, and the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-14. If the determined variation pattern type is High Base Super Reach B, and the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-15. If the determined variation pattern type is High Base Super Reach C, and the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-16. If the determined variation pattern type is High Base Super Reach D, and the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-17.

Furthermore, if the variable display result is a jackpot and the game state is time-saving state B, the jackpot variation pattern determination table C shown in Figure 11-10(C) is selected, and the variation pattern is determined by comparing the value of the jackpot variation pattern determination table C with the value of the random number MR4. At this time, if the determined variation pattern type is not a reach, and the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-18.

[Expected success rate of Super Reach演出 (Super Reach演出)]
As described above, the types of variation patterns and the expected probability of a big win when a variation pattern is determined are as shown in Figures 11-11 (A) to (C). The expected probability of a big win for a super reach performance is the percentage of times a big win occurs when the corresponding super reach performance is executed. This value is calculated by dividing the percentage of times a big win occurs when the corresponding super reach performance is executed by the sum of the percentage of times a big win occurs when the corresponding super reach performance is executed and the percentage of times a loss occurs when the corresponding super reach performance is executed.

As shown in Figure 11-11(A), among the super reach animations that are performed when the game state is normal, the reach animations of Low Base Weak Super Reach A and Low Base Weak Super Reach B do not directly result in a jackpot, so the jackpot expectation rate for each is 0%. However, the reach animations of Low Base Weak Super Reach A and Low Base Weak Super Reach B may develop into reach animations of other super reaches (Low Base Strong Super Reach A to C, Low Base Strongest Reach). The expectation rate of development from Low Base Weak Super Reach A to reach animations of other super reaches is approximately 44%, and the expectation rate of development from Low Base Weak Super Reach B to reach animations of other super reaches is approximately 68%. The expected development rate of a Super Reach演出 (Super Reach演出) is the probability that a Super Reach演出 will develop into another Super Reach演出 when it is performed. It is calculated by dividing the probability of a Super Reach演出 developing into another by the sum of the probability of a Super Reach演出 resulting in a miss (no development).

Furthermore, among the super reach animations performed when the game is in a normal state, the probability of winning a jackpot is approximately 20% for the low-base strong super reach A, approximately 25% for the low-base strong super reach B, approximately 35% for the low-base strong super reach C, and approximately 55% for the low-base strongest super reach. Furthermore, the probability of winning a jackpot with the reach animations of Low Base Strong Super Reach A-C and Low Base Strongest Super Reach differs depending on whether it develops from Low Base Weak Super Reach A, Low Base Weak Super Reach B, or is executed directly without going through Low Base Weak Super Reach A or B. The probability of winning a jackpot with the reach animation of Low Base Strong Super Reach A developed from Low Base Weak Super Reach A is approximately 19%, the probability of winning a jackpot with the reach animation of Low Base Strong Super Reach A developed from Low Base Weak Super Reach B is approximately 20%, and the probability of winning a jackpot with the reach animation of Low Base Strong Super Reach A executed directly without going through B is approximately 21%, the probability of winning a jackpot with the reach animation of Low Base Strong Super Reach B developed from Low Base Weak Super Reach A is approximately 24%, and the probability of winning a jackpot with Low Base Strong Super Reach B developed from Low Base Weak Super Reach B is approximately 24%. The probability of winning a jackpot in a reach animation is approximately 25%. The probability of winning a jackpot in a reach animation for a low-base strong super reach B executed directly without going through B is approximately 27%. The probability of winning a jackpot in a reach animation for a low-base strong super reach C developed from a low-base weak super reach A is approximately 33%. The probability of winning a jackpot in a reach animation for a low-base strong super reach C developed from a low-base weak super reach B is approximately 35%. The probability of winning a jackpot in a reach animation for a low-base strong super reach C executed directly without going through B is approximately 37%. The probability of winning a jackpot in a reach animation for a low-base strongest super reach developed from a low-base weak super reach A is approximately 53%. The probability of winning a jackpot in a reach animation for a low-base strongest super reach developed from a low-base weak super reach B is approximately 55%. The probability of winning a jackpot in a reach animation for a low-base strongest super reach executed directly without going through B is approximately 57%.

As shown in Figure 11-11(B), when the game state is time-saving state A, the expected probability of winning a jackpot for the reach animation of high-base super reach A is approximately 14%, for high-base super reach B it is approximately 16%, for high-base super reach C it is approximately 27%, and for high-base super reach D it is approximately 70%.

As shown in Figure 11-11(C), when the game state is in a probability variation state, the expected probability of winning a jackpot for the reach animation of High Base Super Reach A is approximately 40%, for High Base Super Reach B it is approximately 45%, for High Base Super Reach C it is approximately 60%, and for High Base Super Reach D it is approximately 90%.

As described later, in Super Reach sequences, it is possible to display an expectation indicator that suggests the probability of winning the jackpot in the corresponding Super Reach sequence using the number of stars. As shown in Figure 11-11(A), among the Super Reach sequences performed when the game state is normal, the low-base weak Super Reach A and B sequences do not display the expectation indicator, the low-base strong Super Reach A sequence displays 3 stars, the low-base strong Super Reach B sequence displays 3.5 stars, the low-base strong Super Reach C sequence displays 4 stars, and the low-base strongest Super Reach sequence displays 4.5 stars. As shown in Figures 11-11(B) and (C), when the game state is in the time-saving state A or the probability variation state, the expectation level indicator for the reach animation of high-base super reach A displays 3 stars, the expectation level indicator for the reach animation of high-base super reach B displays 3.5 stars, the expectation level indicator for the reach animation of high-base super reach C displays 4 stars, and the expectation level indicator for the reach animation of high-base super reach D displays 4.5 stars.

While the same number of stars may be displayed in the expectation indicator for both the Super Reach animation performed in the normal game state and the Super Reach animation performed in the probability variation state, as shown in Figures 11-12 (A) and (B), the suggested jackpot probability is not the same even if the number of stars displayed is the same. In fact, when the number of stars is the same, the Super Reach animation performed in the probability variation state suggests a higher jackpot probability than the Super Reach animation performed in the normal game state.

Furthermore, whether the Super Reach animation is performed when the game state is normal or when the game state is in a probability variation state, the probability of winning a jackpot increases with each 0.5 increase in the number of stars displayed in the probability indication display. As shown in Figures 11-12 (A) and (B), in the probability indication display for Super Reach animations in any game state, the increase in the number of stars increases, and the amount of increase in the probability of winning a jackpot becomes greater. Furthermore, as shown in Figures 11-12(A) and (B), the increase in the expected value of a jackpot when the number of stars displayed in the expected value indicator increases from 3 to 3.5 is the same whether the super reach animation is performed in the normal state or in the probability variation state. However, the increase in the expected value of a jackpot when the number of stars displayed in the expected value indicator increases from 3.5 to 4, and from 4 to 4.5, is greater for the super reach animation performed in the probability variation state than for the super reach animation performed in the normal state.

[Performance control command]
Figure 11-13(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of a performance control command in this embodiment. The performance control command is, for example, a two-byte structure, where the first byte indicates MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is "0". Note that the command form shown in Figure 11-13(A) is just an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command consists of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or three or more.

In the example shown in Figure 11-13(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variation pattern specification command that specifies the variation pattern (variation time) of decorative symbols, etc., that are variably displayed in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, corresponding to the variable display of special symbols in the special game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and it can be any value that is arbitrarily set according to the instructions given by the performance control command. Note that different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern specified in the variation pattern specification command.

Command 8C00H is a variable display result specification command, a performance control command that specifies the variable display result, such as special symbols or decorative symbols. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in Figure 11-13(B), different EXT data is set depending on the determination result (pre-determined result) of whether the variable display result is a "miss" or a "jackpot," and the determination result (jackpot type determination result) of which of several jackpot types will be used if the variable display result is a "jackpot."

In the variable display result specification commands, for example, as shown in Figure 11-13(B), command 8C00H is the first variable display result specification command, which specifies that the variable display result is "miss". Command 8C01H is the second variable display result specification command, which notifies the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A". Command 8C02H is the third variable display result specification command, which notifies the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B". Command 8C03H is the fourth variable display result specification command, which notifies the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot C".

Command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command that specifies the cessation (confirmation) of the variable display of decorative patterns in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5.

Command 9000H is an initialization (power-on) command for displaying the initial screen when the image display device 5 is powered on. Command 9200H is a power-out recovery command for displaying a power-out recovery screen on the image display device 5 indicating that the pachinko game machine 1 has recovered from a power outage.

Command 95XXH is a game state specification command that specifies the current game state in the pachinko machine 1. Depending on the current game state of the pachinko machine 1, different EXT data is set using this game state specification command. As a specific example, command 9500H is designated as the first game state specification command corresponding to game states where time-saving control is not performed (low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is designated as the second game state specification command corresponding to game states where time-saving control is performed (high base state, time-saving state).

Command A0XXH is a jackpot start command (also called the "fanfare command") that specifies the display of a visual effect indicating the start of a jackpot game state. Command A1XXH is a jackpot opening notification command that indicates the period during which the jackpot opening is open during a jackpot game state. Command A2XXH is a jackpot opening after notification command that indicates the period during which the jackpot opening has changed from open to closed during a jackpot game state. Command A3XXH is a jackpot end command that specifies the display of a visual effect at the end of a jackpot game state.

In the jackpot start and jackpot end commands, different EXT data may be set depending on the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting EXT data similar to that of the variable display result notification command. Alternatively, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data in the jackpot start and jackpot end commands may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. In the jackpot opening notification command and the jackpot opening notification command, different EXT data is set corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game state (e.g., "1" to "10").

Command B100H is a first-start-entry designation command that notifies the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A has been met, based on the detection of a game ball that has passed through (entered) the first start-entry

Command C1XXH is a first reserve memory count notification command that notifies the first special symbol reserve memory count in order to display the number of special symbol reserve memories in the first reserve memory display area 132SG005D, etc. Command C2XXH is a second reserve memory count notification command that notifies the second special symbol reserve memory count in order to display the number of special symbol reserve memories in the second reserve memory display area 132SG005U, etc. The first reserve memory count notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when a first start-up entry designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the first start condition has been met, for example, when a game ball has passed through (entered) the first start-up entry point. The second reserve memory count notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when a second start-up entry designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the second start condition has been met, for example, when a game ball has passed through (entered) the second start-up entry point. Furthermore, the first and second reserved memory count notification commands may be sent in response to the start of the special game execution when either the first or second start condition is met (i.e., when the number of reserved memories decreases).

Instead of sending the first and second pending memory count notification commands, a total pending memory count notification command may be sent to notify the total number of pending memories. In other words, a total pending memory count notification command may be used to notify of an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Command C4XXH is a symbol specification command that specifies the winning result at the start of the game. Command C6XXH is a variation category specification command that specifies the variation category of the winning result at the start of the game.

Command D100H is a jackpot start switch pass notification command that signals the start of a jackpot game when the variable display result is a jackpot, meaning the game has passed the jackpot start switch 131SG024. Command D200H is a V-win notification command that signals the start of a jackpot game when the game ball has passed the V-switch 131SG023B1, meaning the game state will be controlled to a probability variation state after the jackpot game ends.

Command E1XXH is a command that notifies the remaining number of time-saving control attempts in the time-saving state (time-saving state A), excluding the rescue time-saving. Command E2XXH is a command that notifies the remaining number of probability-changing control attempts in the probability-changing state.

Command F100H is a command to notify the right-side LED 131SG031 when it lights up. Command F101H is a command to notify the right-side LED 131SG031 when it turns off.

Command 91XXH is a command for specifying the number of recovery time reductions. It is a performance control command that converts the value of the recovery time reduction counter to hexadecimal and specifies it when power is restored. In this command, for example, as shown in Figure 11-13(C), different EXT data is set depending on each digit (1st digit, 2nd digit, 3rd digit, 4th digit) of the recovery time reduction counter value (a 4-digit value) when power is restored.

In the recovery time reduction count specification commands, for example, as shown in Figure 11-13(C), commands 9100H to 910FH are recovery time reduction count specification 1 commands, which specify the first digit of the recovery time reduction count value. Commands 9110H to 911FH are recovery time reduction count specification 2 commands, which specify the second digit of the recovery time reduction count value. Commands 9130H to 913FH are recovery time reduction count specification 3 commands, which specify the third digit of the recovery time reduction count value. Commands 9140H to 914FH are recovery time reduction count specification 4 commands, which specify the fourth digit of the recovery time reduction count value.

Command 94XXH is a command to specify the number of rescue time reductions, and is a performance control command that specifies the remaining variable number of displays (126 or less) until rescue time reduction is triggered. In the rescue time reduction count specification command, for example, as shown in Figure 11-13(D), different EXT data is set depending on the remaining variable number of displays (126 or less) until rescue time reduction is triggered.

In the commands for specifying the number of rescue time reductions, for example, as shown in Figure 11-13(D), command 9400H is a rescue time reduction count A specification command, indicating that the rescue time reduction has been reached. Command 9401H is a rescue time reduction count B specification command, indicating that 1 to 125 times remain until the rescue time reduction is reached. Command 947EH is a rescue time reduction count C specification command, indicating that 126 times remain until the rescue time reduction is reached. Command 947FH is a rescue time reduction count D specification command, indicating that 127 or more times remain until the rescue time reduction is reached.

Command 96XXH is a command to specify the number of rescue time reductions (2), and is a performance control command that specifies the remaining variable display count (in units of 100) until rescue time reduction is triggered. In the command to specify the number of rescue time reductions (2), for example, a value corresponding to the remaining variable display count (in units of 100) until rescue time reduction is triggered is set in the EXT data of the command. For example, if the remaining variable display count until rescue time reduction is triggered is 100, command 9601H is sent as the command to specify the number of rescue time reductions (2). If the remaining variable display count is 700, command 9607H is sent as the command to specify the number of rescue time reductions (1). Command 9F00(H) is a command to specify a customer waiting demonstration.

[Game control data storage area]
The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in Figure 11-2 can be a backup RAM, where part or all of it is backed up by a backup power supply generated on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 will be saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor acting as the backup power supply discharges and the backup power supply becomes unable to supply power). In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, i.e., the control state of the game control means (such as the special symbol process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls should be saved in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is the data necessary to restore the control state to what it was before the power outage occurred, based on that data, when power is restored after a power outage or the like. Furthermore, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data storage area 131SG150, as shown in Figure 11-14, which is a region for storing various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The game control data storage area 131SG150 shown in Figure 11-14 includes a first special symbol hold storage unit 131SG151A, a second special symbol hold storage unit 131SG151B, a regular symbol hold storage unit 131SG151C, a game control flag setting unit 131SG152, a game control timer setting unit 131SG153, a game control counter setting unit 131SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 131SG155.

The first special symbol hold storage unit 131SG151A stores hold data for special symbol games (special symbol games using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) that have not yet started, but where a game ball has passed through (entered) the first starting entry opening formed by the prize ball entry device 6A and a starting entry (first starting entry) has occurred. As an example, the first special symbol hold storage unit 131SG151A associates the hold number with the order in which the game balls enter the first starting entry opening (the order in which the game balls are detected), and stores numerical data such as random values MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random values MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, random values MR3 for determining the type of variation pattern, and random values MR4 for determining the variation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 etc. based on the fulfillment of the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball, as hold data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). Furthermore, the upper limit of the amount of reserved data (reserved memory) that can be stored in the second special symbol reserved memory unit 131SG151B is always four, regardless of the game state. The reserved data stored in the first special symbol reserved memory unit 131SG151A indicates that the execution of the special symbol game using the first special symbol is reserved, and this reserved information allows for the determination of whether or not a jackpot will occur based on the variable display result (special symbol display result) in this special symbol game.

The second special symbol hold storage unit 131SG151B stores hold data for special symbol games (special symbol games using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) that have not yet started, but where a game ball has passed through (entered) the second starting entry opening formed by the variable prize ball device 6B and a starting entry (second starting entry) has occurred. As an example, the second special symbol hold storage unit 131SG151B associates the hold number with the order in which the game balls enter the second starting entry opening (the order in which the game balls are detected), and stores numerical data such as random values MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random values MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, random values MR3 for determining the type of variation pattern, and random values MR4 for determining the variation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 etc. based on the fulfillment of the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball, as hold data until the number of such data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). Furthermore, the upper limit of the amount of hold data (hold data) that can be stored in the second special symbol hold storage unit 131SG151B is always four, regardless of the game state. The hold data stored in the second special symbol hold storage unit 131SG151B indicates that the execution of the special symbol game using the second special symbol is pending. This hold information allows for the determination of whether or not a jackpot will occur based on the variable display result (special symbol display result) in this special symbol game.

In other words, in this embodiment, up to four reserved memories can be stored as the first reserved memory (reserved memories that can be stored in the first reserved memory unit 131SG151A), and up to four reserved memories can be stored as the second reserved memory (reserved memories that can be stored in the second reserved memory unit 131SG151B).

Furthermore, it is also possible to store the reserved information (first reserved information) based on the fulfillment of the first start condition (when the game ball passes through the first start entry point) and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the fulfillment of the second start entry (when the game ball passes through the second start entry point), in a common reserved memory unit, associated with the reserved number. In this case, the start entry point data indicating which of the first or second start entry points the game ball passed through (entered) should be included in the reserved information and stored in association with the reserved number.

Furthermore, during the execution of variable display, the CPU 103 first, if a second special symbol hold memory exists during the normal processing of special symbols (see Figure 6), reads the random values MR1 to MR4 from the second special symbol hold memory unit 131SG151B, and then shifts the contents of the second special symbol hold memory unit 131SG151B. In other words, if the second special symbol hold memory unit 131SG151B has the random values MR1 to MR4 stored as the hold memory for hold number 1, the CPU 103 reads the random values MR1 to MR4 stored as the hold memory for hold number 1, erases the hold memory for hold number 1, and restores the hold memory stored as the hold memory for hold number 2 as the hold memory for hold number 1, the hold memory stored as the hold memory for hold number 3 as the hold memory for hold number 2, and the hold memory stored as the hold memory for hold number 4 as the hold memory for hold number 3.

Furthermore, if no hold memory is stored in the second special symbol hold memory unit 131SG151B, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first special symbol hold memory exists. If the first special symbol hold memory exists, the CPU 103 reads random values MR1 to MR4 from the first special symbol hold memory unit 131SG151A and then shifts the contents of the first special symbol hold memory unit 131SG151A. In other words, if the CPU 103 has the random values MR1 to MR4 stored as the reserved memory for reserved number 1 in the first special figure reserved memory unit 131SG151A, it reads out the random values MR1 to MR4 stored as the reserved memory for reserved number 1, erases the reserved memory for reserved number 1, and restores the reserved memory stored as the reserved memory for reserved number 2 as the reserved memory for reserved number 1, the reserved memory stored as the reserved memory for reserved number 3 as the reserved memory for reserved number 2, and the reserved memory stored as the reserved memory for reserved number 4 as the reserved memory for reserved number 3.

Then, the CPU 103 performs a determination of the variable display result based on the random value MR1 read from the first special symbol hold storage unit 131SG151A or the second special symbol hold storage unit 131SG151B (and if the variable display result is a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot based on the random value MR2). After that, in the variation pattern determination process (see Figure 6), it determines the variation pattern type using different variation pattern type determination tables depending on the game state, the variable display result, and the number of special symbols that execute the variable display. Furthermore, it determines the variation pattern using different variation pattern determination tables depending on the determined variation pattern type, game state, number of hold memories, etc.

In other words, in this embodiment, the CPU 103 can determine the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting process according to the number of reserved memories obtained by subtracting 1 from the reserved memory immediately before the variation display.

The regular symbol hold storage unit 131SG151C stores hold information for regular symbol games that have not yet been started by the regular symbol display unit 20, even though a game ball has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the regular symbol hold storage unit 131SG151C associates the hold number with the order in which the game balls are detected by the gate switch 21, and stores numerical data such as a random value MR4 for determining the regular symbol display result, extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the passage of the game balls, as hold data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 131SG152 is equipped with multiple types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 131SG152 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating whether it is on or off for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 131SG153 is equipped with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 131SG153 stores data indicating the timer values for each of several types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 131SG154 is equipped with multiple types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 131SG154 stores data indicating the count values for each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 131SG154 may also be equipped with a random counter for counting some or all of the random numbers used for the game, which can be updated by the CPU 103 via software.

The random counter in the game control counter setting unit 131SG154 stores random values not generated by the random number circuit 104, such as numerical data representing random values MR1 to MR6, as random count values. The numerical data representing each random value is updated periodically or irregularly in response to software execution by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count values may update the random count values independently of the numerical data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or it may update the random count values by applying predetermined processing, such as scrambling or arithmetic processing, to all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit 131SG155 is equipped with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 131SG155 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of several types of buffers.

[Performance control data storage area]
The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 is provided with a performance control data holding area 131SG190, as shown in Figure 11-15(A), which is a region for holding various data used to control performance operations. The performance control data holding area 131SG190 shown in Figure 11-15(A) includes a performance control flag setting unit 131SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 131SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 131SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 131SG194.

The performance control flag setting unit 131SG191 is equipped with multiple types of flags whose status can be updated according to the performance operation status, such as the display status of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, or performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 131SG191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 131SG192 is equipped with multiple types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 131SG192 stores data indicating the timer values for each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit 131SG193 is equipped with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance actions. For example, the performance control counter setting unit 131SG193 stores data indicating the count value for each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 131SG194 is equipped with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 131SG194 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of several types of buffers.

In this embodiment, the data constituting the start-up winning command buffer 131SG194A, as shown in Figure 11-15(B), is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting unit 131SG194. The start-up winning command buffer 131SG194A is provided with a storage area (areas corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total number of reserved memories in the first special feature reserved memory (for example, "4"). The start-up winning command buffer 131SG194A is also provided with a storage area (areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total number of reserved memories in the second special feature reserved memory (for example, "4"). When a starting prize is won in the first or second starting prize slot, four commands—a starting slot entry designation command (either the first or second starting slot entry designation command), a symbol designation command, a variable category designation command, and a hold memory count notification command (either the first or second hold memory count notification command)—are transmitted as a set from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The starting prize received command buffer 131SG194A has storage areas corresponding to the first and second special symbol hold memory. These storage areas (entries) are allocated to store the starting slot entry designation command, the symbol designation command, the variable category designation command, the hold memory count notification command, and the hold display flag, each associated with the number of hold memories, and are divided into the first and second special symbol hold memory.

When the start condition is met and the variable display of the highest-level reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") begins, the contents (data) of the reserved memory for which the start condition was met are copied to the active display buffer 131SG194B in Figure 11-15(C). Simultaneously, the copied contents of the reserved memory are deleted from the start-winning received command buffer 131SG194A. The contents of the storage areas lower than the deleted reserved memory are then shifted one by one to the higher-level storage areas.

As described above, the active display buffer 131SG194B copies the contents (data) of the held memory (buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") when the variable display of the held memory (buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") is started. Therefore, as shown in Figure 11-15(C), it has a storage area similar to the start-up prize-receiving command buffer 131SG194A. Specifically, it has areas for storing the start-up prize-specifying command, the symbol-specifying command, the variable category command, the held memory count notification command, and the held display flag.

In this embodiment, if a starting win occurs when variable display is not being executed and no hold memory exists, the starting gate win designation command, symbol designation command, variable category command, and hold memory count notification command based on the starting win are stored in the active display buffer 131SG194B without passing through the starting win received command buffer 131SG194A. The hold display flag is set when the performance control CPU 120 executes the pre-read notification setting process (S161) described later.

Furthermore, the contents of the active display buffer 131SG194B are cleared (deleted) during the special symbol win waiting process, which is executed when the variable display ends.

Furthermore, the pending display flag indicates the display mode of the active display corresponding to the pending display and the variable display during execution. As will be explained in detail later, in this embodiment, the display modes of these pending and active displays (the value of the pending display flag) can suggest the proportion of the game being controlled to a jackpot state.

[Start-up prize determination process]
Figure 11-16 is a flowchart showing the start-up prize determination process (S101) shown in Figure 6. In the start-up prize determination process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the first start-up switch 22A is ON or OFF based on a detection signal from the first start-up switch 22A, which is provided corresponding to the first start-up prize opening formed by the prize ball device 6A (131SGS101). At this time, if the first start-up switch 22A is ON (131SGS101; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the first special feature reserve memory count, which is the number of reserved memories for a special feature game using the first special feature, is at a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory count) (131SGS102). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to identify the first special feature reserve memory count by, for example, reading the first reserve memory count value, which is the stored value of the first reserve memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 131SG154. If the number of reserved first special symbols stored in 131SGS102 is not at the upper limit (131SGS102; N), then, for example, the value stored in the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 131SG155 is set to "1" (131SGS103).

When the first start port switch 22A is off (131SGS101; N), or when the number of reserved special symbols in the first special symbol game has reached its upper limit (131SGS102; Y), the second start port switch 22B is turned on or not, based on the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B, which is provided in correspondence with the second start port formed by the variable prize ball device 6B (131SGS104). In this case, if the second start port switch 22B is on (131SGS104; Y), the second special symbol reserved symbol game number, which is the number of reserved special symbols in the special symbol game using the second special symbol, is determined to be at a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4" as the upper limit of reserved symbols) (131SGS105). The CPU 103 only needs to determine the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol by reading the second reserved ball count value, which is the value stored in the second reserved ball count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 131SG154. If the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol is not at the upper limit (131SGS105; N), then, for example, the value stored in the start-up buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 131SG155 is set to "2" (131SGS106).

After executing either process 131SGS103 or 131SGS106, the number of reserved special symbols, corresponding to the value stored in the start-up buffer, is updated by adding 1 (131SGS107). For example, when the start-up buffer value is "1", the first reserved symbol count value is added by 1, while when the start-up buffer value is "2", the second reserved symbol count value is added by 1. In this way, the first reserved symbol count value is updated to increase by 1 when a game ball passes through (enters) the first start-up entry point and the first start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the first special symbol is met. The second reserved symbol count value is also updated to increase by 1 when a game ball passes through (enters) the second start-up entry point and the second start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the second special symbol is met. At this time, the total number of reserved symbols is also updated by adding 1 (131SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the value stored in the total reserved memory counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 131SG154, can be updated by adding 1.

After executing the processing of 131SGS108, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 131SG154, representing the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random value MR2 for determining the type of win, the random value MR3 for determining the type of variation pattern, and the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern (131SGS109). The numerical data representing each of these extracted random values, along with the start gate buffer value, are stored as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special symbol hold storage unit (131SGS110).

The numerical data representing the random values MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and MR2 for determining the type of win are used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbols or decorative symbols is a "jackpot" or a "minor win," and further, if the variable display result is a "jackpot" or a "minor win," to determine the type of jackpot or minor win. The random values MR3 and MR4 for determining the variation pattern type are used to determine the variation pattern, including the variable display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols. The CPU 103 extracts numerical data representing all of the random values used to determine the variable display pattern, including the variable display result and variable display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols, by executing the processing of 131SGS109.

Following the processing of 131SGS110, the transmission settings for the start-up entry designation command are configured according to the start-up buffer value (131SGS111). For example, when the start-up buffer value is "1", the settings for transmitting the first start-up entry designation command are configured to the performance control board 12 by storing the storage address of the first start-up entry designation command table in ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. Conversely, when the start-up buffer value is "2", the settings for transmitting the second start-up entry designation command are configured to the performance control board 12 by storing the storage address of the second start-up entry designation command table in ROM 101 in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. The start-up entry designation command thus configured is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special symbol process processing is completed, by executing the command control processing S27 shown in Figure 4.

The CPU 103 executes a random value determination process upon winning, following the processing of 131SGS111 (131SGS112). Then, it sets up the system to send a reserved memory count notification command to the performance control board 12, for example, by storing the storage address of the reserved memory count notification command table in ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer (131SGS113). The reserved memory count notification command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special symbol process processing is completed, by executing the command control process S27 shown in Figure 4.

After executing the process in 131SGS113, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "1" (131SGS114). If the start port buffer value is "1" (Y in 131SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared, its stored value is initialized to "0" (131SGS115), and then the process in 2390SGS104 proceeds. Conversely, if the start port buffer value is "2" (N in 131SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared, its stored value is initialized to "0" (131SGS116), and then the start port entry process is terminated. This ensures that even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start port entry for a game ball, the processing based on the detection of valid start ports from both switches can be reliably completed.

[Random value determination process upon winning a prize]
Figure 11-17(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed by 131SGS112 in Figure 11-17 as a random value determination process at the time of winning. In this embodiment, when the variable display of special symbols or decorative symbols is started, the special symbol normal processing (Figure 6) determines whether or not to control the game state to a jackpot as a "jackpot" based on the special symbol display result (variable display result of special symbols). In addition, the variation pattern setting processing (Figure 6) determines the variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative symbols. On the other hand, separate from these determinations, when a game ball is detected at the starting entry point (first starting entry point or second starting entry point), the CPU 103 executes the random value determination process at the time of winning in S112 to determine whether or not to determine whether or not to derive and display a jackpot symbol as the special symbol display result. As a result, before the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of game balls entering the starting prize slot begins, that is, before it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot at the start of the variable display, it is determined that the special symbol display result will be a "jackpot". Based on this determination result, the performance control CPU 120 and the like will execute pre-announcement effects such as panel display effects and hold-announcement effects, as described later.

In the random number determination process at the time of winning, as shown in Figure 11-17, the CPU 103 first identifies the game state (step 131SGS121) and selects the display result determination table shown in Figure 11-3(B) (step 131SGS122). Then, in step 131SGS123a, the CPU 103 compares the random number MR1 extracted in step 131SGS109 with the display result determination table and determines whether the random number MR1 is within the range for determining a jackpot.

If the random value MR1 is outside the range for determining a jackpot, i.e., if the variable display result is a miss, the system sets the transmission of a symbol specification command corresponding to the miss (step 131SGS126a). Then, it determines whether the game state is a normal state or not (step 131SGS126b). If the game state is a normal state, the system selects the miss variation pattern type determination table A shown in Figure 11-7(A) and proceeds to step 131SGS131 (step 131SGS126c).

If the game state is not the normal state, it is further determined whether the game state is the time-saving state B (step 131SGS126d). If the game state is not the time-saving state B, that is, if the game state is time-saving state A or the probability-changing state, the losing variation pattern type determination table B shown in Figure 11-7(B) is selected and the process proceeds to step 131SGS131 (step 131SGS126e). If the game state is the time-saving state B, the losing variation pattern type determination table C shown in Figure 11-7(C) is selected and the process proceeds to step 131SGS131 (step 131SGS126f).

Furthermore, in step 131SGS123a, if the random value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination value, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of the symbol specification command corresponding to the jackpot (step 131SGS129). Then, it determines whether the game state is the normal state or not (step 131SGS130a). If the game state is the normal state, it selects the jackpot variation pattern type determination table A shown in Figure 11-7(D); if the game state is the time-saving state A or the probability-changing state, it selects the jackpot variation pattern type determination table B shown in Figure 11-7(E); and if the game state is the time-saving state B, it selects the jackpot variation pattern type determination table C shown in Figure 11-7(F), and proceeds to step 131SGS131 (steps 131SGS130b, 131SGS130d, and 131SGS130e).

In step 131SGS131, the CPU 103 compares the selected variation pattern type determination table with the random value MR3 extracted in step 131SGS109 to determine the variation category from non-reach, super reach, and other (normal reach). For example, if the random value MR3 is a variation pattern type of non-reach, the variation category is determined to be non-reach; if the random value MR3 is a variation pattern type of normal reach, the variation category is determined to be other (normal reach); and if the random value MR3 is any of low-base weak super reach A/B, low-base strong super reach A, low-base strong super reach B, low-base strong super reach C, low-base strongest super reach, high-base super reach A, high-base super reach B, high-base super reach C, or high-base super reach D, the variation category is determined to be super reach. Then, the transmission settings for the variable category specification command (one of the options shown in Figure 11-17(B)) corresponding to the judgment result are configured, and the random value judgment process for winning is terminated (Step 131SGS132).

Furthermore, the commands configured for transmission are sent to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in Figure 5.

[Game control main processing]
Figure 11-18 is a flowchart showing the main game control process in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the processes in steps S1 to S7, S8 to S9, and S10 to S12 are the same as those shown in Figure 4.

In this embodiment, when a performance control command instructing recovery from a power outage is sent in step S7, the CPU 103 checks the value of the recovery time reduction counter, which counts the remaining variable number of display counts until the recovery time reduction occurs. It then converts the current value of the recovery time reduction counter to hexadecimal, sets the value, and sends a recovery time reduction count specification command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 131SGS0013).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the current value of the relief time reduction counter and sends a relief time reduction count specification command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 131SGS0014). For example, if the current value of the relief time reduction counter is between 1 and 125, the CPU 103 sends command 9401H as the relief time reduction count specification command. Therefore, in this embodiment, if the RAM clear process is not executed when the gaming machine is powered on and the recovery process is executed instead, the relief time reduction count specification command is sent, and the remaining variable display count until the current relief time reduction is notified.

In this embodiment, we show a case where, upon power restoration, a command specifying the number of recovery time reductions and another command specifying the number of recovery time reductions are sent separately from the command sent during power restoration. However, the system is not limited to this configuration. For example, the EXT data of the command sent during restoration in step S7 (e.g., the power-on command) may be configured to include a value corresponding to the remaining number of recovery time reductions before transmission.

Furthermore, when a RAM clear is requested in step S3, when no backup data is found in step S4, or when an abnormality is found in the backup RAM in step S5, the initialization process in step S8 performs a clear operation on the area including the area for the rescue time reduction count counter.

Furthermore, when a performance control command instructing initialization is transmitted in step S9, the CPU 103 sets the relief time-saving counter to "900" (step 131SGS0015). Therefore, in this embodiment, if a RAM clear process is performed when the gaming machine is powered on, the relief time-saving counter is set to "900". In other words, in this embodiment, if a jackpot does not occur after 900 variable display attempts following a RAM clear process when the gaming machine is powered on, the machine enters relief time-saving mode and is controlled to time-saving state B. In this embodiment, since the performance control command instructing initialization transmitted in step S9 corresponds to the initial value ("900") set in the relief time-saving counter, the CPU 103 can also determine the initial value to set in the relief time-saving counter based on the transmission of the performance control command instructing initialization.

Next, the CPU 103 checks the value of the rescue time reduction count counter (which is "900" in this embodiment), converts the current value of the rescue time reduction count counter to hexadecimal, sets the value, and sends a command to the CPU 120 for performance control to specify the number of rescue time reductions during recovery (step 131SGS0016).

Thus, the setting of the relief time reduction counter is performed before the timer interrupt processing, which is part of the game's progression process, is executed. This prevents the variable display from starting before the relief time reduction counter is set, ensuring reliable management of the number of attempts until the relief time reduction is reached.

In this embodiment, the initial setting of the relief time reduction count counter is shown when the RAM clear process is executed upon power-on to the gaming machine. However, the system is not limited to this configuration; it may also be configured so that the relief time reduction count counter is not initialized when the RAM clear process is executed. Such a configuration allows the game to start from the state where the relief time reduction count counter value from the previous day continued, thereby reducing the investment required to trigger the relief time reduction and ensuring that the system is not disadvantageous to the player.

Furthermore, when configuring as described above, the system may be configured so that the initial setting of the recovery time reduction count counter is not performed only when the clear switch is detected as ON (step S3; Yes) and the RAM clear process is executed, while the system may be configured to perform the initial setting of the recovery time reduction count counter when a RAM abnormality is detected (steps S4, S5; No) and the RAM clear process is executed.

[Time-saving flag, probability-increasing flag]
In this embodiment, the time-saving flag can be set when any of the conditions for controlling to the time-saving state are met. There are two time-saving flags: time-saving flag A and time-saving flag B. In the following description, clearing (erasing) a flag may be referred to as resetting the flag.

The time-saving flag A is set when the game is controlled to time-saving state A, which is triggered via jackpot A, jackpot B, or jackpot C. This time-saving flag A is set when the jackpot game state of jackpot A ends, and is cleared when time-saving state A ends (at the timing of a jackpot during time-saving state A, or when the 110 time-saving control rounds end and the game returns to the normal state).

The Time-Saving Flag B is set when the game is controlled in Time-Saving State B, which is controlled via the rescue Time-Saving feature. This Time-Saving Flag B is set when 900 variable displays are executed after a RAM clear, during which the display result is not a winning symbol, or when 900 variable displays are executed in a low-probability state after a winning game state ends, during which the display result is not a winning symbol. It is cleared when Time-Saving State B ends (e.g., when a winning combination occurs during Time-Saving State B, or when the 1100 Time-Saving controls end and the game returns to the normal state).

The probability variation flag is set when the game is controlled to a probability variation state. In this embodiment, when a V-win occurs in the first round of a jackpot game, the probability variation flag is set when the game state is controlled to a probability variation state at the end of the jackpot game. This probability variation flag is cleared at the timing when the probability variation state ends (e.g., when a jackpot occurs during the probability variation state, or when the 110th probability variation control is executed and the game is controlled to a normal state). For example, if the probability variation flag is determined to be YES in step 131SGS69A of Figure 11-20 (described later), it is cleared based on the fact that the variable display has been controlled to a probability variation state for 110 times.

[Special pattern normal processing]
Figures 11-19 and 11-20 are flowcharts showing the normal special symbol processing (step S110) in the special symbol processing. In the normal special symbol processing, the CPU 103 checks the value of the combined reserved memory count (step 131SGS51). Specifically, it checks the count value of the combined reserved memory count counter, which counts the sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count. If the combined reserved memory count is not 0, the CPU 103 checks whether the second reserved memory count is 0 or not (step 131SGS52). Specifically, it checks whether the value of the second reserved memory count counter, which counts the second reserved memory count, is 0 or not. If the second reserved memory count is not 0, the CPU 103 sets the data indicating "second" to the special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol processing is being performed on the first special symbol or the second special symbol) (step 131SGS53). If the second reserved memory count is 0 (i.e., only the first reserved memory count is accumulated), the CPU 103 sets the special symbol pointer to data indicating "first" (step 131 SGS 54).

In this embodiment, the execution of steps 131SGS52 to S54 prioritizes the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol over the variable display of the first special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for initiating the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled to take precedence over the first start condition for initiating the variable display of the first special symbol.

Furthermore, the system is not limited to the configuration shown in this embodiment. For example, it may be configured to perform variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the order in which the game balls enter the first and second starting prize slots.

Next, the CPU 103 reads each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved memories = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 131SGS55). Specifically, if the special symbol pointer indicates "first," the CPU 103 reads each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory number buffer and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Furthermore, if the special symbol pointer indicates "second," the CPU 103 reads each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory number buffer and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 decrements the count value of the reserved memory counter indicated by the special symbol pointer by 1, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 131SGS56). Specifically, if the special symbol pointer indicates "first," the CPU 103 decrements the count value of the first reserved memory counter by 1 and shifts the contents of each storage area in the first reserved memory buffer. If the special symbol pointer indicates "second," the CPU 103 decrements the count value of the second reserved memory counter by 1 and shifts the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory buffer.

In other words, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first," the CPU 103 stores each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory count = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory count buffer of the RAM 102 into the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory count = n-1. Furthermore, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second," the CPU 103 stores each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory count = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory count buffer of the RAM 102 into the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory count = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which the random values stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) are extracted always matches the order of first reserved memory number (or second reserved memory number) = 1, 2, 3, 4.

Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the combined reserved memory count by 1. That is, it subtracts 1 from the count value of the combined reserved memory count counter (step 131SGS57). The CPU 103 also saves the value of the combined reserved memory count counter before the subtraction of 1 to a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 reads a random number for determining a win from the random number buffer area (step 131SGS61) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 131SGS62). In this case, the CPU 103 reads a random number for determining a win that was extracted in the start-up prize-winning determination process (step S101) and stored in the first and second reserve memory buffers, and performs a jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value with a random number for determining a win, and if they match, it is determined to be a jackpot. In other words, it is a program that performs the jackpot determination process. In this case, if the probability variation flag indicating a probability variation state is not set (i.e., it is in a low probability state), the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination using the low probability jackpot determination value. Also, if the probability variation flag is set (i.e., it is in a high probability state), the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination using the high probability jackpot determination value. The CPU 103 determines that a win is awarded for the special symbol if the value of the random number used for determining a win matches any of the winning values.

If it is determined that a jackpot has been awarded (Step 131SGS63; Yes), the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot has been awarded (Step 131SGS64). Then, the CPU 103 determines the type of jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B, or jackpot C) corresponding to the value of the random number used for type determination stored in the random number buffer area (Step 131SGS65). In this case, the CPU 103 reads the random number used for type determination, which was extracted in the start-up prize award determination process (Step S101) and stored in the first and second reserve memory buffers, and determines the type of jackpot. Then, it proceeds to Step 131SGS70. On the other hand, if it is not determined that a jackpot has been awarded (Step 131SGS63; No), it proceeds to Step 131SGS66.

In this embodiment, by performing the normal processing of special symbols, a rescue time-saving condition (the value of the rescue time-saving count counter being subtracted to "0") can be generated regardless of the variable display result (jackpot or miss). In this embodiment, the system is controlled to time-saving state A based on a jackpot A, and to time-saving state B based on the completion of a predetermined number of variable displays (900 times in this embodiment) without another jackpot. However, it is conceivable that the variable display result of a variable display where the rescue time-saving condition has been met may be a jackpot. Therefore, if the variable display result of a variable display where the rescue time-saving condition has been met is a jackpot, the system is configured to control the system to time-saving state A based on the jackpot.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the time-saving counter, which counts the number of times the variable display is executed during the time-saving state, is 0 (step 131SGS66). If the value of the time-saving counter is not 0, the CPU 103 deducts 1 from the value of the time-saving counter (step 131SGS67) and checks whether the value of the time-saving counter after the deduction is 0 (step 131SGS68). If the value of the time-saving counter after the deduction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a time-saving termination flag indicating that the time-saving state will end when the variable display ends (step 131SGS69).

In this embodiment, steps 131SGS66 to 131SGSS69 are executed to subtract from the time-saving counter before the counting process of the variable display counts up to the relief time-saving feature from step 131SGS71 onwards. However, the system is not limited to this configuration. For example, the system may be configured to perform the subtraction process for the time-saving counter after the counting process of the variable display counts up to the relief time-saving feature from step 131SGS71 onwards. In this case, for example, if the variable display results in a relief time-saving feature, setting the time-saving counter to "110" (see step 131SGS172) and then performing the subtraction process would result in an extra 1 being subtracted from the time-saving counter. Therefore, for variable displays resulting in a relief time-saving feature, the system may be configured to add 1 to the time-saving counter again after the subtraction process. Alternatively, the system may be configured to pre-set the time-saving counter to "111," which is one more than the default value.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the probability variation flag is set (step 131SGS69A). If the probability variation flag is set (i.e., the game is in a probability variation state), the process proceeds to step 131SGS84. In this embodiment, because the process in step 131SGS69A is executed, if the game is in a probability variation state, the processes from step 131SGS70 onwards (especially the process in step 131SGSS71) are not performed. Therefore, even if the variable display is executed when the game state is in a probability variation state (in this embodiment, during Extreme Battle Rush), the value of the relief time reduction counter is not reduced. If the probability variation flag is not set (i.e., the game is not in a probability variation state), the process proceeds to step 131SGSS70.

In this embodiment, if the probability variation flag is set, the process from step 131SGSS70 onwards is not executed, and the system proceeds to step 131SGS84. However, the system is not limited to this configuration. Even if the probability variation flag is set, the system may proceed to step 131SGSS70, but the process in step 131SGSS71 may not be executed. That is, although the value of the relief time reduction counter is not updated, a relief time reduction count specification command or a relief time reduction count 2 specification command corresponding to the unupdated value of the relief time reduction counter may be sent.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the rescue time reduction count counter is 0 (step 131SGS70; Yes). If the value of the rescue time reduction count counter is 0 (step 131SGS70; Yes), the process proceeds to step 131SGS84. At this point, if the value of the rescue time reduction count counter is 0, it means that the game has already been controlled to a time reduction state via rescue time reduction (time reduction state B) (either controlled to time reduction state B, or controlled to the normal state after 1100 fluctuations in time reduction state B), and a jackpot, which would trigger the setting of 900 in the rescue time reduction count counter, has not yet occurred. Also, if the value of the rescue time reduction count counter is not 0 (step 131SGS70; No), the value of the rescue time reduction count counter is deducted by 1 (step 131SGS71). Furthermore, in this embodiment, the value of the relief time reduction counter is uniformly updated regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol is performed when the processing of step 131SGS71 is executed.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the reduced rescue time counter is 127 or greater (step 131SGS72). If the value of the reduced rescue time counter is 126 or less (step 131SGS72; No), the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the reduced rescue time counter in the EXT data and performs control to send a command to specify the number of reduced rescue times to the CPU 120 for performance control (step 131SGS73). For example, if the value of the reduced rescue time counter is 1, the CPU 103 performs control to send command 9401H as the command to specify the number of reduced rescue times. Also, if the value of the reduced rescue time counter is 126, the CPU 103 performs control to send command 947EH as the command to specify the number of reduced rescue times.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the relief time reduction count counter after subtraction is 0 (step 131SGS74). If the value of the relief time reduction count counter after subtraction is not 0, the process proceeds to step 131SGS84. If the value of the relief time reduction count counter after subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a relief time reduction decision flag indicating that the system will control to time reduction state B at the end of the variation based on the occurrence of relief time reduction (step 131SGS75). Then, the process proceeds to step 131SGS84.

On the other hand, if the value of the relief time reduction count counter after subtraction is 127 or more (step 131SGS72; Yes), the CPU 103 uniformly sets 7FH as EXT data and performs control to send command 957FH to the performance control CPU 120 as a relief time reduction count specification command (step 131SGS76). Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the remaining variable display count until the relief time reduction is in units of 100 (in this embodiment, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800) (step 131SGS77). Note that whether the remaining variable display count until the relief time reduction is in units of 100 can be determined by checking the value of the relief time reduction count counter. If the remaining variable display count until the relief time reduction is in units of 100, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction count counter in the EXT data and performs control to send a command to specify relief time reduction count 2 to the performance control CPU 120 (step 131SGS78). For example, if the value of the relief time reduction count counter is 100, the CPU 103 performs control to send command 9601H as the command to specify relief time reduction count 2. If the value of the relief time reduction count counter is 800, the CPU 103 performs control to send command 9608H as the command to specify relief time reduction count 2. Then, the process proceeds to step 131SGS84.

In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) counts the remaining variable number of displays until the rescue time-saving feature is activated and sends commands to specify the number of rescue time-saving features and the command to specify two rescue time-saving features. However, the embodiment is not limited to this configuration. For example, the performance control CPU 120 may be configured to count the remaining variable number of displays until the rescue time-saving feature is activated and execute the teasing and countdown effects described later.

Furthermore, for example, if you set the rescue time reduction count counter (to "900") at the time a rescue time reduction occurs, and configure the system to allow for consecutive rescue time reductions, you can configure it so that the rescue time reduction count specification command and the rescue time reduction count 2 specification command are sent only when a rescue time reduction occurs for the first time, and not when a rescue time reduction occurs for the second time or later.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the stopping symbol for the special symbols according to the result of determining the type of jackpot (step 131SGS84). In this case, for example, if it is determined to be jackpot A, the stopping symbol for the special symbols is determined to be "2", if it is determined to be jackpot B, the stopping symbol for the special symbols is determined to be "3", if it is determined to be jackpot C, the stopping symbol for the special symbols is determined to be "7", and if it is determined to be a miss, the stopping symbol for the special symbols is determined to be "-". The CPU 103 also stores the determined stopping symbols for the special symbols in the stopping symbol storage area provided in the RAM 102 (step 131SGS85).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the variable pattern setting process (step S111) (step 131SGS86).

[Special symbol stop processing]
Figure 11-21 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step S113) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the symbol confirmation period timer is running or not (step 131SGS131). If the symbol confirmation period timer is not running, it displays the derivation of the special symbol stop (step 131SGS132). Then, it determines whether the jackpot flag is set or not (step 131SGS133).

If a jackpot flag is set, the game state flags such as the time-saving A flag, time-saving B flag, and probability change flag are cleared (step 131SGS134), the time-saving counter is cleared (step 131SGS135), and the jackpot start designation command is set to be sent according to the type of jackpot, and the process proceeds to step 131SGS147 (step 131SGS136). The jackpot start designation command that has been set to be sent is transmitted to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing command control processing (see Figure 5).

Furthermore, if the jackpot flag is not set in step 131SGS133, the CPU 103 determines whether the rescue time-saving determination flag is set (step 131SGS140). If the rescue time-saving determination flag is not set, the process proceeds to step 131SGS147. If the rescue time-saving determination flag is set, the rescue time-saving determination flag is cleared, and the time-saving B flag, indicating time-saving state B, is set (steps 131SGS141, 131SGS142). Additionally, the time-saving count counter is set to 1100, corresponding to time-saving state B (rescue time-saving), and the transmission setting for the time-saving state B specification command is configured (steps 131SGS143, 131SGS144). The time-saving state B specification command, which has been configured for transmission, is sent to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing command control processing (see Figure 5).

Furthermore, the right-hand side lamp 131SG132 is started to light up, and the transmission settings for the right-hand side LED lighting notification command are configured (steps 131SGS145 and 131SGS146). The configured right-hand side LED lighting notification command is then transmitted to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing command control processing (see Figure 5).

Then, the symbol confirmation period timer is set to a value corresponding to the symbol confirmation period of 0.5 seconds, and the transmission settings for the symbol confirmation command are configured, before proceeding to step 131SGS149 (steps 131SGS147, 131SGS148). The symbol confirmation command, which has been set for transmission, is sent to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing command control processing (see Figure 5).

In step 131SGS149, the CPU 103 sets the transmission settings for the game state specification command according to the game state and terminates the special symbol stop process. The transmitted game state specification command is sent to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing command control processing (see Figure 5).

Then, in step 131SGS131, if the symbol confirmation period timer is operating, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the symbol confirmation period timer by 1 (step 131SGS150) and determines whether the symbol confirmation period timer has timed out (step 131SGS151). If the symbol confirmation period timer has not timed out, the special symbol stop process is terminated. If the symbol confirmation period timer has timed out, it is determined whether the derived stopped symbol is a losing symbol (step 131SGS152). If the derived stopped symbol is a losing symbol, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process and the special symbol stop process is terminated (step 131SGS153). If the derived stopped symbol is a jackpot symbol, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot pre-opening process and the special symbol stop process is terminated (step 131SGS154).

[state transition]
Next, the state transitions in this embodiment will be described. Figure 11-22 is a state transition diagram illustrating the state transitions in this embodiment.

As shown in Figure 11-22, in the normal state (low probability/low base state), if a jackpot B occurs and the game ball passes through the probability variation area (V switch 131SG023B1), the game is controlled to the probability variation state. If a jackpot A occurs, the game is controlled to the time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot (low probability/high base state)). Although not shown in the figure, even if a jackpot B occurs but the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area (V switch 131SG023B1), the game is controlled to the time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot). Furthermore, even if the result is a miss, if a rescue time-saving mode is activated (if the variable display count reaches 900 without another big win occurring after the RAM clear process or the end of the probability variation state, or if the variable display count reaches 790 without another big win occurring after the end of 110 variable displays in time-saving mode A), the game will be controlled to time-saving mode B (time-saving mode via rescue time-saving mode (low probability/high base state)).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-22, in the probability variation state (high probability/high base state), if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the game ball passes through the probability variation area, the game is controlled to return to the probability variation state. Although not shown in the figure, if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs but the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area, the game is controlled to the time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-22, in the time-saving state A (low probability/high base state), if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the game ball passes through the probability variation area, the game is controlled to the probability variation state. Although not shown in the figure, if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs but the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area, the game is controlled back to time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot). Also, in time-saving state A, if 110 variable displays are completed without a jackpot occurring, the game is controlled to the normal state.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-22, in the time-saving state B (low probability/high base state), if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the game ball passes through the probability variation area, the game is controlled to the probability variation state. Although not shown in the figure, if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs but the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area, the game is controlled back to time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot). Also, in time-saving state B, if 1100 variable displays are completed without a jackpot occurring, the game is controlled to the normal state. Furthermore, even in the case of a loss, if a rescue time-saving state occurs (after RAM clear processing or after the end of the probability variation state, if the number of variable displays reaches 900 without the next jackpot occurring, or after 110 variable displays in time-saving state A, if the number of variable displays reaches 790 without the next jackpot occurring), the game is controlled to time-saving state B (time-saving state via rescue time-saving).

In this embodiment, the system uniformly transitions to Time-Saving State A if a jackpot occurs during Time-Saving State B and the game ball does not enter the probability variation area. However, the control method is not limited to this. For example, the system may be configured to compare the remaining number of Time-Saving rounds with the number of Time-Saving rounds corresponding to the case where the game ball does not enter the probability variation area (V switch 131SG023B1) (110 rounds in this embodiment). If the remaining number of Time-Saving rounds is greater, the system may continue in the current Time-Saving State B.

In this embodiment, although it is possible to perform variable display of the first special symbol during the time-saving state or the probability-increasing state, this would result in a disadvantageous gameplay experience for the player. Therefore, the explanation of state transitions does not assume that variable display of the first special symbol will be performed during the time-saving state or the probability-increasing state.

[Production control process processing/pre-announcement]
As shown in Figures 11-23 and 11-24, in the pre-announcement setting process of this embodiment, the display mode of the active display and the reserved display is determined by setting the reserved display flag to one of 0 to 2 at the timing when a starting prize is won (the timing when the starting prize winning specification command, symbol specification command, variable category command, and reserved memory count notification command are newly stored as reserved memory in the starting prize winning received command buffer shown in Figure 11-15(B)), and the proportion of the game that is controlled to a big win state can be indicated by these display modes of the active display and the reserved display.

For example, as shown in Figure 11-24, if the variable display result indicated by the symbol specification command is "miss" and the variable category indicated by the variable category command is "non-reach," then the system will decide to not execute the pre-announcement (set the value of the hold display flag to "0") with a 95% probability, execute the pre-announcement using performance pattern α (set the value of the hold display flag to "1") with a 5% probability, and execute the pre-announcement using performance pattern β (set the value of the hold display flag to "2") with a 0% probability.

Furthermore, if the variable display result indicated by the symbol selection command is "miss," and the variable category indicated by the variable category command is "other (normal reach)," then there is a 90% probability of deciding not to execute the pre-announcement (setting the value of the hold display flag to "0"), a 10% probability of executing the pre-announcement with performance pattern α (setting the value of the hold display flag to "1"), and a 0% probability of executing the pre-announcement with performance pattern β (setting the value of the hold display flag to "2").

Furthermore, if the variable display result indicated by the symbol selection command is "miss," and the variable category indicated by the variable category command is "super reach," then there is a 70% probability of deciding not to execute the pre-announcement (setting the value of the hold display flag to "0"), a 20% probability of executing the pre-announcement with performance pattern α (setting the value of the hold display flag to "1"), and a 10% probability of executing the pre-announcement with performance pattern β (setting the value of the hold display flag to "2").

Furthermore, if the variable display result indicated by the symbol selection command is "Big Win," there is a 5% chance of deciding not to execute the pre-announcement (setting the value of the hold display flag to "0"), a 30% chance of executing the pre-announcement with performance pattern α (setting the value of the hold display flag to "1"), and a 65% chance of executing the pre-announcement with performance pattern β (setting the value of the hold display flag to "2").

Furthermore, after the execution of the pre-read notification setting process, the following processes are executed: hold display/active display update process (131SGS162), rescue time reduction remaining count display update process (step 131SGS163), and rescue time reduction arrival notification effect execution process (step 131SGS164). In the hold display/active display update process, the following processes are executed: start displaying the hold display or active display in a display mode corresponding to the value of the hold display flag; erase the active display from the active display area 131SG005F at the end timing of the variable display; and hide or start displaying the hold display or active display according to the progress of the effect during the variable display. In the rescue time reduction remaining count display update process, the following processes are executed: decrease and update the value of the rescue time reduction remaining count display 131SG005Z (see Figure 11-1) displayed on the image display device 5 each time the variable display starts; and hide or start displaying the rescue time reduction remaining count display 131SG005Z according to the progress of the effect during the variable display. In the rescue time reduction notification animation execution process, from the moment the variable display count reaches 900 and the variable display ends, the process is executed to execute the rescue time reduction notification animation, which notifies that the game has been controlled to time reduction state B.

[Variable display start setting process]
Figure 11-25 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process shown in Figure 11. In the variable display start setting process, the CPU 120 for performance control first determines whether the first variable display start command reception flag is set (step 131SGS601). If the first variable display start command reception flag is set, the various command data stored in correspondence with buffer number "1-1" in the start-up winning received command buffer 131SG194A is copied to the active display buffer 131SG194B (131SGS602). In addition, the first special symbol hold memory (various command data stored in correspondence with buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") in the start-up winning received command buffer 131SG194A is shifted one by one to a higher position (step 131SGS603). At this time, the various command data stored in buffer number "1-1" is erased because there is no destination to shift to.

Furthermore, in step 131SGS601, if the first variable display start command reception flag is not on, it is determined whether the second variable display start command reception flag is set (step 131SGS604). If the second variable display start command reception flag is set, the various command data stored in the start-up prize-receiving command buffer 131SG194A, corresponding to buffer number "2-1," is copied to the active display buffer 131SG194B (131SGS605). Also, the second special symbol hold memory (various command data stored in the buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") in the start-up prize-receiving command buffer 131SG194A is shifted one by one to a higher position (step 131SGS606). Note that at this time, the various command data stored in buffer number "2-1" is erased because there is no destination to shift to.

Furthermore, if the flag for receiving the command to start variable display of the second special illustration is not set, the variable display start setting process will be terminated.

After step 131SGS603 or step 131SGS6060 is executed, the performance control CPU 120 reads a variation pattern specification command from the variation pattern specification command storage area (step 131SGS607). Furthermore, it determines the stopping pattern of the decorative symbols based on the read variation pattern specification command and the data stored in the display result specification command storage area (step 131SGS608).

For example, as shown in Figure 11-26, if the variable display result is "miss" and the variation pattern is non-reach (non-reach miss), the stopping symbols are determined to be a "non-reach" combination such as "124" or "578" (non-reach pattern, non-reach miss pattern) with a 100% probability. Also, if the variable display result is "miss" and the variation pattern is a normal reach (normal reach miss), the stopping symbols are determined to be a "reach" combination of even numbers such as "242" or "676" (even-number reach pattern, even-number reach miss pattern) with a 95% probability, and a "reach" combination of odd numbers other than 7, such as "131" or "545" (odd-number reach pattern, odd-number reach miss pattern) with a 5% probability.

Furthermore, if the variable display result is "miss" and the variation pattern is a Super Reach (Super Reach Miss), the stopping symbols are determined to be an even number combination such as "242" or "676" (Even Number Reach Pattern, Even Number Reach Miss Pattern) with an 80% probability, an odd number combination other than 7 such as "131" or "545" (Odd Number Reach Pattern, Odd Number Reach Miss Pattern) with a 19% probability, and a 7 number combination such as "767" or "787" ("7" Reach Pattern, "7" Reach Miss Pattern) with a 1% probability.

Then, if the variable display result is a "jackpot," the stopping symbols are determined with a 20% probability to be an even number combination such as "222" or "666" (even number reach pattern, even number reach jackpot pattern), a 50% probability to be an odd number combination other than 7 such as "111" or "555" (odd number reach pattern, odd number reach jackpot pattern), and a 30% probability to be a "reach" with the number 7, such as "777" ("7" reach pattern, "7" reach jackpot pattern).

In other words, the probability of winning a jackpot is highest when the decorative symbol is a "7," and then it decreases in the following order: when the decorative symbol is an odd number other than "7," when the decorative symbol is an even number, and when there is no jackpot (jackpot probability based on decorative symbol: "7" symbol jackpot > odd number other than "7" jackpot > even number jackpot > no jackpot). Therefore, in this embodiment, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the decorative symbol forms a jackpot, and which symbol will form the jackpot.

In this embodiment, we have illustrated a configuration where the probability of winning differs depending on whether the decorative symbols form an even-numbered combination or an odd-numbered combination. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The probability of winning may be the same regardless of the combination of decorative symbols that forms a winning combination, or the probability of winning may differ depending on the size of the numbers represented by the decorative symbols.

Returning to Figure 11-25, after determining the stopping pattern for the decorative symbols, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance executes a variable display notification performance determination process (step 131SGS609) to determine whether or not to execute a variable display notification performance that suggests the possibility of the variable display result being a jackpot during the variable display.

Subsequently, the CPU 120 for performance control selects a process table (performance control pattern) according to the variation pattern, game state, variable display result, and the decision result of the notification performance determination process during variable display (step 131SGS610), and starts the process timer (step 131SGS611).

Furthermore, each process table has a set of performance control patterns. Specifically, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from speakers 8L and 8R, and operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A are arranged sequentially in chronological order, corresponding to each process data n (numbered from 1 to N).

Next, the CPU 120 for performance control executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L and 8R as performance components, and the operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.)) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, and operation unit control execution data 1) (131SGS612). For example, to display an image corresponding to a variation pattern on the image display device 5, a command is output to the display control unit 123. Also, to control the on/off operation of the various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, to enable sound output from speakers 8L and 8R, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound control board 13.

In this embodiment, the CPU 120 for performance control controls the variable display of decorative symbols using a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one with the variation pattern specification command. However, the CPU 120 for performance control may also select the variation pattern to be used from multiple types of variation patterns corresponding to the variation pattern specification command.

Next, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern specification command (131SGS613). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (131SGS614). The predetermined time is, for example, 30ms. The performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, center, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every predetermined time. The display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written to the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing the variable display of the decorative patterns. Next, the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (S172) (131SGS615).

Furthermore, during the variable display animation process, the values of the process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer are each set to -1. Then, the animation device is controlled according to the value of the process timer, the variable display of the decorative symbols is implemented according to the value of the variable display control timer as described above, and the variable display of the decorative symbols is stopped according to the value of the variable display time timer. The value of the animation control process flag is then set to the value corresponding to the special symbol win waiting process (S173).

[Regarding the effects during variable display]
In the variable display start waiting process in step S170, the CPU 120 for performance control receives a first variable display start command or a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display. In the subsequent variable display start setting process in step S171, the CPU 120 determines the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols (confirmed decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of decorative symbols, whether or not a reach performance is performed, its manner, and the timing of its start, based on the variable pattern specified by the variable pattern specification command and the variable display results of special symbols and decorative symbols specified by the variable display result specification command. The CPU 120 then sets a performance control pattern that reflects these determinations and controls the variable display of decorative symbols and reach performances based on the set performance control pattern.

[Regarding the performance control patterns]
As shown in Figures 11-27 and 11-28, the performance control patterns are set for each variation pattern PA1-1 to 4, PA2-1 to 19, and PB1-1 to 18.

As performance control patterns corresponding to the variation patterns PA1-1 to PA1-4, patterns 1 to 4, which result in a non-reach failure without the decorative symbols appearing in a reach state, are set. Variation patterns PA1-1 and PA1-2 are the variation patterns specified in the normal state, PA1-3 is the variation pattern selected in the time-saving state A or the probability variation state, and PA1-4 is the variation pattern selected in the time-saving state B. In the corresponding non-reach patterns 1 to 4, the time until the variable display of the decorative symbols ends is set to differ according to the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern.

As a performance control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-1, a pattern is set in which a normal reach performance (indicated as "Normal" in the diagram) is executed with the decorative symbols in a reach pattern, followed by a miss. Variation pattern PA2-1 is a variation pattern specified in the normal state, time-saving state A, and probability variation state.

As a performance control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-2, a pattern is set in which, after the normal reach performance, the low-base weak super reach A performance (indicated as "low-base weak A" in the diagram) is executed, followed by a missed reach. As a performance control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-3, a pattern is set in which, after the normal reach performance, the low-base weak super reach B performance (indicated as "low-base weak B" in the diagram) is executed, followed by a missed reach.

For variation pattern PA2-4, the performance control pattern is set to execute the reach animation for a normal reach, followed by the reach animation for a low-base weak super reach A, then the reach animation for a low-base strong reach A (indicated as "low-base strong A" in the diagram), and then a missed reach. For variation pattern PA2-5, the performance control pattern is set to execute the reach animation for a normal reach, followed by the reach animation for a low-base weak super reach B, then the reach animation for a low-base strong reach A, and then a missed reach. For variation pattern PA2-6, the performance control pattern is set to execute the reach animation for a normal reach, followed by the reach animation for a low-base strong reach A, and then a missed reach.

For variation pattern PA2-7, the performance control pattern is set to execute the reach animation for a normal reach, followed by the reach animation for a low-base weak super reach A, then the reach animation for a low-base strong reach B (indicated as "low-base strong B" in the diagram), and then a missed reach. For variation pattern PA2-8, the performance control pattern is set to execute the reach animation for a normal reach, followed by the reach animation for a low-base weak super reach B, then the reach animation for a low-base strong reach B, and then a missed reach. For variation pattern PA2-9, the performance control pattern is set to execute the reach animation for a normal reach, followed by the reach animation for a low-base strong reach B, and then a missed reach.

For variation pattern PA2-10, the performance control pattern is set to execute the normal reach animation, followed by the low-base weak super reach A animation, then the low-base strong reach C animation, and then a missed reach. For variation pattern PA2-11, the performance control pattern is set to execute the normal reach animation, followed by the low-base weak super reach B animation, then the low-base strong reach C animation, and then a missed reach. For variation pattern PA2-12, the performance control pattern is set to execute the normal reach animation, followed by the low-base strong reach C animation, and then a missed reach.

For variation pattern PA2-13, the performance control pattern is set to execute the reach animation for a normal reach, followed by the reach animation for a low-base weak super reach A, then the reach animation for a low-base strongest super reach (indicated as "low-base strongest" in the diagram), and then a miss. For variation pattern PA2-14, the performance control pattern is set to execute the reach animation for a normal reach, followed by the reach animation for a low-base weak super reach B, then the reach animation for a low-base strongest super reach, and then a miss. For variation pattern PA2-15, the performance control pattern is set to execute the reach animation for a normal reach, followed by the reach animation for a low-base strongest super reach, and then a miss.

Variation patterns PA2-2 to PA2-15 are all variation patterns specified under normal conditions.

As a performance control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-16, the pattern is set so that after the normal reach performance, the high-base reach A performance (shown as "High Base A" in the diagram) is executed, followed by a miss. As a performance control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-17, the pattern is set so that after the normal reach performance, the high-base reach B performance (shown as "High Base B" in the diagram) is executed, followed by a miss. As a performance control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-18, the pattern is set so that after the normal reach performance, the high-base reach C performance (shown as "High Base C" in the diagram) is executed, followed by a miss. As a performance control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-19, the pattern is set so that after the normal reach performance, the high-base reach D performance (shown as "High Base D" in the diagram) is executed, followed by a miss.

Variation patterns PA2-16 to PA2-19 are all variations selected during the time-saving state A and the probability variation state.

As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-1, a pattern is set in which a normal reach performance is executed, followed by a jackpot.

For variation pattern PB1-2, the performance control pattern is set to execute a normal reach performance, followed by a low-base weak super reach A performance, then a low-base strong reach A performance, and then a jackpot. For variation pattern PB1-3, the performance control pattern is set to execute a normal reach performance, followed by a low-base weak super reach B performance, then a low-base strong reach A performance, and then a jackpot. For variation pattern PB1-4, the performance control pattern is set to execute a normal reach performance, followed by a low-base strong reach A performance, and then a jackpot.

For variation patterns PB1-5, the following performance control patterns are set: After a normal reach animation, a low-base weak super reach A animation is performed, followed by a low-base strong reach B animation, and then a jackpot occurs. For variation patterns PB1-6, the following performance control patterns are set: After a normal reach animation, a low-base weak super reach B animation is performed, followed by a low-base strong reach B animation, and then a jackpot occurs. For variation patterns PB1-7, the following performance control patterns are set: After a normal reach animation, a low-base strong reach B animation is performed, and then a jackpot occurs.

For variation patterns PB1-8, the following performance control patterns are set: After a normal reach animation, a low-base weak super reach A animation is performed, followed by a low-base strong reach C animation, and then a jackpot occurs. For variation patterns PB1-9, the following performance control patterns are set: After a normal reach animation, a low-base weak super reach B animation is performed, followed by a low-base strong reach C animation, and then a jackpot occurs. For variation patterns PB1-10, the following performance control patterns are set: After a normal reach animation, a low-base strong reach C animation is performed, and then a jackpot occurs.

For variation patterns PB1-11, the following performance control pattern is set: after a normal reach performance, a low-base weak super reach A performance is executed, followed by a low-base strongest super reach performance, and then a jackpot is achieved. For variation patterns PA2-12, the following performance control pattern is set: after a normal reach performance, a low-base weak super reach B performance is executed, followed by a low-base strongest super reach performance, and then a jackpot is achieved. For variation patterns PB1-13, the following performance control pattern is set: after a normal reach performance, a low-base strongest super reach performance is executed, and then a jackpot is achieved.

Variation patterns PB1-1 to PB1-13 are all variation patterns selected under normal conditions.

For variation patterns PB1-14, the following performance control patterns are set: After the normal reach animation, the high-base reach A animation is executed, followed by a jackpot. For variation patterns PB1-15, the following performance control patterns are set: After the normal reach animation, the high-base reach B animation is executed, followed by a jackpot. For variation patterns PB1-16, the following performance control patterns are set: After the normal reach animation, the high-base reach C animation is executed, followed by a jackpot. For variation patterns PB1-17, the following performance control patterns are set: After the normal reach animation, the high-base reach D animation is executed, followed by a jackpot.

Variation patterns PB1-14 to 17 are all variations selected during the time-saving state A and the probability variation state.

As a performance control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PB1-18, a pattern is set that results in a jackpot without executing the normal reach or super reach performance animations. Variation pattern PB1-18 is the variation pattern selected in time-saving state B.

[Regarding the flow of the effects during variable display]
Figure 11-29 shows the flow of the effects during variable display in the normal state. The effects control CPU 120 receives a first variable display start command or a second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the variable pattern specified by the variable pattern specification command is PA1-1 or PA1-2, it controls the decorative symbols so that they do not become a reach and result in a non-reach miss.

The CPU 120 for performance control receives either the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state. If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-1 or PB1-1, it executes a normal reach performance where the decorative symbols form a reach pattern. Then, if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-1, it controls the game to result in a missed reach; if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-1, it controls the game to result in a jackpot.

The CPU 120 for performance control receives either the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state. If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-2, it executes the normal reach animation, then the low-base weak super reach A animation, and then controls the system to report a miss as the result of the low-base weak super reach A animation, resulting in a miss.

The CPU 120 for performance control receives either the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state. If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-3, it executes the normal reach performance, then the low-base weak super reach B performance, and then controls the system so that a miss is reported as the result of the low-base weak super reach B performance, resulting in a miss.

The CPU 120 for performance control receives either the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state. If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-4 or PB1-2, it executes the normal reach performance, then the low-base weak super reach A performance, and then the low-base strong super reach A performance. Afterward, if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-4, it controls the system to report a miss as the result of the low-base strong super reach A performance, resulting in a reach miss. If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-2, it controls the system to report a jackpot as the result of the low-base strong super reach A performance, resulting in a jackpot.

The CPU 120 for performance control receives either the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state. If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-5 or PB1-3, it executes the normal reach performance, then the low-base weak super reach B performance, and then the low-base strong super reach A performance. Afterward, if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-5, it controls the system to report a miss as the result of the low-base strong super reach A performance, resulting in a miss. If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-3, it controls the system to report a jackpot as the result of the low-base strong super reach A performance, resulting in a jackpot.

The CPU 120 for performance control receives either the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state. If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-6 or PB1-4, it executes the normal reach performance, then the low-base strong super reach A performance. Subsequently, if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-6, it controls the system to report a miss as the result of the low-base strong super reach A performance, resulting in a miss. If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-4, it controls the system to report a jackpot as the result of the low-base strong super reach A performance, resulting in a jackpot.

The CPU 120 for performance control receives either the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state. If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-7 or PB1-5, it executes the normal reach performance, then the low-base weak super reach A performance, and then the low-base strong super reach B performance. Afterward, if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-7, it controls the system to report a miss as the result of the low-base strong super reach B performance, resulting in a miss. If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-5, it controls the system to report a jackpot as the result of the low-base strong super reach B performance, resulting in a jackpot.

The CPU 120 for performance control receives either the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state. If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-8 or PB1-6, it executes the normal reach performance, then the low-base weak super reach B performance, and then the low-base strong super reach B performance. Afterward, if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-8, it controls the system to report a miss as the result of the low-base strong super reach B performance, resulting in a miss. If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-6, it controls the system to report a jackpot as the result of the low-base strong super reach B performance, resulting in a jackpot.

The CPU 120 for performance control receives either the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state. If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-9 or PB1-7, it executes the normal reach performance, then the low-base strong super reach B performance. Subsequently, if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-9, it controls the system to report a miss as the result of the low-base strong super reach B performance, resulting in a reach miss. If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-7, it controls the system to report a jackpot as the result of the low-base strong super reach B performance, resulting in a jackpot.

The CPU 120 for performance control receives either the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state. If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-10 or PB1-8, it executes the normal reach performance, then the low-base weak super reach A performance, and then the low-base strong super reach C performance. If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-10, it controls the system to report a miss as the result of the low-base strong super reach C performance, resulting in a miss. If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-8, it controls the system to report a jackpot as the result of the low-base strong super reach C performance, resulting in a jackpot.

The CPU 120 for performance control receives either the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state. If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-11 or PB1-9, it executes the normal reach performance, then the low-base weak super reach B performance, and then the low-base strong super reach C performance. Afterward, if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-11, it controls the system to report a miss as the result of the low-base strong super reach C performance, resulting in a miss. If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-9, it controls the system to report a jackpot as the result of the low-base strong super reach C performance, resulting in a jackpot.

The CPU 120 for performance control receives either the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state. If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-12 or PB1-10, it executes the normal reach performance, then the low-base strong super reach C performance. Subsequently, if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-12, it controls the system to report a miss as the result of the low-base strong super reach C performance, resulting in a miss. If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-10, it controls the system to report a jackpot as the result of the low-base strong super reach C performance, resulting in a jackpot.

The CPU 120 for performance control receives either the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state. If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-13 or PB1-11, it executes the normal reach performance, then the low-base weak super reach A performance, and then the low-base strongest super reach performance. Afterward, if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-13, it controls the system to report a miss as the result of the low-base strongest super reach performance, resulting in a miss. If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-11, it controls the system to report a jackpot as the result of the low-base strongest super reach performance, resulting in a jackpot.

The CPU 120 for performance control receives either the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state. If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-14 or PB1-12, it executes the normal reach performance, then the low-base weak super reach B performance, and then the low-base strongest super reach performance. Afterward, if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-14, it controls the system to report a miss as the result of the low-base strongest super reach performance, resulting in a miss. If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-12, it controls the system to report a jackpot as the result of the low-base strongest super reach performance, resulting in a jackpot.

The CPU 120 for performance control receives either the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state. If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-15 or PB1-13, it executes the normal reach performance, then the low-base strongest super reach performance. Subsequently, if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-15, it controls the system to report a miss as the result of the low-base strongest super reach performance, resulting in a miss. If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-13, it controls the system to report a jackpot as the result of the low-base strongest super reach performance, resulting in a jackpot.

In this way, under normal circumstances, the low-base weak super reach A and B reach sequences will announce a jackpot as the result of the sequence, but will not be controlled to result in a jackpot. Only the low-base strong super reach A-C, low-base strongest reach, and low-base strong super reach A-C, and low-base strongest super reach sequences executed via the low-base weak super reach A and B reach sequences will announce a jackpot as the result of the sequence, and will be controlled to result in a jackpot.

Figure 11-30 shows the flow of the display during variable display in the time-saving state A and the probability variation state. The display control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time-saving state A and the probability variation state. If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA1-3, it controls the display so that the decorative symbols do not form a reach pattern and result in a non-reach miss.

The CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command during the time-saving state A or the probability variation state. If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-1 or PB1-1, it executes a normal reach animation. Then, if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-1, it controls the game to result in a missed reach; if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-1, it controls the game to result in a jackpot.

The CPU 120 for performance control receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time-saving state A or the probability variation state. If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-16 or PB1-14, it executes the normal reach performance, then the high-base super reach A performance. If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-16, it controls the performance to report a miss as the result of the high-base super reach A performance, resulting in a miss. If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-14, it controls the performance to report a jackpot as the result of the high-base super reach A performance, resulting in a jackpot.

The CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation receives either the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command during the time-saving state A or the probability variation state. If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-17 or PB1-15, it executes the normal reach presentation, then the high-base super reach B presentation. If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-17, it then controls the game to announce a miss as the result of the high-base super reach B presentation, resulting in a miss. If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-15, it controls the game to announce a jackpot as the result of the high-base super reach B presentation, resulting in a jackpot.

The CPU 120 for performance control receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time-saving state A or the probability variation state. If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-18 or PB1-16, it executes the normal reach performance, then the high-base super reach C performance. If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-18, it controls the performance to report a miss as the result of the high-base super reach C performance, resulting in a reach miss. If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-16, it controls the performance to report a jackpot as the result of the high-base super reach C performance, resulting in a jackpot.

The CPU 120 for performance control receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time-saving state A or the probability variation state. If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-19 or PB1-17, it executes the normal reach performance, then the high-base super reach D performance. If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-19, it controls the performance to report a miss as the result of the high-base super reach D performance, resulting in a miss. If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-17, it controls the performance to report a jackpot as the result of the high-base super reach D performance, resulting in a jackpot.

In this way, during the shortened time state A and the probability variation state, the result of a jackpot or a miss is announced during the normal performance, or during the high-base super reach A to D reach performances controlled after the normal performance, and the game is then controlled to either result in a jackpot or a miss. No further reach performances are executed after the high-base super reach A to D performances controlled after the normal performance.

Figure 11-31 shows the flow of the animation during variable display in time-saving state B. The animation control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in time-saving state B. If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA1-4, it controls the decorative symbols so that they do not enter a reach pattern and result in a non-reach miss.

The CPU 120 for performance control receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time-saving state B. If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-18, it controls the display so that the decorative symbols do not enter a reach pattern, resulting in a jackpot.

In this time-saving state B, the system is controlled so that neither a miss nor a big win will result in a non-reach (a near-miss).

[About the Super Reach演出 (Super Reach演出)]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute super reach performances during variable display. The super reach performances include, as described above, the low-base weak super reach A and B, low-base strong super reach A to C, and low-base strongest super reach performances that are executed in the normal state, as well as the time-saving state A and high-base super reach A to D performances that are executed in the probability variation state. In the following, the reach animations for Normal Reach and Super Reach may be simply referred to as Normal Reach animation and Super Reach animation, respectively. The reach animations for Low Base Weak Super Reach A, Low Base Weak Super Reach B, Low Base Strong Super Reach A, Low Base Strong Super Reach B, Low Base Strong Super Reach C, and Low Base Strongest Super Reach may be simply referred to as Low Base Weak Reach A animation, Low Base Weak Reach B animation, Low Base Strong Reach A animation, Low Base Strong Reach B animation, Low Base Strong Reach C animation, and Low Base Strongest Reach animation, respectively. The reach animations for High Base Super Reach A, High Base Super Reach B, High Base Super Reach C, and High Base Super Reach D may be simply referred to as High Base Reach A animation, High Base Reach B animation, High Base Reach C animation, and High Base Reach animation, respectively.

The Super Reach sequence is a sequence that performs visuals suggesting the possibility of a jackpot, and then announces the outcome of the sequence (for Low Base Weak Super Reach A and B, the outcome of whether it develops into Low Base Strong Super Reach A-C or Low Base Strongest Super Reach, or whether it is a miss).

Furthermore, each type of Super Reach演出 (Super Reach演出) has a designated title. A Super Reach演出 consists of a title display section, where the title of the Super Reach演出 is displayed, and an introductory section, which follows the title display section and continues until the result of the Super Reach演出 is announced.

[Regarding variations of the low-base weak reach A and B effects]
In this embodiment, the configuration for executing the low-base weak reach A or low-base weak reach B performance does not include a variation pattern that results in a jackpot without developing into another super reach performance after the execution of the low-base weak reach A or low-base weak reach B performance. However, the configuration may include variation pattern PB1-JA, which results in a jackpot without developing into another super reach performance after the execution of the low-base weak reach A performance, and variation pattern PB1-JB, which results in a jackpot without developing into another super reach performance after the execution of the low-base weak reach B performance.

In this configuration, the CPU 120 for performance control receives a first variable display start command or a second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-JA, it executes a normal reach performance, then executes a low-base weak reach A performance, and controls the system so that a jackpot is announced as a result of the low-base weak reach A performance. In the normal state, it receives a first variable display start command or a second variable display start command, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-JB, it executes a normal reach performance, then executes a low-base weak reach B performance, and controls the system so that a jackpot is announced as a result of the low-base weak reach B performance. Therefore, in this configuration, the introductory part of the low-base weak reach A sequence will either announce whether or not it results in a jackpot, or it will develop into another super reach sequence. Similarly, the introductory part of the low-base weak reach B sequence will either announce whether or not it results in a jackpot, or it will develop into another super reach sequence.

Furthermore, the system may be configured so that the low-base weak reach A and B sequences do not develop into other super reach sequences. In such a configuration, the system will announce whether or not a jackpot will result from the sequence during the introductory part of the low-base weak reach A and B sequences.

Furthermore, in the following embodiment, a configuration may be applied that includes a variation pattern in which a jackpot is achieved after the execution of low-base weak reach A and B effects without developing into other super reach effects. In this case, the configuration is configured such that the probability of a jackpot for low-base strong reach A to C effects and low-base strongest reach effects is higher than the probability of a jackpot for low-base weak reach A effects and low-base weak reach A effects. The determination ratios for variation patterns that result in a loss after the execution of low-base weak reach A and B effects, and variation patterns that result in a jackpot without developing into other super reach effects after the execution of low-base weak reach A and B effects, are determined accordingly.

[Regarding the low-base weak reach A animation]
Figure 11-32 shows the progression of images displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the low-base weak reach A performance, and Figure 11-33 is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low-base weak reach A performance.

The CPU 120 for performance control receives either the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state. When a variation pattern corresponding to a low-base weak super reach A is specified by the variation pattern specification command, it starts the variation of a relatively large decorative symbol (decorative symbol (large)). As shown in Figure 11-32(a1), it executes a normal reach performance by stopping the decorative symbol (large) of the type specified by the variable display result specification command in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the image display device 5 at a predetermined timing to form a reach. Afterward, it executes the operation acceleration performance A described later, and as shown in Figure 11-32(a2), while maintaining the hold display and active display in the first hold memory display area 131SG005D, the second hold memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F, it executes a white flash performance that displays the entire display area in white, and then starts the title display part of the low-base weak reach A performance.

As shown in Figures 11-32(a1) to (a3), the background of the large decorative symbol during its normal state (daytime sky background), which was displayed before the white flash effect, switches to the background of the low-base weak reach A effect (corridor background) after the white flash effect. Furthermore, the large decorative symbol, which was displayed in a reach pattern before the white flash effect, switches to a reach pattern of a smaller decorative symbol after the white flash effect.

As shown in Figure 11-33, the title display part of the Low Base Weak Reach A演出 (performance) includes a title start period from when a portion of the title text "Catch the Explosive Chu!" is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 until it is displayed in its fixed position, a title display period during which the title text "Catch the Explosive Chu!" is displayed in its fixed position, and a title end period from when the title text "Catch the Explosive Chu!" displayed in its fixed position disappears until the program switches to the introductory part.

The CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation, upon transitioning to the title display part of the low-base weak reach A presentation, first begins displaying the title start period. During the title start period of the low-base weak reach A presentation, as shown in Figures 11-32(a3) to (a4), a portion of the title text "Catch the Explosive Chu!" appears from the left side of the display area, overlapping with the left-hand decorative symbol (small) of the left and right decorative symbols (small) of the reach pattern. Then, the entire title text "Catch the Explosive Chu!" is moved towards its fixed position and stopped there. When the title text "Catch the Explosive Chu!" is stopped in its fixed position, a portion of the title text "Catch the Explosive Chu!" is displayed overlapping with both the left and right decorative symbols (small) of the reach pattern.

The small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach pattern will display one of the numbers from "1" to "9" (in the diagram, it's "2"). However, during the title start period of the low-base weak reach A演出 (performance), regardless of whether the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach pattern are any of the numbers from "1" to "9", a portion of the title text "Catch the Explosive Chu!" will appear overlapping with the left small decorative symbol on the reach pattern. When the title text "Catch the Explosive Chu!" is stationary in its fixed position, a portion of the title text "Catch the Explosive Chu!" will be displayed overlapping with both the left and right small decorative symbols on the reach pattern.

The CPU 120 for controlling the performance displays the title text "Catch Bakuchu!" in a fixed position during the title start period, and then transitions to displaying the title during the title display period. During the title display period of the low-base weak reach A performance, as shown in Figures 11-32 (a4) to (a5), the enemy character "Bakuchu" appears behind the title text "Catch Bakuchu!" displayed in its fixed position, and a subtitle, "Try and catch me if you can!", corresponding to the scene in which the enemy character "Bakuchu" appears, is displayed below the title text "Catch Bakuchu!". The audio of the subtitled line is output from speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, as shown in Figure 11-33, the audio reading the title is not output. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-33, the title display period of the low-base weak reach A performance is executed for a longer period than the title start period of the low-base weak reach A performance (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48).

The CPU 120 for controlling the performance transitions to displaying the title end period after the title display period ends. During the title end period of the low-base weak reach A performance, as shown in Figures 11-32 (a5) to (a6), the title text "Catch the Explosive Chu!" displayed in its fixed position is moved from its fixed position to the right side of the display area until all the title text disappears. As shown in Figure 11-33, the title end period of the low-base weak reach A performance ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low-base weak reach A performance (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48). Also, as shown in Figure 11-33, the expectation level indication display described later is not displayed during the title display part of the low-base weak reach A performance.

The CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation starts the introductory part of the low-base weak reach A presentation after the title screen ends. As shown in Figures 11-32(a6) to (a7), the background at the start of the introductory part of the low-base weak reach A presentation is the same as the background of the title screen (the corridor background). The video scene that started in the title screen (the scene where the enemy character "Bakuchu" appears) continues into the introductory part, and the line "Catch me if you can!" displayed in the title screen continues to be displayed. The audio of the line output from speakers 8L and 8R also continues to be output. Then, as shown in Figures 11-32(a7) to (a8), the video scene switches to the next video scene in the introductory part (the scene where the ally character "Yumeyume" chases the enemy character "Bakuchu") at the moment the audio output of the line "Catch me if you can!" displayed in the title screen ends.

The CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation, when a variation pattern is specified by the variation pattern specification command that develops from a low-base weak super reach A to one of the low-base strong super reach A-C or low-base strongest super reach, executes a dropping animation at the end of the introductory part, causing the movable body 32 to fall, and then develops into one of the low-base strong reach A, low-base strong reach B, low-base strong reach C, or low-base strongest reach animations. On the other hand, when a variation pattern is specified by the variation pattern specification command that results in a missed reach after a low-base weak super reach A, the CPU 120 reports at the end of the introductory part that the ally character "Yumeyume" fails to catch the enemy character "Bakuchu," indicating that the low-base weak reach A animation did not result in a jackpot. Subsequently, the image display device 5 displays a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating a missed reach of the type specified by the variable display result specification command.

Furthermore, in a configuration that includes a variation pattern in which a jackpot occurs after the execution of a low-base weak reach A sequence without developing into other super reach sequences, the performance control CPU 120, when a variation pattern in which a jackpot occurs after the execution of a low-base weak super reach A sequence without developing into other super reach sequences is specified by the variation pattern specification command, will, at the end of the introductory part, announce that the ally character "Yumeyume" has captured the enemy character "Bakuchu" and that the result of the low-base weak reach A sequence is a jackpot (that the game is controlled to a jackpot state). Afterward, the image display device 5 will display a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating the type of jackpot specified by the variable display result specification command.

[Regarding the low-base weak reach B演出 (performance/effect)]
Figure 11-34 shows the progression of images displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the low-base weak reach B performance, and Figure 11-35 is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low-base weak reach B performance.

The CPU 120 for performance control, in the normal state, receives either the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command. When a variation pattern corresponding to the low-base weak super reach B is specified by the variation pattern specification command, it starts the variation of the decorative symbols (large). As shown in Figure 11-34(b1), it executes a normal reach performance by stopping the decorative symbols (large) of the type specified by the variable display result specification command at a predetermined timing in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the image display device 5 to form a reach. Afterward, it executes the operation acceleration performance A described later, and as shown in Figure 11-34(b2), while maintaining the hold display and active display in the first hold memory display area 131SG005D, the second hold memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F, it executes a white flash performance that displays the entire display area in white, and then starts the title display part of the low-base weak reach B performance.

As shown in Figures 11-34(b1) to (b3), the background of the large decorative symbol during its normal state (a daytime sky background), which was displayed before the white flash effect, switches to the background of the low-base weak reach B effect (a background where the characters "Yumeyume" and "Boingo" face each other across a hockey table) after the white flash effect. Furthermore, the large decorative symbol, which was displayed in a reach pattern before the white flash effect, switches to a reach pattern using a smaller decorative symbol after the white flash effect.

As shown in Figure 11-35, the title display part of the Low Base Weak Reach B演出 (performance) includes a title start period from when a portion of the title text "Biribiri Hockey Showdown" is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 until it is displayed in its fixed position, a title display period when the title text "Biribiri Hockey Showdown" is displayed in its fixed position, and a title end period from when the displayed title text "Biribiri Hockey Showdown" disappears and the program switches to the introduction part.

The CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation, upon transitioning to the title display part of the low-base weak reach B presentation, first begins displaying the title start period. During the title start period of the low-base weak reach B presentation, as shown in Figures 11-34 (b3) to (b4), a portion of the title text "Biribiri Hockey Showdown" appears from the left side of the display area, overlapping with the left-hand decorative symbol (small) of the left and right decorative symbols (small) of the reach pattern. Then, the entire title text "Biribiri Hockey Showdown" is moved towards its fixed position and stopped there. When the title text "Biribiri Hockey Showdown" is stopped in its fixed position, a portion of the title text "Biribiri Hockey Showdown" is displayed overlapping with both the left and right decorative symbols (small) of the reach pattern.

The small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach pattern will display one of the numbers from "1" to "9" (in the diagram, it's "2"). However, during the title start period of the low-base weak reach B演出 (performance), regardless of whether the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach pattern are any of the numbers from "1" to "9", a portion of the title text "Biribiri Hockey Showdown" will appear overlapping with the left small decorative symbol on the reach pattern. When the title text "Biribiri Hockey Showdown" is stationary in its fixed position, a portion of the title text "Biribiri Hockey Showdown" will be displayed overlapping with both the left and right small decorative symbols on the reach pattern.

The CPU 120 for controlling the performance displays the title text "Electric Hockey Showdown" in a fixed position during the title start period, and then transitions to displaying the title during the title display period. During the title display period of the low-base weak reach B performance, as shown in Figures 11-34 (b4) to (b5), the subtitle "Let's settle this with hockey! I won't lose!" is displayed below the title text "Electric Hockey Showdown," corresponding to the scene where the ally character "Yumeyume" and the enemy character "Boingo" face each other from left to right. The audio of the subtitled dialogue is output from speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, as shown in Figure 11-35, the audio reading the title is not output. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-35, the title display period of the low-base weak reach B performance is executed for a longer period than the title start period of the low-base weak reach B performance (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48).

The CPU 120 for controlling the performance transitions to displaying the title end period after the title display period ends. During the title end period of the low-base weak reach B performance, as shown in (b5) to (b6), the title text "Biribiri Hockey Showdown," displayed in its fixed position, is moved from its fixed position to the right side of the display area until all the title text disappears. As shown in Figure 11-35, the title end period of the low-base weak reach B performance ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low-base weak reach B performance (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48). Also, as shown in Figure 11-35, the expectation level indication display described later is not displayed during the title display part of the low-base weak reach B performance.

The CPU 120 for controlling the performance starts the introductory part of the low-base weak reach B performance after the title end period has finished. As shown in Figures 11-34 (b6) to (b7), the background at the start of the introductory part of the low-base weak reach B performance is the same as the background of the title display part (a background in which the characters "Yumeyume" and "Boingo" face each other on the left and right sides of a hockey table), the video scene that started from the title display part (a scene in which the ally character "Yumeyume" and the enemy character "Boingo" face each other on the left and right) continues into the introductory part, the line "Let's settle this with hockey! I won't lose!" that was displayed in the title display part continues to be displayed, and the audio of the line output from speakers 8L and 8R also continues to be output. Subsequently, as shown in Figures 11-34(b7) to (b8), the audio output of the line "Let's play hockey! I won't lose!" displayed in the title sequence ends, at which point the video switches to the next scene in the introductory sequence (the scene where the ally character "Yumeyume" hits the puck back).

The CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation, when a variation pattern is specified by the variation pattern specification command that develops from a low-base weak super reach B to one of the low-base strong super reach A-C or low-base strongest super reach, executes a dropping animation at the end of the introductory part, causing the movable body 32 to fall, and then develops into one of the low-base strong reach A, low-base strong reach B, low-base strong reach C, or low-base strongest reach animations. On the other hand, when a variation pattern is specified by the variation pattern specification command that results in a missed reach after a low-base weak super reach B, the CPU 120 announces at the end of the introductory part that the ally character "Yumeyume" fails to win against the enemy character "Boingo," and that the result of the low-base weak reach B animation is not a jackpot. Afterward, the image display device 5 displays a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating a missed reach of the type specified by the variable display result specification command.

Furthermore, in a configuration that includes a variation pattern in which a jackpot occurs after the execution of the low-base weak reach B effect without developing into other super reach effects, the effect control CPU 120, when a variation pattern in which a jackpot occurs after the execution of the low-base weak reach B effect without developing into other super reach effects is specified by the variation pattern specification command, will notify the player that the ally character "Yumeyume" has won the battle against the enemy character "Boingo" at the end of the introductory part, resulting in a jackpot (that the game is controlled to a jackpot state), and then display on the image display device 5 a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating the type of jackpot specified by the variable display result specification command.

[Regarding the low-base strong reach A演出 (performance/effect)]
Figure 11-36 shows the progression of images displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the low-base strong reach A performance, and Figure 11-37 is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low-base strong reach A performance.

The CPU 120 for performance control, in the normal state, receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command. If a variation pattern corresponding to a low-base strong super reach A is specified by the variation pattern specification command, and that variation pattern develops from a normal reach through a low-base weak super reach A or low-base weak super reach B, then after executing the normal reach performance, it executes the low-base weak reach A performance or the low-base weak reach B performance, and develops into a low-base strong reach A performance. Furthermore, if a variation pattern corresponding to a low-base strong super reach A is specified by the variation pattern specification command, and that variation pattern develops directly from a normal reach, then after executing the normal reach performance, it executes the selection performance described later, and develops into a low-base strong reach A performance.

The CPU 120 for performance control, when developing from a low-base weak reach A or low-base weak reach B performance, executes a drop animation where the movable body 32 is dropped at the end of the low-base weak reach A or low-base weak reach B performance, and then starts the title display part of the low-base strong reach A performance. During the drop animation, as shown in Figure 11-36(c1), while maintaining the display of the decorative symbols (small) on the left and right of the reach pattern, the hold display in the first hold memory display area 131SG005D, the second hold memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F, the background switches from the end of the low-base weak reach A or low-base weak reach B performance to a background specifically for the drop animation (a background with a pattern radiating from the center), then drops the movable body 32, and then raises the movable body 32 back to its initial position.

Furthermore, when the game directly develops from a normal reach, the CPU 120 for controlling the gameplay, as shown in Figure 11-36 (c1'), executes the selection animation described later, and then starts the title display part of the low-base strong reach A animation. Details of the selection animation will be described later, but at the start of the selection animation, the hold display and active display in the first hold memory display area 131SG005D, the second hold memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F are hidden.

As shown in Figure 11-37, the title display part of the Low Base Strong Reach A演出 (performance) includes a prologue display period before the title text "Catch the Explosive Chu Together!" is displayed, a title start period from when a portion of the title text "Catch the Explosive Chu Together!" is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 until it is displayed in its fixed position, a title display period when the title text "Catch the Explosive Chu Together!" is displayed in its fixed position, and a title end period from when the displayed title text "Catch the Explosive Chu Together!" disappears and the program switches to the introduction part.

When the CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation transitions to the title display part of the low-base strong reach A presentation, it first starts displaying the prologue period.

During the prologue display period of the low-base strong reach A sequence, which transitions from the falling animation, the display of the background dedicated to the falling animation (a background with patterns radiating from the center), the display of the decorative symbols (small) on the left and right of the reach pattern, and the reserve display and active display of the first reserve memory display area 131SG005D, the second reserve memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F are maintained. Then, the ally character "Yumeyume" is displayed on a layer in front of the background dedicated to the falling animation (the background with patterns radiating from the center), the reserve display, and the active display. Afterward, the ally character "Yumeyume" is enlarged until the entire display area is filled.

Furthermore, during the prologue display period of the low-base strong reach A sequence, which transitions from the selection sequence, the display of the selection result image (in this case, the result image of the low-base strong reach A sequence) and the decorative symbols (small) on the left and right of the reach pattern are maintained. Then, the ally character "Yumeyume" is displayed on a layer in front of the selection result screen of the selection sequence, and subsequently enlarged until the entire display area is filled.

The CPU 120 for controlling the presentation transitions to the title screen start period after the prologue display period ends.

As shown in Figures 11-36 (c1) to (c3), during the prologue display period following the fall animation, the background specifically for the fall animation (a background with a pattern radiating from the center), which was displayed before the display area was completely filled by the enlarged view of the ally character "Yumeyume," switches to the background for the low-base strong reach A animation (a background displaying the ally characters "Yumeyume" and "Jam" in a corridor) after the prologue display period ends. The hold and active displays, which were displayed before the display area was completely filled by the enlarged view of the ally character "Yumeyume," become hidden after the prologue display period ends. Note that the decorative symbols (small) on the left and right of the reach pattern remain displayed even after the prologue display period ends.

Furthermore, although not illustrated, during the prologue display period following the selection animation, the selection result image displayed before the display area was completely filled by the enlarged display of the ally character "Yumeyume" switches to the background of the low-base strong reach A animation (a background where the ally characters "Yumeyume" and "Jam" are displayed in a corridor) after the prologue display period ends. The decorative symbols (small) on the left and right of the reach animation remain displayed even after the prologue display period ends, and the hold display and active display, which were hidden during the selection animation, remain hidden.

During the title start period of the low-base strong reach A演出 (performance), as shown in Figures 11-36 (c3) to (c4), a portion of the title text "Catch the Explosive Chu together!" appears from the left side of the display area, overlapping with the left-hand decorative symbol (small) of the left and right decorative symbols (small) of the reach pattern. Then, the entire title text "Catch the Explosive Chu together!" moves towards its fixed position and stops there. When the title text "Catch the Explosive Chu together!" is stationary in its fixed position, a portion of the title text "Catch the Explosive Chu together!" is displayed overlapping with both the left and right decorative symbols (small) of the reach pattern.

The small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach pattern will display one of the numbers from "1" to "9" (in the diagram, it's "2"). However, during the title start period of the low-base strong reach A演出 (performance), regardless of whether the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach pattern are any of the numbers from "1" to "9", a portion of the title text "Catch the Explosive Chu Together!" will appear overlapping with the left small decorative symbol on the reach pattern. When the title text "Catch the Explosive Chu Together!" is stationary in its fixed position, a portion of the title text "Catch the Explosive Chu Together!" will be displayed overlapping with both the left and right small decorative symbols on the reach pattern.

The CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation displays the title text "Catch the Explosive Chu Together!" in its fixed position during the title start period, and then transitions to displaying the title during the title display period. During the title display period of the low-base strong reach A presentation, as shown in Figure 11-36 (c4), the CPU first maintains the display of the title text "Catch the Explosive Chu Together!" in its fixed position for a predetermined time, with the expectation level indication display hidden. During this time, as shown in Figure 11-37, the speakers 8L and 8R output audio reading the title. Next, as shown in Figures 11-36 (c5) to (c6), the expectation level indication display is shown below the title text "Catch the Explosive Chu Together!" in a smaller size than the title text "Catch the Explosive Chu Together!". As shown in Figure 11-37, the title display period of the low-base strong reach A presentation is executed for a longer period than the title start period of the low-base strong reach A presentation (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48).

The CPU 120 for controlling the performance transitions to displaying the title end period after the title display period ends. During the title end period of the low-base strong reach A performance, as shown in Figures 11-36 (c6) to (c7), the title text "Catch the Explosive Chu Together!" displayed in its fixed position is moved from its fixed position to the right side of the display area until all of the title text disappears. The expectation level indication display is also moved to the right side of the display area along with the title text until all of it disappears. As shown in Figure 11-37, the title end period of the low-base strong reach A performance ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low-base strong reach A performance (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48). Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-37, in the title display part of the low-base strong reach A performance, no subtitles of dialogue are displayed, and no dialogue audio is output from speakers 8L and 8R, unlike in the low-base weak reach A and low-base weak reach B performances.

The CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation starts the introductory part of the low-base strong reach A presentation after the title screen ends. As shown in Figures 11-36 (c3) to (c8), the background at the start of the introductory part of the low-base strong reach A presentation is the same as the background from the title screen onwards (the background showing the allied characters "Yumeyume" and "Jam" in the corridor), and the video scene that started from the title screen (the scene showing the allied characters "Yumeyume" and "Jam" in the corridor) continues into the introductory part. Furthermore, as shown in Figures 11-36 (c8) and 11-37, after the introductory part begins, the enemy character "Bakuchu" appears, and the subtitle "Try and catch me if you can!" corresponding to the scene in which the enemy character "Bakuchu" appears is displayed. The audio of the subtitled line is then output from speakers 8L and 8R.

In this low-base strong reach A演出 (performance/animation), during the title display part, the title is read aloud from speakers 8L and 8R. However, subtitles of dialogue corresponding to the scene in the title display part are not displayed, and no dialogue audio corresponding to the scene in the title display part is output from speakers 8L and 8R. After the introduction part begins, subtitles of dialogue corresponding to the scene in the introduction part are displayed, and dialogue corresponding to the scene in the introduction part is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

The CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation, when a variation pattern that results in a jackpot is specified via the variation pattern specification command after a low-base strong super reach A, reports that the ally characters "Yumeyume" and "Jam" capture the enemy character "Bakuchu" at the end of the introductory part, indicating that the result of the low-base strong reach A presentation is a jackpot (that the game is controlled to a jackpot state). Afterward, the image display device 5 displays a combination of large decorative symbols indicating the type of jackpot specified by the variable display result specification command. Conversely, when a variation pattern that results in a missed reach is specified via the variation pattern specification command, the CPU 120 reports that the ally characters "Yumeyume" and "Jam" fail to capture the enemy character "Bakuchu" at the end of the introductory part, indicating that the result of the low-base strong reach A presentation is not a jackpot. Afterward, the image display device 5 displays a combination of large decorative symbols indicating the type of missed reach specified by the variable display result specification command.

[Regarding the display of expected value indication for low-base strong reach A演出 (performance/animation)]
In the title display part of the low-base strong reach A performance, the image display device 5 displays the title text "Catch the Bakuchu together!" along with an expectation level indication display in a smaller size than the title text "Catch the Bakuchu together!". The expectation level indication display shown in the title display part consists of five star-shaped objects and the text "Expectation Level" displayed above the star-shaped objects to indicate that the star-shaped objects represent the expectation level, as shown in Figure 11-36 (c5). The expectation level is indicated by the number of star-shaped objects whose color has changed from black to gold among the five star-shaped objects.

In the normal state when the low-base strong reach A演出 (performance/animation) is performed, the image display device 5 may display objects indicating the number of reserved balls and objects indicating the active display. On the other hand, the expectation level indication displayed in the title display part also indicates the expectation level using multiple objects. Therefore, if the reserved ball indication, active display, and expectation level indication are displayed simultaneously in the title display part, there is a risk that the objects constituting the reserved ball indication and active display may be mistaken for the objects of the expectation level indication. For this reason, in the title display part of the low-base strong reach A performance where the expectation level indication is displayed, the reserved ball indication and active display are not displayed simultaneously with the expectation level indication, thereby preventing the objects constituting the reserved ball indication and active display from being mistaken for the objects of the expectation level indication.

Furthermore, under normal circumstances, game balls rarely enter the second starting prize entry point. Therefore, when the number of reserved balls in the first special symbol is at its maximum (four) and is in variable display mode, up to five objects may be displayed as reserved ball and active ball displays. This matches the number of objects indicating maximum expectation in the expectation indication display. However, in the title display part of the low-base strong reach A performance, the reserved ball and active ball displays are not displayed simultaneously with the expectation indication display. Therefore, even when the low-base strong reach A performance is executed while up to five objects are displayed as reserved ball and active ball displays, it is possible to prevent confusion between the objects displayed as reserved ball and active ball displays and the objects in the expectation indication display, thus preventing the misinterpretation that the expectation level is maximum in the expectation indication display.

Furthermore, in the example shown in Figure 11-36, the pending and active displays are shown during the prologue display period before the expectation level indication display is shown in the title display part. However, the system may also be configured to hide the pending and active displays from the start of the prologue display period. Even in such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the objects constituting the pending and active displays from being mistaken for the expectation level indication display objects.

Furthermore, when executing the low-base strong reach A animation, as shown in Figures 11-36 (c2) to (c3), during the prologue display period, the ally character "Yumeyume" is displayed on a layer in front of the background dedicated to the falling animation (a background with a pattern radiating from the center), the hold display, and the active display. Then, the ally character "Yumeyume" is enlarged until the entire display area is filled. At the same time, the hold display and active display, which were displayed before the entire display area was filled by the enlargement of the ally character "Yumeyume," are hidden after the prologue display period ends, so that the hold display and active display can be hidden without any sense of incongruity. In the example shown in Figure 11-36, the character is displayed on a layer in front of the hold and active displays, and is enlarged until the entire display area is filled. This configuration hides the hold and active displays that were visible before the display area was completely filled. However, when executing the low-base strong reach A animation, a monochrome display animation is also possible, where the entire display area, excluding decorative symbols (small) of the reach pattern, is displayed in a single color such as white. This eliminates the hold and active displays that were visible before the monochrome display animation. Even in this configuration, the hold and active displays can be hidden without any noticeable inconsistencies.

In the title display part of the Low Base Strong Reach A演出 (performance), as shown in Figure 11-36(c4), the title text "Catch the Explosive Chu Together!" is displayed in its fixed position for a predetermined time with the expectation level indication hidden. Then, as shown in Figures 11-36(c5) to (c6), the expectation level indication is displayed below the title text "Catch the Explosive Chu Together!". At this time, as shown in Figure 11-36(c5), in the initial stage, the five star-shaped objects constituting the expectation level indication are all displayed in black. Subsequently, as shown in Figure 11-36(c6), the color of three of the five star-shaped objects corresponding to the Low Base Strong Reach A演出 is changed from black to gold, indicating the expectation level of a big win in the Low Base Strong Reach A演出.

When the low-base weak reach A or low-base weak reach B sequence progresses to the low-base strong reach A sequence, as shown in Figures 11-38 (x1) to (x2), during the prologue display period, the reserve display and active display are shown if there are any remaining reserves until the display area is completely filled by the enlarged display of the ally character "Yumeyume". In the subsequent title display part, without going through the step of displaying the title text "Catch the Bakuchu together!" in its fixed position with the expectation level indication display hidden, as shown in Figures 11-38 (x3) to (x4), the five star-shaped objects that constitute the expectation level indication display are displayed simultaneously with the title text "Catch the Bakuchu together!". If the color of the star-shaped objects is then changed from black to gold, the objects that constitute the expectation level indication display will be displayed immediately after the objects that constitute the reserve display and active display are hidden, which may cause confusion between the reserve display and active display and the expectation level indication display. In contrast, in the example shown in Figure 11-36, after the expectation level indicator is hidden during the prologue display period, the title text "Catch the Bakuchu Together!" is displayed in its fixed position for a predetermined period of time with the expectation level indicator hidden during the title display period. Afterward, the expectation level indicator is displayed below the title text "Catch the Bakuchu Together!", thus preventing confusion between the pending display, active display, and expectation level indicator.

[Regarding the low-base strong reach B演出 (performance/effect)]
Figure 11-39 shows the progression of images displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the low-base strong reach B performance, and Figure 11-40 is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low-base strong reach B performance.

The CPU 120 for performance control, in the normal state, receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command. If a variation pattern corresponding to a low-base strong super reach B is specified by the variation pattern specification command, and that variation pattern develops from a normal reach through a low-base weak super reach A or low-base weak super reach B, then after executing the normal reach performance, it executes the low-base weak reach A performance or low-base weak reach B performance, and develops into a low-base strong reach B performance. Furthermore, if a variation pattern corresponding to a low-base strong super reach B is specified by the variation pattern specification command, and that variation pattern develops directly from a normal reach, then after executing the normal reach performance, it executes the selection performance described later, and develops into a low-base strong reach B performance.

The CPU 120 for controlling the performance, when developing from a low-base weak reach A performance or a low-base weak reach B performance, executes a drop performance in which the movable body 32 is dropped at the end of the low-base weak reach A performance or a low-base weak reach B performance, and then starts the title display part of the low-base strong reach B performance. During the drop performance, as shown in Figure 11-39(d1), while maintaining the display of the decorative symbols (small) on the left and right of the reach pattern, the reserve display in the first reserve memory display area 131SG005D, the second reserve memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F, the background switches from the end of the low-base weak reach A performance or a low-base weak reach B performance to a background specifically for the drop performance (a background with a pattern radiating from the center), then drops the movable body 32, and then raises the movable body 32 back to its initial position.

Furthermore, when the game directly develops from a normal reach, the CPU 120 for controlling the gameplay, as shown in Figure 11-39 (d1'), executes the selection animation described later, and then starts the title display part of the low-base strong reach B animation. Details of the selection animation will be described later, but at the start of the selection animation, the hold display and active display in the first hold memory display area 131SG005D, the second hold memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F are hidden.

As shown in Figure 11-40, the title display part of the Low Base Strong Reach B演出 (performance) includes a prologue display period before the title text "Gekishin Robo Battle" is displayed, a title start period from when a part of the title text "Gekishin Robo Battle" is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 until it is displayed in its fixed position, a title display period when the title text "Gekishin Robo Battle" is displayed in its fixed position, and a title end period from when the display of the title text "Gekishin Robo Battle" that was displayed in its fixed position disappears until the program switches to the introduction part.

When the CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation transitions to the title display part of the low-base strong reach B presentation, it first starts displaying the prologue period.

During the prologue display period of the low-base strong reach B sequence, which transitions from the falling animation, the display of the background dedicated to the falling animation (a background with patterns radiating from the center), the display of the decorative symbols (small) on the left and right of the reach pattern, and the reserve and active displays of the first reserve memory display area 131SG005D, the second reserve memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F are maintained. Then, the ally character "Yumeyume" is displayed on a layer in front of the background dedicated to the falling animation (the background with patterns radiating from the center), the reserve displays, and the active displays. Afterward, the ally character "Yumeyume" is enlarged until the entire display area is filled.

Furthermore, during the prologue display period of the low-base strong reach B sequence, which transitions from the selection sequence, the display of the selection result image (in this case, the result image of the low-base strong reach B sequence) and the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach pattern are maintained. Then, the ally character "Yumeyume" is displayed on a layer in front of the selection result screen of the selection sequence, and subsequently enlarged until the entire display area is filled.

The CPU 120 for controlling the presentation transitions to the title screen start period after the prologue display period ends.

As shown in Figures 11-39 (d1) to (d3), during the prologue display period following the fall animation, the background specifically for the fall animation (a background with a pattern radiating from the center), which was displayed before the display area was completely filled by the enlarged view of the ally character "Yumeyume," switches to the background specifically for the title display of the low-base strong reach B animation (a background where the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Robo" are displayed on the left and right). The hold display and active display, which were displayed before the display area was completely filled by the enlarged view of the ally character "Yumeyume," become invisible after the prologue display period ends. Note that the decorative symbols (small) on the left and right of the reach pattern remain displayed even after the prologue display period ends.

Furthermore, although not illustrated, during the prologue display period following the selection sequence, the selection result image displayed before the entire display area was filled by the enlarged display of the ally character "Yumeyume" switches to a background specifically for the title display of the low-base strong reach B sequence (a background where the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Robo" are displayed on the left and right). The display of the decorative symbols (small) on the left and right of the reach sequence remains even after the prologue display period ends, and the hold display and active display, which were hidden during the selection sequence, remain hidden.

During the title start period of the low-base strong reach B演出 (performance), as shown in Figures 11-39 (d3) to (d4), a portion of the title text "Gekishin Robo Battle" appears from the left side of the display area, overlapping with the left-hand decorative symbol (small) of the left and right decorative symbols (small) of the reach pattern. Then, the entire title text "Gekishin Robo Battle" moves towards its fixed position and stops there. When the title text "Gekishin Robo Battle" is stationary in its fixed position, a portion of the title text "Gekishin Robo Battle" is displayed overlapping with both the left and right decorative symbols (small) of the reach pattern.

The small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach pattern will display one of the numbers from "1" to "9" (in the diagram, it's "2"). However, during the title start period of the low-base strong reach B演出 (performance), regardless of whether the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach pattern are any of the numbers from "1" to "9", a portion of the title text "Gekishin Robo Battle" will appear overlapping with the left small decorative symbol on the left and right of the reach pattern. When the title text "Gekishin Robo Battle" is stationary in its fixed position, a portion of the title text "Gekishin Robo Battle" will be displayed overlapping with both the left and right small decorative symbols on the reach pattern.

The CPU 120 for controlling the performance displays the title text "Gekishin Robo Battle" in a fixed position during the title start period, and then transitions to displaying the title during the title display period. During the title display period of the low-base strong reach B performance, first, as shown in Figure 11-39 (d4), the CPU maintains the state of displaying the title text "Gekishin Robo Battle" in a fixed position with the expectation level indication display hidden for a predetermined time. During this time, as shown in Figure 11-40, the speakers 8L and 8R output audio reading the title. Next, as shown in Figures 11-39 (d5) to (d6), the expectation level indication display is shown below the title text "Gekishin Robo Battle" in a smaller size than the title text "Gekishin Robo Battle". As shown in Figure 11-40, the title display period of the low-base strong reach B performance is executed for a longer period than the title start period of the low-base strong reach B performance (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48).

The CPU 120 for controlling the performance transitions to displaying the title end period after the title display period ends. During the title end period of the Low Base Strong Reach B performance, as shown in Figures 11-39 (d6) to (d7), the title text "Gekishin Robo Battle," displayed in its fixed position, is moved to the right side of the display area until all of the title text disappears. The expectation level indication display is also moved to the right side of the display area until all of it disappears. As shown in Figure 11-40, the title end period of the Low Base Strong Reach B performance ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the Low Base Strong Reach B performance (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48). Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-40, in the title display part of the Low Base Strong Reach B performance, dialogue subtitles are not displayed, and no dialogue audio is output from speakers 8L and 8R, unlike in the Low Base Weak Reach A and Low Base Weak Reach B performances.

The CPU 120 for controlling the performance starts the introductory part of the low-base strong reach B performance after the title end period has finished. As shown in Figures 11-39 (d3) to (d8), the background at the start of the introductory part of the low-base strong reach B performance is different from the background used for title display in the title display part (a background in which the allied characters "Jam" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Robo" are displayed on the left and right). At the start of the introductory part, the background switches from the background used for title display in the title display part to the background at the start of the introductory part of the low-base strong reach B performance (a background in which the allied characters "Jam" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Robo" confront each other in the town). The introductory part of the low-base strong reach B performance starts with a video scene in which the enemy character "Robo" is facing forward at a position further away from the player, and the allied characters "Jam" and "Nana" are facing away from the player at a position closer to the player. In this sequence, both the enemy character "Robo," located further back from the player's perspective, and the allied characters "Jam" and "Nana," located closer to the player, are displayed in positions that overlap with the title text "Earthquake Robo Battle" during the title display period of the title screen. Furthermore, as shown in Figures 11-39(d8) and 11-40, after the start of the introductory part, the line "I won't lose!" is displayed as a subtitle corresponding to the scene where the allied characters "Jam" and "Nana" confront the enemy character "Robo," and the audio of the subtitled line is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

In this low-base strong reach B演出 (performance/animation), during the title display part, the title is read aloud from speakers 8L and 8R. However, subtitles of dialogue corresponding to the scene in the title display part are not displayed, and no dialogue audio corresponding to the scene in the title display part is output from speakers 8L and 8R. After the introduction part begins, subtitles of dialogue corresponding to the scene in the introduction part are displayed, and dialogue corresponding to the scene in the introduction part is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

The CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation, when a variation pattern that results in a jackpot is specified via the variation pattern specification command after a low-base strong super reach B, will report the result of the low-base strong reach B presentation as a jackpot (indicating that the game is controlled to a jackpot state) at the end of the introductory part, where the allied characters "Jam" and "Nana" win the battle against the enemy character "Robo". Afterward, the CPU 120 will display on the image display device 5 a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating the type of jackpot specified by the variable display result specification command. Conversely, when a variation pattern that results in a miss after a low-base strong super reach B is specified via the variation pattern specification command, the CPU 120 will report the result of the low-base strong reach B presentation as not resulting in a jackpot at the end of the introductory part, where the allied characters "Jam" and "Nana" lose the battle against the enemy character "Robo". Afterward, the CPU 120 will display on the image display device 5 a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating the type of miss specified by the variable display result specification command.

[Regarding the display of expected value indication for the low-base strong reach B演出 (performance/effect)]
In the title display part of the low-base strong reach B production, the image display device 5 displays the title text "Gekishin Robo Battle" along with an expectation level indication display in a smaller size than the title text "Gekishin Robo Battle". The expectation level indication display shown in the title display part consists of five star-shaped objects and the text "Expectation Level" displayed above the star-shaped objects to indicate that the star-shaped objects represent the expectation level, as shown in Figure 11-39 (d5). The expectation level is indicated by the number of star-shaped objects whose color has changed from black to gold among the five star-shaped objects.

In the normal state where the low-base strong reach B演出 (performance/effect) is executed, the image display device 5 may display objects indicating the number of reserved balls and objects indicating the active display. If the reserved ball display, active display, and expectation level indication display are displayed simultaneously in the title display part, there is a risk that the objects constituting the reserved ball display and active display may be mistaken for the expectation level indication display objects. Therefore, in the title display part of the low-base strong reach B performance where the expectation level indication display is displayed, the reserved ball display and active display are not displayed simultaneously with the expectation level indication display, thereby preventing the objects constituting the reserved ball display and active display from being mistaken for the expectation level indication display objects.

Furthermore, in the title display section of the Low Base Strong Reach B演出 (performance), the hold indicator and active indicator are not displayed simultaneously with the expectation level indicator. Therefore, even when the Low Base Strong Reach B performance is executed while up to five objects are displayed as hold indicators and active indicators, it prevents confusion between the objects displayed as hold indicators and active indicators and the objects displayed as expectation level indicators, thus preventing the misinterpretation that the expectation level is at its maximum.

Furthermore, in the low-base strong reach B演出 (performance/animation), the system may be configured to hide the hold display and active display from the start of the prologue display period. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the objects constituting the hold display and active display from being mistaken for objects indicating the expected value.

Furthermore, when executing the low-base strong reach B animation, as shown in Figures 11-39 (d2) to (d3), during the prologue display period, the ally character "Yumeyume" is displayed on a layer in front of the background dedicated to the falling animation (a background with a pattern radiating from the center), the hold display, and the active display. Then, the ally character "Yumeyume" is enlarged until the entire display area is filled. The hold display and active display that were displayed before the display area was completely filled by the enlargement of the ally character "Yumeyume" are hidden after the prologue display period ends, thus allowing the hold display and active display to be hidden without any sense of incongruity. Alternatively, when executing the low-base strong reach B animation, a monochrome display animation can be performed, where the entire display area is displayed in a single color such as white, excluding decorative symbols (small) of the reach pattern. This configuration also allows the hold display and active display to be hidden without any sense of incongruity.

In the title display part of the Low Base Strong Reach B演出 (performance), as shown in Figure 11-39(d4), the title text "Gekishin Robo Battle" is displayed in its fixed position for a predetermined time with the expectation level indication display hidden. Then, as shown in Figures 11-39(d5) to (d6), the expectation level indication display is shown below the title text "Gekishin Robo Battle". At this time, as shown in Figure 11-39(d5), in the initial stage, the five star-shaped objects constituting the expectation level indication display are all displayed in black. Then, as shown in Figure 11-39(d6), the color of 3.5 star-shaped objects corresponding to the Low Base Strong Reach B performance is changed from black to gold, indicating the expectation level of a big win in the Low Base Strong Reach B performance. This prevents confusion between the hold display, active display, and expectation level indication display.

[Regarding the low-base strong reach C演出 (performance/effect)]
Since the low-base strong reach C演出 (performance) has many similarities to the low-base strong reach B演出 (performance) mentioned above, the diagram for the low-base strong reach C演出 will be omitted.

The CPU 120 for performance control, in the normal state, receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command. If a variation pattern corresponding to a low-base strong super reach C is specified by the variation pattern specification command, and that variation pattern develops from a normal reach through a low-base weak super reach A or low-base weak super reach B, then after executing the normal reach performance, it executes the low-base weak reach A performance or low-base weak reach B performance, and develops into the low-base strong reach C performance. Furthermore, if a variation pattern corresponding to a low-base strong super reach C is specified by the variation pattern specification command, and that variation pattern develops directly from a normal reach, then after executing the normal reach performance, it executes the selection performance described later, and develops into the low-base strong reach C performance.

The CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation, when developing from either the Low Base Weak Reach A or Low Base Weak Reach B presentation, executes a drop animation where the movable body 32 is dropped at the end of the Low Base Weak Reach A or Low Base Weak Reach B presentation, and then starts the title display part of the Low Base Strong Reach C presentation. During the drop animation, while maintaining the display of the decorative symbols (small) on the left and right of the reach pattern, and the reserve and active displays in the first reserve memory display area 131SG005D, the second reserve memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F, the background switches from the end of the Low Base Weak Reach A or Low Base Weak Reach B presentation to a background specifically for the drop animation (a background with a pattern radiating from the center), then drops the movable body 32, and then raises the movable body 32 back to its initial position.

Furthermore, when the game directly develops from a normal reach, the CPU 120 for controlling the gameplay executes the selection sequence described later, and then starts the title display part of the low-base strong reach B sequence. Details of the selection sequence will be described later, but at the start of the selection sequence, the reserve display and active display in the first reserve memory display area 131SG005D, the second reserve memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F are hidden.

The title display part of the Low Base Strong Reach C演出 (performance) includes a prologue display period before the title text "Great Shock Robot Battle" is displayed, a title start period from when a portion of the title text "Great Shock Robot Battle" is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 until it is displayed in its fixed position, a title display period when the title text "Great Shock Robot Battle" is displayed in its fixed position, and a title end period from when the displayed title text "Great Shock Robot Battle" disappears and the program switches to the introduction part.

When the CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation transitions to the title display part of the low-base strong reach C presentation, it first starts displaying the prologue period.

During the prologue display period of the low-base strong reach C animation, which transitions from the falling animation, the display of the background dedicated to the falling animation (a background with patterns radiating from the center), the display of the decorative symbols (small) on the left and right of the reach pattern, and the reserve display and active display of the first reserve memory display area 131SG005D, the second reserve memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F are maintained. Then, the ally character "Yumeyume" is displayed on a layer in front of the background dedicated to the falling animation (the background with patterns radiating from the center), the reserve display, and the active display. Afterward, the ally character "Yumeyume" is enlarged until the entire display area is filled.

Furthermore, during the prologue display period of the low-base strong reach C sequence, which transitions from the selection sequence, the display of the selection result image (in this case, the result image of the low-base strong reach C sequence) and the decorative symbols (small) on the left and right of the reach pattern are maintained. Then, the ally character "Yumeyume" is displayed on a layer in front of the selection result screen of the selection sequence, and subsequently enlarged until the entire display area is filled.

The CPU 120 for controlling the presentation transitions to the title screen start period after the prologue display period ends.

During the prologue display period following the fall animation, the background specifically for the fall animation (a background with a pattern radiating from the center) that was displayed before the display area was completely filled by the enlarged view of the ally character "Yumeyume" will switch to the background for the low-base strong reach B animation (a background where the ally characters "Yumeyume" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Dai-Robo" are displayed on the left and right sides) after the prologue display period ends. The hold and active indicators that were displayed before the display area was completely filled by the enlarged view of the ally character "Yumeyume" will disappear after the prologue display period ends. Note that the decorative symbols (small) on the left and right of the reach pattern will remain displayed even after the prologue display period ends.

Furthermore, although not illustrated, during the prologue display period following the selection sequence, the selection result image displayed before the display area was completely filled by the enlarged display of the ally character "Yumeyume" switches to a background specifically for the title display of the low-base strong reach C sequence (a background where the ally characters "Yumeyume" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Dai-Robo" are displayed on the left and right). Note that the display of the decorative symbols (small) on the left and right of the reach sequence remains even after the prologue display period ends, and the hold display and active display, which were hidden during the selection sequence, remain hidden.

During the title start period of the low-base strong reach C演出 (performance/effect), a portion of the title text "Great Shock Robot Battle" appears from the left side of the display area, overlapping with the left-hand decorative symbol (small) of the left and right decorative symbols (small) of the reach pattern. Then, the entire title text "Great Shock Robot Battle" moves towards its fixed position and stops there. While the title text "Great Shock Robot Battle" is stationary in its fixed position, a portion of the title text "Great Shock Robot Battle" is displayed overlapping with both the left and right decorative symbols (small) of the reach pattern.

The small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach pattern will display one of the numbers from "1" to "9" (in the diagram, it's "2"). However, during the title start period, regardless of which of the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach pattern is a number from "1" to "9", a portion of the title text "Great Shock Robot Battle" will appear overlapping with the left small decorative symbol on the reach pattern. When the title text "Great Shock Robot Battle" is stationary in its fixed position, a portion of the title text "Great Shock Robot Battle" will be displayed overlapping with both the left and right small decorative symbols on the reach pattern.

The CPU 120 for controlling the performance displays the title text "Great Shock Robot Battle" in its fixed position during the title start period, and then transitions to displaying the title during the title display period. During the title display period of the low-base strong reach C performance, the CPU first maintains the display of the title text "Great Shock Robot Battle" in its fixed position for a predetermined time, with the expectation level indication display hidden. During this time, the speakers 8L and 8R output audio reading the title. Next, the expectation level indication is displayed below the title text "Great Shock Robot Battle" in a smaller size. The title display period for the low-base strong reach C performance is executed for a longer period than the title start period of the low-base strong reach C performance (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48).

The CPU 120 for controlling the performance transitions to displaying the title end period after the title display period ends. During the title end period of the Low Base Strong Reach C performance, the title text "Great Shock Robot Battle," currently displayed in its fixed position, is moved to the right side of the display area until all of the title text disappears. The expectation level indication display is also moved to the right side of the display area until it disappears completely. The title end period of the Low Base Strong Reach C performance is shorter than the title start period and title display period of the Low Base Strong Reach C performance (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48). Furthermore, in the title display part of the Low Base Strong Reach C performance, dialogue subtitles are not displayed, and no dialogue audio is output from speakers 8L and 8R, unlike the Low Base Weak Reach A and Low Base Weak Reach B performances.

The CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation starts the introductory part of the low-base strong reach C presentation after the title screen period has ended. The background at the start of the introductory part of the low-base strong reach C presentation is different from the background used for displaying the title in the title screen section (a background in which the allied characters "Yumeyume" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Dai Robo" are displayed on the left and right). At the start of the introductory part, the background switches from the background used for displaying the title in the title screen section to the background used for starting the introductory part of the low-base strong reach C presentation (a background in which the allied characters "Yumeyume" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Dai Robo" confront each other in the town). The introductory part of the low-base strong reach C presentation starts with a video scene in which the enemy character "Dai Robo" is facing forward on the far side from the player's perspective, and the allied characters "Yumeyume" and "Nana" are facing away from the player on the near side from the player's perspective. In this sequence, both the enemy character "Dai-Robo," located further back from the player's perspective, and the allied characters "Yumeyume" and "Nana," located closer to the player, are displayed in the same position as the title text "Dai-Gekishi Robo Battle" was displayed during the title display period of the title screen. Furthermore, after the introductory part begins, the line "I will absolutely not lose!" is displayed as a subtitle corresponding to the scene where the allied characters "Yumeyume" and "Nana" confront the enemy character "Dai-Robo," and the audio of the displayed line is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

In this low-base strong reach C演出 (performance/animation), during the title display part, the title is read aloud from speakers 8L and 8R. However, subtitles of dialogue corresponding to the scene in the title display part are not displayed, and no dialogue audio corresponding to the scene in the title display part is output from speakers 8L and 8R. After the introduction part begins, subtitles of dialogue corresponding to the scene in the introduction part are displayed, and dialogue corresponding to the scene in the introduction part is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

The CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation, when a variation pattern that results in a jackpot is specified via the variation pattern specification command after a low-base strong super reach C, will report the result of the low-base strong reach C presentation as a jackpot (indicating that the game is controlled to a jackpot state) at the end of the introductory part, with the allied characters "Yumeyume" and "Nana" winning the battle against the enemy character "Dai-Robo". Afterward, the image display device 5 will display a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating the type of jackpot specified by the variable display result specification command. Conversely, when a variation pattern that results in a miss is specified via the variation pattern specification command after a low-base strong super reach C, the CPU 120 will report the result of the low-base strong reach C presentation as not resulting in a jackpot. Afterward, the image display device 5 will display a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating the type of miss, specified by the variable display result specification command.

[Regarding the display of expected value indication for low-base strong reach C演出]
In the title display part of the low-base strong reach C production, the image display device 5 displays the title text "Great Shock Robot Battle" along with an expectation level indicator in a smaller size than the title text "Great Shock Robot Battle". The expectation level indicator displayed in the title display part consists of five star-shaped objects and the text "Expectation Level" displayed above the star-shaped objects to indicate that the star-shaped objects represent the expectation level. The expectation level is indicated by the number of star-shaped objects whose color has changed from black to gold.

In the normal state where the low-base strong reach C演出 (performance/animation) is performed, the image display device 5 may display objects indicating the number of reserved balls and objects indicating the active display. If the reserved ball display, active display, and expectation level indication display are displayed simultaneously in the title display part, there is a risk that the objects constituting the reserved ball display and active display may be mistaken for the expectation level indication display objects. Therefore, in the title display part of the low-base strong reach C performance where the expectation level indication display is displayed, the reserved ball display and active display are not displayed simultaneously with the expectation level indication display, thereby preventing the objects constituting the reserved ball display and active display from being mistaken for the expectation level indication display objects.

Furthermore, in the title display section of the Low Base Strong Reach C演出 (performance), the hold indicator and active indicator are not displayed simultaneously with the expectation level indicator. Therefore, even when the Low Base Strong Reach C演出 is executed while up to five objects are displayed as hold indicators and active indicators, it prevents confusion between the objects displayed as hold indicators and active indicators and the objects displayed as expectation level indicators, thus preventing the misinterpretation that the expectation level is at its maximum.

Furthermore, in the low-base strong reach C演出 (performance/animation), the system may be configured to hide the hold display and active display from the start of the prologue display period. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the objects constituting the hold display and active display from being mistaken for objects indicating the expected value.

Furthermore, when executing the low-base strong reach B sequence, during the prologue display period, the ally character "Yumeyume" is displayed on a layer in front of the background dedicated to the falling sequence (a background with a pattern radiating from the center), the hold display, and the active display. Then, the ally character "Yumeyume" is enlarged until the entire display area is filled. The hold display and active display that were displayed before the display area was completely filled by the enlargement of the ally character "Yumeyume" disappear after the prologue display period ends, thus allowing the hold display and active display to be hidden without any sense of incongruity. Additionally, when executing the low-base strong reach C sequence, a monochrome display sequence can be implemented where the entire display area, excluding decorative symbols (small) of the reach sequence, is displayed in a single color such as white. This configuration also allows the hold display and active display to be hidden without any sense of incongruity.

In the title display section of the Low Base Strong Reach C演出 (performance), the title text "Great Shock Robot Battle" is displayed in its fixed position for a predetermined time with the expectation level indication hidden. Afterward, the expectation level indication is displayed below the title text "Great Shock Robot Battle." Initially, the five star-shaped objects constituting the expectation level indication are all displayed in black. Then, the four star-shaped objects corresponding to the Low Base Strong Reach C演出 change color from black to gold, indicating the expectation level of a big win in the Low Base Strong Reach C演出. This prevents confusion between the hold display, active display, and expectation level indication.

[Regarding the strongest low-base reach animation]
Figure 11-41 shows the progression of images displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the low-base strongest reach performance, and Figure 11-42 is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low-base strongest reach performance.

The CPU 120 for performance control, in the normal state, receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command. If a variation pattern corresponding to the lowest base strongest super reach is specified by the variation pattern specification command, and that variation pattern develops from a normal reach through a low-base weak super reach A or low-base weak super reach B, then after executing the normal reach performance, it executes the low-base weak reach A performance or the low-base weak reach B performance, and develops into the lowest base strongest reach performance. Furthermore, if a variation pattern corresponding to the lowest base strongest super reach is specified by the variation pattern specification command, and that variation pattern develops directly from a normal reach, then after executing the normal reach performance, it executes the selection performance described later, and develops into the lowest base strongest reach performance.

The CPU 120 for performance control, when developing from the Low Base Weak Reach A or Low Base Weak Reach B performance, executes a drop animation where the movable body 32 is dropped at the end of the Low Base Weak Reach A or Low Base Weak Reach B performance, and then starts the title display part of the Low Base Strongest Reach performance. During the drop animation, as shown in Figure 11-41(e1), while maintaining the display of the decorative symbols (small) on the left and right of the reach pattern, the hold display in the first hold memory display area 131SG005D, the second hold memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F, the background switches from the end of the Low Base Weak Reach A or Low Base Weak Reach B performance to a background specifically for the drop animation (a background with a pattern radiating from the center), then drops the movable body 32, and then raises the movable body 32 back to its initial position.

Furthermore, when the game directly develops from a normal reach, the CPU 120 for controlling the gameplay, as shown in Figure 11-41(e1'), executes the selection animation described later, and then starts the title display part of the low-base strongest reach animation. Details of the selection animation will be described later, but at the start of the selection animation, the hold display and active display in the first hold memory display area 131SG005D, the second hold memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F are hidden.

As shown in Figure 11-42, the title display part of the low-base strongest reach演出 (reach animation) includes a title start period from when a portion of the title text "Catch the Explosive Chu with 6 People!" is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 until it is displayed in its fixed position, a title display period during which the title text "Catch the Explosive Chu with 6 People!" is displayed in its fixed position, and a title end period from when the displayed title text "Catch the Explosive Chu with 6 People!" disappears and the program switches to the introductory part.

When the CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation transitions to the title display part of the low-base strongest reach presentation, it first starts displaying the title start period.

During the title start period of the low-base strongest reach演出, as shown in Figure 11-41(e3), the display of the decorative symbols (small) on the left and right of the reach pattern is maintained, while the title text "Catch the Bakuchu with 6 people!" is displayed in an enlarged size so that only a portion of its characters is visible within the display area. At this time, the display area is completely filled by a portion of the title text "Catch the Bakuchu with 6 people!". Furthermore, the portion of the title text "Catch the Bakuchu with 6 people!" that is visible within the display area appears overlapping with both the decorative symbols (small) on the left and right of the reach pattern. Subsequently, as shown in Figure 11-41(e4), the title text "Catch the Bakuchu with 6 people!" is gradually reduced in size until all the characters of the title text "Catch the Bakuchu with 6 people!" are visible within the display area, and the title text "Catch the Bakuchu with 6 people!" is then fixed in place. When the title text "Catch the Explosive Chu with 6 People!" is displayed in a reduced size and stationary in its fixed position, a portion of the title text "Catch the Explosive Chu with 6 People!" from the low-base strongest reach animation is displayed overlapping with both the left and right decorative symbols (small) of the reach animation.

The small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach pattern will display one of the numbers from "1" to "9" (in the diagram, it's "2"). However, during the title start period of the low-base strongest reach animation, regardless of whether the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach pattern are any of the numbers from "1" to "9", the enlarged title text "Catch the Bakuchu with 6 people!" will appear overlapping with both of the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach pattern. The reduced-size title text "Catch the Bakuchu with 6 people!" displayed while stationary in its fixed position will also partially overlap with both of the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach pattern.

As shown in Figures 11-41 (e1) to (e4), during the title start period following the fall animation, the background specifically for the fall animation (a background with a pattern radiating from the center) that was displayed before the display area was completely filled with a portion of the enlarged title text "Catch Bakuchu with 6 people!" switches to the background specifically for the title display of the low-base strongest reach animation (a background where the 6 ally characters and the enemy character "Bakuchu" are displayed on the left and right) while the display area is completely filled with a portion of the enlarged title text "Catch Bakuchu with 6 people!". When the title text "Catch Bakuchu with 6 people!" is in a reduced size and stationary in its fixed position, the background specifically for the title display of the low-base strongest reach animation is displayed as its background. Furthermore, during the title sequence following the drop animation, the hold and active indicators, which were displayed before the title text "Catch the Explosive Chu with Six People!" (in its enlarged size) completely fills the display area, will be hidden while the title text "Catch the Explosive Chu with Six People!" is displayed. Note that the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach animation will remain displayed even after the title sequence ends.

Furthermore, during the title screen transition period following the selection animation, the selection result image (in this case, the title image for the low-base strongest reach animation) that was displayed before the enlarged title text "Catch Bakuchu with 6 people!" completely fills the display area will switch to a background specifically for the low-base strongest reach animation title display (a background displaying the six ally characters and the enemy character "Bakuchu" on the left and right). When the title text "Catch Bakuchu with 6 people!" remains stationary in its reduced size, the background specifically for the low-base strongest reach animation title display will be displayed. Note that the decorative symbols (small) on the left and right of the reach animation will remain displayed even after the title screen transition period ends, and the hold display and active display, which were hidden during the selection animation, will remain hidden.

The CPU 120 for controlling the performance displays the title text "Catch the Explosive Chu with 6 People!" in a reduced size at a fixed position during the title start period, and then transitions to displaying the title during the title display period. During the title display period of the low-base strongest reach performance, first, as shown in Figure 11-41(e4), the CPU maintains the state of displaying the title text "Catch the Explosive Chu with 6 People!" at a fixed position for a predetermined time with the expectation level indication display hidden. During this time, as shown in Figure 11-42, the speakers 8L and 8R output audio reading the title. Next, as shown in Figures 11-41(e5) to (e6), the expectation level indication display is displayed below the title text "Catch the Explosive Chu with 6 People!" in a smaller size than the title text "Catch the Explosive Chu with 6 People!". As shown in Figure 11-42, the title display period of the low-base strongest reach performance is executed for a longer period than the title start period of the low-base strongest reach performance (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48).

The CPU 120 for controlling the performance transitions to displaying the title end period after the title display period ends. During the title end period of the low-base strongest reach performance, as shown in Figures 11-41 (e6) to (e7), the title text "Catch the Explosive Chu with 6 People!", which is displayed in a reduced size in a fixed position, is enlarged until the entire display area is filled with a portion of the title text "Catch the Explosive Chu with 6 People!". At this time, the enlargement is not in the opposite manner to when the title text "Catch the Explosive Chu with 6 People!" is displayed reduced in size during the title start period, but rather in a manner different from when the title text "Catch the Explosive Chu with 6 People!" is displayed reduced in size during the title start period, until the entire display area is filled with a portion of the title text "Catch the Explosive Chu with 6 People!". In other words, the trajectory of each part of the title text "Catch the Explosive Chu with 6 People!" as it shrinks during the title start period is different from the trajectory of each part of the title text as it expands during the title end period. Therefore, the display area is completely filled by a portion of the title text "Catch the Explosive Chu with 6 People!" in a manner different from when the entire display area is filled at the start of the title start period. As shown in Figure 11-42, the title end period of the low-base strongest reach演出 (highest reach performance) ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low-base strongest reach performance (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48). Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-42, in the title display part of the low-base strongest reach performance, no subtitles of dialogue are displayed, and no dialogue audio is output from speakers 8L and 8R, unlike in the low-base weak reach A performance and low-base weak reach B performance.

The CPU 120 for controlling the performance starts the introductory part of the low-base strongest reach performance after the title end period has ended. As shown in Figures 11-41 (e4) to (e8), the background at the start of the introductory part of the low-base strongest reach performance (a background showing six allied characters chasing the enemy character "Bakuchu" in the city) is different from the background used exclusively for title display in the title display part (a background showing the six allied characters and the enemy character "Bakuchu" on the left and right). After the title end period has ended, the background used exclusively for title display is completely filled with part of the title text "Catch Bakuchu with 6 people!" and the title end period has ended, and then it switches to the background used at the start of the introductory part of the low-base strongest reach performance. The introductory part of the low-base strongest reach performance starts with a video scene of the six allied characters chasing the enemy character "Bakuchu". Furthermore, as shown in Figures 11-41(e8) and 11-42, after the start of the introductory part, the subtitle "Catch me if you can!" is displayed, corresponding to the scene where six allied characters chase the enemy character "Bakuchu," and the audio of the displayed subtitle is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

In this low-base strongest reach演出 (reach animation), during the title display part, the title is read aloud from speakers 8L and 8R. However, subtitles of dialogue corresponding to the scene in the title display part are not displayed, and no dialogue audio corresponding to the scene in the title display part is output from speakers 8L and 8R. After the introductory part begins, subtitles of dialogue corresponding to the scene in the introductory part are displayed, and dialogue corresponding to the scene in the introductory part is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

The CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation, when a variation pattern that results in a jackpot is specified via the variation pattern specification command after a low-base strongest super reach, will report the result of the presentation, indicating that the six allied characters have captured the enemy character "Bakuchu" at the end of the introductory part, and that the result of the low-base strongest reach presentation is a jackpot (that the game is controlled to a jackpot state). Afterward, the image display device 5 will display a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating the type of jackpot specified by the variable display result specification command. On the other hand, when a variation pattern that results in a missed reach is specified via the variation pattern specification command, the CPU 120 will report the result of the presentation, indicating that the six allied characters have failed to capture the enemy character "Bakuchu" at the end of the introductory part, and that the result of the low-base strongest reach presentation is not a jackpot. Afterward, the image display device 5 will display a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating the type of missed reach specified by the variable display result specification command.

[Regarding the display of the expected value of the strongest low-base reach animation]
In the title display part of the low-base strongest reach演出 (reach effect), the image display device 5 displays the title text "Catch the Bakuchu with 6 people!" along with an expectation level indicator in a smaller size than the title text "Catch the Bakuchu with 6 people!". The expectation level indicator displayed in the title display part consists of five star-shaped objects and the text "Expectation Level" displayed above the star-shaped objects to indicate that the star-shaped objects represent the expectation level, as shown in Figure 11-41(e6). The expectation level is indicated by the number of star-shaped objects whose color has changed from black to gold among the five star-shaped objects.

In the normal state where the low-base strongest reach演出 (reach animation) is performed, the image display device 5 may display objects indicating the number of reserved balls and objects indicating the active display. If the reserved ball display, active display, and expectation level indication display are displayed simultaneously in the title display part, there is a risk that the objects constituting the reserved ball display and active display may be mistaken for the expectation level indication display objects. Therefore, in the title display part of the low-base strongest reach animation where the expectation level indication display is shown, the reserved ball display and active display are not displayed simultaneously with the expectation level indication display, thereby preventing the objects constituting the reserved ball display and active display from being mistaken for the expectation level indication display objects.

Furthermore, in the title display section of the low-base strongest reach演出 (reach animation), the reserve display and active display are not shown simultaneously with the expectation level indication display. Therefore, even when the low-base strongest reach animation is executed while up to five objects are displayed as reserve and active displays, it prevents confusion between the objects displayed as reserve and active displays and the objects displayed as expectation level indication displays, thus preventing the misinterpretation that the expectation level is at its maximum.

Furthermore, when executing the low-base strongest reach animation, as shown in Figures 11-41(e2) to (e4), the title text "Catch the Explosive Chu with 6 People!" is displayed in an enlarged size during the title start period, where only a portion of the text is visible within the display area. Then, it is reduced to a size where all text is visible within the display area. When the background specifically for the low-base strongest reach animation title is displayed, the hold and active indicators that were displayed before the title start period are hidden, allowing for a seamless and unobtrusive removal of the hold and active indicators. Alternatively, when executing the low-base strongest reach animation, a monochrome display animation can be performed, where the entire display area, excluding decorative symbols (small) of the reach pattern, is displayed in a single color such as white. This configuration also allows for a seamless and unobtrusive removal of the hold and active indicators.

In the title display section of the low-base strongest reach演出 (reach演出), as shown in Figure 11-41(e4), the title text "Catch the Bakuchu with 6 people!" is displayed in its fixed position for a predetermined time with the expectation level indication hidden. Then, as shown in Figures 11-41(e5) to (e6), the expectation level indication is displayed below the title text "Catch the Bakuchu with 6 people!". At this time, as shown in Figure 11-41(e5), in the initial stage, the five star-shaped objects constituting the expectation level indication are all displayed in black. Then, as shown in Figure 11-41(e6), the color of 4.5 of the five star-shaped objects corresponding to the low-base strongest reach演出 is changed from black to gold, indicating the expectation level of a big win in the low-base strongest reach演出. This prevents confusion between the hold display, active display, and expectation level indication.

[Regarding variations in the title display section]
Figure 11-43 shows the image transitions in modified versions of the title display part for the Low Base Strong Reach A, Low Base Strong Reach B, Low Base Strong Reach C, and Low Base Strongest Reach performances.

When the CPU 120 for controlling the performance transitions to the title display part of the corresponding super reach performance, it first executes a blackout effect, as shown in Figure 11-43 (f1), which blacks out the entire display area except for the decorative symbols (small) on the left and right of the reach pattern. If the hold display and active display were displayed before the blackout effect was executed, the hold display and active display will be hidden when the blackout effect begins.

The CPU 120 for controlling the performance continues the blackout effect for a predetermined time, and then, as shown in Figure 11-43(f2), maintains a black background across the entire display area while displaying an expectation level indicator (in Figure 11-43(f2), it displays an expectation level indicator for the low-base strongest reach effect).

Next, the CPU 120 for performance control maintains the display of the expectation level indication for a predetermined time, with the background of the entire display area set to black. Then, as shown in Figures 11-43 (f3) and (f5), it displays the title text of the corresponding super reach performance (in Figures 11-43 (f3) and (f5), the title text of the low-base strongest reach performance) in a fixed position and in a size larger than the expectation level indication.

In all cases where the title text of the corresponding Super Reach animation is displayed in its fixed position, a portion of the title text overlaps with both the left and right decorative symbols (small) of the reach animation. The left and right decorative symbols (small) of the reach animation will be one of the numbers from "1" to "9" (in the diagram, "2" is shown). Regardless of which number the left and right decorative symbols (small) of the reach animation are, when displayed in its fixed position, a portion of the title text of the corresponding Super Reach animation will overlap with both the left and right decorative symbols (small) of the reach animation.

Furthermore, the title text is displayed in either a white form (Figure 11-43 (f3)) or a red form (Figure 11-43 (f5)). Whether the title text is displayed in white or red is determined in the variable display予告演出決加工 (preview effect determination process) of step 131SGS609 described above. In the variable display preview effect determination process, when a variation pattern including the execution of low-base strong reach A effect, low-base strong reach B effect, low-base strong reach C effect, and low-base strongest reach effect is identified, it is determined whether the title text is displayed in white or red with a probability depending on whether it is a jackpot or not. In addition, it is determined whether the title text is displayed in white or red with a probability such that the proportion of jackpots when the title text is displayed in red is higher than the proportion of jackpots when the title text is displayed in white. Therefore, in the title display part of the relevant Super Reach sequence, the probability of a big win is higher when the title text is displayed in red than when the title text is displayed in white.

Next, the CPU 120 for performance control displays the expectation level indication and the title text of the corresponding super reach performance. Then, as shown in Figures 11-43 (f4) and (f6), while maintaining the display of the expectation level indication and the title text of the corresponding super reach performance, it displays the background corresponding to the title display part of the corresponding super reach performance and outputs audio of the title being read aloud from speakers 8L and 8R. On the other hand, in the title display part, no subtitles of dialogue are displayed, as in the low-base weak reach A performance and low-base weak reach B performance, and no audio of dialogue is output from speakers 8L and 8R. Furthermore, in the title display part, the title text is displayed for a longer period of time than the time from the start of the blackout performance until the title text is displayed (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48).

Next, the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation transitions to the title screen end period. Note that the control of the title screen end period is the same as for each of the super reach presentations described above, so the explanation is omitted here.

In this modified title display section, the title text for the corresponding super reach animation is larger than the expectation level indicator, and the expectation level is indicated by whether the text is white or red, thus attracting the player's attention. However, by displaying the expectation level indicator before the title text, the player's attention can be drawn to the expectation level indicator first.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-43 (f2), whether the title text is displayed in white or red, if the type of super reach animation is the same, the expectation level indication will be displayed in the same manner. Therefore, attention can be drawn to whether the title text is displayed in white or red after the expectation level indication is shown.

[Regarding High Base Reach A-D演出 (performance/effects)]
Figure 11-44 shows the progression of images displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the High Base Reach A to D sequences, and Figure 11-44 is a timing chart showing the execution status of the High Base Reach A to D sequences. Note that the High Base Reach A to D sequences are the same except for the type of enemy character that appears, the title name, and the expected value indicated by the expected value indication display, so here we will explain the High Base Reach A sequence and omit the explanation of the High Base Reach B to D sequences.

The CPU 120 for performance control receives a first variable display start command or a second variable display start command in the time-saving state A or the probability variation state. When a variation pattern corresponding to High Base Super Reach A is specified by the variation pattern specification command, it starts the variation of the decorative symbols (large). As shown in Figure 11-44(g2), it executes a normal reach performance by stopping the decorative symbols (large) of the type specified by the variable display result specification command at a predetermined timing in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the image display device 5 to form a reach. Afterward, it starts the title display part of the High Base Reach A performance.

As shown in Figure 11-45, the title display part of the High Base Reach A sequence includes a title start period from when a portion of the title text "Battle Reach A" is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 until it is displayed in its fixed position, a title display period when the title text "Battle Reach A" is displayed in its fixed position, and a title end period from when the displayed title text "Battle Reach A" disappears and the sequence switches to the introductory part.

When the CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation transitions to the title display part of the high-base reach A presentation, it first starts displaying the title start period.

During the title start period of the high-base reach A sequence, as shown in Figure 11-44(g2), the display of the decorative symbols (small) on the left and right of the reach sequence is maintained, while the title text "Battle Reach A" is displayed in an enlarged size so that only a portion of its characters are visible within the display area. At this time, the display area is completely filled by a portion of the title text "Battle Reach A". Furthermore, the portion of the title text "Battle Reach A" that is visible within the display area appears overlapping with both the decorative symbols (small) on the left and right of the reach sequence. Subsequently, as shown in Figure 11-44(g3), the title text "Battle Reach A" is gradually reduced in size until all of its characters are visible within the display area, and then the reduced-size title text "Battle Reach A" is fixed in place. When the title text "Battle Reach A" is displayed in a reduced size and stationary in its fixed position, a portion of the title text "Battle Reach A" overlaps with both the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach pattern.

The small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach pattern will display one of the numbers from "1" to "9" (in the diagram, "2" is displayed). However, during the title start period of the high-base reach A sequence, regardless of whether the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach pattern are any of the numbers from "1" to "9", the enlarged title text "Battle Reach A" will appear overlapping with both of the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach pattern. The reduced-size title text "Battle Reach A," when stationary in a fixed position, will also appear partially overlapping with both of the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach pattern.

As shown in Figures 11-44 (g1) to (g3), the background (night sky background) of the large decorative symbols during the changeover of the time-saving state A or probability change state, which was displayed before the display area was completely filled by a portion of the enlarged title characters "Battle Reach A", switches to the background specifically for the title display of the high-base reach A performance (a background in which the ally character "Yumeyume" and the enemy character "Maskman" are displayed on the left and right) while the display area is completely filled by a portion of the enlarged title characters "Battle Reach A". When the title characters "Battle Reach A" are in a reduced size and stationary in their fixed position, the background specifically for the title display of the high-base reach A performance is displayed as its background. In addition, the hold display and active display that were displayed before the display area was completely filled by a portion of the enlarged title characters "Battle Reach A" become invisible while the display area is completely filled by a portion of the enlarged title characters "Battle Reach A". Furthermore, the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach pattern will remain displayed even after the title's start period ends.

The CPU 120 for controlling the performance displays the title text "Battle Reach A" in a reduced size at a fixed position during the title start period, and then transitions to displaying the title during the title display period. During the title display period of the High Base Reach A performance, first, as shown in Figure 11-44 (g3), the CPU maintains the state of displaying the title text "Battle Reach A" at a fixed position for a predetermined time with the expectation level indication display hidden. During this time, as shown in Figure 11-45, the speakers 8L and 8R output audio reading the title. Next, as shown in Figures 11-44 (g4) to (g5), the expectation level indication display is displayed below the title text "Battle Reach A" in a smaller size than the title text "Battle Reach A". As shown in Figure 11-45, the title display period of the High Base Reach A performance is executed for a longer period than the title start period of the High Base Reach A performance (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48).

The CPU 120 for controlling the performance transitions to displaying the title end period after the title display period has ended. During the title end period of the high-base reach A performance, as shown in Figures 11-44 (g5) to (g6), the title characters "Battle Reach A," which are displayed in a reduced size and fixed position, are enlarged until a portion of the title characters "Battle Reach A" completely fills the display area. At this time, the title characters "Battle Reach A" are not enlarged in the opposite manner to when they are reduced in size during the title start period, but rather in a manner different from when they are reduced in size during the title start period, until a portion of the title characters "Battle Reach A" completely fills the display area. In other words, the trajectories that each part of the title characters "Battle Reach A" takes during the process of reducing them during the title start period are different from the trajectories that each part of the title characters takes during the process of enlarging them during the title end period. Therefore, unlike the state in which the entire display area is filled at the start of the title period, the display area is completely filled by a portion of the title text "Battle Reach A". As shown in Figure 11-45, the title end period of the High Base Reach A performance ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the High Base Reach A performance (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48). Also, as shown in Figure 11-45, in the title display part of the High Base Reach A performance, dialogue subtitles are not displayed, and no dialogue audio is output from speakers 8L and 8R, unlike in the Low Base Weak Reach A performance and the Low Base Weak Reach B performance.

The CPU 120 for controlling the performance starts the introductory part of the high-base reach A performance after the title end period has ended. As shown in Figures 11-44 (g3) to (g7), the background at the start of the introductory part of the high-base reach A performance (a background showing the ally character "Yumeyume" and the enemy character "Maskman" fighting) is different from the background dedicated to the title display in the title display part (a background showing the ally character "Yumeyume" and the enemy character "Maskman" on the left and right). After the title end period has ended, the background dedicated to the title display has been completely filled with part of the title text "Battle Reach A" and the title end period has ended, and then it switches to the background at the start of the introductory part of the high-base reach A performance. The introductory part of the high-base reach A performance starts with a video scene of the ally character "Yumeyume" and the enemy character "Maskman" fighting. Furthermore, as shown in Figures 11-44 (g7) and 11-45, after the start of the introductory part, the subtitle "Fight!" is displayed, corresponding to the scene where the ally character "Yumeyume" and the enemy character "Maskman" are fighting. The audio of the subtitled line is then output from speakers 8L and 8R.

In this high-base reach A sequence, the title is read aloud from speakers 8L and 8R during the title display phase. However, subtitles for dialogue relevant to the scene in the title display phase are not displayed, and no dialogue is output from speakers 8L and 8R. After the introduction phase begins, subtitles for dialogue relevant to the scene in the introduction phase are displayed, and dialogue relevant to the scene in the introduction phase is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

The CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation, when a variation pattern that results in a jackpot is specified via the variation pattern specification command after a high-base super reach A, reports that the ally character "Yumeyume" has won the battle against the enemy character "Maskman" at the end of the introductory part, and that the result of the high-base reach A presentation is a jackpot (that the game is controlled to a jackpot state). Afterward, it displays on the image display device 5 a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating the type of jackpot specified by the variable display result specification command. On the other hand, when a variation pattern that results in a miss after a high-base super reach A is specified via the variation pattern specification command, reports that the ally character "Yumeyume" has lost to the enemy character "Maskman" at the end of the introductory part, and that the result of the high-base reach A presentation is not a jackpot. Afterward, it displays on the image display device 5 a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating the type of miss specified by the variable display result specification command.

[Regarding the indication of expected value for high-base reach A-D effects]
The expectation level indications for the high-base reach A to D sequences are the same except for the expected level indicated by the indication. Therefore, this section will explain the expectation level indication for the high-base reach A sequence, and will omit the explanation for the expectation level indications for the high-base reach B to D sequences.

In the title display section of the High Base Reach A sequence, the image display device 5 displays the title text "Battle Reach A" along with a display indicating the level of expectation, in a smaller size than the title text "Battle Reach A". The display indicating the level of expectation shown in the title display section, as shown in Figure 11-44 (g5), consists of five star-shaped objects and the text "Expectation Level" displayed above the star-shaped objects to indicate that the star-shaped objects represent the level of expectation. The level of expectation is indicated by the number of star-shaped objects whose color has changed from black to gold.

In the time-saving state A or probability variation state where the high-base reach A performance is executed, the image display device 5 may display objects indicating the number of reserved balls and objects indicating the active display. If the reserved ball display, active display, and expectation level indication display are displayed simultaneously in the title display part, there is a risk that the objects constituting the reserved ball display and active display may be mistaken for the expectation level indication display objects. Therefore, in the title display part of the high-base reach A performance where the expectation level indication display is displayed, the reserved ball display and active display are not displayed simultaneously with the expectation level indication display, thereby preventing the objects constituting the reserved ball display and active display from being mistaken for the expectation level indication display objects.

Furthermore, in the time-saving state A or the probability variation state, game balls rarely enter the first starting entry point. Therefore, when the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol is at its maximum (4) and is in variable display mode, up to 5 objects may be displayed as reserved ball and active ball displays. This matches the number of objects indicating maximum expectation in the expectation indication display. However, in the title display part of the high-base reach A performance, the reserved ball and active ball displays are not displayed simultaneously with the expectation indication display. Therefore, even when the high-base reach A performance is executed while up to 5 objects are displayed as reserved ball and active ball displays, it is possible to prevent confusion between the objects displayed as reserved ball and active ball displays and the objects in the expectation indication display, thus preventing the misinterpretation that the expectation is at its maximum.

Furthermore, when executing the High Base Reach A sequence, as shown in Figures 11-44 (g1) to (g3), the title text "Battle Reach A" is displayed in an enlarged size during the title start period, where only a portion of the text is visible within the display area. Afterward, it is reduced to a size where all text is visible within the display area. When the background dedicated to the High Base Reach A sequence title is displayed, the hold and active indicators that were displayed before the title start period are hidden, allowing for a seamless and unobtrusive removal of the hold and active indicators. Alternatively, when executing the High Base Reach A sequence, a monochrome display sequence can be implemented, where the entire display area, excluding decorative symbols (small) of the reach pattern, is displayed in a single color such as white. This configuration also allows for a seamless and unobtrusive removal of the hold and active indicators.

In the title display part of the High Base Reach A performance, as shown in Figure 11-44 (g3), the title text "Battle Reach A" is displayed in a fixed position with the expectation level indication display hidden for a predetermined time. Then, as shown in Figures 11-44 (g4) to (g5), the expectation level indication display is displayed below the title text "Battle Reach A". At this time, as shown in Figure 11-44 (g4), in the initial stage, the five star-shaped objects that make up the expectation level indication display are all displayed in black. Then, as shown in Figure 11-44 (g5), the color of three of the five star-shaped objects corresponding to the High Base Reach A performance (3.5 for High Base Reach B performance, 4 for High Base Reach C performance, and 4.5 for High Base Reach D performance) is changed from black to gold, thereby indicating the expectation level of a big win in the High Base Reach A performance. Therefore, this prevents confusion between the pending/active display and the expectation level indication display.

[Regarding the display position of the title text]
Figure 11-46 shows the position where the title characters are displayed within the display area of the image display device 5.

As shown in Figures 11-46(A) and (B), the image display device 5 has a rectangular display area 5L. However, since the game board 2 is positioned in front of it, the visible area of the display area 5L of the image display device 5 is the area visible through the opening 24 formed in the game board 2, that is, the area not covered by the components that make up the game board 2.

As mentioned above, the CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation displays the title text "Catch the Explosive Chu!" in a fixed position during the title display period of the low-base weak reach A presentation. In this case, the fixed position where the title text "Catch the Explosive Chu!" is displayed is, as shown in Figure 11-46(A), the position where the title text "Catch the Explosive Chu!" coincides with the intersection of the diagonals of the display area 5L of the image display device 5, and as shown in Figure 11-46(B), the position where it coincides with the intersection of the diagonals of the visible rectangular area 5S, which is the largest rectangular area within the viewing area of the image display device 5 that is not obstructed by the components of the game board 2.

Similarly, the title text for the low-base weak reach B performance is "Electric Shock Hockey Showdown", the title text for the low-base strong reach A performance is "Catch the Explosive Chu with Two People!", the title text for the low-base strong reach B performance is "Earthquake Robot Battle", the title text for the low-base strong reach C performance is "Great Earthquake Robot Battle", the title text for the low-base strongest reach performance is "Catch the Explosive Chu with Six People!", the title text for the high-base reach A performance is "Battle Reach A", the title text for the high-base reach B performance is "Battle Reach B", and the title text for the high-base reach C performance is " For both the "Battle Reach C" title and the "Battle Reach D" title for the High Base Reach D sequence, the fixed position where the title is displayed during the title display period is, as shown in Figure 11-46(A), a position where the title coincides with the intersection of the diagonals of the display area 5L of the image display device 5, and as shown in Figure 11-46(B), a position where the title coincides with the intersection of the diagonals of the visible rectangular area 5S, which is the largest rectangular area within the viewing area of the image display device 5 that is not obstructed by the components of the game board 2.

Gaming machines often undergo design changes during the development phase. Changes in the design of the game board 2 can alter the area covered by the display area 5L of the image display device 5 due to the components of the game board 2, thus changing the visible area within the display area 5L. Furthermore, gaming machines installed in arcades are sometimes taken back, modified, and resold. In such cases, changes in the design of the game board 2 can also alter the area covered by the display area 5L of the image display device 5 due to the components of the game board 2, thus changing the visible area within the display area 5L. In such cases, if the placement of title characters in a super reach animation is determined based on the display area 5L of the image display device 5, there is a risk that the title characters' display position will be significantly off-center from the visible area.

In contrast, in this embodiment, in the title display part of any super reach animation, the fixed position where the title characters are displayed during the title display period is such that the title characters coincide with the intersection of the diagonals of the display area 5L of the image display device 5, and also coincide with the intersection of the diagonals of the visible rectangular area 5S, which is the largest rectangular area within the viewing area of the image display device 5 that is not obstructed by the components of the game board 2. Therefore, since the title characters displayed in the fixed position during the title display period coincide with both the intersection of the diagonals of the display area 5L and the intersection of the diagonals of the visible rectangular area 5S, it is possible to prevent the title character display position from shifting significantly from the center of the viewing area even if the design of the game board 2 is changed during design changes or when reusing the game machine.

[Regarding the duration of the Super Reach animation]
Figure 11-47 shows the duration of each super reach animation, and Figure 11-48 shows one form of the relationship between the durations of each super reach animation.

As shown in Figure 11-47, the total duration of the low-base weak reach A sequence (the time from the start of the title display part to the end of the introduction part) is T1-1, the duration of the title display part is Tt1, of which the duration of the title start period is Tt1a, the duration of the title display period is Tt1b, and the duration of the title end period is Tt1c.

The total duration of the low-base weak reach B animation is T1-2. The duration of the title display part is Tt1, of which the duration of the title start period is Tt1a, the duration of the title display period is Tt1b, and the duration of the title end period is Tt1c.

Furthermore, while the overall duration of the low-base weak reach A and low-base weak reach B sequences differs, the duration of the title display segment, the duration of the title start period, the duration of the title display period, and the duration of the title end period are all the same.

As shown in Figure 11-47, the total duration of the low-base strong reach A animation is T2-1, the duration of the title display part is Tt2, of which the duration of the title start period is Tt2a, the duration of the title display period is Tt2b, and the duration of the title end period is Tt2c.

The total duration of the low-base strong reach B演出 (performance/animation) is T2-2. The duration of the title display part is Tt2, of which the duration of the title start period is Tt2a, the duration of the title display period is Tt2b, and the duration of the title end period is Tt2c.

The total duration of the low-base strong reach C演出 (performance/animation) is T2-3. The duration of the title display part is Tt2, of which the duration of the title start period is Tt2a, the duration of the title display period is Tt2b, and the duration of the title end period is Tt2c.

Furthermore, while the overall duration of the Low Base Strong Reach A, Low Base Strong Reach B, and Low Base Strong Reach C sequences differs, the duration of the title display segment, the duration of the title start period, the duration of the title display period, and the duration of the title end period are all the same.

The total duration of the low-base strongest reach animation is T3, the duration of the title display part is Tt3, of which the duration of the title start period is Tt3a, the duration of the title display period is Tt3b, and the duration of the title end period is Tt3c.

The total duration of the high-base reach sequences A through D is T4, the duration of the title display part is Tt4, the duration of the title start period is Tt4a, the duration of the title display period is Tt4b, and the duration of the title end period is Tt4c.

In this configuration, comparing the total performance time of the Super Reach演出 (Super Reach演出) during low base mode (normal state), as shown in Figure 11-48(A), the total performance time (T2-1, T2-2, T2-3) for Low Base Strong Reach A, Low Base Strong Reach B, and Low Base Strong Reach C, which have a higher probability of winning than Low Base Weak Reach A and Low Base Weak Reach B, is longer than the total performance time (T1-1, T1-2) for Low Base Weak Reach A and Low Base Weak Reach B. Similarly, the total performance time (T3) for Low Base Strongest Reach, which has a higher probability of winning than Low Base Strong Reach A, Low Base Strong Reach B, and Low Base Weak Reach C, is set longer than the total performance time (T2-1, T2-2, T2-3) for Low Base Strong Reach A, Low Base Strong Reach B, and Low Base Strong Reach C.

Furthermore, among the low-base weak reach A and low-base weak reach B sequences, the overall duration (T1-2) of the low-base weak reach B sequence, which has a higher expectation of developing into other super reach sequences than the low-base weak reach A sequence, is set to be longer than the overall duration (T1-1) of the low-base weak reach A sequence. Furthermore, among the low-base strong reach A, low-base strong reach B, and low-base strong reach C sequences, the overall sequence time (T2-3) for the low-base strong reach C sequence, which has a higher probability of winning than the low-base strong reach A sequence and low-base strong reach B sequence, is longer than the overall sequence time (T2-1, T2-2) for the low-base strong reach A sequence and low-base strong reach B sequence. Similarly, the overall sequence time (T2-2) for the low-base strong reach B sequence, which has a higher probability of winning than the low-base strong reach A sequence, is set to be longer than the overall sequence time (T2-1) for the low-base strong reach A sequence.

In this configuration, comparing the duration of the title start period, title display period, and title end period in the title display part, as shown in Figure 11-48(B), in all super reach sequences (low-base weak reach A and B sequences, low-base strong reach A to C sequences, low-base strongest reach sequence, and high-base reach A to D sequences), the duration of the title display period (Tt1b/Tt2b/Tt3b/Tt4b) is longer than the duration of the title start period (Tt1a/Tt2a/Tt3a/Tt4a) and the duration of the title end period (Tt1c/Tt2c/Tt3c/Tt4c). Furthermore, the duration of the title start period (Tt1a/Tt2a/Tt3a/Tt4a) is set to be longer than the duration of the title end period (Tt1c/Tt2c/Tt3c/Tt4c).

In this configuration, comparing the duration of the title display part in the super reach sequences, as shown in Figure 11-48(C), the duration of the title display part (Tt2) for the low-base strong reach A, low-base strong reach B, and low-base strong reach C sequences, which have a higher probability of winning than the low-base weak reach A and low-base weak reach B sequences, is longer than the duration of the title display part (Tt1) for the low-base weak reach A and low-base weak reach B sequences. Similarly, the duration of the title display part (Tt3) for the low-base strongest reach sequence, which has a higher probability of winning than the low-base strong reach A, low-base strong reach B, and low-base weak reach C sequences, is set to be longer than the duration of the title display part (Tt2) for the low-base strong reach A, low-base strong reach B, and low-base strong reach C sequences. Furthermore, the title display time (Tt4) for the high-base reach A-D sequences is set shorter than the title display time (Tt1, Tt2, Tt3) for the low-base weak reach A and B sequences, the low-base strong reach A-C sequences, and the low-base strongest reach sequence.

In this configuration, comparing the duration of the title start period and title display period in the low-base strongest reach animation and the high-base reach animations A-D, as shown in Figure 11-48(D), the duration of the title start period (Tt3a) in the low-base strongest reach animation is set longer than the duration of the title start period (Tt4a) in the high-base reach animations A-D. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-48(E), the duration of the title display period (Tt3b) in the low-base strongest reach animation is set longer than the duration of the title display period (Tt4b) in the high-base reach animations A-D.

In this form, when comparing the duration of the title start period in the Super Reach演出 (low base weak reach A and B performances, low base strong reach A to C performances, low base strongest reach performance) during the low base (normal state), as shown in Figure 11-48(F), the duration of the title start period (Tt2a) for the low base strong reach A performance, low base strong reach B performance, and low base strong reach C performance, which have a higher probability of winning than the low base weak reach A performance and low base weak reach B performance, is longer than the duration of the title start period (Tt1a) for the low base weak reach A performance and low base weak reach B performance. The duration of the title start period (Tt3a) for the low base strongest reach performance, which has a higher probability of winning than the low base strong reach A performance, low base strong reach B performance, and low base weak reach C performance, is set to be longer than the duration of the title start period (Tt2a) for the low base strong reach A performance, low base strong reach B performance, and low base strong reach C performance.

In this form, when comparing the duration of the title display period for the Super Reach演出 (low base weak reach A and B performances, low base strong reach A to C performances, and low base strongest reach performance) during the low base (normal state), as shown in Figure 11-48(G), the duration of the title display period (Tt2b) for the low base strong reach A performance, low base strong reach B performance, and low base strong reach C performance, which have a higher probability of winning than the low base weak reach A performance and low base weak reach B performance, is longer than the duration of the title display period (Tt1b) for the low base weak reach A performance and low base weak reach B performance. The duration of the title display period (Tt3b) for the low base strongest reach performance, which has a higher probability of winning than the low base strong reach A performance, low base strong reach B performance, and low base weak reach C performance, is set to be longer than the duration of the title display period (Tt2b) for the low base strong reach A performance, low base strong reach B performance, and low base strong reach C performance.

In this form, when comparing the duration of the title ending period in the Super Reach演出 (low base weak reach A and B performances, low base strong reach A to C performances, and low base strongest reach performance) during the low base (normal state), as shown in Figure 11-48(H), the duration of the title ending period (Tt2c) for the low base strong reach A performance, low base strong reach B performance, and low base strong reach C performance, which have a higher probability of winning than the low base weak reach A performance and low base weak reach B performance, is longer than the duration of the title ending period (Tt1c) for the low base weak reach A performance and low base weak reach B performance. The duration of the title ending period (Tt3c) for the low base strongest reach performance, which has a higher probability of winning than the low base strong reach A performance, low base strong reach B performance, and low base weak reach C performance, is set to be longer than the duration of the title ending period (Tt2c) for the low base strong reach A performance, low base strong reach B performance, and low base strong reach C performance.

In this form, when comparing the duration of the text display period in the title display part of the Super Reach演出 (low-base weak reach A and B performances, low-base strong reach A to C performances, low-base strongest reach performance) during low base (normal state), as shown in Figure 11-48(I), the low-base strong reach A performance has a higher probability of winning than the low-base weak reach A performance and the low-base weak reach B performance. The duration of the text display period (Tt2d) for the low-base strong reach B and low-base strong reach C animations is longer than the duration of the text display period (Tt1d) for the low-base weak reach A and low-base weak reach B animations. Furthermore, the duration of the text display period (Tt3d) for the low-base strongest reach animation, which has a higher probability of winning than the low-base strong reach A, low-base strong reach B, and low-base weak reach C animations, is set to be longer than the duration of the text display period (Tt2d) for the low-base strong reach A, low-base strong reach B, and low-base strong reach C animations.

In this configuration, comparing the duration of the title start period and the title display period in the Super Reach演出 (Super Reach演出) during the low base (normal state) (Low Base Weak Reach A and B, Low Base Strong Reach A to C, Low Base Strongest Reach), as shown in Figures 11-48(J) and (K), in all Super Reach演出 (Super Reach演出) during the low base (normal state), the duration of the title display period (Tt1b/Tt2b/Tt3b) is longer than the duration of the title start period (Tt1a/Tt2a/Tt3a), and the duration of the title start period (Tt1a/Tt2a/Tt3a) is longer than the duration of the title end period (Tt1c/Tt2c/Tt3c).

In this configuration, comparing the total duration of the super reach sequences during low base (normal state) (low base weak reach A and B sequences, low base strong reach A to C sequences, low base strongest reach sequence) and during high base (time-saving state A and probability-changing state) (high base reach A to D sequences), as shown in Figure 11-48(L), the total duration (T4) of the super reach sequences (high base reach A to D sequences) during high base (time-saving state A and probability-changing state) is set shorter than the total duration (T1-1, T1-2, T2-1, T2-3, T3) of the super reach sequences (low base weak reach A and B sequences, low base strong reach A to C sequences, low base strongest reach sequence) during low base (normal state).

[Regarding the title text for the Super Reach animation]
Figure 11-49 shows one form of the relationship between the title text and decorative symbols in the title display part of a super reach animation.

As shown in Figure 11-49(A), the title text for the low-base weak reach A演出 (performance/animation) is "Catch the Explosive Chu!", the title has 10 characters, the font size of the title text (standard size per character) is FJ, and the display area size where the title text is displayed (size of the area including all title text) is EJA.

The title text for the low-base weak reach B演出 (performance/effect) is "Electric Hockey Showdown," the title has 10 characters, the font size is FJ, and the display area size for the title text is EJB.

The title text for the low-base strong reach A演出 (performance/animation) is "Catch the Explosive Chu together!", the title has 13 characters, the font size is FK, and the display area size for the title is EKA.

The title text for the low-base strong reach B演出 (performance/effect) is "Gekishin Robo Battle" (Earthquake Robot Battle), the title has 7 characters, the font size is FK, and the display area size for the title text is EKB.

The title text for the low-base strong reach C演出 (performance/effect) is "Great Shock Robot Battle," the title has 8 characters, the font size is FK, and the display area size for the title text is EKC.

The title text for the lowest base strongest reach animation is "Catch the Explosive Chu with 6 People!", the title has 13 characters, the font size is FSK, and the display area size for the title text is ESK.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-49(A), the font size of the large decorative symbols before the Super Reach animation is KD, and the font size of the small decorative symbols after the Super Reach animation is KS.

In this configuration, comparing the font sizes of the title characters, as shown in Figure 11-49(B), the font size FK of the title characters for the low-base strong reach A, low-base strong reach B, and low-base strong reach C sequences, which have a higher probability of winning than the low-base weak reach A and low-base weak reach B sequences, is larger than the font size FJ of the title characters for the low-base weak reach A and low-base weak reach B sequences. Furthermore, the smallest character size among the characters that make up the title characters for the low-base strong reach A, low-base strong reach B, and low-base strong reach C sequences is larger than the largest character size among the characters that make up the title characters for the low-base weak reach A and low-base weak reach B sequences.

Furthermore, the font size FSK of the title text for the Low-Base Strongest Reach演出 (Low-Base Strongest Reach演出), which has a higher probability of winning than the Low-Base Strong Reach A, Low-Base Strong Reach B, and Low-Base Weak Reach C演出, is larger than the font size FK of the title text for the Low-Base Strong Reach A, Low-Base Strong Reach B, and Low-Base Strong Reach C演出. Moreover, the smallest character size among the characters that make up the title text of the Low-Base Strongest Reach演出 is larger than the largest character size among the characters that make up the title text of the Low-Base Strong Reach A, Low-Base Strong Reach B, and Low-Base Strong Reach C演出.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-49(B), the font sizes FJ for the title text of the low-base weak reach A and low-base weak reach B sequences, FK for the title text of the low-base strong reach A, low-base strong reach B, and low-base strong reach C sequences, and FSK for the title text of the low-base strongest reach sequence are all smaller than the font size KD of the decorative symbols (large) before the sequence develops into a super reach sequence, and larger than the font size KS of the decorative symbols (small) after the sequence develops into a super reach sequence. Furthermore, the largest font size in the title text of the Low Base Weak Reach A and Low Base Weak Reach B sequences, the largest font size in the title text of the Low Base Strong Reach A, Low Base Strong Reach B, and Low Base Strong Reach C sequences, and the largest font size in the title text of the Low Base Strongest Reach sequence are all smaller than the smallest font size that the decorative symbols (large) can take before developing into a Super Reach sequence. Conversely, the smallest font size in the title text of the Low Base Weak Reach A and Low Base Weak Reach B sequences, the smallest font size in the title text of the Low Base Strong Reach A, Low Base Strong Reach B, and Low Base Strong Reach C sequences, and the smallest font size in the title text of the Low Base Strongest Reach sequence are all larger than the largest font size that the decorative symbols (small) can take after developing into a Super Reach sequence.

In this configuration, comparing the display area sizes of the title characters, as shown in Figure 11-49(C), the display area sizes EKA, EKB, and EKC for the title characters of the Low-Base Strong Reach A, Low-Base Strong Reach B, and Low-Base Strong Reach C, which have a higher probability of winning than the Low-Base Weak Reach A and Low-Base Weak Reach B, are larger than the display area sizes EJA and EJB for the title characters of the Low-Base Weak Reach A and Low-Base Weak Reach B. Similarly, the display area size ESK for the title character of the Low-Base Strongest Reach, which has a higher probability of winning than the Low-Base Strong Reach A, Low-Base Strong Reach B, and Low-Base Weak Reach C, is larger than the display area sizes EKA, EKB, and EKC for the title characters of the Low-Base Strong Reach A, Low-Base Strong Reach B, and Low-Base Strong Reach C.

[Regarding the indication of expected value]
Figure 11-50 shows the execution status of the expectation level indication display in the title display part of the Super Reach演出 (Super Reach演出).

The expectation level indicator displayed in the title display section, as shown in Figure 11-50(A), consists of five star-shaped objects and the text "Expectation Level" displayed above the star-shaped objects to indicate that the star-shaped objects represent the expectation level. The expectation level is indicated by the number of star-shaped objects whose color has changed from black to gold.

When the CPU 120 for performance control displays an indication of the expected level, as shown in Figure 11-50(A), it first displays five star-shaped objects in black, and then displays the text "Expected Level" to indicate that these star-shaped objects represent the expected level. Afterward, it gradually changes the color of multiple star-shaped objects from black to gold, starting from the left. Furthermore, when changing a star-shaped object from black to gold, the CPU 120 highlights the corresponding star-shaped object before changing it back to its normal gold display.

In this process, as shown in Figure 11-50(B), the CPU 120 for performance control enlarges the star-shaped object whose color changes, and changes its color to white so that it shines from the center outwards. After the entire enlarged object has turned white until its outline disappears, the CPU displays the star-shaped object with the entire object or half of it turned gold. In particular, for the second and third star-shaped objects, the enlarged star-shaped object is enlarged to a size where a portion of it overlaps with the text "Expectation Level," which indicates that the star-shaped object represents the expectation level. Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control performs highlighting in a common manner whether the entire star-shaped object changes from black to gold, or whether only half of the star-shaped object changes to gold.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-50(A), when the CPU 120 for visual effects control changes multiple star-shaped objects to gold, it starts highlighting the next adjacent star-shaped object at the timing (t1) before the highlighting of the previously highlighted star-shaped object ends and it returns to its normal display. On the other hand, the CPU 120 for visual effects control does not start highlighting the second adjacent star-shaped object until the highlighting of the previously highlighted star-shaped object ends (t2), and only starts highlighting the second adjacent star-shaped object at the timing (t2) when the highlighting of the previously highlighted star-shaped object ends. In other words, the highlighting timing of two adjacent star-shaped objects overlaps, but three star-shaped objects are not highlighted simultaneously.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-50(A), the CPU 120 for performance control outputs an expectation level suggestion sound from speakers 8L and 8R at the timing when the highlighting of the star-shaped object begins. In addition, when multiple star-shaped objects are to change to gold, the output of the expectation level suggestion sound associated with the highlighting of the previously highlighted star-shaped object is terminated before the highlighting of the next star-shaped object begins, so that it does not overlap with the expectation level suggestion sound associated with the next star-shaped object.

[Regarding the choice of effects]
Figure 11-51 shows the execution status of the selection sequence. The selection sequence is a sequence that specifies which type of super reach sequence will be executed when the low-base strong reach sequences A to C or the low-base strongest reach sequence are executed directly from the normal reach sequence without going through the low-base weak reach sequence A or the low-base weak reach sequence B.

When a selected animation is to be executed, the CPU 120 for animation control executes a normal reach animation as shown in Figure 11-51(h1), and then, as shown in Figure 11-51(h2), displays a window within the display area of the image display device 5, displaying the title of the selected animation within that window. The title of the selected animation displays the message "Upgrade the reach!", indicating that the selected animation will be executed.

Next, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance displays, as shown in Figures 11-51 (h2) to (h8), the title image of the super reach performance, an operation prompt image consisting of a button image resembling the push button 31B and the operation prompt text "Press repeatedly!" to encourage continuous operation of the push button 31B, within the window. The title image of the super reach performance is the same as the content displayed during the title display period in the title display part of each super reach performance. In the title images of the low-base strong reach performances A to C and the low-base strongest reach performance, an expectation level indication is also displayed.

The CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation initially displays the title image of the low-base weak reach A presentation, which has a jackpot probability of 0 and the lowest probability of developing into other super reach presentations, as the title image for the super reach presentation displayed in the window. Each time the number of push button 31B operations corresponding to the displayed super reach presentation title image is detected, the CPU switches to the title image of the next super reach presentation until it corresponds to the type of variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command.

As shown in Figures 11-51 (h2) to (h8), the title images of the Super Reach sequences displayed within the window switch in the following order: first, the title image for Low Base Weak Reach A, which has the lowest probability of developing into other Super Reach sequences; second, the title image for Low Base Weak Reach B, which has a higher probability of developing into other Super Reach sequences than Low Base Weak Reach A; third, the title image for Low Base Strong Reach A, which has a higher probability of winning than Low Base Weak Reach A and B; fourth, the title image for Low Base Strong Reach B, which has a higher probability of winning than Low Base Strong Reach A; fifth, the title image for Low Base Strong Reach C, which has a higher probability of winning than Low Base Strong Reach C; and finally, the title image for Low Base Strongest Reach, which has a higher probability of winning than Low Base Strong Reach C.

Then, when the CPU 120 for performance control detects the number of times the push button 31B has been operated, corresponding to the number of times the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command corresponds to the title image of the displayed super reach performance, the operation prompt image disappears, and a confirmation image is displayed in the window, as shown in Figure 11-51 (h9), indicating that the super reach performance of the displayed title image will be executed. Afterward, the system transitions to the title display part of that super reach performance.

As shown in Figure 11-52, the number of times push button 3B is operated to switch from the title image of the low-base weak reach A performance to the title image of the low-base weak reach B performance is 3, the number of times push button 31B is operated to switch from the title image of the low-base weak reach B performance to the title image of the low-base strong reach A performance is 4, the number of times push button 31B is operated to switch from the title image of the low-base strong reach A performance to the title image of the low-base strong reach B performance is 8, and from the title image of the low-base strong reach B performance to the low-base strong The number of push button 31B operations required to switch to the title image of the Reach C演出 is 10. The number of push button 31B operations required to switch from the title image of the Low-Base Strong Reach C演出 to the title image of the Low-Base Strongest Reach演出 is 15. The higher the likelihood of development into other Super Reach演出 or the higher the probability of a big win in the switching title image, the more push button 31B operations are required to switch to the next title image, resulting in a greater number of push button 31B operations being needed.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-52, when a selection animation is executed, the low-base weak reach A and B animations will not be executed. Instead, a super reach animation with a jackpot expectation of at least low-base strong reach A animation will always be executed. The probability of executing low-base strong reach A animation is approximately 32.18%, low-base strong reach B animation is approximately 30.16%, low-base strong reach C animation is approximately 30.30%, and low-base strongest reach animation is approximately 7.36%.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance will display an expectation level indication in the title images of the low-base strong reach A-C performances and the low-base strongest reach performance, similar to the title display part. However, while the expectation level indication in the title display part displays five star-shaped objects in black and then gradually changes from black to gold on multiple star-shaped objects from left to right, the expectation level indication displayed in the selected performance will initially display a number of star-shaped objects in gold that indicate the expectation level of the corresponding super reach performance.

The minimum time required to switch from the title image of one Super Reach animation to the title image of the next Super Reach animation during the selection animation is the time required for one operation of push button 31B multiplied by the number of times corresponding to the title image of the Super Reach animation. Since one operation of push button 31B takes approximately 80 ms, switching from the title image of Low Base Weak Reach A animation to the title image of Low Base Weak Reach B animation requires three operations of push button 31B, and the minimum time required in this case is approximately 240 ms.

On the other hand, in the title display section's expectation indication display, the time it takes for the star-shaped object to change from black to highlighted and then to gold—that is, the time it takes for the indicated expectation level to change by one step—is approximately 300ms. This is longer than the minimum time required to switch from the title image of the low-base weak reach A performance to the title image of the low-base weak reach B performance. Therefore, the performance control CPU 120 can switch the title image of the low-base weak reach A performance to the title image of the low-base weak reach B performance in a shorter time than the time it takes for the indicated expectation level to change by one step in the title display section's expectation indication display during the selected performance.

[Regarding the effects that can be executed while the display is variable]
Figure 11-53 shows the effects that can be executed during variable display. The effects that can be executed during variable display include the explanatory text display effect, the title color change effect, and the operation prompt effects A to D, as shown in Figure 11-53.

The explanatory text display effect is an effect that can be performed during the prologue display period in the title display part of the low-base strong reach A to C effects. It displays an explanatory text that suggests a high probability of winning a jackpot.

The title color change effect is an effect that can be performed during the title display period of the low-base weak reach A and B effects. It changes the color of the title text from its initial white to red or gold.

Operation-prompting effect A is an effect that can be executed during a normal reach effect. It displays an operation-prompting image prompting the user to press the push button 31B, and indicates whether the effect will develop into a low-base weak reach effect A or B depending on the operation of the push button 31B. Furthermore, operation-prompting effect A may also be configured to develop into low-base strong reach effects A-C or low-base strongest reach effect, depending on the operation of the push button 31B.

Operation-Prompting Performance B is an effect that can be executed at the end of the introductory part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects. It displays a small or large operation-prompting image prompting the user to press the push button 31B, and indicates whether or not the game will develop into one of the low-base strong reach A to C effects based on the operation of the push button 31B. Furthermore, in configurations where the low-base weak reach A and B effects indicate a jackpot as the result of the effect, Operation-Prompting Performance B may also be configured to indicate whether or not a jackpot was achieved based on the operation of the push button 31B.

Operation-prompting effect C is an effect that can be executed in the middle of the introductory part of the low-base strong reach effects A-C and the strongest reach effect. It displays an operation-prompting image that encourages the user to press the push button 31B, and displays one of several types of cut-in images depending on the operation of the push button 31B.

Operation-Prompting Performance D is a performance that can be executed at the end of the introductory part of the low-base weak reach A and B performances. It displays an operation-prompting image (small) or operation-prompting image (large) to encourage the operation of push button 31B, and then notifies the performance result (whether it is a jackpot or not) based on the operation of push button 31B.

The CPU 120 for controlling the effects determines, during the variable display start setting process, whether or not to execute the explanatory text display effect, whether or not to execute the title color change effect and which color to change it to, whether or not to execute the operation prompt effect A, whether or not to display the operation prompt image (small) or operation prompt image (large) in operation prompt effect B, whether or not to execute the operation prompt effect C and whether or not to display the cut-in image (A) or cut-in image (B), and whether or not to display the operation prompt image (small) or operation prompt image (large) in operation prompt effect D.

As shown in Figure 11-54(A), in the pre-announcement effect determination process, when a variation pattern in which the low-base strong reach A to C effects are executed is identified, a decision is made as to whether or not to execute the explanatory text display effect. In this case, if a variation pattern resulting in a loss is identified, execution is decided 80% of the time, and execution is decided 20% of the time. Similarly, if a variation pattern resulting in a jackpot is identified, execution is decided 20% of the time, and execution is decided 80% of the time. Thus, when a variation pattern resulting in a jackpot is identified, execution of the explanatory text display effect is decided at a higher rate than when a variation pattern resulting in a loss is identified. Therefore, the execution of the explanatory text display effect during the prologue display period in the title display part of the low-base strong reach A to C effects suggests a high probability of a jackpot.

In this embodiment, the explanatory text display animation is executed during the prologue display period in the title display part. Regardless of whether the explanatory text display animation is executed in the title display part of the low-base strong reach A to C animations, the execution time of the low-base strong reach A to C animations and the execution time of the title display part remain unchanged. However, the system may also be configured such that the system includes a first variation pattern and a second variation pattern with a longer variation time than the first variation pattern as the variation patterns in which the low-base strong reach A to C animations are executed. In this configuration, the system does not execute the explanatory text display animation when the first variation pattern is specified, but rather it is determined whether or not the explanatory text display animation is executed based on whether or not the first variation pattern or the second variation pattern is specified. In this case, the first and second variation patterns are determined such that the probability of a big win is higher when the explanatory text display animation is executed compared to when it is not executed. This suggests that the execution of the explanatory text display animation in the title display part of the low-base strong reach A-C animations indicates a high probability of a big win.

As shown in Figure 11-54(B), in the pre-announcement effect determination process, when a variation pattern in which the low-base weak reach A or B effects are executed is identified, it is determined whether or not to execute the title color change effect, and if so, which color the title color change effect should be. In this case, if a variation pattern in which the effect result is a miss is identified, it is decided to not execute (white) in 80% of cases, to execute (red) in 20% of cases, and not to execute (gold). Furthermore, if a variation pattern that develops into the low-base strong reach A to C effects or the low-base strongest reach effect is identified, it is decided to not execute (white) in 20% of cases, to execute (red) in 75% of cases, and to execute (gold) in 5% of cases. Thus, when the variation patterns leading to the Low-Base Strong Reach A-C and Low-Base Strongest Reach are identified, the execution of the title color change effect is determined at a higher rate than when the variation patterns resulting in a miss are identified. Therefore, it is suggested that a change in the title color of the title text in the title display part of the Low-Base Strong Reach A and B effects indicates a high probability of development into the Low-Base Strong Reach A-C and Low-Base Strongest Reach effects. Furthermore, since execution (gold) is determined only when the variation patterns leading to the Low-Base Strong Reach A-C and Low-Base Strongest Reach effects are identified, a change in the title color of the title text in the title display part of the Low-Base Strong Reach A and B effects to gold confirms development into the Low-Base Strong Reach A-C and Low-Base Strongest Reach effects.

Furthermore, in configurations that include variation patterns where a jackpot occurs after the execution of low-base weak reach A and B effects without developing into other super reach effects, the execution of the title color change effect may be determined at a higher rate when a variation pattern resulting in a jackpot is identified than when a variation pattern resulting in a miss is identified. The title text color may change in the title display part of the low-base strong reach A and B effects to suggest a high probability of a jackpot. Alternatively, in such configurations, the execution (gold) may be determined only when a variation pattern resulting in a jackpot is identified, and the title text color may change to gold in the title display part of the low-base strong reach A and B effects to confirm a jackpot.

As shown in Figure 11-54(C), in the notification effect determination process, when a variation pattern that results in a loss from a normal reach effect, or a variation pattern that develops from a normal reach effect to a low-base weak reach A or B effect is identified, a decision is made on whether or not to execute the operation-promoting effect A. In this case, if a variation pattern that results in a loss is identified, execution is decided 50% of the time and execution is decided 50% of the time. Furthermore, if a variation pattern that develops to a low-base weak reach A or B effect is identified, execution is decided 100% of the time. Thus, since execution is always decided when a variation pattern that develops to a low-base weak reach A or B effect is identified, and execution may also be decided when a variation pattern that results in a loss is identified, the execution of operation-promoting effect A in a normal reach effect suggests the possibility of development to a low-base weak reach A or B effect.

As shown in Figure 11-54(D), in the notification effect determination process, when a variation pattern is identified in which the low-base weak reach A and B effects result in a miss, or when a variation pattern is identified in which the low-base weak reach A and B effects develop into low-base strong reach A to C effects or low-base strongest reach effects, it is determined whether to display a small or large operation prompt image. In this case, if a variation pattern resulting in a miss is identified, a small operation prompt image is determined 90% of the time, and a large operation prompt image is determined 10% of the time. Also, when a variation pattern developing into low-base strong reach A to C effects or low-base strongest reach effects is identified, a small operation prompt image is determined 10% of the time, and a large operation prompt image is determined 90% of the time. Thus, when a variation pattern leading to a low-base strong reach A-C or low-base strongest reach is identified, the operation prompt image (large) is determined at a higher rate than when a variation pattern resulting in a miss is identified. Therefore, it is suggested that when the operation prompt image (large) is displayed during operation prompt image B at the end of the introductory part of the low-base weak reach A and B, there is a higher probability of development into a low-base strong reach A-C or low-base strongest reach than when the operation prompt image (small) is displayed.

As shown in Figure 11-54(E), in the notification effect determination process, when a variation pattern in which the low-base strong reach A to C effects or the low-base strongest reach effect is executed is identified, it is determined whether or not to execute the operation promotion effect C, and if so, whether to display cut-in image (A) or cut-in image (B). In this case, if a variation pattern in which the effect result is a miss is identified, it is decided not to execute it 50% of the time, to execute it (cut-in image (A)) 30% of the time, and to execute it (cut-in image (B)) 20% of the time. Also, if a variation pattern in which the effect result is a jackpot is identified, it is decided not to execute it 5% of the time, to execute it (cut-in image (A)) 30% of the time, and to execute it (cut-in image (B)) 65% of the time. Thus, when a variation pattern resulting in a jackpot is identified, the execution of the operation-promoting animation C is decided at a higher rate than when a variation pattern resulting in a miss is identified. Therefore, the execution of operation-promoting animation C at the end of the introductory part of the low-base strong reach A-C animations suggests a high probability of a jackpot. Furthermore, when a variation pattern resulting in a jackpot is identified, cut-in image (B) is displayed at a higher rate than when a variation pattern resulting in a miss is identified. Therefore, when operation-promoting animation C is executed at the end of the introductory part of the low-base strong reach A-C animations and cut-in image (B) is displayed, it suggests a higher probability of a jackpot than when cut-in image (A) is displayed.

As shown in Figure 11-54(F), in the notification effect determination process, when a variation pattern is identified in which the low-base strong reach A to C effects or the low-base strongest reach effect is executed, it is determined whether to display a small or large operation prompt image. In this case, if a variation pattern in which the effect result is a miss is identified, a small operation prompt image is selected 90% of the time, and a large operation prompt image is selected 10% of the time. Also, if a variation pattern in which the effect result is a jackpot is identified, a small operation prompt image is selected 10% of the time, and a large operation prompt image is selected 90% of the time. Thus, when a variation pattern resulting in a jackpot is identified, the large operation prompt image is selected at a higher rate than when a variation pattern resulting in a miss is identified. Therefore, it is suggested that when the large operation prompt image is displayed during operation prompt image D at the end of the introductory part of the low-base strong reach A-C and low-base strongest reach sequences, the probability of a jackpot is higher than when the small operation prompt image is displayed.

[Regarding the display and presentation of explanatory text]
Figure 11-55 is a diagram showing the display status of the explanatory text displayed in the explanatory text display animation, and Figure 11-56 is a timing chart showing the display status of the explanatory text displayed in the explanatory text display animation.

The CPU 120 for controlling the performance, during the prologue display period of the title display part in the low-base strong reach A to C performances, displays the ally character "Yumeyume" as shown in Figures 11-55 (A) to (I), and then enlarges the ally character "Yumeyume" until it fills the entire display area. In addition, when an explanatory text display performance is performed during the prologue display period, the CPU 120 displays the explanatory text "Surprise!", "Peach Tree", and "Great Luck!" in order on a layer in front of the background where the ally character "Yumeyume" is enlarged. In this process, the CPU 120 for controlling the visual effects first displays the explanatory text "Surprise!" moving rapidly from the right side of the display area towards the center (Figure 11-56 (t1)), as shown in Figure 11-55(A). Then, as shown in Figure 11-55(B), when the text reaches near the center, it is displayed again, moving slowly to the left (Figure 11-56 (t2)). Finally, as shown in Figure 11-55(C), it is displayed again, moving rapidly to the left until it disappears from the display area (Figure 11-56 (t3)).

Next, the CPU 120 for controlling the visual effects displays the explanatory text "peach tree" by rapidly moving it from the right side of the display area towards the center (Figure 11-56 (t4)), as shown in Figure 11-55 (D). Then, as shown in Figure 11-55 (E), when it reaches near the center, it is displayed again by moving it slowly to the left (Figure 11-56 (t5)). After that, as shown in Figure 11-55 (F), it is displayed again by rapidly moving it to the left until it disappears from the display area (Figure 11-56 (t6)).

Next, the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation displays the explanatory text "Great Luck!" moving rapidly from the right side of the display area towards the center (Figure 11-56 (t7)), as shown in Figure 11-55(G). Then, as shown in Figure 11-55(H), when it reaches near the center, it displays again moving slowly to the left (Figure 11-56 (t8)). After that, as shown in Figure 11-55(I), it displays again moving rapidly to the left until it disappears from the display area (Figure 11-56 (t9)).

[Regarding the title color change effect]
Figure 11-57 shows the execution status of the title color change effect, and Figure 11-58 shows the timing of the title text color change during the title color change effect.

The CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation can execute a title color change effect in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B presentations, changing the white title text to red or gold.

The CPU 120 for performance control, in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B performances, causes a portion of the white title characters to appear from the left side of the display area during the title start period, move toward a fixed position, and then stop at that position. Afterward, the CPU 120 displays the white title characters in a stationary state at the fixed position during the title display period, as shown in Figure 11-57(A). Then, if the execution of the title color change performance has not been determined, after a time t1 has elapsed from the start of the title display period, the CPU 120 outputs a specific sound from speakers 8L and 8R, and maintains the state in which the white title characters are stationary at the fixed position, as shown in Figures 11-57(B) and (C). Afterward, during the title end period, the CPU 120 moves the white title characters displayed at the fixed position to the right side of the display area until all of the title characters disappear.

Meanwhile, the CPU 120 for performance control, when it has decided to execute the title color change effect, outputs a specific sound from speakers 8L and 8R after time t1 has elapsed from the start of the title display period, and changes the appearance of the title characters displayed in their fixed positions to appear as if they are glowing, as shown in Figure 11-57(D). After time t2 has elapsed, if a change to red has been decided, the title characters change to red, as shown in Figure 11-57(E). If a change to gold has been decided, the title characters change to gold, as shown in Figure 11-57(F). Then, during the title end period, while maintaining the changed color displayed in their fixed positions, the title characters are moved from their fixed positions to the right side of the display area until all of the title characters disappear. When the title characters change from an appearance of glowing to red or gold, the change occurs when the glow of the title characters dissipates.

As shown in Figures 11-58 (A) and (B), in the low-base weak reach A and B sequences, the sequence duration T1 for the title start period is set to 500 ms, the sequence duration T2 for the title display period is set to 2200 ms, and the sequence duration T3 for the title end period is set to 300 ms. Within the title display period, the time t1 from the start of the title display period until the title text appears to glow is set to 800 ms, the time t2 from the time the title text appears to glow until it changes to red or gold is set to 200 ms, and the time t3 from the time the title text changes to red or gold until the title display period ends is set to 1200 ms.

Therefore, as shown in Figure 11-58(C), when the title text changes color from white to red or gold, the time during the title display period when the title text is displayed in the red or gold form (t3) is longer than the time during the title display period when the title text is displayed in the white form (t1). Furthermore, the time during the title display part when the title text is displayed in the red or gold form (t3 + T3) is longer than the time during the title display part when the title text is displayed in the white form (T1 + t1).

[Regarding Operation-Enhancing Presentation A]
Figure 11-59 shows the execution status of the operation acceleration effect A.

The CPU 120 for controlling the performance can execute an action prompting performance A during a normal reach performance, which encourages the user to press the push button 31B.

When the execution of the action-prompting action A is determined, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance displays a small action-prompting image, as shown in Figures 11-59(A) and (B), during the execution of a normal reach action where the large decorative symbol is in a reach state. This image consists of a small button image resembling the push button 31B and small action-prompting text ("Press!") prompting the user to press the push button 31B.

The button image (small) has a remaining time meter indicating the remaining validity period for operating the push button 31B. The CPU 120 for performance control detects an operation of the push button 31B before the remaining time meter reaches zero, or when the remaining time meter reaches zero, if the variation pattern leads to the low-base weak reach A or B performance, it executes a whiteout effect, as shown in Figure 11-59(C), which displays the entire display area in white. Then, as shown in Figure 11-59(D), it executes the low-base weak reach A or B performance.

On the other hand, the CPU 120 for performance control, in the case of a losing variation pattern, erases the operation prompt image (small) and stops the decorative symbol (large) in a losing state, as shown in Figure 11-59(E).

[Regarding Operation-Enhancing Presentation B]
Figure 11-60 shows the execution status of the operation acceleration effect B.

The CPU 120 for controlling the performance can execute an action prompting performance B at the end of the introductory part of the low-base weak reach A and B performances, prompting the user to operate the push button 31B.

The CPU 120 for performance control, when it has been decided to execute the operation prompting performance B and to display the operation prompting image (small), displays the operation prompting image (small) at the end of the introductory part, as shown in Figure 11-60(A), consisting of a button image (small) resembling the push button 31B and operation prompting text (small) "Press!" to encourage operation of the push button 31B.

Furthermore, when the CPU 120 for performance control has decided to execute the operation prompting performance B and has decided to display the operation prompting image (large), as shown in Figures 11-60(B) and (C), it displays the operation prompting image (large) at the end of the introductory part. This image is a representation of the push button 31B, and consists of a button image (large) that is larger than the button image (small) and operation prompting text (large) "Press!" to encourage the operation of the push button 31B. In this case, as shown in Figure 11-60(B), unlike when displaying the operation prompting image (small), the CPU 120 for performance control displays multiple button images (large) with transparent backgrounds, and after performing an introductory performance in which these multiple button images (large) merge into a single button image (large), it displays the operation prompting image (large) consisting of the button image (large) and operation prompting text (large) "Press!" to encourage the operation of the push button 31B.

Both the small and large button images have a remaining time meter. The CPU 120 for performance control detects an operation of the push button 31B before the remaining time meter reaches zero, or when the remaining time meter reaches zero, if the variation pattern progresses to the low-base strong reach A-C or low-base strongest reach performance, it will erase the small or large operation prompt image and execute a drop performance to drop the movable body 32, as shown in Figure 11-60(D). Afterward, as shown in Figure 11-60(E), it will execute the low-base strong reach A-C or low-base strongest reach performance.

On the other hand, the CPU 120 for performance control, in the case of a losing variation pattern, executes a blackout effect, as shown in Figure 11-60(F), by erasing the small or large operation prompt image and darkening the entire display area. Then, as shown in Figure 11-60(G), it notifies the user that the performance result is a loss.

[Regarding Operation-Enhancing Presentation C]
Figure 11-61 shows the execution status of the operation acceleration effect C.

The CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation can execute an action prompting presentation C in the middle of the introductory part of the low-base strong reach presentations A to C and the low-base strongest reach presentation, prompting the player to operate the push button 31B.

When the execution of the action prompting effect C is determined, the CPU 120 for performance control displays a small action prompting image in the middle of the introductory part, as shown in Figures 11-61(A) and (B). The image consists of a small button image resembling the push button 31B and small action prompting text "Press!" prompting the user to press the push button 31B.

The CPU 120 for controlling the presentation is configured to display the cut-in image (A). If the push button 31B is pressed before the remaining time meter reaches zero, the CPU will clear the small operation prompt image (as shown in Figure 11-61(C)), display the cut-in image (A) showing the ally character "Nana," and then continue executing the introductory part as shown in Figure 11-61(F).

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation is configured to display the cut-in image (B). If the push button 31B is detected to be pressed before the remaining time meter reaches zero, the small operation prompt image is cleared, as shown in Figure 11-61(D). The cut-in image (B) displaying the ally character "Jam" is then displayed, and the continuation of the introductory part is executed, as shown in Figure 11-61(F).

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control, whether it has decided to display cut-in image (A) or cut-in image (B), will, if no operation of the push button 31B is detected before the remaining time meter reaches zero, delete the small operation prompt image while continuing the performance in the middle of the introductory part, as shown in Figure 11-61(E), and then execute the continuation of the introductory part, as shown in Figure 11-61(F).

[Regarding Operation-Enhancing Presentation D]
Figure 11-62 shows the execution status of the operation acceleration effect D.

The CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation can execute an action prompting presentation D at the end of the introductory part of the low-base strong reach presentations A to C and the low-base strongest reach presentation, prompting the player to press the push button 31B.

When it is determined that a small prompt image should be displayed, the CPU 120 for performance control displays a small prompt image at the end of the introductory part, as shown in Figures 11-62(A) and (B). This image consists of a small button image resembling the push button 31B and small prompt text "Press!" encouraging the operation of the push button 31B.

Furthermore, when the CPU 120 for performance control has decided to display a large prompt image, as shown in Figures 11-62(A) and (G), it displays a large prompt image at the end of the introductory part. This large prompt image consists of an image resembling a push button 31B, larger than the small button image, and large prompt text "Press!" to encourage operation of the push button 31B. In this case, unlike when displaying a small prompt image, the CPU 120 displays multiple large button images with transparent backgrounds and then performs a prompt introduction animation (see Figure 11-60(B)) in which these multiple large button images merge into a single large button image. Finally, it displays the large prompt image consisting of the large button image and large prompt text "Press!" to encourage operation of the push button 31B.

The CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation detects an operation of the push button 31B before the remaining time meter reaches zero, or when the remaining time meter reaches zero, if the variation pattern results in a jackpot, it executes a rainbow effect as shown in Figures 11-62(C) and (H), where a small or large operation prompt image gradually disappears while a rainbow-colored pattern swirls across the entire display area. Afterward, as shown in Figures 11-62(D) and (I), it announces a jackpot as the result of the effect.

On the other hand, the CPU 120 for performance control, in the case of a losing variation pattern, executes a blackout effect by erasing the small or large operation prompt image and darkening the entire display area, as shown in Figures 11-62(E) and (J). Afterward, it notifies the user that the performance result is a loss, as shown in Figures 11-62(F) and (K).

[Regarding the images used to assist in operation]
Figure 11-63 shows the display modes of the operation prompt images. The CPU 120 for performance control displays the button images that make up the operation prompt image (small) and operation prompt image (large) by moving them alternately and continuously in the left-right direction, as shown in Figure 11-63(A), and also displays them while continuously changing between a state where the button is not pressed and a state where the button is pressed. In this case, as shown in Figure 11-63(B), the interval between the movement of the button image in the left-right direction and the interval between the change between the state where the button is not pressed and the state where the button is pressed are different, so the movement of the button image in the left-right direction and the movement of the change between the state where the button is not pressed and the state where the button is pressed are not synchronized, resulting in complex movement.

[Regarding the jackpot start animation]
Figure 11-64 shows the execution status of the jackpot start animation.

As shown in Figure 11-64(A), the CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation executes the jackpot start animation when it receives a jackpot start command that specifies the display of an animation image indicating the start of a jackpot game state, after stopping the large decorative symbol in the jackpot configuration.

As shown in Figures 11-64(B) to (G), the CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation displays an image on the image display device 5 that simulates flickering flames as the background during the jackpot start animation. As shown in Figure 11-64(B), it first displays the first part of the jackpot title "BIG BONUS (REG BONUS)," "BIG (REG)," in an enlarged size. Then, as shown in Figure 11-64(C), it gradually reduces the size of the first part of the title "BIG (REG)" until it is fully visible within the display area, displaying it at a fixed position near the center of the display area.

Next, as shown in Figure 11-64(D), the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation displays the latter half of the title text "BIG BONUS (REG BONUS)" in the jackpot title, "BONUS," in an enlarged size. Then, as shown in Figure 11-64(E), it gradually reduces the size of the latter half of the title text "BONUS" until it is fully visible within the display area, displaying it at a fixed position near the center of the display area (below the first half of the title text, "BIG").

In this embodiment, when a 6-round jackpot game state is initiated, "REG BONUS" is displayed as the title text. When a 10-round jackpot game state is initiated, "BIG BONUS" is displayed as the title text.

Next, as shown in Figures 11-64(E) to (G), the CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation displays the entire title "BIG BONUS" in a fixed position, then gradually enlarges the title "BIG BONUS," and then, as shown in Figure 11-64(H), starts the bonus game presentation and switches the display on the image display device 5 to the background of the bonus game state.

When the performance control CPU 120 starts a performance during a jackpot, it first displays a large right-hand shooting prompt image and a small right-hand shooting prompt image, as shown in Figure 11-64(H), to encourage the player to shoot the game ball towards the right game area 2R.

The right-hand shooting promotion image (small) consists of a message "Right-hand shooting" (small) prompting the player to shoot the game ball towards the right-hand game area 2R, and a right-hand arrow image (small). As shown in Figure 11-64(H)(I), the CPU 120 for performance control displays the right-hand shooting promotion image (small) in the upper right position of the display area from the start of the jackpot performance until the jackpot game state ends.

The Right-Handed Shot Promotion Image (Large) is a message prompting the player to shoot the game ball towards the right game area 2R. It consists of a larger message "Right-Handed Shot" (Large) and an arrow indicating the right direction, which is larger than the arrow image (Small). As shown in Figure 11-64(H)(I), the CPU 120 for performance control repeatedly displays the Right-Handed Shot Promotion Image (Large) in a manner that moves from the left to the right of the display area, only for a certain period of time during the period from the start of the jackpot performance until the end of the jackpot game state.

Furthermore, when the game is controlled to enter a jackpot state, after the title text is displayed in the jackpot start animation, the system switches to the jackpot animation and displays a small right-shooting promotion image and a large right-shooting promotion image that suggest the operation method for the jackpot state (the operation method of shooting the game ball toward the right game area 2R). At this time, the animation control CPU 120 switches to the jackpot animation and displays the small right-shooting promotion image and the large right-shooting promotion image at a predetermined time before the timing at which the main board 11 performs control that is advantageous when the game ball is shot toward the right game area 2R. Therefore, the control that is advantageous when the game ball is shot toward the right game area 2R occurs after a predetermined period has elapsed since the small right-shooting promotion image and the large right-shooting promotion image were displayed.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation, after displaying the title text during the jackpot start presentation, will erase the title text and switch to the next presentation in a shorter time than when erasing the title text during the title display period of the super reach presentation, before switching to the next presentation.

In particular, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance switches to the in-game performance after the title text is displayed in the jackpot start performance, in one frame (the smallest unit of image update), and displays the right-hand shooting promotion image (small) and the right-hand shooting promotion image (large). In the title display part of the super reach performance, instead of one frame, a title termination period is set, and the title text is erased over a certain period of time. However, if the same configuration is used when switching to the in-game performance after the title text is displayed in the jackpot start performance, and the right-hand shooting promotion image (small) and the right-hand shooting promotion image (large) are displayed, there is a risk that the player may operate the game by shooting the game ball towards the right game area 2R during the period when the title text is being erased. However, if the game ball is shot towards the right game area 2R at this timing, the control that is advantageous by operating the game ball towards the right game area 2R has not yet started, so the game ball will be wasted. In contrast, the CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation switches to the in-game presentation within one frame (the smallest unit of image update) after displaying the title text during the jackpot start presentation, and displays the small and large right-hand play promotion images, thereby suppressing the generation of wasted game balls.

[Regarding the display of remaining spins until the bonus time]
The game control microcomputer 100 controls the game to a shortened time state B (in this embodiment, a playtime with 1100 shortened time rounds) in which (1) shortened time control is performed 1100 times and (2) low probability control is performed 1100 times, if the variable display is performed 900 times in a low probability state without being controlled to a jackpot.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation can display the remaining variable number of display counts until the game enters the reduced-time state B (playtime) on the image display device 5, which is the remaining number of counts until the game reaches the reduced-time state (hereinafter referred to as the remaining counts until playtime) 131SG005Z (see Figure 11-1).

As shown in Figure 11-65(A), the CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation displays the remaining number of spins until the playtime bonus in the upper left corner of the display area when the normal reach presentation, low-base weak reach presentations A and B, low-base strong reach presentations A through C, and low-base strongest reach presentations are not being executed in the normal state. The remaining number of spins until playtime bonus 131SG005Z is displayed as "XXX spins remaining" (XXX being a number from 0 to 900 depending on the remaining spins). In this case, regardless of whether the remaining number of spins until playtime bonus is 0 to 900, the remaining number of spins until playtime bonus 131SG005Z is displayed using the same font size.

As shown in Figure 11-65(B), the CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation continues to display the remaining number of spins until the bonus time (131SG005Z) even during the execution of a normal reach animation where the large decorative symbol appears in a reach state.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-65(C), the CPU 120 for performance control continues to display the remaining number of spins until the playtime bonus (131SG005Z) even while the low-base weak reach A or B performance is running, when the normal reach performance progresses to the low-base weak reach A or B performance. In this case, as shown in Figures 11-65(D) and (E), if the performance control CPU 120 reports a miss as the result of the low-base weak reach A or B performance, it continues to display the remaining number of spins until the playtime bonus (131SG005Z) even after the low-base weak reach A or B performance has ended.

Furthermore, the system is configured so that a jackpot can be announced as a result of the low-base weak reach A and B sequences. If a jackpot is announced as a result of the low-base weak reach A and B sequences, the remaining spins until the playtime bonus (131SG005Z) will be continuously displayed until the low-base weak reach A and B sequences end, at which point the remaining spins until the playtime bonus (131SG005Z) will be cleared. Alternatively, the remaining spins until the playtime bonus (131SG005Z) may be cleared when the content confirming a jackpot is displayed as a result of the low-base weak reach A and B sequences.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-65(F), the CPU 120 for performance control, when progressing from a normal reach performance, low-base weak reach A or B performance to a low-base strong reach A to C performance or a low-base strongest reach performance, erases the remaining number of spins until playtime 131SG005Z at the start of the low-base strong reach A to C performance or the low-base strongest reach performance. In this case, if the performance control CPU 120 progresses from a normal reach performance, it erases the remaining number of spins until playtime 131SG005Z at the start of the selected performance. If the performance progresses from a low-base weak reach A or B performance, and it is a low-base strong reach A to C performance, it erases the remaining number of spins until playtime 131SG005Z during the prologue display period of the title display part, along with the hold display and active display. If it is a low-base strongest reach performance, it erases the remaining number of spins until playtime 131SG005Z at the start of the title display part.

Furthermore, when developing from the low-base weak reach A and B sequences, the timing at which the drop sequence begins following the execution of the operation-prompting sequence B (the timing shown in Figure 11-60 (D)) may be configured to erase the remaining spins until playtime (131SG005Z) along with the hold display and active display. This allows the timing of erasing the hold display, active display, and remaining spins until playtime (131SG005Z) to be consistent regardless of whether the sequence develops into the low-base strong reach A-C sequences or the low-base strongest reach sequence.

Subsequently, if the performance control CPU 120 reports a miss as the result of the low-base strong reach A-C performance or the low-base strongest reach performance, it displays the remaining number of spins until playtime 131SG005Z again after the low-base strong reach A-C performance or the low-base strongest reach performance ends, as shown in Figures 11-65(G) and (H). On the other hand, if the performance control CPU 120 reports a jackpot as the result of the low-base strong reach A-C performance or the low-base strongest reach performance, it keeps the remaining number of spins until playtime 131SG005Z erased until the next normal state is reached, as shown in Figures 11-65(I) and (J).

Furthermore, if the operation prompting sequence A is configured to progress to low-base strong reach sequences A-C and low-base strongest reach sequences depending on the operation of the push button 31B, then the remaining number of spins until playtime 131SG005Z should be continuously displayed during the execution of operation prompting sequence A, and then the remaining number of spins until playtime 131SG005Z should be cleared when the low-base strong reach sequences A-C and low-base strongest reach sequences begin. In this configuration, the remaining number of spins until playtime 131SG005Z will be displayed during operation prompting sequence A, but will not be displayed during operation prompting sequences C and D in the subsequent low-base strong reach sequences A-C and low-base strongest reach sequences.

[Regarding the start animation of the bonus time]
The game control microcomputer 100 controls the game to time-saving state B (playtime) when it has performed 900 variable displays in a low probability state without being controlled to a jackpot. At this time, as shown in Figure 11-66(C), the game control microcomputer 100 lights up the right-hand shooting lamp 131SG132 and sends a right-hand shooting LED lighting notification command. Subsequently, as shown in Figures 11-66(A) and (B), when the variable display stops with 0 remaining spins until playtime and the right-hand shooting LED lighting notification command is received, the performance control CPU 120 displays a right-hand shooting promotion image (small) as shown in Figure 11-66(C), prompting the player to shoot the game ball towards the right game area 2R. The timing of lighting the right-hand shooting lamp 131SG132 and the timing of displaying the right-hand shooting promotion image (small) are almost simultaneous. However, the game control microcomputer 100 lights up the right-hand shooting lamp 131SG132 first, then sends a right-hand shooting LED lighting notification command. Consequently, the performance control CPU 120 displays the right-hand shooting promotion image (small), so the right-hand shooting lamp 131SG132 lights up before the right-hand shooting promotion image (small) is displayed.

The game control microcomputer 100 keeps the right-hand shooting lamp 131SG132 lit when the shortened time state B (playtime) is started, until the shortened time state B (playtime) ends. The right-hand shooting promotion image (small) consists of a message "Right-hand shooting" (small) prompting the player to shoot the game ball towards the right game area 2R, and an arrow image (small) indicating the right direction. As shown in Figures 11-66(C) to (H), the performance control CPU 120 displays the right-hand shooting promotion image (small) in the upper right position of the display area when the shortened time state B (playtime) is started, until the shortened time state B (playtime) ends.

When the CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation stops displaying zero remaining spins until the playtime bonus, and receives a game state specification command specifying the shortened time state B (playtime bonus), it executes the playtime bonus start animation as shown in Figures 11-66 (D) to (G).

The playtime start animation includes a title start period from when a portion of the playtime title text "Playtime Start" is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 until it is displayed in its designated position; a title display period when the title text "Playtime Start" is displayed in its designated position; and a title end period from when the displayed title text "Playtime Start" disappears and the animation switches to the playtime animation.

The CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation displays the title "Entering Playtime" during the title start period, title display period, and title end period of the playtime start presentation, in the same manner as when displaying the title text "Catch the Explosive Chu with 6 People!" during the title display period, title display period, and title end period of the low-base strongest reach presentation.

In detail, during the title start period, the CPU 120 for performance control displays the title text "Playtime Activated" at an enlarged size, as shown in Figure 11-66(D), where only a portion of the text is visible within the display area. At this time, the CPU 120 displays the title text "Playtime Activated" in a manner where a portion of it completely fills the display area. Subsequently, as shown in Figures 11-66(D)(E), the CPU 120 gradually shrinks the title text "Playtime Activated" until all the characters are visible within the display area, and then stops the title text "Playtime Activated" at a fixed position.

The CPU 120 for controlling the presentation displays the title text "Entering Playtime" in a reduced size at a fixed position during the title start period, and then transitions to displaying the title during the title display period. During the title display period, the CPU 120 keeps the title text "Entering Playtime" fixed at its position and displays it still, as shown in Figures 11-66(E) and (F).

The CPU 120 for controlling the presentation transitions to displaying the title end period after the title display period has ended. During the title end period, the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation enlarges the title text "Entering Playtime," which is displayed in a reduced size and fixed position, as shown in Figures 11-66(F) and (G), until a portion of the title text "Entering Playtime" completely fills the display area. At this time, the enlargement is not in the reverse manner to when the title text "Entering Playtime" is displayed in a reduced size during the title start period, but rather in a manner different from when the title text "Entering Playtime" is displayed in a reduced size during the title start period, until a portion of the title text "Entering Playtime" completely fills the display area. In other words, the trajectory that each part of the title text takes during the process of shrinking the title text "Entering Playtime" during the title start period is different from the trajectory that each part of the title text takes during the process of enlarging the title text "Entering Playtime" during the title end period. Therefore, at the start of the title period, the display area is filled with a portion of the title text "Entering Playtime," in a manner different from when the entire display area is filled. Subsequently, as shown in Figure 11-66(H), the background switches to the playtime animation, and the playtime animation begins.

The CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation displays, during the start of the playtime bonus, a large image encouraging players to shoot the game balls towards the right-hand game area 2R, in addition to the small image encouraging right-hand shooting. It also displays a warning image about excessive gambling (message "Beware of excessive gambling!") at the bottom of the display area.

The large right-hand shooting prompt image is a message encouraging the player to shoot the game ball towards the right-hand game area 2R. It consists of a larger message "Right-Hand Shooting" (large) and an arrow indicating the right direction, which is larger than the small arrow image. The CPU 120 for performance control repeatedly displays the large right-hand shooting prompt image in a manner that moves from the left to the right of the display area, as shown in Figures 11-66(D) to (G), during the period in which the playtime start animation is executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to time-saving state B, and if the variable display result is a miss, it selects variation pattern PA1-4 with a special symbol variation time of 500ms and performs variable display, and is controlled to time-saving state B, and if the variable display result is a jackpot, it selects variation pattern PB1-18 with a special symbol variation time of 500ms + 15000ms and performs variable display, and the performance control CPU 120 is configured to execute the playtime start performance during the period in which these variation patterns are being displayed when control of time-saving state B begins, but the game control microphone The microcomputer 100, in the first variable display controlled to time-saving state B, that is, in the variable display based on the first entry of a game ball into the first and second entry points after being controlled to time-saving state B, if the variable display result is a miss, it selects a time-saving B start variation pattern that has a longer variation time than variation pattern PA1-4 and defines a variation time corresponding to the playtime start effect, and performs the variable display. The performance control CPU 120 may also be configured to execute the playtime start effect during the period in which the variable display using the time-saving B start variation pattern is performed in the first variable display controlled to time-saving state B. In such a configuration, if the variable display result in the first variable display controlled to time-saving state B is a jackpot, the game control microcomputer 100 performs the variable display using variation pattern PB1-18 with a special symbol variation time of 500ms + 15000ms, and the performance control CPU 120 does not execute the playtime start effect, but simply stops the decorative symbol (large) in the jackpot configuration.

[Regarding title text, etc. 1]
Figure 11-67 shows one form of the relationship between the title text in the title display part of the super reach performance, the explanatory text in the explanatory text display performance, the title text in the jackpot start performance, the small operation prompt text in the small operation prompt performance, and the large operation prompt text in the large operation prompt performance.

As shown in Figure 11-67(A), the title text of the Super Reach演出 (Super Reach演出) is displayed statically during the title display period. The background image at this time is either a static image (Low Base Strong Reach B, C演出, Low Base Strongest Reach演出, High Base Reach A-D演出) or a moving image (Low Base Weak Reach A, B演出, Low Base Strong Reach A演出). The number of characters in the Super Reach演出 title text ranges from 7 to 13. The display time of the Super Reach演出 title text (the time from when all the characters constituting the title text are displayed until at least a portion of the characters disappear) is LR, the font size of the Super Reach演出 title text is FR, and the display area size where the Super Reach演出 title text is displayed is ER.

As shown in Figure 11-67(A), the explanatory text is displayed in the operational state, and the background image at that time is the operational image. The number of characters in the explanatory text is 3 to 6, and the display time of the explanatory text (one of three explanatory texts) (the time from when all the characters constituting the explanatory text are displayed until at least part of the string disappears) is LS, the font size of the explanatory text is FS, and the display area size where the explanatory text (one of three explanatory texts) is displayed is ES.

As shown in Figure 11-67(A), the title text for the jackpot start animation is displayed in an animated state, and the background image at that time is the animation image. The title text for the jackpot start animation consists of 8 characters, the display time for the title text (the time from when all the characters constituting the title text are displayed until at least part of the characters disappear) is LB, the font size for the title text is FB, and the display area size for the title text is EB.

As shown in Figure 11-67(A), the small prompt text is displayed when the operation is in progress, and the background image at that time is the operation image. The small prompt text consists of three characters, the display time of the small prompt text (the period during which the push button 31B is operational and the small prompt text is displayed) is L1P, the font size of the small prompt text is F1P, and the display area size for the small prompt text is E1P.

As shown in Figure 11-67(A), the large prompt text is displayed when the operation is in progress, and the background image at that time is the operation image. The large prompt text consists of three characters, the display time of the large prompt text (the period during which the push button 31B is displayed without being operated) is L2P, the font size of the large prompt text is F2P, and the display area size where the large prompt text is displayed is E2P.

In this configuration, when comparing the display times of the title text and explanatory text for the super reach animation, the title text, small operation prompt text, and large operation prompt text for the jackpot start animation, as shown in Figure 11-67(B), the display time LB for the title text of the jackpot start animation is longer than the display times LR, LS, L1P, and L2P for the title text, explanatory text, small operation prompt text, and large operation prompt text of the super reach animation. The display time LR for the title text of the super reach animation is longer than the display times LS, L1P, and L2P for the explanatory text, small operation prompt text, and large operation prompt text. The display times LS and L1P for the small operation prompt text and large operation prompt text are set to be longer than the display time LS for the explanatory text. Furthermore, the display times L, LB, L1P, and L2P for the title text of the Super Reach演出 (Super Reach演出), the title text of the Jackpot Start演出 (Big Win Start演出), the small operation prompt text, and the large operation prompt text are all set to be longer than the display time required for all three explanatory characters that make up the explanatory text display to be displayed. This relationship of display times holds true regardless of the type of Super Reach演出.

In this configuration, when comparing the font sizes of the title text and explanatory text for the Super Reach演出 (Super Reach演出), the title text and small operation prompt text for the Jackpot Start演出 (Jackpot Start演出), and the large operation prompt text, as shown in Figure 11-67(C), the font size F2P of the large operation prompt text is larger than the font sizes FR, FS, FB, and F1P of the title text and explanatory text for the Super Reach演出, the title text for the Jackpot Start演出, and the small operation prompt text. Furthermore, the smallest character size among the characters that make up the large operation prompt text is larger than the largest character size among the characters that make up the title text and explanatory text for the Super Reach演出, the title text for the Jackpot Start演出, the small operation prompt text, and the large operation prompt text.

Furthermore, the font size FB of the title text for the jackpot start animation is larger than the font sizes FR and F1P of the title text, explanatory text, and small operation prompt text for the super reach animation. Also, the title text "BIG BONUS" for the jackpot start animation is displayed with the first half "BIG" at the top of the screen, then the second half "BONUS" at the bottom of the screen, and then the title text "BIG BONUS" is gradually enlarged. The size of the characters that make up the title text "BIG BONUS" is smallest when the first half "BIG" is displayed at the top of the screen and the second half "BONUS" is displayed at the bottom of the screen. In this configuration, the size of the title text for the jackpot start animation when the first half "BIG" is displayed at the top of the screen and the second half "BONUS" is displayed at the bottom of the screen is larger than the size of the title text, explanatory text, and small operation prompt text for the super reach animation. Furthermore, when "BIG" is displayed at the top of the screen in the first half and "BONUS" is displayed at the bottom of the screen in the second half, the smallest font size of the characters that make up the title text of the jackpot start animation is larger than the largest font size of the characters that make up the title text, explanatory text, small operation prompt text, and large operation prompt text of the super reach animation.

Furthermore, the font size FR of the title text for the Super Reach演出 (Super Reach演出) is larger than the font sizes FS and F1P of the explanatory text and the small operation prompt text. Additionally, the smallest character size among the characters that make up the title text for the Super Reach演出 is larger than the largest character size among the characters that make up the explanatory text and the small operation prompt text.

Furthermore, the font size FS of the explanatory text is larger than the font size F1P of the small operation prompt text. Additionally, the smallest character size among those that make up the explanatory text is larger than the largest character size among those that make up the small operation prompt text.

Furthermore, these relationships between font sizes and character sizes hold true regardless of the type of Super Reach animation.

In this configuration, when comparing the display area sizes of the title text and explanatory text for the Super Reach演出 (Super Reach演出), the title text and small operation prompt text for the Jackpot Start演出 (Jackpot Start演出), and the large operation prompt text, as shown in Figure 11-67(D), the display area size E2P of the large operation prompt text is larger than the display area sizes ER, ES, EB, and E1P of the title text and explanatory text for the Super Reach演出, the title text for the Jackpot Start演出, and the small operation prompt text. Furthermore, the display area size EB of the title text for the Jackpot Start演出 is larger than the display area sizes ER, ES, and E1P of the title text, explanatory text, and small operation prompt text for the Super Reach演出. Also, the display area size ES of the explanatory text is larger than the display area size E1P of the small operation prompt text. These relationships regarding display area sizes hold true regardless of the type of Super Reach演出.

[Regarding title text, etc. 2]
Figure 11-68 shows one aspect of the relationship between the title text in the title display part of the super reach animation, the title text in the big win start animation, the small operation prompt text in the small operation prompt animation, the large operation prompt text in the large operation prompt animation, the title text in the playtime start animation, and the remaining number text that constitutes the remaining number of plays until playtime.

As shown in Figure 11-68(A), the display time of the title text for the Super Reach演出 (the time from when all the characters constituting the title text are displayed until at least a portion of those characters disappears) is LR, the font size of the title text for the Super Reach演出 is FR, and the display area size for which the title text is displayed is ER.

As shown in Figure 11-68(A), the display time of the title text for the jackpot start animation (the time from when all the characters constituting the title text are displayed until at least a portion of those characters disappears) is LB, the font size of the title text for the jackpot start animation is FB, and the display area size for the title text is EB.

As shown in Figure 11-68(A), the display time of the small prompt character (the period during which the push button 31B is displayed without being operated) is L1P, the font size of the small prompt character is F1P, and the display area size for the small prompt character is E1P.

As shown in Figure 11-68(A), the display time of the large prompt character (the period during which the push button 31B is displayed without being operated) is L2P, the font size of the large prompt character is F2P, and the display area size for the large prompt character is E2P.

As shown in Figure 11-68(A), the display time of the title text for the playtime start animation (the time from when all the characters constituting the title text are displayed until at least a portion of those characters disappears) is LY, the font size of the title text for the playtime start animation is FY, and the display area size for the title text is EY.

As shown in Figure 11-68(A), the font size of the remaining number of spins until the bonus time is FZ, and the display area size where the remaining spins until the bonus time are displayed is EZ.

In this configuration, when comparing the font sizes of the title text for the super reach animation, the title text for the jackpot start animation, the small operation prompt text, the large operation prompt text, the title text for the playtime start animation, and the remaining number of spins until playtime, as shown in Figure 11-68(B), the font size F2P for the large operation prompt text is larger than the font sizes FR, FB, F1P, FY, and FZ for the title text for the super reach animation, the title text for the jackpot start animation, the small operation prompt text, the title text for the playtime start animation, and the remaining number of spins until playtime. Furthermore, the smallest character size among the characters that make up the large operation prompt text is larger than the largest character size among the characters that make up the title text for the super reach animation, the title text for the jackpot start animation, the small operation prompt text, the title text for the playtime start animation, and the remaining number of spins until playtime (remaining XXX (where X is a number from 0 to 900) spins). Furthermore, the smallest character size among the characters that make up the large prompt text is larger than the largest character size among the characters that make up the remaining number of plays until playtime, regardless of whether the remaining plays until playtime is 0 to 900.

Furthermore, the font size FB of the title text for the jackpot start animation is larger than the font sizes FR, F1P, FY, and FZ of the title text for the super reach animation, the small operation prompt text, the title text for the playtime start animation, and the text indicating the remaining number of spins until playtime. Moreover, the smallest character size among the characters that make up the title text for the jackpot start animation is larger than the largest character size among the characters that make up the title text for the super reach animation, the small operation prompt text, the title text for the playtime start animation, and the text indicating the remaining number of spins until playtime. Additionally, the smallest character size among the characters that make up the title text for the jackpot start animation is larger than the largest character size among the characters that make up the text indicating the remaining number of spins until playtime, regardless of whether the remaining spins until playtime are 0 to 900.

Furthermore, the font size FY of the title text for the playtime start animation is larger than the font sizes FR, F1P, and FZ of the title text, operation prompt text (small), and remaining spins until playtime text for the super reach animation. Additionally, the smallest character size among the characters that make up the title text for the playtime start animation is larger than the largest character size among the characters that make up the title text, operation prompt text (small), and remaining spins until playtime text for the super reach animation. Moreover, the smallest character size among the characters that make up the title text for the playtime start animation is larger than the largest character size among the characters that make up the remaining spins until playtime text, regardless of whether the remaining spins until playtime are 0 to 900.

Furthermore, the font size FR of the title text for the Super Reach演出 (Super Reach) sequence is larger than the font sizes F1P and FZ of the operation prompt text (small) and the remaining number of spins until playtime. Additionally, the smallest character size among those constituting the title text for the Super Reach sequence is larger than the largest character size among those constituting the operation prompt text (small) and the remaining number of spins until playtime. Moreover, the smallest character size among those constituting the title text for the Super Reach sequence is larger than the largest character size among those constituting the remaining number of spins until playtime, regardless of whether the remaining spins until playtime are 0 to 900.

Furthermore, the font size F1P for the small instruction prompt text is larger than the font size FZ for the remaining spins until playtime. Additionally, the smallest character in the small instruction prompt text is larger than the largest character in the remaining spins until playtime. Moreover, the smallest character in the small instruction prompt text is larger than the largest character in the remaining spins until playtime, regardless of whether the remaining spins until playtime are 0 to 900.

Furthermore, these relationships between font sizes and character sizes hold true regardless of the type of Super Reach animation.

In this configuration, when comparing the display area sizes of the title text for the Super Reach演出 (Super Reach演出), the title text for the Jackpot Start演出 (Big Win Start演出), the Operation Prompt Text (Small), the Operation Prompt Text (Large), the title text for the Playtime Start演出 (Playtime Start演出), and the remaining number of spins until Playtime, as shown in Figure 11-68(C), the display area size E2P for the Operation Prompt Text (Large) is larger than the display area sizes ER, EB, E1P, EY, and EZ for the title text for the Super Reach演出, the title text for the Jackpot Start演出, the Operation Prompt Text (Small), the title text for the Playtime Start演出, and the remaining number of spins until Playtime. Furthermore, the display area size EY for the title text of the playtime start animation is larger than the display area sizes ER, E1P, and EZ for the title text, operation prompt text (small), and remaining count until playtime animation of the super reach animation. Also, the display area size ER for the title text of the super reach animation is larger than the display area sizes E1P and EZ for the operation prompt text (small) and remaining count until playtime animation. Furthermore, the display area size E1P for the operation prompt text (small) is larger than the display area size EZ for the remaining count until playtime animation. These relationship between display area sizes holds true regardless of the type of super reach animation.

In this configuration, comparing the display times of the title text for the Super Reach演出 (Super Reach演出) and the Playtime Start演出 (Playtime Start演出), as shown in Figure 11-68(D), the display time LY for the Playtime Start演出's title text is set longer than the display time LR for the Super Reach演出's title text. Furthermore, this relationship of display times holds true regardless of the type of Super Reach演出.

In this configuration, comparing the display patterns of the title text for the Super Reach演出 (Super Reach演出) and the Playtime Start演出 (Playtime Start演出), as shown in Figure 11-68(E), in the Low Base Weak Reach A and B演出 and Low Base Strong Reach A to C演出, the title text moves from the left to the center of the display area during the title start period, and disappears while moving from the center to the right of the display area during the title end period. On the other hand, in the Low Base Strongest Reach演出 and Playtime Start演出, the title text is displayed from enlarged to reduced during the title start period, and disappears while enlarging during the title end period.

[Regarding LED placement]
In this embodiment, the game effect lamp 9 includes frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

As shown in Figure 11-69, frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 are positioned above the image display device 5 and surrounding the left side of the game area of the gaming machine frame 3, while frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 are positioned to surround the right side of the game area of the gaming machine frame 3. Logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 are positioned to correspond to the logo "POWERFUL II" formed on the front of the movable body 32. Decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 are positioned to correspond to the decorative parts formed in the game area 2L. Attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 are positioned near the special variable prize ball device 7 on the game board 2.

Frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, LWR2-LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1-LA4 are full-color LEDs consisting of RGB (Red, Green, Blue) light-emitting elements. Logo LEDs LL1-LL4 are red LEDs capable of emitting a single color of red light, and decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 are white LEDs capable of emitting a single color of white light.

[Mechanism of output to LED driver (lamp driver)]
Figure 11-70 is a diagram illustrating the mechanism of output to the LED driver. In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 mounted on the performance control board 12 outputs brightness data to the LED driver (also referred to as the lamp driver) to turn on/flash/turn off one or more of the LEDs included in the game effect lamp 9. Hereinafter, the control of turning on/flashing/turning off LEDs and other lamps performed by the performance control CPU 120 will also be referred to as lamp control. Based on the brightness data received from the performance control CPU 120, the LED driver adjusts the current flowing to each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 that is subject to lamp control in order to turn on/flash/turn off each lamp. Each game effect lamp 9 turns on/flashes/turns off based on the current adjusted by the LED driver.

More specifically, the ROM 121 of the performance control board 12 stores a brightness data table containing brightness data for controlling each game effect lamp 9. The brightness data table includes an error brightness data table used when an error occurs, an SP reach brightness data table used during a super reach, and a background brightness data table.

Furthermore, the background brightness data table includes a normal background brightness data table used in the low probability low base state (normal state), a fanfare background brightness data table used in the fanfare state where the fanfare effect is performed, a jackpot background brightness data table used during the rounds of the jackpot game state, an ending background brightness data table used in the ending state where the ending effect that signals the end of the jackpot game state is performed, and a time-saving background brightness data table used in the low probability high base state (time-saving state).

Each of the background brightness data tables described above is used without overlap. Depending on which of the multiple game states—such as normal state, fanfare state, jackpot state, ending state, and time-saving state—is being controlled, one of the background brightness data tables is used. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 uses one of the background brightness data tables for each game state being controlled and outputs brightness data based on that background brightness data table to the LED driver. As a result, each game effect lamp 9 is controlled according to the game state being controlled.

Furthermore, a priority order is defined for the use of each of the following tables: the error brightness data table, the SP reach brightness data table, and the background brightness data table. Specifically, as shown in Figure 11-70, the priority order for use is as follows: error brightness data table, SP reach brightness data table, and background brightness data table.

For example, when the CPU 120 for performance control is outputting brightness data based on the normal background brightness data table in the normal state, and the game progresses to a Super Reach performance, it prioritizes using the SP Reach brightness data table corresponding to the Super Reach performance over the normal background brightness data table, and outputs brightness data to the LED driver based on the SP Reach brightness data table. As a result, when the game effect lamp 9 is controlled in a manner corresponding to the normal state based on the normal background brightness data table and the game progresses to a Super Reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled in a manner corresponding to the Super Reach performance based on the SP Reach brightness data table. Furthermore, while brightness data based on the SP Reach brightness data table is output to the LED driver, brightness data based on the normal background brightness data table is not output to the LED driver. However, after the Super Reach performance ends and the game returns to the normal state, brightness data based on the normal background brightness data table is output to the LED driver. If a jackpot occurs and the fanfare state is reached, brightness data based on the fanfare background brightness data table is output to the LED driver.

More specifically, the CPU 120 for performance control measures the time for lamp control corresponding to the game state being controlled using a timer, and outputs brightness data to the LED driver using a background brightness data table corresponding to the game state being controlled. However, when the game progresses to a super reach effect, the CPU 120 uses the SP reach brightness data table corresponding to the super reach effect, prioritizing it over the background brightness data table, to output brightness data to the LED driver. During this time, the CPU 120 for performance control continues to update the timer value without stopping the time measurement for lamp control using the background brightness data table. In other words, even while the CPU 120 for performance control is controlling the game effect lamp 9 based on the SP reach brightness data table, it continues to update the brightness data included in the background brightness data table. However, because the brightness data included in the background brightness data table has a lower priority than the brightness data included in the SP reach brightness data table, the CPU 120 does not output the brightness data included in the background brightness data table to the LED driver. Then, after the Super Reach animation ends, the CPU 120 for controlling the animation starts outputting the brightness data included in the background brightness data table to the LED driver again, starting from where it left off updating the brightness data.

Furthermore, for example, if an error occurs when the CPU 120 for performance control is outputting brightness data based on the SP reach brightness data table during a super reach performance, it will prioritize using the error brightness data table corresponding to that error over the SP reach brightness data table and output brightness data to the LED driver based on the error brightness data table. As a result, if an error occurs when the game effect lamp 9 is being controlled in a manner corresponding to the super reach performance based on the SP reach brightness data table, the game effect lamp 9 will be controlled in a manner corresponding to the error based on the error brightness data table. Note that while brightness data based on the error brightness data table is being output to the LED driver, brightness data based on the SP reach brightness data table is not output to the LED driver. However, once the error is cleared and the game returns to the super reach performance state, brightness data based on the SP reach brightness data table is output to the LED driver.

More specifically, the CPU 120 for performance control measures the time for lamp control corresponding to the super reach performance being controlled using a timer, and outputs brightness data to the LED driver using the SP reach brightness data table corresponding to the super reach performance. However, if an error occurs, it outputs brightness data to the LED driver using the error brightness data table corresponding to that error, with priority given to the SP reach brightness data table. During this time, the CPU 120 for performance control continues to update the timer value without stopping the time measurement for lamp control using the SP reach brightness data table. In other words, even while the CPU 120 for performance control is controlling the game effect lamp 9 based on the error brightness data table, it continues to update the brightness data included in the SP reach brightness data table. However, because the brightness data included in the SP reach brightness data table has a lower priority than the brightness data included in the error brightness data table, the brightness data included in the SP reach brightness data table is not output to the LED driver. Then, after the error is cleared, the CPU 120 for performance control begins outputting the brightness data included in the SP reach brightness data table to the LED driver again, starting from where it left off updating the brightness data.

[How the game effect lamp lights up]
In this embodiment, each game effect lamp 9 is controlled by the output of brightness data to the LED driver by the CPU 120 for performance control as described above. In this embodiment, terms such as "off,""partiallyoff,""on," and "flashing" are used to describe the lighting of each game effect lamp 9. As mentioned above, the states of each game effect lamp 9 when "on" or "flashing" are also referred to as "lighting states."

The term "off" includes the state in which the game effect lamp 9 is not lit and its brightness is 0. The term "partially off" includes the state in which the game effect lamp 9 is lit but its brightness is extremely low (for example, brightness "1" as described later).

For example, if the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as the luminance data is "000", the corresponding LED will be "off". Also, if the luminance data (RGB data) is "111", the corresponding LED will light up white at extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of an LED with such RGB data as "111" may be referred to as "almost off" for convenience.

If the R (Red) data, which is defined as the luminance data for logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, is "0", then logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 will be "off". Conversely, if the luminance data (R data) for logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 is "1", then logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 will light up at extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state in which logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 have such R data as "1" may be referred to as "almost off" for convenience.

If the W (White) data, which is defined as the luminance data for decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, is "0", then decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 will be "off". Furthermore, if the luminance data (W data) for decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 is "1", then decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 will light up at extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state in which the W data is "1" for logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 may be referred to as "almost off" for convenience.

The term "illuminated" includes three states: constant illumination (where the game effect lamp 9 is always lit), wave illumination (where multiple lamps within the game effect lamp 9 switch from off to lit in sequence), and hazy illumination (where the game effect lamp 9 dimly illuminates while its brightness changes). Specifically, "illuminated" includes the illumination of the game effect lamp 9 when the brightness data is one of the values from "2" to "F". The brightness data is a hexadecimal value that can be specified from "0" to "F," where "0" represents no brightness, "1" represents the lowest brightness, and "F" represents the highest brightness.

The term "flashing" includes modes of operation other than the "off" and "on" states described above, where the brightness of each lamp alternates between a first brightness and a second brightness that is higher than the first brightness. For example, "flashing" includes repeatedly switching between on and off or partially off. Specifically, "flashing" includes switching between a brightness data value of "2" to "F" and a brightness data value of "0" or "1" over time. As described above, in this embodiment, there is a "hazy illumination" mode for the lamps. However, hazy illumination is a state where the game effect lamps 9 are dimly lit while changing brightness, whereas flashing differs in that all the lamps included in the game effect lamps 9 repeatedly switch between on and off or partially off.

[Explanation regarding the game effect indicator lights]
Next, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 will be explained with reference to Figures 11-71 to 12-36.

[Regarding lamp control of game effect lamps using a luminance data table]
The CPU 120 for performance control uses the brightness data table stored in the ROM 121 to control one or more of the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 by turning them on, blinking, or turning them off.

Specifically, the display control unit 123 sets the sub-variation time according to the variation pattern command transmitted from the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11. The sub-variation time is a counter that decrements by 1 for each frame (33 ms) of the displayed image. When the sub-variation time reaches the timing to start the display corresponding to each part (for example, various displays in each part of a super reach animation), the display control unit 123 controls the display of the image display device 5 based on the image data (video data, animation data) stored in the ROM 121. The display control unit 123 sets an extended command (for example, extended command BXXX, etc. ("X" is any alphanumeric character)) corresponding to the animation display (animation scene) to be displayed on the image display device 5, according to the display control it is performing, and transmits this extended command to the animation control CPU 120. Based on the extended command received from the display control unit 123, the animation control CPU 120 identifies the address of the parent table corresponding to the animation display (animation scene) whose display control is performed by the display control unit 123.

Figure 11-71 illustrates an example of lamp control using a luminance data table. As shown in Figure 11-71, for example, when the display control unit 123 performs display control in the title display part of a low-base weak reach A performance, it sends an extended command (B421) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify the title display part of the low-base weak reach A performance. Based on the extended command received from the display control unit 123, the performance control CPU 120 identifies the address of the parent table (weak reach common title (parent)) corresponding to the title display part of the low-base weak reach A performance.

The parent table stores information specifying which lamps (lighted locations) among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are subject to lamp control, information specifying the child table referenced during lamp control corresponding to the lamps subject to lamp control, and information specifying the maximum time for which lamp control is performed. Note that the parent table only stores information about the lamps subject to lamp control; information about lamps not subject to lamp control is not stored.

For example, in the parent table shown in Figure 11-74, the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and LWR2 to LWR12 (XD_A_LWU_1_B421), logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 (XD_A_LLOGO_B421), decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 (XD_A_LSLMP_B421), and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 (XD_A_LATAK_B421) are specified as targets for lamp control. Furthermore, a child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE is specified for frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the maximum time for lamp control by this child table is specified as 600,000 ms (600,000/10). Similarly, a child table: XD_J_LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE is specified for logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, and the maximum time for lamp control by this child table is specified as 600,000 ms (600,000/10). The following is specified: ) is designated, and for decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, the child table: XD_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE is designated, with a maximum time of 600,000 ms (600,000/10) specified for lamp control by this child table. For attacker lamps LA1 to LA4, the child table: XD_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE is designated, with a maximum time of 600,000 ms (600,000/10) specified for lamp control by this child table.

As shown in Figure 11-71, when the performance control CPU 120 controls a lamp specified in the parent table using the specified child table, for example, if the maximum time is specified as 600,000 ms (10 minutes), it decrements a counter by 1 every 10 ms to measure this 600,000 ms (10 minutes). In other words, the performance control CPU 120 measures 600,000 ms (10 minutes) by executing the counter decrementing process 60,000 times. The performance control CPU 120 continues to control the target lamp using the child table specified by the parent table until it has measured a maximum of 600,000 ms (10 minutes). Furthermore, if the CPU 120 for performance control receives another extended command before the maximum 600,000ms (10 minutes) has elapsed since receiving the extended command, it will stop the currently running lamp control and perform lamp control of the target lamp using the child table specified by the parent table specified by the newly received extended command. While it is not anticipated that any performance display (performance scene) will take 600,000ms, the maximum time for lamp control using the child table is set to 600,000ms, which is significantly longer than the time required for a performance display (performance scene). Therefore, even if the CPU 120 for performance control fails to receive the next extended command for any reason, it can continue the currently running lamp control for up to 600,000ms (10 minutes).

The child table stores information specifying the sub-table to be referenced during lamp control for each lamp (the illuminated location) among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the execution time for each lamp control, in the order in which each lamp control is executed.

For example, in the child table shown in Figure 11-75, corresponding to frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12 (XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE), there is a grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 and the execution time for lamp control by this grandchild table is 500ms, and a grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and this grandchild table The execution time for lamp control by Bull is 500ms, the execution time for lamp control by grandchild table XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 is 230ms, and the execution time for lamp control by grandchild table XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 is 600,000ms. These are specified in the order in which the lamp control by these grandchild tables is executed.

Furthermore, in the child table shown in Figure 11-75, corresponding to the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 (XD_J_LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE), the following grandchild tables are specified in the order in which the lamp control by these grandchild tables is executed: XD___LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 and its execution time: 500 ms, XD___LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and its execution time: 500 ms, XD___LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 and its execution time: 230 ms, and XD___LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and its execution time: 600,000 ms.

Furthermore, in the child table shown in Figure 11-75, corresponding to the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 (XD_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE), the following grandchild tables are specified in the order in which the lamp control by these grandchild tables is executed: XD_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 and its execution time: 500 ms, XD_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and its execution time: 500 ms, XD_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 and its execution time: 230 ms, and X_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and its execution time: 600,000 ms.

Furthermore, in the child table shown in Figure 11-75, corresponding to attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 (XD_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE), the following grandchild tables are specified in the order in which their lamp control is executed: XD_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 and its execution time: 500 ms, XD_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and its execution time: 500 ms, XD_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 and its execution time: 230 ms, and X_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and its execution time: 600,000 ms.

As shown in Figure 11-71, when the CPU 120 for performance control controls a target lamp using a grandchild table specified by a child table, it first controls the target lamp using the first specified grandchild table, measures the execution time corresponding to this grandchild table, and then controls the target lamp using the next specified grandchild table. This process is performed for all specified grandchild tables in the specified order. For example, in the case of the child table shown in Figure 11-75, for frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, lamp control is performed by the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 until 500 ms is measured, then lamp control is performed by the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 until 500 ms is measured, then lamp control is performed by the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 until 230 ms is measured, and then lamp control is performed by the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 until 600000 ms is measured. While it's not anticipated that a performance display (performance scene) would require 600,000 ms, by setting the maximum time for lamp control via the last specified grandchild table to 600,000 ms—significantly longer than the time required for a performance display (performance scene)—the performance control CPU 120 can continue the ongoing lamp control for up to 600,000 ms (10 minutes) even if it fails to receive the next extended command for any reason.

Furthermore, in the child table, when frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12 are to be targeted for lamp control, a grandchild table corresponding to frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12 may be specified, for example, as shown in Figure 11-75, with one grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1, or two grandchild tables: XD___LWU_1_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1 and XD___LWU_2_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1. Furthermore, if one grandchild table is specified as the grandchild table corresponding to frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the CPU 120 for performance control uses this one grandchild table to perform the same lamp control for both frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12. On the other hand, if two grandchild tables are specified as the grandchild tables corresponding to frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the CPU 120 for performance control uses one of the two grandchild tables to perform lamp control for frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the other grandchild table to perform lamp control for frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12. Therefore, if one grandchild table is specified as the grandchild table corresponding to frames LEDLWL1-LWL12 and frames LEDLWR2-LWR12, common lamp control is performed for frames LEDLWL1-LWL12 and frames LEDLWR2-LWR12. On the other hand, if two grandchild tables are specified, individual lamp control is performed for frames LEDLWL1-LWL12 and frames LEDLWR2-LWR12.

The sub-table stores, for each lamp (the illuminated area) among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 that are subject to lamp control, the brightness data referenced during lamp control and information specifying the execution time of the lamp control, in the order in which each lamp control is executed.

For example, in the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, corresponding to frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12 (XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1), the brightness data is: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 100 ms, brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120 ms, brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, The following are specified as the order in which lamp control based on luminance data will be executed: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, with an execution time of 120 ms for lamp control based on this luminance data; luminance data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, with an execution time of 40 ms for lamp control based on this luminance data.

Furthermore, in the sub-table shown in Figure 11-76, corresponding to logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 (XD___LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1), the following are specified in the order in which the lamp control based on these brightness data will be executed: brightness data: 0x0000, execution time for lamp control based on this brightness data: 100 ms; brightness data: 0xAAAA, execution time for lamp control based on this brightness data: 120 ms; brightness data: 0xAAAA, execution time for lamp control based on this brightness data: 120 ms; brightness data: 0xAAAA, execution time for lamp control based on this brightness data: 120 ms; and brightness data: 0xAAAA, execution time for lamp control based on this brightness data: 40 ms.

Furthermore, in the sub-table shown in Figure 11-76, the following are specified for each decorative LED LS1 to LS5 (XD___LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1): Brightness data: 0x00000, execution time for lamp control based on this brightness data: 100 ms; Brightness data: 0x00000, execution time for lamp control based on this brightness data: 120 ms; Brightness data: 0x66666, execution time for lamp control based on this brightness data: 120 ms; Brightness data: 0x66666, execution time for lamp control based on this brightness data: 120 ms; Brightness data: 0x66666, execution time for lamp control based on this brightness data: 40 ms. These are specified in the order in which lamp control based on these brightness data is executed.

Furthermore, in the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, the following are specified for the order in which lamp control based on luminance data is executed, corresponding to attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 (XD___LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1): luminance data: 0x000000, 0x000000, execution time for lamp control based on this luminance data: 100 ms; luminance data: 0x000000, 0x000000, execution time for lamp control based on this luminance data: 120 ms; luminance data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, execution time for lamp control based on this luminance data: 120 ms; luminance data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, execution time for lamp control based on this luminance data: 40 ms.

In the luminance data for frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12 (XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1) of the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, the values from the 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL1, the values from the 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of frames LEDLWL2 and LWR2, the values from the 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of frames LEDLWL3 and LWR3, and the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 The last three digits of the data indicate the RGB values of frames LEDLWL4 and LWR4. The last four to six digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of frames LEDLWL5 and LWR5. The last three digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of frames LEDLWL6 and LWR6. The last four to six digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of frames LEDLWL7 and LWR7. The last three digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of frames LEDLWL8 and LWR8.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-81, when separate grandchild tables are specified for frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 (XD___LWU_1_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1) and frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12 (XD___LWU_2_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1), in the luminance data of frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 (XD___LWU_1_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1), the values from the 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to the 1st and 2nd values are the RGB values of frame LEDLWL1. The values shown are as follows: the first to third digits from the bottom of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL2; the fourth to sixth digits from the bottom of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL3; the first to third digits from the bottom of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL4; the fourth to sixth digits from the bottom of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL5; and the first to third digits from the bottom of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL6. For data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8, the last four to six digits indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL7, and the last one to three digits indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL8. For the luminance data of frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12 (XD___LWU_2_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1), the last one to three digits of the data corresponding to number 2 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWR2, and the last four to six digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWR3. The data for numbers 3 and 4 shows the RGB values of frame LEDLWR4, the data for numbers 5 and 6 shows the RGB values of frame LEDLWR5, the data for numbers 5 and 6 shows the RGB values of frame LEDLWR6, the data for numbers 7 and 8 shows the RGB values of frame LEDLWR7, and the data for numbers 7 and 8 shows the RGB values of frame LEDLWR8.

Furthermore, in the luminance data for the sub-table logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 (XD_J_LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE) shown in Figure 11-76, the fourth digit from the bottom indicates the R (Red) value of logo LED LL1, the third digit from the bottom indicates the R value of logo LED LL2, the second digit from the bottom indicates the R value of logo LED LL3, and the fourth digit from the bottom indicates the R value of logo LED LL4.

Furthermore, in the luminance data for the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 (XD_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE) of the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, the fourth digit from the bottom indicates the W (White) value of decorative LED LS1, the third digit from the bottom indicates the W value of decorative LED LS2, the second digit from the bottom indicates the W value of decorative LED LS3, and the fourth digit from the bottom indicates the W value of decorative LED LS4.

In the luminance data for attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 (XD_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE) in the sub-table shown in Figure 11-76, the values from the 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to lamps 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of attacker lamp LA1, the values from the 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to lamps 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of attacker lamp LA2, the values from the 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to lamps 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of attacker lamp LA3, and the values from the 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to lamps 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of attacker lamp LA4.

The luminance data values correspond to the current values output to the lamps being controlled. Frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, LWR2-LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1-LA4 are composed of LEDs consisting of three elements: "R," "G," and "B." The luminance data for each element corresponds to the current value output to that element. Specifically, the luminance data is divided into 16 current values from 0 to F. When the luminance data is 0, the current value is the minimum value (e.g., 0), and when the luminance data is F, the current value is the maximum value. For example, when luminance data "A" is output to the "R" element, the current corresponding to that "A" luminance data flows to the "R" element. When luminance data "1" is output to the "G" element, the current corresponding to that "1" luminance data flows to the "G" element. When luminance data "F" is output to the "G" element, the current corresponding to that "F" luminance data flows to the "G" element.

The frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, LWR2-LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1-LA4 can emit light in various colors by flowing a current corresponding to the brightness data through each RGB element. Furthermore, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, LWR2-LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1-LA4 can light up in colors corresponding to various effects and characters based on the brightness data. For example, if the brightness data is "F00," output from one LED lamp to another, and a current corresponding to that data flows, the LED lights up red. Similarly, if the brightness data is "F0F," output from one LED lamp to another, and a current corresponding to that data flows, the LED lights up reddish-purple. Also, if the brightness data is "FF0," output from one LED lamp to another, and a current corresponding to that data flows, the LED lights up yellow.

Furthermore, the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 can emit red light at a brightness corresponding to the brightness data by having a current corresponding to the brightness data flow through the R (Red) element, while the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 can emit white light at a brightness corresponding to the brightness data by having a current corresponding to the brightness data flow evenly through the three elements "R," "G," and "B."

As shown in Figure 11-71, when the performance control CPU 120 controls a target lamp by referring to the brightness data in the sub-table, for example, it first outputs the specified brightness data to the LED driver, measures the execution time corresponding to this brightness data, and then outputs the next specified brightness data to the LED driver. This process is performed for all specified brightness data in the specified order. For example, in the case of the child table shown in Figure 11-75, for frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, until 100 ms is measured, the brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000 is output to the LED driver, then until 120 ms is measured, the brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, The LED driver outputs 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, then outputs brightness data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, until 120ms have elapsed. Then, until 40ms have elapsed, it outputs 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, to the LED driver. The LED driver then supplies the corresponding current to the specified LED based on the received brightness data. This allows the performance control CPU 120 to control each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 via the LED driver.

As described above, the CPU 120 for performance control has timers corresponding to the parent table, child table, and grandchild table. It controls the lamps based on the parent table, child table, and grandchild table while subtracting these timers at a fixed period (for example, a 10ms period).

Specifically, the CPU 120 for performance control starts outputting brightness data from the first specified location in the grandchild table. When it has finished outputting brightness data up to the last specified location in the grandchild table, if the timer corresponding to the child table specifying that grandchild table still has a value remaining, it starts outputting brightness data again from the first specified location in the grandchild table. On the other hand, while the CPU 120 is outputting brightness data based on the grandchild table, if the timer corresponding to the child table specifying that grandchild table becomes 0, it then sets a timer corresponding to another child table specified by the parent table specifying that child table, and starts outputting brightness data from the first specified location in the grandchild table specified by that child table. This causes the grandchild table to switch, and lamp control is performed based on the switched grandchild table.

The timer management of the child table by the CPU 120 for performance control will be explained with reference to the figure. Figure 11-72 is a diagram illustrating an example of lamp control using a grandchild table with timer management of the child table. As shown in Figure 11-72, in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE, 500ms is specified as the time for the first lamp control to be performed for frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, and the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 is specified, 500ms is specified as the time for the second lamp control to be performed, and the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 is specified, 230ms is specified as the time for the third lamp control to be performed, and the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 is specified, and 600000ms is specified as the time for the fourth lamp control to be performed, and the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 is specified. In the second and fourth grandchild tables: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2, for frame LED LWL1 to LWL12, the brightness data (RGB data) is "0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499", "0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499388", "0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499", "0x499388, 0x4995AA, The process is specified to execute at 100ms intervals in the order of "0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x4995AA". For the sake of explanation, the luminance data from the first 100ms will be referred to as Data 1, the luminance data from the second 100ms as Data 2, the luminance data from the third 100ms as Data 3, and the luminance data from the fourth 100ms as Data 4.

The CPU 120 for performance control, when performing lamp control for the second grandchild table XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 specified in the child table XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE, measures the specified 500ms by decrementing a counter by 1 every 10ms. Until the measurement reaches 500ms, it outputs brightness data 1, 2, 3, and 4 to the LED driver at 100ms intervals based on XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2. However, if the measurement has not yet reached 500ms after outputting data 1 through 4, it outputs the brightness data to the LED driver again, starting from the first data 1 in order. When the timing reaches 500ms, the CPU 120 for performance control will stop outputting brightness data based on the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2, and start outputting brightness data based on the next grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3, which was specified by the child table.

Furthermore, when the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control for the grandchild table XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2, which is the fourth entry in the child table XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE, it counts the specified 600,000 ms by decrementing a counter by 1 every 10 ms. Until the count reaches 600,000 ms, it outputs brightness data 1, 2, 3, and 4 to the LED driver at 100 ms intervals based on XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2. However, if the count has not yet reached 600,000 ms after outputting data 1 through 4, it outputs the brightness data to the LED driver again, starting from the first data 1 in order. When the timing reaches 600,000ms, the CPU 120 for performance control stops outputting brightness data based on the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2. At this point, since no further grandchild table is specified in the child table, outputting brightness data based on the first grandchild table specified in the child table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 begins. However, unless an abnormality occurs, the timing will not reach 600,000ms. Before reaching 600,000ms, the CPU 120 receives the next extended command from the display control unit 123, and then begins outputting brightness data based on the parent, child, and grandchild tables specified in the newly received extended command.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-74, the maximum time for lamp control by the child table is specified as 600,000 ms (10 minutes). This 10-minute data in the parent table serves a role in troubleshooting. Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 switches parent tables based on performance control commands from the main board 11 to perform lamp control. However, even if a malfunction occurs while lamp control is being performed based on a particular parent table, and the performance control CPU 120 fails to receive performance control commands from the main board 11, lamp control will continue for 10 minutes based on the same parent table. This prevents the system from switching to different lamp controls one after another from the point where the malfunction occurred.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-75, the execution time for lamp control by the last specified grandchild table is set to 600,000 ms (10 minutes). This 10-minute data in the child table serves to prevent the lamp control from being performed again by the first specified grandchild table when the timer value corresponding to the child table becomes 0, because the parent table's timer is still active.

Furthermore, in the grandchild table, the execution time for lamp control referencing the last specified brightness data may be set to 600,000 ms (10 minutes). This configuration prevents the lamp control from being performed again using the brightness data specified first in the grandchild table, even when the timer value corresponding to the grandchild table becomes 0, because the timer in the child table is still active. By setting the last specified brightness data in the grandchild table to 10 minutes, the lamp is maintained at a predetermined level of illumination, thus preventing the malfunction of continuously fluctuating lamp illumination. Moreover, specifying 600,000 ms (10 minutes) of brightness data at the end of the grandchild table, as specified at the end of the child table, can more effectively prevent the malfunction of continuously fluctuating lamp illumination.

[Regarding the luminance data table used for the Super Reach animation, Part 1]
Figure 11-73 shows the brightness data table used in the Super Reach animation.

The execution time of the title display part is the same for both the low-base weak reach A and low-base weak reach B sequences. As shown in Figure 11-73, the CPU 120 for sequence control controls the game effect lamp 9 in the title display part using a common weak reach series title, which defines the illumination pattern of the title display part for both low-base weak reach A and B sequences as a brightness data table, regardless of whether the low-base weak reach A or B sequence is executed.

Furthermore, when the low-base weak reach A and B effects are executed, the CPU 120 for controlling the effects executes a title color change effect in the title display part. If the title text changes to red, it uses a common title common chance-up red, defined in the luminance data table, to control the game effect lamp 9, regardless of whether it's the title display part of the low-base weak reach A or the low-base weak reach B effect. Similarly, when the title color change effect is executed in the title display part and the title text changes to gold, it uses a common title common chance-up gold, defined in the luminance data table, to control the game effect lamp 9, regardless of whether it's the title display part of the low-base weak reach A or the low-base weak reach B effect.

The execution time of the introductory part differs between the low-base weak reach A and low-base weak reach B sequences. As shown in Figure 11-73, when executing the low-base weak reach A sequence, the introductory part uses a weak reach-type weak reach A introduction, which defines a specific light emission pattern for the introductory part of the low-base weak reach A sequence, to control the game effect lamp 9. When executing the low-base weak reach B sequence, the introductory part uses a weak reach-type weak reach B introduction, which defines a specific light emission pattern for the introductory part of the low-base weak reach B sequence, to control the game effect lamp 9.

The execution time of the title display part is the same for the Low Base Strong Reach A, Low Base Strong Reach B, and Low Base Strong Reach C sequences. As shown in Figure 11-73, the CPU 120 for sequence control controls the game effect lamp 9 in the title display part using a common strong reach series title, which defines the illumination patterns of the title display parts for Low Base Strong Reach A to C sequences as a luminance data table, regardless of whether Low Base Strong Reach A, Low Base Strong Reach B, or Low Base Strong Reach C is executed.

The execution time of the introductory part differs for the Low Base Strong Reach A, Low Base Strong Reach B, and Low Base Strong Reach C sequences. As shown in Figure 11-73, when executing the Low Base Strong Reach A sequence, the introductory part uses the Strong Reach A Introduction, which defines a specific light emission pattern for the introductory part of the Low Base Strong Reach A sequence as its luminance data table, to control the game effect lamp 9. When executing the Low Base Strong Reach B sequence, the introductory part uses the Strong Reach B Introduction, which defines a specific light emission pattern for the introductory part of the Low Base Strong Reach B sequence as its luminance data table, to control the game effect lamp 9. The introductory part also uses the Strong Reach C Introduction, which defines a specific light emission pattern for the introductory part of the Low Base Strong Reach C sequence as its luminance data table, to control the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in Figure 11-73, when the low-base strongest reach animation is executed, the CPU 120 for performance control uses a luminance data table that defines a series of light emission patterns from the title display part to the introduction part of the low-base strongest reach animation, to control the game effect lamp 9.

The execution time of the title display part is the same for High Base Reach A, High Base Reach B, High Base Reach C, and High Base Reach D. As shown in Figure 11-73, the CPU 120 for performance control controls the game effect lamp 9 in the title display part using a common high-base reach system title, which defines the illumination patterns of the title display parts for High Base Reach A to D as a brightness data table, regardless of whether High Base Reach A, High Base Reach B, High Base Reach C, or High Base Reach D is being executed.

The execution time of the title display part is the same for High Base Reach A, High Base Reach B, High Base Reach C, and High Base Reach D. However, as shown in Figure 11-73, when executing High Base Reach A, the introduction part uses the High Base Reach A introduction, which defines a specific light emission pattern for the introduction part of High Base Reach A as the brightness data table, to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9. When executing High Base Reach B, the introduction part uses a specific light emission pattern for the introduction part of High Base Reach B as the brightness data table. When executing the high-base reach B sequence, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the high-base reach C sequence, which has a defined luminance data table for the specific luminescence pattern of the high-base reach C sequence's introduction part. When executing the high-base reach D sequence, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the high-base reach D sequence, which has a defined luminance data table for the specific luminescence pattern of the high-base reach D sequence's introduction part.

Thus, in both the low-base weak reach A and low-base weak reach B sequences, the title display section uses a common weak reach common title as the brightness data table to control the game effect lamp 9. This saves storage capacity in the brightness data table. Meanwhile, in the introduction section, separate weak reach A and weak reach B introductions are used for controlling the game effect lamp 9, respectively. This allows the game effect lamp 9 to illuminate in different patterns depending on the content of each sequence in the introduction section of the low-base weak reach A and low-base weak reach B sequences, thereby enhancing the effect of the introduction section leading up to the presentation of the super reach result.

In this embodiment, whether executing the low-base weak reach A or low-base weak reach B performance, the title display part uses a common weak reach common title as the brightness data table to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9. However, the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B performances includes a weak reach title start with a specific light emission pattern defined for the title start period from when a part of the title characters is displayed until they are displayed in their fixed position, and a weak reach title display with a specific light emission pattern defined for the title display period after the title characters are displayed in their fixed position. The display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B performances, The CPU 120 for performance control may, by sending an extended command to specify the start of a reach-type title, control the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 using the brightness data table: weak reach-type title start. The display control unit 123 may, when starting display control of the title display period in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B performances, send an extended command to specify the weak reach-type title display, causing the CPU 120 for performance control to control the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 using the brightness data table: weak reach-type title display. In this configuration, depending on whether it is a low-base weak reach A performance or a low-base weak reach B performance, a common brightness data table may be used for either the brightness data table: weak reach-type title start or the weak reach-type title display, while separate brightness data tables with individual contents may be used for the other.

Furthermore, when executing the low-base weak reach A and B sequences, and when executing the title color change sequence in the title display part, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a common title common chance-up red (or title common chance-up gold) as the brightness data table, regardless of whether it is the low-base weak reach A sequence or the low-base weak reach B sequence. This saves storage capacity in the brightness data table.

Furthermore, when executing the low-base strong reach A, low-base strong reach B, or low-base strong reach C, the title display part uses a common strong reach common title as the brightness data table to control the game effect lamp 9. This saves storage capacity for the brightness data table. Meanwhile, in the introduction part, separate strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, and strong reach system strong reach C introduction are used to control the game effect lamp 9, respectively. This allows the game effect lamp 9 to have different illumination patterns in the introduction part of the low-base strong reach A, low-base strong reach B, and low-base strong reach C sequences, according to the content of each sequence, thereby enhancing the effect of the introduction part before the sequence result is shown in the super reach sequence.

In this embodiment, whether executing the low-base strong reach A, low-base strong reach B, or low-base strong reach C, the title display part uses a common strong reach common title as a brightness data table to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9. However, the title display part of the low-base strong reach A to C effects includes a strong reach title start with a specific light emission pattern defined for the prologue display period and the title start period from when part of the title characters are displayed until they are displayed in their fixed position, and a strong reach title display with a specific light emission pattern defined for the title display period after the title characters are displayed in their fixed position, and the display control unit 123 controls the title display part of the low-base strong reach A to C effects. When starting the display control of the title, the CPU 120 for performance control may send an extended command specifying the start of a strong reach title, thereby controlling the lamps of frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 using the brightness data table: strong reach title start. Alternatively, when the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display period in the title display part of the strong base weak reach A to C performance, it may send an extended command specifying the display of a strong reach title, thereby controlling the lamps of frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 using the brightness data table: strong reach title display. Furthermore, in such a configuration, depending on whether it is a low-base strong reach A, low-base strong reach B, or low-base strong reach C, a common luminance data table may be used for either the strong reach title start or the strong reach title display, while separate luminance data tables with individual content may be used for the other.

Furthermore, the title display part of the low-base strong reach A to C performance includes a strong reach prologue with a specific light emission pattern defined for the prologue display period, a strong reach title start with a specific light emission pattern defined for the title start period from when a part of the title characters is displayed until they are displayed in their fixed position, and a strong reach title display with a specific light emission pattern defined for the title display period after the title characters are displayed in their fixed position. When the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display part of the low-base strong reach A to C performance, it sends an extended command specifying the strong reach prologue, and the performance control CPU 120 uses the brightness data table: strong reach prologue to control the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4, and the display control unit 123 However, when the display control unit 123 starts displaying the title display period in the title display part of the low-base strong reach A to C performances, it may send an extended command specifying the start of a strong reach title, causing the performance control CPU 120 to control the lamps of frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 using the brightness data table: strong reach title start. Alternatively, when the display control unit 123 starts displaying the title display period in the title display part of the strong-base weak reach A to C performances, it may send an extended command specifying the display of a strong reach title, causing the performance control CPU 120 to control the lamps of frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 using the brightness data table: strong reach title display. Furthermore, in such a configuration, depending on whether it is a low-base strong reach A, low-base strong reach B, or low-base strong reach C, at least one of the following luminance data tables—strong reach prologue, strong reach title start, or strong reach title display—may be a common luminance data table, while the remaining tables may each have separate luminance data tables with individual content set for each.

Furthermore, the title display part of the low-base strong reach A to C effects includes a strong reach prologue with a specific light emission pattern defined for the prologue display period, and a strong reach title display with a specific light emission pattern defined for the title start period from when a part of the title characters is displayed until they are displayed in their fixed position. When the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display part of the low-base strong reach A to C effects, it sends an extended command specifying the strong reach prologue, and the effect control CPU 120 uses the brightness data table: strong reach prologue. The display control unit 123 controls the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. When the display control unit 123 starts display control for the title start period of the title display part of the low-base strong reach A to C effects, it sends an extended command specifying the strong reach title display. The effect control CPU 120 then uses the brightness data table: strong reach title display to control the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. Furthermore, in such a configuration, depending on whether it is a low-base strong reach A effect, a low-base strong reach B effect, or a low-base strong reach C effect, one of the brightness data tables: strong reach prologue and strong reach title display may be a common brightness data table, while the other may be a separate brightness data table with individual content set for each.

Furthermore, when executing High Base Reach A, High Base Reach B, High Base Reach C, or High Base Reach D, the title display part uses a common high-base reach series title as the brightness data table to control the game effect lamp 9. This saves storage capacity for the brightness data table. Meanwhile, in the introduction part, separate high-base reach series introductions (A, B, C, and D) are used to control the game effect lamp 9. This allows the game effect lamp 9 to illuminate in different patterns according to the content of each sequence in the introduction part of the high-base reach A, B, C, and D sequences, enhancing the effect of the sequence in the super reach sequence before the sequence result is revealed.

In this embodiment, whether executing the high-base reach A, high-base reach B, high-base reach C, or high-base reach D, the title display part uses a common high-base reach common title as a brightness data table to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9. However, the title display part of the high-base reach A to D effects includes a high-base reach title start, which defines a specific light emission pattern for the title start period from when a part of the title characters is displayed until they are displayed in their fixed position, and a high-base reach title display, which defines a specific light emission pattern for the title display period after the title characters are displayed in their fixed position. The display control unit 123 controls the title display part of the high-base reach A to D effects. When starting display control of the title, the CPU 120 for performance control may send an extended command specifying the start of a high-base reach-type title, thereby controlling the lamps of frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 using the brightness data table: high-base reach-type title start. Alternatively, when the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display period in the title display part of the high-base reach A to D performance, it may send an extended command specifying the display of a high-base reach-type title, thereby controlling the lamps of frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 using the brightness data table: high-base reach-type title display. Furthermore, in such a configuration, depending on whether it is a high-base reach A, high-base reach B, high-base reach C, or high-base reach D, a common luminance data table may be used for either the high-base reach title start or the high-base reach title display, while separate luminance data tables with individual content may be used for the other.

Furthermore, when executing a low-base strongest reach effect where the execution time of the title display part is not the same as other super reach effects, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a strongest reach title introduction, which defines the series of illumination patterns from the title display part to the introduction part of the low-base strongest reach effect as a brightness data table in the title display part and introduction part, thereby reducing the number of brightness data tables.

In this embodiment, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a common weak reach series title as the brightness data table in the title display part, regardless of whether the low-base weak reach A or low-base weak reach B performance is executed. However, it is also possible to control the game effect lamp 9 using a weak reach series weak reach A title, which defines a specific light emission pattern for the title display part of the low-base weak reach A performance, as the brightness data table in the title display part when executing the low-base weak reach A performance, and to control the game effect lamp 9 using a weak reach series weak reach B title, which defines a specific light emission pattern for the title display part of the low-base weak reach B performance, as the brightness data table in the title display part when executing the low-base weak reach B performance. This makes it possible to set the game effect lamp 9 to different light emission patterns in the title display parts of the low-base weak reach A and low-base weak reach B performances according to the content of each performance, thereby enhancing the performance effect in the title display part during super reach performances.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, whether executing the low-base strong reach A, low-base strong reach B, or low-base strong reach C, the title display part uses a common strong reach common title as its brightness data table to control the game effect lamp 9. However, when executing the low-base strong reach A, the title display part uses a strong reach A title that defines a specific light emission pattern for the title display part of the low-base strong reach A to control the game effect lamp 9. When executing the low-base strong reach B, the title display part uses the title of the low-base strong reach B as its brightness data table. When executing a low-base strong reach C performance, the game effect lamp 9 may be controlled using a strong reach B title with a specific illumination pattern defined for the display part, as the brightness data table for the title display part. This allows the game effect lamp 9 to have different illumination patterns in the title display parts of the low-base strong reach A, low-base strong reach B, and low-base strong reach C performances, according to the content of each performance, thereby enhancing the performance effect in the title display part during super reach performances.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, whether executing the high-base reach A, high-base reach B, high-base reach C, or high-base reach D, the title display part uses a common high-base reach common title as its brightness data table to control the game effect lamp 9. However, when executing the high-base reach A, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a high-base reach system reach A title, which defines a specific light emission pattern for the title display part of the high-base reach A, as its brightness data table for the title display part. When executing the high-base reach B, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a high-base reach system reach B title, which defines a specific light emission pattern for the title display part of the high-base reach B, as its brightness data table for the title display part. When executing the High Base Reach C performance, the game effect lamp 9 may be controlled using a High Base Reach C title, which defines a specific light emission pattern for the title display part of the High Base Reach C performance, as the brightness data table for the title display part. Similarly, when executing the High Base Reach D performance, the game effect lamp 9 may be controlled using a High Base Reach D title, which defines a specific light emission pattern for the title display part of the High Base Reach D performance, as the brightness data table for the title display part. This allows the game effect lamp 9 to emit different light emission patterns in the title display parts of the High Base Reach A, High Base Reach B, High Base Reach C, and High Base Reach D performances according to their respective performance content, thereby enhancing the performance effect in the title display part during super reach performances.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when executing the low-base strongest reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the strongest reach series strongest reach title introduction, which defines a series of light emission patterns from the title display part to the introduction part of the low-base strongest reach performance as a luminance data table, in the title display part and introduction part. However, when executing the low-base strongest reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 may also be controlled using the strongest reach series strongest reach title, which defines a light emission pattern specific to the title display part of the low-base strongest reach performance as a luminance data table for the title display part, and the game effect lamp 9 may also be controlled using the strongest reach series strongest reach introduction, which defines a light emission pattern specific to the introduction part of the low-base strongest reach performance as a luminance data table for the introduction part.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when executing the low-base weak reach A and B effects, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a common weak reach common title as the brightness data table for the title display part, and the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the weak reach A introduction and weak reach B introduction, respectively, as brightness data tables for the introduction part. However, when executing the low-base weak reach A effect, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 may be performed using the weak reach A title introduction, which defines a series of light emission patterns from the title display part to the introduction part of the low-base weak reach A, as the brightness data table for the title display part and the introduction part. Similarly, when executing the low-base weak reach B effect, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 may be performed using the weak reach B title introduction, which defines a series of light emission patterns from the title display part to the introduction part of the low-base weak reach B, as the brightness data table for the title display part and the introduction part. By doing so, the number of brightness data tables can be reduced.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when executing the low-base strong reach A to C effects, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a common strong reach common title as the brightness data table for the title display part, and the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the strong reach A introduction, strong reach B introduction, and strong reach C introduction, respectively, as the brightness data tables for the introduction part. However, when executing the low-base strong reach A effect, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the strong reach A title introduction, which defines a series of light emission patterns from the title display part to the introduction part of the low-base strong reach A effect, as the brightness data table for the title display part and the introduction part. When executing the low-base strong reach B effect, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the strong reach A title introduction, which defines a series of light emission patterns from the title display part to the introduction part of the low-base strong reach B effect. When executing a low-base strong reach C performance, the game effect lamp 9 may be controlled using a strong reach B title introduction, which defines a series of light emission patterns from the title display part to the introduction part, as the brightness data table for the low-base strong reach C performance. Similarly, when executing a low-base strong reach D performance, the game effect lamp 9 may be controlled using a strong reach D title introduction, which defines a series of light emission patterns from the title display part to the introduction part of the low-base strong reach D performance, as the brightness data table. This method reduces the number of brightness data tables.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when executing high-base reach A to D effects, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a common high-base reach common title as the brightness data table for the title display part, and the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using high-base reach A introduction, high-base reach B introduction, high-base reach C introduction, and high-base reach D introduction, respectively, as the brightness data tables for the introduction part. However, when executing high-base reach A effects, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a high-base reach A title introduction, which defines a series of light emission patterns from the title display part to the introduction part of the high-base reach A effect, as the brightness data table for the title display part and introduction part. When executing high-base reach B effects, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a high-base reach A title introduction, which defines a series of light emission patterns from the title display part to the introduction part of the high-base reach A effect, as the brightness data table for the title display part and introduction part. When executing a high-base reach B performance, the game effect lamp 9 may be controlled using a high-base reach system reach B title introduction, which defines a series of light emission patterns from the title display part to the introduction part of the base reach B performance. When executing a high-base reach C performance, the game effect lamp 9 may be controlled using a high-base reach system reach C title introduction, which defines a series of light emission patterns from the title display part to the introduction part of the high-base reach C performance, as the luminance data table. Similarly, when executing a high-base reach D performance, the game effect lamp 9 may be controlled using a high-base reach system reach D title introduction, which defines a series of light emission patterns from the title display part to the introduction part of the high-base reach D performance, as the luminance data table. This approach reduces the number of luminance data tables.

[Regarding the luminance data table used for the Super Reach animation, Part 2]
The following describes the settings for the brightness data table used in the Super Reach animation. As mentioned above, the brightness data table consists of a parent table, a child table, and a grandchild table. However, in the brightness data table described below, only some of the parent, child, and grandchild tables are shown, and the other tables may be omitted.

[Brightness data table used in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects]
Figure 11-74 shows the settings of the parent table of the luminance data table: weak reach common title, which is used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command B421 that is transmitted when controlling the display of the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B effects. Figure 11-75 shows the settings of the child table of the luminance data table: weak reach common title, and Figures 11-76 to 11-78 show the settings of the grandchild table of the luminance data table: weak reach common title.

The CPU 120 for performance control, upon receiving extended command B421, specifies the parent table of the weak-reach common title based on extended command B421. As shown in Figure 11-74, the parent table of the weak-reach common title is configured to control the lamps for frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12 by referring to the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE for a maximum of 600,000 ms. Therefore, upon receiving extended command B421, the CPU 120 controls the lamps for frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12 by referring to the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE specified by the parent table of the weak-reach common title.

The child table, XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE, contains the grandchild tables of frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, along with their execution times, in the order they are referenced, as shown in Figure 11-75.

The CPU 120 for performance control first controls the lamps by referring to the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 (Figure 11-76), which is initially set in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE. As a result, frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12 are turned off for 340ms, and then frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12 are illuminated in blue for 160ms.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing for 500ms (the execution time of the grandchild table XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1), refers to the second grandchild table XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 (Figure 11-77), which is set in the child table XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE, to perform lamp control. As a result, frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and LWR2 to LWR12 light up in a blue color, and their brightness changes every 100ms.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 500ms (the execution time of the grandchild table XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2), refers to the third grandchild table XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 (Figure 11-78), which is set in the child table XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE, to perform lamp control. As a result, some of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12 turn off, while the rest light up in blue, and the areas that are off and lit change every 30ms or 20ms.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing for 230ms (the execution time of the grandchild table XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3), refers to the fourth grandchild table XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 (Figure 11-77), which is set in the child table XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE, to perform lamp control. As a result, frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and LWR2 to LWR12 light up in a blue color, and their brightness changes every 100ms.

The CPU 120 for performance control then receives an extended command (B400 or B40F) transmitted when the display control unit 123 performs display control for the introductory part of the low-base weak reach A and B performances. Upon receiving this extended command, the CPU switches to lamp control based on the brightness data table. As a result, frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and LWR2 to LWR12 remain lit in a blue color until a new extended command is received, with their brightness changing every 100ms. Upon receiving the new extended command, the CPU switches to the illumination pattern based on the received extended command.

As shown in Figure 11-74, the parent table of the common title for weak reach-type games has child tables that reference the logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacker lamps LA1-LA4. These child tables have their referenced grandchild tables set in execution order, and these grandchild tables have their referenced brightness data set in execution order. The CPU 120 for performance control controls the logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacker lamps LA1-LA4 by referring to the child tables specified in the parent table, the grandchild tables specified in the child tables, and the brightness data specified in the grandchild tables, following the same procedure as described above.

As a result, the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 will change from off to red for 500ms, then remain red for another 500ms, with their brightness changing every 100ms. After that, they will transition from red to nearly off for 230ms, then re-illuminate as red. This process of remaining red and changing brightness every 100ms continues until a new extended command is received.

Furthermore, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 change from off to white for 500ms, then remain lit in white for another 500ms, with their brightness changing every 100ms. After that, they switch from white to nearly off for 230ms, then revert to white, and continue to remain lit in white with their brightness changing every 100ms until a new extended command is received.

Furthermore, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 change from off to blue for 500ms, then remain lit in a blue color for another 500ms, with their brightness changing every 100ms. After that, they briefly go from blue to nearly off before returning to blue for another 230ms. This cycle of remaining lit in a blue color with brightness changing every 100ms continues until a new extended command is received.

As shown in Figure 11-152(A), in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B performances, the title start period is 500 ms from the start, followed by a title display period of 2200 ms, and then a title end period of 300 ms. Therefore, in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B performances, lamp control is performed based on the luminance data table: common title for weak reach systems. During the title start period (the period from the start of the title display part until 500 ms have elapsed) when the title characters move from the left side of the display area toward their fixed position, the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and LWR2 to LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 change from off to blue, the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 change from off to red, and the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 change from off to white (lamp control by the grandchild table (1) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75). Furthermore, during the title display period when the title characters remain stationary in a fixed position and the title end period when the title characters move to the right from their fixed position (the period from the start of the title display period until the end of the title display part), the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 light up in the blue color scheme for 500 ms, and their brightness changes every 100 ms (lamp control by the grandchild table (2) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75), and then, within 230 ms, they light up in the blue color scheme, then briefly go to a nearly off state, and then light up in the blue color scheme again (lamp control by the grandchild table (3) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75), and then light up in the blue color scheme again, and the state of brightness changing every 100 ms continues (lamp control by the grandchild table (4) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75). Furthermore, the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 light up red for 500ms, and their brightness changes every 100ms (lamp control by the grandchild table (2) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75). After that, they light up red again, then briefly go from red to nearly off, and then light up red again for 230ms (lamp control by the grandchild table (3) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75). After that, they light up red again, and the state of changing brightness every 100ms continues (lamp control by the grandchild table (4) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75). Furthermore, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 illuminate in white for 500ms, with their brightness changing every 100ms (lamp control by the grandchild table (2) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75). Then, within 230ms, they briefly switch from white to nearly off, before illuminating again in white (lamp control by the grandchild table (3) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75). After that, they illuminate in white again, and the brightness changes every 100ms (lamp control by the grandchild table (4) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75).

Furthermore, 3000ms after the title display section begins, the display control unit 123 receives an extended command (B400 or B40F) that is transmitted when it starts display control of the introductory section of the low-base weak reach A and B sequences. Upon receiving this command, the lamp control based on the luminance data table: common title for weak reach sequences ends, and the system switches to lamp control based on the luminance data table corresponding to the introductory section of the low-base weak reach A and B sequences.

In this way, when the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command B421, it controls the lamps based on the brightness data table: common title for weak reach systems, based on the extended command B421. As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 change their emission color and emission pattern according to the title start period, when the title characters move from the left side of the display area toward their fixed position, and the title end period, when the title characters move from their fixed position toward the right side.

[Luminance data table used in title color change effect (red)]
Figure 11-79 shows the settings of the parent table of the luminance data table: title common chance up red, which is used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command B511, which is sent when it performs display control of the title color change effect that changes the title characters from white to red. Figure 11-80 shows the settings of the child table of the luminance data table: title common chance up red. Figures 11-81 to 11-83 show the settings of the grandchild tables of the luminance data table: title common chance up red.

The display control unit 123, when controlling the display of the title color change effect in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects, which changes the title characters from white to red, sends an extended command 511 at the timing when the title characters change (1300 ms after the start of the title display part).

When the CPU 120 for performance control receives the extended command B511, it specifies the parent table (Figure 11-79) for the common title chance-up red based on the extended command 511, and then controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 by referring to the child table (Figure 11-80), the grandchild table (Figures 11-81 to 83), and the brightness data specified in the grandchild table.

As a result, frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1-LA4 will blink white at 40ms intervals for 200ms, then remain lit in a red color scheme for 1200ms, with brightness changing at 20ms intervals, and then gradually dim from red at 280ms, remaining off until a new extended command is received.

Furthermore, the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 will remain off for 200ms, then illuminate red for 1200ms, with their brightness changing at 20ms intervals. Afterward, they will gradually fade from red to red after 280ms and remain off until a new extended command is received.

Furthermore, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 blink white at 40ms intervals for 200ms, then remain lit white for 1200ms, with their brightness changing at 20ms intervals. After that, they gradually dim from white at 280ms and remain off until a new extended command is received.

As shown in Figure 11-152(B), in the low-base weak reach A and B sequences, the title display part consists of a title start period of 500ms from the beginning, followed by a title display period of 2200ms, and then a title end period of 300ms. Furthermore, when executing the title color change sequence from white to red, 800ms after the start of the title display period, the title text appears to glow for 200ms, then the title text changes to red, and after another 1200ms, the title ends.

Therefore, after the start of the title display period, when the extended command B511 is received at the timing of executing the title color change effect, lamp control is performed based on the luminance data table: title common chance up red. As a result, during the period in which the title characters appear to light up (the period from the receipt of extended command B511 until 200 ms has elapsed), the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and LWR2 to LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 flash white, the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 are off, and the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 flash white (lamp control by the grandchild table (5) specified by the child table in Figure 11-80). Furthermore, from the time the title text changes to red until the title end period begins (the period from 200ms after receiving extended command B511 until another 1200ms have elapsed), the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 light up in the red color scheme, with their brightness changing at 20ms intervals; the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 light up in red, with their brightness changing at 20ms intervals; and the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 light up in white, with their brightness changing at 20ms intervals (lamp control by the grandchild table (6) specified by the child table in Figure 11-80). Furthermore, during the title termination period (the period 1400ms after receiving extended command B511) when the title text moves from its fixed position to the right and disappears, the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and LWR2 to LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 gradually dim from red, the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 gradually dim from red, and the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 gradually dim from white (lamp control by the grandchild table (7) specified by the child table in Figure 11-80).

Furthermore, 3000ms after the title display section begins, the display control unit 123 receives an extended command (B400 or B40F) that is transmitted when it starts display control of the introductory section of the low-base weak reach A and B sequences. Upon receiving this command, the lamp control based on the luminance data table: title common chance-up red terminates, and the system switches to lamp control based on the luminance data table corresponding to the introductory section of the low-base weak reach A and B sequences.

[Luminance data table used in the title color change effect (gold)]
Figure 11-84 shows the settings of the parent table of the luminance data table: title common chance up gold, which is used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command B512, which is sent when it performs display control of the title color change effect that changes the title characters from white to gold. Figure 11-85 shows the settings of the child table of the luminance data table: title common chance up gold, and Figures 11-86 to 11-88 show the settings of the grandchild table of the luminance data table: title common chance up gold.

The display control unit 123, when controlling the display of the title color change effect in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects, which changes the title characters from white to gold, sends an extended command 512 at the timing when the title characters change (1300 ms after the start of the title display part).

When the CPU 120 for performance control receives the extended command B512, it specifies the parent table (Figure 11-84) for the title common chance-up gold based on the extended command 512, and then controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 by referring to the child table (Figure 11-85), the grandchild table (Figures 11-86 to 88), and the brightness data specified in the grandchild table.

As a result, frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1-LA4 will blink white at 40ms intervals for 200ms, then remain lit in a yellowish color for 1200ms, with brightness changing at 20ms intervals, and then gradually dim from yellow at 280ms, remaining off until a new extended command is received.

Furthermore, the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 will remain off for 200ms, then illuminate red for 1200ms, with their brightness changing at 20ms intervals. Afterward, they will gradually fade from red to red after 280ms and remain off until a new extended command is received.

Furthermore, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 blink white at 40ms intervals for 200ms, then remain lit white for 1200ms, with their brightness changing at 20ms intervals. After that, they gradually dim from white at 280ms and remain off until a new extended command is received.

As shown in Figure 11-152(B), in the low-base weak reach A and B sequences, the title display part consists of a title start period of 500ms from the beginning, followed by a title display period of 2200ms, and then a title end period of 300ms. Furthermore, when executing the title color change sequence from white to gold, 800ms after the start of the title display period, the title text appears to glow for 200ms, then the title text changes to gold, and after another 1200ms, the sequence transitions to the title end period.

Therefore, after the start of the title display period, when the extended command B512 is received at the timing of executing the title color change effect, lamp control is performed based on the luminance data table: title common chance up gold. As a result, during the period in which the title characters appear to light up (the period from the receipt of extended command B512 until 200ms have elapsed), the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and LWR2 to LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 flash white, the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 are off, and the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 flash white (lamp control by the grandchild table (8) specified by the child table in Figure 11-85). Furthermore, until the title text changes to gold and the title ends (the period from 200ms after receiving extended command B512 until another 1200ms have elapsed), the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 light up in a yellow color and their brightness changes at 20ms intervals, the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 light up in red and their brightness changes at 20ms intervals, and the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 light up in white and their brightness changes at 20ms intervals (lamp control by the grandchild table (9) specified by the child table in Figure 11-85). Furthermore, during the title termination period (the period 1400ms after receiving extended command B512), when the title text moves from its fixed position to the right and disappears, the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and LWR2 to LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 gradually dim from yellow, the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 gradually dim from red, and the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 gradually dim from white (lamp control by the grandchild table (10) specified by the child table in Figure 11-85).

Furthermore, 3000ms after the title display section begins, the display control unit 123 receives an extended command (B400 or B40F) that is transmitted when it starts display control of the introductory section of the low-base weak reach A and B sequences. Upon receiving this command, the lamp control based on the luminance data table: title common chance-up gold terminates, and the system switches to lamp control based on the luminance data table corresponding to the introductory section of the low-base weak reach A and B sequences.

[A modified example of the luminance data table used in title color change effects]
In this embodiment, the CPU 120 for performance control controls the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and LWR2 to LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 using the brightness data table: common title for weak reach sequences, regardless of whether a title change sequence is performed in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B sequences. If a title change sequence is not performed, the CPU 120 continues to use the brightness data table: common title for weak reach sequences to control the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and LWR2 to LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. In order to perform lamp control and title change effects, the system was configured to receive an extended command from the display control unit 123 specifying either "Title Common Chance Up Red" or "Title Common Chance Up Gold" at the timing of display control to change the color of the title characters. This command would then be used to control the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4, using the luminance data table: "Title Common Chance Up Red" or "Title Common Chance Up Gold," from the moment the color of the title characters changed.

In contrast, this modified version includes a luminance data table: weak reach common title (white) with luminance data set for when no title change effect is performed in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects, a luminance data table: weak reach common title (red) with luminance data set for when a title change effect is performed in when the title characters change to red in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects, and a luminance data table: weak reach common title (gold) with luminance data set for when a title change effect is performed in when the title characters change to gold. When the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects, if no title change effect is performed, it sends an extended command specifying weak reach common title (white), and the effect control CPU 120 uses the luminance data table: weak reach common title (white) to control the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker When the display control unit 123 controls the lamps LA1 to LA4 and starts display control of the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects, if it is to perform a title change effect that changes the title characters to red, it sends an extended command specifying the common title (red) for weak reach series, and the effect control CPU 120 uses the brightness data table: common title (red) for weak reach series to control the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. When the display control unit 123 performs lamp control and initiates display control of the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects, if it is to perform a title change effect that changes the title characters to gold, it sends an extended command specifying the common weak reach title (gold). The effect control CPU 120 then uses the brightness data table: common weak reach title (gold) to control the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

This allows the CPU 120 for performance control to control the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4, with corresponding illumination patterns for each situation in the title display part of the base weak reach A and B performances: when no title change performance is performed, when a title change performance is performed that changes the title text to red, and when a title change performance is performed that changes the title text to gold.

[Brightness data table used in the introductory part of the low-base weak reach A演出 (performance/animation).
Figure 11-89 shows the settings of the parent table of the luminance data table: weak reach system weak reach A introduction, which is used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command B400 transmitted when performing display control of the introduction part in the low base weak reach A performance. Figure 11-90 shows the settings of the child table of the luminance data table: weak reach system weak reach A introduction. Figures 11-91 to 11-95 show the settings of the grandchild tables of the luminance data table: weak reach system weak reach A introduction. Note that the child and grandchild tables are omitted except for some settings.

When the CPU 120 for performance control receives the extended command B400, it specifies the parent table (Figure 11-89) for introducing weak reach A based on the extended command B400, and then controls the lamps of frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 by referring to the child table (Figure 11-90), the grandchild table (Figures 11-91 to 95), and the brightness data specified in the grandchild table.

In particular, the sub-table shown in Figure 11-90 contains a sub-table with execution time corresponding to the scene change in the introductory part of the low-base weak reach A effect, as well as the corresponding emission color and emission pattern for each scene. Furthermore, the sub-tables shown in Figures 11-91 to 11-95 contain luminance data corresponding to the emission color and emission pattern for each character appearing in the scene.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, attacker lamps LA1-LA4, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change their illumination color and illumination pattern according to the scene and characters appearing in the introductory part of the low-base weak reach A演出 (performance/animation).

[Brightness data table used in the introductory part of the low-base weak reach B演出 (performance/presentation)]
Figure 11-96 shows the settings of the parent table of the luminance data table: weak reach system weak reach B introduction, which is used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: B40F transmitted when controlling the display of the introduction part in the low base weak reach B performance. Figure 11-97 shows the settings of the child table of the luminance data table: weak reach system weak reach B introduction. Figures 11-99 to 11-103 show the settings of the grandchild tables of the luminance data table: weak reach system weak reach B introduction. Note that the child and grandchild tables are omitted except for some settings.

When the CPU 120 for performance control receives the extended command B40F, it specifies the parent table (Figure 11-96) for introducing the weak reach B based on the extended command B40F, and then controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 by referring to the child table (Figure 11-97), the grandchild table (Figures 11-98 to 103), and the brightness data specified in the grandchild table.

In particular, the sub-table shown in Figure 11-97 contains a sub-table with execution time corresponding to the scene change in the introductory part of the low-base weak reach B effect, and a sub-table with emission color and emission pattern corresponding to the scene. Furthermore, the sub-tables shown in Figures 11-98 to 103 contain brightness data corresponding to the emission color and emission pattern corresponding to the characters appearing in the scene.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, attacker lamps LA1-LA4, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change their illumination color and pattern in accordance with the scenes and characters appearing in the introductory part of the low-base weak reach B演出 (performance/animation).

[Brightness data table used in the title display part of the low-base strong reach A-C effects]
Figure 11-104 shows the settings of the parent table of the luminance data table: common title for strong reach sequences, which is used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command B517 that is transmitted when controlling the display of the title display part in the low-base strong reach A to C sequences. Figure 11-105 shows the settings of the child table of the luminance data table: common title for strong reach sequences, and Figures 11-106 to 11-109 show the settings of the grandchild table of the luminance data table: common title for strong reach sequences.

When the CPU 120 for performance control receives the extended command B517, it specifies the parent table (Figure 11-105) of the common title for strong reach sequences based on the extended command B517, and then controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 by referring to the child table (Figure 11-106), the grandchild table (Figures 11-107 to 109), and the brightness data specified in the grandchild table.

In particular, the sub-table shown in Figure 11-106 contains a sub-table with execution times corresponding to the transition times between scenes in the low-base strong reach A-C sequences, such as the prologue display period, title start period, title display period, and title end period, as well as the corresponding emission color and emission pattern for each scene. Furthermore, the sub-tables shown in Figures 11-107 to 109 contain luminance data corresponding to the emission color and emission pattern for characters and other elements appearing in the scenes.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, attacker lamps LA1-LA4, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change their illumination color and illumination pattern according to the scenes and characters appearing in the title display part of the low-base strong reach A-C effects.

[Brightness data table used in the introductory part of the low-base strong reach A演出 (performance/effect).
Figure 11-110 shows the settings of the parent table of the luminance data table: Strong Reach System Strong Reach A Introduction, which is used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command B500 transmitted when performing display control of the introduction part in the low base strong reach A performance. Figure 11-111 shows the settings of the child table of the luminance data table: Strong Reach System Strong Reach A Introduction, and Figures 11-112 to 11-117 show the settings of the grandchild tables of the luminance data table: Strong Reach System Strong Reach A Introduction. Note that the child and grandchild tables are omitted except for some settings.

When the CPU 120 for performance control receives the extended command B500, it specifies the parent table (Figure 11-110) for introducing the strong reach A based on the extended command B500, and then controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 by referring to the child table (Figure 11-111), the grandchild table (Figures 11-112 to 117), and the brightness data specified in the grandchild table.

In particular, the sub-table shown in Figure 11-111 contains a sub-table with execution time corresponding to the scene change in the introductory part of the low-base strong reach A effect, as well as the corresponding emission color and emission pattern for each scene. Furthermore, the sub-tables shown in Figures 11-112 to 117 contain luminance data corresponding to the emission color and emission pattern for each character appearing in the scene.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, attacker lamps LA1-LA4, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change their illumination color and illumination pattern according to the scene and characters appearing in the introductory part of the low-base strong reach A演出 (performance/animation).

[Brightness data table used in the introductory part of the low-base strong reach B演出 (performance/effect).
Figure 11-118 shows the settings of the parent table of the luminance data table: Strong Reach System Strong Reach B Introduction, which is used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: B504 transmitted when controlling the display of the introduction part in the low base strong reach B performance. Figure 11-119 shows the settings of the child table of the luminance data table: Strong Reach System Strong Reach B Introduction. Figures 11-120 to 11-124 show the settings of the grandchild tables of the luminance data table: Strong Reach System Strong Reach B Introduction. Note that the child and grandchild tables are omitted except for some settings.

When the CPU 120 for performance control receives the extended command B504, it specifies the parent table (Figure 11-118) for introducing the strong reach B based on the extended command B504, and then controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 by referring to the child table (Figure 11-119), the grandchild table (Figures 11-120 to 124), and the brightness data specified in the grandchild table.

In particular, the sub-table shown in Figure 11-119 contains a sub-table with execution time corresponding to the scene change in the introductory part of the low-base strong reach B effect, and a sub-table with emission color and emission pattern corresponding to the scene. Furthermore, the sub-tables shown in Figures 11-120 to 124 contain brightness data corresponding to the emission color and emission pattern corresponding to the characters appearing in the scene.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, attacker lamps LA1-LA4, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change their illumination color and illumination pattern according to the scene and characters appearing in the introductory part of the low-base strong reach B演出 (performance/animation).

[Brightness data table used in the introductory part of the low-base strong reach C effect]
When the CPU 120 for performance control receives an extended command B505 that is sent when the display control unit 123 performs display control of the introduction part of the low-base strong reach C performance, it specifies the parent table (not shown) for the strong reach C introduction based on the extended command B505, and performs lamp control of frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 by referring to the child table (not shown) specified in the parent table, the grandchild table (not shown) specified in the child table, and the brightness data specified in the grandchild table.

In particular, the sub-table for the Strong Reach C introduction contains a sub-table with execution time corresponding to the scene change in the introductory part of the low-base Strong Reach C演出, as well as the corresponding illumination color and illumination pattern. Furthermore, the sub-table for the Strong Reach C introduction contains brightness data corresponding to the illumination color and illumination pattern corresponding to the characters appearing in the scene in the introductory part of the low-base Strong Reach C演出.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, attacker lamps LA1-LA4, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change their illumination color and illumination pattern according to the scene and characters appearing in the introductory part of the low-base strong reach C演出 (performance/animation).

[Brightness data table used in the strongest low-base reach animation]
Figure 11-125 shows the settings of the parent table of the luminance data table: strongest reach series strongest reach title introduction, which is used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command B600 that is sent when it performs display control of the low base strongest reach effect. Figure 11-126 shows the settings of the child table of the luminance data table: strongest reach series strongest reach title introduction. Figures 11-127 to 11-135 show the settings of the grandchild tables of the luminance data table: strongest reach series strongest reach title introduction. Note that the child and grandchild tables are omitted except for some settings.

When the CPU 120 for performance control receives the extended command B600, it specifies the parent table (Figure 11-126) for introducing the strongest reach title based on the extended command B600. It then controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacker lamps LA1-LA4 by referring to the child table (Figure 11-127), the grandchild table (Figures 11-128-135), and the brightness data specified in the grandchild table.

In particular, the sub-table shown in Figure 11-126 contains a sub-table with execution time corresponding to the time it takes for the scenes of the low-base strongest reach演出 (performance) to switch from the title display part to the end of the introduction part, as well as the emission color and emission pattern corresponding to the scene of the performance. Furthermore, the sub-tables shown in Figures 11-127 to 135 contain brightness data corresponding to the emission color and emission pattern corresponding to the characters and other elements that appear in the performance scene.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, attacker lamps LA1-LA4, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change their illumination color and pattern in accordance with the scenes and characters appearing in the introductory part of the low-base strongest reach演出 (reach)演出.

[Brightness data table used in the title display part of the high-base reach A-D effects]
Figure 11-136 shows the settings of the parent table of the luminance data table: common title for high base reach systems, which is used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command B605 that is transmitted when it controls the display of the title display part in the high base reach A to D effects. Figure 11-137 shows the settings of the child table of the luminance data table: common title for high base reach systems. Figures 11-138 to 11-140 show the settings of the grandchild table of the luminance data table: common title for high base reach systems.

When the CPU 120 for performance control receives the extended command B605, it specifies the parent table (Figure 11-136) of the high-base reach common title based on the extended command B605, and then controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 by referring to the child table (Figure 11-137), the grandchild table (Figures 11-138 to 140), and the brightness data specified in the grandchild table.

In particular, the sub-table shown in Figure 11-137 contains a sub-table with execution times corresponding to the transition times between scenes in the high-base reach A-D sequences, such as the title start period, title display period, and title end period, as well as the corresponding emission color and emission pattern for each scene. Furthermore, the sub-tables shown in Figures 11-138 to 140 contain luminance data corresponding to the emission color and emission pattern for characters and other elements appearing in the scenes.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, attacker lamps LA1-LA4, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change their illumination color and illumination pattern according to the scenes and characters appearing in the title display part of the high-base reach A-D sequences.

[Brightness data table used in the introductory part of the high-base reach A effect]
Figure 11-141 shows the settings of the parent table of the luminance data table: high-base reach system reach A introduction, which is used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command B606 transmitted when performing display control of the introduction part in the high-base reach A performance. Figure 11-142 shows the settings of the child table of the luminance data table: high-base reach system reach A introduction. Figures 11-143 to 11-145 show the settings of the grandchild tables of the luminance data table: high-base reach system reach A introduction. Note that the child and grandchild tables are omitted except for some settings.

When the CPU 120 for performance control receives the extended command B606, it specifies the parent table (Figure 11-141) for introducing the high-base reach system reach A based on the extended command B606, and then controls the lamps of frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 by referring to the child table (Figure 11-142), the grandchild table (Figures 11-143 to 145), and the brightness data specified in the grandchild table.

In particular, the sub-table shown in Figure 11-142 contains a sub-table with execution time corresponding to the scene change in the introductory part of the high-base reach A effect, as well as the corresponding emission color and emission pattern for each scene. Furthermore, the sub-tables shown in Figures 11-143 to 11-145 contain luminance data corresponding to the emission color and emission pattern for each character appearing in the scene.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, attacker lamps LA1-LA4, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change their illumination color and illumination pattern in accordance with the scenes and characters appearing in the introductory part of the high-base reach A演出 (performance/animation).

[Brightness data table used in the introductory part of the high-base reach B effect]
Figure 11-146 shows the settings of the parent table for the brightness data table: high-base reach system reach B introduction, which is used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command B607 transmitted when performing display control of the introduction part in the high-base reach B performance. Figure 11-147 shows the settings of the child table for the brightness data table: high-base reach system reach B introduction. Note that the child table is omitted except for some settings, and the grandchild table is omitted entirely.

When the CPU 120 for performance control receives the extended command B607, it specifies the parent table (Figure 11-146) for introducing the high-base reach system reach B based on the extended command B607, and then controls the lamps of frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 by referring to the child table (Figure 11-147) specified in the parent table, the grandchild table (not shown) specified in the child table, and the brightness data specified in the grandchild table.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-147 contains a grandchild table with execution time corresponding to the scene change in the introductory part of the high-base reach B effect, and emission color and emission pattern corresponding to the scene. Furthermore, the grandchild table for the introduction of the high-base reach B effect contains brightness data corresponding to the emission color and emission pattern corresponding to the characters and other elements that appear in the scene in the introductory part of the high-base reach B effect.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, attacker lamps LA1-LA4, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change their illumination color and pattern in accordance with the scenes and characters appearing in the introductory part of the high-base reach B演出 (high-base reach B)演出.

[Brightness data table used in the introductory part of the high-base reach C effect]
Figure 11-148 shows the settings of the parent table for the luminance data table: high-base reach system reach C introduction, which is used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command B608 transmitted when performing display control of the introduction part in the high-base reach C performance. Figure 11-149 shows the settings of the child table for the luminance data table: high-base reach system reach C introduction. Note that the child table is omitted except for some settings, and the grandchild table is omitted entirely.

When the CPU 120 for performance control receives the extended command B608, it specifies the parent table (Figure 11-148) for introducing the high-base reach system reach C based on the extended command B608, and then controls the lamps of frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 by referring to the child table (Figure 11-149) specified in the parent table, the grandchild table (not shown) specified in the child table, and the brightness data specified in the grandchild table.

In particular, the sub-table shown in Figure 11-148 contains a sub-table with execution time corresponding to the scene change in the introductory part of the high-base reach C effect, and a sub-table with emission color and emission pattern corresponding to the scene. Furthermore, the sub-table for the introduction of the high-base reach C effect contains luminance data corresponding to the emission color and emission pattern corresponding to the characters and other elements that appear in the scene in the introductory part of the high-base reach C effect.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, attacker lamps LA1-LA4, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change their illumination color and illumination pattern in accordance with the scenes and characters appearing in the introductory part of the high-base reach C演出 (performance/animation) sequence.

[Brightness data table used in the introductory part of the high-base reach D effect]
Figure 11-150 shows the settings of the parent table for the luminance data table: high-base reach system reach D introduction, which is used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command B609 transmitted when performing display control of the introduction part in the high-base reach D performance. Figure 11-151 shows the settings of the child table for the luminance data table: high-base reach system reach D introduction. Note that the child table is omitted except for some settings, and the grandchild table is omitted entirely.

When the CPU 120 for performance control receives the extended command B609, it specifies the parent table (Figure 11-150) for introducing the high-base reach system reach D based on the extended command B609, and then controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 by referring to the child table (Figure 11-151) specified in the parent table, the grandchild table (not shown) specified in the child table, and the brightness data specified in the grandchild table.

In particular, the sub-table shown in Figure 11-150 contains a sub-table with execution time corresponding to the scene change in the introductory part of the high-base reach D effect, and a sub-table with emission color and emission pattern corresponding to the scene. Furthermore, the sub-table for the introduction of the high-base reach D effect contains luminance data corresponding to the emission color and emission pattern corresponding to the characters, etc., that appear in the scene in the introductory part of the high-base reach D effect.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, attacker lamps LA1-LA4, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change their illumination color and pattern in accordance with the scenes and characters appearing in the introductory part of the high-base reach D effect.

[Effect 1]
In this embodiment, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance can execute a super reach performance after the decorative symbols displayed on the image display device 5 have entered a reach state. The super reach performance consists of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. The decorative symbols are displayed in a reach state before the title display part of the super reach performance, and in the title display part, the title characters corresponding to the super reach performance are displayed using the display position of the decorative symbols that have entered the reach state. In this way, when the decorative symbols enter the reach state, the player will focus on which decorative symbol has entered the reach state, but by displaying the title characters corresponding to the super reach performance using the display position of the decorative symbols that have entered the reach state in the title display part of the super reach performance, the player's attention can also be naturally drawn to the title characters, and as a result, the title can be displayed effectively.

Furthermore, since the probability of a big win differs depending on whether the decorative symbol that triggers the "reach" pattern is an odd-numbered or even-numbered symbol, players will pay more attention to which decorative symbol triggered the pattern when it occurs, and thus their attention will also be drawn to the title text.

Furthermore, before the title display part of the Super Reach animation, a large decorative symbol is displayed in a reach pattern. Afterward, the large decorative symbol displayed in the reach pattern is reduced in size to a smaller decorative symbol. The title text corresponding to the Super Reach animation is then displayed using the display position of the reduced decorative symbol. This approach attracts the player's attention by reducing the size of the large decorative symbol, and by using the display position of the reduced decorative symbol to display the title text corresponding to the Super Reach animation, it becomes easier to draw attention to the title text.

Furthermore, in the title display segment of the Super Reach演出 (Super Reach演出), the title text corresponding to the Super Reach演出 is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative symbol that has entered the reach state, making it easier to draw attention to the title text.

Furthermore, the Super Reach演出 (Super Reach演出) includes low-base weak reach A and B演出, and low-base strong reach A to C演出, which have a higher probability of winning than low-base weak reach A and B演出. The title text corresponding to low-base weak reach A and B演出, and the title text corresponding to low-base strong reach A to C演出, appear overlapping with one of the decorative symbols (the left decorative symbol) in the reach pattern, making it easier to draw attention to the title display.

Furthermore, the Super Reach演出 (Super Reach演出) includes the Low-Base Strongest Reach演出 (Low-Base Strongest Reach演出), which has a higher probability of winning than the Low-Base Strongest Reach演出 (Low-Base Strongest Reach演出). The title text corresponding to the Low-Base Strongest Reach演出 (Low-Base Strongest Reach演出) appears overlapping with both decorative symbols (the decorative symbols on both sides) in the reach pattern, allowing for a more impactful display of the title text corresponding to the Low-Base Strongest Reach演出.

Furthermore, the title text corresponding to the low-base weak reach A and B effects, the title text corresponding to the low-base strong reach A to C effects, and the title text corresponding to the low-base strongest reach effect appear overlapping with one of the decorative symbols (the left decorative symbol) or both decorative symbols (the decorative symbols on both sides) that have formed a reach pattern. After appearing in this fixed position, and even during the period they are displayed in this fixed position, they remain overlapped with a portion of the decorative symbols on both sides that have formed a reach pattern. Therefore, even after the title text is displayed in its fixed position, it is easier to draw attention to it.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, it uses a brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach series, common title for strong reach series, high base reach series) The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a common title, and in the introduction part of the super reach sequence, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach A introduction, weak reach B introduction, strong reach A introduction, strong reach B introduction, strong reach C introduction, high base reach A introduction, high base reach B introduction, high base reach C introduction, high base reach D introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach sequence, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a different brightness data table for title display than the brightness data table for the introduction part, allowing the game effect lamp 9 to illuminate in a suitable light emission mode corresponding to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed effectively.

[Effect 2]
In this embodiment, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance can execute low-base weak reach A and B performances and low-base strong reach A to C performances after the decorative symbols displayed on the image display device 5 have entered a reach state. The low-base weak reach A and B performances and low-base strong reach A to C performances each consist of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Furthermore, in the low-base weak reach A and B performances, if an odd-numbered decorative symbol is displayed in a reach pattern before the title display part, the title text corresponding to the low-base weak reach A and B performances will be displayed in the title display part using the display position of the odd-numbered decorative symbol in the reach pattern. In the low-base weak reach A and B performances, if an even-numbered decorative symbol is displayed in a reach pattern before the title display part, the title text corresponding to the low-base weak reach A and B performances will be displayed in the title display part using the display position of the even-numbered decorative symbol in the reach pattern. In the low-base strong reach A to C performances, if an odd-numbered decorative symbol is displayed in a reach pattern before the title display part, the title text corresponding to the low-base strong reach A to C performances will be displayed in the title display part using the display position of the odd-numbered decorative symbol in the reach pattern. In the low-base strong reach A to C performances, if an even-numbered decorative symbol is displayed in a reach pattern before the title display part, the title text corresponding to the low-base strong reach A to C performances will be displayed in the title display part using the display position of the even-numbered decorative symbol in the reach pattern. In this way, when a decorative symbol enters a reach state, the player will focus on which decorative symbol entered the reach state. Furthermore, in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B performances and the low-base strong reach A to C performances, the display position of the decorative symbol that entered the reach state is used to display the title characters corresponding to the low-base weak reach A and B performances and the low-base strong reach A to C performances. As a result, the player's attention can be naturally drawn to the title characters as well, and the title can be displayed effectively.

Furthermore, since the probability of a big win differs depending on whether the decorative symbol that triggers the "reach" pattern is an odd-numbered or even-numbered symbol, players will pay more attention to which decorative symbol triggered the pattern when it occurs, and thus their attention will also be drawn to the title text.

[Effect 3]
In this embodiment, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance can execute low-base weak reach A and B performances, low-base strong reach A to C performances, and low-base strongest reach performances after the decorative symbols displayed on the image display device 5 have entered a reach state. The low-base weak reach A and B performances, low-base strong reach A to C performances, and low-base strongest reach performances all consist of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Furthermore, in the low-base weak reach A and B sequences, when an odd-numbered decorative symbol is displayed in a reach pattern before the title display part, the title text corresponding to the low-base weak reach A and B sequences is displayed in the title display part using the display position of the odd-numbered decorative symbol in the reach pattern. In the low-base weak reach A and B sequences, when an even-numbered decorative symbol is displayed in a reach pattern before the title display part, the title text corresponding to the low-base weak reach A and B sequences is displayed in the title display part using the display position of the even-numbered decorative symbol in the reach pattern. In the low-base strong reach A to C sequences, when an odd-numbered decorative symbol is displayed in a reach pattern before the title display part, the title text corresponding to the low-base strong reach A to C sequences is displayed in the title display part using the display position of the odd-numbered decorative symbol in the reach pattern. The following are displayed: When an even-numbered decorative symbol is displayed in a reach pattern before the title display part of the low-base strong reach A to C performances, the title text corresponding to the low-base strong reach A to C performances is displayed in the title display part using the display position of the even-numbered decorative symbol in the reach pattern; when an odd-numbered decorative symbol is displayed in a reach pattern before the title display part of the low-base strongest reach performances, the title text corresponding to the low-base strongest reach performance is displayed in the title display part using the display position of the odd-numbered decorative symbol in the reach pattern; and when an even-numbered decorative symbol is displayed in a reach pattern before the title display part of the low-base strongest reach performances, the title text corresponding to the low-base strongest reach performance is displayed in the title display part using the display position of the even-numbered decorative symbol in the reach pattern. In this way, when a decorative symbol enters a reach state, the player will focus on which decorative symbol entered the reach state. In the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B performances, low-base strong reach A to C performances, and low-base strongest reach performances, the display position of the decorative symbol that entered the reach state is used to display the title characters corresponding to the low-base weak reach A and B performances, low-base strong reach A to C performances, and low-base strongest reach performances. This allows the player to naturally focus on the title characters as well, resulting in a suitable title display.

Furthermore, since the probability of a big win differs depending on whether the decorative symbol that triggers the "reach" pattern is an odd-numbered or even-numbered symbol, players will pay more attention to which decorative symbol triggered the pattern when it occurs, and thus their attention will also be drawn to the title text.

[Effect 4]
In this embodiment, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance can execute a super reach performance after the decorative symbols displayed on the image display device 5 have entered a reach state. The super reach performance consists of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. The decorative symbols are displayed in a reach state before the title display part of the super reach performance, and in the title display part, the title characters corresponding to the super reach performance are displayed using the display position of the decorative symbols that have entered the reach state. In this way, when the decorative symbols enter the reach state, the player will focus on which decorative symbol has entered the reach state, but by displaying the title characters corresponding to the super reach performance using the display position of the decorative symbols that have entered the reach state in the title display part of the super reach performance, the player's attention can also be naturally drawn to the title characters, and as a result, the title can be displayed effectively.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, it uses a brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach series, common title for strong reach series, high base reach series) The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a common title, and in the introduction part of the super reach sequence, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach A introduction, weak reach B introduction, strong reach A introduction, strong reach B introduction, strong reach C introduction, high base reach A introduction, high base reach B introduction, high base reach C introduction, high base reach D introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach sequence, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a different brightness data table for title display than the brightness data table for the introduction part, allowing the game effect lamp 9 to illuminate in a suitable light emission mode corresponding to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed effectively.

[Effect 5]
In this embodiment, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance is capable of executing a low-base weak reach B performance and a low-base strong reach B performance, which has a higher probability of winning than the low-base weak reach B performance. Both the low-base weak reach B performance and the low-base strong reach B performance consist of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the performance result is announced. In the low-base weak reach B performance, the ally character "Yumeyume" and the enemy character "Boingo" are used, and the ally character "Yumeyume" announces that a jackpot has been won. In the low-base strong reach B performance, the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Robo" are used, and the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" announce that a jackpot has been won. In the introductory part of the low-base strong reach B sequence, the display starts with the allied characters "Jam" and "Nana" positioned in the foreground and the enemy character "Robo" in the background. In the introductory part of the low-base weak reach B sequence, the display starts with the allied character "Yumeyume" positioned in the foreground and the enemy character "Boingo" not in the background (with the allied character "Yumeyume" and the enemy character "Boingo" facing each other left and right). By doing this, for the low-base weak reach B sequence, which has a relatively high probability of winning, the display starts with the allied characters "Jam" and "Nana," who announce the win, positioned in the foreground and the enemy character "Robo" in the background. This allows the player to empathize with the characters and intuitively recognize the high probability of winning, resulting in a more effective title display.

Furthermore, allied characters receive benefits upon victory in battle, while enemy characters do not. In the introductory part of the low-base strong reach B sequence, allied characters "Jam" and "Nana" are displayed with their backs turned towards the viewer, while the enemy character "Robo" is displayed facing the viewer, further away. This creates a confrontation between "Jam" and "Nana" and "Robo." Because the player's orientation aligns with that of "Jam" and "Nana" in the relatively high-probability low-base strong reach B sequence, it becomes easier for the player to empathize with the characters and recognize the high probability of a big win.

Furthermore, in the introductory part of the low-base strong reach B sequence, the allied characters "Jam" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Robo" are displayed in the same area as the title text in the title display sequence. Therefore, players who were focusing on the title text will naturally shift their gaze to the allied characters "Jam" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Robo" once the title text disappears.

[Effect 6]
In this embodiment, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance can execute low-base weak reach A and B performances, and low-base strong reach A to C performances, which have a higher probability of winning than low-base weak reach A and B performances and a longer performance time than low-base weak reach A and B performances. Low-base weak reach A and B performances and low-base strong reach A to C performances each consist of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. In addition, dialogue subtitles are used in all low-base weak reach A and B performances and low-base strong reach A to C performances. In low-base weak reach A and B performances, the title characters and dialogue subtitles are displayed in the title display part, and the dialogue subtitles that were displayed in the title display part are continued to be displayed in the introduction part, whereas in low-base strong reach A to C performances, dialogue subtitles are not displayed in the title display part, and only the title characters are displayed. In this way, for low-base strong reach A to C sequences, which have a relatively high probability of winning and a long execution time, the title text and dialogue subtitles are displayed in a way that avoids overlapping as much as possible. On the other hand, for low-base weak reach A and B sequences, which have a relatively low probability of winning and a short execution time, even if the display of dialogue subtitles and title text overlaps, the display of the title text is completed first, drawing attention to the dialogue subtitles as well. This allows for the optimal presentation of title text and dialogue subtitles to the player, resulting in an optimal title display.

Furthermore, in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B sequences, if both the title text and dialogue subtitles are displayed, the scene will not switch in the subsequent introductory part until the dialogue subtitles that were displayed simultaneously with the title text have finished displaying. This allows the viewer to focus on the title text first, and then on the dialogue subtitles.

Furthermore, in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B sequences, when both the title text and dialogue subtitles are displayed, the audio corresponding to the dialogue subtitles is output, while the audio corresponding to the title text is not. This makes the audio corresponding to the dialogue subtitles easier to hear.

[Effect 7]
In this embodiment, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance is capable of executing low-base strongest reach performances and high-base reach A to D performances. Both the low-base strongest reach performance and the high-base reach A to D performances consist of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part that is used until the performance result is announced. Furthermore, the titles for the low-base strongest reach演出 (high-reach演出) and high-base reach演出 (high-reach演出) A-D are composed of multiple characters ("Catch the Bakuchu with 6 people!", "Battle Reach A (Battle Reach B-D)"). In the title display part of the low-base strongest reach演出 and high-base reach演出 A-D, the title characters are displayed at an enlarged size where only a portion of the multiple characters is visible, and then the display size is gradually reduced from the enlarged size until all of the multiple characters are visible. In this way, the titles for the low-base strongest reach演出 and high-base reach演出 A-D are displayed at an enlarged size where only a portion of the multiple characters is visible, and then gradually reduced to a reduced size where all of the characters are visible, thus drawing the player's attention to the title characters.

Furthermore, before the title display part of the low-base strongest reach animation begins, the movable body 32 is moved to overlap the front of the image display device 5. During the period from when the movable body 32 moves until it returns to its initial position, a background specifically for the fall animation is displayed. When the movable body 32 returns to its initial position, the title text is displayed at an enlarged size where not all of the characters constituting the title are visible, and the display area is filled, making the background invisible. Afterward, a reduced-size title text and a background specifically for title display are displayed. In this way, the title text display method is impactful, and the background is switched simultaneously and seamlessly, allowing the title text to be presented effectively to the player.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data. In the title display part of the high-base reach A to D performances, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using a brightness data table for title display (common title for high-base reach series). In the introduction part of the high-base reach A to D performances, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction for high-base reach series reach A, introduction for high-base reach series reach B, introduction for high-base reach series reach C, introduction for high-base reach series reach D). In this way, during the title display portion of the high-base reach A-D sequences, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a different brightness data table for title display than the brightness data table used for the introduction portion. This allows the game effect lamp 9 to illuminate in a suitable light emission pattern corresponding to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed effectively.

Furthermore, in the low-base strongest reach演出 (highest reach)演出, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a single luminance data table (strongest reach title introduction) corresponding to the title display part and the introduction part. However, it is also possible to configure the low-base strongest reach演出 to control the game effect lamp 9 using a luminance data table for title display (a luminance data table composed of luminance data corresponding to the title display part of the low-base strongest reach演出 (strongest reach series strongest reach title)) in the title display part of the low-base strongest reach演出, and to control the game effect lamp 9 using a luminance data table for the introduction part (a luminance data table composed of luminance data corresponding to the title display part of the low-base strongest reach演出 (strongest reach series strongest reach introduction)) in the introduction part of the low-base strongest reach演出. With this configuration, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a luminance data table for title display that is different from the luminance data table for the introduction part of the low-base strongest reach演出, allowing the game effect lamp 9 to illuminate in a suitable illumination pattern corresponding to the title display, and as a result, the title can be displayed effectively.

[Effects and Effects 8]
In this embodiment, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance is capable of executing low-base strongest reach performances and high-base reach A to D performances. Both the low-base strongest reach performance and the high-base reach A to D performances consist of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Furthermore, the title display of the low-base strongest reach performance and the high-base reach A to D performances consists of multiple characters (e.g., "Catch the Bakuchu with 6 people!", "Battle Reach A (Battle Reach B to D)"). In the title display part of the low-base strongest reach performance and the high-base reach A to D performances, the title display part is ended by enlarging the multiple characters displayed, and the background at the start of the introduction part is displayed. In this way, the player focuses on the title characters in the title display part, and these title characters can be used appropriately to smoothly transition to the background corresponding to the next introduction part.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data. In the title display part of the high-base reach A to D performances, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using a brightness data table for title display (common title for high-base reach series). In the introduction part of the high-base reach A to D performances, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction for high-base reach series reach A, introduction for high-base reach series reach B, introduction for high-base reach series reach C, introduction for high-base reach series reach D). In this way, during the title display portion of the high-base reach A-D sequences, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a different brightness data table for title display than the brightness data table used for the introduction portion. This allows the game effect lamp 9 to illuminate in a suitable light emission pattern corresponding to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed effectively.

Furthermore, in the low-base strongest reach演出 (highest reach)演出, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a single luminance data table (strongest reach title introduction) corresponding to the title display part and the introduction part. However, it is also possible to configure the low-base strongest reach演出 to control the game effect lamp 9 using a luminance data table for title display (a luminance data table composed of luminance data corresponding to the title display part of the low-base strongest reach演出 (strongest reach series strongest reach title)) in the title display part of the low-base strongest reach演出, and to control the game effect lamp 9 using a luminance data table for the introduction part (a luminance data table composed of luminance data corresponding to the title display part of the low-base strongest reach演出 (strongest reach series strongest reach introduction)) in the introduction part of the low-base strongest reach演出. With this configuration, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a luminance data table for title display that is different from the luminance data table for the introduction part of the low-base strongest reach演出, allowing the game effect lamp 9 to illuminate in a suitable illumination pattern corresponding to the title display, and as a result, the title can be displayed effectively.

[Effect 9]
In this embodiment, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance is capable of executing low-base weak reach A and B performances and low-base strong reach A to C performances. Both the low-base weak reach A and B performances and the low-base strong reach A to C performances consist of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Furthermore, unlike the execution time of the title display part in the low-base weak reach A and B performances (T1-1 to T2) and the execution time of the title display part in the low-base strong reach A to C performances (T2-1 to T2-3), the title display part in both cases consists of a title start period from when the display of the title characters begins until they are displayed in a fixed position, a title display period when the title characters are displayed in a fixed position, and a title end period from when the display in a fixed position ends until the display ends. In both the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B performances and the title display part of the low-base strong reach A to C performances, the title characters are displayed such that the title display period is longer than the title start period and the title end period, and the title start period is longer than the title end period. By doing this, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the low-base weak reach A and B sequences and the low-base strong reach A to C sequences, the title display period at the fixed position can be made the most important to draw attention to the type of title text. Also, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the low-base weak reach A and B sequences and the low-base strong reach A to C sequences, the title start period before it appears at the fixed position can be made longer than the title end period from the time it appears at the fixed position until it ends, thus building anticipation for which title text will be displayed. Furthermore, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the low-base weak reach A and B sequences and the low-base strong reach A to C sequences, the relationship between the title start period, title display period, and title end period execution times can be made common, making the title display part easier to understand.

[Effect 10]
In this embodiment, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance can execute a super reach performance in both the normal state and the probability variation state, which is more advantageous than the normal state. Both the super reach performance in the normal state and the super reach performance in the probability variation state consist of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Furthermore, the execution time of the title display part in the super reach performance in the normal state (T1-1 to 2, T2-1 to 3, T3) and the execution time of the title display part in the super reach performance in the probability variation state (T4) are different. In both cases, the title display part consists of a title start period from when the display of the title characters begins until they are displayed in a fixed position, a title display period when they are displayed in a fixed position, and a title end period from when they are displayed in a fixed position until the display ends. In both the title display part of the super reach performance in the normal state and the title display part of the super reach performance in the probability variation state, the title characters are displayed such that the title display period is longer than the title start period and the title end period, and the title start period is longer than the title end period. By doing this, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the normal state and the probability variation state of the super reach animation, the title display period at the fixed position is made the longest, drawing attention to the type of title text. Also, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the normal state and the probability variation state of the super reach animation, the title start period before appearing at the fixed position is made longer than the title end period from the fixed position until the display ends, thus building anticipation for which title text will be displayed. Furthermore, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the normal state and the probability variation state of the super reach animation, the relationship between the title start period, title display period, and title end period execution times is made common, making the title display part easier to understand.

Furthermore, the execution time of the title display part of the Super Reach演出 (Super Reach演出) in the probability variation state (T4) is shorter than the execution time of the title display part of the Super Reach演出 in the normal state (T1-1 to T2, T2-1 to T3, T3). Because the execution time of the title display part of the Super Reach演出 performed in the probability variation state is relatively short, gameplay in the probability variation state can proceed at a good pace. On the other hand, the execution time of the title display part of the Super Reach演出 performed in the normal state is relatively long, allowing for a more substantial build-up of excitement.

Furthermore, any type of Super Reach animation performed during a probability-increasing state has a higher probability of winning a jackpot than the low-base weak reach A and B animations performed during normal play. Even if the execution time of the title display part in a Super Reach animation during a probability-increasing state is relatively short, the mere execution of the Super Reach animation can create the expectation of a jackpot.

Furthermore, while the execution time of the super reach sequence and the title display segment are the same regardless of the type of super reach sequence performed in the probability variation state, the probability of winning is higher than that of the low-base weak reach sequences A and B performed in the normal state. Even though the execution time of the super reach sequence and the title display segment are the same regardless of the type of super reach sequence performed in the probability variation state, the mere execution of the super reach sequence can create the expectation of a big win.

Furthermore, among the super reach sequences performed in the normal state, the title display time for the low-base strong reach sequences A-C, which have a higher probability of winning than the low-base weak reach sequences A and B, is set to be longer than the title display time for the low-base weak reach sequences A and B. Similarly, the title display time for the low-base strongest reach sequence, which has a higher probability of winning than the low-base strong reach sequences A-C, is set to be longer than the title display time for the low-base strong reach sequences A-C. In this way, in the normal state, the title display time for super reach sequences with a higher probability of winning is longer, allowing for more effective build-up of excitement.

Furthermore, among the super reach sequences performed in the normal state, the duration of the title display period, where the title text is displayed in a fixed position, is set longer for the low-base strong reach sequences A-C sequences, which have a higher probability of winning than the low-base weak reach sequences A and B sequences. Similarly, the duration of the title display period for the low-base strongest reach sequence, which has a higher probability of winning than the low-base strong reach sequences A-C sequences, is set longer for the title display period for the low-base strong reach sequences A-C sequences. In this way, in the normal state, the higher the probability of winning, the longer the title display period where the title text is displayed in a fixed position, allowing for more effective build-up of excitement.

[Effects and Effects 11]
In this embodiment, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance is capable of executing a super reach performance. The super reach performance consists of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part that includes an announcement of the performance result. The title display part consists of a title start period from when the display of the title characters begins until they are displayed in a fixed position, a title display period when the title characters are displayed in the fixed position, and a title end period from when the display in the fixed position ends until the display ends. In the title display part, the title characters are displayed such that the title display period is longer than the title start period and the title end period, and the title start period is longer than the title end period. By doing so, the title display period when the title characters are displayed in the fixed position is made the longest, drawing attention to the type of title characters. Also, by making the title start period until the title characters are displayed in the fixed position longer than the title end period from when the display in the fixed position ends until the display ends, it is possible to build anticipation for which title characters will be displayed. Furthermore, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the super reach performance in the normal state and the super reach performance in the probability variation state, the relationship between the execution times of the title start period, title display period, and title end period is made common, making the title display part easy to understand.

[Effect 12]
In this embodiment, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance is capable of executing the low-base strong reach A to C performances and the low-base strongest reach performance. Both the low-base strong reach A to C performances and the low-base strongest reach performance consist of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-43, in the title display part of the low-base strongest reach performance and the low-base strong reach A to C performances, the title characters can be displayed in white and in red, which indicates a higher probability of winning than the white version. In the title display part of the low-base strongest reach performance and the low-base strong reach A to C performances, a corresponding probability indication display is shown, and then the title characters are displayed in a larger size than the probability indication display. In this case, whether the title characters are displayed in white or red, the probability indication display is displayed in a common manner. In this way, the title text corresponding to the low-base strongest reach演出 and low-base strong reach演出 A to C演出 is larger in size than the expectation level indication display, and the appearance of the title text indicates the expectation level, thus attracting the player's attention. However, by displaying the expectation level indication display before the title text, attention can be drawn to the expectation level indication first. Furthermore, since the expectation level indication display is performed in the same manner whether the title text is displayed in white or red, attention can be drawn to the appearance of the title text that follows.

[Effect 13]
In this embodiment, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance can execute the Low Base Strong Reach B performance and the Low Base Strong Reach C performance, which has a higher probability of winning than the Low Base Strong Reach B performance. Both the Low Base Strong Reach B and C performances consist of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Furthermore, in the title display part of the Low Base Strong Reach B performance, a probability indication display is shown in a first mode (3.5 stars), and in the title display part of the Low Base Strong Reach C performance, a probability indication display is shown in a second mode (4 stars). At this time, the probability indication display in the title display part of the Low Base Strong Reach B performance and the probability indication display in the title display part of the Low Base Strong Reach C performance are highlighted in a common mode. By doing this, development costs can be reduced by using a common highlighting method whether the expectation level indication is displayed in the first mode in the title display part of the low-base strong reach B performance, or in the second mode in the title display part of the low-base strong reach C performance.

Furthermore, the expectation level indication is composed of multiple star-shaped objects. In the low-base strong reach B演出 (performance), the expectation level is indicated by N (where N is an integer) + 0.5 (3.5) objects, and in the low-base strong reach C演出 (performance), the expectation level is indicated by N + 1 (4) objects. Each star-shaped object is highlighted, and the highlighting is performed in a common manner whether one object or 0.5 objects are highlighted. By doing so, development costs can be reduced because the highlighting is performed in a common manner regardless of whether one or 0.5 star-shaped objects are highlighted.

Furthermore, in the expectation indication display, the time for highlighting one star-shaped object and the time for highlighting 0.5 star-shaped objects are the same. By making the time for highlighting one star-shaped object and the time for highlighting 0.5 star-shaped objects the same, development costs can be reduced.

Furthermore, the expectation level indication display outputs the same expectation level indication sound whether one star-shaped object is highlighted or 0.5 star-shaped objects are highlighted. This reduces development costs by ensuring that the same expectation level indication sound is output regardless of whether one or 0.5 star-shaped objects are highlighted.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4) using a luminance data table composed of luminance data. In the title display part of the low-base strong reach B and C performances, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a luminance data table for title display (common title for strong base systems). In the introduction part of the low-base strong reach B and C performances, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using luminance data tables for each introduction part (strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the low-base strong reach B and C performances, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a luminance data table for title display that is different from the luminance data table for the introduction part, allowing the game effect lamps 9 to emit light in a suitable illumination pattern corresponding to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed effectively.

Furthermore, in the low-base strong reach B and C effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a common brightness data table (strong base common title) in the title display part. However, in the title display part of the low-base strong reach B effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display in the low-base strong reach B effect (a brightness data table composed of brightness data corresponding to the title display part of the low-base strong reach B effect (strong reach strong reach B title)), and in the title display part of the low-base strong reach C effect, the brightness for title display in the low-base strong reach C effect is controlled using a brightness data table. The game effect lamp 9 may also be controlled using a luminance data table (a luminance data table (strong reach type strong reach C title) composed of luminance data corresponding to the title display part of the low-base strong reach C effect). With this configuration, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using different luminance data tables for title display in the title display part of the low-base strong reach B effect and the title display part of the low-base strong reach C effect. This allows the game effect lamp 9 to illuminate in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display, resulting in a favorable title display.

[Effect 14]
In this embodiment, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance is capable of executing low-base strong reach A to C performances, low-base strongest reach performances, and high-base reach A to D performances. The low-base strong reach A to C performances, low-base strongest reach performances, and high-base reach A to D performances each consist of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Furthermore, the title display part of the low-base strong reach A to C performances, low-base strongest reach performances, and high-base reach A to D performances can display an expectation level indication display consisting of multiple star-shaped objects. In the expectation level indication display, the first star-shaped object is highlighted, then, while the highlighting of the first star-shaped object continues, the second star-shaped object is highlighted, then the highlighting of the first star-shaped object ends, and the third star-shaped object is highlighted. In this way, in the expectation indicator display, the highlighting of the second star-shaped object begins before the highlighting of the first star-shaped object ends, but the highlighting of the third star-shaped object does not begin until the highlighting of the first star-shaped object has finished, making it easier to recognize the number of objects indicating the expectation of a big win.

Furthermore, in the expectation level indication display, an expectation level indication sound is output each time a star-shaped object is highlighted. After the expectation level indication sound for one star-shaped object finishes outputting, the expectation level indication sound for the next object is output. This prevents the emphasis sounds for one object from overlapping with those for the next, making it easier to recognize the number of objects indicating expectation level.

Furthermore, the expectation level indication consists of multiple star-shaped objects and the text "Expectation Level" indicating that the star-shaped objects represent expectations. The star-shaped objects are highlighted to a size that overlaps with the text "Expectation Level." This allows the highlighting of the star-shaped objects to draw attention to both the multiple star-shaped objects that make up the expectation level indication and the text indicating that the star-shaped objects represent expectations.

In this embodiment, when highlighting some of the star-shaped objects, the highlighting of the star-shaped objects is superimposed on text indicating that the star-shaped objects represent expectations. However, it is also possible to configure the system so that the highlighting of all star-shaped objects is superimposed on text indicating that the star-shaped objects represent expectations.

[Effect 15]
In this embodiment, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance is capable of executing low-base strong reach A to C performances, low-base strongest reach performances, and high-base reach A to D performances. The low-base strong reach A to C performances, low-base strongest reach performances, and high-base reach A to D performances each consist of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. In addition, it is possible to display multiple hold displays corresponding to variable displays that have not yet started, and in the title display part of the low-base strong reach A to C performances, low-base strongest reach performances, and high-base reach A to D performances, it is possible to display an expectation level indication display consisting of multiple star-shaped objects. Furthermore, in the title display part of the low-base strong reach A to C performances, low-base strongest reach performances, and high-base reach A to D performances, the hold displays are not displayed simultaneously with the expectation level indication displays. In this way, in the title display part of the low-base strong reach A-C演出, low-base strongest reach演出, and high-base reach A-D演出, an expectation indication display consisting of multiple objects is displayed, while the hold display is not displayed at the same time as the expectation indication display. This prevents the hold display from being mistakenly recognized as the expectation indication display.

In particular, the maximum number of active displays corresponding to the pending display and the started variable display will match the maximum number of star-shaped objects that constitute the expectation indication display. However, even when the maximum number of pending displays and active displays are displayed, and the low-base strong reach A-C, low-base strongest reach, or high-base reach A-D effects are executed, it is possible to prevent the system from mistakenly recognizing that the maximum number of star-shaped objects constituting the expectation indication display are being displayed for the pending displays and active displays.

Furthermore, by clearing the hold display when the monochrome display animation (where the display area is shown in a single color before the title screen begins) is executed, the hold display can be terminated without any noticeable jarring effect.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4), and in the title display part of the low-base strong reach A to C performances and high-base reach A to D performances, it uses a brightness data table for title display (common title for strong base series, high base series). The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a common title for high-base reach sequences. In the introductory parts of the low-base strong reach A-C sequences and high-base reach A-D sequences, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (strong reach A introduction, strong reach B introduction, strong reach C introduction, high-base reach A introduction, high-base reach B introduction, high-base reach C introduction, high-base reach D introduction). In this way, in the title display parts of the low-base strong reach A-C sequences and high-base reach A-D sequences, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a different brightness data table for title display than the brightness data table for the introductory part. This allows the game effect lamp 9 to illuminate in a suitable light emission mode corresponding to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed effectively.

Furthermore, in the low-base strongest reach演出 (highest reach)

[Effect 16]
In this embodiment, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance is capable of executing low-base strong reach A to C performances and high-base reach A to C performances. Both the low-base strong reach A to C performances and high-base reach A to C performances consist of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Furthermore, in the title display part of the low-base strong reach A performance/high-base reach A performance, it is possible to display an expectation level indication display consisting of a first number (3) of star-shaped objects; in the title display part of the low-base strong reach B performance/high-base reach B performance, it is possible to display an expectation level indication display consisting of a second number (3.5) of star-shaped objects which is greater than the first number; and in the title display part of the low-base strong reach C performance/high-base reach C performance, it is possible to display an expectation level indication display consisting of a third number (4) of star-shaped objects which is greater than the second number. Furthermore, the difference between the first number (3) and the second number (3.5) is the same as the difference between the second number (3.5) and the third number (4) (0.5). The difference between the expected probability of a big win when the low-base strong reach C/high-base reach C performance corresponding to the third number (4) is executed and the expected probability of a big win when the low-base strong reach B performance/high-base reach B performance corresponding to the second number (3.5) is executed is greater than the difference between the expected probability of a big win when the low-base strong reach B performance/high-base reach B performance corresponding to the second number (3.5) is executed and the expected probability of a big win when the low-base strong reach A performance/high-base reach A performance corresponding to the first number (3) is executed. In this way, when the number of star-shaped objects displayed as an indication of expectation in the title display part increases from the first number (3) to the second number (3.5), and when it increases from the second number (3.5) to the third number (4), the amount of increase in the number of star-shaped objects is the same, but the increase in the expectation of a big win is greater when it increases from the second number (3.5) to the third number (4) than when it increases from the first number (3) to the second number (3.5). Therefore, the more the number of star-shaped objects increases, the more expectation of a big win can be made to exceed the number of increased star-shaped objects, while preventing excessive expectation of a big win when the number of star-shaped objects is small.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control is capable of executing low-base strongest reach performance/high-base reach D performance, and in the title display part of the low-base strongest reach performance/high-base reach D performance, it is capable of displaying an expectation indication display composed of a fourth number (4.5) which is greater than the third number (4), and the difference between the third number (4) and the fourth number (4.5) (0.5) is smaller than the difference between the first number (3) and the third number (4) (1), and the low-base corresponding fourth number (4.5) - The difference between the expected probability of a big win when the strongest reach animation/high base reach D animation is performed and the expected probability of a big win when the low base strong reach C animation/high base reach C animation corresponding to the third number (4) is performed is greater than the difference between the expected probability of a big win when the low base strong reach C animation/high base reach C animation corresponding to the third number (4) is performed and the expected probability of a big win when the low base strong reach B animation/high base reach B animation corresponding to the first number (3) is performed. In this way, the number of star-shaped objects displayed as an indicator of expectation in the title screen section increases less when the number of stars increases from the third number (4) to the fourth number (4.5) than when it increases from the first number (3) to the third number (4). However, the increase in the expectation of a big win is greater when the number of stars increases from the third number (4) to the fourth number (4.5) than when it increases from the first number (3) to the third number (4). Therefore, the more the number of star-shaped objects increases, the more expectation of a big win can be made, even if the increase in the number of star-shaped objects is small.

Furthermore, the difference between the third number (4) and the fourth number (4.5) is 0.5, and the difference between the first number (3) and the third number (4) is 1. Therefore, when the number of star-shaped objects displayed as an indicator of expectation in the title display section increases from the first number (3) to the third number (4), an increase of 0.5 to the fourth number (4.5) creates a greater expectation of a big win than when it increases from the first number (3) to the third number (4).

Furthermore, the difference between the expected probability of winning a jackpot when the high-base reach C animation corresponding to the third number (4) is executed in the more advantageous probability-increasing state compared to the normal state, and the expected probability of winning a jackpot when the high-base reach B animation corresponding to the second number (3.5) is executed, is greater than the difference between the expected probability of winning a jackpot when the low-base strong reach C animation corresponding to the third number (4) is executed in the normal state, and the expected probability of winning a jackpot when the low-base strong reach B animation corresponding to the second number (3.5) is executed. In this way, the more advantageous probability-increasing state compared to the normal state allows players to expect a jackpot when the number of star-shaped objects displayed as an expectation indicator in the title display section increases.

[Effect 17]
In this embodiment, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance can execute low-base weak reach A and B performances, and low-base strong reach A to C performances, which have a higher probability of winning than low-base weak reach A and B performances, under normal conditions. Low-base weak reach A and B performances and low-base strong reach A to C performances each consist of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. The execution time of the title display part in low-base strong reach A to C performances is longer than that of the title display part in low-base weak reach A and B performances, and an expectation level indication display is shown in the title display part of low-base strong reach A to C performances, while an expectation level indication display is not shown in the title display part of low-base weak reach A and B performances. By doing this, the title display part in the relatively high-expectation low-base strong reach A to C sequences is longer than the title display part in the relatively low-expectation low-base weak reach A and B sequences. Furthermore, an expectation level indicator is displayed in the title display part of the low-base strong reach A to C sequences, while no such indicator is displayed in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B sequences. This allows players to intuitively perceive that the low-base strong reach A to C sequences have a higher expectation level than the low-base weak reach A and B sequences.

Furthermore, the title display portion in the low-base strong reach A-C sequences consists of a prologue display period and a title text display period (title start period, title display period, title end period). In contrast, the title display portion in the low-base weak reach A and B sequences lacks a prologue display period and consists only of a title text display period. The title text display period in the low-base strong reach A-C sequences is longer than that in the low-base weak reach A and B sequences. This design allows players to intuitively perceive that the low-base strong reach A-C sequences have a higher probability of success than the low-base weak reach A and B sequences, as the title text display period in the low-base strong reach A-C sequences is longer than that in the low-base weak reach A and B sequences.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation can execute the Low-Base Strongest Reach presentation, which has a higher probability of winning than the Low-Base Strong Reach A-C presentations, under normal conditions. The title display part in the Low-Base Strong Reach A-C presentations consists of a prologue display period and a title text display period (title start period, title display period, title end period). The title display part in the Low-Base Strongest Reach presentation lacks a prologue display period and consists only of a title text display period. The title text display period in the Low-Base Strongest Reach presentation is longer than that in the Low-Base Strong Reach A-C presentations. This allows players to intuitively perceive that the Low-Base Strongest Reach presentation has a higher probability of winning than the Low-Base Strong Reach A-C presentations.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data. In the title display parts of the low-base weak reach A and B performances and low-base strong reach A to C performances, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using brightness data tables for each title display (common title for weak reach series, common title for strong reach series). In the introduction parts of the low-base weak reach A and B performances and low-base strong reach A to C performances, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using brightness data tables for each introduction part (introduction for weak reach series weak reach A, introduction for weak reach series weak reach B, introduction for strong reach series strong reach A, introduction for strong reach series strong reach B, introduction for strong reach series strong reach C). In this way, during the title display parts of the low-base weak reach A and B sequences, and the low-base strong reach A to C sequences, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a different brightness data table for title display than the brightness data table used for the introduction part. This allows the game effect lamp 9 to illuminate in a suitable light emission pattern corresponding to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed effectively.

[Effects 18]
In this embodiment, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance can execute low-base weak reach A and B performances, and low-base strong reach A to C performances, which have a higher probability of winning than low-base weak reach A and B performances, in the normal state. Low-base weak reach A and B performances and low-base strong reach A to C performances each consist of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Furthermore, in low-base weak reach A and B performances, there are cases where it is announced that the performance result is a win, and cases where it is announced that the performance result is a miss, or cases where it develops into another super reach performance. In low-base strong reach A to C performances, there are cases where it is announced that the performance result is a win, and cases where it is announced that it is a miss. Furthermore, in the title display part of low-base strong reach A to C performances, an expectation level indication display is shown, while in the title display part of low-base weak reach A and B performances, an expectation level indication display is not shown. In this way, an expectation level indication is displayed in the title display part of the low-base strong reach A to C sequences, which may directly announce that a jackpot has been won, while an expectation level indication is not displayed in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B sequences, which do not directly announce that a jackpot has been won. This prevents the low-base weak reach A and B sequences from creating an excessive sense of anticipation.

Furthermore, in the title display portion of the low-base weak reach A and B sequences, it is possible to display the title text in a golden color, which confirms that the sequence will develop into another super reach sequence. Therefore, even in the title display portion of the low-base weak reach A and B sequences, where no expectation level indicator is displayed, the player's attention can still be drawn to the animation.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data. In the title display parts of the low-base weak reach A and B performances and low-base strong reach A to C performances, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using brightness data tables for each title display (common title for weak reach series, common title for strong reach series). In the introduction parts of the low-base weak reach A and B performances and low-base strong reach A to C performances, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using brightness data tables for each introduction part (introduction for weak reach series weak reach A, introduction for weak reach series weak reach B, introduction for strong reach series strong reach A, introduction for strong reach series strong reach B, introduction for strong reach series strong reach C). In this way, during the title display parts of the low-base weak reach A and B sequences, and the low-base strong reach A to C sequences, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a different brightness data table for title display than the brightness data table used for the introduction part. This allows the game effect lamp 9 to illuminate in a suitable light emission pattern corresponding to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed effectively.

[Effects and Effects 19]
In this embodiment, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance is capable of executing low-base strong reach A to C performances and low-base strongest reach performances. Both low-base strong reach A to C performances and low-base strongest reach performances consist of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Furthermore, low-base strong reach A to C performances and low-base strongest reach performances may be executed via a selection performance using title characters corresponding to multiple super reach performances, and it is possible to display an expectation level indication along with the title characters in the title display part and selection performance of low-base strong reach A to C performances and low-base strongest reach performances. When displaying the expectation level indication in the title display part of low-base strong reach A to C performances and low-base strongest reach performances, the expectation level indication, which consists of multiple star-shaped objects, is displayed in stages, while when displaying the expectation level indication in the selection performance, the expectation level indication, which consists of multiple star-shaped objects, is not displayed in stages. In this way, when displaying the expectation level indication in the title display part of the low-base strong reach A to C sequences and the low-base strongest reach sequence, the expectation level indication, composed of multiple star-shaped objects, is displayed in stages. However, when displaying the expectation level indication in the selection sequence, the expectation level indication, composed of multiple star-shaped objects, is not displayed in stages. Therefore, the annoyance caused by the expectation level indication being displayed in stages not only in the title display part but also in the preceding selection sequence can be eliminated.

Furthermore, the selection sequence is a sequence that changes gradually from a super reach sequence with a low probability of winning to a super reach sequence with a high probability of winning, based on the operation of the push button 31B. The time required for one step change in the selection sequence, that is, the minimum time required to switch to the title image of the next super reach sequence, may be shorter than the time required for one step to be displayed in the probability indication part of the title display section of the low-base strong reach sequences A-C and the low-base strongest reach sequence, that is, the time it takes for the star-shaped object to change from black to highlighted and then to gold. This allows for a sense of speed in the gradual changes in the selection sequence.

Furthermore, the selection animation changes one step at a time to a Super Reach animation with a higher probability of winning than the current Super Reach animation. Each step of the change increases the number of times the push button 31B needs to be pressed to advance to the next stage. This way, the higher the probability of winning in the Super Reach animation, the more the player's anticipation is heightened.

Furthermore, if the selection process chooses one of the low-base strong reach sequences A-C or the low-base strongest reach, the game will start from the title display part of that super reach sequence. This way, even if the low-base strong reach sequences A-C or the low-base strongest reach are executed via the selection process, the game will start from the title display part, making it easier for the player to determine which super reach sequence was ultimately executed.

[Effects and Effects 20]
In this embodiment, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance is capable of executing a super reach performance. The super reach performance consists of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Furthermore, after it is announced that a jackpot has been won through the super reach performance, it is possible to display title characters corresponding to the jackpot game state in the jackpot start performance. The title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed in a manner with greater movement than the title characters of the super reach performance. In this way, the situation in which the title characters are displayed in the super reach performance is one in which it is not yet known whether or not a jackpot will be won, whereas the situation in which the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed is one in which it has already been announced that a jackpot will be won, and by making the title characters of the jackpot start performance move more dramatically, it can be said that the game has been controlled to the jackpot state.

In this embodiment, the title text is displayed statically in the title display part of the Super Reach演出 (Super Reach演出) sequence. However, the title text may also be displayed in a manner that allows it to move. Even in such a configuration, displaying the title text of the Jackpot Start演出 (Jackpot Start演出) with greater movement than the title text of the Super Reach演出 (Jackpot Performance) sequence can celebrate the transition to a Jackpot game state.

Furthermore, in the title display part of the Super Reach演出 (Super Reach演出), a special background is displayed when the title text is shown (Low Base Strong Reach B and C演出, Low Base Strongest Reach演出, High Base Reach A-D). The background of the title text in the Jackpot Start演出 is displayed with greater movement than the special background for the title display in the Super Reach演出. This allows for a greater movement of the title text background in the Jackpot Start演出, celebrating the transition to the Jackpot game state.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the background image used exclusively for title display during the Super Reach sequence is a static image. However, the background image used exclusively for title display during the Super Reach sequence may also be a dynamic image. Even with such a configuration, the background of the title text in the jackpot start sequence can be displayed with greater movement than the background image used exclusively for title display during the Super Reach sequence, thus celebrating the control of the jackpot game state.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, it uses a brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach series, common title for strong reach series, high base reach series) The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a common title, and in the introduction part of the super reach sequence, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach A introduction, weak reach B introduction, strong reach A introduction, strong reach B introduction, strong reach C introduction, high base reach A introduction, high base reach B introduction, high base reach C introduction, high base reach D introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach sequence, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a different brightness data table for title display than the brightness data table for the introduction part, allowing the game effect lamp 9 to illuminate in a suitable light emission mode corresponding to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed effectively.

[Effect 21]
In this embodiment, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance is capable of executing a super reach performance. The super reach performance consists of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Furthermore, in the operation prompting performances B and D in the introduction part of the super reach performance, operation prompting characters (small) can be displayed to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. In this case, the operation prompting characters (small) are displayed in a manner that has greater movement than the title characters corresponding to the super reach performance. In this way, the operation prompting characters (small) displayed in the introduction part prompt the player to take action (operate), and by moving more than the title characters displayed in the title display part, it is possible to intuitively prompt the player to take action (operate).

Furthermore, in the introductory part of the Super Reach sequence, the operation prompting sequences B and D encourage the player to operate the push button 31B. It is also possible to display operation prompting text (large) that suggests a more favorable situation than the operation prompting text (small). Both the operation prompting text (small) and the operation prompting text (large) are displayed with greater movement than the title text corresponding to the Super Reach sequence. In this way, by making both the operation prompting text (small) and the operation prompting text (large) move more dramatically than the title text displayed in the title display part, it is possible to intuitively encourage the player to take action (operate).

In this embodiment, the title text is displayed statically in the title display part of the super reach animation. However, the title text may also be displayed in an animated manner in the title display part of the super reach animation. Even in such a configuration, displaying the small action prompt text with greater movement than the title text of the super reach animation can intuitively encourage player action (operation). Furthermore, even in such a configuration, displaying both the small and large action prompt text with greater movement than the title text corresponding to the super reach animation allows for greater movement than the title text displayed in the title display part, thereby intuitively encouraging player action (operation).

Furthermore, since the number of characters in the small prompt text (3) is less than the number of characters in the title text of the super reach animation (7-13), the content of the text can still be recognized even when the small prompt text is moved significantly.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, it uses a brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach series, common title for strong reach series, high base reach series) The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a common title, and in the introduction part of the super reach sequence, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach A introduction, weak reach B introduction, strong reach A introduction, strong reach B introduction, strong reach C introduction, high base reach A introduction, high base reach B introduction, high base reach C introduction, high base reach D introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach sequence, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a different brightness data table for title display than the brightness data table for the introduction part, allowing the game effect lamp 9 to illuminate in a suitable light emission mode corresponding to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed effectively.

[Effects and Effects 22]
In this embodiment, the CPU 120 for performance control is capable of executing a super reach performance. The super reach performance consists of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. In addition, the title display part of the super reach performance can display explanatory characters that explain the content of the super reach performance. In this case, the explanatory characters are displayed in a manner with greater movement than the title characters corresponding to the super reach performance. By doing so, the explanatory characters that are displayed additionally are made to stand out, as they are not only the title characters but also the explanatory characters.

In this embodiment, the title text is displayed statically in the title display part of the super reach animation. However, the title text may also be displayed in a dynamic manner in the title display part of the super reach animation. In such a configuration, by displaying the explanatory text with greater movement than the title text of the super reach animation, attention can be drawn to the fact that explanatory text is also included in addition to the title text.

Furthermore, since the explanatory text suggests that the Super Reach animation is advantageous, its presence can draw even more attention.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, it uses a brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach series, common title for strong reach series, high base reach series) The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a common title, and in the introduction part of the super reach sequence, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach A introduction, weak reach B introduction, strong reach A introduction, strong reach B introduction, strong reach C introduction, high base reach A introduction, high base reach B introduction, high base reach C introduction, high base reach D introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach sequence, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a different brightness data table for title display than the brightness data table for the introduction part, allowing the game effect lamp 9 to illuminate in a suitable light emission mode corresponding to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed effectively.

[Effects and Effects 23]
In this embodiment, the CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation can execute low-base weak reach A and B presentations, and low-base strong reach A to C presentations, which have a higher probability of winning a jackpot than low-base weak reach A and B presentations. Each of the low-base weak reach A and B presentations and low-base strong reach A to C presentations consists of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the presentation result is announced. The title characters corresponding to the low-base strong reach A to C presentations are displayed in a larger font size than the title characters corresponding to the low-base weak reach A and B presentations. In this way, the title characters corresponding to the low-base strong reach A to C presentations, which have a relatively higher probability of winning, are displayed in a larger font size than the title characters corresponding to the low-base weak reach A and B presentations, which have a relatively lower probability of winning. Therefore, even just from the title characters, players can intuitively recognize that the low-base strong reach A to C presentations have a higher probability of winning a jackpot than the low-base weak reach A and B presentations.

Furthermore, while the number of characters (10) in the title text corresponding to the low-base weak reach A and B sequences is greater than the number of characters (7 and 8) in the title text corresponding to the low-base strong reach B and C sequences, the display area size of the title text corresponding to the low-base strong reach B and C sequences is larger than that of the title text corresponding to the low-base weak reach A and B sequences. This arrangement allows players to intuitively perceive that the low-base strong reach B and C sequences have a higher probability of winning than the low-base weak reach A and B sequences, as each character occupies a larger display area.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data. In the title display parts of the low-base weak reach A and B performances and low-base strong reach A to C performances, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using brightness data tables for each title display (common title for weak reach series, common title for strong reach series). In the introduction parts of the low-base weak reach A and B performances and low-base strong reach A to C performances, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using brightness data tables for each introduction part (introduction for weak reach series weak reach A, introduction for weak reach series weak reach B, introduction for strong reach series strong reach A, introduction for strong reach series strong reach B, introduction for strong reach series strong reach C). In this way, during the title display parts of the low-base weak reach A and B sequences, and the low-base strong reach A to C sequences, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a different brightness data table for title display than the brightness data table used for the introduction part. This allows the game effect lamp 9 to illuminate in a suitable light emission pattern corresponding to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed effectively.

[Effects and Effects 24]
In this embodiment, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance can execute a super reach performance after the decorative symbols displayed on the image display device 5 have entered a reach state. The super reach performance consists of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. In addition, before the title display part of the super reach performance, the decorative symbols (large) are displayed in a reach state, and then the decorative symbols (large) that were displayed in a reach state are reduced in size to decorative symbols (small). At this time, at least one character of the title characters corresponding to the super reach performance is displayed at a size larger than the decorative symbols (small). In this way, at least one character of the title characters corresponding to the super reach performance is displayed at a size larger than the reduced decorative symbols (small), so that the title characters can be drawn to in the title display part.

Furthermore, each character of the title text corresponding to the Super Reach animation is displayed smaller than the large decorative symbols but larger than the small decorative symbols. This ensures that the large decorative symbols are clearly recognizable during the reach animation, while subsequently, the large decorative symbols shrink to become the small decorative symbols. The individual characters constituting the title text are then displayed larger than the small decorative symbols, thus drawing attention to the title text during the title display phase.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, it uses a brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach series, common title for strong reach series, high base reach series) The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a common title, and in the introduction part of the super reach sequence, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach A introduction, weak reach B introduction, strong reach A introduction, strong reach B introduction, strong reach C introduction, high base reach A introduction, high base reach B introduction, high base reach C introduction, high base reach D introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach sequence, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a different brightness data table for title display than the brightness data table for the introduction part, allowing the game effect lamp 9 to illuminate in a suitable light emission mode corresponding to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed effectively.

[Effects and Effects 25]
In this embodiment, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance is capable of executing a super reach performance. The super reach performance consists of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Furthermore, in the operation prompting performances B and D in the introduction part of the super reach performance, operation prompting characters (small) can be displayed to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. In addition, after it is announced that a jackpot has been won by the super reach performance, the title characters corresponding to the jackpot game state can be displayed in the jackpot start performance. The title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed larger than the operation prompting characters (small). In this way, the situation in which the operation prompting characters (small) are displayed in the super reach performance is a situation in which it is not yet known whether or not a jackpot has been won, whereas the situation in which the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed is a situation in which it has already been announced that a jackpot has been won, and by displaying the title characters of the jackpot start performance larger than the operation prompting characters (small), it can be said that the player has been controlled to the jackpot game state.

Furthermore, the title text for the jackpot start animation consists of "BIG" or "REGULAR" and "BONUS". After "BIG" or "REGULAR" is displayed at the top of the screen, "BONUS" is displayed at the bottom of the screen. After "BONUS" is displayed at the bottom of the screen, "BIG" or "REGULAR" displayed at the top and "BONUS" displayed at the bottom gradually enlarge. The text size of "BIG" or "REGULAR" and "BONUS" is smallest when they are displayed at the top and bottom of the screen, while the text size of "BIG" or "REGULAR" and "BONUS" when they are displayed at the top and bottom of the screen is larger than the text size that makes up the small operation prompt text. By doing this, the characters that make up the title text for the jackpot start animation are always displayed larger than the characters that make up the small operation prompt text, thus more effectively celebrating the establishment of the jackpot game state.

Furthermore, the smallest character in the string that makes up the title text of the jackpot start animation is larger than the largest character in the string that makes up the small prompt text. This ensures that no matter which character is focused on, the title text of the jackpot start animation is displayed larger than the small prompt text, thus more effectively celebrating the successful entry into the jackpot state.

Furthermore, it is possible to display special promotional text (large) that suggests a more favorable situation than the small promotional text. The large promotional text is displayed larger than the title text of the jackpot start animation, allowing players to perceive the favorable situation.

Furthermore, the smallest character in the large prompt text is displayed larger than the largest character in the title text of the jackpot start animation. This ensures that no matter which character is focused on, the large prompt text appears larger than the title text of the jackpot start animation, allowing the player to perceive this advantageous situation.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, it uses a brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach series, common title for strong reach series, high base reach series) The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a common title, and in the introduction part of the super reach sequence, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach A introduction, weak reach B introduction, strong reach A introduction, strong reach B introduction, strong reach C introduction, high base reach A introduction, high base reach B introduction, high base reach C introduction, high base reach D introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach sequence, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a different brightness data table for title display than the brightness data table for the introduction part, allowing the game effect lamp 9 to illuminate in a suitable light emission mode corresponding to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed effectively.

[Effects and Effects 26]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing a super reach performance. The super reach performance consists of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Furthermore, after it is announced that a jackpot has been won through the super reach performance, the title characters corresponding to the jackpot game state can be displayed in the jackpot start performance. The title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed larger than the title characters corresponding to the super reach performance. In this way, the situation in which the title characters are displayed in the super reach performance is one in which it is still unknown whether or not a jackpot will be won, whereas the situation in which the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed is one in which it has already been announced that a jackpot will be won. By displaying the title characters of the jackpot start performance larger than the title characters corresponding to the super reach performance, it is possible to celebrate that the game has been controlled to the jackpot state.

Furthermore, the Super Reach animation includes multiple types of Super Reach animations with different title texts. The title text for the jackpot start animation is displayed larger than the title text for any other type of Super Reach animation, signifying that the game has been controlled to a jackpot state.

Furthermore, the smallest character in the title text of the jackpot start animation is displayed larger than the largest character in the title text of any type of super reach animation. Therefore, no matter which character you focus on, the title text of the jackpot start animation will be displayed larger than the title text of the super reach animation, thus more effectively celebrating the establishment of the jackpot state.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, it uses a brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach series, common title for strong reach series, high base reach series) The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a common title, and in the introduction part of the super reach sequence, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach A introduction, weak reach B introduction, strong reach A introduction, strong reach B introduction, strong reach C introduction, high base reach A introduction, high base reach B introduction, high base reach C introduction, high base reach D introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach sequence, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a different brightness data table for title display than the brightness data table for the introduction part, allowing the game effect lamp 9 to illuminate in a suitable light emission mode corresponding to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed effectively.

[Effects and Effects 27]
In this embodiment, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance is capable of executing low-base weak reach A and B performances. Low-base weak reach A and B performances consist of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Furthermore, in the operation prompting performance A that is executed before the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B performances, operation prompting characters (small) that prompt the player to operate the push button 31B can be displayed. The title characters corresponding to the low-base weak reach A and B performances are displayed larger than the operation prompting characters (small). In this way, the operation prompting characters (small) are displayed before the title display part, and the title characters displayed afterward are displayed larger than the operation prompting characters (small), thereby drawing attention to the title characters.

Furthermore, after the small prompt text is displayed, the game progresses to the low-base weak reach A and B sequences, and the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B sequences begins. This arrangement allows the small prompt text to be displayed before the title display part, and the subsequent title text to be displayed larger than the small prompt text, thereby drawing attention to the title text.

Furthermore, the smallest character in the string that makes up the title text corresponding to the low-base weak reach A and B effects is displayed larger than the largest character in the string that makes up the operation prompt text (small), so that the title text can be drawn to any character the player focuses on.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, attacker lamps LA1-LA4) using a luminance data table composed of luminance data. In the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B performances, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a luminance data table for title display (common title for weak reach series). In the introduction part of the low-base weak reach A and B performances, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using luminance data tables for each introduction part (weak reach series weak reach A introduction, weak reach series weak reach B introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B performances, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a luminance data table for title display that is different from the luminance data table for the introduction part, allowing the game effect lamps 9 to emit light in a suitable illumination pattern corresponding to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed effectively.

[Effects and Effects 28]
In this embodiment, the CPU 120 for performance control is capable of executing low-base weak reach A and B performances. Low-base weak reach A and B performances consist of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Furthermore, in the operation prompting performance A that is executed before the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B performances, operation prompting characters (small) that prompt the player to operate the push button 31B can be displayed. In addition, after it is announced that a jackpot has been won by the low-base weak reach A and B performances, the CPU 120 is capable of displaying the title characters of the jackpot start performance corresponding to the controlled jackpot game state. The title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed larger than the title characters corresponding to the low-base weak reach A and B performances, and the title characters corresponding to the low-base weak reach A and B performances are displayed larger than the operation prompting characters (small). In this way, the situation in which the title text is displayed during the low-base weak reach A and B sequences indicates that it is still unknown whether or not a jackpot will be won, whereas the situation in which the title text is displayed during the jackpot start sequence indicates that a jackpot has already been announced. By displaying the title text for the jackpot start sequence larger than the title text for the low-base weak reach A and B sequences, it is possible to celebrate the fact that the game has been controlled to a jackpot state. In addition, by displaying small operation prompt text before the title display part, and then displaying the title text for the low-base weak reach A and B sequences that are displayed afterward in a larger size than the small operation prompt text, attention can be drawn to the title text for the low-base weak reach A and B sequences.

Furthermore, after the small prompt text is displayed, the game progresses to the low-base weak reach A and B sequences. The title display part for the low-base weak reach A and B sequences begins, and after it is announced that a jackpot has been won through the low-base weak reach A and B sequences, the title text for the jackpot start sequence is displayed. In this way, the small prompt text is displayed before the title display part within the sequence, and the title text corresponding to the low-base weak reach A and B sequences is displayed larger than the small prompt text, drawing attention to the title text for the low-base weak reach A and B sequences. After it is announced that a jackpot has been won through the low-base weak reach A and B sequences, the title text for the jackpot start sequence is displayed larger than the title text for the low-base weak reach A and B sequences, celebrating the transition to a jackpot state.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, attacker lamps LA1-LA4) using a luminance data table composed of luminance data. In the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B performances, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a luminance data table for title display (common title for weak reach series). In the introduction part of the low-base weak reach A and B performances, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using luminance data tables for each introduction part (weak reach series weak reach A introduction, weak reach series weak reach B introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B performances, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a luminance data table for title display that is different from the luminance data table for the introduction part, allowing the game effect lamps 9 to emit light in a suitable illumination pattern corresponding to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed effectively.

[Effects and Effects 29]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing a super reach performance. The super reach performance consists of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Furthermore, after it is announced that a jackpot has been won through the super reach performance, the title characters corresponding to the jackpot game state can be displayed in the jackpot start performance. The title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed for a longer period of time than the title characters corresponding to the super reach performance. In this way, the situation in which the title characters are displayed in the super reach performance is one in which it is still unknown whether or not a jackpot will be won, whereas the situation in which the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed is one in which it has already been announced that a jackpot will be won. By displaying the title characters of the jackpot start performance for a longer period of time than the title characters corresponding to the super reach performance, it is possible to celebrate being controlled to the jackpot game state.

Furthermore, the time from when all the characters constituting the title text of the jackpot start animation are displayed until at least part of those characters disappear is longer than the time from when part of the characters constituting the title text of the super reach animation is displayed until all of those characters disappear. By doing this, the time during which the celebratory title text of the jackpot start animation is clearly visible is longer than the time during which the title text of the super reach animation, which aims to heighten the possibility of a jackpot, is displayed, thereby providing players with a sense of satisfaction.

Furthermore, after the title text for the jackpot start animation is displayed, the title text for the jackpot start animation is switched to a small right-hand shooting promotion image and a large right-hand shooting promotion image that suggest the operation method during the jackpot game state. Additionally, after a predetermined period has elapsed since the switch to the small right-hand shooting promotion image and the large right-hand shooting promotion image, control is implemented that makes it advantageous to operate using the operation method suggested by the small right-hand shooting promotion image and the large right-hand shooting promotion image (the operation method of shooting the game ball toward the right game area 2R). Moreover, the time it takes to switch from the title text for the jackpot start animation to the small right-hand shooting promotion image and the large right-hand shooting promotion image is shorter than the time it takes to finish the title text corresponding to the super reach animation. This design allows the game to quickly switch from the title text of the jackpot start animation to the small and large right-hand play promotion images. After a predetermined period, the game will then implement controls that favor players who operate according to the suggested methods indicated by the small and large right-hand play promotion images. This prevents players from being disadvantaged by changing their operating methods during the period when the jackpot start animation title text ends.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, it uses a brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach series, common title for strong reach series, high base reach series) The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a common title, and in the introduction part of the super reach sequence, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach A introduction, weak reach B introduction, strong reach A introduction, strong reach B introduction, strong reach C introduction, high base reach A introduction, high base reach B introduction, high base reach C introduction, high base reach D introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach sequence, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a different brightness data table for title display than the brightness data table for the introduction part, allowing the game effect lamp 9 to illuminate in a suitable light emission mode corresponding to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed effectively.

[Effects and Effects 30]
In this embodiment, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance is capable of executing a super reach performance. The super reach performance consists of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Furthermore, in the operation prompting performances B and D in the introduction part of the super reach performance, operation prompting characters (small) can be displayed to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. In addition, after it is announced that a jackpot has been won by the super reach performance, the title characters corresponding to the jackpot game state can be displayed in the jackpot start performance. The title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed for a longer period of time than the operation prompting characters (small). In this way, the situation in which the operation prompting characters (small) are displayed in the super reach performance is a situation in which it is not yet known whether or not a jackpot has been won, whereas the situation in which the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed is a situation in which it has already been announced that a jackpot has been won. By displaying the title characters of the jackpot start performance for a longer period of time than the operation prompting characters (small), it can be celebrated that the game has been controlled to the jackpot state.

Furthermore, the prompt text (small) remains displayed until the prompted action is performed or until the time limit for the prompted action has elapsed. The time the title text for the jackpot start animation is displayed is longer than the time between the display of the prompt text (small) and the expiration of the time limit for the prompted action. In this way, the title text for the jackpot start animation is displayed for a longer period than the time between the display of the prompt text (small) and the expiration of the time limit for the prompted action, thus celebrating the establishment of the jackpot game state.

Furthermore, the time from when all the characters constituting the title text of the jackpot start animation are displayed until at least some of those characters disappear is longer than the time the small prompt text is displayed. This ensures that the title text of the jackpot start animation, which conveys a sense of celebration, is clearly visible for a longer period than the time the small prompt text, intended to encourage player action, is displayed, thereby providing players with a greater sense of satisfaction.

Furthermore, it is possible to display "Large" operation prompt text, which suggests a more favorable situation than "Small" operation prompt text. Small operation prompt text displays text prompting action without accompanying a promotional introductory animation, while large operation prompt text displays text prompting action after the promotional introductory animation has been executed. The duration for which the title text of the jackpot start animation is displayed is longer than the duration for which the large operation prompt text is displayed. This ensures that the display of the favorable state name, which conveys a sense of celebration, is longer than the duration for which the large operation prompt text accompanied by a promotional introductory animation is displayed, thereby providing players with a greater sense of satisfaction.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, it uses a brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach series, common title for strong reach series, high base reach series) The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a common title, and in the introduction part of the super reach sequence, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach A introduction, weak reach B introduction, strong reach A introduction, strong reach B introduction, strong reach C introduction, high base reach A introduction, high base reach B introduction, high base reach C introduction, high base reach D introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach sequence, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a different brightness data table for title display than the brightness data table for the introduction part, allowing the game effect lamp 9 to illuminate in a suitable light emission mode corresponding to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed effectively.

[Effect 31]
In this embodiment, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance is capable of executing low-base weak reach A and B performances. Low-base weak reach A and B performances consist of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Furthermore, in the operation prompting performance A that is executed before the title display part in low-base weak reach A and B performances, operation prompting characters (small) that prompt the player to operate the push button 31B can be displayed. The title characters corresponding to low-base weak reach A and B performances are displayed for a longer period of time than the operation prompting characters (small). In this way, by displaying the operation prompting characters (small) before the title display part and displaying the title characters that are displayed afterward for a longer period of time than the operation prompting characters (small), attention can be drawn to the title characters.

Furthermore, the time from when all the characters constituting the title are displayed until at least some of those characters disappear is longer than the time the prompt text (small) is displayed. This ensures that the title is clearly visible for a longer period than the prompt text, which is intended to encourage the player to take action, thus drawing the player's attention to the title.

Furthermore, it is possible to display "Large" prompt text (which suggests a more favorable situation than "Small" prompt text). "Small" prompt text displays characters prompting action without an introductory animation, while "Large" prompt text displays characters prompting action after an introductory animation has been performed. The title text is displayed for a longer period than the "Large" prompt text. This ensures that the title is displayed for a longer time than the "Large" prompt text (which includes an introductory animation), thereby drawing attention to the title text.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, attacker lamps LA1-LA4) using a luminance data table composed of luminance data. In the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B performances, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a luminance data table for title display (common title for weak reach series). In the introduction part of the low-base weak reach A and B performances, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using luminance data tables for each introduction part (weak reach series weak reach A introduction, weak reach series weak reach B introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B performances, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a luminance data table for title display that is different from the luminance data table for the introduction part, allowing the game effect lamps 9 to emit light in a suitable illumination pattern corresponding to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed effectively.

[Effects and Effects 32]
In this embodiment, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance is capable of executing low-base weak reach A and B performances. Low-base weak reach A and B performances consist of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Furthermore, in the operation prompting performance A that is executed before the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B performances, operation prompting characters (small) that prompt the player to operate the push button 31B can be displayed. In addition, after it is announced that a jackpot has been won by the low-base weak reach A and B performances, the CPU 120 can display the title characters of the jackpot start performance corresponding to the controlled jackpot game state. The title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed for a longer period of time than the title characters corresponding to the low-base weak reach A and B performances, and the title characters corresponding to the low-base weak reach A and B performances are displayed for a longer period of time than the operation prompting characters (small). In this way, the situation in which the title text is displayed during the low-base weak reach A and B sequences is one in which it is still unknown whether or not a jackpot will be won, whereas the situation in which the title text is displayed during the jackpot start sequence is one in which it has already been announced that a jackpot will be won. By displaying the title text for the jackpot start sequence for a longer period of time than the title text for the low-base weak reach A and B sequences, it is possible to celebrate the fact that the game has been controlled to a jackpot state. In addition, by displaying small operation prompt text before the title display part, and then displaying the title text for the low-base weak reach A and B sequences for a longer period of time than the small operation prompt text, attention can be drawn to the title text for the low-base weak reach A and B sequences.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, attacker lamps LA1-LA4) using a luminance data table composed of luminance data. In the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B performances, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a luminance data table for title display (common title for weak reach series). In the introduction part of the low-base weak reach A and B performances, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using luminance data tables for each introduction part (weak reach series weak reach A introduction, weak reach series weak reach B introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B performances, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a luminance data table for title display that is different from the luminance data table for the introduction part, allowing the game effect lamps 9 to emit light in a suitable illumination pattern corresponding to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed effectively.

[Effects and Effects 33]
In this embodiment, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance can execute low-base weak reach A and B performances and low-base strong reach A to C performances in the normal state, and can execute high-base reach A to D performances in the probability variation state, which is more advantageous than the normal state. The low-base weak reach A and B performances, low-base strong reach A to C performances, and high-base reach A to D performances in the probability variation state all consist of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Furthermore, the low-base strong reach A to C performances have a higher probability of winning a jackpot than the low-base weak reach A and B performances, the high-base reach B to D performances have a higher probability of winning a jackpot than the high-base reach A performance, and the high-base reach A performance has a higher probability of winning a jackpot than the low-base weak reach A and B performances. Furthermore, the title display parts for the low-base strong reach A-C, high-base reach A, and high-base reach B-D sequences will display an indication of the expected probability, while the title display parts for the low-base weak reach A and B sequences will not display an indication of the expected probability. In this way, since the low-base weak reach A and B sequences in the normal state have a lower probability of winning than the low-base strong reach A-C sequences in the normal state, an indication of the expected probability will be displayed for the low-base strong reach A-C sequences, but not for the low-base weak reach A and B sequences, thereby preventing players from having excessive expectations of winning with the low-base weak reach A and B sequences. On the other hand, while the high-base reach A sequence in the probability variation state, which is more advantageous than the normal state, has a lower probability of winning than the high-base reach B to D sequences in the probability variation state, it has a higher probability of winning than the low-base weak reach A and B sequences in the normal state. Therefore, by displaying an expectation indicator for both the high-base reach A sequence and the high-base reach B to D sequences, it is possible to make players expect a win in both the high-base reach A sequence and the high-base reach B to D sequences.

[Effects 34]
In this embodiment, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance can execute super reach performances in both the normal state and the probability variation state, which is more advantageous than the normal state. Both the super reach performance in the normal state and the super reach performance in the probability variation state consist of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. The title display part of the super reach performance in the probability variation state is shorter than the title display part of the super reach performance in the normal state. In this way, the title display part of the super reach performance in the probability variation state is shorter than the title display part of the super reach performance in the normal state, allowing the game to proceed smoothly in the probability variation state.

Furthermore, even if the frequency of Super Reach animations occurring in the probability variation state is higher than in the normal state, the title display portion of the Super Reach animation in the probability variation state is shorter than that of the Super Reach animation in the normal state, allowing for a smoother and more engaging gameplay experience in the probability variation state.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LED LWL1 to LWL12, frame LED LWR2 to LWR12, logo LED LL1 to LL4, decorative LED LS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4), and in the title display part of the super reach performance in the normal state and the super reach performance in the probability variation state, it uses brightness data tables for title display (common title for weak reach series, common title for strong reach series, high base reach series) The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a common title, and in the introductory part of the super reach演出 (super reach) in the normal state and the super reach演出 (super reach) in the probability variation state, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (weak reach type weak reach A introduction, weak reach type weak reach B introduction, strong reach type strong reach A introduction, strong reach type strong reach B introduction, strong reach type strong reach C introduction, high base reach type reach A introduction, high base reach type reach B introduction, high base reach type reach C introduction, high base reach type reach D introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach演出, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, allowing the game effect lamp 9 to illuminate in a suitable illumination mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed effectively.

[Effects and Effects 35]
In this embodiment, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance is capable of executing low-base strong reach A to C performances and low-base strongest reach performances, which have a higher probability of winning a jackpot than low-base strong reach A to C performances. Both low-base strong reach A to C performances and low-base strongest reach performances consist of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Furthermore, the microcomputer 100 for game control controls the player to a time-saving state B (playtime), which is more advantageous than the normal state, if it has performed 900 variable displays without being controlled to win a jackpot in the normal state. Furthermore, in the title display part of the low-base strong reach A to C performances, the title text is displayed in a manner that moves from the left side of the display area to the center, and in the title display part of the low-base strongest reach performance, the title text is displayed in a manner that changes from enlarged to reduced. Additionally, when controlled to time-saving state B (playtime), in the playtime start performance, the title text of the playtime start performance is displayed in the same manner as the title display part of the low-base strongest reach performance, where the title text changes from enlarged to reduced. In this way, when controlled to time-saving state B (playtime), the title text of the playtime start performance is displayed in the same manner as the title text of the low-base strongest reach performance, which has a relatively high expectation of a big win, thus making it clear that time-saving state B (playtime) is highly advantageous.

Furthermore, when the title text is erased during the playtime start animation, it is erased in the same way as when the title text is erased in the title display part of the low-base strongest reach animation, where the title text enlarges as it disappears. By doing this, even when the title text is erased during the playtime start animation, it is erased in the same way as when the title text is erased in the low-base strongest reach animation, which has a relatively high probability of winning a jackpot. This allows players to perceive the time-saving state B (playtime) as being highly advantageous.

[Effect 36]
In this embodiment, the CPU 120 for performance control is capable of executing a super reach performance. The super reach performance consists of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 100 controls the game to a time-saving state B (playtime), which is more advantageous than the normal state, when it has performed 900 variable displays without being controlled to a jackpot in the normal state. When controlled to time-saving state B (playtime), the title characters of the playtime start performance are displayed in the playtime start performance, and the size of the characters that make up the title characters of the playtime start performance is larger than the size of the characters that make up the title characters corresponding to the super reach performance. In this way, the situation in which the title characters are displayed in the super reach performance is a situation in which it is not yet known whether or not a jackpot will occur, whereas the title characters of the playtime start performance are a situation in which the game is controlled to time-saving state B (playtime), and the characters that make up the title characters of the playtime start performance are displayed larger than the characters that make up the title characters corresponding to the super reach performance, so that the game can celebrate being controlled to time-saving state B (playtime).

Furthermore, the Super Reach演出 (Super Reach演出) includes multiple types of Super Reach演出 with different title characters. The characters constituting the title of the Playtime Start演出 are larger than the characters constituting the title of any of the other Super Reach演出 types. This ensures that the characters constituting the Playtime Start演出's title are displayed larger than those constituting the title of any of the other Super Reach演出 types, thus celebrating the entry into the Time-Saving State B (Playtime).

Furthermore, the smallest character in the title text of the playtime start animation is larger than the largest character in the title text corresponding to any type of super reach animation. This ensures that, regardless of which character is focused on, the playtime start animation title text is displayed larger than the title text corresponding to the super reach animation, thus more effectively celebrating the entry into the time-saving state B (playtime).

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, it uses a brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach series, common title for strong reach series, high base reach series) The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a common title, and in the introduction part of the super reach sequence, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach A introduction, weak reach B introduction, strong reach A introduction, strong reach B introduction, strong reach C introduction, high base reach A introduction, high base reach B introduction, high base reach C introduction, high base reach D introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach sequence, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a different brightness data table for title display than the brightness data table for the introduction part, allowing the game effect lamp 9 to illuminate in a suitable light emission mode corresponding to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed effectively.

[Effect 37]
In this embodiment, the CPU 120 for performance control is capable of executing a super reach performance. The super reach performance consists of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 100 controls the game to a time-saving state B (playtime), which is more advantageous than the normal state, when it has performed 900 variable displays without being controlled to a jackpot in the normal state. When controlled to time-saving state B (playtime), the title characters of the playtime start performance are displayed in the playtime start performance, and the display time of the playtime start performance title characters is longer than the display time of the title characters corresponding to the super reach performance. In this way, the situation in which the title characters are displayed in the super reach performance is a situation in which it is not yet known whether or not a jackpot will occur, whereas the title characters of the playtime start performance are a situation in which the game is controlled to time-saving state B (playtime), and since the title characters of the playtime start performance are displayed for longer than the title characters corresponding to the super reach performance, it can be celebrated that the game is controlled to time-saving state B (playtime).

Furthermore, the time from when all the characters constituting the title text of the playtime start animation are displayed until at least part of those characters disappear is longer than the time from when part of the characters constituting the title text of the super reach animation is displayed until all of those characters disappear. This ensures that the time the title text of the playtime start animation, which conveys a sense of celebration, is clearly visible is longer than the time the title text of the super reach animation, which aims to heighten the possibility of a big win, is displayed, thereby providing players with a greater sense of satisfaction.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, it uses a brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach series, common title for strong reach series, high base reach series) The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a common title, and in the introduction part of the super reach sequence, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach A introduction, weak reach B introduction, strong reach A introduction, strong reach B introduction, strong reach C introduction, high base reach A introduction, high base reach B introduction, high base reach C introduction, high base reach D introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach sequence, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a different brightness data table for title display than the brightness data table for the introduction part, allowing the game effect lamp 9 to illuminate in a suitable light emission mode corresponding to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed effectively.

[Effects and Effects 38]
In this embodiment, the CPU 120 for performance control is capable of executing a super reach performance. The super reach performance consists of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 100 controls the game to a time-saving state B (playtime), which is more advantageous than the normal state, when it has performed 900 variable displays without being controlled to a jackpot in the normal state. In addition, in the normal state, it is possible to display characters indicating the number of remaining spins until the game switches to time-saving state B (playtime). The size of the characters that make up the title characters corresponding to the super reach performance is larger than the size of the characters that make up the number of remaining spins until playtime. In this way, the title characters corresponding to the super reach performance are displayed larger than the characters that make up the number of remaining spins until playtime, so that the title characters corresponding to the super reach performance can be made to attract attention.

Furthermore, the Super Reach演出 (Super Reach演出) includes low-base weak reach A and B演出, and low-base strong reach A to C演出, which have a higher probability of winning than low-base weak reach A and B演出. The remaining number of spins until the playtime bonus is displayed during the execution of low-base weak reach A and B演出, but not during the execution of low-base strong reach A to C演出. This allows players to be aware of the remaining spins until playtime bonus by displaying the remaining spins during low-base weak reach A and B演出, which have a lower probability of winning, while allowing them to focus on the content of the演出 by not displaying the remaining spins during low-base strong reach A to C演出, which have a higher probability of winning. Additionally, since playtime bonuses are more likely to be favorable than in normal mode, this helps to mitigate the player's disappointment when the remaining spins until playtime bonus are few.

Furthermore, if the game progresses from the selection sequence to the low-base strong reach sequences A-C without going through the low-base weak reach sequences A and B, the remaining number of spins until the playtime bonus is not displayed during the selection sequence. This prevents the selection sequence, which guarantees a super reach sequence of low-base strong reach sequences A-C or higher, from being interrupted by the remaining spins until the playtime bonus, and also mitigates the player's disappointment when the remaining spins until the playtime bonus state B are few.

Furthermore, if a jackpot is announced during the low-base strong reach A-C sequence, the game will remain in the jackpot state without displaying the remaining spins until the playtime bonus again. Conversely, if a miss is announced during the low-base strong reach A-C sequence, the remaining spins until the playtime bonus will be displayed again after the sequence ends. This approach mitigates the player's disappointment when the remaining spins until playtime bonus are low, by not displaying the remaining spins until playtime bonus when a jackpot is announced during the low-base strong reach A-C sequence. Additionally, if a miss is announced during the low-base strong reach A-C sequence, the remaining spins until playtime bonus will be displayed again after the sequence ends, providing a quicker sense of relief when the remaining spins until playtime bonus are low.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, it uses a brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach series, common title for strong reach series, high base reach series) The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a common title, and in the introduction part of the super reach sequence, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach A introduction, weak reach B introduction, strong reach A introduction, strong reach B introduction, strong reach C introduction, high base reach A introduction, high base reach B introduction, high base reach C introduction, high base reach D introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach sequence, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a different brightness data table for title display than the brightness data table for the introduction part, allowing the game effect lamp 9 to illuminate in a suitable light emission mode corresponding to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed effectively.

[Effects and Effects 39]
In this embodiment, the CPU 120 for performance control is capable of executing a super reach performance. The super reach performance consists of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Furthermore, the microcomputer 100 for game control controls the game to a time-saving state B (playtime), which is more advantageous than the normal state, when it has performed 900 variable displays without being controlled to a jackpot in the normal state. In addition, in the operation prompting performances A to D that are executed at timings related to the super reach performance, operation prompting characters (small) can be displayed to encourage the player to operate the push button 31B. Furthermore, in the normal state, it is possible to display characters indicating the number of plays remaining until the game is controlled to time-saving state B (playtime). The size of the characters that make up the operation prompting characters (small) is larger than the size of the characters that make up the number of plays remaining until playtime. In this way, the operation prompting characters (small) are displayed larger than the characters that make up the number of plays remaining until playtime, so the player's attention can be drawn to the operation prompting characters (small), and the player can be effectively encouraged to take action (operate).

Furthermore, when executing the low-base strong reach sequences A through C, if the small operation prompt text is displayed during the operation prompt sequence A, which is performed before the title display part, the remaining number of spins until the playtime bonus will be displayed simultaneously. However, if the small operation prompt text is displayed during the operation prompt sequence D, which is performed at the end of the introductory part, the remaining number of spins until the playtime bonus will not be displayed. This arrangement allows the player to be aware of the remaining spins until the playtime bonus by displaying both the small operation prompt text and the remaining number of spins until the playtime bonus before progressing to the low-base strong reach sequences A through C. By not displaying the remaining number of spins until the playtime bonus during the introductory part's operation prompt text, the player's attention can be drawn to whether or not a big win is being announced.

Furthermore, when executing the low-base strong reach A-C sequences, in the operation prompt sequence A, which is performed before the title display part, only the small operation prompt text (small) is displayed, while in the operation prompt sequence D, which is performed at the end of the introduction part, both the small and large operation prompt text can be displayed. In the low-base strong reach A-C sequences, when the large operation prompt text is displayed, the remaining number of spins until the playtime bonus is not displayed simultaneously. This allows players to focus not only on whether or not a jackpot is announced, but also on the fact that the large operation prompt text is displayed, suggesting a more favorable situation.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for controlling the effects controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data. In the title display part of the super reach effect, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using a brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach series, common title for strong reach series). In the introduction part of the super reach effect, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction for weak reach series weak reach A, introduction for weak reach series weak reach B, introduction for strong reach series strong reach A, introduction for strong reach series strong reach B, introduction for strong reach series strong reach C). In this way, during the title display part of the super reach animation, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a different brightness data table for title display than the brightness data table used for the introduction part. This allows the game effect lamp 9 to illuminate in a suitable light emission pattern corresponding to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed effectively.

[Effects 40]
In this embodiment, the CPU 120 for performance control is capable of executing a super reach performance. The super reach performance consists of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Furthermore, the microcomputer 100 for game control, when it has performed 900 variable displays without being controlled to a jackpot in the normal state, controls the game to a time-saving state B (playtime) which is more advantageous than the normal state. Furthermore, after it is announced that a jackpot has been won by the super reach performance, it is possible to display the title characters of the jackpot start performance corresponding to the controlled jackpot game state. Furthermore, in the normal state, it is possible to display characters indicating the number of plays remaining until playtime, which indicates the number of plays remaining until playtime is activated. And, before displaying the title characters of the jackpot start performance, the characters indicating the number of plays remaining until playtime are erased, and the size of the characters that make up the title characters of the jackpot start performance is larger than the size of the characters that make up the characters indicating the number of plays remaining until playtime. By doing this, the situation in which the title text of the jackpot start animation is displayed is already after the announcement that a jackpot has been won, and the text indicating the remaining number of plays until the playtime bonus is no longer needed. Therefore, the text indicating the remaining number of plays until the playtime bonus is removed before the title text of the jackpot start animation is displayed, and the characters that make up the title text of the jackpot start animation are displayed larger than the characters that make up the text indicating the remaining number of plays until the playtime bonus, thus celebrating the fact that the game has been controlled to a jackpot state.

Furthermore, regardless of the remaining number of spins until the shortened playtime state B (playtime), the size of the characters in the remaining spin count text remains the same. However, the size of the characters in the title text of the jackpot start animation is larger than the size of the characters in the remaining spin count text. This ensures that, regardless of the remaining spins until shortened playtime state B (playtime), the characters in the title text of the jackpot start animation are displayed larger than the characters in the remaining spin count text, thus celebrating the jackpot game state.

Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 100, in the variable display triggered by the initial entry of a game ball into the first and second starting entry points during the shortened time state B (playtime), uses a shortened time B start variation pattern with a longer variation duration than the normally used variation pattern during shortened time state B (playtime). In this way, the playtime start animation can be executed during the first variation in shortened time state B (playtime) with a variation period corresponding to the shortened time B start variation pattern.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for controlling the effects controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data. In the title display part of the super reach effect, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using a brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach series, common title for strong reach series). In the introduction part of the super reach effect, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction for weak reach series weak reach A, introduction for weak reach series weak reach B, introduction for strong reach series strong reach A, introduction for strong reach series strong reach B, introduction for strong reach series strong reach C). In this way, during the title display part of the super reach animation, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a different brightness data table for title display than the brightness data table used for the introduction part. This allows the game effect lamp 9 to illuminate in a suitable light emission pattern corresponding to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed effectively.

[Effects 41]
In this embodiment, the CPU 120 for performance control is capable of executing low-base weak reach A and B performances. Low-base weak reach A and B performances consist of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Furthermore, it is possible to change the title characters corresponding to the low-base weak reach A and B performances from a white form to a red or gold form. When the title characters are changed from a white form to a red or gold form in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B performances, the time the title characters are displayed in the red or gold form is longer than the time the title characters are displayed in the white form. In this way, when the title characters are changed from a white form to a red or gold form in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B performances, the red or gold form, i.e., the title characters in the changed form, is displayed for a longer time than the white form, i.e., the title characters in the original form, thus ensuring that the change from white to red or gold is reliably recognized.

Furthermore, in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B sequences, there are cases where the title text changes from white to red or gold, and cases where it remains white. When the title text changes from white to red or gold, it changes to red or gold and a specific sound is output when time t1 has elapsed from the start of the title display period. When the title text remains white and does not change, it remains white and a specific sound is output when time t1 has elapsed from the start of the title display period. In this way, a specific sound is output when the title text corresponding to the low-base weak reach A and B sequences changes from white to red or gold at a specific timing, and also when it remains white and does not change at a specific timing. Therefore, the output of the specific sound can create the expectation that the title text will change to red or gold.

Furthermore, when changing the title text corresponding to the low-base weak reach A and B effects from white to other forms, a specific sound is output whether the text changes to red or gold. This allows the player to focus on which form the text will change to by using the specific sound.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, attacker lamps LA1-LA4) using a luminance data table composed of luminance data. In the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B performances, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a luminance data table for title display (common title for weak reach series). In the introduction part of the low-base weak reach A and B performances, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using luminance data tables for each introduction part (weak reach series weak reach A introduction, weak reach series weak reach B introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B performances, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a luminance data table for title display that is different from the luminance data table for the introduction part, allowing the game effect lamps 9 to emit light in a suitable illumination pattern corresponding to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed effectively.

[Effects 42]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing low-base weak reach A and B performances. Low-base weak reach A and B performances consist of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Furthermore, it is possible to change the title characters corresponding to low-base weak reach A and B performances from a white form to a red form, or to a gold form that suggests a higher probability of winning than the red form. In the title display part of low-base weak reach A and B performances, in any case when changing the title characters from a white form to a red form or a gold form, the display is made such that the white form is changed to a common display form before changing to the red form or the gold form. In this way, in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects, whether the title text changes from white to red or from white to gold, it changes to a common display mode before changing to the red or gold mode. By changing from white to the common display mode, the player can expect the gold mode, which has a higher probability of winning than the red mode, to change until the common display mode changes to the red or gold mode.

Furthermore, a common display method involves illuminating the characters that make up the title, changing to either a red or gold color when the light is clear. This method enhances the effect of the title characters changing to either a red or gold color as they illuminate.

[Effect 43]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing low-base weak reach A and B performances. The low-base weak reach A and B performances consist of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. The performance control CPU 120 also controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data. Furthermore, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance controls the game effect lamp 9 using a common brightness data table for the title display part (common title for weak reach series) in both the title display part of the low-base weak reach A performance and the title display part of the low-base weak reach B performance. It also controls the game effect lamp 9 using a brightness data table for the low-base weak reach A performance (weak reach series weak reach A introduction) in the introduction part of the low-base weak reach A performance, and controls the game effect lamp 9 using a brightness data table for the low-base weak reach B performance (weak reach series weak reach B introduction) in the introduction part of the low-base weak reach B performance. In this way, by using a common brightness data table for the title display part for two different super reach performances, an increase in cost and capacity can be prevented. By using a brightness data table corresponding to each introductory part, the period until it is announced whether or not it will be a jackpot can be appropriately built up, resulting in a suitable title display.

[Effects 44]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing low-base weak reach A and B performances, and low-base strong reach A to C performances, which have a higher probability of winning than low-base weak reach A and B performances. Each of the low-base weak reach A and B performances and low-base strong reach A to C performances consists of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. The performance control CPU 120 also controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LED LWL1 to LWL12, frame LED LWR2 to LWR12, logo LED LL1 to LL4, decorative LED LS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data. Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control controls the game effect lamp 9 using a common brightness data table for the title display part (common title for weak reach series) in both the title display part of the low-base weak reach A performance and the title display part of the low-base weak reach B performance, and also controls the game effect lamp 9 using a common brightness data table for the title display part (common title for strong reach series) in both the title display part of the low-base strong reach A performance, the title display part of the low-base strong reach B performance and the title display part of the low-base strong reach C performance, and in the introduction part of the low-base weak reach A performance, it uses a brightness data table for the low-base weak reach A performance (introduction for weak reach series weak reach A) The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the following: In the introductory part of the low-base weak reach B performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for the low-base weak reach B performance (weak reach series weak reach B introduction); In the introductory part of the low-base strong reach A performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for the low-base strong reach A performance (strong reach series strong reach A introduction); In the introductory part of the low-base strong reach B performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for the low-base strong reach B performance (strong reach series strong reach B introduction); and In the introductory part of the low-base strong reach C performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for the low-base strong reach C performance (strong reach series strong reach C introduction). By doing this, the brightness data table corresponding to the title display part is made common for the two types of super reach sequences with high expectations and the two types of super reach sequences with low expectations, thereby preventing an increase in cost and capacity. Furthermore, by using a brightness data table corresponding to each sequence for the introduction part, the period until the announcement of whether or not it will be a jackpot can be appropriately built up, resulting in an appropriate title display.

[Effects and Effects 45]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing low-base weak reach A and B performances, low-base strong reach A to C performances which have a higher probability of winning than low-base weak reach A and B performances, and low-base strongest reach performances which have an even higher probability of winning than low-base strong reach A to C performances. Each of the low-base weak reach A and B performances, low-base strong reach A to C performances and low-base strongest reach performances consists of a title display part which displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part which is used until the performance result is announced. The performance control CPU 120 also controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LED LWL1 to LWL12, frame LED LWR2 to LWR12, logo LED LL1 to LL4, decorative LED LS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data. Furthermore, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance controls the game effect lamp 9 using a common brightness data table for the title display part (common title for weak reach series) in both the title display part of the low-base weak reach A performance and the title display part of the low-base weak reach B performance, and controls the game effect lamp 9 using a common brightness data table for the title display part (common title for strong reach series) in both the title display part of the low-base strong reach A performance, the title display part of the low-base strong reach B performance and the title display part of the low-base strong reach C performance, and controls the game effect lamp 9 using a common brightness data table for the title display part (common title for strong reach series) in the title display part of the low-base strongest reach performance, and controls the game effect lamp 9 using a brightness data table for the title display of the low-base strongest reach performance (strongest reach series strongest reach title) in the introduction part of the low-base weak reach A performance. The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the (Introduction of Reach A) method, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for the low-base weak reach B performance (Weak Reach System Weak Reach B Introduction) in the introduction part of the low-base strong reach A performance (Strong Reach System Strong Reach A Introduction) in the introduction part of the low-base strong reach B performance (Strong Reach System Strong Reach B Introduction) in the introduction part of the low-base strong reach B performance (Strong Reach System Strong Reach B Introduction) in the brightness data table for the low-base strong reach B performance (Strong Reach System Strong Reach B Introduction) in the introduction part of the low-base strong reach C performance (Strong Reach System Strong Reach C Introduction) in the brightness data table for the low-base strong reach C performance (Strong Reach System Strong Reach Introduction) in the introduction part of the low-base strongest reach performance (Strongest Reach System Strongest Reach Introduction) in the brightness data table for the low-base strongest reach performance (Strongest Reach System Strongest By doing this, the brightness data table corresponding to the title display part is common to the two types of super reach sequences with high expectations and the two types of super reach sequences with low expectations, thereby preventing an increase in cost and capacity. By using a brightness data table corresponding to each sequence for the introduction part, the period until the announcement of whether or not it will be a jackpot can be appropriately built up, resulting in a suitable title display. Furthermore, the strongest low-base reach sequence with the highest expectations has dedicated brightness data tables for both the title display part and the introduction part, enhancing its appeal and resulting in a suitable title display.

[Effects 46]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing low-base weak reach A and B performances. The low-base weak reach A and B performances consist of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Furthermore, it is possible to change the title characters corresponding to the low-base weak reach A and B performances from a white form to a red form, or to a gold form that suggests a higher probability of winning than the red form. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data. Furthermore, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance controls the game effect lamp 9 using a brightness data table: weak reach common title (white) which has brightness data set for when no title change performance is performed, if the title text color is not changed in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B performances. If the title text color is changed to red or gold in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B performances, the CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 using a brightness data table: weak reach common title (red) or weak reach common title (gold) which has brightness data set for when a title change performance is performed. Regardless of whether the title text color is changed or not in the introduction part of the low-base weak reach A and B performances, the CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 using a common brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach weak reach A introduction, weak reach weak reach B introduction). In this way, whether the title text in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects is changed to red or gold or to the second form, the luminance data table corresponding to the introduction part is common, thereby preventing an increase in cost and capacity. By using a luminance data table corresponding to each for the title display part, the effects can be suitably presented whether the title text color is not changed or is changed to red or gold, resulting in a suitable title display.

[Effects 47]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing low-base weak reach A and B performances. The low-base weak reach A and B performances consist of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. The performance control CPU 120 also controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data. Furthermore, the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B performances includes a title start period from when the title characters start to be displayed until they are displayed in their fixed position, and a title display period and a title end period after the title characters are displayed in their fixed position. The performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 using a luminance data table (weak reach title start) that defines a specific light emission pattern for the title start period during the title start period of the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B performances, and controls the game effect lamp 9 using a luminance data table (weak reach title display) that defines a specific light emission pattern for after the title display period during the title display period and the title end period. In this way, by using luminance data tables corresponding to the title start period from when the title characters start to be displayed until they are displayed in their fixed position, the title display period and the title end period after the title characters are displayed in their fixed position, and the luminance data table corresponding to the introduction part in the low-base weak reach A and B performances, the period for displaying the title characters and the period until an advantageous state is announced can be appropriately heightened, resulting in a suitable title display.

Furthermore, depending on whether it's a low-base weak reach A or a low-base weak reach B, a common luminance data table can be used for either the title start period or the title display period and title end period, while separate luminance data tables with individual content can be used for the other. By using a common luminance data table for either the title start period or the title display period and title end period, cost and capacity increases can be prevented. By using separate luminance data tables for the other, the presentation can be optimized according to whether it's a low-base weak reach A or a low-base weak reach B, resulting in a suitable title display.

Although embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configurations are not limited to these embodiments, and any modifications or additions that do not depart from the spirit of the present invention are also included.

The present invention executes a reach animation based on a fluctuating pattern, but it is conceivable to execute various pre-announcement animations before the reach animation is executed. For example, pre-announcement animations (step-up pre-announcement, pseudo-pre-announcement, reach suggestion animation, timer animation, etc.) are displayed on the liquid crystal display (LCD). The LCD is composed of multiple layers, and it is possible to set which pre-announcement animation image or identification information is displayed on which layer according to a predetermined priority. Furthermore, by displaying the pre-announcement animation on a specific layer and changing the display mode, thereby changing the transmittance, it is conceivable to effectively change the display mode of the pre-announcement animation, thereby improving the player's interest. In addition, when executing a pre-announcement animation on a specific layer, it is preferable to execute the pre-announcement animation in conjunction with light-emitting means provided around the LCD or on the game board. Specific control of the light-emitting means is described below.

The embodiments for implementing the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on examples.

[Form 1-1]
The gaming machine of form 1-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The means of execution of the performance are,
It is possible to execute a predetermined animation that suggests the game is being controlled to a favorable state.
It is possible to execute a specific animation that is different from the predetermined animation and suggests that the game will be controlled to a favorable state.
The means of display are,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined part that displays a cracking precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the cracking precursor image.
A specific effect is an effect in which the display of multiple fragment images begins in a period shorter than the period from when a premonition image of cracking is displayed until a fragment image corresponding to that premonition image of cracking is displayed in a predetermined effect.
The execution timing differs between the standard animation and the specific animation.
Before the first predetermined part is executed and after the fragment images in the second predetermined part are displayed, the type of background image displayed on a display layer with a lower priority than the predetermined display layer is different.
Before a specific effect is executed and after the fragment images in that effect are displayed, the type of background image displayed on display layers with a lower priority than the specific display layer differs (see Figures 44-47, 56, 57, 63, 74, and 79).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of predetermined effects that display images indicating impending breakage and fragments, and specific effects that display fragments without showing the impending breakage image, at different timings. This allows for surprising players at various times, and furthermore, since the background image differs before and after the fragments are displayed in both the predetermined and specific effects, even effects that similarly display fragments can give suitably different impressions, enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 1-2]
The gaming machines of type 1-2 are,
In a single variable display, both a predetermined effect and a specific effect can be executed.
When a specific animation is performed without a predetermined animation being executed, the likelihood of being controlled to a favorable state is higher than when the predetermined animation is performed without the specific animation being executed (see Figures 44 to 47).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows viewers to focus on the execution of predetermined and specific performances, thereby enhancing their interest.

[Form 1-3]
Gaming machines of types 1-3 are,
The background image includes a first background image and a second background image which is more advantageous than the first background image.
The first predetermined part can be executed when the first background image is displayed.
During the execution of the second predetermined part, the second background image is displayed.
The second background image can be displayed even when a second background animation different from the predetermined animation is performed.
When the second background image is displayed through a predetermined animation, the likelihood of being controlled to a favorable state is higher than when the second background image is displayed through a second background prompt animation (see Figure 41).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows viewers to focus on whether the second background image is displayed through a predetermined animation or a second background teasing animation, thereby increasing interest and engagement.

[Form 1-4-1]
The gaming machine of form 1-4-1 is,
In a variable display, both a predetermined effect and a specific effect can be executed.
The specified performance is a performance that can be executed before the decorative identification information enters a reach state.
A specific performance is a performance that can be executed after the decorative identification information has entered a reach state.
When a predetermined animation is performed before a specific animation is executed, the likelihood of being controlled to a favorable state is higher than when it is not performed (see Figures 44 to 47).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for increased interest by creating anticipation that both predetermined and specific effects will be performed.

[Form 1-4-2]
The gaming machine of type 1-4-2 is,
The specified performance is a performance that can be executed before the decorative identification information enters a reach state.
A specific performance is a performance that can be executed after the decorative identification information has entered a reach state.
The background image includes a first background image before the decorative identification information reaches a certain state, a second background image which is more advantageous than the first background image before the decorative identification information reaches a certain state, a third background image which is more advantageous than the third background image after the decorative identification information reaches a certain state,
The fragment images in the second designated part are displayed together with the second background image.
In certain effects, fragment images are displayed together with the fourth background image (see Figures 56, 57, 63, 74, and 79).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows viewers to focus on the relationship between predetermined effects, specific effects, and background images, thereby enhancing their interest.

[Form 1-4-3]
The gaming machine of form 1-4-3 is,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is a transparent image capable of recognizing at least a portion of the second background image which is superimposed on it.
In a specific performance, the fragment image is a transparent image that allows recognition of at least a portion of the superimposed fourth background image (see Figures 70, 71, and 84).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to enhance the effects of the second predetermined part and specific effects.

[Form 1-4-4]
The gaming machine of type 1-4-4 is,
The fragment images can be rotated.
When the fragment image reaches a first angle due to the rotational movement, it becomes possible to recognize at least a portion of the second background image that is superimposed on the fragment image.
When the fragment image is rotated to a second angle, it becomes difficult to recognize at least a portion of the second background image that is superimposed on the fragment image (see Figures 94 and 100).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhanced visual effects when displaying fragmented images.

[Form 1-4-5]
The gaming machine of type 1-4-5 is,
When the first fragment image among multiple fragment images is at a first angle, the second fragment image among multiple fragment images will be at a second angle (see Figures 94 and 100).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhanced visual effects when displaying fragmented images.

[Form 1-5]
Gaming machines of types 1-5 are,
The fragment images in the second predetermined part and the fragment images in the specific performance are, in common, displayed in a manner that moves in multiple directions, including at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction.
The time required for a fragment image displayed in a manner that moves in a specific direction to become invisible in the display area of the display means is longer than for a fragment image displayed in a manner that moves in a predetermined direction (see Figure 95).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhanced visual effects when displaying fragmented images.

[Form 1-6]
Gaming machines of type 1-6 are,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed in a manner that moves without a change in speed over the display period of the fragment image.
In a specific performance, the fragment images are displayed in a manner that they move without changing speed throughout the display period of the fragment images (see Figure 83).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the natural display of fragmented images.

[Form 1-7-1]
The gaming machine of type 1-7-1 is,
The fragment images in the second predetermined part and the fragment images in the specific performance are, in common, displayed in a manner that moves in multiple directions, including at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction.
The time required for the fragment images in the second predetermined part and the fragment images in the specific performance to become invisible in the display area of the display means is the same (see Figures 86 and 91).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature increases the correlation between predetermined effects and specific effects, thereby enhancing the effects of both.

[Form 1-7-2]
The gaming machine of type 1-7-2 is,
The visibility of the fragment images displayed as they move in a specific direction differs between the time the display starts and the time before they become invisible within the display area of the display means (see Figures 86 and 91).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhanced visual effects when displaying fragmented images.

[Form 1-7-3]
The gaming machine of type 1-7-3 is,
In a specific performance, the fragment image that is moved and displayed in a specific direction takes longer to disappear from the display area of the display means than the fragment image that is moved and displayed in a specific direction in a predetermined performance (see Figure 95).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the natural display of fragmented images.

[Form 1-8]
Gaming machines of type 1-8 are,
The fragment images in the second predetermined part and the fragment images in the specific performance can be rotated.
The number of rotational movements performed from the time the first fragment image among multiple fragment images in the second predetermined part is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the display means is the same as the number of rotational movements performed from the time the second fragment image among multiple fragment images in a specific effect is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the display means (see Figures 94 and 100).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature increases the correlation between predetermined effects and specific effects, thereby enhancing the effects of both.

[Form 2-1]
The gaming machine of type 2-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The means of execution of the performance are,
It is possible to execute a predetermined animation that suggests the game is being controlled to a favorable state.
It is possible to execute a specific animation that is different from the predetermined animation and suggests that the game will be controlled to a favorable state.
The means of display are,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined part that displays a cracking precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the cracking precursor image.
A specific effect is an effect in which the display of multiple fragment images begins in a period shorter than the period from when a premonition image of cracking is displayed until a fragment image corresponding to that premonition image of cracking is displayed in a predetermined effect.
The display means is capable of displaying an effect image at a first timing when transitioning from a first predetermined part to a second predetermined part, and at a second timing when fragment images in a specific effect are displayed.
During the display period of the effect image, it is difficult to see the fragment image throughout the first period, but it is possible to see the fragment image throughout the second period after the first period has elapsed (see Figures 56, 57, 63, 74, and 79).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of predetermined effects that display images indicating impending breakage and fragments, and specific effects that display fragments without showing the impending breakage image, at different timings. This enables surprising players at various timings, and further reduces the sense of incongruity when fragments are displayed using effect images, allowing for the execution of predetermined and specific effects more effectively.

[Form 2-2]
The gaming machine of type 2-2 is,
The effect image displayed at the first timing and the effect image displayed at the second timing have the same display duration (see Figures 74 and 79).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature increases the correlation between predetermined effects and specific effects, thereby enhancing the effects of both.

[Form 2-3]
The gaming machine of type 2-3 is,
The execution period for the first prescribed part is longer than the execution period for the second prescribed part.
The display period of the effect image is shorter than the execution period of the first predetermined part and the execution period of the second predetermined part (see Figure 74).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for a seamless transition from displaying fragment images to using effect images.

[Form 2-4]
The gaming machine of type 2-4 is,
The display pattern of the effect image is the same for the first timing and the second timing (see Figures 56, 57, and 63).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature increases the correlation between predetermined effects and specific effects, thereby enhancing the effects of both.

[Form 3-1]
The gaming machine of form 3-1 is
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The means of execution of the performance are,
It is possible to execute a predetermined animation that suggests the game is being controlled to a favorable state.
It is possible to execute a specific animation that is different from the predetermined animation and suggests that the game will be controlled to a favorable state.
The means of display are,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined part that displays a cracking precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the cracking precursor image.
A specific effect is an effect in which the display of multiple fragment images begins in a period shorter than the period from when a premonition image of cracking is displayed until a fragment image corresponding to that premonition image of cracking is displayed in a predetermined effect.
The execution timing differs between the standard animation and the specific animation.
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed in a manner that moves without a change in speed over the display period of the fragment image.
In a specific performance, the fragment images are displayed in a manner that changes from a first speed to a second speed and moves over the duration of the display period of the fragment images (see Figures 59, 66, 76, 81, and 83).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of predetermined effects that display images of impending breakage and fragments, and specific effects that display only fragments without showing the impending breakage image, at different timings. This allows for surprising players at various times, and furthermore, because the speed at which the fragments move differs between the predetermined and specific effects, even effects that display fragments in the same way can give suitably different impressions, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 3-2]
The gaming machine of type 3-2 is,
In a variable display, a predetermined effect can be executed multiple times, while a specific effect can only be executed once.
When a predetermined sequence of events is performed multiple times, the likelihood of being controlled to a favorable state is higher than when the predetermined sequence of events is performed only once.
The probability of being controlled to a favorable state is higher when a specific effect is executed once than when a predetermined effect is executed multiple times (see Figures 44 to 47).
A gaming machine characterized by the following:
This feature allows viewers to focus on the execution of predetermined and specific performances, thereby enhancing their interest.

[Form 3-3]
The gaming machine of type 3-3 is,
At the first timing when transitioning from the first predetermined part to the second predetermined part, and at the second timing when fragment images are displayed in a specific effect, it is possible to display an effect image of a specific color in common.
The display pattern of the effect image differs between the first timing and the second timing (see Figures 59(C) and 66(C)).
A gaming machine characterized by the following:
This feature allows for differences in the display patterns of effect images between predetermined and specific effects, thereby enhancing the overall experience and enjoyment.

[Form 3-4-1]
The gaming machine of form 3-4-1 is,
In a specific performance, the fragment images are displayed in a manner that moves at a speed greater than a first speed during the first period from the start of display until a specific timing, and are displayed in a manner that moves at a second speed during the second period from the specific timing until they become invisible within the display area of the display means.
The second period is longer than the first period (see Figure 83).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhanced visual effects when displaying fragmented images.

[Form 3-4-2]
The gaming machine of form 3-4-2 is,
At the timing when fragment images are displayed in a specific effect, it is possible to display an effect image.
The display period of the effect image overlaps with the first period, but does not overlap with the second period (see Figures 81, 83, and 92).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to prevent a decrease in the effectiveness of specific effects.

[Form 3-5]
Gaming machines of type 3-5 are,
The fragment images in the second predetermined part and the fragment images in the specific performance can be rotated.
The number of rotational movements performed from the time the first fragment image among multiple fragment images in the second predetermined part is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the display means is greater than the number of rotational movements performed from the time the second fragment image among multiple fragment images in a specific effect is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the display means (see Figure 100).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhanced visual effects when displaying fragmented images.

[Form 4-1]
The gaming machine of form 4-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The means of execution of the performance are,
It is possible to execute a predetermined animation that suggests the game is being controlled to a favorable state.
It is possible to execute a specific animation that is different from the predetermined animation and suggests that the game will be controlled to a favorable state.
The means of display are,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined part that displays a cracking precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the cracking precursor image.
A specific effect is an effect in which the display of multiple fragment images begins in a period shorter than the period from when a premonition image of cracking is displayed until a fragment image corresponding to that premonition image of cracking is displayed in a predetermined effect.
The execution timing differs between the standard animation and the specific animation.
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is an opaque image in which at least a portion of the superimposed background image is difficult to recognize.
The fragment images in specific effects are transparent images that allow recognition of at least a portion of the superimposed background image (see Figures 59, 66, 70, 71, 76, 81, and 93).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of predetermined effects that display images of impending breakage and fragments, and specific effects that display fragments without showing the impending breakage image, at different timings. This allows for surprising players at various times, and furthermore, because the display manner of the fragments differs between the predetermined effects and the specific effects, even effects that similarly display fragments can give suitably different impressions, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 4-2]
The gaming machine of type 4-2 is,
A specific effect is an effect that includes displaying special images along with the display of fragment images.
In certain effects, the fragment images and special images are in a superimposed relationship.
In a specific performance, among multiple fragment images, the first fragment image is a transparent image that allows recognition of at least a portion of the background image.
In a specific performance, among multiple fragment images, the second fragment image is a transparent image capable of recognizing at least a portion of the special image.
In a specific performance, the third fragment image among multiple fragment images is a transparent image that allows recognition of at least a portion of the background image and at least a portion of the special image (see Figure 93).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for different display patterns of fragment images for each effect, thereby enhancing the effect of each effect.

[Form 4-3-1]
The gaming machine of type 4-3-1 is,
In certain effects, the fragment images can be rotated.
When the first fragment image reaches a first angle due to the rotational movement, it becomes possible to recognize at least a portion of the background image that is superimposed on the fragment image.
When the first fragment image reaches a second angle due to rotation, it becomes difficult to recognize at least a portion of the background image that is superimposed on the fragment image (see Figures 94 and 100).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhanced visual effects when displaying fragmented images.

[Form 4-3-2]
The gaming machine of type 4-3-2 is,
In a specific animation, when the first fragment image among multiple fragment images is at a first angle, the second fragment image among multiple fragment images will be at a second angle (see Figures 94 and 100).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhanced visual effects when displaying fragmented images.

[Form 5-1]
The gaming machine of type 5-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The means of execution of the performance are,
It is possible to execute a predetermined animation that suggests the game is being controlled to a favorable state.
It is possible to execute a specific animation that is different from the predetermined animation and suggests that the game will be controlled to a favorable state.
The means of display are,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined part that displays a cracking precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the cracking precursor image.
A specific effect is an effect in which the display of multiple fragment images begins in a period shorter than the period from when a premonition image of cracking is displayed until a fragment image corresponding to that premonition image of cracking is displayed in a predetermined effect.
The execution timing differs between the standard animation and the specific animation.
The fragment images in the second predetermined part and the fragment images in the specific performance are, in common, displayed in a manner that moves in multiple directions, including at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction.
The time required for fragment images displayed in a manner that moves in a specific direction to become invisible in the display area of the display means is longer than for fragment images displayed in a manner that moves in a predetermined direction (see Figures 59, 66, 76, and 81).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of predetermined effects that display both a premonition image of breakage and a fragment image, and specific effects that display only the fragment image without showing the premonition image, at different timings. This allows for surprising players at various times, and furthermore, while the direction in which the fragment image moves is the same in the predetermined effect and the specific effect, the time required for it to disappear differs. Therefore, even effects that similarly display fragment images can give suitably different impressions, enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 5-2]
The gaming machine of type 5-2 is,
The visibility of the fragment images displayed as they move in a specific direction differs between the time the display starts and the time before they become invisible within the display area of the display means (see Figures 88 and 92).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhanced visual effects when displaying fragmented images.

[Form 5-3]
The gaming machine of type 5-3 is,
In a specific performance, the fragment image that is moved and displayed in a specific direction takes longer to disappear from the display area of the display means than the fragment image that is moved and displayed in a specific direction in a predetermined performance (see Figure 95).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for differences between predetermined and specific performances, enhancing interest through diverse presentation methods.

[Form 5-4]
The gaming machine of type 5-4 is,
All of the fragment images in the second predetermined part are hidden in a manner that moves outward from the display area of the display means (see, for example, Figure 94(A)).
In a specific performance, the first fragment image among the fragment images is hidden in a manner that moves outward from the display area of the display means.
In a specific performance, a second fragment image, which is different from the first fragment image, is hidden from view in the display area of the display means before it moves out of the display area (see, for example, Figure 94(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for differences in how fragment images are presented between predetermined and specific sequences, thereby enhancing the viewing experience.

[Form 6-1]
The gaming machine of type 6-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The means of execution of the performance are,
It is possible to execute a predetermined animation that suggests the game is being controlled to a favorable state.
It is possible to execute a specific animation that is different from the predetermined animation and suggests that the game will be controlled to a favorable state.
The means of display are,
The special display layer allows for the display of object images.
It is possible to display a crack precursor image on a predetermined display layer that has a higher priority than the special display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined part that displays an object image and displays a crack precursor image of a first crack pattern in accordance with the movement of the object image; a second predetermined part that changes the crack precursor image from a first crack pattern to a second crack pattern in accordance with the movement of the object image; and a third predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image.
A specific effect is an effect that displays an object image and, in response to the movement of the object image, starts displaying multiple fragment images in a period shorter than the period from when a premonition image of a first crack pattern is displayed to when a fragment image corresponding to that premonition image is displayed in a predetermined effect.
The execution timing differs between the standard animation and the specific animation.
After the second predetermined part is executed, the third predetermined part may or may not be executed.
In a predetermined animation sequence, the period from the display of the image indicating the second type of crack to the display of the fragment image is longer than the period from the display of the object image to the display of the fragment image in a specific animation sequence.
In the third predetermined part, the fragment image requires a first period of time from when it is displayed until it becomes invisible in the display area of the display means.
In a specific performance, the fragment image requires a second period, different from the first period, from the time it is displayed until it becomes invisible within the display area of the display means (see Figures 60-62, 70, 71, 77, and 78).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of predetermined effects that display both a premonition image of breakage and a fragment image, and specific effects that display only the fragment image without showing the premonition image, at different timings. This allows for surprising players at various times, and furthermore, because the time between the display of the object image and the display of the fragment image, as well as the display period of the fragment image, differs between the predetermined effect and the specific effect, even effects that similarly display fragment images can give suitably different impressions, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 6-2]
The gaming machine of form 6-2 is,
The second prescribed part has a longer execution period than the first prescribed part (see Figures 70, 71, 76, and 81).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature prevents the entertainment value of a particular performance from being diminished by a monotonous production structure.

[Form 6-3]
The gaming machine of form 6-3 is,
If the second predetermined part is executed and the third predetermined part is not executed thereafter, a fourth predetermined part can be executed which continues to display a crack precursor image of the second crack pattern for a longer period than the display period of the fragment image in the third predetermined part (see Figure 77).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for a favorable indication that the third predetermined part will not be executed.

[Form 6-4-1]
The gaming machine of form 6-4-1 is,
The specified performance is a performance that sets the decorative identification information to a reach state.
There are two patterns: a first pattern in which a predetermined animation is performed and the decorative identification information enters a "reach" state, and a second pattern in which the decorative identification information enters a "reach" state without the predetermined animation being performed.
When the variable display is performed using the first pattern, the expected probability of being controlled to a favorable state is higher than when the variable display is performed using the second pattern (see Figure 77).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows viewers to focus on the execution of a predetermined sequence of events, thereby increasing their interest and engagement.

[Form 6-4-2]
The gaming machine of form 6-4-2 is,
In a variable display, both a predetermined effect and a specific effect can be executed.
The specific performance can be executed after the third designated part has been performed.
When the third predetermined part is executed before the execution of a specific performance, the likelihood of being controlled to a favorable state is higher than when it is not executed (see Figures 44 to 47).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows us to draw attention to the execution of the third predetermined part of the predetermined performance, thereby enhancing the audience's interest.

[Form 6-5]
The gaming machine of type 6-5 is,
At the first timing when transitioning from the second predetermined part to the third predetermined part, and at the second timing when fragment images are displayed in a specific effect, it is possible to display an effect image of a specific color in common.
The display pattern of the effect image differs between the first timing and the second timing (see Figures 60(G) and 62(D)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for differences in the display patterns of effect images between predetermined and specific effects, thereby enhancing the overall experience and enjoyment.

[Form 6-6]
The gaming machine of type 6-6 is,
The specified performance is a performance that sets the decorative identification information to a reach state.
In the third predetermined part, it is possible to highlight the decorative identification information of the reach state.
In the third predetermined part, the period during which the decorative identification information of the reach state is highlighted is longer than the display period of the fragment image (see Figures 61(I) to 61(K)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for a favorable indication that the device has reached a "reach" state.

[Form 6-7-1]
The gaming machine of form 6-7-1 is,
In the first predetermined part, motion-enhancing images can be displayed in response to the movement of the object image.
It can be displayed in a display layer with a higher priority than a specific display layer.
At the timing when displaying the crack pattern and pre-crack images begins, the motion-enhanced image is displayed (see Figure 60(D)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for seamless transformation of images showing signs of cracking into images depicting crack patterns.

[Form 6-7-2]
The gaming machine of type 6-7-2 is,
It is possible to display small fragment images along with motion-enhanced images.
The display period for the small fragment image is longer than the display period for the motion-enhanced image (see Figure 60(D)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for a favorable indication that the crack precursor image has changed into a crack pattern.

[Form 6-7-3]
The gaming machine of type 6-7-3 is,
In the second predetermined part, an effect image can be displayed in response to the movement of the object image.
When displaying effect images, do not display motion enhancement images (see Figures 60(H) and 77).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for differences between the first and second predetermined parts, preventing the predetermined performance from becoming monotonous.

[Form 6-7-4]
The gaming machine of type 6-7-4 is,
The time required for the small fragment image in the first predetermined part and the fragment image in the third predetermined part to become invisible in the display area of the display means are different (Figure 77).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for differences in how the fragment images are presented between the first predetermined part and the third predetermined part, thereby enhancing interest.

[Form 6-8]
The gaming machines of type 6-8 are,
The fragment image in the third predetermined part is a transparent image capable of recognizing at least a portion of the superimposed background image,
The fragment images in specific effects are opaque images in which at least a portion of the superimposed background image is difficult to recognize (see Figures 70, 71, and 84).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for differences in the display of fragment images between predetermined and specific effects, thereby enhancing the viewing experience.

[Form 6-9]
The gaming machine of type 6-9 is,
The fragment image in the third predetermined part is displayed in a manner that moves without any change in speed over the display period of the fragment image.
In a specific performance, the fragment images are displayed in a manner that they move without changing speed throughout the display period of the fragment images (see Figure 83).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the natural display of fragmented images.

[Form 6-10]
The gaming machine of form 6-10 is,
The period required from the time a fragment image in a specific performance is displayed until it disappears from the display area of the display means is longer than the period required from the time a fragment image in the third predetermined part is displayed until it disappears from the display area of the display means (see Figures 77 and 78).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for differences between predetermined and specific performances, enhancing interest through diverse presentation methods.

[Form 7-1]
The gaming machine of type 7-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
A motion detection means capable of detecting the player's movements,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The means of execution of the performance are,
It is possible to execute action-promoting effects that encourage the player to take action in response to the motion detection means.
It is possible to execute a predetermined animation that suggests the game is being controlled to a favorable state.
It is possible to execute a specific animation that is different from the predetermined animation and suggests that the game will be controlled to a favorable state.
The means of display are,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
It is possible to display an action-enhancing image in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the special display layer.
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined part that displays a cracking precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the cracking precursor image.
A specific effect is an effect in which the display of multiple fragment images begins in a period shorter than the period from when a premonition image of cracking is displayed until a fragment image corresponding to that premonition image of cracking is displayed in a predetermined effect.
The execution timing differs between the standard animation and the specific animation.
The action acceleration effect displays an action acceleration image throughout the action validity period, and when the player's action is detected, it changes the display mode of the action acceleration image from an action acceleration mode to an action completion mode.
When the action acceleration effect causes the action acceleration image to change from the action acceleration state to the action completion state, a specific effect can be executed.
During at least a portion of the execution period of a particular performance, it is possible to view both the action acceleration image of the completed action and the fragment image in the particular performance.
The display period of the fragment images in a specific performance is shorter than the display period of the action acceleration images in the action acceleration mode, and longer than the display period of the action acceleration images in the action completion mode (see Figures 56, 57, 66, 74, and 81).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of predetermined animations that display images indicating impending breakage and fragments, and specific animations that display fragments without showing the impending breakage image, at different timings. This allows for surprising players at various times, and also prevents the entertainment value of specific animations from diminishing due to a monotonous animation structure.

[Form 8-1]
The gaming machine of type 8-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests being controlled to an advantageous state,
The prescribed performance includes the first prescribed performance and the second prescribed performance.
The means of display are,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The first predetermined performance is a performance that includes a first predetermined part which displays a crack precursor image of a first type of crack, and a second predetermined part which displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image.
The second predetermined performance is a performance that includes a third predetermined part which displays a crack precursor image of a second crack pattern, and a fourth predetermined part which displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The execution timing differs between the first and second predetermined sequences.
The execution period differs between the first and third designated parts.
Before the first predetermined part is executed and when the fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed, the type of background image displayed on the display layer with a lower priority than the predetermined display layer is different.
Before the execution of the third predetermined part and when the fragment image in the fourth predetermined part is displayed, the type of background image displayed in the display layer with a lower priority than the predetermined display layer is different (see Figures 56, 57, 59, 74, and 76).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of the first and second predetermined effects, which display the premonition image of the breakage and the fragment image, at different timings, thereby surprising the player at various times. Furthermore, since the background image differs before and after the fragment image is displayed in both the first and second predetermined effects, even effects that similarly display fragment images can give suitably different impressions, enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 8-2]
The gaming machine of type 8-2 is,
In the first predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed by changing it from the first pre-crack state to the first crack state.
In the third predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed by changing it from the second pre-crack state to the second crack state.
In the first predetermined part, the period from when the pre-crack image changes from the first pre-crack state to the first crack state is different in length from the period from when the pre-crack image changes from the second pre-crack state to the second crack state in the third predetermined part (see Figures 56, 57, 59, 74, and 76).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature enhances the visual effect when displaying images of impending cracks in a specific crack pattern.

[Form 9-1]
The gaming machine of type 9-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests being controlled to an advantageous state,
The prescribed performance includes the first prescribed performance and the second prescribed performance.
The means of display are,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The first predetermined performance is a performance that includes a first predetermined part which displays a crack precursor image of a first type of crack, and a second predetermined part which displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image.
The second predetermined performance is a performance that includes a third predetermined part which displays a crack precursor image of a second crack pattern, and a fourth predetermined part which displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The execution timing differs between the first and second predetermined sequences.
The execution period differs between the first and third designated parts.
The display means is capable of displaying an effect image at a first timing when transitioning from a first predetermined part to a second predetermined part, and at a second timing when transitioning from a third predetermined part to a fourth predetermined part.
During the display period of the effect image, it is difficult to see the fragment image for the first period, but it is possible to see the fragment image for the second period after the first period has elapsed (see Figures 56, 57, 59, 74, and 76).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of a first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect, which display a premonition image of cracking and a fragment image, at different timings, thereby surprising the player at various times. Furthermore, the use of effect images reduces the sense of incongruity when the fragment image is displayed, allowing for the execution of the first and second predetermined effects more effectively.

[Form 9-2]
The gaming machine of type 9-2 is,
In the first predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed by changing it from the first pre-crack state to the first crack state.
In the third predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed by changing it from the second pre-crack state to the second crack state.
In the first predetermined part, the period from when the pre-crack image changes from the first pre-crack state to the first crack state is different in length from the period from when the pre-crack image changes from the second pre-crack state to the second crack state in the third predetermined part (see Figures 56, 57, and 59).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature enhances the visual effect when displaying images of impending cracks in a specific crack pattern.

[Form 10-1]
The gaming machine of form 10-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests being controlled to an advantageous state,
The prescribed performance includes the first prescribed performance and the second prescribed performance.
The means of display are,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The first predetermined performance is a performance that includes a first predetermined part which displays a crack precursor image of a first type of crack, and a second predetermined part which displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image.
The second predetermined performance is a performance that includes a third predetermined part which displays a crack precursor image of a second crack pattern, and a fourth predetermined part which displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The execution timing differs between the first and second predetermined sequences.
The execution period differs between the first and third designated parts.
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed in a manner that moves without a change in speed over the display period of the fragment image.
The fragment image in the fourth predetermined part is displayed in a manner that changes from a first speed to a second speed and moves over the display period of the fragment image (see Figures 56, 57, 64, 65, 74, 80, and 83).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of a first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect, which display a premonition image of breakage and a fragment image, at different timings, thereby surprising the player at various times. Furthermore, because the speed at which the fragment image moves differs between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect, even effects that display fragment images in the same way can give suitably different impressions, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 10-2]
The gaming machine of form 10-2 is,
At the first timing when transitioning from the first predetermined part to the second predetermined part, and at the second timing when transitioning from the third predetermined part to the fourth predetermined part, it is possible to display an effect image of a specific color in common.
The display pattern of the effect image differs between the first timing and the second timing (see Figures 56(G) and 64(H)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for differences in the display patterns of effect images between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect, thereby enhancing the entertainment value.

[Form 10-3-1]
The gaming machine of form 10-3-1 is,
The fragment image in the fourth predetermined part is displayed in a manner that moves at a speed greater than a first speed during a first period from the start of display until a specific timing, and is displayed in a manner that moves at a second speed during a second period from the specific timing until it is hidden.
The second period is longer than the first period (see Figure 83).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for differences in how the fragment images are presented between the first and second predetermined presentations, thereby enhancing the viewing experience.

[Form 10-3-2]
The gaming machine of form 10-3-2 is,
When the fragment image in the fourth predetermined part is displayed, the effect image can be displayed.
In the fourth predetermined part, the display period of the effect image overlaps with the first period, but does not overlap with the second period (see Figures 64 and 83).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to prevent a decrease in the effectiveness of specific effects.

[Form 10-4]
The gaming machine of form 10-4 is,
In the second predetermined part, all of the fragment images are hidden in a manner that moves outward from the display area of the display means (see Figure 94(A)).
In the fourth predetermined part, the first fragment image among the fragment images is hidden in a manner that moves outward from the display area of the display means.
In the fourth predetermined part, the second fragment image, which is different from the first fragment image, is hidden in the display area of the display means before it moves out of the display area (see Figure 94(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for differences in how the fragment images are presented between the first predetermined presentation and the second specific presentation, thereby enhancing the viewing experience.

[Form 10-5]
The gaming machine of form 10-5 is,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is a transparent image capable of recognizing at least a portion of the superimposed background image,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is a transparent image capable of recognizing at least a portion of the superimposed background image (see Figures 70, 71, and 84).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhanced visual effects when displaying fragmented images.

[Form 10-6-1]
The gaming machine of form 10-6-1 is,
The fragment images in the second predetermined part and the fragment images in the fourth predetermined part are displayed in a manner that moves in multiple directions, including at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction.
In the fourth predetermined part, the fragment image displayed while moving in a specific direction takes a longer time to disappear from the display area of the display means than the fragment image displayed while moving in a specific direction in the second predetermined part (see Figures 86 and 87).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhanced visual effects when displaying fragmented images.

[Form 10-6-2]
The gaming machine of form 10-6-2 is,
The visibility of the fragment images displayed as they move in a specific direction differs between the time the display starts and the time before they disappear (see Figures 86 and 87).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhanced visual effects when displaying fragmented images.

[Form 10-7-1]
The gaming machine of form 10-7-1 is,
The fragment images in the second predetermined part and the fragment images in the fourth predetermined part are capable of rotation.
The number of rotational movements performed from the time the first fragment image among multiple fragment images in the second predetermined part is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the display means is greater than the number of rotational movements performed from the time the second fragment image among multiple fragment images in the fourth predetermined part is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the display means (see Figure 100).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhanced visual effects when displaying fragmented images.

[Form 10-7-2]
The gaming machine of form 10-7-2 is,
When the fragment image reaches a first angle due to the rotational movement, it becomes possible to recognize at least a portion of the background image that is superimposed on the fragment image.
When the fragment image reaches a second angle due to rotation, it becomes difficult to recognize at least a portion of the background image that is superimposed on the fragment image (see Figures 94 and 100).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhanced visual effects when displaying fragmented images.

[Form 10-7-3]
The gaming machine of form 10-7-3 is,
When the first fragment image is at the first angle, the second fragment image among the multiple fragment images will be at the second angle (see Figures 94 and 100).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhanced visual effects when displaying fragmented images.

[Form 10-8]
The gaming machine of form 10-8 is,
In a variable display, both the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect can be executed.
The first predetermined performance is a performance that can be executed before the decorative identification information enters a reach state.
The second prescribed performance is a performance that can be executed after the decorative identification information enters a reach state.
When the first predetermined performance is performed before the second predetermined performance is performed, the probability of being controlled to a favorable state is higher than when it is not performed (see Figures 44 to 47).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows us to draw attention to the execution of the first predetermined performance, thereby increasing interest and engagement.

[Form 10-9]
The gaming machine of form 10-9 is,
In the first predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed by changing it from the first pre-crack state to the first crack state.
In the third predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed by changing it from the second pre-crack state to the second crack state.
In the first predetermined part, the period from when the pre-crack image changes from the first pre-crack state to the first crack state is different in length from the period from when the pre-crack image changes from the second pre-crack state to the second crack state in the third predetermined part (see Figures 74 and 80).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature enhances the visual effect when displaying images of cracks in a specific pattern.

[Form 11-1]
The gaming machine of form 11-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests being controlled to an advantageous state,
The prescribed performance includes the first prescribed performance and the second prescribed performance.
The means of display are,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The first predetermined performance is a performance that includes a first predetermined part which displays a crack precursor image of a first type of crack, and a second predetermined part which displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image.
The second predetermined performance is a performance that includes a third predetermined part which displays a crack precursor image of a second crack pattern, and a fourth predetermined part which displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The execution timing differs between the first and second predetermined sequences.
The execution period differs between the first and third designated parts.
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is an opaque image in which at least a portion of the superimposed background image is difficult to recognize.
The fragment image in the fourth predetermined part is a transparent image that allows recognition of at least a portion of the superimposed background image (see Figures 59, 56, 57, 76, and 74).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of a first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect, which display images of the impending breakage and fragments, at different timings, thereby surprising the player at various times. Furthermore, because the display patterns of the fragments differ between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect, even effects that similarly display fragments can give suitably different impressions, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 12-1]
The gaming machine of form 12-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests being controlled to an advantageous state,
The prescribed performance includes the first prescribed performance and the second prescribed performance.
The means of display are,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The first predetermined performance is a performance that includes a first predetermined part which displays a crack precursor image of a first type of crack, and a second predetermined part which displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image.
The second predetermined performance is a performance that includes a third predetermined part which displays a crack precursor image of a second crack pattern, and a fourth predetermined part which displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The execution timing differs between the first and second predetermined sequences.
The execution period differs between the first and third designated parts.
The fragment images in the second predetermined part and the fragment images in the fourth predetermined part are displayed in a manner that moves in at least multiple directions, including a predetermined direction and a specific direction.
The time required for a fragment image to disappear from the display area of the display means is longer for a fragment image that is moved in a specific direction than for a fragment image that is moved in a predetermined direction.
In the fourth predetermined part, the fragment image displayed while moving in a specific direction takes a longer time to disappear from the display area of the display means than the fragment image displayed while moving in a specific direction in the second predetermined part (see Figures 56, 57, 64, 65, 74, and 80).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of a first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect, which display a premonition image of breakage and a fragment image, at different timings, thereby surprising the player at various times. Furthermore, while the direction in which the fragment image moves is the same in the predetermined effect and the specific effect, the time required for it to disappear differs. Therefore, even effects that similarly display fragment images can give suitably different impressions, enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 13-1]
The gaming machine of form 13-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests being controlled to an advantageous state,
The prescribed performance includes the first prescribed performance and the second prescribed performance.
The means of display are,
The special display layer allows for the display of object images.
It is possible to display a crack precursor image on a predetermined display layer that has a higher priority than the special display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The first predetermined performance includes a first predetermined part that displays an object image and displays a crack precursor image of a first crack pattern in accordance with the movement of the object image; a second predetermined part that changes the crack precursor image from a first crack pattern to a second crack pattern in accordance with the movement of the object image; and a third predetermined part that displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image.
The second predetermined performance includes a fourth predetermined part which displays an object image and a crack precursor image of a third crack pattern in accordance with the movement of the object image, and a fifth predetermined part which displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image in accordance with the movement of the object image.
The execution timing differs between the first and second predetermined sequences.
The length of the execution period differs between the first prescribed part and the fourth prescribed part.
After the second predetermined part is executed, the third predetermined part may or may not be executed.
The period from the start of the second prescribed part to the transition to the third prescribed part is longer than the period from the start of the fourth prescribed part to the transition to the fifth prescribed part.
In the third predetermined part, the fragment image requires a first period of time from when it is displayed until it becomes invisible in the display area of the display means.
In the fifth predetermined part, the fragment image requires a second period different from the first period from the time it is displayed until it becomes invisible in the display area of the display means (see Figures 56, 57, 60, 61, 77, and 74).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of a first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect, which display a premonition image of breakage and a fragment image, at different timings, thereby surprising the player at various times. Furthermore, because the period from when the object image is displayed to when the fragment image is displayed, as well as the display period of the fragment image, differs between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect, even effects that similarly display fragment images can give suitably different impressions, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 13-2]
The gaming machine of form 13-2 is,
In the first predetermined part, a crack precursor image can be displayed in a first crack pattern according to the movement of the object image.
In the fourth predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed by changing it from the third pre-crack state to the third crack state (see Figures 60 and 56).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature enhances the visual effect when displaying images of cracks in a specific pattern.

[Form 14-1]
The gaming machine of form 14-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests being controlled to an advantageous state,
The prescribed performance includes the first prescribed performance and the second prescribed performance.
The means of display are,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The first predetermined performance is a performance that includes a first predetermined part that displays a premonition image of cracking, and a second predetermined part that displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the premonition image of cracking,
The second predetermined performance is a performance that includes a third predetermined part which displays a cracking premonition image, and a fourth predetermined part which displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the cracking premonition image,
The second predetermined performance can be executed at a specific timing after the first predetermined performance has been executed.
The length of the execution period is the same for both the first and third designated parts.
The length of the execution period is the same for the second prescribed part and the fourth prescribed part.
When the second predetermined performance is executed after the first predetermined performance, the fragment image displayed in the second predetermined part is hidden in the display area of the display means, and then the third predetermined part is started (see Figures 53, 54, and 72).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the continuous execution of the first and second predetermined sequences, which display images of impending breakage and fragments, thereby continuously surprising the player. Furthermore, since the third predetermined sequence begins after the fragment images from the second predetermined sequence are hidden, it prevents a decrease in the effectiveness of the presentation due to the display of new impending breakage images even though fragment images have already been shown.

[Form 14-2]
The gaming machine of form 14-2 is,
The fragment images in the second predetermined part and the fragment images in the fourth predetermined part are displayed in a manner that moves in multiple directions, including at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction.
The starting position for displaying the fragment images differs between the second predetermined part and the fourth predetermined part (see Figures 53, 54, and 95).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for differences in how the fragment images are presented between the first and second predetermined presentations, thereby enhancing the viewing experience.

[Form 14-3]
The gaming machine of form 14-3 is,
In both the second and fourth designated parts, special images can be displayed along with the fragment images.
The special images in the second designated part are displayed in the first mode.
The special image in the fourth designated part is displayed in a second manner different from the first manner (see Figures 53(F) and 54(F)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for differences in how special images are presented between the first and second predetermined sequences, thereby enhancing the entertainment value.

[Form 14-4]
The gaming machine of form 14-4 is,
The display duration of the fragment images differs between the second predetermined part and the fourth predetermined part, while the display duration of the special images is the same (see Figure 72).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for differences in how the fragment images are presented between the first and second predetermined presentations, thereby enhancing the viewing experience.

[Form 14-5]
The gaming machine of form 14-5 is,
There are two patterns: a first pattern in which the second predetermined performance is performed after the first predetermined performance, and a second pattern in which the second predetermined performance is not performed after the first predetermined performance.
The game proceeding according to the first pattern is more likely to result in a favorable state than the game proceeding according to the second pattern (see Figure 38).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows us to draw attention to the execution of the second predetermined performance, thereby increasing interest and engagement.

[Form 14-6]
The gaming machine of form 14-2 is,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed in a manner that moves without a change in speed over the display period of the fragment image.
The fragment image in the fourth predetermined part is displayed in a manner that moves without a change in speed throughout the display period of the fragment image (see Figure 83).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for a greater connection between the first and second predetermined performances, thereby enhancing the entertainment value.

[Form 14-7-1]
The gaming machine of form 14-7-1 is,
At the first timing when transitioning from the first predetermined part to the second predetermined part, and at the second timing when transitioning from the third predetermined part to the fourth predetermined part, it is possible to display an effect image of a specific color in common.
The display pattern of the effect image is the same for the first timing and the second timing (see Figures 53(C), 54(C), and 72).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature enhances the connection between the first and second predetermined effects, thereby increasing the effectiveness of both.

[Form 14-7-2]
The gaming machine of form 14-7-2 is,
The effect image displayed at the first timing and the effect image displayed at the second timing have the same display duration (see Figure 72).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature enhances the connection between the first and second predetermined effects, thereby increasing the effectiveness of both.

[Form 15-1]
The gaming machine of form 15-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The means of execution of the performance are,
It is possible to execute a predetermined animation that suggests the game is being controlled to a favorable state.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that indicates whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state.
The means of display are,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a first type of crack, and a second predetermined part that displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image.
When it is announced through a notification sequence that the game will not be controlled to an advantageous state, a premonition image of the second type of crack is displayed, and multiple fragment images corresponding to the premonition image are displayed.
The fragment image in the second predetermined part requires a first period of time before it becomes invisible in the display area of the display means.
When it is announced through a notification effect that the system will not be controlled to an advantageous state, the fragment image requires a second period different from the first period before it becomes invisible in the display area of the display means (see Figures 56, 57, 69, 74, and 82(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of a predetermined sequence of events that displays images of impending breakage and fragments, thereby surprising the player. Furthermore, by displaying the impending breakage image along with fragment images that have a different duration of disappearance than the fragment images in the predetermined sequence, the player can be informed that they will not be controlled to an appropriately advantageous state.

[Form 15-2]
The gaming machine of form 15-2 is,
The pre-breakdown image displayed when it is announced that the game will not be controlled to an advantageous state has a longer display period than the pre-breakdown image in the first predetermined part (see Figure 74).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for a favorable indication that the system is not controlled to a favorable state.

[Form 15-3]
The gaming machine of form 15-3 is,
In the second designated part, among multiple fragment images, there is a first fragment image with the largest display size.
When it is reported that the system is not controlled to an advantageous state, there is a second fragment image among the multiple fragment images that has the largest display size,
The first fragment image has a larger display size than the second fragment image (see, for example, Figures 57(J) and 69(D)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for variations in how fragment images are presented, thereby increasing their appeal.

[Form 15-4]
The gaming machine of form 15-4 is,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is a transparent image capable of recognizing at least a portion of the superimposed background image,
When it is reported that the system is not controlled to a favorable state, the fragment image is a transparent image that allows recognition of at least a portion of the superimposed background image (see Figure 84).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for variations in how fragment images are presented, thereby increasing their appeal.

[Form 15-5]
The gaming machine of type 15-5 is,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image when it is notified that the system is not controlled to a favorable state are both displayed in a manner that moves in multiple directions, including at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction (see, for example, Figures 86 and 88).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for a more coherent presentation of fragment images, enhancing their appeal.

[Form 15-6]
The gaming machine of form 15-6 is,
In both the first timing when transitioning from the first predetermined part to the second predetermined part, and the second timing when a fragment image is displayed upon notification that the system is not controlled to an advantageous state, it is possible to display an effect image of a specific color.
The display pattern of the effect image differs between the first timing and the second timing (see Figures 56(G) and 69(C)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for variations in the display patterns of effect images, enhancing their appeal.

[Form 16-1]
The gaming machine of form 16-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The means of execution of the performance are,
It is possible to execute a predetermined animation that suggests the game is being controlled to a favorable state.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that indicates whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state.
The means of display are,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a first type of crack, and a second predetermined part that displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image.
When it is announced through a notification sequence that the game will not be controlled to an advantageous state, the premonition image of the second crack pattern can be displayed.
When a crack precursor image of the first crack pattern is displayed, the light-emitting means emits light according to the first light-emitting pattern.
When a crack precursor image of the second crack pattern is displayed, the light-emitting means emits light according to the second light-emitting pattern.
The light emission of the light-emitting means according to the first light emission pattern continues until the second predetermined part is executed.
The illumination of the light-emitting means according to the second light-emitting pattern continues after the notification performance in which it is announced that the system is not controlled to an advantageous state has ended, until predetermined conditions are met (see Figures 56, 57, 69, 74, and 82(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of a predetermined animation that displays a premonition image of a break, thereby surprising the player. Furthermore, by using the premonition image of a break and a second light emission pattern that continues until predetermined conditions are met after the end of the notification animation, the player can be notified that they are not being controlled to an appropriately advantageous state.

[Form 17-1]
The gaming machine of form 17-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The means of execution of the performance are,
It is possible to execute a predetermined animation that suggests the game is being controlled to a favorable state.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that indicates whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state.
The means of display are,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a first type of crack, and a second predetermined part that displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image.
When it is announced through a notification effect that the game will not be controlled to an advantageous state, the premonition image of the second crack pattern can be displayed.
The type of background image differs before the first predetermined part is executed and when the fragment image is displayed in the second predetermined part (see Figures 56(A) to 56(F), 57(I) to 57(K)).
The display of the background image differs before the notification is given whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, and when the fragment image is displayed after it is announced that the game will not be controlled to an advantageous state (see Figures 69(A), 69(B), 69(D), 74, and 82(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of a predetermined animation that displays a premonition image of a break, thereby surprising the player. Furthermore, by using the premonition image of a break and changing the display pattern of the background image before it is announced whether or not the game will be controlled to a favorable state, the player can be properly informed that the game will not be controlled to a favorable state.

[Form 18-1]
The gaming machine of form 18-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Movable body and,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests being controlled to an advantageous state,
The prescribed performance includes the first prescribed performance and the second prescribed performance.
The means of display are,
The special display layer allows for the display of object images.
It is possible to display a crack precursor image on a predetermined display layer that has a higher priority than the special display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The first predetermined performance includes a first predetermined part that displays an object image, a second predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a first crack pattern in accordance with the movement of the object image, and a third predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image.
The second predetermined performance includes a fourth predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a second crack pattern, a fifth predetermined part that starts the first movement of the movable body, and a sixth predetermined part that displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image.
The execution timing differs between the first and second predetermined sequences.
In the sixth predetermined part, the movable body starts a second operation different from the first operation, and the second operation of the movable body ends after the fragment image is hidden in the display area of the display means (see Figures 56, 57, 59, 74, and 76).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of a first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect, which display a premonition image of cracking and a fragment image, at different timings, thereby surprising the player at various times. Furthermore, by activating a movable part to display the fragment image after displaying the premonition image of cracking, a more impactful effect can be provided.

[Form 18-2]
The gaming machine of form 18-2 is,
In the first predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed by changing it from the first pre-crack state to the first crack state.
In the fourth predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed by changing it from the second pre-crack state to the second crack state.
In the first predetermined part, the period from when the pre-crack image changes from the first pre-crack state to the first crack state is different in length from the period from when the pre-crack image changes from the second pre-crack state to the second crack state in the fourth predetermined part (see Figures 74 and 76).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature enhances the visual effect when displaying images of impending cracks in a specific crack pattern.

[Form 18-3-1]
The gaming machine of form 18-3-1 is,
At the first timing when transitioning from the second predetermined part to the third predetermined part, and at the second timing when transitioning from the fifth predetermined part to the sixth predetermined part, it is possible to display an effect image of a specific color in common.
The display pattern of the effect image differs between the first timing and the second timing (see Figures 56(G) and 59(C)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for variations in the display patterns of effect images, enhancing their appeal.

[Form 18-3-2]
The gaming machine of type 18-3-2 is,
The first movement is the movement of the movable body from the origin position toward the advance position.
The effect image is displayed when the movable body is positioned in the advance position (see Figure 59(C)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for a sense of unity by linking the movement of the movable body with the display of effect images, thereby enhancing the effect of the second predetermined performance.

[Form 18-3-3]
The gaming machine of type 18-3-3 is,
The duration of the first movement of the movable body is longer than the display period of the effect image.
The display period of the fragment image in the sixth predetermined part is longer than the period of the first movement of the movable body (see Figure 76).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to enhance the effect of the second predetermined performance.

[Form 18-4]
The gaming machine of form 18-4 is,
It is possible to perform a suggestive performance that is different from the second predetermined performance and suggests that the system will be controlled to an advantageous state by operating a movable body.
As the movable body moves, a display area that overlaps with the movable body can be used to display an image that highlights the movable body.
In the suggestive presentation, an image highlighting the movable body is displayed in conjunction with the movement of the movable body, whereas in the fifth predetermined part, an image highlighting the movable body is not displayed in conjunction with the first movement of the movable body (see Figure 76).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to prevent the effect of the second predetermined effect from being reduced by the image that emphasizes the movable body.

[Form 19-1]
The gaming machine of form 19-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Movable body and,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests being controlled to an advantageous state,
The prescribed performance includes the first prescribed performance and the second prescribed performance.
The means of display are,
The special display layer allows for the display of object images.
It is possible to display a crack precursor image on a predetermined display layer that has a higher priority than the special display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The first predetermined performance includes a first predetermined part that displays an object image, a second predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a first crack pattern in accordance with the movement of the object image, and a third predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image.
The second predetermined performance includes a fourth predetermined part which displays a crack precursor image of a second crack pattern along with the first movement of the movable body, and a fifth predetermined part which displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image.
The execution timing differs between the first and second predetermined sequences.
In the fifth predetermined part, the movable body starts a second operation different from the first operation, and the second operation of the movable body ends before the fragment image is hidden in the display area of the display means (see Figures 56, 57, 67, 68, 74, and 82(A)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of a first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect, which display images of impending breakage and fragments, at different timings, thereby surprising the player at various times. Furthermore, by operating a movable part to display the impending breakage image, a more impactful effect can be provided.

[Form 19-2]
The gaming machine of form 19-2 is,
In the first predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed by changing it from the first pre-crack state to the first crack state.
In the fourth predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed by changing it from the second pre-crack state to the second crack state.
In the first predetermined part, the period from when the pre-crack image changes from the first pre-crack state to the first crack state is different in length from the period from when the pre-crack image changes from the second pre-crack state to the second crack state in the fourth predetermined part (see Figures 74 and 82).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature enhances the visual effect when displaying images of cracks in a specific pattern.

[Form 19-3-1]
The gaming machine of form 19-3-1 is,
At the first timing when transitioning from the second predetermined part to the third predetermined part, and at the second timing when transitioning from the fourth predetermined part to the fifth predetermined part, it is possible to display an effect image of a specific color in common.
The display pattern of the effect image differs between the first timing and the second timing (see Figures 56(G) and 67(E)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for differences in the display patterns of effect images between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect, thereby enhancing the entertainment value.

[Form 19-3-2]
The gaming machine of form 19-3-2 is,
The second movement is the movement of the movable body from the advanced position toward the origin position.
The effect image is displayed when the second operation begins (see Figure 67(F)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for a sense of unity by linking the movement of the movable body with the display of effect images, thereby enhancing the effect of the second predetermined performance.

[Form 19-3-3]
The gaming machine of type 19-3-3 is,
The duration of the second movement of the movable body is longer than the display period of the effect image.
The display period of the fragment image in the fifth predetermined part is longer than the period of the second movement of the movable body (see Figure 82).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to enhance the effect of the second predetermined performance.

[Form 19-4]
The gaming machine of form 19-4 is,
It is possible to perform a suggestive performance that is different from the second predetermined performance and suggests that the system will be controlled to an advantageous state by operating a movable body.
As the movable body moves, a display area that overlaps with the movable body can be used to display an image that highlights the movable body.
In the suggestive presentation, an image highlighting the movable body is displayed in conjunction with the movement of the movable body, whereas in the fourth predetermined part, an image highlighting the movable body is not displayed in conjunction with the first movement of the movable body (see Figure 82).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to prevent the effect of the second predetermined effect from being reduced by the image that emphasizes the movable body.

[Form 20-1]
The gaming machine of form 20-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Movable body and,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The means of execution of the performance are,
It is possible to execute a predetermined animation that suggests the game is being controlled to a favorable state.
It is possible to execute a specific animation that is different from the predetermined animation and suggests that the game will be controlled to a favorable state.
The means of display are,
The special display layer allows for the display of object images.
It is possible to display a crack precursor image on a predetermined display layer that has a higher priority than the special display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The first predetermined performance includes a first predetermined part that displays an object image, a second predetermined part that displays a cracking precursor image in accordance with the movement of the object image, and a third predetermined part that displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the cracking precursor image.
A specific effect is an effect in which, in response to the first movement of a movable body, the display of multiple fragment images begins in a period shorter than the period from when a premonition image of cracking is displayed in a predetermined effect until a fragment image corresponding to the premonition image of cracking is displayed.
The execution timing differs between the standard animation and the specific animation.
In a specific performance, the movable body is capable of performing a second action different from the first action, and the movable body starts this second action after the fragment image is hidden in the display area of the display means (see Figures 56, 57, 63, 74, and 79).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of predetermined effects that display pre-breakage images and fragment images, as well as specific effects, at different timings, thereby surprising players at various points in time. Furthermore, by operating a movable part to display fragment images without displaying pre-breakage images, it is possible to provide a more impactful presentation.

[Form 20-2-1]
The gaming machine of form 20-2-1 is,
The first movement is the movement of the movable body from the origin position toward the advance position.
The effect image is displayed when the first operation is initiated (see Figure 63(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for a sense of unity by linking the movement of the movable parts with the display of effect images, thereby enhancing the visual effect of specific effects.

[Form 20-2-2]
The gaming machine of type 20-2-2 is,
The effect image can be displayed over a display period that includes the first and second display periods.
The length of the first movement period of the movable body and the length of the first display period of the effect image are approximately the same.
The display period of the fragment images in a specific effect is longer than the duration of the first movement of the movable body (see Figure 79).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the enhancement of the visual effects of specific performances.

[Form 20-3]
The gaming machine of form 20-3 is,
It is possible to perform an effect that is different from a specific effect, which suggests that the game will be controlled to a favorable state by operating a movable body.
As the movable body moves, a display area superimposed on the movable body can be displayed,
In suggestive effects, a highlight image of the movable body is displayed in conjunction with the movement of the movable body, whereas in specific effects, a highlight image of the movable body is not displayed in conjunction with the first movement of the movable body (see Figure 79).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature prevents the effect of certain visual effects from being diminished by images that emphasize moving parts.

[Form 21-1]
The gaming machine of form 21-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests being controlled to an advantageous state,
The prescribed performance includes the first prescribed performance and the second prescribed performance.
The means of display are,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer.
The first predetermined effect is an effect that displays a crack premonition image of the first crack pattern,
The second predetermined effect is an effect that displays a crack premonition image of the second crack pattern,
The execution timing differs between the first and second predetermined sequences.
Even if a crack precursor image of the first or second crack precursor is displayed, the background image can be seen together with the crack precursor image.
When no crack precursor image of the first or second crack pattern is displayed, the image displayed on a display layer with a lower priority than the predetermined display layer is displayed with first visibility.
When the image showing the first type of crack precursor is displayed, the background image is displayed with a second level of visibility that is less visible than the first level of visibility.
When a crack precursor image of the second crack pattern is displayed, images displayed on a display layer with a lower priority than the predetermined display layer are displayed with a second level of visibility over a predetermined range, and are displayed with a first level of visibility over a specific range different from the predetermined range (see Figures 56(E), (F), 58(C), 74, and 75).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance, each displaying a different crack pattern in a premonition image, at different timings. This allows for surprising the player at various times, and furthermore, because the visibility of the background image visible along with the premonition image differs depending on the type of crack pattern, even performances that similarly display premonition images can give suitably different impressions, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 21-2]
The gaming machine of form 21-2 is,
The boundary between a predetermined range and a specific range can be indicated by a third level of visibility that is more visible than the first and second levels of visibility (see Figure 58(C) enlarged view).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to enhance the effect of the second predetermined performance.

[Form 21-3]
The gaming machine of form 21-3 is,
A special display layer with a higher priority than the designated display layer can display a corresponding image that supports variable display.
When a crack precursor image is displayed in the second crack pattern, the corresponding image is displayed superimposed over a predetermined range, but not superimposed over a specific range (see Figure 58(C)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the display of a suitable corresponding image even while the second predetermined performance is being executed.

[Form 21-4]
The gaming machine of form 21-4 is,
The display period for the pre-cracking image of the second crack pattern is longer than the display period for the pre-cracking image of the first crack pattern (see Figure 75).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for differences in how the premonition images are presented between the first and second predetermined sequences, thereby enhancing the overall experience and appeal.

[Form 22-1]
The gaming machine of form 22-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests being controlled to an advantageous state,
The prescribed performance includes the first prescribed performance and the second prescribed performance.
The means of display are,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer.
The first predetermined effect is an effect that displays a crack premonition image of the first crack pattern,
The second predetermined effect is an effect that displays a crack premonition image of the second crack pattern,
The execution timing differs between the first and second predetermined sequences.
The visibility of the background image differs depending on whether the image showing the first type of crack precursor is displayed or the image showing the second type of crack precursor is displayed.
The pre-cracking images for the second type of cracking lasted longer than the pre-cracking images for the first type of cracking.
There are multiple types of images showing the precursor to the second type of cracking.
When a pre-cracking image of the second type of second crack pattern is displayed, the likelihood of being controlled to a favorable state is higher than when a pre-cracking image of the first type of second crack pattern is displayed (see Figures 55-57, 73, and 74).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance, each displaying a different crack pattern in a premonition image, at different timings. This allows for surprising the player at various times, and furthermore, the player will pay attention to the type of premonition image in the second crack pattern, giving a suitably different impression even when the same premonition image is displayed, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 22-2]
The gaming machine of form 22-2 is,
The visibility of the background image displayed below a predetermined display layer differs depending on whether a crack precursor image of the first type of second crack pattern is displayed or a crack precursor image of the second type of second crack pattern is displayed (see Figures 56 and 55).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for variations in how images showing signs of cracking are presented, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 22-3]
The gaming machine of form 22-3 is,
In both the first and second predetermined effects, it is possible to display effect images of a specific color.
The display pattern of the effect image differs between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect at the second timing (see Figures 56 and 55).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for variations in the display patterns of effect images, enhancing their appeal.

[Form 23-1]
The gaming machine of form 23-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The means of execution of the performance are,
It is possible to execute a predetermined animation that suggests the game is being controlled to a favorable state.
It is possible to perform a change effect that alters the display mode of the corresponding image that supports variable display.
The prescribed performance includes the first prescribed performance and the second prescribed performance.
The means of display are,
In the special display layer, it is possible to display corresponding images that support variable display.
The first pre-crack image can be displayed in the first predetermined display layer, which has a higher priority than the special display layer.
The second pre-break image can be displayed in the second predetermined display layer, which has a lower priority than the special display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the first predetermined display layer.
The first predetermined effect is an effect that displays the first premonition image of a break,
The second prescribed effect is an effect that displays a second premonition image.
The execution timing differs between the first and second predetermined sequences.
When the first crack precursor image is displayed, the visibility of the corresponding image decreases.
When the second crack precursor image is displayed, the visibility of the corresponding image does not decrease.
If the first predetermined effect is executed, the change effect will not be executed.
When the second predetermined performance is executed, the change performance can be executed (see Figures 56-58, 74, 75, and 102).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of a first predetermined animation displaying a first premonition image and a second predetermined animation displaying a second premonition image at different timings, thereby surprising players at various times. Furthermore, even in animations that similarly display premonition images, the display layer and the presence or absence of change animations differ, creating distinctly different impressions and enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 23-2-1]
The gaming machine of form 23-2-1 is,
The transformation effect is an effect that displays a predetermined object image and changes the display mode of the corresponding display by having the predetermined object image perform an action that affects the corresponding display.
A predetermined object image can be displayed on a display layer with a lower priority than the predetermined display layer (see Figure 102).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of a change effect without significantly reducing the effect of the second predetermined effect.

[Form 23-2-2]
The gaming machine of type 23-2-2 is,
In response to the movement of a predetermined object image, a change-enhancing image can be displayed on a display layer above the special display layer so as to be superimposed on the corresponding image (see Figure 102).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the appropriate execution of the change effect even while the second predetermined effect is being performed.

[Form 24-1]
The gaming machine of form 24-1 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The means of execution of the performance are,
A first predetermined performance can be executed that suggests the game is controlled to a favorable state.
A second predetermined performance can be executed that suggests the game is controlled to a favorable state.
After the execution of the second prescribed performance, a special performance can be performed.
The means of display are,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The first predetermined effect is an effect that displays a crack precursor image of a first crack pattern, and displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image.
The second predetermined effect is an effect that displays a crack precursor image of the second crack pattern, and displays multiple fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image.
The execution timing differs between the first and second predetermined sequences.
The fragment images in the first predetermined presentation and the fragment images in the second predetermined presentation have different display modes.
The fragment images in the second predetermined performance include images in a suggestive manner that indicate that a special performance will be performed.
The display period of the fragment image in the second predetermined performance is longer than the display period of the fragment image in the first predetermined performance (see Figures 56, 74, 79, 103, and 104).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of a first predetermined sequence and a second predetermined sequence, which display images of impending breakage and fragments, at different timings, thereby surprising the player at various times. Furthermore, since the display patterns of the fragment images differ between the first and second predetermined sequences, and the relationship between the fragment images in the second predetermined sequence and the subsequent sequence can be enhanced, even sequences that similarly display fragment images can give suitably different impressions, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 24-2]
The gaming machine of form 24-2 is,
There are two types of special performances: the first special performance and the second special performance.
When the second special effect is performed, the probability of being controlled to a favorable state is higher than when the first special effect is performed.
The suggestive mode includes a first suggestive mode that suggests the first special performance will be performed, and a second suggestive mode that suggests the second special performance will be performed (see Figures 103, 104, and 105).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to increase the level of attention paid to the fragment images in the second predetermined presentation.

[Form 24-3-1]
The gaming machine of form 24-3-1 is,
The fragment image in the second predetermined presentation includes a suggestive form and a transparent form that allows at least a portion of the background image displayed in a layer lower than the specific display layer to be visible.
Images of fragments in the transparent mode are displayed more frequently than images of fragments in the suggestive mode (see Figure 105).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to increase the level of attention paid to the fragment images in the second predetermined presentation.

[Form 24-3-2]
The gaming machine of type 24-3-2 is,
The fragment images can be rotated.
In the second predetermined presentation, the fragment image in the transparent mode has a greater amount of rotational movement than the fragment image in the suggestive mode (see Figure 105).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to increase the level of attention paid to the fragment images in the second predetermined presentation.

[Form 24-4]
The gaming machine of form 24-4 is,
The second prescribed production includes the first prescribed part and the second prescribed part,
In the first predetermined part, multiple fragment images of the suggestive form are displayed, and multiple fragment images of the transparent form are displayed.
In the second predetermined part, a single fragment image of the suggestive form is displayed, and multiple fragment images of the transparent form are displayed (see Figure 104).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to increase the level of attention paid to the fragment images in the second predetermined presentation.

[Form 25]
The gaming machine of type 25 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The means of execution of the performance are,
It is possible to execute a predetermined animation that suggests the game is being controlled to a favorable state.
Before the predetermined performance is executed, the preceding performance (Figure 63(C)) can be executed.
The means of display are,
Cracked images can be displayed in a specific display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The predetermined performance includes displaying a cracked image in a first form (Figure 91 (B1)), and then changing the cracked image from the first form to a second form (Figures 91 (B2) to (B5)).
The execution period of the preliminary sequence is longer than the display period of the cracked image in the first embodiment (see Figures 79 and 91).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the preceding animation creates anticipation for the crack, and the crack image in the first mode conveys a sense of speed, thereby achieving a desirable crack pattern.

[Form 26]
The gaming machine of form 26 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The means of execution of the performance are,
It is possible to execute a predetermined animation that suggests the game is being controlled to a favorable state.
Before the predetermined performance is executed, the preceding performance (Figure 63(C)) can be executed.
The means of display are,
Cracked images can be displayed in a specific display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The predetermined performance includes displaying a cracked image in a first form (Figure 91 (B1)), and then changing the cracked image from the first form to a second form (Figures 91 (B2) to (B5)).
The combined period for displaying the cracked image in the first mode and the period for displaying it in the second mode is longer than the execution period of the preceding sequence (see Figures 79 and 91).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the crack pattern is made more memorable by making the period during which the cracked image is in its first and second forms longer than the duration of the preceding sequence.

[Form 27]
The gaming machine of type 27 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Equipped with display means,
The means of display are,
The first display layer can display the effect image.
The cracked image can be displayed on the second display layer, which has a lower priority than the first display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in the third display layer, which has a higher priority than the first display layer.
The display period of the effect image and the display period of the cracked image overlap for at least part of the time.
The display period for the effect image is shorter than the display period for the cracked image.
During the display period of the effect image, it is difficult to see the cracked image throughout the first period, but it is possible to see the cracked image throughout the second period after the first period has elapsed.
The second period is longer than the first period (see Figures 72-82 and 86-92).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the effect image serves to hide the initial visible portion of the cracked image, fulfilling its purpose while preventing the effect image from being emphasized more than the cracked image.

[Form 28]
The gaming machine of type 28 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests being controlled to an advantageous state,
The means of display are,
The first display layer can display the effect image.
The cracked image can be displayed on the second display layer, which has a lower priority than the first display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in the third display layer, which has a higher priority than the first display layer.
The predetermined effect is an effect that includes displaying a cracked image in a first form, and then changing the cracked image from the first form to a second form.
The display means displays an effect image when displaying the cracked image in the first embodiment, and hides the effect image before displaying the cracked image in the second embodiment (see Figures 72 to 82, 86 to 92).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature prevents the cracked image from appearing unnatural by obscuring the initial visible portion of the cracked image.

[Form 29]
The gaming machine of type 29 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests being controlled to an advantageous state,
The means of display are,
Cracked images can be displayed in a specific display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The predetermined performance includes displaying a cracked image in a first form (Figure 90 (B1)), and then changing the cracked image from the first form to a second form (Figures 90 (B2) to (B5)).
In the second embodiment, the transparency of the cracked image differs between the first timing and the second timing during the display period of the cracked image (see Figures 78 and 90).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature enhances the visual effect when the cracked image of the second embodiment is displayed.

[Form 30]
The gaming machine of type 30 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The means of execution of the performance are,
It is possible to execute a predetermined animation that suggests the game is being controlled to a favorable state.
It is possible to perform certain effects that suggest the game is being controlled to a favorable state.
The means of display are,
Cracked images can be displayed in a specific display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The predetermined performance includes displaying a cracked image in the first mode (Figure 86 (B1)), and then changing the cracked image from the first mode to the second mode (Figures 86 (B2) to (B5)).
The specific effect includes displaying a cracked image in the third form (Figure 90 (B1)), and then changing the cracked image from the third form to the fourth form (Figures 90 (B2) to (B5)).
The transparency of the cracked image at a predetermined timing after the start of display of the cracked image in the second embodiment is different from that of the cracked image at a specific timing after the start of display of the cracked image in the fourth embodiment (see Figures 74, 78, 86, 90, and 94(A)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhanced visual effects when the cracked image of the second embodiment is displayed compared to when the cracked image of the fourth embodiment is displayed.

[Form 31]
The gaming machine of form 31 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The means of execution of the performance are,
It is possible to execute a predetermined animation that suggests the game is being controlled to a favorable state.
It is possible to perform certain effects that suggest the game is being controlled to a favorable state.
The means of display are,
Cracked images can be displayed in a specific display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The predetermined performance is a performance that can be executed in normal conditions, and includes displaying a cracked image in a first form (Figure 86 (B1)), and then changing the cracked image from the first form to a second form (Figures 86 (B2) to (B5)).
The specific performance is a performance that can be executed in a special state which is more advantageous than the normal state, and includes the performance of displaying a cracked image in the third form (Figure 90 (B1)), and then changing the cracked image from the third form to the fourth form (Figures 90 (B2) to (B5)),
The transparency of the cracked image at a predetermined timing after the start of display of the cracked image in the second embodiment is different from that of the cracked image at a specific timing after the start of display of the cracked image in the fourth embodiment (see Figures 41 to 43, 74, 78, 86, 90, and 94(A)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhanced visual effects when the cracked image of the second embodiment is displayed compared to when the cracked image of the fourth embodiment is displayed.

[Form 32]
The gaming machine of form 32 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The means of display are,
Cracked images can be displayed in a specific display layer.
Background images can be displayed on display layers with a lower priority than a specific display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a display layer with a higher priority than a specific display layer.
The light emission control means is,
When a cracked image is displayed, the emission control of the light-emitting means is performed using a specific brightness data table.
The light emission control of the light emission means is performed using a specific luminance data table until a specific timing during the display period of the cracked image, and thereafter the specific timing, the light emission control of the light emission means is performed using a luminance data table corresponding to the background image (see Figures 72 to 74 and 77).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for optimal control of the light emission of the light emission means when a cracked image is displayed.

[Form 33]
The gaming machine of form 33 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with a sound output means,
The means of display are,
The first display layer can display the effect image.
The cracked image can be displayed on the second display layer, which has a lower priority than the first display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in the third display layer, which has a higher priority than the first display layer.
The display period of the effect image and the display period of the cracked image overlap for at least part of the time.
The sound output means outputs a sound corresponding to the cracked image at the timing when the effect image is displayed (see Figures 72 to 78).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhanced visual effects when a cracked image is displayed.

[Form 34]
The gaming machine of form 34 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with a sound output means,
The means of display are,
Cracked images can be displayed in a specific display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
There are two display patterns for the cracked image: Pattern 1 and Pattern 2.
The sound output means outputs a sound corresponding to the cracked image when the cracked image is displayed according to the first pattern (see Figure 72), but does not output a sound corresponding to the cracked image when the cracked image is displayed according to the second pattern (see Figure 79).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the display of cracked images using multiple display patterns that give different impressions.

[Form 35]
The gaming machine of form 35 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with a sound output means,
The means of display are,
Cracked images can be displayed in a specific display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
There are two display patterns for the cracked image: Pattern 1 and Pattern 2.
The sound output means outputs a sound corresponding to the cracked image when the cracked image is displayed according to the first pattern (see Figure 72), and outputs a sound that notifies that the system is controlled to an advantageous state when the cracked image is displayed according to the second pattern (see Figure 82).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the display of cracked images using multiple display patterns that give different impressions depending on the game state.

[Form 36]
The gaming machine of form 36 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with a sound output means,
The means of display are,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer.
The cracked image can be displayed on a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
There are two display patterns for the cracked image: Pattern 1 and Pattern 2.
The crack precursor image is an image that can be displayed before the crack image is displayed when the crack image is displayed according to the first pattern.
The sound output means outputs a sound corresponding to the cracked image when the cracked image is displayed according to the first pattern (see Figure 72), but does not output a sound corresponding to the cracked image when the cracked image is displayed according to the second pattern (see Figure 79).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the display of cracked images using multiple display patterns that give different impressions.

[Form 37]
The gaming machine of form 37 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with a sound output means,
The means of display are,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer.
The cracked image can be displayed on a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The means of sound output is,
It is possible to output a predetermined sound when a crack warning image is displayed.
It is possible to output a specific sound when a cracked image is displayed.
The specific sound output by the sound output means is louder than a predetermined sound (see Figure 99).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for a clear distinction between when the pre-cracking image is displayed and when the cracked image is displayed, effectively creating a more impactful impression when the cracked image is shown.

[Form 38]
The gaming machine of type 38 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with a sound output means,
The means of display are,
The special display layer allows for the display of object images.
It is possible to display a crack precursor image on a predetermined display layer that has a higher priority than the special display layer.
The cracked image can be displayed on a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
It is possible to display an image indicating a crack in conjunction with the movement display of the object image.
The means of sound output is,
When a crack warning image is displayed, it is possible to output a sound corresponding to the object image.
When a cracked image is displayed, it is possible to output a sound corresponding to the cracked image (see Figure 99).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for a clear distinction between when the pre-cracking image is displayed and when the cracked image is displayed, effectively creating a more impactful impression when the cracked image is shown.

[Form 39]
The gaming machine of form 39 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Equipped with display means,
The means of display are,
Multiple fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
There are two display patterns for the fragment images: Pattern 1 and Pattern 2.
In the first pattern, the amount of variation is a specific value, and as a result, the operating speed of the fragment image of the first size and the fragment image of the second size, which is smaller than the first size, are different.
In the second pattern, the amount of variation is zero, meaning that the operating speed of the third-size fragment image and the fourth-size fragment image, which is smaller than the third size, are the same (see Figures 84 and 85).
It is characterized by the following.
According to these characteristics, the first pattern involves fragments that are affected by animation differently depending on their size. Smaller fragments fly faster, while larger fragments fall somewhat slower, resulting in a shattering pattern that can be used when you want to show realistic movement. The second pattern, on the other hand, involves fragments that are affected by animation in the same way regardless of size, resulting in a similar flying and falling pattern. This allows you to select the appropriate shattering pattern depending on the scene.

[Form 40]
The gaming machine of type 40 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Equipped with display means,
The means of display are,
Fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The fragment images are displayed in a manner that shows them falling from the moment the display starts.
There are two display patterns for the fragment images: Pattern 1 and Pattern 2.
The first and second patterns differ in their gravity settings, resulting in different falling speeds for the fragment images (see Figures 84 and 85).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the creation of diverse patterns by varying the parameter values and thus the speed at which the fragment images fall, thereby enhancing the visual effect.

[Form 41]
The gaming machine of form 41 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Equipped with display means,
The means of display are,
Fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
There are two display patterns for the fragment images: Pattern 1 and Pattern 2.
The setting of the gravity direction is different between the first and second patterns, resulting in a different direction of movement when the fragment images are displayed as they move (see Figures 84 and 85).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the creation of diverse patterns by varying parameter values and thus the direction in which the fragment images progress, thereby enhancing the visual effect.

[Form 42]
The gaming machine of form 42 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Equipped with display means,
The means of display are,
Multiple fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
There are three display patterns for the fragment images: Pattern 1, Pattern 2, and Pattern 3.
The first pattern comprises a first parameter relating to the display of the fragment image and a second parameter relating to the display of the fragment image.
The second pattern consists of the first parameter and the second parameter,
The third pattern consists of the first parameter and the second parameter,
The first parameter value is common to all three patterns (Pattern 1, Pattern 2, and Pattern 3), while the second parameter value is different (see Figures 84 and 85).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by fixing the value of the first parameter and creating common parts for the fragment images, while varying the value of the second parameter, it is possible to construct a variety of patterns, thereby creating stable and diverse display patterns for fragment images.

[Form 43]
The gaming machine of form 43 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Equipped with display means,
The means of display are,
Multiple fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
There are three display patterns for the fragment images: Pattern 1, Pattern 2, and Pattern 3.
The first pattern comprises a first parameter relating to the display of the fragment image and a second parameter relating to the display of the fragment image.
The second pattern consists of the first parameter and the second parameter,
The third pattern consists of the first parameter and the second parameter,
In the first and second patterns, the value of the first parameter is the same, but the value of the second parameter is different.
The second and third patterns have different values for the first parameter, but the second parameter is the same (see Figures 84 and 85).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the construction of stable and diverse fragment image display patterns by creating common parts for each pattern while using different parameter values.

[Form 44]
The gaming machine of form 44 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Equipped with display means,
The means of display are,
Cracked images can be displayed in a specific display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
There are two display patterns for the cracked image: Pattern 1 and Pattern 2.
The cracked image according to the first pattern can be displayed under normal conditions.
The cracked image in the second pattern can be displayed in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state.
Before the cracked image is displayed by the first pattern, and after the cracked image is displayed by the first pattern, the type of background image displayed in display layers with a lower priority than a specific display layer differs.
The type of background image displayed in display layers with a lower priority than a specific display layer differs before and after the display of the cracked image by the second pattern (see Figures 41, 43, 56-58).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for different impressions to be created and enhances interest when displaying a cracked image under normal conditions compared to when displaying it under special conditions.

[Form 45]
The gaming machine of type 45 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests being controlled to an advantageous state,
The means of display are,
The first display layer can display the effect image.
The cracked image can be displayed on the second display layer, which has a lower priority than the first display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in the third display layer, which has a higher priority than the first display layer.
The predetermined effect is an effect that includes displaying a cracked image in a first form, and then changing the cracked image from the first form to a second form.
The means of display are,
In the normal state and in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state, a cracked image can be displayed.
When displaying the cracked image in the first embodiment, an effect image is displayed, and the effect image is hidden at the timing before displaying the cracked image in the second embodiment (see Figures 41, 43, 56, and 57).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature prevents the cracked image from appearing unnatural by obscuring the initial visible portion of the cracked image with the effect image.

[Form 46]
The gaming machine of type 46 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Equipped with display means,
The means of display are,
Cracked images can be displayed in a specific display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
There are two display patterns for the cracked image: Pattern 1 and Pattern 2.
The cracked image according to the first pattern can be displayed under normal conditions.
The cracked image in the second pattern can be displayed in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state.
The cracked image displayed by the first pattern and the cracked image displayed by the second pattern are both displayed in a manner that moves in multiple directions, including at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction.
The cracked image displayed by the first pattern and the cracked image displayed by the second pattern move at different speeds (see Figures 41, 43, 56-58).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhanced visual effects during the special state by displaying cracked images in a way that doesn't disrupt the tempo of the special state.

[Form 47]
The gaming machine of type 47 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Equipped with display means,
The means of display are,
Cracked images can be displayed in a specific display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
There are two display patterns for the cracked image: Pattern 1 and Pattern 2.
The cracked image according to the first pattern can be displayed under normal conditions.
The cracked image in the second pattern can be displayed in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state.
The expected probability of being controlled to a favorable state when a cracked image is displayed using the first pattern is different from the expected probability of being controlled to a favorable state when a cracked image is displayed using the second pattern (see Figures 38, 40(C), 41, and 43).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for greater attention to be drawn to the image's display pattern, as the expected degree of control to a favorable state differs depending on the pattern of the cracked image.

[Form 48]
The gaming machine of type 48 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Equipped with display means,
The means of display are,
Multiple fragment images of type 1 can be displayed on a predetermined display layer.
Multiple fragment images of the second type can be displayed on a specific display layer with a lower priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer.
The display period for the first type of fragment image and the display period for the second type of fragment image overlap in at least part.
The first type of fragment image is a depiction of a character,
The second type of fragment image has a transparent appearance that allows recognition of at least a portion of the background image displayed in a display layer lower than a specific display layer (see Figures 91 and 105).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the creation of a memorable visual effect by overlapping the display periods of two different types of fragment images with varying display modes.

[Form 49]
The gaming machine of type 49 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Equipped with display means,
The means of display are,
Multiple fragment images of type 1 can be displayed on a predetermined display layer.
Multiple fragment images of the second type can be displayed on a specific display layer with a lower priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer.
The display period for the first type of fragment image and the display period for the second type of fragment image overlap in at least part.
The display method differs between the first type of fragment image and the second type of fragment image.
The display period for the first type of fragment image is longer than the display period for the second type of fragment image (see Figures 91 and 105).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the creation of a memorable visual effect by overlapping the display periods of two different types of fragment images with varying display modes.

[Form 50]
The gaming machine of type 50 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Movable body and,
A means of display, and comprising,
The means of display are,
Multiple fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The movable body is capable of superimposing itself onto the display area of the display means.
The display period of the fragment images and the operation period of the movable body overlap at least partially.
The fragment images displayed in the first display area, which is a display area where the movable object does not overlap, are displayed in greater quantity than the fragment images displayed in the second display area, which is a display area where the movable object does overlap (see Figures 91 and 105).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the display of fragments effectively while the movable body overlaps with the display area of the display means.

[Form 51]
The gaming machine of form 51 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Movable body and,
A means of display, and comprising,
The means of display are,
Multiple fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The movable body is capable of superimposing itself onto the display area of the display means.
The display period of the fragment images and the operation period of the movable body overlap at least partially.
The first fragment image among multiple fragment images is displayed in a manner that it moves from a first region, which is a display area where the movable body does not overlap, into a second region, which is a display area where the movable body overlaps.
The second fragment image among multiple fragment images is displayed in a manner that moves within the first region so as not to enter the second region (see Figures 91 and 105).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for a dynamic presentation by providing fragment images that do not enter the area where the moving object is superimposed, thereby conveying the idea that the object has broken, while also providing fragment images that pass through the area where the moving object is superimposed.

[Form 52]
The gaming machine of form 52 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Movable body and,
A means of display, and comprising,
The means of display are,
Multiple fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The movable body is capable of superimposing itself onto the display area of the display means.
The display period of the fragment images and the operation period of the movable body overlap at least partially.
Even after the movable body superimposed on the display area of the display means moves to a position where it no longer superimposes on the display area, the fragment image continues to be displayed (see Figures 91 and 105).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the display of fragment images in a suitable manner, ensuring that no fragment images are missed, even when the movable body overlaps with the display area of the display means.

[Form 53]
The gaming machine of form 53 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Equipped with means for executing performances,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests being controlled to an advantageous state,
The means of display are,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on a specific display layer with a higher priority than a predetermined display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined part that displays a premonition image of cracking, and a second predetermined part that displays multiple fragment images of a first type corresponding to the premonition image of cracking.
The display means is capable of displaying multiple fragment images of the second type when a crack precursor image is displayed.
The second type of fragment image takes less time to disappear from the display area of the display means than the first type of fragment image (see Figures 60 and 61).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhanced visual effects in displaying fragmented images.

[Form 54]
The gaming machine of type 54 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Equipped with display means,
The means of display are,
It is possible to display specific characters in the special display layer.
It is possible to display the cracked image in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the special display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
There are two display patterns for the cracked image: Pattern 1 and Pattern 2.
The first pattern is one in which the first type of cracked image is displayed in conjunction with the actions of a specific character.
The second pattern is one in which a second type of cracked image is displayed in conjunction with the actions of a specific character.
Before the first type of cracked image is displayed by the first pattern, and after the first type of cracked image is displayed by the first pattern, the type of background image displayed in display layers with a lower priority than a specific display layer differs.
Before the second type of cracked image is displayed by the second pattern, and after the second type of cracked image is displayed by the second pattern, the type of background image displayed in display layers with a lower priority than the specific display layer differs (see Figures 56, 57, and 62).
It is characterized by the following.
This characteristic means that a specific character appears in common across multiple cracked image display patterns, thus increasing the level of attention given to that particular character.

[Form 55]
The gaming machine of type 55 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Equipped with display means,
The means of display are,
The first display layer can display the effect image.
The cracked image can be displayed on the second display layer, which has a lower priority than the first display layer.
A specific character can be displayed in the third display layer, which has a lower priority than the second display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in the fourth display layer, which has a higher priority than the first display layer.
There are two display patterns for the cracked image: Pattern 1 and Pattern 2.
The first pattern is one in which a first type of cracked image is displayed when a specific character is in motion.
The second pattern is one in which a second type of cracked image is displayed when a specific character is in motion.
The means of display are,
When displaying the first type of cracked image using the first pattern, an effect image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of a specific character, and the effect image is hidden at a predetermined timing after the first type of cracked image has been displayed.
In the second pattern, when displaying the second type of cracked image, an effect image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of a specific character, and the effect image is hidden at a specific timing after the second type of cracked image has been displayed (see Figures 56, 57, and 62).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature prevents the cracked image from appearing unnatural by obscuring the initial visible portion of the cracked image with the effect image.

[Form 56]
The gaming machine of form 56 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Equipped with display means,
The means of display are,
It is possible to display specific characters in the special display layer.
Fragment images can be displayed on specific display layers that have a higher priority than special display layers.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
There are two display patterns for the fragment images: Pattern 1 and Pattern 2.
The first pattern is one in which multiple fragment images of the first type are displayed in conjunction with the actions of a specific character.
The second pattern is one in which multiple fragment images of a second type are displayed in conjunction with the actions of a specific character.
The first type of fragment image is displayed in a manner that changes from a first speed to a second speed and moves over the display period of the first type of fragment image.
The second type of fragment image is displayed in a manner that it moves without changing speed throughout the display period of the second type of fragment image (see Figures 56, 57, and 62).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhancing the visual effect by changing the speed at which the fragment images move depending on the type of display pattern of the fragment images.

[Form 57]
The gaming machine of type 57 is,
A gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to create a favorable state for the player,
Equipped with display means,
The means of display are,
It is possible to display specific characters in the special display layer.
It is possible to display the cracked image in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the special display layer.
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer.
There are two display patterns for the cracked image: Pattern 1 and Pattern 2.
The first pattern is one in which the first type of cracked image is displayed in conjunction with the actions of a specific character.
The second pattern is one in which a second type of cracked image is displayed in conjunction with the actions of a specific character.
The expected degree to which the game is controlled to a favorable state differs depending on whether the cracked image is displayed using the first pattern or the second pattern (see Figures 56, 57, 60, and 61).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature enhances anticipation for a specific character and increases interest by drawing attention to the display pattern of the cracked image after that character is shown.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
Figure 12 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of its main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game surface, and a game machine frame (frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls, which serve as the game medium, are launched from a predetermined ball launching device and fired into this game area.

Furthermore, "variable display" of special symbols refers to, for example, the display of multiple types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/shrinking one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and the regular symbols described later, multiple types of special symbols or regular symbols are displayed in an updated manner. In the variation of decorative symbols described later, multiple types of decorative symbols are displayed in a scrolling or updated manner, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/shrinked. Note that variation also includes the display of a symbol blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is displayed as a stopped display (also called derivation or derivation display, etc.) (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that variable display may also be expressed as variable display or simply variable.

Furthermore, the special symbols displayed variably in the first special symbol display device 4A are also referred to as "first special symbols," and the special symbols displayed variably in the second special symbol display device 4B are also referred to as "second special symbols." Additionally, a special symbol game using the first special symbols is called a "first special symbol game," and a special symbol game using the second special symbols is called a "second special symbol game." Furthermore, only one type of special symbol display device is required for the variable display of special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (electroluminescence) display, and displays various visual effects. The image display device 5 may also consist of a projector and a screen. Various visual effects are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative symbols (such as symbols showing numbers) that serve as decorative identification information distinct from the special symbols is performed in synchronization with the first and second special symbol games. Here, in synchronization with the first or second special symbol game, the decorative symbols are displayed variably (e.g., vertical scrolling or updating) in the left, center, and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, respectively. The synchronous execution of the special symbol games and the variable display of decorative symbols are collectively referred to simply as "variable display."

Furthermore, the upper left corner of the display screen (display area) of the image display device 5 is provided with a display area 5S for displaying the first reserved memory number (for example, the number "0"), the second reserved memory number (for example, the number "4"), and small symbols corresponding to the decorative symbols. The small symbols are displayed variably in accordance with the variable display of the decorative symbols.

Furthermore, the first reserve memory count, second reserve memory count, reserve display, small symbols, error display (not shown) indicating an error state in the pachinko machine 1, right-hand shooting notification images prompting the player to shoot to the right, and time-saving display showing the remaining number of time-saving rounds, etc., may be displayed in front of (on a higher layer than) the performance images (object images) such as characters. This prevents the performance images from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the first reserve memory count, second reserve memory count, small symbols, and error display. On the other hand, decorative symbols may be displayed behind (on a lower layer than) the performance images. This prevents the decorative symbols from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the performance images.

The above-mentioned small symbol is also referred to as the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating that the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are being displayed in a variable form. For example, it is displayed in a variable form by a certain operation in a manner that is always visible on a display device such as the image display device 5. Because the fourth symbol is displayed in a variable form, even if the decorative symbols are difficult to recognize, such as when the display content including the variable display of the decorative symbols momentarily disappears from the screen, or when the movable body 32 obscures all or part of the screen of the image display device 5, it becomes possible to recognize whether or not the display is currently in a variable form. The performance control CPU 120, upon receiving the first variable display start command, operates the image display device 5 to perform the variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol. Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120, upon receiving the second variable display start command, operates the image display device 5 to perform the variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol.

The lower part of the screen of the image display device 5 is provided with display areas (special symbol hold memory display area 5U, active display area 5F) for displaying hold displays corresponding to variable displays whose execution is pending, and active displays corresponding to variable displays that are currently being executed. The hold displays and active displays are collectively referred to as variable display corresponding displays. In this embodiment, a special symbol hold memory display area 5U is provided common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but a first special symbol hold memory display area that displays a first hold display representing a variable display whose execution of the first special symbol is pending, and a second special symbol hold memory display area that displays a second hold display representing a variable display whose execution of the second special symbol is pending, may be provided separately. In this embodiment, the special symbol hold memory display area 5U is a display area that displays a hold display corresponding to the first special symbol when the game state is in the normal state, and a display area that displays a hold display corresponding to the second special symbol when the game state is in the time-saving state or the probability variation state. Furthermore, the Active Display Area 5F is a display area that shows the active display corresponding to the first special symbol when the game state is normal, and a display area that shows the active display corresponding to the second special symbol when the game state is shortened time or probability variation.

A first reserve indicator 25A and a second reserve indicator 25B, each composed of multiple LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first reserve indicator 25A displays the first reserve memory count based on the number of lit LEDs. The second reserve indicator 25B displays the second reserve memory count based on the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a prize ball device 6A is provided, and to the right of the prize ball device 6A, a variable prize ball device 6B is provided.

The prize ball entry device 6A forms a first starting prize entry opening, which is kept in a constant open state, allowing game balls to enter at all times, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting prize entry opening, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 3) are dispensed, and the first special game may be started.

The variable prize ball device 6B (a standard electric mechanism) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see Figure 13). The variable prize ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric mechanism having a movable piece that can be opened and closed. When the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable piece is in the upright position, resulting in a closed state where no game balls can enter the second starting prize opening (this is also said to be the second starting prize opening being in the closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable piece of the variable prize ball device 6B is in the tilted position, resulting in an open state where game balls can enter the second starting prize opening (this is also said to be the second starting prize opening being in the open state). When a game ball enters the second starting prize opening, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 3) are dispensed, and the second special game may be started. Furthermore, the variable prize ball device 6B is not limited to those described above, as long as it changes between a closed state and an open state.

General prize slots 10 are provided at predetermined locations on the game board 2 (in the example shown in Figure 12, three locations in the lower left of the game area and one location above the variable prize ball device 6B) and are kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when a ball enters any of the general prize slots 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are dispensed as prize balls.

Between the prize ball device 6A and the variable prize ball device 6B, a special variable prize ball device 7 with a large prize opening is provided. The special variable prize ball device 7 includes a large prize opening door driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 13), forming a large prize opening as a specific region that changes between an open state and a closed state.

For example, in the special variable prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric mechanism) is in the off state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, preventing game balls from entering (passing through) it. On the other hand, in the special variable prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the on state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize slot, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14) are dispensed as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize slot, more prize balls are dispensed than when a game ball enters, for example, the first starting prize slot, the second starting prize slot, or the general prize slot 10.

The entry of a game ball into any of the prize-winning slots, including the general prize-winning slot 10, is also referred to as "winning a prize." In particular, winning a prize in the starting slots (first starting prize-winning slot, second starting prize-winning slot) is also called a "starting prize."

A standard symbol display unit 20 is provided at a predetermined location on the game board 2 (in the example shown in Figure 12, the lower left of the game area). For example, the standard symbol display unit 20 consists of a 7-segment LED and displays a variable representation of multiple types of standard symbols as general identification information, distinct from special symbols. Standard symbols are represented by lighting patterns such as numbers "0" through "9" or "-". The standard symbols may also include a pattern where all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of standard symbols is also called a standard symbol game.

To the right of the image display device 5, a passage gate 41 is provided through which the game ball can pass. The game is executed based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41.

Below the regular symbol display unit 20, a regular symbol hold indicator unit 25C is provided. The regular symbol hold indicator unit 25C is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of regular symbol hold memories (the number of regular symbol games currently in a pending state) by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is equipped with windmills and numerous obstacle pins that change the direction and speed of the game balls. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet for game balls that do not enter any of the winning slots.

Speakers 8L and 8R for playing and outputting sound effects are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3. Side lamps 9b are provided to the left and right of the main lamp 9a, surrounding the game area. A button lamp 9e is provided below the game board 2. These main lamp 9a, side lamps 9b, and button lamps 9e provided on the gaming machine frame 3 are also referred to as "frame lamps."

A movable body 32, which operates according to the effects, is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (above the image display device 5 in Figure 12). The movable body 32 is equipped with a movable body lamp 9d. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided near the special variable prize ball device 7 on the game board 2, and a decorative lamp 9f is provided on the left side of the game board 2. These attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, and decorative lamp 9f on the game board 2 are also referred to as "board lamps." These main lamps 9a, side lamps 9b, attacker lamps 9c, movable body lamps 9d, button lamps 9e, and decorative lamps 9f are sometimes collectively referred to as game effect lamps 9. Note that these main lamps 9a, side lamps 9b, attacker lamps 9c, movable body lamps 9d, button lamps 9e, and decorative lamps 9f are composed of LEDs (see Figure 47). Further details about the various lamps will be described later.

A ball-launching handle (operating knob) 30 is provided at the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3. This handle is operated by the player or other user to launch the game balls towards the game area using a ball-launching device.

A ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided at a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, for holding (storing) game balls dispensed as prize balls or game balls dispensed by a designated ball dispenser so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a dispensing section (ball supply tray) separate from the upper tray, from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A, which can be grasped and tilted by the player, is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is equipped with a trigger button that the player can press. Operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see Figure 13).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, allowing the player to perform predetermined instruction operations by pressing it. Operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see Figure 13).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

(Outline of how the game progresses)
The player rotates the ball-shooting handle 30 on the pachinko game machine 1, launching the game ball towards the game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the regular symbol game is started using the regular symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the execution of the previous regular symbol game (i.e., the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the regular symbol game based on that passage cannot be executed immediately), the regular symbol game based on that passage is held up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this regular symbol game, if a specific regular symbol (a regular symbol that results in a win) stops and is displayed, the display result for the regular symbol becomes "Regular Symbol Win." On the other hand, if a regular symbol other than the regular symbol that results in a win (a regular symbol that results in a loss) stops and is displayed, the display result for the regular symbol becomes "Regular Symbol Loss." When a "Regular Symbol Win" occurs, the variable prize ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time (the second starting prize entry point becomes open).

When a game ball enters the first starting prize entry opening formed in the prize ball entry device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second starting prize entry opening formed in the variable prize ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

Furthermore, if a game ball enters (wins) the starting entry slot during the execution of a special feature game, or during the period when the game is controlled to a jackpot state as described later (i.e., if a starting entry occurs but the special feature game based on that entry cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special feature game based on that entry will be suspended until a predetermined maximum number of entries (for example, 4) are reached.

In the special feature game, if a specific special symbol (a winning symbol, such as "7," although the actual symbol may differ depending on the type of win described later) stops and is displayed as a guaranteed special symbol, it results in a "jackpot." If a special symbol other than the winning symbol (a losing symbol, such as "-") stops and is displayed, it results in a "miss."

After the display result in the special game is "Big Win," the game is controlled to a "Big Win Game" state, which is advantageous for the player.

During a jackpot, the large prize winning slot formed by the special variable prize ball entry device 7 opens in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls entering the large prize winning slot reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9 balls), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize winning slot can be open in one round, and is hereinafter referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize winning slot is open is called a round (round game). During a jackpot, the round can be repeated until a predetermined maximum number of rounds (e.g., 15 or 2) has been reached.

In a jackpot state, players can win prize balls by getting them into the jackpot slot. Therefore, a jackpot state is advantageous for the player. The more rounds there are in a jackpot state, and the longer the maximum opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

Furthermore, each "jackpot" has a designated jackpot type. For example, multiple types of opening mechanisms for the jackpot entry point (number of rounds and maximum opening period) and game states after a jackpot (normal state, time-saving state, probability-increasing state, etc.) are provided, and the jackpot type is determined accordingly. There may also be jackpot types that award many prize balls, types that award few prize balls, or types that award almost no prize balls.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a probability-increasing state, depending on the type of jackpot.

In the time-saving mode, a control mechanism (time-saving control) is implemented that shortens the average special symbol variation time (the period during which the special symbols vary) compared to the normal state. In the time-saving mode, a control mechanism (high-open control, high-base control) is also implemented that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize entry point, such as by shortening the average normal symbol variation time (the period during which the normal symbols vary) or increasing the probability of a "normal symbol win" in the normal symbol game. Since the time-saving mode improves the variation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol), it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the probability variation state, in addition to the time-saving control, probability variation control is implemented that increases the probability of the displayed result being "Big Win" compared to the normal state. The probability variation state is even more advantageous for the player because it improves the efficiency of special symbol variations and makes "Big Win" more likely.

The time-saving mode and the probability-increasing mode continue until one of the following termination conditions is met first: either a predetermined number of special symbol games have been played, or the next jackpot game state has begun. When the termination condition is the predetermined number of special symbol games played, it is also called a "count-restricted time-saving mode" (count-restricted time-saving mode, count-restricted probability-increasing mode, etc.).

The "normal state" refers to any game state other than advantageous states such as the jackpot state, the time-saving state, or the probability-increasing state. It is a state in which the pachinko machine 1 is controlled to the same settings as its initial state (for example, when a system reset is performed, or when a predetermined recovery process is not executed after power-on).

The state in which probability variation control is being performed is also called the high probability state, and the state in which probability variation control is not being performed is also called the low probability state. The state in which time reduction control is being performed is also called the high base state, and the state in which time reduction control is not being performed is also called the low base state. Combining these, the time reduction state is sometimes called the low probability high base state, the probability variation state is called the high probability high base state, and the normal state is called the low probability low base state. A state that is both high probability and low base is also called the high probability low base state.

Furthermore, the game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the jackpot entry point) during a jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a probability variation state after the jackpot game state.

(Regarding the progress of the performance, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects that notify the progress of the game or enhance the excitement of the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. These effects are described below. These effects are performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of such displays, they may also be performed using sound output from speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting and extinguishing of game effect lamps 9, the operation of movable parts 32, or any effect device that includes some or all of these.

As a performance effect executed in accordance with the progress of the game, the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5, designated as "left," "center," and "right," begin displaying variable decorative symbols in response to the start of the first or second special symbol game. At the timing when the display result (also called the confirmed special symbol) is displayed in the first or second special symbol game, the confirmed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols, is also displayed (derived).

During the period from the start to the end of the variable display of decorative symbols, the mode of variable display of decorative symbols may become a predetermined "reach" mode (a reach is achieved). Here, a "reach" mode refers to a mode in which, when the stopped display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5 constitutes part of the jackpot combination described later, the variable display of decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped continues.

Furthermore, a reach animation is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach pattern occurring during the variable display of decorative symbols. In pachinko machine 1, multiple types of reach animations are executed, each with a different probability (also called the jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special symbol game or the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols) resulting in a "jackpot." Reach animations include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is "Big Win," the image display device 5 displays a predetermined combination of decorative symbols as the result of the variable display of decorative symbols (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols is "Big Win"). For example, identical decorative symbols (e.g., "7") are aligned and displayed on predetermined active lines in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

If it's a "probability-increasing jackpot" where the game state is controlled to a probability-increasing state after the jackpot state ends, odd-numbered decorative symbols (e.g., "7") may be displayed in a line. If it's a "non-probability-increasing jackpot (normal jackpot)" where the game state is not controlled to a probability-increasing state after the jackpot state ends, even-numbered decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd-numbered decorative symbols are also called probability-increasing symbols, and even-numbered decorative symbols are also called non-probability-increasing symbols (normal symbols). After a reach pattern is reached with non-probability-increasing symbols, an upgrade animation may be performed that ultimately results in a "probability-increasing jackpot."

If the display result of the special game is "miss," the variable display mode of the decorative symbols may not become a reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a confirmed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination (also called "non-reach miss") (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols will be "non-reach miss"). Also, if the display result is "miss," the variable display mode of the decorative symbols may become a reach mode, and then the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a confirmed decorative symbol of a predetermined reach combination that is not a winning combination (also called "reach miss") (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols will be "reach miss").

The Pachinko game machine 1 can perform various effects, including displaying the variable display-compatible displays (such as hold displays and active displays). Other effects, such as a prediction effect that foreshadows the probability of a jackpot, are performed during the variable display of decorative symbols. These prediction effects include those that foreshadow the probability of a jackpot in the currently running variable display, and those that foreshadow the probability of a jackpot in the variable display before execution (variable displays whose execution is pending). As a pre-read prediction effect, the machine may also perform an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display-compatible displays (such as hold displays and active displays) to a mode different from the normal mode.

Furthermore, the image display device 5 may perform a pseudo-consecutive display effect by temporarily pausing the display of the decorative pattern during its variable display and then resuming the variable display, thereby making a single variable display appear as if it were multiple variable displays.

Even during a jackpot game, a jackpot-related animation is performed to indicate the jackpot state. This animation may include an announcement of the number of rounds or an upgrade animation indicating an increase in the value of the jackpot state.

Furthermore, when, for example, a special game is not being played, a demo image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer-waiting demo is performed).

(Circuit board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and other components, as shown in Figure 13. In addition, various other boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also installed. The term "various control boards" is a concept that includes not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on an electronic circuit board.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17. By operating the power switch 91 (turning it ON), power from an AC power source such as AC 100V from an external power source like a commercial power supply can be supplied from the power supply board 17 to electrical components, including the main board 11 and various control boards such as the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting AC to DC, and a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (e.g., DC 12V or DC 5V).

The main board 11 is the main control board and has the function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of special symbol games (including management of held symbols), execution of regular symbol games (including management of held symbols), jackpot game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a single-chip microcomputer and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock 106.

The CPU 103 controls the progress of the game (implementing the functions of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as the variable patterns described later, the performance control commands described later, and various tables referenced when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains its contents for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is interrupted, either partially or entirely. Alternatively, all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 continuously counts and updates numerical data representing various random values (game-specific random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. These game-specific random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (i.e., updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal pattern hold indicator 25C, etc., and solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (such as detection signals indicating that a game ball has passed through or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start switch (first start switch 22A and second start switch 22B), count switch 23) and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signals indicates that the passage or entry of a game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 receives reset signals, power-off signals, and clear signals from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal used to stop the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer IC, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal turns off when the predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period during which the predetermined power supply voltage remains below the predetermined value exceeds the power-off reference time. The clear signal turns on, for example, in response to a press operation on the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The output circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (for example, signals to turn on solenoids 81 and 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to solenoid 81 for the regular electric mechanism and solenoid 82 for the large prize door.

The payout control board 006SG030 is connected to a payout device 006SG031, which is driven to dispense a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 3, 5, 10, 15, etc.) to the player based on the receipt of a payout signal, and a game ball detection sensor 006SG032, which is installed in the payout passage (not shown) through which the game balls dispensed by the payout device 006SG031 pass. The board is capable of stopping the operation of the payout device 006SG031 according to the pattern of the game ball detection signal received from the game ball detection sensor 006SG032.

Furthermore, the payout control board 006SG030 is connected to a handle sensor 006SG034 for detecting the amount of operation performed by the player, and a touch ring 006SG035 (touch sensor) for detecting whether the player is gripping the ball-shooting handle 30. Based on the signals input from these sensors, the payout control board 006SG030 controls the launching device 006SG033, which is capable of launching game balls onto the game board 2. In addition, signals indicating whether the touch ring 006SG035 is detected, and signals indicating that a game ball has been launched by the launching device 006SG033, are input from the payout control board 006SG030 to the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies performance control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the performance control board 12 as part of the control of the game's progress. The performance control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the performance control board 12. These performance control commands include, for example, commands specifying various decision results from the main board 11 (e.g., display results of the special feature game (including the type of jackpot), the variation pattern used when executing the special feature game (details described later)), the game status (e.g., start and end of variable display, opening status of the jackpot opening, occurrence of a jackpot, number of reserved balls, game state), and the occurrence of errors.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11. It receives performance control commands and executes performances (various performances corresponding to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable parts 32, error notifications, and power outage recovery notifications) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, ROM 121, RAM 122, display control unit 123, random number circuit 124, and I/O 125.

The CPU 120 for performance control executes the program stored in the ROM 121, and together with the display control unit 123, performs processing to execute the performance (processing to realize the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining which performance to execute). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 121 (data such as various tables) is used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation may also instruct the display control unit 123 to execute the presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals output when player operation is detected, indicating the operation content as appropriate).

The display control unit 123 is equipped with a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the animation based on animation execution instructions from the animation control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123, based on the execution instructions for the performance control CPU 120, supplies video signals corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5, thereby displaying the performance image on the image display device 5. It also performs display processing, outputting image data from the display image creation area of the VRAM region specified in the display register as a video signal. In this embodiment, the display image creation area and the drawing area switch with each V-blank. Therefore, drawing is performed in the area allocated as the drawing area in one V-blank, and then in the next V-blank, it switches to the display image creation area, so the image data drawn in the previous V-blank is displayed, while drawing continues in the other area during that time.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 14, the display control unit 123 generates an image for display on the image display device 5 by superimposing (combining) multiple layers. Therefore, the VRAM area contains a layer image drawing area for drawing and arranging the images of each layer, and a display image creation area that generates an image for display on the image display device 5 by further superimposing (combining) the images drawn and arranged in each layer image drawing area. Note that each layer image drawing area has the concepts of upper, middle, and lower levels. Images in the upper layer image drawing area have a higher display priority on the image display device 5, while images in the lower layer image drawing area have a lower display priority.

As shown in Figure 15, the VRAM area contains a Layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a background image as the Layer 1 image, a Layer 2 image drawing area for drawing and arranging decorative patterns as the Layer 2 image, a Layer 3 image drawing area for drawing and arranging object images such as characters as the Layer 3 image, a Layer 4 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a crack precursor image (glass plate image 006SG301, etc.) described later as the Layer 4 image, and a Layer 5 image containing a glass plate image 006SG301A as the target image for cracking, displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301A, and a fragment image 006SG resulting from the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A. Layer 5 is an image drawing area for drawing and placing 302; Layer 6 is an image drawing area for drawing and placing the action effect image described later as Layer 6; Layer 7 is an image drawing area for drawing and placing the whiteout image 006SG303 described later as Layer 7; Layer 8 is an image drawing area for drawing and placing the operation prompt image described later as Layer 8; Layer 9 is an image drawing area for drawing and placing the variable display compatible display (hold display and active display); and Layer 10 is an image drawing area for drawing and placing the small symbol (fourth symbol), the first hold memory count, the second hold memory count, and the right-hand shooting notification image. Furthermore, Layer 11 is an image drawing area for drawing and placing error displays.

The glass plate image 006SG301, drawn and placed in the Layer 4 image drawing area, is an image intended to make the player perceive that the display area of the image display device 5 has cracked due to the action of the character or movable body 32. The glass plate image 006SG301A, drawn and placed in the Layer 5 image drawing area, is an image intended to make the player perceive that the display area of the image display device 5 has broken. Furthermore, the fragment image 006SG302 is an image displayed with a modified portion of the glass plate image 006SG301A to emphasize to the player that the display area of the image display device 5 has broken due to the action of the character or movable body 32.

The glass plate image 006SG301 is an image that is hidden at the start timing of the cracking effect (the cracking timing of glass plate image 006SG301A) in the following sequences: the first consecutive cracking effect, the second consecutive cracking effect, the dialogue予告 effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo-consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect. Furthermore, the glass plate image 006SG301A is also the image displayed in place of glass plate image 006SG301 (the cracking target image) at the start timing of the cracking effect (the cracking timing of glass plate image 006SG301A) in the following sequences: the first consecutive cracking effect, the second consecutive cracking effect, the dialogue予告 effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo-consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect.

Furthermore, as will be described later, the start timing of the cracking effects in the first consecutive cracking effect, second consecutive cracking effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect is such that the display of the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A are not visible to the player due to the display of the whiteout image 006SG303. Therefore, in this embodiment, the glass plate image 006SG301 displaying cracks can be switched to the glass plate image 006SG301A without the player noticing, making it possible to realize a crack (movement display of fragment image 006SG302) that cannot be expected from the cracks displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301, and thus making a strong impression of the cracking effect on the player.

In this embodiment, by superimposing the images drawn and arranged in the Layer 1 to Layer 10 image drawing areas, an image can be generated to be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. Furthermore, as shown in Figures 15 and 16, the image drawn in the Layer 1 image drawing area has the lowest display priority, the image drawn in the Layer 2 image drawing area has a higher display priority than the image drawn in the Layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the Layer 3 image drawing area has a higher display priority than the image drawn in the Layer 2 image drawing area, the image drawn in the Layer 4 image drawing area has a higher display priority than the image drawn in the Layer 3 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the Layer 5 image drawing area has a higher display priority than the image drawn in the Layer 4 image drawing area. Images drawn in the Layer 6 image drawing area have a higher display priority than images drawn in the Layer 5 image drawing area, images drawn in the Layer 7 image drawing area have a higher display priority than images drawn in the Layer 6 image drawing area, images drawn in the Layer 8 image drawing area have a higher display priority than images drawn in the Layer 7 image drawing area, images drawn in the Layer 9 image drawing area have a higher display priority than images drawn in the Layer 8 image drawing area, and images drawn in the Layer 10 image drawing area have a higher display priority than images drawn in the Layer 9 image drawing area. Furthermore, if a Layer 11 image drawing area is further placed in the VRAM area, images drawn in the Layer 11 image drawing area will have a higher display priority than images drawn in the Layer 10 image drawing area.

In other words, the image drawn in the Layer 1 image drawing area is the lowest-level image displayed on the image display device 5, the image drawn in the Layer 2 image drawing area is displayed above (prioritized) the image drawn in the Layer 1 image drawing area on the image display device 5, the image drawn in the Layer 3 image drawing area is displayed above (prioritized) the image drawn in the Layer 2 image drawing area on the image display device 5, the image drawn in the Layer 4 image drawing area is displayed above (prioritized) the image drawn in the Layer 3 image drawing area on the image display device 5, the image drawn in the Layer 5 image drawing area is displayed above (prioritized) the image drawn in the Layer 4 image drawing area on the image display device 5, and the image drawn in the Layer 6 image drawing area is the lowest-level image displayed on the image display device 5, the image drawn in the Layer 2 image drawing area is the highest-level image displayed on the image display device 5, the image drawn in the Layer 5 image drawing area is the highest-level image displayed on the image display device 5, and the image drawn in the Layer 6 image drawing area is the lowest-level image displayed on the image display device 5. The images drawn are displayed (prioritized) above the images drawn in the Layer 5 image drawing area on the image display device 5; the images drawn in the Layer 7 image drawing area are displayed (prioritized) above the images drawn in the Layer 6 image drawing area on the image display device 5; the images drawn in the Layer 8 image drawing area are displayed (prioritized) above the images drawn in the Layer 7 image drawing area on the image display device 5; the images drawn in the Layer 9 image drawing area are displayed (prioritized) above the images drawn in the Layer 8 image drawing area on the image display device 5; and the images drawn in the Layer 10 image drawing area are displayed (prioritized) above the images drawn in the Layer 9 image drawing area on the image display device 5. Furthermore, if a Layer 11 image drawing area is further arranged in the VRAM area, the images drawn in the Layer 11 image drawing area are displayed (prioritized) above the images drawn in the Layer 10 image drawing area on the image display device 5. Furthermore, although it has been explained that there is a Layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging background images, instead of the Layer 1 image drawing area, there may be a Layer 1-1 image drawing area, a Layer 1-2 image drawing area, and a Layer 1-3 image drawing area. In this case, the Layer 1-1 image drawing area can be used to draw the normal background images (first background image 006SG081, sixth background image) described later, the Layer 1-2 image drawing area can be used to draw the chance background images (second background image 006SG082, seventh background image) described later, the normal reach background image, the super reach α background image (weak S reach effect image 006SG088), the super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) described later, and the Layer 1-3 image drawing area can be used to draw the background effect image (background effect image 006SG322) described later, large The system can display a winning notification background image (fifth background image 006SG085). Images drawn in the Layer 1-3 image drawing area have a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than images drawn in the Layer 2 image drawing area. Images drawn in the Layer 1-2 image drawing area have a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than images drawn in the Layer 1-3 image drawing area. Images drawn in the Layer 1-1 image drawing area have a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than images drawn in the Layer 1-2 image drawing area.

In this embodiment, the transparency of the images drawn and placed in each image drawing area is set to 0% so that when superimposed, the overlapping areas of the upper image and the lower image are not visible to the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the situation, the transparency of the images drawn and placed in each image drawing area may be set to a value higher than 0%, and images that are displayed transparently or temporarily hidden may be provided on the display screen of the image display device 5.

The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound specification signal (a signal specifying the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal specifying the on/off mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to synchronize sound output with the display of the performance image and to turn the game effect lamp 9 on/off. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or the drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving speakers 8L and 8R. Based on the specified audio signal, it drives speakers 8L and 8R and outputs the audio specified by the audio signal from speakers 8L and 8R.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9. Based on the lamp signal, it drives the game effect lamp 9 and turns it on/off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the on/off status of the lamp.

Furthermore, the control of audio output, lamp on/off (supply of sound specification signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals to operate the movable body 32, etc.) may be performed by the performance control CPU 120.

The random number circuit 124 keeps an updatable count of numerical data representing various random values (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. These random numbers for effects may be updated by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for receiving performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound specification signals, lamp signals).

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As in the pachinko machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or the sub-boards of machine 1 may be configured to have multiple functions.

Figure 14(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of a performance control command used in this embodiment. The performance control command is, for example, a two-byte structure, where the first byte indicates MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "0", and the first bit of the EXT data is also "0". Note that the command form shown in Figure 14(A) is just an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command consists of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or three or more.

In the example shown in Figure 17(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variation pattern specification command that specifies the variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) of decorative symbols (also called performance symbols) that are variably displayed in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, corresponding to the variable display of special symbols in the special game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and it can be any value that is arbitrarily set according to the instructions given by the performance control command. Note that different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern specified in the variation pattern specification command.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, a performance control command that specifies variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result specification command, different EXT data is set depending on the determination result (pre-determined result) of whether the variable display result (also called the variable display result) is a "miss" or a "jackpot," and the determination result (jackpot type determination result) of which of several types of jackpots to use if the variable display result is a "jackpot."

In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in Figure 17(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result specification command that indicates a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "probability variation jackpot A", as well as the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "probability variation jackpot B", as well as the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "probability variation jackpot C", as well as the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C04H is the fifth variable display result specification command, which notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "Big Win" and the big win type will be "Non-Probability Variation Big Win," as well as the big win type determination result.

Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command that specifies the stopping (confirmation) of the variation of decorative symbols in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. Command 9000H is a power-on specification command that specifies that the pachinko game machine 1 has performed a cold start (power was turned on with the clear switch 92 pressed (power-on with initialization)). A cold start refers to a state in which, when power is turned on, the data is initialized without restoring the data from before power-on, and the game machine is made capable of performing various processes. Command 9200H is a power-out recovery specification command that specifies that the pachinko game machine has performed a hot start (power was turned on with the clear switch 92 not pressed (power-on without initialization)). A hot start refers to a state in which, when power is turned on, the game machine is made capable of performing various processes based on the backed-up data. Since a hot start does not involve initialization, it is also called a power-on without initialization. Command 95XXH is a game state specification command that specifies the current game state in the pachinko machine 1. Depending on the current game state of the pachinko machine 1, different EXT data is set using this game state specification command. For example, command 9500H is the first game state specification command corresponding to a game state where neither time-saving control nor probability-changing control is performed (low probability, low base state, normal state). Command 9501H is the second game state specification command corresponding to a game state where time-saving control is performed but probability-changing control is not (low probability, high base state, time-saving state). Command 9502H is the third game state specification command corresponding to a game state where both time-saving control and probability-changing control are performed (high probability, high base state, probability-changing state). Note that the high probability, high base state is sometimes simply referred to as the "probability-changing state."

Command A0XXH is a win start command (also called the "fanfare command") that specifies the display of a visual effect indicating the start of a jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a jackpot opening notification command that indicates the period during which the jackpot opening is open during a jackpot game. Command A2XXH is a jackpot opening after notification command that indicates the period during which the jackpot opening has changed from open to closed during a jackpot game. Command A3XXH is a win end command that specifies the display of a visual effect at the end of a jackpot game.

In the win start and win end commands, different EXT data may be set depending on the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting EXT data similar to that of the variable display result specification command. Alternatively, in the win start and win end commands, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. In the big prize slot open notification command and the big prize slot after opening notification command, different EXT data may be set, for example, corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the jackpot state described later (e.g., "0" to "10").

Command B100H is a first-start-entry designation command that notifies the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A has been met, based on the detection of a game ball that has passed through (entered) the first start-entry

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory count notification command that notifies the first reserved memory count in order to identify the number of reserved special symbols. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory count notification command that notifies the second reserved memory count in order to identify the number of reserved special symbols. The first reserved memory count notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when a first start-up-entry designation command is transmitted, for example, based on the first start condition being met when a game ball passes through (enters) the first start-up-entry Furthermore, the first and second reserved memory count notification commands may be sent in response to the start of the special game execution when either the first or second start condition is met (i.e., when the number of reserved memories decreases).

Commands C4XXH and C6XXH are performance control commands (winning result specification commands) that indicate the content of the winning result judgment. Of these, command C4XXH is a symbol specification command that indicates whether the variable display result is a "jackpot" and the type of jackpot (probability variation, non-probability variation, or sudden probability variation) as the winning result judgment. Command C6XXH is a variation category command that indicates the result of determining whether the random value used for variation pattern judgment will result in "non-reach," "super reach," or "other (normal reach)" as the winning result judgment.

Instead of sending the first and second pending memory count notification commands, a total pending memory count notification command may be sent to notify the total number of pending memories. That is, a total pending memory count notification command may be used to notify of an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Note that the commands shown in Figure 17(A) are just examples, and the system may omit some of these commands, use different commands in place of these, or add other commands. For example, a command to notify the number of prize balls dispensed based on each prize ball entering a prize slot, a gate passage notification command to notify when a game ball has passed through gate 41, and a notification command to notify the remaining number of variable display rounds for which probability variation control or time reduction control is executed may be provided.

Figure 18 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the random values counted on the main board 11. As shown in Figure 18, on the main board 11, numerical data representing the random values MR1 for determining the special display result, MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and MR4 for determining the normal display result are controlled to be countable. Note that other random values may be used to enhance the game's effectiveness. These random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game-specific random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data that represents some or all of these random values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 may use a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown), and update various numerical data via software to count numerical data that represents some of the random values MR1 to MR4.

The random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is used to determine whether or not to control the game into a jackpot state by treating the variable display result, such as a special symbol, as a "jackpot." For example, it takes a value in the range of "0" to "65536." The random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is used to determine the jackpot type ("Probability Variation Jackpot A," "Probability Variation Jackpot B," "Probability Variation Jackpot C," or "Non-Probability Variation Jackpot") when the variable display result is a "jackpot." For example, it takes a value in the range of "0" to "100."

The random value MR3 used for determining the variation pattern is a random value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols to one of several pre-defined types, and takes values in the range of "0" to "997".

The random value MR4 used for determining the result of the regular symbol display is a random value used to determine whether the variable display result in the regular symbol game using the regular symbol display unit 20 is a "regular symbol win" or a "regular symbol loss," and takes values in the range of "3" to "13," for example.

Figure 19 shows an example of the configuration of the display result determination table stored in ROM 101. In this embodiment, a common display result determination table is used for both the first and second special figures. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and separate display result determination tables may be used for the first and second special figures.

The display result determination table is a table referenced in special symbol games using the first special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the confirmed special symbol resulting in a variable display is derived and displayed, this table determines, based on the random value MR1 used for determining the special symbol display result, whether or not to control the game into a jackpot state as a "jackpot."

In the display result determination table, a numerical value (determination value) is assigned to the special symbol display result of "Big Win" or "Miss," depending on whether the game state of the pachinko machine 1 is the normal state, the time-saving state (low probability state), or the probability variation state (high probability state).

In the display result determination table, the table data showing the determination value compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is determination data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special symbol display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In the display result determination table, when the game state is a probability variation state (high probability state), more determination values are assigned to the special symbol display result of "jackpot" when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, the probability of determining to control the special symbol display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" is higher (approximately 1/30 in this embodiment) compared to the probability of determining to control the special symbol display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" when the pachinko game rr is in a time-saving state (low probability state) (approximately 1/300 in this embodiment). In other words, in the display result determination table, the determination data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the game to a jackpot state, such that when the game state of the pachinko machine 1 is a probability variation state (high probability state), the probability of determining whether or not to control it to a jackpot state is higher compared to when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

Figure 20(A) shows an example of the configuration of the jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. In this embodiment, the jackpot type determination table is referenced to determine the jackpot type from several types based on the random value MR2 used for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special symbol display result should be controlled to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In the jackpot type determination table, depending on whether the special symbol that was variably displayed (variable display) in the special symbol game was a first special symbol (special symbol game using the first special symbol display device 4A) or a second special symbol (special symbol game using the second special symbol display device 4B), the numerical value (determination value) compared with the random value MR2 used for jackpot type determination is assigned to one of several types of jackpots, such as "non-probability variation jackpot," "probability variation jackpot A," "probability variation jackpot B," and "probability variation jackpot C."

Here, the types of jackpots in this embodiment will be explained using Figure 20(B). In this embodiment, the types of jackpots are set as follows: "Probability Variation Jackpot A," "Probability Variation Jackpot B," and "Probability Variation Jackpot C," in which probability variation control and time reduction control are executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a high probability, high base state; and "Non-Probability Variation Jackpot," in which only time reduction control is executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a low probability, high base state.

The jackpot game state resulting from "Probability-increasing Jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable ball entry device 7 is changed to a first state advantageous to the player 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) and this is repeated. On the other hand, the jackpot game state resulting from "Probability-increasing Jackpot B" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable ball entry device 7 is changed to a first state advantageous to the player 5 times (so-called 5 rounds) and this is repeated. The jackpot game state resulting from "Probability-increasing Jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable ball entry device 7 is changed to a first state advantageous to the player 2 times (so-called 2 rounds) and this is repeated. In addition, the jackpot game state resulting from "Non-Probability-increasing Jackpot" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable ball entry device 7 is changed to a first state advantageous to the player 5 times (so-called 5 rounds) and this is repeated. Therefore, "Bonus Win A" may be referred to as a 10-round (10R) bonus win, "Bonus Win B" as a 5-round (5R) bonus win, and "Bonus Win C" as a 2-round (2R) bonus win.

The probability variation control and time-saving control that begin after the end of the jackpot game state of probability variation jackpot A to probability variation jackpot C are terminated on the condition that the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state. Furthermore, the time-saving control that begins after the end of the jackpot game state of a non-probability variation jackpot is terminated on the condition that 100 variable displays are completed, or that the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state before the completion of the 100 variable displays. Therefore, if the next jackpot is one of probability variation jackpots A to probability variation jackpot C, the probability variation control and time-saving control are executed again after the end of the jackpot game state, resulting in a so-called continuous jackpot state where jackpot game states occur continuously without going through the normal state. In other words, the probability variation state in this embodiment is a game state that continues until the variable display result is a jackpot, regardless of the number of variable displays, while the time-saving state in this embodiment is a game state that is controlled to the normal state by executing 100 variable displays if the variable display result is not a jackpot. Therefore, the time-saving state is also a game state that is controlled when a winning streak is about to end.

In the example setting of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 20(A), the assignment of determination values to the jackpot types "Probability Variation Jackpot A," "Probability Variation Jackpot B," "Probability Variation Jackpot C," and "Non-Probability Variation Jackpot" differs depending on whether the variable-display special symbol is the first special symbol or the second special symbol. That is, when the variable-display special symbol is the first special symbol, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "81" to "100") are assigned to the jackpot types "Probability Variation Jackpot B" and "Probability Variation Jackpot C," which have fewer rounds. On the other hand, when the variable-display special symbol is the second special symbol, no determination values are assigned to the jackpot types "Probability Variation Jackpot B" and "Probability Variation Jackpot C." This configuration allows for different rates of determining the jackpot type to be "Probability Variation Jackpot B" or "Probability Variation Jackpot C," which have fewer rounds, depending on whether the first start condition for starting a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is met, or whether the second start condition for starting a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is met. In particular, in special symbol games using the second special symbol, the jackpot type is never controlled to be "Probability Variation Jackpot B" or "Probability Variation Jackpot C," which result in fewer rounds. Therefore, for example, in game states where game balls are more likely to enter the second starting entry point formed by the variable prize ball entry device 6B due to high-opening control associated with time-saving control, frequent occurrences of jackpot states with fewer prize balls can be avoided, thus preventing a decrease in game enjoyment.

Furthermore, in the example setting of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 20(A), the assignment of determination values for the "non-probability variation" jackpot type is the same regardless of whether it is the first or second special symbol game. Therefore, the probability of a non-probability variation jackpot and the probability of a probability variation jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first or second special symbol game.

Therefore, as mentioned above, just as the assignment of judgment values for "Probability Variation Jackpot B" and "Probability Variation Jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is a special game of the first or second special symbol, the assignment of judgment values for "Probability Variation Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is a special game of the first or second special symbol. For "Probability Variation Jackpot A," which has a large number of rounds, it is set to be more likely to be determined when it is a special game of the second special symbol than when it is a special game of the first special symbol.

Furthermore, even in the case of a special feature game using the second special feature, a different range of predetermined judgment values than those used in the case of a special feature game using the first special feature may be assigned to the jackpot types "Probability Variation Jackpot B" and "Probability Variation Jackpot C". For example, in the case of a special feature game using the second special feature, a smaller judgment value than in the case of a special feature game using the first special feature may be assigned to the jackpot types "Probability Variation Jackpot B" and "Probability Variation Jackpot C". Alternatively, regardless of whether it is a special feature game using the first or second special feature, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data.

Figures 21(A) and 21(B) show the variation patterns in this embodiment. In this embodiment, multiple variation patterns are pre-prepared for cases where the variable display result is a "miss" when the game state is a normal state (low probability low base state) and a time-saving state or probability variation state (low probability high base state or high probability high base state), corresponding to cases where the variable display mode of the decorative symbols is "not a reach" and "a reach", as well as for cases where the variable display result is a "jackpot". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbols is "not a reach" is called the non-reach variation pattern (also called the "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbols is "a reach" is called the reach variation pattern (also called the "reach miss variation pattern"). Furthermore, non-reach variation patterns and reach variation patterns are included in the "miss variation patterns" that correspond to cases where the variable display result is "miss." Variation patterns that correspond to cases where the variable display result is "jackpot" are called jackpot variation patterns.

There are two types of winning and winning combination patterns: normal winning combination patterns, where the winning animation for a normal winning combination is executed, and super winning combination patterns, where the winning animation for a super winning combination is executed.

In this embodiment, when the game state is the normal state (low probability, low base state), the following super reach variation patterns are provided: a variation pattern in which a pseudo-consecutive performance including temporary stopping of decorative symbols and re-variable display is performed once during the variable display, followed by a normal reach and then the reach performance of super reach α, resulting in a loss or a big win for the variable display (PA2-2, PB1-2); a variation pattern in which no pseudo-consecutive performance is performed, followed by a normal reach and then the reach performance of super reach β, resulting in a loss or a big win for the variable display (PA2-3, PB1-3); and a variation pattern in which a pseudo-consecutive performance is performed twice, followed by a normal reach and the reach performance of super reach α, and then the reach performance of super reach β, resulting in a loss or a big win for the variable display (PA2-4, PB1-4). Furthermore, in this embodiment, the reach animation for Super Reach α corresponds to the weak S reach animation described later, and the reach animation for Super Reach β corresponds to the strong S reach animation A and strong S reach animation B described later.

Furthermore, when the game state is a time-saving state or a probability variation state (low probability high base state or high probability high base state), the following Super Reach variation patterns are provided: a variation pattern (PA2-6, PB1-6) in which the Super Reach γ reach animation is executed via a normal reach and the variable display result is either a miss or a jackpot; and a variation pattern (PA2-7, PB1-7) in which the Super Reach δ reach animation is executed via a normal reach and the variable display result is either a miss or a jackpot. In this embodiment, the Super Reach γ reach animation corresponds to the weak S reach animation described later, and the Super Reach δ reach animation corresponds to the strong S reach animation A and strong S reach animation B described later.

As shown in Figure 21, the special symbol variation time for the normal reach variation pattern in this embodiment, during which the reach animation is performed, is set to be shorter than that for the super reach variation pattern.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot increases in the order of Super Reach, Normal Reach, and Non-Reach. Therefore, in both the Normal Reach and Super Reach variation patterns, the longer the special symbol variation time, the higher the probability of winning a jackpot.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, a random value for fluctuation pattern type determination may be provided, and the type of fluctuation pattern may be determined first from these random values for fluctuation pattern type determination, and then the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type may be determined.

Figure 22 is an explanatory diagram of the method for determining the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the variation pattern determination table to be selected differs depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed, the number of reserved items, the game state, etc.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 22(A) to 22(D), when the game state is the normal state (low base state) and the variable display result is a miss, if the number of reserved special symbols that execute the variable display (number of same-type reserved symbols) is 1 or less, the variation pattern is determined based on the value of the miss variation pattern determination table A and the random value MR3. If the number of reserved special symbols that execute the variable display is 2, the variation pattern is determined based on the value of the miss variation pattern determination table B and the random value MR3. If the number of reserved special symbols that execute the variable display is 3, the variation pattern is determined based on the value of the miss variation pattern determination table C and the random value MR3. Furthermore, when the game state is the time-saving state or the probability variation state (high base state) and the variable display result is a miss, the variation pattern is determined based on the value of the miss variation pattern determination table D and the random value MR3. Then, as shown in Figures 22(E) and 22(F), when the game state is the normal state (low base state) and the variable display result is a jackpot, the variation pattern is determined based on the jackpot variation pattern determination table A and the value of the random number MR3. When the game state is the time-saving state or the probability variation state (high base state) and the variable display result is a jackpot, the variation pattern is determined based on the jackpot variation pattern determination table B and the value of the random number MR3.

For example, as shown in Figure 22(A), if the losing variation pattern determination table A is selected, if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 1 to 660, the variation pattern is determined to be a non-reach miss variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening; if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 661 to 900, the variation pattern is determined to be a normal reach miss variation pattern (PA2-1); and if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 901 to 970, the variation pattern is determined to be a normal reach after executing a pseudo-consecutive performance once. The system determines the variation pattern (PA2-2) where Super Reach α fails via Chi, and if the random value MR3 is within the range of 971 to 990, the variation pattern is determined to be: If the system determines the variation pattern (PA2-3) where Super Reach β fails via Normal Reach, and if the random value MR3 is within the range of 991 to 997, the variation pattern is determined to be: If the system executes the pseudo-consecutive演出 twice, the system determines the variation pattern (PA2-4) where Super Reach β fails via Normal Reach and Super Reach α.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 22(B), if the losing variation pattern determination table B is selected, the variation pattern is determined to be a shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2) if the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 1 to 700, the variation pattern is determined to be a normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) if the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 701 to 900, the variation pattern is determined to be a normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) if the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 901 to 970, the variation pattern is determined to be a loss of Super Reach α via a normal reach after executing a pseudo-consecutive performance once (PA2-2), the variation pattern is determined to be a loss of Super Reach β via a normal reach (PA2-3) if the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 971 to 990, and the variation pattern is determined to be a loss of Super Reach β via a normal reach after executing a pseudo-consecutive performance twice (PA2-4)

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 22(C), if the losing variation pattern determination table C is selected, the variation pattern is determined to be a shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3) if the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 1 to 750, the variation pattern is determined to be a normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) if the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 751 to 900, the variation pattern is determined to be a normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) if the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 901 to 970, the variation pattern is determined to be a loss of Super Reach α via a normal reach after executing a pseudo-consecutive performance once (PA2-2), the variation pattern is determined to be a loss of Super Reach β via a normal reach (PA2-3) if the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 971 to 990, and the variation pattern is determined to be a loss of Super Reach β via a normal reach after executing a pseudo-consecutive performance twice (PA2-4) if the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 991 to 997.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 22(D), if the losing variation pattern determination table D is selected, the variation pattern is determined to be a short non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-4) if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 1 to 300, the variation pattern is determined to be a non-reach loss variation pattern (PA2-5) if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 301 to 550, and the variation pattern is determined to be a non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-6) if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 551 to 750. If the random value MR3 is within the range of 751 to 900, the variation pattern is determined to be the normal reach miss variation pattern (PA2-5). If the random value MR3 is within the range of 901 to 970, the variation pattern is determined to be the normal reach via a super reach γ miss variation pattern (PA2-6). If the random value MR3 is within the range of 971 to 997, the variation pattern is determined to be the normal reach via a super reach δ miss variation pattern (PA2-7).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 22(E), when the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected, if the random value MR3 is within the range of 1 to 30, the variation pattern is determined to be the variation pattern for a normal reach jackpot (PB1-1). If the random value MR3 is within the range of 31 to 200, the variation pattern is determined to be the variation pattern (PB1-2) which proceeds to a Super Reach α jackpot via a normal reach after one pseudo-consecutive performance. If the random value MR3 is within the range of 201 to 500, the variation pattern is determined to be the variation pattern (PB1-3) which proceeds to a Super Reach β jackpot via a normal reach. If the random value MR3 is within the range of 501 to 997, the variation pattern is determined to be the variation pattern (PB1-4) which proceeds to a Super Reach β jackpot via a normal reach and Super Reach α after two pseudo-consecutive performances.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 22(F), when the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected, if the random value MR3 is within the range of 1 to 100, the variation pattern is determined to be a non-reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-5). If the random value MR3 is within the range of 101 to 400, the variation pattern is determined to be a variation pattern that leads to a Super Reach γ jackpot via a Normal Reach (PB1-6). If the random value MR3 is within the range of 401 to 997, the variation pattern is determined to be a variation pattern that leads to a Super Reach δ jackpot via a Normal Reach (PB1-7).

In this embodiment, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the variation pattern is determined at a rate of 1 regardless of the type of jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination ratios for multiple jackpot variation patterns may be different depending on the type of jackpot. By doing so, the player's attention can be drawn to which variation pattern resulted in a jackpot, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in Figure 2 may be a backup RAM, where part or all of its contents are backed up by a backup power supply generated on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is interrupted, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 will be preserved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor acting as the backup power supply discharges and the backup power supply becomes unable to supply power). In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, i.e., the control state of the game control means (such as the special symbol process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls should be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is the data necessary to restore the control state to what it was before the power outage occurred, based on that data, when power is restored after a power outage or the like. Furthermore, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data storage area 006SG150, as shown in Figure 23, which is a region for storing various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The game control data storage area 006SG150 shown in Figure 23 includes a first special symbol hold storage unit 006SG151A, a second special symbol hold storage unit 006SG151B, a regular symbol hold storage unit 006SG151C, a game control flag setting unit 006SG152, a game control timer setting unit 006SG153, a game control counter setting unit 006SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 006SG155.

The first special symbol hold memory unit 006SG151A stores hold data for special symbol games (special symbol games using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) in order of winning, where a game ball has passed through (entered) the first starting entry opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, resulting in a starting entry (first starting entry), but the game has not yet started.

The second special symbol hold memory unit 006SG151B stores hold data for special symbol games (special symbol games using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) in order of winning, where a game ball has passed through (entered) the second starting entry opening formed by the variable prize ball device 6B, resulting in a starting entry (second starting entry), but the game has not yet started.

As an example, the first special symbol hold memory unit 006SG151A associates the hold number with the order in which the game balls enter the first starting prize slot (the order in which the game balls are detected), and stores numerical data representing the random value MR1 for determining the variable display result, the random value MR2 for determining the type of win, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the fulfillment of the first starting condition when the game ball passes through (enters), as hold data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). Furthermore, the second special symbol hold memory unit 006SG151B associates the hold number with the order in which the game balls enter the second starting prize entry point (the order in which the game balls are detected). Based on the fulfillment of the first starting condition during the passage (entry) of the game ball, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data representing the random value MR1 for variable display result determination, the random value MR2 for win type determination, and the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination. This data is stored as hold data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

Thus, the reserved data stored in the first special symbol reserved memory unit 006SG151A and the second special symbol reserved memory unit 006SG151B indicates that the execution of the special symbol game using the first special symbol or the special symbol game using the second special symbol is reserved. This reserved information allows for the determination of whether or not a jackpot will be achieved based on the variable display results (special symbol display results) in these special symbol games.

In this embodiment, when the reserved information (first reserved information) based on the fulfillment of the first start condition (when the game ball passes through the first start prize entry opening) and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the fulfillment of the second start prize entry (when the game ball passes through the second start prize entry opening) are stored in separate reserved storage units in association with reserved numbers, the variable display based on the second reserved storage information is executed with priority over the variable display based on the first reserved information.

The regular symbol hold storage unit 006SG151C stores hold information for regular symbol games that have not yet been started by the regular symbol display unit 20, even though a game ball has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the regular symbol hold storage unit 006SG151C associates the hold number with the order in which the game balls are detected by the gate switch 21, and stores numerical data such as a random value MR4 for determining the regular symbol display result, extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the passage of the game balls, as hold data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 006SG152 is equipped with multiple types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 006SG152 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating whether it is on or off for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 006SG153 is equipped with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 006SG153 stores data indicating the timer values for each of several types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 006SG154 is equipped with multiple types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 006SG154 stores data indicating the count values for each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 006SG154 may also be equipped with a random counter for counting some or all of the random numbers used for the game, which can be updated by the CPU 103 via software.

The random counter in the game control counter setting unit 006SG154 stores random values not generated by the random number circuit 104, such as numerical data representing random values MR1 to MR4, as random count values. The numerical data representing each random value is updated periodically or irregularly in response to software execution by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count values may update the random count values independently of the numerical data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or it may update the random count values by applying predetermined processing, such as scrambling or arithmetic processing, to all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit 006SG155 is equipped with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 006SG155 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of several types of buffers.

The ROM 121 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 2 stores not only the program for performance control, but also various data tables used to control performance operations. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data that constitutes multiple judgment tables prepared for the performance control CPU 120 to perform various judgments, decisions, and settings, as well as pattern data that constitutes various performance control patterns.

As an example, ROM 121 stores a performance control pattern table containing multiple types of performance control patterns used by the performance control CPU 120 to control the performance operations of various performance devices (e.g., image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamps 9 and decorative LEDs, performance models, etc.). The performance control patterns consist of data indicating the control content, corresponding to various performance operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. The performance control pattern table should contain, for example, performance control patterns for when the special symbol is displayed, pre-announcement performance control patterns, and various other performance control patterns.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 2 is provided with a performance control data storage area 006SG190, as shown in Figure 24(A), which is a region for storing various data used to control performance operations. The performance control data storage area 006SG190 shown in Figure 24(A) includes a performance control flag setting unit 006SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 006SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 006SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 006SG194.

The performance control flag setting unit 006SG191 is equipped with multiple types of flags whose status can be updated according to the performance operation status, such as the display status of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, or performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 006SG191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 006SG192 is equipped with multiple types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 006SG192 stores data indicating the timer values for each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit 006SG193 is equipped with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit 006SG193 stores data indicating the count value for each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 006SG194 is equipped with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 006SG194 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of several types of buffers.

In this embodiment, the data constituting the start-up winning command buffer 006SG194A, as shown in Figure 24(B), is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting unit 006SG194. The start-up winning command buffer 006SG194A is provided with a storage area corresponding to the maximum value of the total number of reserved memories in the first special feature reserve memory (for example, "4") (areas corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") and a storage area corresponding to the first special feature during variable display (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0"). Furthermore, the start-up winning command buffer 006SG194A is provided with a storage area corresponding to the maximum value of the total number of reserved memories in the second special feature reserve memory (for example, "4") (areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") and a storage area corresponding to the second special feature during variable display (area corresponding to buffer number "2-0"). When a starting prize is awarded at the first or second starting prize slot, four commands—a starting slot entry designation command (either the first or second starting slot entry designation command), a hold memory count notification command (either the first or second hold memory count notification command), a symbol designation command, and a variation category command—are transmitted as a set from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The storage areas corresponding to the first and second special symbol hold memory in the starting prize award reception command buffer 006SG194A are configured to store these commands separately, in the first and second special symbol hold memory, respectively, by associating them with each other.

The contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted one by one to higher positions, as described later, when the start condition is met and the variable display of the highest-level reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") begins. Furthermore, the contents of buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0," which store the contents of the reserved memory for which the start condition was met, are cleared during the special symbol win waiting process executed when the variable display ends.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the start-up winning command buffer 006SG194A has a storage area reserved for each storage area (entry) so that it can store a hold display flag, which has a flag value set according to the display pattern (display mode) of the hold memory display, and a continuous break effect flag, which can identify whether or not it is subject to the continuous break effect described later, in association with each buffer number corresponding to the first special symbol hold memory and the second special symbol hold memory.

Furthermore, the pending display flag stores "0" if the pending display animation is not executed during the pending display animation determination process described later. If the pending display animation is executed, it is set to "1" (square (◇)) or "2" (star (☆)), corresponding to a special display pattern for the pending memory display that differs from the normal display (e.g., a square (◇) or a star (☆)). After the pending display animation determination process is executed, the pending display update process, described later, is performed, causing the active display and pending display to display in a manner corresponding to each pending display flag (for example, a white circle (○) if the pending display flag value is "0", a square (◇) if the pending display flag value is "1", and a star (☆) if the pending display flag value is "2"). The value of the continuous break animation flag is set during the continuous break animation setting process described later (see Figure 37).

The CPU 120 for performance control stores commands in the first empty entry (the entry with the lowest buffer number) corresponding to the first special symbol hold memory in the command buffer 006SG194A when a ball is entered into the first starting entry slot. Similarly, when a ball is entered into the second starting entry slot, the CPU 120 stores commands in the first empty entry (the entry with the lowest buffer number) corresponding to the second special symbol hold memory in the command buffer 006SG194A. Upon entry, the following commands are transmitted sequentially: a starting slot entry specification command, a hold memory count notification command, a symbol specification command, and a variation category command. Therefore, upon command reception, the starting slot entry specification command, hold memory count notification command, symbol specification command, and variation category command are sequentially stored in the storage areas corresponding to the last digits "0" through "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first or second special symbol hold memory.

As shown in Figure 24(B), the commands stored in the start-up prize-receiving command buffer 006SG194A are changed each time a variable display of decorative symbols is started. The commands stored in the entry corresponding to the previously completed variable display hold memory (the entry with buffer number "1-0" or "2-0") are deleted, and the contents of the entries stored in the entry corresponding to the hold memory of the variable display to be started (the entry corresponding to buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") and the contents of the entries after the hold memory of the variable display to be started are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in Figure 24(B), when the variable display of the decorative symbols of the first special symbol hold memory is completed, each command stored in buffer number "0" is deleted, each command stored in buffer number "0" is shifted to buffer number "0", each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3", respectively. Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes the area (entry) for storing each command related to the variable-display pending memory at that time.

(operation)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of the main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power is supplied to the pachinko game machine 1, the game control microcomputer 100 starts up, and the main game control processing is executed by the CPU 103. Figure 25 is a flowchart showing the main game control processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the main game control process shown in Figure 25, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to disabled (step S1). Next, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). These initial settings include setting the stack pointer, setting the registers of built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to an accessible state.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are met (step S3). The recovery conditions are met when the clear signal is in the off state, backup data exists, and the backup RAM is functioning correctly. When power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, for example, if the clear switch on the power supply board 17 is pressed, an ON clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an ON clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery conditions are not met. The backup data only needs to be storable in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors are checked or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery conditions are met (Step S3; Yes), the recovery process (Step S4) is executed, followed by the random number circuit setting process (Step S8). The recovery process in Step S4 sets the work area based on the contents of RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state is restored to what it was when the power supply was interrupted. For example, if the special symbols were changing, it is sufficient that the special symbol changes can be resumed from the state before the interruption.

Furthermore, if the recovery conditions are not met (Step S3; No), the initialization process (Step S6) is executed, followed by the random number circuit setting process (Step S8). The initialization process in Step S6 includes a clear process that clears the flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102. The execution of the clear process sets initial values in the work area.

After the random number circuit setting process (step S8) is executed, the CPU 103 sets the registers of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically triggered at predetermined intervals (e.g., 2 ms) (step S9), and enables the interrupt (step S10). Then, the loop process begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (e.g., 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

The CPU 103, which has executed the main game control processing, receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and, upon accepting the interrupt request, executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of Figure 26. Upon starting the game control timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 26, the CPU 103 first performs a predetermined switch process to determine whether detection signals have been received from various switches, such as the gate switch 21, the first start switch 22A, the second start switch 22B, and the count switch 23, via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error processing, the CPU 103 diagnoses an abnormality in the pachinko game machine 1 and, if necessary, generates a warning based on the diagnosis result (step S22). After this, by executing a predetermined information output process, the CPU 103 outputs data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.), start information (information indicating the number of start-up wins, etc.), and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the game entered a probability variation state, etc.), which are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output processing, the main board 11 performs a game random number update process to update at least a portion of the random numbers used for gameplay via software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing each time a timer interrupt occurs, the execution and management of special symbol games, control of the jackpot game state, and control of the game state are realized.

Following the special symbol processing, the normal symbol processing is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol processing each time a timer interrupt occurs, enabling the execution and management of the normal symbol game based on detection signals from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of a game ball through the gate 41), as well as the opening control of the variable prize ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol win." The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal symbol holds is displayed by lighting the normal symbol hold display 25C.

After the normal pattern processing is executed, the following may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing: processing when a power outage occurs, processing for dispensing prize balls, etc. Then, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set to transmit performance control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, the set performance control commands are transmitted to a sub-control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, interrupts are enabled, and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

(Special pattern processing)
Figure 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the process performed in step S25 shown in Figure 26 as part of the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first performs the start prize determination process (step S101).

In the start-up prize determination process, the occurrence of a start-up prize is detected, and a process is executed to store the reserved information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and update the reserved number of items. When a start-up prize occurs, a random value is extracted to determine the display result (including the type of jackpot) and the variation pattern, and this is stored as reserved information. Alternatively, a process may be executed to predict the display result and variation pattern based on the extracted random value. After storing the reserved information and the number of reserved items, a transmission setting is made to send a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the occurrence of a start-up prize, the number of reserved items, and the prediction judgment. The performance control command for a start-up prize, thus set for transmission, is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special symbol process is completed, by executing the command control process in step S27 shown in Figure 26.

After executing the start-up prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special symbol process flag in RAM 102. In each of the special symbol process processes (steps S110 to S117), transmission settings are made to send the corresponding performance control command to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on a random value for determining the display result, it is determined (pre-determined) whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol will be a "jackpot," and if so, the type of jackpot, before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1," and the special symbol normal processing ends. In this embodiment, the special symbol game using the second special symbol is executed with priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol (also called special symbol 2 priority processing). Furthermore, the system may store the order in which the game balls enter the first and second starting prize slots, and ensure that the conditions for starting the special game are met in that order (also known as "sequential execution").

When making various decisions based on random values, the various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which the decision values compared with the random values are assigned to the decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, the various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special feature process flag is "1". This variation pattern setting process includes determining one of several variation patterns using a random value for variation pattern determination, based on a pre-determined result such as whether the display result should be "jackpot" or not. When the variation pattern is determined during the variation pattern setting process, the value of the special feature process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process terminates.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special feature game (special feature variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not a reach occurs, etc.), and the content of the effects during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach effect, etc.). It is also called the variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes setting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to vary the special symbols, and measuring the elapsed time since the special symbols began to vary. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special symbol variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. When the elapsed time since the special symbols began to vary reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process terminates.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". This special symbol stop process includes stopping the variation of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and setting the display to stop (derive) the confirmed special symbol that will be the display result of the special symbols. If the display result is "Big Win", the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4". If the display result is "Miss", and the game is controlled in a time-saving state or a probability variation state, and the end of the number of spins is achieved, the game state is also updated. Once the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

Step S114, the pre-jackpot opening process, is executed when the value of the special feature process flag is "4". This pre-jackpot opening process includes settings to start round execution and open the jackpot opening in the jackpot game state, based on factors such as the display result being "jackpot". When opening the jackpot opening, a solenoid drive signal is supplied to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door. At this time, for example, the maximum opening period and the maximum number of rounds executed are set, corresponding to the type of jackpot. Once these settings are complete, the value of the special feature process flag is updated to "5", and the pre-jackpot opening process ends.

Step S115, the jackpot opening process, is executed when the value of the special feature process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening was opened, and determining whether it is time to return the jackpot opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When returning the jackpot opening to the closed state, the process includes stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door, then updating the value of the special feature process flag to "6", and ending the jackpot opening process.

Step S116, the post-jackpot opening processing, is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "6". This post-jackpot opening processing includes determining whether the number of rounds in which the jackpot opening is open has reached the set upper limit, and setting the game to terminate the jackpot state if the upper limit is reached. If the number of rounds has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "5". If the number of rounds has reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "7". Once the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the post-jackpot opening processing ends.

The jackpot termination process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special feature process flag is "7". This jackpot termination process includes waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the duration of the ending sequence (a visual effect indicating the end of the jackpot game state) has elapsed, and various settings for initiating probability variation control and time reduction control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When these settings are completed, the value of the special feature process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot termination process ends.

(Starting point prize determination process)
Figure 28 is a flowchart showing the start-up prize determination process (S101) shown in Figure 27. In the start-up prize determination process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the first start-up switch 22A is ON or OFF based on a detection signal from the first start-up switch 22A, which is provided corresponding to the first start-up prize opening formed by the prize ball device 6A (006SGS101). At this time, if the first start-up switch 22A is ON (006SGS101; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the first special feature reserve memory count, which is the number of reserved memories for a special feature game using the first special feature, is at a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory count) (006SGS102). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to identify the first special feature reserve memory count by, for example, reading the first reserve memory count count value, which is the stored value of the first reserve memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 006SG154. If the number of reserved first special symbols stored in 006SGS102 is not the upper limit (006SGS102; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 006SG155 is set to "0" (006SGS103).

When the first start port switch 22A is off (006SGS101; N), or when the number of reserved special symbols has reached its upper limit (006SGS102; Y), the second start port switch 22B is turned on or not, based on the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B, which is provided in correspondence with the second start port formed by the variable prize ball device 6B (006SGS104). In this case, if the second start port switch 22B is on (006SGS104; Y), the second special symbol reserved number, which is the number of reserved special symbols for a special symbol game using the second special symbol, is determined to be at a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4" as the upper limit number of reserved symbols) (006SGS105). The CPU 103 can determine the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol by reading the second reserved ball count value, which is the value stored in the second reserved ball count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 006SG154. If the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol is not the upper limit (006SGS105; N), the CPU 103 sets the value stored in the start-up buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 006SG155 to "2" (006SGS106).

After executing either process 006SGS103 or 006SGS106, the number of reserved special symbols, corresponding to the value stored in the start-up buffer, is updated by adding 1 (006SGS107). For example, when the start-up buffer value is "0", the first reserved symbol count value is added by 1, while when the start-up buffer value is "2", the second reserved symbol count value is added by 1. In this way, the first reserved symbol count value is updated to increase by 1 when a game ball passes through (enters) the first start-up entry-level slot and the first start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the first special symbol is met. The second reserved symbol count value is updated to increase by 1 when a game ball passes through (enters) the second start-up entry-level slot and the second start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the second special symbol is met. At this time, the total number of reserved symbols is also updated by adding 1 (006SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 006SG154, can be updated by adding 1.

After executing the processing in 006SGS108, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data representing the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 006SG154 (006SGS109). The numerical data representing each of these extracted random values and the start gate buffer value are stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special symbol hold storage unit (006SGS110).

The numerical data representing the random values MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and MR2 for determining the type of jackpot are used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbols or decorative symbols is a "jackpot," and further, if the variable display result is a "jackpot," to determine the type of jackpot. The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern, including the variable display time of the special symbols or decorative symbols. The CPU 103 executes the processing of 006SGS109 to extract numerical data representing all of the random values used to determine the variable display pattern, including the variable display result and variable display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols.

Following the processing of 006SGS110, the transmission settings for the start-up prize-winning designation command are configured according to the start-up buffer value (006SGS111). For example, when the start-up buffer value is "0", the settings for transmitting the first start-up prize-winning designation command to the performance control board 12 are configured by storing the storage address of the first start-up prize-winning designation command table in ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. Conversely, when the start-up buffer value is "2", the settings for transmitting the second start-up prize-winning designation command to the performance control board 12 are configured by storing the storage address of the second start-up prize-winning designation command table in ROM 101 in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. The start-up prize-winning designation command thus configured is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special symbol process processing is completed, by executing the command control processing shown in S27 in Figure 26.

Following the processing in step 006SGS111, the CPU 103 executes the random value determination process upon winning (step 006SGS112). Then, for example, it stores the storage address of the reserved memory count notification command table in ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, thereby setting up the system to send a reserved memory count notification command to the performance control board 12 (006SGS113). The reserved memory count notification command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special symbol process is completed, by executing the command control process shown in S27 in Figure 26.

After executing the process in 006SGS113, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "0" (006SGS114). If the start port buffer value is "0" (Y in 006SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared, its stored value is initialized to "0" (006SGS115), and then the process proceeds to 2390SGS104. Conversely, if the start port buffer value is "2" (N in 006SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared, its stored value is initialized to "0" (006SGS116), and then the start port entry process is terminated. This ensures that even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start port entry of a game ball, the processing based on the detection of valid start ports from both can be reliably completed.

(Random value determination process upon winning)
Figure 29(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 006SGS112 of Figure 28 as a random value determination process at the time of winning. In this feature unit 006SG, when the variable display of special symbols or decorative symbols is started, the special symbol normal processing described later determines whether or not to control the game state to a jackpot as a "jackpot" based on the special symbol display result (variable display result of special symbols). In addition, in the variable pattern setting processing described later, a determination is made for the variable pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative symbols. On the other hand, separate from these determinations, when a game ball is detected at the starting entry point (first starting entry point or second starting entry point), the CPU 103 executes the random value determination process at the time of winning in step 006SGS112, determining whether or not to stop displaying a jackpot symbol as the special symbol display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbols becomes a predetermined display mode accompanied by a super reach. As a result, before the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of game balls entering the starting prize slot begins, that is, before it is decided whether or not it will be a jackpot at the start of the variable display, it is determined whether the special symbol display result will be a "jackpot" and which category of variable display mode the decorative symbols will fall into. Based on this determination result, the performance control CPU 120 and the like will execute a pre-announcement effect, as described later.

In the random number determination process at the time of winning shown in Figure 29(A), the CPU 103 first identifies the current game state of the pachinko machine 1 by checking, for example, the state of the time-saving flag and the probability-changing flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 006SG152 (step 006SGS121). The CPU 103 identifies the state as a probability-changing state (high probability, high base state) when the probability-changing flag is ON, as a time-saving state (low probability, high base state) when the probability-changing flag is OFF and the time-saving flag is ON, and as a normal state (low probability, high base state) when both the probability-changing flag and the time-saving flag are OFF.

Following the processing in step 006SGS121, the special display result determination table 1 shown in Figure 19 is selected and set (step 006SGS122). Then, it is determined whether the numerical data representing the random value MR1 for special display result determination extracted in step 006SGS109 in Figure 28 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step 006SGS123). The jackpot determination range is set with individual determination values assigned to the "jackpot" special display result in the special display result determination table selected in the processing of step 006SGS122, and it is sufficient for the CPU 103 to determine whether there is a determination value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing the random value MR1 with each determination value one by one. Alternatively, by setting numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) of the judgment value included in the jackpot judgment range, the CPU 103 can determine whether the random value MR1 is within the jackpot judgment range by comparing it with the minimum and maximum values of the jackpot judgment range. In this case, if it is determined that the random value MR1 is within the jackpot judgment range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the pending data including that random value MR1 is determined to be a "jackpot".

If it is determined in step 006SGS123 that the result is outside the range of a jackpot, that is, if it is determined that it will not be a jackpot in the variable display (step 006SGS123; N), the transmission setting for the first symbol specification command, which is a symbol specification command corresponding to the variable display result being "miss," is executed (step 006SGS128), and it is determined whether the time-saving flag is on, that is, whether the current game state is either a time-saving state or a probability-changing state (step 006SGS129). If the time-saving flag is off (step 006SGS129; N), the miss variation pattern determination table A is selected and set, and if the time-saving flag is on (step 006SGS129; Y), the miss variation pattern determination table D is selected and set (step 006SGS131).

In this embodiment, in addition to the losing pattern determination tables A and D, losing pattern determination tables B and C are pre-prepared according to the number of reserved memories. As shown in Figure 22, among these losing pattern determination tables A to C, table A assigns determination values from 1 to 660 to non-reach patterns, while tables B and C assign determination values from 1 to 700 and 1 to 750, respectively, to non-reach patterns. On the other hand, tables A to C assign determination values from 901 to 997 to super-reach patterns.

Therefore, in step 006SGS126, the variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern determination table A for misses. This ensures that the determination of non-reach and super-reach will always result in a variation pattern of either non-reach or super-reach, even if the number of reserved balls changes after the determination. Therefore, the determination at the time of initial winning is made using the variation pattern determination table A for misses.

Furthermore, if it is determined in step 006SGS123 that the result falls within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot will occur during variable display (step 006SGS123; Y), the jackpot type is determined based on the random value MR2 for jackpot type determination, as shown in Figure 29(A) (step 006SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103 selects jackpot type determination table data from the table data constituting the jackpot type determination table, according to the variable special symbol ("First Special Symbol" corresponding to "1" or "Second Special Symbol" corresponding to "2") identified in relation to the start-up buffer value. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it determines which of the multiple jackpot types the result falls into.

Furthermore, the system executes the transmission settings for symbol specification commands corresponding to the determined type of jackpot: the second symbol specification command for probability variation jackpot A, the third symbol specification command for probability variation jackpot B, the fourth symbol specification command for probability variation jackpot C, and the fifth symbol specification command for non-probability variation jackpot (step 006SGS133). Then, a jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected and set according to the game state as the table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step 006SGS135), and the process proceeds to step 006SGS138. Note that in step 006SGS135, if the game state is normal (low probability, low base state), jackpot variation pattern determination table A should be selected; if the game state is time-saving state or probability variation state (low probability, high base state or high probability, high base state), jackpot variation pattern determination table B should be set.

In step 006SGS138, the variable category corresponding to the range of determination values that include the random value MR3 is determined using the variable pattern determination table set in each step and the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for variable pattern determination (step 006SGS138). In this embodiment, as shown in Figure 29(B), when the variable display result is at least "miss," there are variable categories that result in a "non-reach" variable display mode regardless of the total number of reserved memories, a variable category that results in a "super reach" variable display mode, and an "other" variable category that results in a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (e.g., normal reach). It is sufficient to determine whether or not the variable category is determined based on the random value MR3.

Subsequently, after setting up the system to send a variable category specification command to the performance control board 12 based on the judgment result from step 006SGS138 (step 006SGS132), the random value judgment process at the time of winning is terminated.

(Special pattern processing as usual)
Figure 30 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of Figure 27 as a normal special symbol processing. In the normal special symbol processing shown in Figure 30, the CPU 103 first determines whether the second special symbol hold memory count is "0" (step 006SGS141). The second special symbol hold memory count is the number of hold memories for a special symbol game using the second special symbol, as displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 006SGS141, the second hold memory count value stored in the game control counter setting unit is read, and it is determined whether the read value is "0" or not.

If the number of reserved symbols in the second special symbol storage unit is not "0" in step 006SGS141 (step 006SGS141; N), the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are read out from the second special symbol storage unit as reserved data corresponding to reserved symbol number "0" (step 006SGS142). The numerical data read out at this time can be temporarily stored, for example, in a variation random number buffer.

Following the processing in step 006SGS142, the second special feature hold memory count value and the total hold memory count value are updated by subtracting 1, thereby updating the second special feature hold memory count and the total hold memory count, and updating the data in the second special feature hold memory unit. Specifically, the hold data representing random values MR1 to MR3 stored in the second special feature hold memory unit in entries lower than hold number "0" (for example, entries corresponding to hold numbers "2" to "4") are shifted one entry at a time to higher (step 006SGS143).

Afterward, the variable special pattern designation buffer value, which is the value stored in the variable special pattern designation buffer, is updated to "2" (step 006SGS144), and then the process proceeds to step 006SGS149.

On the other hand, if the second special symbol hold memory count is "0" in step 006SGS141 (step 006SGS141; Y), it is determined whether the first special symbol hold memory count is "0" or not (step 006SGS145). The first special symbol hold memory count is the number of hold memories for the special symbol game using the first special symbol, as displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 006SGS145, the game control counter setting unit reads the first hold memory count value stored in the first hold memory counter and determines whether the read value is "0" or not. Thus, the process of step 006SGS145 is executed when it is determined in step 006SGS141 that the second special symbol hold memory count is "0", and it determines whether the first special symbol hold memory count is "0" or not. As a result, the special symbol game using the second special symbol is started with priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol.

Furthermore, the execution of the special feature game using the second special feature is not limited to prioritizing the execution of the special feature game using the first special feature. For example, the execution of the special feature game may be initiated in the order in which the game ball enters (passes through) the first and second starting prize entry points and a starting prize is generated. In this case, it would suffice to provide a table that stores data that can identify the order in which starting prizes occurred, and to determine whether to start the execution of the special feature game using the first or second special feature from that stored data.

If the number of reserved symbols in the first special symbol storage is not "0" in step 006SGS145 (step 006SGS145; N), then numerical data representing the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are read from the first special symbol storage unit as reserved data corresponding to reserved symbol number "0" (step 006SGS146). The numerical data read at this time can be temporarily stored, for example, in a variation random number buffer.

Following the processing in step 006SGS146, the first special feature hold memory count value and the total hold memory count value are updated by subtracting 1, thereby updating the first special feature hold memory count and the total hold memory count, and updating the data in the first special feature hold memory unit. Specifically, the hold data representing random values MR1 to MR3 stored in the first special feature hold memory unit in entries lower than hold number "0" (for example, entries corresponding to hold numbers "2" to "4") are shifted one entry at a time to higher (step 006SGS147).

Afterward, the variable special pattern designation buffer value, which is the value stored in the variable special pattern designation buffer, is updated to "0" (step 006SGS148), and then the process proceeds to step 006SGS149.

In step 006SGS149, the display result determination table shown in Figure 19 is selected and set as the table used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbols, which is the special symbol display result, is a "jackpot" or a "miss". Next, the numerical data representing the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the determination value assigned to each special symbol display result, "jackpot" or "miss", to determine whether the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" or a "miss" (step 006SGS150). In step 006SGS150, if the game state at that time is a high probability state (probability change state) where the probability change flag is on, then if the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result falls within the range of 10000 to 12180 corresponding to the high probability state (probability change state), it is determined to be a "jackpot", and if not, it is determined to be a "miss". Furthermore, if the probability variation flag is off and the state is low probability (in this embodiment, low probability low base state and low probability high base state), the random value MR1 used for determining the special symbol display result is determined to be a "jackpot" if it falls within the range of 1 to 219, and a "miss" if it does not.

Thus, in the display result determination table selected in step 006SGS149, different determination values are assigned to "jackpot" depending on the game state at that time (high probability, low probability). Therefore, in the processing of step 006SGS150, depending on whether the game state when the variable display such as the special symbol game starts is in a high probability state, different determination data (determination values) are used to determine whether the special symbol display result is a "jackpot." As a result, when the game state is in a high probability state, the probability of determining a "jackpot" is higher than when it is in a low probability state.

If it is determined in step 006SGS150 that it is a "jackpot" (step 006SGS150; Y), the jackpot flag is turned ON (step 006SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 20(A) is selected and set as the table used to determine one of several jackpot types (step 006SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table thus set, the system determines which of the several jackpot types it is based on whether the numerical data representing the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer matches the determination value assigned to each of the jackpot types in the jackpot type determination table: "non-probability jackpot," "probability jackpot A," "probability jackpot B," or "probability jackpot C" (step 006SGS154).

In step 006SGS154, the type of jackpot is determined, and the game state after the jackpot game state ends is determined before the confirmed special symbol is derived as a variable display result. This determination is made to control the game state to either a time-saving state (low probability, high base state) or a probability variation state (high probability, high base state), which is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state. The determined jackpot type is then stored by setting the jackpot type buffer value, which is the value stored in the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (step 006SGS155), in accordance with the determined jackpot type. For example, if the jackpot type is "non-probability variation jackpot" which corresponds to a non-probability variation jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value should be set to "0". If it is "probability variation A" which corresponds to probability variation jackpot A, it should be set to "0". If it is "probability variation B" which corresponds to probability variation jackpot B, it should be set to "2". If it is "probability variation C" which corresponds to probability variation jackpot C, it should be set to "3". After processing in step 006SGS155, proceed to step 006SGS156.

Furthermore, if it is determined that the result is "incorrect" in step 006SGS150 (step 006SGS150; N), the process in step 006SGS156 is executed without executing the processes in steps 006SGS152 to 006SGS155.

In step 006SGS156, the CPU 103 sets a confirmed special symbol in accordance with the prior determination result of whether or not to control the game to a jackpot state (whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on) and the determination result of the jackpot type when the game is in a jackpot state. For example, in accordance with the prior determination result that the special symbol display result is a "miss", the special symbol showing the "-" symbol, which is a missing symbol, is set as the confirmed special symbol. Also, if the special symbol display result is determined to be a "jackpot" in step 006SGS150a, and the jackpot type in step 006SGS154 is "probability variation jackpot A", the special symbol showing the number "7" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Also, if the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot B", the special symbol showing the number "5" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Furthermore, if the jackpot type is a "non-probability-increasing jackpot," the special symbol showing the number "3" is set as the guaranteed special symbol. Also, if the jackpot type is a "probability-increasing jackpot C," the special symbol showing the number "0" is set as the guaranteed special symbol. Note that these guaranteed special symbols are just examples; other guaranteed special symbols may be set, or multiple types of symbols may be set as guaranteed special symbols.

After setting the confirmed special symbol in step 006SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", which corresponds to the variable pattern setting process (step 006SGS157), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated.

Furthermore, if the number of reserved special symbol games using the first special symbol is "0" in step 006SGS145 (step 006SGS145; Y), the system performs a predetermined demo display setting (step 006SGS158) before ending the normal special symbol processing. This demo display setting determines whether a performance control command (customer-waiting demo specification command) specifying a demonstration display (demo screen display), such as displaying a predetermined performance image on the image display device 5, has already been sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. If the customer-waiting demo specification command has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated. If it has not been sent, the system performs the necessary settings to send the customer-waiting demo specification command before terminating the demo display setting.

(Setting the variation pattern)
Figure 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of Figure 27 as a variable pattern setting process. In the variable pattern setting process shown in Figure 31, the CPU 103 selects a variable pattern determination table according to the state (step 006 SGS161). For example, when the variable display result is a miss, if the game state is normal and there is 1 reserved special symbol that performs variable display, the CPU 103 selects the miss variable pattern determination table A; if the game state is normal and there are 2 reserved special symbols that perform variable display, the CPU 103 selects the miss variable pattern determination table B; if the game state is normal and there are 3 reserved special symbols that perform variable display, the CPU 103 selects the miss variable pattern determination table C; and if the game state is a time-saving state or a probability-changing state, the CPU 103 selects the miss variable pattern determination table D. Also, when the variable display result is a jackpot, if the game state is normal, the CPU 103 selects the jackpot variable pattern determination table A; and if the game state is a time-saving state or a probability-changing state, the CPU 103 selects the jackpot variable pattern determination table B.

Then, based on numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, which is stored in a random number buffer for variation, for example, the variation pattern is determined to be one of several types by referring to the selected (set) variation pattern determination table (step 006 SGS162).

After determining the variation pattern in step 006SGS162, settings are made to initiate the variation of the special symbols, depending on the variation special symbol designation buffer value, so that either a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is started (step 006SGS163). For example, if the variation special symbol designation buffer value is "1", settings are made to transmit a drive signal to update the display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variation special symbol designation buffer value is "2", settings are made to transmit a drive signal to update the display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B.

Following the processing in step 006SGS163, settings are made for sending various commands for when the special symbols start to change (step 006SGS164). For example, when the special symbol change specification buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 stores setting data indicating the storage address (starting address) in the ROM 101 of the pre-prepared first change start command table in the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 006SG155 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer, in order to sequentially send the game state specification command, first change start command, change pattern specification command, variable display result specification command, and first hold memory count notification command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the variable special symbol specification buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 sequentially transmits the game state specification command, the second variation start command, the variation pattern specification command, the variable display result specification command, and the second reserved memory count notification command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. To this end, the CPU 103 stores setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the pre-prepared second variation start command table in the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 006SG155, in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer.

After executing the process in step 006SGS164, the variable display time for the special symbol, which corresponds to the determination result of the variation pattern, is set (step 006SGS165). The variable display time for the special symbol is the time required in the special symbol game from the start of the variable display of the special symbol until the confirmed special symbol, which is the variable display result (special symbol display result), is stopped and displayed. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2," which corresponds to the special symbol variation process (step 006SGS166), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

Based on the command transmission settings in step 006 SGS166, after the variable pattern setting process is completed, each time the command control process in step S27 shown in Figure 26 is executed, the main board 11 will sequentially transmit the following commands to the performance control board 12: game state specification command, first variable start command or second variable start command, variable pattern specification command, variable display result specification command, first reserved memory count notification command or second reserved memory count notification command. The order in which these performance control commands are transmitted can be arbitrarily changed. For example, the variable display result specification command may be transmitted first, followed by the first variable start command or second variable start command, variable pattern specification command, game state specification command, first reserved memory count notification command or second reserved memory count notification command.

(Special symbol stop processing)
Figure 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of Figure 27 as a special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 turns on the termination flag referenced in the special symbol variation process of step S113 to terminate the variation of the special symbols, and controls the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to display the stopped symbols as stopped (step 006SGS180). If the variation special symbol designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special symbol, the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is terminated, and if the variation special symbol designation buffer value is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is terminated. It also controls the sending of a symbol confirmation command to the performance control board 12 (step 006SGS181). Finally, it determines whether the jackpot flag is in the ON state or not (step 006SGS182).

If the jackpot flag is ON (step 006SGS182; Y), the CPU 103, if the probability variation flag or time reduction flag is ON, clears the probability variation flag and time reduction flag to the OFF state (step 006SGS184), and sets the performance control board 12 to send the following commands according to the stored jackpot type: jackpot start 1 (probability variation jackpot A), jackpot start 2 (probability variation jackpot B), jackpot start 3 (probability variation jackpot C), and jackpot start 4 (non-probability variation) (step 006SGS185).

Furthermore, the CPU 103 configures the settings to send a game state specification command indicating the normal state to the performance control board 12 (step 006 SGS 186).

Then, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (the time it takes for the image display device 5 to announce that a jackpot has occurred) is set in the jackpot display time timer (step 006SGS187). Also, the number of times the jackpot opening counter is opened (for example, 10 times for non-probability jackpots and probability jackpot A, 5 times for probability jackpot B, and 2 times for probability jackpot C) is set (step 006SGS188). Finally, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4", which corresponds to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S114) (step 006SGS189).

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is off (step 006SGS182; N), step 006SGS191 determines whether the time-saving flag is on (step 006SGS191). If the time-saving flag is off (step 006SGS191; N), proceed to step 006SGS196. If the time-saving flag is on (step 006SGS191; Y), determine whether the value of the time-saving counter is "0". If the value of the time-saving counter is "0" (step 006SGS192; Y), proceed to step 006SGS196.

On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving counter is not "0" (step 006SGS192; N), that is, if the high base state with remaining time-saving counts, the value of the time-saving counter is subtracted by 1 (step 006SGS193). Then, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter after the subtraction is "0" or not (step 006SGS194). If it is not "0" (step 006SGS194; N), the process proceeds to step 006SGS196. If the value of the time-saving counter is "0" (step 006SGS194; Y), in order to terminate the time-saving control, the time-saving flag is cleared and turned off (step 006SGS195), and after setting the transmission of a game state specification command corresponding to the game state corresponding to the state of the probability variation flag or time-saving flag (specifically, low probability low base) (step 006SGS195), the process proceeds to step 006SGS196.

In step 006SGS196, the settings for sending game state specification commands are configured according to the status of the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0," which corresponds to the normal processing of the special symbol, and the special symbol stop processing is terminated (step 006SGS197).

(Big win termination process)
Figure 33 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S117 of Figure 27 as the jackpot termination process.

In the jackpot termination process, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot termination display timer is operating, i.e., whether the timer is counting (step 006SGS201). If the jackpot termination display timer is not operating (step 006SGS201; N), the CPU 103 sets a value in the jackpot termination display timer that corresponds to the display time for displaying the jackpot termination on the image display device 5 (jackpot termination display time) (step 006SGS202), and terminates the process.

On the other hand, if the jackpot completion display timer is running (step 006SGS201; Y), the value of the jackpot completion display timer is decremented by 1 (step 006SGS203). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the jackpot completion display timer is 0, that is, whether the jackpot completion display time has elapsed (step 006SGS204). If it has not elapsed, the process terminates.

If the time limit for displaying the end of the jackpot has elapsed (step 006SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored jackpot type is a non-probability-increasing jackpot (step 006SGS205).

If the stored jackpot type is not a non-probability-increasing jackpot (Step 006SGS205; N), the probability-increasing flag and the time-saving flag are turned on (Steps 006SGS207, 006SGS208). Also, the time-saving counter is set to "0" (Step 006SGS209), and the process proceeds to Step 006SGS213.

On the other hand, if the type of jackpot is a non-probability-increasing jackpot (step 006SGS205; Y), steps 006SGS211 and 006SGS212 are executed to turn on the time-saving flag and set the time-saving counter to "100," after which the process proceeds to step 006SGS213.

In step 006SGS213, the jackpot flag is turned off, and the transmission settings for the jackpot termination command corresponding to the jackpot type are configured (step 006SGS214). Then, after configuring the transmission settings for the game state specification command to notify the performance control board 12 of the game state based on the turned-on probability variation flag and time reduction flag (step 006SGS215), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0," which corresponds to the normal processing of special symbols, and the jackpot termination process is terminated (step 006SGS216).

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be explained. When the performance control board 12 receives power voltage from the power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the main performance control process as shown in the flowchart of Figure 34. When the main performance control process shown in Figure 34 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first performs a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clearing the RAM 122, setting various initial values, and setting the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12.

Subsequently, a determination is made as to whether the timer interrupt flag is on or off (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) based on, for example, the CTC register setting. If the timer interrupt flag is off at this time (step S73; No), the process in step S73 is repeatedly executed while waiting.

Furthermore, on the performance control board 12, in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs at predetermined intervals, an interrupt occurs to receive performance control commands from the main board 11. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 turns ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal turning ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets to interrupt disable. However, if a CPU that does not automatically set to interrupt disable is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt disable instruction (DI instruction). In response to the interrupt caused by the performance control INT signal turning ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt processing. In this command reception interrupt processing, the performance control command is received from a predetermined input port among the input ports included in I/O 125 that receives control signals transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The performance control command received at this time is stored, for example, in a performance control command reception buffer provided in RAM 122. Subsequently, the CPU 120 for performance control sets itself to enable interrupts and then terminates the command reception interrupt processing.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis processing, for example, various performance control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11 and stored in the performance control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read performance control commands are performed. For example, to allow the performance control process to confirm which performance control command was received and what the performance control command identifies, the read performance control command is stored in a predetermined area of RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in RAM 122 is turned on. Furthermore, if the performance control command identifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, various performance devices are controlled, such as the display operation of performance images on the display screen of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. Furthermore, the control content of the performance operations using the various performance devices is determined, decided, and set according to the performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process in step S76, a random number update process for performances is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the random numbers used for performances on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Furthermore, after the random number update process for performances (step S77), a demo performance control process (step S78) for executing a demo performance in the pachinko game machine 1, and a background display update process (step S79) for updating the background display shown on the image display device 5 to another background display are executed. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to step S73.

Furthermore, in the background display update process of this embodiment, control can be executed to update the background image displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the execution of specific effects (for example, background change effects or reach effects described later) or changes in the game state during variable display.

The menu display process includes, in addition to displaying the menu screen on the image display device 5 in the game standby state, further processing to adjust the volume output from speakers 8L and 8R, and to adjust the light intensity (brightness) of the game effect lamp 9, in response to the player's operation of the push button 31B, etc., while the menu screen is displayed.

Furthermore, in the demo performance control processing, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, set a timer, such as a customer-waiting demo performance start timer, based on the receipt of a customer-waiting demo specification command, and start the customer-waiting demo performance when the timer expires without the variable display starting. If the variable display starts while the customer-waiting demo performance start timer is operating or while the customer-waiting demo performance is running, the customer-waiting demo performance start timer should be cleared, the customer-waiting demo performance should be interrupted, and the display on the image display device 5 should be switched to the variable display of decorative patterns.

(Performance control process processing)
Figure 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of Figure 34 as part of the performance control process. In the performance control process shown in Figure 35, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a hold display performance determination process (step S160) to determine the display mode of the hold display shown in the special feature hold memory display area 5U and the active display shown in the active display area 5F. It also executes a hold display update process (step S161) to update the display mode of the hold display in the special feature hold memory display area 5U and the active display in the active display area 5F. The hold display update process also serves to start displaying the hold display and active display whose display mode has been newly determined in the hold display performance determination process. After the execution of the hold display update process, for example, depending on the value of the performance process flag provided in RAM 122, one of the following processes in steps S170 to S175 is selected and executed.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process to determine whether or not to start the variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5, based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display results and variation patterns identified by the performance control command, the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols (confirmed decorative symbols), the mode of the variable display of decorative symbols, and the presence or absence of various performances such as reach performances and various予告 (pre-announcement) performances, as well as their mode and start timing, are determined. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute performances) is set, reflecting these determinations. Afterward, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process ends. Upon receiving the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of decorative symbols, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, drive the movable body 32, output sound and sound effects from speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14, and performs various effect controls during the variable display of decorative symbols. After performing these effect controls, the CPU 120 stops displaying the confirmed decorative symbols, which are the display result of the decorative symbols, in response to, for example, when an exit code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative symbols is read from the effect control pattern, or when a command is received from the main board 11 specifying that the confirmed decorative symbols should be stopped displaying. When the confirmed decorative symbol is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3," and the variable display performance processing ends.

The special symbol win waiting process in step S173 is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "3". In this special symbol win waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has received a performance control command from the main board 11 specifying the start of the jackpot game state. If it receives a performance control command specifying the start of the jackpot game state, it updates the value of the performance process flag to "4". If it does not receive a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state and the waiting time for such a command has elapsed, it determines that the display result in the special symbol game was "miss" and updates the value of the performance process flag to its initial value of "0". After updating the value of the performance process flag, the special symbol win waiting process terminates.

The jackpot animation processing in step S174 is executed when the value of the animation process flag is "4". In this jackpot animation processing, the animation control CPU 120 sets, for example, an animation control pattern corresponding to the animation content in the jackpot game state, and executes various animation controls in the jackpot game state based on that setting. Furthermore, in the jackpot animation processing, in response to receiving, for example, a command from the main board 11 specifying the termination of the jackpot game state, the value of the animation process flag is updated to "5", which corresponds to the ending animation processing, and the jackpot animation processing terminates.

The ending sequence processing in step S175 is executed when the value of the sequence process flag is "5". In this ending sequence processing, the sequence control CPU 120 sets sequence control patterns corresponding to events such as the end of a jackpot game state, and executes various sequence controls for the ending sequence at the end of the jackpot game state based on these settings. Afterward, the value of the sequence process flag is updated to its initial value of "0", and the ending sequence processing ends.

(Processing to determine the pending display animation)
Figure 36 shows the determination ratio for the display patterns of the hold display and active display in the hold display effect shown in Figure 35. In the hold display effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first refers to the start-up winning-received command buffer 006SGS194A shown in Figure 24(B) to determine whether there are any entries in which the hold display flag is not set. If there are entries in which the hold display flag is not set, the variable display result is determined from the symbol specification command in the entry, and the variable category is determined from the variable category command in the entry. Based on these determined variable display results and variable categories, the CPU determines whether the hold display effect will be executed and the effect pattern, i.e., the display patterns of the hold display and active display.

For example, as shown in Figure 36, if the variable display result is a jackpot, there is a 5% chance that the hold display animation will not be executed, a 25% chance that the hold display animation will be executed using animation pattern α, and a 70% chance that the hold display animation will be executed using animation pattern β. Also, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is not a reach, there is a 95% chance that the hold display animation will not be executed, a 5% chance that the hold display animation will be executed using animation pattern α, and a 0% chance that the hold display animation will be executed using animation pattern β. Also, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is other (normal reach), there is a 75% chance that the hold display animation will not be executed, a 20% chance that the hold display animation will be executed using animation pattern α, and a 5% chance that the hold display animation will be executed using animation pattern β. Furthermore, if the variable display result is incorrect and the variable category is Super Reach, there is a 65% chance that the pending display animation will not be executed, a 25% chance that the pending display animation will be executed using animation pattern α, and a 10% chance that the pending display animation will be executed using animation pattern β.

As described above, after determining whether or not to execute the hold display animation and the animation pattern, the animation control CPU 120 sets the value of the hold display flag for the entry to "0" if it was determined that the hold display notification animation would not be executed, sets the value of the hold display flag for the entry to "1" if it was determined that the hold display notification animation would be executed with animation pattern α, and sets the value of the hold display flag for the entry to "2" if it was determined that the hold display notification animation would be executed with animation pattern β.

In this embodiment, as described above, after setting a value of 0 to 2 in the hold display flag corresponding to each entry in the start-up prize-receiving command buffer 006SG194A, the performance control CPU 120 executes the hold display update process (step S61). When the value of the hold display flag is set to "0", the hold display or active display corresponding to that flag is displayed as a white circle (○). When the value of the hold display flag is set to "1", the hold display or active display corresponding to that flag is displayed as a white square (◇). When the value of the hold display flag is set to "2", the hold display or active display corresponding to that flag is displayed as a white star (☆).

With these settings, when the hold indicator or active indicator is displayed as a white square (display pattern A) or a white star (display pattern B), the probability of being controlled to a jackpot state (jackpot expectation) is higher than when the hold indicator or active indicator is displayed as a white circle. Similarly, when the hold indicator or active indicator is displayed as a white star (display pattern B), the probability of being controlled to a jackpot state (jackpot expectation) is higher than when the hold indicator or active indicator is displayed as a white square (display pattern A). Therefore, the display patterns of these hold indicators and active indicators, that is, whether or not the hold indicator effect is executed and the effect pattern, can draw the player's attention.

(Variable display start setting process)
Figure 37 is a flowchart of the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in Figure 35. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the first variable display start command reception flag is in the ON state (step 006SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is in the ON state (step 006SGS271; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special symbol hold memory in the start prize reception command buffer 006SG194A are shifted one buffer number higher (step 006SGS272). The contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in buffer number "1-1" of the first special feature hold memory are shifted to be stored in buffer number "1-0," the various command data and flags stored in buffer number "1-2" of the first special feature hold memory are shifted to be stored in buffer number "1-1," the various command data and flags stored in buffer number "1-3" of the first special feature hold memory are shifted to be stored in buffer number "1-2," and the various command data and flags stored in buffer number "1-4" of the first special feature hold memory are shifted to be stored in buffer number "1-3."

Furthermore, if the first variable display start command reception flag is off in step 006SGS271 (step 006SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 006SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 006SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated. If the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 006SGS273; Y), the various command data and flags stored in the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special symbol hold memory in the start-up prize-receiving command buffer 006SG194A are shifted one buffer number higher (step 006SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, and therefore it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in buffer number "2-1" of the second special feature hold memory are shifted to be stored in buffer number "2-0," the various command data and flags stored in buffer number "2-2" of the second special feature hold memory are shifted to be stored in buffer number "2-1," the various command data and flags stored in buffer number "2-3" of the second special feature hold memory are shifted to be stored in buffer number "2-2," and the various command data and flags stored in buffer number "2-4" of the second special feature hold memory are shifted to be stored in buffer number "2-3."

After step 006SGS272 or step 006SGS274 is executed, the performance control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern specification command from the variation pattern specification command storage area (step 006SGS275).

Next, the display result (stopping pattern) of the decorative pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result specification command storage area (i.e., the received display result specification command) (step 006 SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result specified by the display result specification command, and stores the data indicating the determined stopping pattern of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area.

Furthermore, in this feature unit 006SG, when the received variable display result specification command is a second variable display result specification command corresponding to a probability variation jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative symbols (jackpot symbols) in which three symbols are aligned as "7" as the stopping symbols. Also, when the received variable display result specification command is a third variable display result specification command corresponding to a probability variation jackpot B or a fourth variable display result specification command corresponding to a probability variation jackpot C, the stopping symbols are determined from among multiple combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", "999"). Also, when the received variable display result specification command is a fifth variable display result specification command corresponding to a non-probability variation jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative symbols (jackpot symbols) in which three symbols are aligned as even-numbered symbols as the stopping symbols. Furthermore, if the received variable display result specification command is the first variable display result specification command corresponding to a loss, the system will determine, according to the variation pattern, a combination in which the three symbols are mismatched as the stopping symbols, or a combination that results in a missed reach (losing symbols) such as "767".

In determining these stop symbols, the CPU 120 for performance control can, for example, extract a random number to determine the stop symbol and use a stop symbol determination table, which associates data and numerical values indicating combinations of decorative symbols, to determine the stop symbol for the decorative symbols. That is, the stop symbol can be determined by selecting data indicating combinations of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

After step 006SGS276 is executed, the CPU 120 for performance control executes the following: a continuous crack effect setting process for executing a continuous crack effect during variable display (step 006SGS277), a dialogue予告 effect setting process for executing a dialogue予告 effect during variable display (step 006SGS278), a background change effect setting process for executing a background change effect during variable display (step 006SGS279), a reach suggestion effect setting process for executing a reach suggestion effect during variable display (step 006SGS280), and a cut-in effect setting process for executing a cut-in effect during variable display (step 006SGS281).

Then, the CPU 120 for performance control selects a performance control pattern (process table) corresponding to the variable pattern specification command (step 006SGS282), and starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 006SGS283).

Furthermore, the process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the illumination of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from speakers 8L and 8R, and operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, all arranged sequentially in chronological order and associated with each process data n (numbered from 1 to N).

Next, the CPU 120 for performance control executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L and 8R as performance components, and the operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.)) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, and operation unit control execution data 1) (step 006 SGS284). For example, to display an image corresponding to a variation pattern on the image display device 5, a command is output to the display control unit 123. Also, to control the on/off operation of the various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, to enable sound output from speakers 8L and 8R, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound control board 13.

In this embodiment, the CPU 120 for performance control controls the variable display of decorative symbols using a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one with the variation pattern specification command. However, the CPU 120 for performance control may also select the variation pattern to be used from multiple types of variation patterns corresponding to the variation pattern specification command.

Next, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern specification command (step 006SGS285). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 006SGS286). The predetermined time is, for example, 30ms. The performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, center, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every predetermined time. The display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written to the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (variation) of the decorative patterns. Next, the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (step S172) (step 006SGS287).

(Continuous crack effect setting process)
Figure 38(A) is a flowchart of the continuous break effect setting process (step 006SGS277) in the variable display start setting process shown in Figure 37. In the continuous break effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the game state is in a normal state (step 006SGS311). If the game state is in a normal state (step 006SGS311; Y), it refers to the start-up prize-receiving command buffer 006SG194A to identify whether there are any entries where the value of the continuous break effect flag ("0" or "1") is not set (step 006SGS312), and determines whether there are any entries where the value of the continuous break effect flag is set (step 006SGS313).

If there is no entry with the value of the consecutive break effect flag set (step 006SGS313; N), the process proceeds to step 006SGS318. If there is an entry with the value of the consecutive break effect flag set (step 006SGS313; Y), the execution of the consecutive break effect is determined based on the symbol specification command and variation category command stored in that entry (step 006SGS314). In this embodiment, the consecutive break effect in the normal state is an effect that suggests the variable display result of the target variable display will be a jackpot by being executed over multiple variable displays targeting a variable display that has not yet been executed (see Figure 41).

When the game state is normal, in step 006SGS314, the CPU 120 for performance control, as shown in Figure 38(B), decides to not execute the consecutive break animation 20% of the time and to execute the consecutive break animation 80% of the time if the variable display result is a jackpot. Furthermore, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is not a reach, it decides to not execute the consecutive break animation 80% of the time and to execute the consecutive break animation 20% of the time. Also, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is other (normal reach), it decides to not execute the consecutive break animation 60% of the time and to execute the consecutive break animation 40% of the time. Finally, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is a super reach, it decides to not execute the consecutive break animation 50% of the time and to execute the consecutive break animation 50% of the time.

Furthermore, when the game state is a time-saving state/probability-changing state, in step 006SGS314, the CPU 120 for performance control decides not to execute the consecutive break performance 30% of the time and to execute the consecutive break performance 70% of the time if the variable display result is a jackpot. If the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is not a reach, it decides not to execute the consecutive break performance 70% of the time and to execute the consecutive break performance 30% of the time. Also, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is a normal reach, it decides not to execute the consecutive break performance 50% of the time and to execute the consecutive break performance 50% of the time. Also, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is a super reach, it decides not to execute the consecutive break performance 40% of the time and to execute the consecutive break performance 60% of the time. Thus, in this embodiment, the proportion of times the game is controlled to a jackpot state when the consecutive break performance is executed, i.e., the jackpot expectation level, differs between the normal state and the time-saving state/probability-changing state.

Then, the CPU 120 for performance control determines whether or not to execute the continuous crack effect in step 006SGS314 (step 006SGS315). If it decides to execute the continuous crack effect (step 006SGS315; Y), the CPU 120 for performance control sets the value of the continuous crack effect flag for that entry to "1" and proceeds to step 006SGS318. If it decides not to execute the continuous crack effect (step 006SGS315; N), the CPU 120 for performance control sets the value of the continuous crack effect flag for that entry to "0" and proceeds to step 006SGS318.

Next, in step 006SGS318, the CPU 120 for performance control determines whether there is an entry with the value of "1" set as the continuous break performance flag, that is, whether the execution of the continuous break performance has been decided (step 006SGS318). If there is no entry with the value of "1" set as the continuous break performance flag (step 006SGS318; N), the continuous break performance setting process ends. If there is an entry with the value of "1" set as the continuous break performance flag (step 006SGS318; Y), it further determines whether the entry with the value of "1" set as the continuous break performance flag is the entry corresponding to the variable display, that is, whether it is an entry stored in the storage area of buffer number "1-0" or "2-0" of the start-up winning received command buffer 006SG194A (step 006SGS319).

If the entry with the value of "1" set as the continuous break effect flag is not the entry corresponding to the variable display in question (step 006SGS319; N), the execution settings for the first continuous break effect are performed according to the fact that the variable display is not the target variable display for the continuous break effect, and the continuous break effect setting process is terminated (step 006SGS320). If the entry with the value of "1" set as the continuous break effect flag is the entry corresponding to the variable display in question (step 006SGS319; Y), it is further determined whether the variable display is a variable display based on a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern (step 006SGS321). If the variable display is a variable display with a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern (step 006SGS321; Y), the continuous break effect setting process is terminated. If the variable display is a variable display with a super reach variation pattern (step 006SGS321; N), the execution settings for the second continuous break effect are performed according to whether the variable display is a target variable display for the continuous break effect, and the continuous break effect setting process is terminated (step 006SGS322).

In other words, in this embodiment, if the game state is in the normal state and the execution of the consecutive break effect is decided, the first consecutive break effect is executed for the variable display prior to the variable display that is the target of the consecutive break effect. Furthermore, if the variable display that is the target of the consecutive break effect is a variable display with a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern, the second consecutive break effect is not executed. However, if the variable display is a variable display with a super reach variation pattern, the second consecutive break effect is executed.

Furthermore, if the game state is a time-saving state or a probability variation state (step 006SGS311; N), the performance control CPU 120 performs the execution of a continuous break effect according to the variation pattern of the variable display and terminates the continuous break effect setting process (step 006SGS323). For example, in step 006SGS323, the performance control CPU 120 first decides whether or not to execute a continuous break effect according to the variation pattern of the variable display. At this time, if the variation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach variation pattern, the continuous break effect should be decided at the lowest rate, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is a super reach variation pattern, the continuous break effect should be decided at the highest rate (execution rate of continuous break effect for each variation pattern: super reach > normal reach > non-reach). If the execution of the consecutive break effect is decided, and the variable display's variation pattern is not a reach, then the variable display should be set to execute the consecutive break effect (first consecutive break effect) once or twice. If the variable display's variation pattern is a normal reach or a super reach, then the variable display should be set to execute the first consecutive break effect twice, and then execute the second consecutive break effect once after the two first consecutive break effects.

In other words, the continuous splitting animation in the time-saving state and probability-changing state of this embodiment is an animation that can be executed multiple times within the variable display, and the animation suggests that a reach will occur depending on the number of times it is executed.

(Dialogue preview effect setting processing)
Figure 39(A) is a flowchart showing the dialogue予告演出 (dialogue予告演出) setting process (step 006SGS278) in the variable display start setting process shown in Figure 37. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is a shortened non-reach (step 006SGS331). If the variation pattern of the variable display is a shortened non-reach (step 006SGS331; Y), the dialogue予告演出 setting process is terminated. If the variation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach without shortening, a normal reach, or a super reach (step 006SGS331; N), the presence or absence of a dialogue予告演出 and the performance pattern are determined according to the variation pattern and the variable display result (step 006SGS332).

For example, as shown in Figure 39(B), if the variation pattern is not a reach and the variable display result is a miss, the decision to not perform the dialogue予告演出 (dialogue予告演出) is made 70% of the time, and the decision to perform the dialogue予告演出 using performance pattern A is made 30% of the time. Also, if the variation pattern is a normal reach and the variable display result is a miss, the decision to not perform the dialogue予告演出 is made 60% of the time, the decision to perform the dialogue予告演出 using performance pattern A is made 35% of the time, and the decision to perform the dialogue予告演出 using performance pattern B is made 5% of the time. Also, if the variation pattern is a super reach and the variable display result is a miss, the decision to not perform the dialogue予告演出 is made 40% of the time, the decision to perform the dialogue予告演出 using performance pattern A is made 10% of the time, the decision to perform the dialogue予告演出 using performance pattern B is made 20% of the time, and the decision to perform the dialogue予告演出 using performance pattern C is made 30% of the time. Then, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the system determines whether to not execute the dialogue予告演出 (dialogue予告演出) with a 10% probability, whether to execute it using dialogue予告演出 pattern A with a 5% probability, whether to execute it using dialogue予告演出 pattern B with a 10% probability, and whether to execute it using dialogue予告演出 pattern C with a 75% probability.

As shown in Figure 39(C), performance pattern A is a performance pattern in which the line "Chance!?" is displayed in the area generated in the display area of the image display device 5 during a crack effect performed as part of a dialogue予告 (preview) performance. Performance pattern B is a performance pattern in which the line "Super hot!" is displayed in the area generated in the display area of the image display device 5 during a crack effect performed as part of a dialogue予告 (preview) performance. Performance pattern C is a performance pattern in which the line "Super hot!" is displayed in the area generated in the display area of the image display device 5 during a crack effect performed as part of a dialogue予告 (preview) performance.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 39(B), when a dialogue予告演出 (dialogue予告演出) is performed during variable display, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot state is set higher than when the dialogue予告演出 is not performed (not performed). Moreover, when a dialogue予告演出 is performed, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot state is highest when the dialogue予告演出 is performed using performance pattern C, and lowest when the dialogue予告演出 is performed using performance pattern A (jackpot expectation rate according to the presence or absence of dialogue予告演出 and performance pattern: performance pattern C > performance pattern B > performance pattern A > not performed).

(Background change effect setting process)
Next, the background change effect setting process (step 006SGS279) shown in Figure 37 will be described. In the background change effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is PA1-1, PA1-6, PA1-7, PA2-1, PA2-2, PA2-3, PA2-4, PA2-7, PB1-1, PB1-2, PB1-3, PB1-4, or PB1-7. If the variation pattern of the variable display is PA1-1, PA1-6, PA1-7, PA2-1, PA2-2, PA2-3, PA2-4, PA2-7, PB1-1, PB1-2, PB1-3, PB1-4, or PB1-7, it refers to the start-up prize-winning received command buffer 006SG194A.

When the game is in a normal state, if the starting prize-winning received command buffer 006SG194A does not store a symbol specification command indicating a jackpot, that is, if there is no reserve memory for a jackpot, then, as shown in Figure 40(A), the background image change will not be executed and the background change effect will not be executed with a 60% probability. The background image change will not be executed and the background change effect will be executed in a failed pattern (if the variable display variation pattern is any of PA1-1, PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1, or PB1-3, the background change effect A will be executed in a failed pattern, and the variable display will be changed If the motion pattern is PA2-2, PA2-4, PB1-2, or PB1-4, the execution of the failed pattern of background change effect B is determined at a rate of 30%, and the execution of the background image change and the successful pattern of the background change effect is determined at a rate of 10%. Furthermore, when the game state is in a time-saving state/probability-changing state, if the starting entry command buffer 006SG194A does not store a symbol specification command indicating a jackpot, that is, if there is no reserve memory for a jackpot, the game will decide not to perform a background image change and not to perform the background change animation with a 50% probability, not to perform a background image change and to perform the background change animation in a failed pattern with a 45% probability (if the variable display's variation pattern is any of PB1-7, PA1-5, PA1-6, or PA2-7, then to perform the background change animation in a failed pattern), and to perform a background image change and to perform the background change animation in a successful pattern (if the variable display's variation pattern is any of PB1-7, PA1-5, PA1-6, or PA2-7, then to perform the background change animation in a successful pattern with a 5% probability.

Furthermore, when the game state is normal, if a symbol specification command indicating a jackpot is stored in the start-up winning-received command buffer 006SG194A, that is, if there is a reserve memory for a jackpot, then, as shown in Figure 40(A), the background image change will not be executed and the background change effect will not be executed with a 30% probability. The background image change will not be executed and the background change effect will be executed in a failed pattern (if the variable display's variation pattern is any of PA1-1, PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1, or PB1-3, then the background change effect A will be executed in a failed pattern, and the variable display If the variation pattern is any of PA2-2, PA2-4, PB1-2, or PB1-4, the execution of the failed pattern of background change effect B is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of the background image change and the successful pattern of the background change effect is determined at a rate of 70%. Furthermore, when the game state is in a time-saving state/probability-changing state, if a symbol specification command indicating a jackpot is stored in the start-up entry command buffer 006SG194A, that is, if there is a reserve memory indicating a jackpot, then the game is determined to not execute the background image change and not perform the background change animation with a 20% probability, to not execute the background image change and perform the background change animation in a failed pattern (if the variable display's variation pattern is any of PB1-7, PA1-5, PA1-6, or PA2-7, then perform the failed pattern of background change animation A) with a 0% probability, and to execute the background image change and perform the background change animation in a successful pattern (if the variable display's variation pattern is any of PB1-7, PA1-5, PA1-6, or PA2-7, then perform the successful pattern of background change animation A) with an 80% probability. Thus, in this embodiment, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state when the background change animation is executed, i.e., the jackpot expectation level, differs between the normal state and the time-saving state/probability-changing state.

Furthermore, if it is decided to execute one of the background change animation patterns, the execution settings corresponding to that background change animation pattern should be configured, and the background change animation should be executed in the variable display animation processing according to those execution settings. Also, if it is decided to change the background image (if it is decided to execute the successful pattern of the background change animation), the background image change settings should be configured. The background image change should be executed in the background display update process (step S79) shown in Figure 34.

(Setting process for suggesting a reach)
Next, the reach suggestion effect setting process (step 006 SGS280) shown in Figure 37 will be explained. In the reach suggestion effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is one of PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1, or PB1-3. If the variation pattern of the variable display is one of PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1, or PB1-3, the CPU determines whether or not to execute the reach suggestion effect and the effect pattern of the reach suggestion effect according to the variation pattern of the variable display.

For example, as shown in Figure 40(B), if the variable display's variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern, the system determines that the reach suggestion animation will not be executed 80% of the time, and that it will be executed in a failed pattern 20% of the time. Furthermore, if the variable display's variation pattern is a reach variation pattern, the system determines that the reach suggestion animation will not be executed 30% of the time, and that it will be executed in a successful pattern 70% of the time. In other words, in this embodiment, when the reach suggestion animation is executed, the system is set to execute a reach (normal reach or super reach animation) at a higher rate than when the reach suggestion animation is not executed. Moreover, when the reach suggestion animation is executed, the player is notified that a reach will not occur if the animation is executed in a failed pattern, while the player is notified that a reach will occur if the animation is executed in a successful pattern.

Furthermore, if you decide to execute one of the reach-indicating animation patterns, you should configure the execution settings according to that animation pattern and then execute the reach-indicating animation during the variable display animation processing according to those execution settings.

(Cut-in effect setting process)
Next, the cut-in effect setting process (step 006 SGS281) shown in Figure 37 will be described. In the cut-in effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is one of PA2-3, PA2-4, PB1-3, PB1-4, PA2-7, or PB1-7. If the variation pattern of the variable display is one of PA2-3, PA2-4, PB1-3, PB1-4, PA2-7, or PB1-7, the CPU determines whether or not to execute the cut-in effect and the effect pattern of the cut-in effect according to the variable display result of the variable display.

For example, when the game is in a normal state, as shown in Figure 40(C), if the variable display result is a miss, the cut-in animation is not executed with a 65% probability, executed with animation pattern X with a 30% probability, and executed with animation pattern Y with a 5% probability. Furthermore, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the cut-in animation is not executed with a 10% probability, executed with animation pattern X with a 20% probability, and executed with animation pattern Y with a 70% probability.

In other words, in this embodiment, when a cut-in animation is performed, the game is controlled to a jackpot state at a higher rate than when a cut-in animation is not performed. Furthermore, when a cut-in animation is performed, when the cut-in animation is performed with animation pattern Y, the game is controlled to a jackpot state at a higher rate than when the cut-in animation is performed with animation pattern X (jackpot expectation rate for the presence or absence of cut-in animation and animation pattern: animation pattern Y > animation pattern X > no cut-in animation). Also, when the game state is a time-saving state/probability-changing state, if the variable display result is a miss, the cut-in animation is not performed with a 70% probability, the cut-in animation is performed with animation pattern X with a 30% probability, and the cut-in animation is performed with animation pattern Y with a 0% probability. Also, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the cut-in animation is not performed with a 10% probability, the cut-in animation is performed with animation pattern X with a 15% probability, and the cut-in animation is performed with animation pattern Y with a 75% probability. Thus, in this embodiment, the proportion of times the game is controlled to a jackpot state when a cut-in animation is performed, i.e., the probability of winning a jackpot, differs between the normal state and the time-saving/probability variation state.

Furthermore, the cut-in animation in this embodiment displays different images depending on the animation pattern (for example, an image of the words "Hot!!" or an image of the words "Chance!"), and the proportion of the game being controlled to a jackpot state differs depending on which image is displayed (which animation pattern is used to execute the animation). (In this embodiment, animation pattern X displays the image of the words "Chance!", and animation pattern Y displays the image of the words "Hot!!").

Furthermore, if you decide to execute one of the cut-in animation patterns, you should configure the execution settings according to that cut-in animation pattern, and then execute the cut-in animation during the variable display animation processing according to those execution settings.

In this embodiment, a cut-in animation is exemplified as an animation accompanied by a cracking animation (see Figures 42 and 66). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the cut-in animation may include both animation patterns with and without a cracking animation. For example, animation pattern Y, which has a high probability of winning, may be an animation pattern accompanied by a cracking animation, and animation pattern X, which has a low probability of winning, may be an animation pattern without a cracking animation. Furthermore, when animation pattern X is an animation pattern without a cracking animation, when the animation pattern for the cut-in animation is determined to be animation pattern X, the display mode of the strip-shaped image displayed on the image display device 5 may be determined from a plurality of modes corresponding to the variable display result (for example, the display color of the image may be determined in different proportions from blue, green, and red depending on whether the variable display result is a win or a loss). By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the cut-in animation is accompanied by a cracking animation, and if the cut-in animation is not accompanied by a cracking animation, it is possible to further draw the player's attention to the display mode of the displayed image.

(Explanation of the production)
As described above, in this embodiment, it is possible to decide whether or not to execute the continuous cracking effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect, reach suggestion effect, and cut-in effect at the start of the variable display. Furthermore, in this embodiment, in addition to the continuous cracking effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect, reach suggestion effect, and cut-in effect described above, multiple effects can be executed while the variable display is in progress.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 41 and 42, when the game state is the normal state, the following effects can be executed: the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, the dialogue予告 effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo-consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 43, when the game state is the time-saving state or the probability variation state, the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, the background change effect A, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect can be executed. Furthermore, the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, and the cut-in effect may be made unexecutable in the normal state and only executable in the time-saving state or probability variation state. In this case, the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, and the cut-in effect are executed according to the determination ratios shown in Figures 38(B) and 40(C). This allows for the execution of different types of cracking animations in the normal state, the time-saving state, and the probability-increasing state.

As shown in Figures 41 to 43, the first continuous cracking effect among these effects is an effect in which a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a cracking effect is executed from the start timing of the variable display in which a glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed as the image to be cracked in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks regardless of the movement of the movable body 32 or the action of the character, and only the part in which the crack occurs breaks (the cracked area is only a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A that is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301). Furthermore, the first continuous cracking effect is also an effect in which the visibility of the background image differs between the area targeted by the cracking effect (a part of the display area of the image display device 5 that is cracked by the cracking effect) and the other display areas. Furthermore, the first consecutive split animation is an animation that may occur during the variable display before the variable display of the pre-read target. However, in the time-saving mode and probability-increasing mode, it can occur multiple times during the execution of the first variable display, and the number of times it occurs suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot.

The second consecutive cracking effect is an effect in which a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a cracking effect occurs in which a glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks. This effect is executed from the start timing of the variable display, and cracks occur in the glass plate image 006SG301 regardless of the movement of movable parts or the action of characters, and only the cracked part breaks (the cracked area is only a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A that is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301). Furthermore, the second consecutive cracking effect is also an effect in which the visibility of the background image differs between the area targeted by the cracking effect (a part of the display area of the image display device 5 that is cracked by the cracking effect) and the other display areas. In addition, the second consecutive cracking effect is an effect that may be executed in the variable display of the pre-read target.

The dialogue notification effect is an effect in which, as an action prompting effect, an action prompting image is displayed in a predetermined position (for example, the center of the display area) in the display area of the image display device 5 prompting the player to operate the push button 31B. Then, in response to the operation of the push button 31B, a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a cracking effect is executed in which a glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks. In this effect, cracks occur in the glass plate image 006SG301 regardless of the movement of a movable body or the action of a character, and only the part where the cracks occur breaks (the cracked area is only a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A that is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301). Furthermore, the dialogue予告演出 (dialogue予告演出) is a performance in which the visibility of the background image differs between the area targeted by the cracking effect (a part of the display area of the image display device 5 that is cracked by the cracking effect) and the other display areas. Additionally, one of the following lines of dialogue is displayed in the cracked area (the area targeted by the cracking effect): "Chance!", "Hot!", or "Super Hot!". The percentage of the game being controlled to a jackpot state differs depending on the displayed line (the displayed line suggests the percentage of the game being controlled to a jackpot state (jackpot expectation)).

Background change effect A is an effect that may change the background image by displaying a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% in the display area of the image display device 5, and then executing a cracking effect in which a glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks. Background change effect A can be executed in two ways: a successful pattern in which the background image changes as the character's actions cause cracks to appear in the glass plate image 006SG301 and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks; and a failed pattern in which the background image does not change because no character appears and the glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed (the glass plate image 006SG301A does not crack).

Background change effect B is an effect in which a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a cracking effect is executed in which a glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks, thereby changing the background image. Furthermore, background change effect B can be executed in two ways: a successful pattern where cracks occur in two stages on the glass plate image 006SG301, and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of glass plate image 006SG301, shatters, resulting in a change of the background image; or a failure pattern (failure pattern 1 and failure pattern 2) where a first stage of crack occurs on glass plate image 006SG301 but a second stage does not occur and glass plate image 006SG301A does not shatter, or where both first and second stage cracks occur on glass plate image 006SG301 but glass plate image 006SG301A does not shatter, resulting in no change of the background image.

The pseudo-consecutive display is an effect in which, when the decorative symbols temporarily stop in a specific combination during the execution of the variable display, a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a cracking effect is executed in which a glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, breaks, thereby restarting the variable display of the decorative symbols. This effect is achieved when the movable body 32 operates, causing cracks to form in the glass plate image 006SG301, and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, breaks. In this embodiment, the pseudo-consecutive display is executed up to two times during the variable display, and the color of the fragments of the glass plate image 006SG301A that breaks in the first pseudo-consecutive display is different from the color of the fragments of the glass plate image 006SG301A that breaks in the second pseudo-consecutive display. Furthermore, in this embodiment, as shown in Figures 21 and 22, the more times the pseudo-consecutive animation is performed during the variable display, the higher the percentage of times the variable display result results in a jackpot (the percentage of times the game is controlled to a jackpot state). In other words, in the pseudo-consecutive animation in this embodiment, the color of the fragments of the glass plate image 006SG301A in the cracking animation performed as part of the pseudo-consecutive animation can indicate to the player the percentage of times the game is controlled to a jackpot state (the expected jackpot rate).

The reach-indication effect is an effect that suggests the establishment of a reach during variable display. It is an effect in which a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a cracking effect is executed in which a glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks, thereby establishing a reach. Furthermore, the reach-indication effect can be executed in two ways: a successful pattern where a crack occurs in the glass plate image 006SG301 due to the character's action, and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks, and thus establishes a reach; and a failure pattern where a crack occurs due to the character's action, but the glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed (the glass plate image 006SG301A does not crack), resulting in no reach being established.

The weak development sequence is a sequence that occurs after a normal reach sequence, in which a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transparency of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a cracking sequence is performed in which a glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks. If the game state is normal, this sequence notifies the player of the transition to the Super Reach α reach sequence; if the game state is shortened time or probability variation, this sequence notifies the player of the transition to the Super Reach γ reach sequence. Furthermore, the weak development sequence can also be a sequence in which the entire glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks without any cracks appearing due to the action of a character.

Strong Development演出 A, when the game state is the normal state, is an effect that signals a transition to the Super Reach β reach effect. This effect occurs when, after the Super Reach α reach effect, a glass plate image 006SG301 with less than 100% transparency is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a glass plate image 006SG301A, displayed in place of the original glass plate image 006SG301, breaks in response to the movement of the movable body 32. When the game state is the Time-Saving State or the Probability-Boosting State, this effect signals a transition to the Super Reach δ reach effect. When the game state is the Normal Reach reach effect, this effect occurs when, after the Normal Reach reach effect, a glass plate image 006SG301 with less than 100% transparency is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a glass plate image 006SG301A, displayed in place of the original glass plate image 006SG301, breaks in response to the movement of the movable body 32.

The powerful development effect B is an effect in which cracks appear without any interaction from the character, and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, shatters. During the reach effect of Super Reach α, a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a cracking effect is executed in which the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, shatters. This effect signals the transition to the reach effect of Super Reach β, and is an effect in which the entire glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, shatters without any cracking caused by the movement of the movable body 32 or the character's interaction.

The cut-in effect is an action prompting effect in which, as an action prompting effect, an action prompting image is displayed in a predetermined position (for example, the center of the display area) of the image display device 5 prompting the player to operate the push button 31B. Then, in response to the operation of the push button 31B, a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a cracking effect is executed in which the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks. This effect is characterized by the entire glass plate image 006SG301A cracking without the occurrence of cracks due to the movement of movable parts or the actions of characters. Furthermore, the cut-in effect displays different cut-in images depending on the effect pattern from the moment the glass plate image 006SG301A cracks, and the percentage of the game being controlled to a jackpot state differs depending on the displayed cut-in image (the displayed cut-in image suggests the percentage of the game being controlled to a jackpot state (jackpot expectation)).

The result notification effect is an effect in which, as an operation prompting effect, an operation prompting image prompting the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, the center of the display area) in the display area of the image display device 5, and then, in response to the operation of the push button 31B, a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a cracking effect is performed in which a glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks, thereby notifying the player that the game has been controlled to a jackpot state. Furthermore, the result notification animation is executed in two ways: a success pattern, where the entire glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of glass plate image 006SG301 after a crack occurs due to the movement of the movable part, indicates that the game has been controlled to a jackpot state; and a failure pattern, where the movable part does not move, no crack occurs in glass plate image 006SG301, and glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed (glass plate image 006SG301A does not crack), indicating that the game has not been controlled to a jackpot state, i.e., the variable display result is a miss. In this embodiment, the result notification animation may exceptionally be executed in the variable display patterns PA1-6 and PB1-5, which are non-reach jackpot or non-reach miss patterns, when the game state is a time-saving state or a probability-changing state (see Figure 47).

(Performance timing for each variation pattern)
Next, we will explain the approximate execution timing and duration for each variation pattern of the effects in this embodiment. First, regarding the variable display when the game state is the normal state, as shown in Figure 44(A), when the variable display is executed in PA1-1, which is a variation pattern with no shortening and no reach misses, the effects can be executed individually without overlapping durations in the following order from the start timing of the variable display: the first consecutive break effect, the dialogue予告 effect, the background change effect A, and the reach suggestion effect.

As shown in Figure 44(B), when variable display is executed in the shortened non-reach miss variation patterns PA1-2 and PA1-3, the first consecutive break effect can be executed from the start timing of the variable display.

As shown in Figure 44(C), when variable display is executed in PA2-1 and PB1-1, which are variation patterns for normal reach jackpots and normal reach misses, the dialogue予告演出 (dialogue予告演出), background change演出 A, reach indication演出 (reach suggestion演出), and normal reach演出 (reach演出) can be executed individually without overlapping performance periods, in the following order, a short time after the start of the variable display.

As shown in Figure 44(D), when variable display is executed in PA2-2 and PB1-2, which are variation patterns for Super Reach α jackpot and Super Reach α miss, the following sequences can be executed individually without overlapping durations, starting from the variable display's start timing: second consecutive break effect, background change effect B, first pseudo-consecutive effect, normal reach effect, weak development effect, and Super Reach α reach effect. Furthermore, during the execution period of the Super Reach α reach effect, the result notification effect is executed in conjunction with the Super Reach α reach effect.

As shown in Figure 45(A), when variable display is executed in PA2-3 and PB1-3, which are variation patterns for Super Reach β jackpot and Super Reach β miss, the following sequences can be executed individually without overlapping durations, starting from the beginning of the variable display: second consecutive break effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, reach suggestion effect, normal reach effect, weak development effect, Super Reach α reach effect, strong development effect A, and Super Reach β reach effect. Furthermore, during the execution period of the Super Reach β reach effect, the cut-in effect and result notification effect are executed individually, overlapping with the Super Reach β reach effect.

In particular, the character displayed in background change effect A begins to appear after the display of the dialogue in the dialogue予告 effect (the display of the cracked area within the display area of the image display device 5) has disappeared. Therefore, a new crack effect does not occur where a crack effect has already occurred, preventing a decrease in the effectiveness of each crack effect due to the player's attention being dispersed among multiple crack effects.

As shown in Figure 45(B), when variable display is executed in PA2-4 and PB1-4, which are variation patterns for Super Reach β jackpot and Super Reach β miss, the following sequences can be executed individually without overlapping durations, starting from the variable display's start timing: 2nd consecutive break sequence, background change sequence B, 1st pseudo-consecutive sequence, 2nd pseudo-consecutive sequence, normal reach sequence, weak development sequence, Super Reach α sequence, strong development sequence B, and Super Reach β sequence. Furthermore, during the execution period of the Super Reach β sequence, the cut-in sequence and result notification sequence are executed individually, overlapping with the Super Reach β sequence.

In this embodiment, as shown in Figures 44 to 46, an example is provided in which the variable display on which background change effect B is executed and the variable display on which the dialogue予告 effect is executed are different. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the background change effect B and the dialogue予告 effect may be executed within the same variable display. Furthermore, in the case where the background change effect B and the dialogue予告 effect are executed within the same variable display, if the execution of background change effect B is decided, the execution periods of background change effect B and the dialogue予告 effect may be avoided. By doing so, for example, if the cracking effect as a dialogue予告 effect is executed while the cracking effect as background change effect B is occurring, it is possible to prevent the player who is experiencing the cracking effect as background change effect B from being misled, that is, from being misled into thinking that the background image is changing.

Next, we will explain the variable display when the game state is a time-saving state or a probability variation state. As shown in Figures 46(A) and 46(B), when the variable display is executed in PA1-5, which is a non-reach miss variation pattern, if the execution of a continuous break effect targeting PA1-6 and PB1-5, which are non-reach miss or non-reach jackpot variation patterns, is decided, the first continuous break effect can be executed from the start timing of the variable display. If the execution of a background change effect is decided as a pre-announcement targeting PB1-7, which is a super reach δ jackpot variation pattern, background change effect A can be executed from the start timing of the variable display.

Furthermore, for the variable display of PB1-5, which are non-reach jackpot variation patterns, it may be possible to execute a pre-announcement effect in which cracks gradually spread within the display area of the image display device 5 from the variable display prior to the said variable display, and an effect (so-called instant win effect, special consecutive crack effect) is executed in which the crack effect is executed at the start of the PB1-5 variable display and the jackpot symbols are displayed (a so-called instant win effect, special consecutive crack effect). Since this effect is an instant win effect, the movement speed of the fragments displayed as part of the crack effect may be faster than that of fragments displayed as part of other crack effects.

As shown in Figures 46(C) and 46(D), when the variable display is executed in PA1-6, which is a non-reach miss variation pattern, if the execution of a continuous break effect targeting PA1-6 and PB1-5, which are non-reach miss or non-reach jackpot variation patterns, the first continuous break effect can be executed individually twice from the start timing of the variable display. Furthermore, if the execution of a background change effect is decided as a pre-announcement targeting PB1-7, which is a Super Reach δ jackpot variation pattern, background change effect A can be executed from the start timing of the variable display.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 47(A), when the variable display is executed in PA1-6, which is a non-reach miss variation pattern, and when it is the target of the continuous break effect, and when the execution of the background change effect has not been decided as a pre-read for PB1-7, which is a Super Reach δ jackpot variation pattern, and when the variable display is executed in PB1-5, which is a non-reach jackpot variation pattern, the first continuous break effect is executed individually three times from the start timing of the variable display, and then the result notification effect is executed.

As shown in Figure 47(B), when the variable display is executed in PA2-5, which is a variation pattern for a normal reach failure, no effects other than the variable display of decorative symbols are executed from the start of the variable display until the reach timing. From the reach timing onward, only the reach effects of a normal reach are executed.

As shown in Figure 47(C), when variable display is performed in PA2-6 and PB1-6, which are variation patterns for Super Reach γ jackpot or Super Reach γ miss, no effects other than the variable display of decorative symbols are performed from the start of the variable display until the reach timing. From the reach timing, the normal reach effect, weak development effect, and Super Reach γ reach effect are executed individually without overlapping effect periods. Furthermore, during the execution period of the Super Reach γ reach effect, the result notification effect is executed in conjunction with the Super Reach γ reach effect.

As shown in Figure 47(D), when the variable display is executed in PA2-7 and PB1-7, which are variation patterns for Super Reach δ jackpot or Super Reach δ miss, the background change effect A can be executed during the period from the start of the variable display to the reach timing. Furthermore, from the reach timing onward, the normal reach effect, strong development effect A, and Super Reach δ reach effect can be executed individually without overlapping effect periods. During the execution period of the Super Reach δ reach effect, the cut-in effect and the result notification effect are executed individually, overlapping with the Super Reach δ reach effect.

(The sequence of events in Super Reach α)
Next, the flow of the Super Reach α sequence will be explained based on Figures 48 to 50. Figure 48 is a diagram showing the flow of the Super Reach α sequence. Figure 49 is a diagram showing the flow of the Super Reach α sequence. Figure 50 is a diagram showing the flow of the Super Reach α sequence.

As shown in Figure 48 (A1), in the normal state (low probability, low base state), when the variable display of symbols based on the variation pattern of Super Reach α begins, a first background image (for example, an image representing a daytime city scene) is displayed as the background image, and the variable display of decorative symbols is performed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. After a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable display, the second consecutive crack effect begins. Specifically, when the second consecutive crack effect begins, a crack premonition image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed, and after the crack premonition image is displayed in a cracked state by displaying cracks in a part of the crack premonition image (see Figure 48 (A2)), a crack effect is performed in which a part of the crack target image that replaces the crack premonition image cracks, and multiple fragment images scatter. Furthermore, a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the crack effect begins. Subsequently, in the image that replaces the pre-crack image, a character image (object image) is displayed in the partially cracked area (specific range). The type of character image displayed suggests the possibility of a jackpot (see Figure 48 (A3)). After the second consecutive crack effect ends, the variable display is executed again.

After a predetermined period has elapsed since the second consecutive crack effect ended, a dialogue notification effect begins. Specifically, at a predetermined timing after the dialogue notification effect begins, an action prompt image is displayed to encourage the operation of the push button 31B (see Figure 48 (A4)). The action prompt image consists of a button image resembling the push button 31B, a text image that reads "Press!!", an indicator image showing the effective operation period, and an effect image.

Next, when push button 31B is operated, or when the operation validity period ends without push button 31B being operated, a crack premonition image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed, and after a crack appears on a part of the crack premonition image (see Figure 48 (A5)), a crack effect is performed in which a part of the target image that replaces the crack premonition image cracks, and multiple fragments of images scatter. A whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period after the crack effect begins. Afterward, the text image "Chance!?" is displayed in the partially cracked area (specific range) of the target image that replaces the crack premonition image, and the content of the displayed text image suggests the possibility of a jackpot in the variable display result (see Figure 48 (A6)). After the dialogue予告演出 (pre-announcement effect) ends, the variable display is executed again.

After a predetermined period has elapsed since the dialogue preview sequence ended, background change sequence A begins. Specifically, an effect image is displayed in the center of the display screen (see Figure 48 (A7)), and if the appearance of a character has been determined, a character image (object image) is displayed (see Figure 48 (A8)). Next, a cracking premonition image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed in accordance with the character image's movement (for example, the character kicking), and after the cracking premonition image is displayed in a cracked state as cracks appear on a part of it (see Figure 48 (A9)), the entire cracking target image, which replaces the cracking premonition image, cracks, and a cracking sequence is performed in which multiple fragments of images scatter (see Figure 48 (A10)). Furthermore, a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period after the cracking sequence begins. As the transparency of the whiteout image increases, a second background image different from the first background image (for example, a special zone image representing a wilderness landscape) is displayed as the background image (see Figure 48 (A11)). After background change effect A finishes, the variable display will be executed again.

After a predetermined period has elapsed since the background change effect A ended, the reach suggestion effect began. Specifically, the decorative symbols were temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, and a character image (object image) was displayed in the center of the display screen (see Figure 48 (A12)). Next, in response to the character image's actions (for example, the character striking the area corresponding to the left decorative pattern display area 5L with a small mallet), a crack precursor image (such as a glass plate) is displayed. A crack then appears on the left side of the crack precursor image, causing it to display in a first crack pattern (see Figure 48 (A13)). Then, in response to the character image's actions (for example, the character striking the area corresponding to the right decorative pattern display area 5R with a small mallet), a crack appears on the right side of the crack precursor image, causing it to change from a first crack pattern to a second crack pattern (see Figure 48 (A14)). Furthermore, in response to the character image's actions (for example, the character striking the area corresponding to the middle decorative pattern display area 5C with a small mallet) (Figure 48 (A15)), if a crack is determined, the entire cracked area of the crack target image, replacing the crack precursor image, cracks, and a crack effect is executed in which multiple fragments of images scatter (see Figure 48 (A16)).

Furthermore, a whiteout image (effect image) will be displayed across the entire screen for a predetermined period after the crack effect begins. As the transparency of the whiteout image increases, the same numbered decorative symbols will be temporarily displayed in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and the N-reach effect will begin.

After a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the N-Reach animation, a weak development animation begins. Specifically, after a character image (object image) is displayed in the center of the display screen (see Figure 48 (A17)), a pre-breaking image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed in accordance with the character image's actions (for example, the character moves toward the front of the display screen and punches a glass plate) (see Figure 49 (A18)). Without any cracks appearing on a portion of the pre-breaking image, the entire target image, which replaces the pre-breaking image, breaks, and multiple fragments scatter (see Figure 49 (A19)). Furthermore, a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period after the start of the breaking animation. As the transparency of the whiteout image increases, a weak S-Reach animation A (for example, a bowling match between an ally character and an enemy character) begins (see Figures 49 (A20) to (A22)).

After a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the weak S-reach animation, the strong development animation A begins. Specifically, after the development symbol with the word "Development" displayed in the central decorative symbol display area 5C is temporarily stopped (see Figure 49 (A23)), a crack premonition image (such as a glass plate) is displayed in accordance with the movement of the movable body 32 (for example, the movable body 32 falls from its origin position at the top of the display screen to an animation position that overlaps with the approximate center of the display screen). Without cracks being displayed in any part of the crack premonition image, the entire area of the image to be cracked, which replaces the crack premonition image, cracks, and a crack animation is performed in which multiple fragments of images scatter (see Figure 49 (A24)). Furthermore, a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period after the crack animation begins. As the transparency of the whiteout image increases, the reach title image is displayed, and the strong S-reach animation (for example, a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) begins (see Figures 49 (A25) to (A27)).

After a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the Strong S Reach演出 (Strong S Reach演出), a cut-in演出 (cut-in演出) begins. Specifically, at a predetermined timing after the start of the Strong S Reach演出, an operation prompt image is displayed to encourage the operation of the push button 31B (see Figure 49 (A28)). Next, when the push button 31B is operated, or when the operation valid period ends without the push button 31B being operated, a crack premonition image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed. Without cracks being displayed in any part of the crack premonition image, the entire area of the crack target image that replaces the crack premonition image cracks, and a crack effect is executed in which multiple fragments of images scatter. Furthermore, a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period after the start of the crack effect. After that, the text image "Hot!!" is displayed in the cracked area (specific range), and the content of the displayed text image suggests the possibility of a jackpot in the variable display result (see Figure 49 (A29)). After the cut-in演出 ends, the Strong S Reach演出 is executed again.

After a predetermined period has elapsed since the cut-in animation ended, the result notification animation begins. Specifically, first, an image of the allied character delivering the final blow is displayed (see Figure 50 (A30)), and then the allied character's movements are displayed in slow motion while the image fades out (see Figure 50 (A31)).

If the variable display result is a jackpot display result, an image of an ally character's attack hitting an enemy character is displayed (see Figure 50 (A32)). Then, a crack premonition image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed according to the movement of the movable body 32 (for example, the movement of the movable body 32 falling from the origin position at the top of the display screen to a predetermined performance position between the origin position and the performance position). A crack is displayed in a part of the crack premonition image, causing the crack premonition image to be displayed in a cracked pattern (for example, a crack extending downwards from the movable body 32), and a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen (see Figure 50 (A33)).

Next, in response to the movement of the movable body (for example, the movable body 32 returns to its origin position by rising from a predetermined performance position at the top of the display screen), the entire area of the image to be cracked, which replaces the pre-crack image, cracks, and a cracking effect is performed in which multiple fragments of images scatter (see Figure 50 (A34)). A whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect begins. As the transparency of the whiteout image increases, the confirmed winning combinations of decorative symbols are temporarily displayed in the respective decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and it is announced that the ally character has won the battle against the enemy character. Furthermore, after the background image is displayed as the fifth background image 006SG085 for jackpots (for example, a rainbow-colored image), the movable lamp 9d lights up in a predetermined color (for example, rainbow), a predetermined sound effect is output, and the game is controlled to a jackpot state (see Figure 50 (A35)). Then, the background image returns to the first background image, and the winning combination's confirmed decorative symbols are displayed (see Figure 50 (A36)).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a false result, after an image of an enemy character's punch hitting an ally character is displayed (see Figure 50 (A37)), the movable body 32 does not move, and a crack precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed. A crack is then displayed in a portion of this crack precursor image, causing the image to appear cracked (for example, a crack in the center of the display screen), and a gray image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen (see Figure 50 (A38)).

Next, after a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed (see Figure 50 (A39)), as the transparency of the whiteout image increases, the confirmed decorative symbols for non-winning combinations are temporarily displayed, and it is announced that the ally character has lost the battle against the enemy character (Figure 50 (A40)). Furthermore, after it is announced that the game is not controlled to a winning state, the background image returns to the first background image, and the confirmed decorative symbols for non-winning combinations are displayed stopped (see Figure 50 (A41)).

(Flow of the presentation in Super Reach β)
Next, the flow of the presentation in Super Reach β will be explained based on Figures 51 and 52. Figure 51 is a diagram showing the flow of the presentation in Super Reach β. Figure 52 is a diagram showing the flow of the presentation in Super Reach β.

As shown in Figure 51 (B1), in the normal state (low probability, low base state), when the variable display of symbols based on the variation pattern of Super Reach β begins, the first background image is displayed as the background image, and the variable display of decorative symbols is performed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. After a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable display, background change effect B is started. Specifically, when background change effect B is started, a crack premonition image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed, and a crack display area consisting of cracks including a small crack area is displayed in the lower left of the crack premonition image, so that the crack premonition image is displayed in a cracked state (see Figure 51 (B2)). Then, two crack display areas are displayed on the right side of the crack premonition image, so that the cracked state of the crack premonition image changes in stages (see Figure 51 (B3)). If a crack is determined, the entire area of the crack target image that replaces the crack premonition image cracks, and a crack effect is performed in which multiple fragment images scatter (see Figure 51 (B4)). Furthermore, a whiteout image (effect image) will be displayed across the entire screen for a predetermined period after the cracking effect begins. As the transparency of the whiteout image increases, a second background image, different from the first background image, will be displayed as the background image (see Figure 51 (B5)).

After the background change effect A finishes, the variable display is executed again. A decorative symbol is temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L (see Figure 51 (B6)). Then, in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, a decorative symbol with the same number as the one temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily displayed, resulting in the variable display mode becoming a "reach" mode (see Figure 51 (B7)).

After a predetermined period has elapsed following the end of background change effect B, the pseudo-consecutive symbol effect begins. Specifically, in the central decorative symbol display area 5C, the pseudo-consecutive symbol displaying the word "NEXT," indicating the start of re-variable display, is displayed at a reduced speed just before the stop display position (see Figure 51 (B8)).

Next, after a pseudo-consecutive symbol is temporarily displayed at the stop display position in the central decorative symbol display area 5C (see Figure 51 (B9)), a crack premonition image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed, and after a crack appears on a part of the crack premonition image, the crack premonition image is displayed in a cracked state (see Figure 51 (B10)). Then, in accordance with the movement of the movable body 32 (for example, the movable body 32 falls from the origin position at the top of the display screen to an effect position that overlaps with the approximate center of the display screen), the entire area of the image to be cracked, which replaces the crack premonition image, cracks, and a crack effect is executed in which multiple fragment images scatter (see Figure 51 (B11)). Furthermore, a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period after the crack effect begins. As the transparency of the whiteout image increases, a text image such as "×2" indicating the number of re-variable display attempts is displayed, and then the variable display resumes (see Figures 51 (B12) to (B13)).

Furthermore, in the case of a variable display where the pseudo-consecutive win notification is not executed, the pseudo-consecutive win symbols pass through the stop display position in the central decorative symbol display area 5C, and decorative symbols with a number one greater than the temporarily stopped decorative symbols in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R are displayed as stop symbols, resulting in a variable display result indicating a loss (see Figure 51 (B9A)).

After the variable display of the decorative symbols resumes, in the case of a three-consecutive-pattern pseudo-consecutive-symbol performance, the pseudo-consecutive-symbol performance, displaying the word "NEXT" indicating the start of the pseudo-consecutive-symbol performance, is displayed at a reduced speed just before the stop display position in the central decorative symbol display area 5C (see Figure 51 (B14)). After the pseudo-consecutive-symbol performance is temporarily stopped at the stop display position in the central decorative symbol display area 5C (see Figure 51 (B15)), a crack premonition image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed, and after a crack appears on a part of the crack premonition image, the crack premonition image is displayed in a cracked state (see Figure 51 (B16)). Then, in accordance with the movement of the movable body 32 (for example, the movement of the movable body 32 falling from the origin position at the top of the display screen to a performance position that overlaps with the approximate center of the display screen), the entire area of the crack target image, which replaces the crack premonition image, cracks, and a crack performance is executed in which multiple fragment images scatter (see Figure 51 (B17)). Furthermore, a whiteout image (effect image) will be displayed across the entire screen for a predetermined period after the cracking effect begins. As the transparency of the whiteout image increases, text images such as "×3" indicating the number of re-variable display attempts will be displayed, after which the variable display will resume (see Figures 52 (B18) to (B19)).

In the case of a two-consecutive-pattern pseudo-consecutive-play sequence, after the second variable display resumes, and in the case of a three-consecutive-pattern pseudo-consecutive-play sequence, after the third variable display resumes, the decorative symbol that was being displayed variably in the left decorative symbol display area 5L temporarily stops (see Figure 52 (B20)), and the decorative symbol with the same number as the decorative symbol temporarily stopped in the left decorative symbol display area 5L temporarily stops in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, resulting in an N-reach (see Figure 52 (B21)), and the N-reach sequence begins.

After a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the N-Reach animation, a weak development animation begins. Specifically, after a character image (object image) is displayed in the center of the display screen (see Figure 52 (B22)), a pre-breaking image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed in accordance with the character image's actions (for example, the character moving toward the front of the display screen and punching a glass plate) (see Figure 52 (B23)). Without any cracks appearing on a portion of the pre-breaking image, the entire image of the target of the break, replacing the pre-breaking image, breaks, and multiple fragments scatter (see Figure 52 (B24)). Furthermore, a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period after the start of the breakage animation. As the transparency of the whiteout image increases, a weak S-Reach animation (for example, a bowling match between an ally character and an enemy character) begins (see Figures 52 (B25) to (B26)).

After a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the weak S reach animation, the strong development animation B begins. Specifically, when the strong development animation B begins, a cracking premonition image (such as a glass plate) is displayed, and after a crack appears on a part of the cracking premonition image, the cracking premonition image is displayed in a cracked state (see Figure 52 (B27)). Then, the entire cracking target image that replaces the cracking premonition image cracks, and a cracking animation is performed in which multiple fragments of images scatter (see Figure 52 (B28)). Furthermore, a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period after the cracking animation begins. As the transparency of the whiteout image increases, the development symbol with the word "Development" displayed in the central decorative symbol display area 5C is temporarily stopped and displayed (see Figure 52 (B29)). Then, the reach title image is displayed, and the strong S reach animation B (for example, a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) begins (see Figure 52 (B30)). Furthermore, Strong S-Reach演出 B is considered a S-Reach演出 with a higher expectation of success than Strong S-Reach演出 A. Also, because Strong S-Reach演出 B has a higher expectation of success than Strong S-Reach演出 A, the cut-in演出 described later is more likely to occur in演出 pattern Y. In other words, Strong S-Reach演出 B is a演出 that makes the fragment image 006SG302 described later more likely to be displayed than Strong S-Reach演出 A.

Strong S-Reach演出B is almost identical to Super Reach α's Strong S-Reach演出A, differing only in the type of enemy character, etc. Therefore, a detailed explanation of the sequence until the variable display ends will be omitted from here on.

(Examples of various effects and actions)
Next, examples of the operation of crack effects in various effects that the CPU 120 for effect control can execute will be explained based on Figures 53 to 69.

Furthermore, an example of the expression used to indicate the display method in the following explanation is provided.

"Fade-out display" increases the transparency (transparency) of the displayed image over time, while "fade-in display" decreases the transparency (transparency) of the displayed image over time.

"Animated display" refers to a dynamic display (video display) that creates movement by changing the visibility of at least a part of the image compared to the image one frame earlier. This change in visibility is achieved by altering at least one of the following: position, size, color, or transparency, compared to the image one frame earlier. In other words, "animated display" includes not only displays involving image displacement, such as "moving display," "rotating display," "enlarging display," "shrinking display," "frame-in display," and "frame-out display," but also displays that do not involve image displacement, such as "fade-out display" and "fade-in display," where the display characteristics, such as color tone, change. In this embodiment, the number of still images (frames) displayed in one second of video is 30, meaning the frame rate is 30 FPS.

"Still display" is the opposite of "animated display." It refers to a non-dynamic display (still image display) where the visibility of the image does not change compared to the previous frame, resulting in no change in the display format whatsoever.

As shown in Figures 53 to 69, the decorative symbols displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R when the game state is in a low-base state (for low-base state) consist of: a circular number base section in front view and a number display section consisting of the numbers "0" to "9" displayed on the front of the number base section; a character display section displaying 10 types of characters corresponding to each number "0" to "9" in the number display section (illustration of all characters is omitted); an information display section in front view consisting of a rectangular information base section and information about the characters (e.g., the character's name) displayed on the front of the information base section; and a roughly rectangular base display section displayed surrounding these number display section, character display section, and information display section (see Figure 1, etc.).

Although not explained in detail here, when the game state is a high-base state or in other performance modes, decorative symbols with different display patterns from those used in the low-base state may be variably displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. Furthermore, while the example of the variable display pattern for the variable display pattern for the low-base state is shown as a vertical scrolling display from the top to the bottom of the screen, other variable display patterns are also possible, and the variable display pattern may differ depending on the game state or performance mode.

The display area 5S located in the upper left of the image display device 5 displays the first and second reserved memory counts, as well as a small symbol (fourth symbol) corresponding to the decorative symbol. The small symbols consist of the numbers "0" through "9" displayed in the small symbol display areas 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR, respectively, and each number corresponds to a decorative symbol. In this embodiment, while the numbers of the decorative symbols and the small symbols correspond, it is not necessarily required that all the numbers of both symbols correspond. For example, the numbers of the small symbols may be fewer than the numbers "0" through "9" of the decorative symbols, ranging from "1" to "5," or they may be different symbols or figures.

The special symbol hold memory display area 5U, located at the bottom of the image display device 5's screen, displays the first hold display 006SG101 (see Figure 102) and the second hold display (not shown), corresponding to variable displays whose execution is pending. The active display area 5F, also located at the bottom of the screen, displays the active display 006SG103, corresponding to the variable display currently in execution. These first hold memory counts, second hold memory counts, small symbols, special symbol hold memory display area 5U, and active display area 5F are displayed in all performance modes.

<First consecutive break effect and second consecutive break effect>
Details of the operation examples for the first consecutive crack effect and the second consecutive crack effect will be explained with reference to Figures 53 and 54. Figure 53 is a diagram showing the details of the operation example for the first consecutive crack effect. Figure 54 is a diagram showing the details of the operation example for the second consecutive crack effect.

As shown in Figure 53(A), when the game state is in the normal state, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display of the decorative symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, the second consecutive cracking effect is started. Then, the glass plate image 006SG301, which is a cracking precursor image, is displayed in the layer 4 image drawing area above the first background image 006SG081, and cracks are displayed radiating outwards from a position slightly to the right of the approximate center of the glass plate image 006SG301, thereby displaying the glass plate image 006SG301 in a cracked state. Furthermore, decorative patterns displayed in the Layer 2 image rendering area, which is lower than the glass plate image 006SG301, and the first background image 006SG081 displayed in the Layer 1 image rendering area are displayed with first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, while when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, they are displayed with second visibility, which is less visible than first visibility, so that the crack pattern is more noticeable (see Figure 53(B)). Furthermore, when the game state is a time-saving state/probability-changing state, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display of the decorative symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, the second consecutive cracking effect begins. At this time, the glass plate image 006SG301, which serves as a cracking premonition image, is displayed in the Layer 4 image rendering area, which is higher than the sixth background image, which is the normal background image for the time-saving state/probability-changing state. Cracks are displayed radiating outwards from a position slightly to the right of the approximate center of the glass plate image 006SG301, thereby displaying the glass plate image 006SG301 in a cracked state. Additionally, the decorative symbols displayed in the Layer 2 image rendering area, which is lower than the glass plate image 006SG301, and the sixth background image displayed in the Layer 1 image rendering area are displayed with first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, while when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, they are displayed with second visibility, which is less visible than first visibility, so that the cracked state is more prominent.

Furthermore, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as if falling downwards from the cracked area. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area or in the Layer 4 image rendering area.

Next, the glass plate image 006SG301 becomes invisible, and a portion of the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area above the glass plate image 006SG301, breaks (the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in a broken state), and a cracking effect is performed in which multiple fragment images 006SG302, which are larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A, scatter. Furthermore, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect starts (see Figure 53(C)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed with a transmittance of 0% (opaque) in the Layer 7 image rendering area, and at the start of display, it becomes difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and fragment images 006SG302 displayed in layers below the Layer 7 image rendering area. As time progresses, the transmittance gradually increases, making the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 visible (see Figure 53(D)). When the transmittance reaches 100%, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends (see Figure 53(E)).

Subsequently, in the crack display area 006SG304 of the glass plate image 006SG301A, the character image 006SG305 and background effect image 006SG314, which are displayed in the layer 3 image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301A, are displayed until the display of the fragment image 006SG302 is finished (see Figure 53(F)). After that, the glass plate image 006SG301A, the character image 006SG305, and the background effect image 006SG314 become invisible (see Figure 53(G)). Here, when the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed, the background effect image 006SG314 is displayed with second visibility in a predetermined area of the glass plate image 006SG301A other than the crack display area 006SG304, and with first visibility, which is more visible than second visibility, in the crack display area 006SG304 (specific area). In other words, because the visibility differs between the uncracked area and the area visible through the cracked area, it becomes easier to recognize that a part of the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked.

Next, as shown in Figure 54, the second consecutive crack effect is almost identical to the first consecutive crack effect in other respects, except for the type of character that appears; therefore, a detailed explanation is omitted here. Note that in this embodiment, the operation examples of the first and second consecutive crack effects are shown as being almost identical, but the operation examples of the first and second consecutive crack effects may be different.

For example, in both the first and second consecutive cracking effects, the cracking pattern is the same (cracking pattern D), and the manner in which the fragment image 006SG302 moves in the X, Y, and Z axes is the same. However, the position at which the display of the fragment image 006SG302 begins when the cracking starts may differ, for example, by displaying the crack on the right side in Figure 53(B) while displaying it on the left side in Figure 54(B). This allows for differences in how the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed between the first and second consecutive cracking effects.

Furthermore, for example, an effect image that emphasizes the cracks may be displayed in the area corresponding to the cracks displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 (for example, in the layer image rendering area above the glass plate image 006SG301). The display mode of this effect image may indicate whether the first continuous cracking effect or the second continuous cracking effect will be executed. Also, the cracking patterns may differ between the first and second continuous cracking effects. In particular, for the second continuous cracking effect, the amount of display of the fragment image 006SG302 may be increased, or the fragment image 006SG302 may be displayed in slow motion to increase attention to the variable display.

Furthermore, the system may enable the output of character voices corresponding to character image 006SG305 in the first consecutive crack effect and character voices corresponding to character image 006SG305 in the second consecutive crack effect. Both voices may be output along with the crack sound at the same time as the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed, or the character voices may be output after the crack sound has finished outputting at the same time as the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed, or the output of the crack sound may be restricted.

<Dialogue preview>
The details of the operation example of the dialogue preview effect will be explained based on Figure 55. Figure 55 is a diagram showing the details of the operation example of the dialogue preview effect.

As shown in Figure 55(A), when the variable display of decorative symbols is being performed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a dialogue notification effect is initiated, the operation prompt image 006SG310 is displayed in the layer 8 image rendering area above the first background image 006SG081 (see Figure 55(B)).

Next, when the push button 31B is operated, or when the operation validity period ends without the push button 31B being operated, the operation prompt image 006SG310 is hidden, and the glass plate image 006SG301, which is a crack precursor image, is displayed in the layer 4 image drawing area above the first background image 006SG081. Cracks are then displayed radiating outwards from a position slightly to the right of the approximate center of the glass plate image 006SG301, thereby displaying the glass plate image 006SG301 in a cracked state. Furthermore, decorative patterns displayed in the Layer 2 image rendering area, which is lower than the glass plate image 006SG301, and the first background image 006SG081 displayed in the Layer 1 image rendering area, are displayed with a first level of visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed. However, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, they are displayed with a second level of visibility, which is lower than the first level of visibility, thereby making the crack pattern more noticeable (see Figure 55(C)).

Furthermore, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as if falling downwards from the cracked area. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area or in the Layer 4 image rendering area.

Next, the glass plate image 006SG301 becomes invisible, and a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area, which is higher than the glass plate image 006SG301, breaks, and a cracking effect is performed in which multiple fragment images 006SG302, which are larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A, scatter in the Layer 5 image rendering area. Furthermore, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect begins (see Figure 55(D)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed with 0% transparency (opaque) in the Layer 7 image rendering area, and at the start of display, it becomes difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and fragment images 006SG302 displayed in layers lower than the Layer 7 image rendering area. As time progresses, the transmittance gradually increases, making the glass plate image 006SG301A, the fragment image 006SG302, and the character image 006SG305 visible (see Figure 55(E)). When the transmittance reaches 100%, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends (see Figure 55(F)).

Subsequently, in the crack display area 006SG304 of the glass plate image 006SG301A, until the display of the fragment image 006SG302 is finished, the Layer 3 image rendering area below the glass plate image 006SG301A displays the text image 006SG306 that suggests the likelihood of a big win, along with the dialogue background image 006SG087 that serves as its background (see Figure 55(F)). Here, the dialogue background image 006SG087 and the text image 006SG306 displayed in the crack display area 006SG304 of the glass plate image 006SG301A are displayed with first visibility, while the first background image 006SG081 displayed in areas other than the crack display area 006SG304 of the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed with second visibility, which has lower visibility than first visibility. In other words, because the visibility differs between the unbroken area and the area visible through the broken area, it becomes easier to recognize that a portion of the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken. Next, the glass plate image 006SG301A, the dialogue background image 006SG087, and the text image 006SG306 become invisible (see Figure 55(H)).

Furthermore, in Figure 55(C), for example, an effect image that emphasizes the crack can be displayed in the area corresponding to the crack displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 (for example, the layer image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301), and the display manner of the effect image may indicate which of the following dialogue text images 006SG306 will be displayed: "Chance!?", "Hot!", or "Super Hot!". In addition, the crack pattern may be different depending on the type of dialogue text (e.g., the amount of display of the fragment image 006SG302. In particular, when displaying "Super Hot!", the fragment image 006SG302 may be displayed in slow motion to increase attention), or the position of the crack (for example, closer to the center the higher the expectation) or the range of the crack (for example, wider range of crack the higher the expectation) may be changed while using a common crack pattern. Furthermore, the system may enable the output of character voices corresponding to the type of character image 006SG305. These voices may be output simultaneously with a crackling sound at the same time as the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed, or they may be output after the crackling sound has finished being output at the same time as the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed, or the output of the crackling sound may be restricted.

<Background change effect A>
The details of the operation example of background change effect A will be explained with reference to Figures 56 and 57. Figure 56 is a diagram showing the details of the operation example of background change effect A. Figure 57 is a diagram showing the details of the operation example of background change effect A.

As shown in Figure 56(A), when the game state is in the normal state, if the variable display of decorative symbols is performed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, when the background change effect A is started, the effect image 006SG320 is displayed in the layer 6 image drawing area above the first background image 006SG081, and after it is gradually enlarged (see Figures 56(B) and (C)), the effect image 006SG320 is faded out and the character image 006SG305 is displayed (see Figure 56(D)). Furthermore, when the game state is in a time-saving state or a probability-increasing state, if the variable display of decorative symbols is performed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, and background change effect A is started, effect image 006SG320 will be displayed in the layer 6 image drawing area, which is higher than the sixth background image, which is the normal background image for the time-saving state/probability-increasing state. After being gradually enlarged, effect image 006SG320 will fade out and character image 006SG305 will be displayed.

Furthermore, the effect image 006SG320 displayed in Figure 56(B) is a visual cue to determine whether or not the character image 006SG305 will be displayed in Figure 56(D). In the case of a successful outcome, the game proceeds to Figure 56(C). In the case of a failed outcome, the game does not proceed to Figure 56(C), the effect image 006SG320 is displayed in a reduced size, and then disappears, suggesting that the character image 006SG305 will not be displayed.

Next, if the game state is normal, the glass plate image 006SG301, which serves as a crack precursor image, is displayed in the Layer 4 image rendering area above the first background image 006SG081. Then, in response to the character image 006SG305 kicking toward the foreground, cracks are displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301, spreading radially from a position slightly to the right of the approximate center. As a result, the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a pre-crack state (see Figure 56(E)), and then the cracks gradually spread radially and change into a crack state (see Figure 56(F)). Furthermore, the character image 006SG305 displayed in the Layer 3 image drawing area, which is lower than the glass plate image 006SG301, the decorative pattern displayed in the Layer 2 image drawing area, and the first background image 006SG081 displayed in the Layer 1 image drawing area are displayed with first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, while when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, they are displayed with second visibility, which is less visible than first visibility, so that the crack pattern is more noticeable. Furthermore, if the game state is a time-saving state or a probability variation state, the glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack premonition image is displayed in the layer 4 image rendering area above the sixth background image. Then, in response to the character image 006SG305 kicking toward the foreground, cracks are displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301, spreading radially from a position slightly to the right of the approximate center. Thus, the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a pre-crack state, and then the cracks gradually spread radially, changing into a crack state. Furthermore, the character image 006SG305 displayed in the Layer 3 image rendering area, which is lower than the glass plate image 006SG301, the decorative pattern displayed in the Layer 2 image rendering area, and the sixth background image displayed in the Layer 1 image rendering area are displayed with first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, while when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, they are displayed with second visibility, which is less visible than first visibility, thereby making the crack pattern more noticeable.

Furthermore, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as if falling downwards from the cracked area. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area or in the Layer 4 image rendering area.

Next, if the game state is normal, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden, and instead of the glass plate image 006SG301, the entire glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area, which is higher than the glass plate image 006SG301, shatters, and a shattering effect is performed in which multiple fragment images 006SG302, which are larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A, scatter into the Layer 5 image rendering area. Furthermore, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the shattering effect begins (see Figure 56(G)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed with a transmittance of 0% (opaque) in the Layer 7 image rendering area, and at the start of display, it becomes difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and fragment images 006SG302 displayed in layers lower than the Layer 7 image rendering area. As time passes, the transparency gradually increases, improving the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the second background image 006SG082 (see Figures 56(H) and 57(I)). After the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends when the transparency reaches 100% (see Figure 57(J)), the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends (see Figure 57(K)). In this way, the cracking effect is executed when the background image changes from the first background image 006SG081 to the second background image 006SG082, making the change from the first background image 006SG081 to the second background image 006SG082 appear natural, thus allowing the background change to be shown without any sense of incongruity. Furthermore, if the game state is a time-saving state or a probability variation state, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden, and instead of the glass plate image 006SG301, the entire glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area, which is higher than the glass plate image 006SG301, shatters, and a shattering effect is performed in which multiple fragment images 006SG302, which are larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A, scatter into the Layer 5 image rendering area. In addition, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the shattering effect starts. The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed with a transparency of 0% (opaque) in the Layer 7 image rendering area, and at the start of display, it becomes difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and fragment images 006SG302 displayed in layers lower than the Layer 7 image rendering area. As time progresses, the transparency gradually increases, improving the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the seventh background image, which is a chance background image for the time-saving/probability-changing state. When the transparency reaches 100%, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends, followed by the display of the fragment image 006SG302. In this way, the cracking effect is executed when the background image changes from the sixth to the seventh background image, making the change from the sixth to the seventh background image appear natural and seamless.

Furthermore, for example, a third background image (not shown) that is more advantageous when displayed than the second background image 006SG082 can be displayed as a background image, and it may be possible to indicate whether the second background image 006SG082 or the third background image will be displayed based on the action of the character image 006SG305 (such as punching or kicking). Also, by making it possible to display characters other than the character image 006SG305, it may be possible to indicate whether the second background image 006SG082 or the third background image will be displayed.

<Background change effect B>
The details of the operation example of background change effect B will be explained based on Figure 58. Figure 58 is a diagram showing the details of the operation example of background change effect B.

As shown in Figure 58(A), when the variable display of decorative patterns is being performed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, and background change effect B is started, the glass plate image 006SG301, as a crack precursor image, is displayed in the layer 4 image rendering area above the first background image 006SG081. A crack display area 006SG324, consisting of cracks including a small crack area, is displayed in the lower left position of the glass plate image 006SG301, causing the glass plate image 006SG301 to be displayed in a cracked state (see Figure 58(B)). Subsequently, two new crack display areas 006SG324 are displayed in the upper right position of the crack display area 006SG324, causing the crack pattern of the glass plate image 006SG301 to change in stages (see Figure 58(C)).

Thus, decorative patterns displayed in the Layer 2 image rendering area, which is lower than the glass plate image 006SG301, and the first background image 006SG081 displayed in the Layer 1 image rendering area, are displayed with a first level of visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed with cracks. However, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed with cracks, it is displayed with a second level of visibility, which is less visible than the first level, thereby making the cracks more noticeable.

Furthermore, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as if falling downwards from the cracked area. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area or in the Layer 4 image rendering area.

Furthermore, as shown in the enlarged view in Figure 58(C), the first background image 006SG081, displayed in the Layer 1 image rendering area below the glass plate image 006SG301, is displayed with second visibility in areas other than each crack display area 006SG324, while in each crack display area 006SG324, it is displayed with first visibility, which is more visible than second visibility. In other words, because the visibility differs between the uncracked areas and the areas visible through the cracked areas, it becomes easier to recognize that a part of the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked.

Next, the glass plate image 006SG301 becomes invisible, and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area above the glass plate image 006SG301, shatters, and a shattering effect is performed in which multiple fragment images 006SG302, which are larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A, scatter into the Layer 5 image rendering area. Furthermore, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the shattering effect begins (see Figure 58(D)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed with 0% transparency (opaque) in the Layer 7 image rendering area, and at the start of display, it becomes difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and fragment images 006SG302 displayed in layers below the Layer 7 image rendering area. As time progresses, the transparency gradually increases, improving the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the second background image 006SG082 (see Figure 58(E)). Then, after the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends when the transparency reaches 100% (see Figure 58(F)), the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends (see Figure 58(G)). In this way, the cracking effect is executed when the background image changes from the first background image 006SG081 to the second background image 006SG082, making the change from the first background image 006SG081 to the second background image 006SG082 appear natural and thus allowing the background change to be presented without any sense of incongruity.

Furthermore, for example, an effect image that emphasizes the cracks may be displayed in the area corresponding to the cracks displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 (for example, in the layer image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301), and the display mode of the effect image may indicate the expected degree of development of the effect. Specifically, it is preferable that when the display color of the effect image is blue, it is more likely to end at the first stage (see Figure 58(B)), when the display color of the effect image is green, it is more likely to end at the second stage (see Figure 58(C)), and when it is red, it is most likely to develop into a crack effect compared to blue or green. Also, as shown in Figure 75(B), when failure pattern 1 ends at the first stage, the transparency may gradually increase and become invisible (fade out display) 1500ms after the start of background change effect B, and as shown in Figure 75(C), when failure pattern 2 ends at the second stage, the transparency may gradually increase and become invisible 3000ms after the start of background change effect B.

Furthermore, while background change effect B is being executed, the change effects for active and pending images, which are displayed in layer image rendering areas higher than the glass plate image 006SG301, may be restricted, while effects using images displayed in layer image rendering areas lower than the glass plate image 006SG301 (for example, mini-character images) may not be restricted. This approach can suppress a decrease in the effectiveness of the cracking effect.

<Simulated Consecutive Performance>
The details of the operation of the pseudo-consecutive win animation will be explained based on Figure 59. Figure 59 is a diagram showing the details of some of the operation examples of the pseudo-consecutive win animation.

As shown in Figure 59(A), after the pseudo-consecutive display is started, if the pseudo-consecutive display area 5C, which displays the word "NEXT" indicating that the re-variable display will start, is temporarily stopped at the stop display position, the glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image is displayed in the layer 4 image drawing area above the second background image 006SG082, and cracks are displayed radiating outwards from approximately the center of the glass plate image 006SG301, thereby displaying the glass plate image 006SG301 in a cracked state. Furthermore, decorative patterns displayed in the Layer 2 image rendering area, which is lower than the glass plate image 006SG301, and the second background image 006SG082 displayed in the Layer 1 image rendering area, are displayed with first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, while when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, they are displayed with second visibility, which is less visible than first visibility, so that the crack pattern is more noticeable (see Figure 59(B)).

Furthermore, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as if falling downwards from the cracked area, and then it goes out of frame and disappears. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area or the Layer 4 image rendering area.

After the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the movable body 32 begins to fall from the origin position to the effect position. In response to this movement, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed approximately in the center of the layer 7 image drawing area (see Figure 59(C)), and then the whiteout image 006SG303 spreads outwards, and the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the crack effect begins (see Figure 59(D)). Furthermore, along with the display of the whiteout image 006SG303, the glass plate image 006SG301 becomes invisible, and instead of the glass plate image 006SG301, the entire glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image rendering area above the glass plate image 006SG301 is shattered, and a shattering effect is executed in which multiple fragment images 006SG302, larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A, scatter into the layer 5 image rendering area.

Furthermore, the whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed with 0% transparency (opaque) in the Layer 7 image rendering area. At the start of display, it becomes difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in layers below the Layer 7 image rendering area. As time passes, the transparency gradually increases, improving the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the second background image 006SG082 (see Figure 59(E)). Then, when the transparency reaches 100% and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends, an action effect image 006SG321 is displayed in the Layer 6 image rendering area, which is lower than the Layer 7 image rendering area, to emphasize that the movable body 32 has moved to the performance position. The image expands from the movable body 32 outwards, and a background effect image 006SG322 is also displayed in the Layer 1 image rendering area, expanding from the movable body 32 outwards (see Figures 59(F) and (G)).

Next, after the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends, the movable body 32 begins moving from the performance position towards the origin position while the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed (see Figure 59(G)). After all fragment images 006SG302 are no longer visible, it stops at the performance position, and the return operation to the origin position is completed (see Figure 59(H)).

Furthermore, the return movement of the movable body 32 from its performance position to the origin position may be initiated after the display of the fragment image 006SG302 has finished, and subsequently after the display of the background effect image 006SG322 has finished.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the pseudo-consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped and the re-variable display begins during the pseudo-consecutive display, the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed. However, the display pattern of the glass plate image 006SG301 may be varied, for example, by setting the display color of the glass plate image 006SG301 to blue during the first variable display, green during the second variable display, and red during the third variable display. Additionally, the crack pattern of the glass plate image 006SG301 may be varied, for example, by gradually increasing the size of the cracks each time the re-variable display is performed.

Furthermore, in this case, while the display color of the glass plate image 006SG301 differs depending on the number of re-variable displays, it is preferable that the crack pattern is common. By standardizing the crack pattern in a gaming machine that performs various crack effects in this way, it is possible to accurately indicate that a pseudo-consecutive display has been executed. Also, while the operation pattern of the movable body 32 is common for the first, second, and third re-variable displays, the display manner of the crack pattern may differ, for example, by having different sizes of the fragment images 006SG302, different numbers of fragment images 006SG302 displayed, or different movement speeds of the fragment images 006SG302 for the first, second, and third re-variable displays.

<Reach indication effect>
Details of the operation examples of the reach indication effect will be explained based on Figures 60 and 61. Figure 60 is a diagram showing the details of the operation example of the reach indication effect. Figure 61 is a diagram showing the details of the operation example of the reach indication effect.

As shown in Figure 60(A), when the variable display of decorative symbols is being performed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a reach suggestion effect is started, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L (see Figure 60(B)), and then the character image 006SG305 is displayed in the center of the display screen (see Figure 60(C)). Next, the glass plate image 006SG301, which is a crack premonition image, is displayed in the layer 4 image drawing area above the second background image 006SG082, and in response to the action of the character image 006SG305 striking the area corresponding to the left decorative symbol display area 5L with a small mallet, a crack is displayed on the left side of the glass plate image 006SG301, causing the glass plate image 006SG301 to be displayed in the first crack pattern, and the action effect image 006SG323 is displayed in the layer 6 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 (see Figure 60(D)).

Next, in response to the character image 006SG305 striking the area corresponding to the right decorative pattern display area 5R with a small mallet, a crack appears on the right side of the glass plate image 006SG301, causing the glass plate image 006SG301 to change to a second crack pattern. Simultaneously, the action effect image 006SG323 is displayed in the layer 6 image rendering area above the glass plate image 006SG301 (see Figure 60(E)).

Furthermore, in response to the character image 006SG305 striking the area corresponding to the central decorative pattern display area 5C with a small mallet (see Figure 60(F)), the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed approximately in the center of the layer 7 image rendering area (see Figure 60(G)). Afterward, the whiteout image 006SG303 expands outward, and the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period (see Figure 60(H)).

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 60(D) and (E), when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as if falling downward from the cracked area, and then it goes out of frame and disappears. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area or the Layer 4 image rendering area.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 60(H), at the timing when the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen, the glass plate image 006SG301 becomes invisible, and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area above the glass plate image 006SG301, shatters, and a shattering effect is executed in which multiple fragment images 006SG302, which are larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A, scatter across the Layer 5 image rendering area. The whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the shattering effect begins. The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed with 0% transparency (opaque) in the Layer 7 image rendering area. At the start of display, it becomes difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in layers below the Layer 7 image rendering area. Subsequently, as time progresses, the transparency gradually increases, improving the visibility of the decorative pattern, fragment image 006SG302, and second background image 006SG082 (see Figure 61(I)). Finally, when the transparency reaches 100%, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends. The decorative patterns temporarily displayed in the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R are then enlarged and emphasized (see Figure 61(J)), after which the decorative patterns are reduced in size, and the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends (see Figure 61(K)).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in various effects involving a cracking effect, for example, as shown in the sequence from Figure 61(J) to Figure 61(K), the effect proceeds after the fragment image 006SG302 completely disappears from the display area of the image display device 5 and becomes invisible (for example, progressing from a reach suggestion effect with a cracking effect to a reach effect without a cracking effect).

Furthermore, for example, an effect image that emphasizes the cracks displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 may be displayed in the corresponding area (for example, in the layer image rendering area above the glass plate image 006SG301), and the expected degree of reach development may be indicated by the display mode of the effect image. Specifically, if there are blue and red display modes for the effect image, it would be desirable that the display in red be more likely to result in a reach than the display in blue.

In the case of a failure pattern, after the character image 006SG305 strikes the area corresponding to the central decorative pattern display area 5C with a small mallet, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed (see Figures 60(G) and (H)). Then, the character image 006SG305 in a disappointed state is displayed in the area corresponding to the central decorative pattern display area 5C. After that, the character image 006SG305 and the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 become invisible, the losing pattern stops, and the variable display ends.

<Weak development performance>
The details of the operation example of the weak development effect will be explained based on Figure 62. Figure 62 is a diagram showing the details of the operation example of the weak development effect.

As shown in Figure 62(A), regardless of whether the game state is normal, time-saving, or probability-changing, when the variable display of decorative symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R enters a reach pattern, a weak development effect is initiated. The background effect image 006SG322 is displayed in the Layer 1 image rendering area, and then the character image 006SG305 is displayed approximately in the center of the Layer 6 image rendering area above it (see Figure 62(B)). After the punching character image 006SG305 is displayed, it is shown in slow motion, enlarged as if moving towards the front of the display screen (see Figure 62(C)). The decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are moved to the upper right position of the display screen and displayed in a reduced size.

Next, if the game state is normal, the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area, which is higher than the normal reach background image. Then, without the glass plate image 006SG301A being displayed in a cracked manner, the entire glass plate image 006SG301A is shattered, and a shattering effect is performed in which multiple fragment images 006SG302, which are larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A, are scattered into the Layer 5 image rendering area. Furthermore, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the shattering effect begins (see Figure 62(D)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed with a transparency of 0% (opaque) in the Layer 7 image rendering area, and at the start of display, it becomes difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and fragment images 006SG302 displayed in layers lower than the Layer 7 image rendering area. Then, as the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the character image 006SG305 improves (see Figure 62(E)). After the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends when the transmittance reaches 100% (see Figure 62(F)), and the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed again (see Figure 62(G)). Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the whiteout image 006SG303 was displayed, the image 006SG088 for the weak S reach effect is displayed, and the game transitions to the weak S reach effect (see Figure 62(H)). Furthermore, if the game state is a time-saving state or a probability variation state, after the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area, which is higher than the normal reach background image, the glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed in a cracked manner, but rather the entire glass plate image 006SG301A is shattered, and a shattering effect is performed in which multiple fragment images 006SG302, which are larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A, are scattered in the Layer 5 image rendering area. In addition, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the shattering effect has started. The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image with a transparency of 0% (opaque) displayed in the Layer 7 image rendering area, and at the start of display, it becomes difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and fragment images 006SG302 displayed in layers lower than the Layer 7 image rendering area. As time passes, the transparency gradually increases, improving the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the character image 006SG305. When the transparency reaches 100%, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends, and after the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed again. After a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the whiteout image 006SG303 was displayed, the image 006SG088 for the weak S reach effect is displayed, and the game transitions to the weak S reach effect. Furthermore, in Figures 71 and 84 described later, the display mode of the fragment image 006SG302 in the weak development sequence is shown as opaque. However, this is the final display mode of the fragment image 006SG302. In the weak development sequence, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in a transparent mode (e.g., with a transparency of 70% or more) in Figures 90(B1) to (B3), and then in an opaque mode (e.g., with a transparency of less than 10%) in Figures 90(B4) and (B5). That is, at the first timing corresponding to Figure 90(B3), the fragment image 006SG302 can be viewed in a transparent mode, and at the second timing corresponding to Figure 90(B4), the fragment image 006SG302 can be viewed in an opaque mode.

In this way, when the N-reach animation progresses to the weak S-reach animation, the cracking animation is executed, allowing the change from the N-reach animation image to the weak S-reach animation image 006SG088 to be shown naturally, thus making the change in animation appear seamless.

<Strong Development Scene A>
The details of the operation example of the strong development effect A will be explained based on Figure 63. Figure 63 is a diagram showing the details of some of the operation examples of the strong development effect A.

As shown in Figure 63(A), in the weak S-reach animation, the development symbol displaying the word "development" is temporarily stopped, and when the strong development animation A begins, the movable body 32 starts falling from its origin position to the animation position. At the same time that this falling motion begins, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed approximately in the center of the Layer 7 image rendering area, and the movable body 32 continues to fall (see Figure 63(B)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the crack animation begins.

Furthermore, as a preliminary effect before the cracking animation, the movable body 32 moves from its origin position to the animation position. When the movable body 32 moves to the animation position, the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in the layer 5 image rendering area, which is higher than the weak S-reach animation image 006SG088. The glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed in a cracked state; instead, the entire glass plate image 006SG301A cracks, and a cracking animation is performed in which multiple fragment images 006SG302, larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A, scatter into the layer 5 image rendering area (see Figure 63(C)).

Furthermore, the whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed with 0% transparency (opaque) in the Layer 7 image rendering area. Here, the transparency remains 0% until the movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the performance position, making it difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in layers below the Layer 7 image rendering area (see Figure 63(C)). Then, as time passes, the transparency gradually increases, improving the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 (see Figure 63(D)). Next, when the transparency reaches 100% and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends, an action effect image 006SG325 is displayed in the Layer 6 image rendering area, which is lower than the Layer 7 image rendering area, to emphasize that the movable body 32 has moved to the performance position. The image expands from the movable body 32 outwards, and a background effect image 006SG322 is also displayed in the Layer 1 image rendering area, expanding from the movable body 32 outwards (see Figure 63(E)).

Next, after the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends and the fragment image 006SG302 disappears, the movable body 32 begins to move from the performance position back to the origin position (see Figure 63(F)). Then, after the return to the origin position is completed, the reach title image 006SG326 is displayed, and the strong S reach performance begins (see Figure 63(G)).

<Strong Development Scene B>
The details of the operation example of the strong development effect B will be explained based on Figures 64 and 65. Figure 64 is a diagram showing the details of the operation example of the strong development effect B. Figure 65 is a diagram showing the details of the operation example of the strong development effect B.

As shown in Figure 64(A), when a strong development sequence B is initiated after a predetermined period has elapsed since the weak S-reach sequence began, the glass plate image 006SG301, serving as a premonition of cracking, is displayed in the Layer 4 image rendering area, which is higher than the weak S-reach sequence image 006SG088. Cracks are then displayed radiating outwards from approximately the center of the glass plate image 006SG301, thus displaying the glass plate image 006SG301 in a cracked state (see Figure 64(B)). Furthermore, decorative patterns displayed in the Layer 2 image rendering area, which is lower than the glass plate image 006SG301, and the weak S-reach sequence image 006SG088 displayed in the Layer 1 image rendering area, are displayed with a first level of visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed. However, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, they are displayed with a second level of visibility, which is lower than the first level of visibility, thus making the cracked pattern more prominent.

Furthermore, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as if falling downwards from the cracked area, and then it goes out of frame and disappears. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area or the Layer 4 image rendering area.

Next, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed approximately in the center of the Layer 7 image rendering area (see Figure 64(C)). Then, the whiteout image 006SG303 expands outwards, and the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period (see Figure 64(D)).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 64(D), at the timing when the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen, the glass plate image 006SG301 becomes invisible, and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area above the glass plate image 006SG301, shatters, and a shattering effect is executed in which multiple fragment images 006SG302, which are larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A, scatter across the Layer 5 image rendering area. The whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the shattering effect begins. The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed with 0% transparency (opaque) in the Layer 7 image rendering area. At the start of display, it becomes difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in layers below the Layer 7 image rendering area. As time progresses, the transparency gradually increases, improving the visibility of the decorative pattern and the fragment image 006SG302 (see Figure 64(E)). Next, when the transparency reaches 100%, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends. After the decorative pattern displaying the word "Development" in the central decorative pattern display area 5C is temporarily displayed (see Figure 64(F)), the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends (see Figure 64(G)).

Next, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed approximately in the center of the Layer 7 image rendering area (see Figure 64(H)). Then, the whiteout image 006SG303 expands outwards, and for a predetermined period, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen, obscuring the development symbols (see Figure 65(I)). As time progresses, the transparency gradually increases, improving the visibility of the reach title image 006SG326 corresponding to the strong S reach effect (see Figures 65(J) and (K)).

In this way, when the weak S-reach animation progresses to the strong S-reach animation, the cracking animation is executed. This makes it appear as if the image 006SG088 used for the weak S-reach animation cracks and changes into the reach title image 006SG326, thus allowing the change in the reach animation to be presented without any sense of incongruity.

<Cut-in animation>
The details of the cut-in animation's operation will be explained based on Figure 66. Figure 66 is a diagram showing the details of the cut-in animation's operation.

As shown in Figure 66(A), when a cut-in animation starts after a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the strong S-reach animation, the operation prompt image 006SG310 is displayed in the layer 8 image rendering area above the fourth background image 006SG084 used for the strong S-reach animation (see Figure 66(B)).

Next, when the push button 31B is operated (or when the operation validity period ends without the push button 31B being operated), the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in the layer 4 image rendering area above the fourth background image 006SG084. Without displaying the glass plate image 006SG301A in a cracked state, the entire glass plate image 006SG301A is shattered, and a shattering effect is executed in which multiple fragment images 006SG302, larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A, scatter into the layer 5 image rendering area. Furthermore, the operation prompt image 006SG310 is displayed in a manner that the button has been pressed by the operation, and the operation effect image 006SG327 is displayed around it, expanding over time (see Figures 66(C) and (D)).

Furthermore, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire screen for a predetermined period after the cracking effect begins. The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed with 0% transparency (opaque) in the Layer 7 image rendering area. At the start of display, it becomes difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302, which are displayed in layers lower than the Layer 7 image rendering area (see Figure 66(C)). Note that the operation prompt image 006SG310 and the operation effect image 006SG327 are displayed in the Layer 8 image rendering area, which is higher than the whiteout image 006SG303. Therefore, they maintain the same first visibility as when the whiteout image 006SG303 is not displayed.

Then, as time passes, the transmittance gradually increases, making the fragment image 006SG302 visible (see Figure 66(D)). Furthermore, the operation prompt image 006SG310 and operation effect image 006SG327 become invisible, while the text image 006SG307, "Hot!!", becomes visible (see Figure 66(E)). After the whiteout image 006SG303 is no longer displayed when the transmittance reaches 100% (see Figure 66(F)), the fragment image 006SG302 becomes invisible (see Figure 66(G)).

In this embodiment, both cut-in animation patterns X and Y are described as animation patterns accompanied by a cracking animation. However, it is also possible to designate animation pattern Y, which has a high probability of winning, as a chance animation pattern accompanied by a cracking animation, and animation pattern X, which has a low probability of winning, as an animation pattern without a cracking animation. In such a case, for animation patterns without a cracking animation, the animation can be performed in a manner in which a strip-shaped cut-in image (not shown) is displayed on the fourth background image 006SG084.

<Result notification sequence (jackpot)>
Details of the operation example of the result notification effect (jackpot) will be explained based on Figures 67 and 68. Figure 67 is a diagram showing the details of the operation example of the result notification effect when the variable display result is a jackpot. Figure 68 is a diagram showing the details of the operation example of the result notification effect when the variable display result is a jackpot.

As shown in Figure 67(A), after a predetermined period has elapsed since the cut-in animation ended, a character image 006SG305 showing an allied character attacking an enemy character is displayed, and the result notification animation begins. Then, the character image 006SG305 gradually decreases in speed, fading out in slow motion, and a whiteout image with 0% transparency (opaque) is displayed across the entire screen (see Figure 67(B)).

Next, if the variable display result is a jackpot display result, an object image 006SG308 showing an attack by an ally character hitting an enemy character is displayed (see Figure 67(C)). Then, the movable body 32 begins to fall from its origin position to a predetermined display position. In response to this falling motion, a glass plate image 006SG301, which serves as a cracking premonition image, is displayed in the layer 4 image rendering area above the object image 006SG308. Cracks are then displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301, spreading downwards from the movable body 32, thereby displaying the glass plate image 006SG301 in a cracked state. Furthermore, the object image 006SG308, which is displayed in the Layer 3 image rendering area below the glass plate image 006SG301, is displayed with first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, while when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, it is displayed with second visibility, which is less visible than first visibility, so that the crack pattern is more prominent (see Figure 67(D)).

Furthermore, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as if falling downwards from the cracked area, and then disappears. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area or the Layer 4 image rendering area.

Next, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 begins at a position near the bottom of the movable body 32 in the Layer 7 image rendering area (see Figure 67(E)). As the movable body 32 begins its return-to-origin operation, rising from a predetermined performance position to the origin position, the whiteout image 006SG303 expands downwards, and the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period (see Figure 67(F)).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 67(F), at the moment when the movable body 32 starts its return to its home position and the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen, the glass plate image 006SG301 becomes invisible, and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in the layer 5 image rendering area above the glass plate image 006SG301, shatters, and a shattering effect is performed in which multiple fragment images 006SG302, which are larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A, scatter across the layer 5 image rendering area. The whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the shattering effect begins. The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed with 0% transparency (opaque) in the Layer 7 image rendering area. At the start of display, it becomes difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in layers below the Layer 7 image rendering area. As time progresses, the transparency gradually increases, improving the visibility of the decorative pattern and the fragment image 006SG302 (see Figure 67(G)).

Next, as the transparency reaches 100%, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends, and after the fifth background image 006SG085 and the confirmed winning combination symbols are displayed (see Figure 67(H)), the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends, and it is announced that the game is controlled to a winning state (see Figure 68(I)). The background image then returns to the first background image 006SG081, and the confirmed winning combination symbols are displayed in a stopped state (see Figure 68(J)).

Furthermore, after the cracking effect begins in response to the upward movement of the movable body 32 to return to its origin, the upward movement of the movable body 32 returning from its predetermined effect position to its origin position is completed before the display of the fragment image 006SG302, which has become visible due to the increased transparency of the whiteout image 006SG303, ends (becomes invisible). This allows for early notification of a jackpot.

<Result notification animation (miss)>
The details of the operation example for the result notification animation (miss) will be explained based on Figure 69. Figure 69 is a diagram showing the details of the operation example for the result notification animation when the variable display result is a miss.

As shown in Figure 69(A), after a predetermined period has elapsed since the cut-in animation ended, a character image 006SG305 showing an allied character attacking an enemy character is displayed, and the result notification animation begins. Then, the character image 006SG305 gradually decreases in speed, fading out in slow motion, and a whiteout image with 0% transparency (opaque) is displayed across the entire screen (see Figure 69(B)).

Next, if the variable display result is incorrect, the movable body 32 does not move, and a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen in the layer 7 image drawing area for a predetermined period of time (see Figure 69(C)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed with 0% transparency (opaque) in the layer 7 image drawing area. At the start of display, it becomes difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301 and character image 006SG305 displayed in layers below the layer 7 image drawing area.

Subsequently, the glass plate image 006SG301, representing a crack precursor image, is displayed in the Layer 4 image rendering area, which is above the character image 006SG305. Cracks are displayed radiating outwards from approximately the center of the glass plate image 006SG301, thus displaying the crack pattern. The character image 006SG305, displayed in the Layer 3 image rendering area below the glass plate image 006SG301, and the gray background image 006SG313, displayed in the Layer 1 image rendering area, are displayed with first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed. However, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, they are displayed with a second visibility level, which is lower than the first visibility level, making the crack pattern more prominent (see Figure 69(D)).

Furthermore, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as if falling downwards from the cracked area, and then it goes out of frame and disappears. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area or the Layer 4 image rendering area.

Thus, although the glass plate image 006SG301 was displayed in a cracked pattern, the cracked pattern remained, and the glass plate image 006SG301 did not shatter. Therefore, it is indicated that the game was not controlled to a jackpot state.

After a predetermined period has elapsed since the glass plate image 006SG301 was displayed in a cracked pattern, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed again across the entire layer 7 image rendering area (see Figure 69(E)). Then, the eye-catching image 006SG309 is displayed (see Figure 69(F)), after which the background image returns to the first background image 006SG081, and the confirmed decorative symbols for non-winning combinations are displayed in a stopped state (see Figure 69(G)).

(Details of the production)
Next, a detailed explanation will be given of each effect that can be performed in this embodiment. As shown in Figures 70, 72, 53, and 54, the first continuous crack effect and the second continuous crack effect are as follows: First, the first stage of cracks is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 for 500 ms (first stage crack display period). Next, when it is time for the glass plate image 006SG301A to crack, the glass plate image 006SG301A, which has been displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks, and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 1000 ms (fragment image display period). Furthermore, from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 400ms to conceal the aforementioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player (early whiteout display period). Then, a whiteout image 006SG303 with higher transmittance than the early whiteout display period is displayed for another 400ms (late whiteout display period). For this reason, in the first and second consecutive breaking effects of this embodiment, during the early whiteout display period of 400ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, the player is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302 because it is obscured by the whiteout image 006SG303. On the other hand, during the 600ms period including the later whiteout display period after the earlier whiteout display period, the fragment image 006SG302 is visible to the player during this period.

Furthermore, from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A's crack, a second stage of cracks is displayed for 3000 ms around the cracked area (the area targeted for the cracking effect) of the glass plate image 006SG301A (second stage crack display period). The fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the first and second consecutive cracking effects are transparent, allowing the player to see other images (e.g., background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302.

Furthermore, in the first and second consecutive crack effects, crack sounds corresponding to the crack display are output from speakers 8L and 8R for 500 ms, which is the crack display period described above. From the crack timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A for 1000 ms, crack effect sounds corresponding to the crack effect are output from speakers 8L and 8R (crack sound output period). Although the types of crack sounds and crack effect sounds output are the same for the first and second consecutive crack effects, in the first consecutive crack effect, a first character voice corresponding to the character in Figure 53(E) is output along with the crack effect sound, and in the second consecutive crack effect, a second character voice corresponding to the character in Figure 54(E) is output along with the crack effect sound. This makes it easy to distinguish between the first and second consecutive crack effects. Furthermore, while the cracking sound effect is louder and more easily perceived by players than the cracking sound effect, the first and second character voices are output at an even louder volume and for a longer duration than the cracking sound effect, making them even more easily perceived by players than the cracking sound effect.

Furthermore, regarding the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, until the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, the illumination data table for the normal background image is used, and illumination that is not primarily white illumination in accordance with the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) is performed. From the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking until the end of the late whiteout display period of 800ms, the illumination data table for the breaking effect (whiteout 800ms) is used, and illumination that is primarily white illumination in accordance with the breaking effect is performed. After the illumination in accordance with the breaking effect ends, the illumination data table for the normal background image is used again, and illumination in accordance with the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) is performed. Furthermore, the data table for the crack effect (whiteout 800ms) is designed to cause the game effect lamp 9 to emit white light at high brightness for 400ms, corresponding to the initial period of the whiteout display, and to emit white light alternately at high and low brightness for 400ms, corresponding to the later period of the whiteout display.

As shown in Figures 70, 73, and 55, the dialogue notification effect first involves an operation prompting effect where an operation prompting image prompting the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 for 3000 ms (operation prompting effect execution period). If the player operates the push button 31B during the execution of the operation prompting effect, or if the execution period of the operation prompting effect ends, the first stage of cracks is displayed for 500 ms from that timing (first stage crack display period). Next, when it is time for the glass plate image 006SG301A to break, a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, breaks, and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 1000 ms (fragment image display period). Furthermore, from the moment the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 400ms to conceal the aforementioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player (early whiteout display period). Following this, a whiteout image 006SG303 with higher transparency than the early whiteout display period is displayed for another 400ms (late whiteout display period). Therefore, in the dialogue予告演出 (preview/announcement) of this embodiment, during the 400ms early whiteout display period from the moment the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the player is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302 because it is obscured by the whiteout image 006SG303. On the other hand, during the 600ms period including the late whiteout display period after the early whiteout display period, the fragment image 006SG302 is visible to the player.

Furthermore, from the timing of the crack in the glass plate image 006SG301A, a second stage of cracks is displayed for 5000ms around the cracked area (the area targeted by the crack effect) of the glass plate image 006SG301A. The fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the dialogue予告演出 (dialogue予告演出) are transparent, allowing the player to see other images (e.g., background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302.

Furthermore, in the dialogue予告演出 (dialogue予告演出), for the 500ms period of the first stage of crack display described above, speakers 8L and 8R output a cracking sound corresponding to the display of the crack (cracking sound output period). Then, for 1000ms from the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A, speakers 8L and 8R output a cracking sound corresponding to the cracking effect (cracking sound output period). Note that the types of cracking sounds and cracking sound outputs are the same for the dialogue予告演出, the first consecutive cracking effect, and the second consecutive cracking effect. In the dialogue予告演出, after the cracking sound is output (after the cracking sound output period has elapsed), a dialogue voice sound corresponding to the type of text image 006SG306 is output. This prevents the dialogue voice sound from becoming difficult to hear due to the cracking sound.

Furthermore, regarding the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, until the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaking, the illumination data table for the normal background image is used, resulting in illumination that is not primarily white, corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081). From the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking until the end of the late whiteout display period (800ms), the illumination data table for the breaking effect (whiteout 800ms) is used, resulting in illumination that is primarily white, corresponding to the breaking effect. After the illumination corresponding to the breaking effect ends, the illumination data table for the normal background image is used again, resulting in illumination that corresponds to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081).

As shown in Figures 70, 74(A), 74(B), 56, and 57, the background change effect A for the successful pattern first involves a preliminary operation where a character is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and an image of the character acting on the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed for 2000 ms (preliminary operation period). From the end of the preliminary operation (character action), cracks are displayed for 2000 ms (crack display period).

Furthermore, the 2000ms crack display period, as shown in Figure 74(B), consists of a 1000ms pre-crack display period and a 1000ms post-crack display period following the pre-crack display period. During the pre-crack display period, from the start of the pre-crack display period, an action effect corresponding to the character's actions is displayed for 100ms. Additionally, a smaller fragment image 006SG302A, smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A, is displayed for 200ms.

Next, when the glass plate image 006SG301A is about to break, the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) that was displayed up to that point is updated to the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) (see Figure 57). Furthermore, from the time the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 2500 ms (fragment image display period). Also, from the time the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 500 ms to conceal the aforementioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player (early whiteout display period), and then a whiteout image 006SG303 with higher transparency than the early whiteout display period is displayed for 500 ms (late whiteout display period). Therefore, in the background change effect A of this embodiment, during the initial whiteout display period of 500 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, the player is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302 because it is obstructed by the whiteout image 006SG303. On the other hand, during the 2000 ms period including the later whiteout display period after the initial whiteout display period, the fragment image 006SG302 is visible to the player during this period.

Furthermore, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the background change animation A during the successful pattern are transparent, allowing the player to see other images (e.g., background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302.

Furthermore, in the background change effect A of the successful pattern, from the start timing of the pre-crack display period described above, speakers 8L and 8R output a cracking sound corresponding to the display of the crack (cracking sound output period), and character voices corresponding to the character's actions are output. From the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A, speakers 8L and 8R output a cracking effect sound corresponding to the cracking effect (cracking effect sound output period). Furthermore, the cracking sound in background change effect A is a sound exclusive to background change effect A, and is composed of a sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A cracking and a sound effect that notifies that the background image has switched to the chance background image. During the 2500ms output period, the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A cracking and the sound effect that notifies that the background image has switched to the chance background image are output for 1000ms, and then the sound effect that notifies that the background image has switched to the chance background image continues to be output for 1500ms. In addition, although the output period for the cracking sound is set to 500ms, it may be set to 2000ms, which corresponds to the crack display period, and sounds corresponding to the progression of the crack may be output for 2000ms. In addition, an action effect sound is output for 100ms, which corresponds to the action effect display period, overlapping with the cracking sound. The operation effect sound is output at a higher volume than the cracking sound. While the cracking sound is difficult to hear when the operation effect sound is output, its output duration is shorter, making the cracking sound audible again after the operation effect sound has finished.

Furthermore, regarding the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, until the start of the crack display period, the illumination data table for the normal background image is used, resulting in illumination that is not primarily white, corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081). From the start of the crack display period until the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A (2000ms), the illumination data table for the crack display period, which primarily causes the game effect lamp 9 to emit white light, is used, resulting in illumination that corresponds to the display of cracks. Furthermore, from the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A until the end of the late whiteout display period (1000ms), the illumination data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000ms) is used, resulting in illumination that primarily emits white light, corresponding to the crack effect. Furthermore, after the illumination in the manner corresponding to the crack effect has ended, illumination other than white illumination in a manner corresponding to the display of the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) is performed by using the illumination data table for the chance background image. Furthermore, the illumination data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000ms) is a data table for causing the game effect lamp 9 to emit white light at high brightness for 500ms corresponding to the initial whiteout display period, and for causing the game effect lamp 9 to emit white light alternately at high brightness and low brightness for 500ms corresponding to the later whiteout display period. Furthermore, although an example of using the illumination data table for the normal background image in the preceding operation period has been described, the game effect lamp 9 may also be illuminated using the preceding operation illumination data table which mainly emits green light corresponding to the character in Figure 56(D) throughout the preceding operation period. In this case, until the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 will mainly emit green light corresponding to the character in Figure 56(D). After the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A are displayed, the game effect lamp 9 will mainly emit white light corresponding to the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A. This creates a contrast between before the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A are displayed and when they are displayed, thereby enhancing the effect of the background change effect A. Furthermore, while both the data table for the crack display period and the data table for the crack effect (1000ms whiteout) are data tables that primarily use white light emission, the white light emission based on the data table for the crack effect (1000ms whiteout) includes a flashing pattern that alternates between high-brightness and low-brightness white light emission, whereas the white light emission based on the data table for the crack display period does not include a flashing pattern.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 74(C), in the failure pattern, background change effect A does not display the character in the display area of the image display device 5 as a preceding operation. In other words, in the background change effect A of this failure pattern, since the character is not displayed, the cracking effect is not executed, and the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) continues to be displayed. In this case, as shown in Figures 56(B) and (C), although a tease effect is performed to indicate whether or not the character will be displayed, neither the character nor the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, so the normal background image light emission data table is used as the light emission data table.

As shown in Figures 70, 75(A), and 58, the background change effect B for the successful pattern first displays the first stage of cracks in the display area of the image display device 5 for 3000 ms (first stage crack display period). During the first stage crack display period, from the start of the first stage crack display period, a small fragment image 006SG302A, smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A, is displayed for 200 ms.

Furthermore, from the moment 1500 ms has elapsed in the first stage crack display period, the second stage crack is displayed over a wider area of the display area of the image display device 5 than in the first stage crack display period for 1500 ms (second stage crack display period). Even in the second stage crack display period, from the start of the second stage crack display period, a small fragment image 006SG302A, smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A, is displayed for 200 ms. Furthermore, the small fragment image 006SG302A during the first stage of crack display and the small fragment image 006SG302A during the second stage of crack display have different values for the "intensity" and "repetition" parameters shown in Figure 84. Therefore, the scattering speed, size, and number of individual fragments are designed to differ. However, the "gravity" parameter value is the same, resulting in both images being displayed downwards and out of frame.

Next, when the glass plate image 006SG301A is about to break, the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) that was displayed up to that point is updated to the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) (see Figure 58). Furthermore, from the time the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 1250 ms (fragment image display period). Also, from the time the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 500 ms to conceal the aforementioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player (early whiteout display period), and then a whiteout image 006SG303 with higher transparency than the early whiteout display period is displayed for 500 ms (late whiteout display period). Therefore, in the background change effect A of this embodiment, during the initial whiteout display period of 500 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, the player is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302 because it is obstructed by the whiteout image 006SG303. On the other hand, during the 750 ms period including the later whiteout display period after the initial whiteout display period, the player can see the fragment image 006SG302 during the period when the fragment image 006SG302 is visible.

Furthermore, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the background change effect B during the successful pattern are transparent, allowing the player to see other images (e.g., background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302.

Furthermore, in the background change effect B of the successful pattern, from the start of the first stage crack display period for 500 ms, speakers 8L and 8R output a first-stage cracking sound corresponding to the display of the crack (first-stage cracking sound output period), from the start of the second stage crack display period for 500 ms, speakers 8L and 8R output a second-stage cracking sound corresponding to the display of the crack (second-stage cracking sound output period), and from the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A for 150 ms, speakers 8L and 8R output a cracking effect sound corresponding to the cracking effect (cracking effect sound output period). Furthermore, the cracking sound in background change effect B is a sound specifically for background change effect B. It consists of a sound effect indicating the glass plate image 006SG301A is cracking, and a sound effect indicating that the background image has switched to the chance background image. During the 1250ms output period, the sound effect indicating the glass plate image 006SG301A is cracking, along with the sound effect indicating that the background image has switched to the chance background image, is output for 1000ms. Subsequently, the sound effect indicating that the background image has switched to the chance background image continues to be output for 250ms. Regarding the volume of the cracking sounds in background change effect B, the cracking sound is the loudest. The volume of the first-stage cracking sound and the second-stage cracking sound may be the same, or the second-stage cracking sound may be louder than the first-stage cracking sound.

Furthermore, regarding the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, until the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A's breakage, the illumination data table for the normal background image is used, resulting in illumination that is not primarily white, corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081). From the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A's breakage until the end of the late whiteout display period (1000ms), the illumination data table for the breakage effect (whiteout 1000ms) is used, resulting in illumination that is primarily white, corresponding to the breakage effect. After the illumination corresponding to the breakage effect ends, the illumination data table for the chance background image is used, resulting in illumination that corresponds to the display of the chance background image (second background image 006SG082).

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 75(B) and 75(C), in failure pattern 1, background change effect B displays the first stage of cracks for 1500ms and small fragment images corresponding to the first stage of cracks for 200ms, but the second stage of cracks is not displayed, and the glass plate image 006SG301A does not break. In failure pattern 2, background change effect B displays the first stage of cracks for 3000ms and small fragment images for 200ms, and from the moment 1500ms has elapsed during the first stage of crack display period, the second stage of cracks is displayed for 1500ms and small fragment images corresponding to the second stage of cracks are displayed for 200ms, but the glass plate image 006SG301A does not break. In these failure patterns, the background change effect B does not break, so the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) continues to be displayed.

As shown in Figures 70, 76, and 59, in the pseudo-consecutive effect, the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 is first temporarily stopped in the display area in the order of "left," "right," and "center." Then, from the stopping timing of the pseudo-consecutive pattern, which is the "center" decorative pattern, cracks are displayed for 1500 ms (crack display period). During this crack display period, as a preliminary operation, the movable body 32 is dropped for 1500 ms (movable body drop period). When the drop operation of the movable body 32 is completed (after 1500 ms has elapsed), it is time for the glass plate image 006SG301A to crack. Note that the way the cracks appear during the crack display period of the pseudo-consecutive effect and the cracks appear during the crack display period of the background change effect A are designed to be different. For example, in background change effect A, the cracks in the glass plate image 006SG301 are displayed in a manner where the cracks progress gradually over the pre-crack display period and the post-crack display period. However, in the pseudo-continuous effect, the cracks are displayed in a manner where the glass plate image 006SG301 cracks all at once.

Next, when the glass plate image 006SG301A is about to break, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 1000ms from the time of the glass plate image 006SG301A's break (fragment image display period). Also, from the time of the glass plate image 006SG301A's break, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 500ms to conceal the aforementioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player (early whiteout display period), and then a whiteout image 006SG303 with higher transmittance than the early whiteout display period is displayed for 500ms (late whiteout display period). Therefore, in the pseudo-consecutive display of this embodiment, during the initial 500ms whiteout display period from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, the player is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302 because it is obstructed by the whiteout image 006SG303. On the other hand, during the 500ms later whiteout display period, the fragment image 006SG302 becomes visible to the player. Furthermore, the background effect image 006SG322 is displayed along with the fragment image 006SG302 for 3000ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking.

Furthermore, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed during the pseudo-consecutive win animation are not transparent, and the player cannot see other images (for example, background images, etc.) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302.

Furthermore, for 3000ms from the moment the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, speakers 8L and 8R output a sound corresponding to the breaking effect (breaking effect sound output period). The breaking effect sound in the pseudo-consecutive spins effect is a sound specifically for the pseudo-consecutive spins effect, and consists of a sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking and a sound effect of the motion effect corresponding to the falling of the movable body 32. During the 3000ms output period, the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, along with the sound effect of the motion effect corresponding to the falling of the movable body 32, is output for 1000ms, and then the sound effect of the motion effect corresponding to the falling of the movable body 32 continues to be output for 2000ms. After the breaking effect sound output period ends, BGM corresponding to the normal background image or the chance background image is output, resulting in a variety of sounds being output during the rising period of the movable body 32. Furthermore, from the end of the whiteout display period, i.e., the end of the display of the fragment image 006G302, the movable body 32 rises to its initial position over a period of 3000 ms (movable body rising period).

Furthermore, regarding the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, until the start timing of the crack display, the illumination data table for the normal background image or the illumination data table for the chance background image is used to illuminate the lamp in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) or the chance background image (second background image 006SG082), with the illumination not primarily being white. From the start timing of the crack display to the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, for 2000ms, the illumination data table for the crack display is used to illuminate the lamp in a manner corresponding to the crack display, with the illumination primarily being white. Then, from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking to the end timing of the late whiteout display period, for 1000ms, the illumination data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000ms) is used to illuminate the lamp in a manner corresponding to the crack effect, with the illumination primarily being white. After the illumination corresponding to the crack effect has finished, for 2000ms, illumination is performed in a manner corresponding to the number of times the pseudo-consecutive effect has been performed, by using a pseudo-consecutive effect illumination data table corresponding to the number of times the pseudo-consecutive effect has been performed. For example, when the first pseudo-consecutive effect is performed, the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated in green in accordance with the first pseudo-consecutive effect, and when the second pseudo-consecutive effect is performed, the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated in red in accordance with the second pseudo-consecutive effect. After the illumination corresponding to the number of times the pseudo-consecutive effect has finished, illumination is performed again in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) or the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) by using the normal background image illumination data table or the chance background image illumination data table again. Furthermore, while both the data table for the crack display period and the data table for the crack effect (1000ms whiteout) are data tables that primarily use white light emission, the white light emission based on the data table for the crack effect (1000ms whiteout) includes a flashing pattern that alternates between high-brightness and low-brightness white light emission, whereas the white light emission based on the data table for the crack display period does not include a flashing pattern.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 74 and 76, the background change effect A and the pseudo-continuous effect in this embodiment illustrate different crack display periods. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the length of the crack display period may be the same for both the background change effect A and the pseudo-continuous effect.

As shown in Figures 70, 77(A), 60, and 61, the successful pattern's reach indication performance first involves a preliminary operation in which a character is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and images of the character acting on the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L of the glass plate image 006SG301, the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R of the glass plate image 006SG301, and the "center" decorative pattern display area 5C of the glass plate image 006SG301 are displayed sequentially over 10,000 ms (preliminary operation period). During the preceding operation period, from the moment the character acts on the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L in the glass plate image 006SG301, a crack is displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L for 8000 ms (left crack display period). Furthermore, from the moment the character acts on the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R in the glass plate image 006SG301, a crack is displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R for 4000 ms (right crack display period).

During the left crack display period, from the start of the left crack display period, an action effect corresponding to the character's actions is displayed around the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L for 100ms, and a smaller fragment image 006SG302A, smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A cracking, is displayed around the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L for 200ms. From the start of the right crack display period, an action effect corresponding to the character's actions is displayed around the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R for 100ms, and a smaller fragment image 006SG302A, smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A cracking, is displayed around the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R for 200ms. Furthermore, the small fragment images 006SG302A displayed around the decorative pattern display area 5L on the "left" and the small fragment images 006SG302A displayed around the decorative pattern display area 5R on the "right" have different values for the "intensity" and "repetition" parameters shown in Figure 84. Therefore, they are designed to have different scattering speeds, sizes, and numbers of individual fragments. However, the value for the "gravity" parameter is the same, so they are both displayed in a downward, frame-out direction.

When the preceding operation period ends because the character has acted on the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C in the glass plate image 006SG301, the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks. At the time the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) or the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) that was displayed up to that point is updated to the normal reach background image corresponding to the reach animation of a normal reach. Furthermore, from the time the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 2000ms (fragment image display period). Furthermore, from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 500ms to conceal the aforementioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player (early whiteout display period). Then, a whiteout image 006SG303 with higher transparency than the early whiteout display period is displayed for another 500ms (late whiteout display period). For this reason, in the successful pattern reach suggestion演出 of this embodiment, during the early whiteout display period of 500ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, the player is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302 because it is obscured by the whiteout image 006SG303. On the other hand, during the 1500ms period including the late whiteout display period after the early whiteout display period, the fragment image 006SG302 is visible to the player during this period.

Furthermore, from the end of the later whiteout period, a 3000ms period of enhanced decorative symbols is implemented to notify the player that a winning combination has been achieved, for example, by temporarily enlarging the decorative symbols (decorative symbol enhancement period).

Furthermore, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed during the reach indication sequence in successful patterns are transparent, allowing the player to see other images (e.g., background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302.

Furthermore, in the reach indication演出 for the successful pattern, from the start of the left crack display period described above for 500ms, speakers 8L and 8R output a left crack sound corresponding to the display of the crack (left crack sound output period), and a first character voice corresponding to the character's first action is output. From the start of the right crack display period described above for 500ms, speakers 8L and 8R output a right crack sound corresponding to the display of the crack (right crack sound output period), and a second character voice corresponding to the character's second action is output. From the crack timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A for 2000ms, speakers 8L and 8R output a crack sound corresponding to the crack effect (crack effect sound output period). Furthermore, the sound effect for the breakage effect in the reach indication演出 (success pattern) is a sound specifically for the reach indication演出. It consists of a sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking and a sound effect of highlighting the decorative symbols to inform the player that a reach has occurred, such as by temporarily enlarging the decorative symbols. During the 3000ms output period, the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, along with the highlighting sound effect, is output for 1000ms, and then the highlighting sound effect continues to be output for the following 2000ms. After the output period of the breakage effect sound ends, the BGM corresponding to the normal reach background image is output. Additionally, when an action effect corresponding to a character's action is displayed, a sound effect corresponding to the action effect is output. This sound effect is used both when the action effect is displayed around the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L and when it is displayed around the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R.

Furthermore, regarding the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, until the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A's breakage, the illumination is not primarily white, but rather a mode of illumination corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) or the chance background image (second background image 006SG082), using either the normal background image illumination data table or the chance background image illumination data table. From the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A's breakage until the end of the late whiteout display period (1000ms), the illumination is primarily white, corresponding to the breakage effect, using the breakage effect illumination data table. After the illumination corresponding to the breakage effect ends, the illumination is not primarily white, corresponding to the display of the normal reach background image, using the normal reach background image illumination data table.

As shown in Figure 77(B), in the failure pattern, the reach suggestion animation begins with a preliminary operation where a character is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and images of the character acting on the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R, and the "center" decorative pattern display area 5C are displayed sequentially over 14,000 ms (preliminary operation period). During the preliminary operation period, from the moment the character acts on the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, cracks are displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L for 12,000 ms (left crack display period), and then, from the moment the character acts on the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R, cracks are displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R for 8,000 ms (right crack display period).

During the left crack display period, from the start of the left crack display period, an action effect corresponding to the character's actions is displayed around the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L for 100ms, and a smaller fragment image 006SG302A, smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A cracking, is displayed around the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L for 200ms. From the start of the right crack display period, an action effect corresponding to the character's actions is displayed around the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R for 100ms, and a smaller fragment image 006SG302A, smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A cracking, is displayed around the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R for 200ms. Furthermore, since the small fragment image 006SG302 in the failure pattern is displayed based on the same parameter values as the small fragment image 006SG302 in the success pattern, the player cannot determine whether it is a success or failure pattern by looking at the speed at which the small fragments scatter or the size and number of each individual fragment. Therefore, it effectively entices the player about whether or not a normal reach will be executed.

Furthermore, in the reach indication演出 for the failure pattern, a left crack sound corresponding to the display of the crack is output from speakers 8L and 8R for 500ms from the start of the left crack display period described above (left crack sound output period), and a right crack sound corresponding to the display of the crack is output from speakers 8L and 8R for 500ms from the start of the right crack display period described above (right crack sound output period). Moreover, from the same timing as the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A in the reach indication演出 for the success pattern (10000 elapsed from the start of the reach indication演出 for the failure pattern), a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 1000ms (whiteout display period). The whiteout display period is a period during which the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 makes other images displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 invisible to the player. Furthermore, when action effects corresponding to character actions are displayed, sound effects corresponding to those effects are output. These sound effects are used both when the action effects are displayed around the left decorative pattern display area 5L and when they are displayed around the right decorative pattern display area 5R.

Furthermore, in the reach suggestion演出 for the failure pattern, until the start of the whiteout display period, illumination is performed in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) or the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) using the illumination data table for the normal background image or chance background image. Then, during the whiteout display period, illumination mainly consisting of white light is performed in a manner corresponding to the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 using the illumination data table for whiteout. From the end of the whiteout display period, illumination mainly consisting of white light is performed in a manner corresponding to the notification that a reach will not occur (that the reach suggestion演出 is a failure pattern) using the illumination data table for failure notification. Furthermore, the illumination in a manner corresponding to the notification that a reach will not occur (that the reach suggestion演出 is a failure pattern) ends when the variable display stops. Furthermore, while the light data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000ms), the whiteout light data table, and the failure notification light data table all primarily use white light emission, the white light emission based on the crack effect (whiteout 1000ms) light data table includes a flashing pattern that alternates between high-brightness and low-brightness white light emission, whereas the white light emission based on the whiteout light data table and the failure notification light data table does not include a flashing pattern. Also, while the game effect lamp 9 is illuminating based on the failure notification light data table (until the variable display stops due to the cessation of the variable display), no sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in Figures 71, 78, and 62, the weak development sequence begins with a preliminary operation where a character is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and an image of the character acting on the center of the display area of the image display device 5 is displayed for 4000ms (preliminary operation period). While the preliminary operation period is set to 4000ms, a separate pattern with a preliminary operation period of 2000ms may be provided. When suggesting a high probability of a big win to the player, the weak development sequence may be executed more frequently using the 2000ms pattern than the 4000ms pattern.

Next, when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the normal reach background image corresponding to the normal reach reach animation that was displayed up to that point is updated to the weak development animation background image (background effect image 006SG322) corresponding to the weak development animation. At the same time, the glass plate image 006SG301A, which was displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, breaks, and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 3500ms (fragment image display period). Furthermore, from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 500ms to conceal the aforementioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player (early whiteout display period), and then a whiteout image 006SG303 with higher transparency than the early whiteout display period is displayed for 500ms (late whiteout display period). Therefore, in the weak development sequence of this embodiment, during the 500ms whiteout display period from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, the player is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302 because it is obscured by the whiteout image 006SG303. On the other hand, during the 3000ms period including the later whiteout display period after the early whiteout display period, the player can see the fragment image 006SG302. Then, when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends, the background image corresponding to the weak development sequence that was displayed up to that point is updated to the Super Reach α background image corresponding to the Super Reach α reach sequence.

Furthermore, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed during the weak development sequence are not transparent, and the player cannot see other images (e.g., background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302. While it is stated that the fragment images 006SG302 in the weak development sequence are not transparent, this is the final display mode of the fragment images 006SG302. During the 3500ms fragment image display period, the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed in a transparent mode (e.g., with a transparency of 70% or more) for the first 1500ms after the display begins. Then, over 1000ms, they gradually change to an opaque mode (e.g., with a transparency of 70% to 10%), and finally, over 1000ms, they are displayed in an opaque mode (e.g., with a transparency of less than 10%).

Furthermore, during the weak development sequence, a cracking sound corresponding to the cracking sequence is output from speakers 8L and 8R for 1000ms starting from the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A (cracking sound output period). In addition, along with the cracking sound, a weak development sequence sound is also output for 3500ms starting from the cracking timing. Note that the cracking sound is louder than the weak development sequence sound, making it more easily recognizable by the player.

Furthermore, regarding the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, until the start of the preceding operation, the illumination data table for the normal reach background image is used, resulting in illumination that is not primarily white, corresponding to the display of the normal reach background image. From the start of the preceding operation until the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, for 4000ms, the illumination data table for the weak development effect is used, resulting in illumination that is not primarily white, corresponding to the weak development effect. From the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking until the end of the late whiteout display period, for 1000ms, the illumination data table for the breaking effect (whiteout 1000ms) is used, resulting in illumination that is primarily white, corresponding to the breaking effect. From the end of the late whiteout display period until the end of the fragment image display period, for 2500ms, the illumination table for the weak development effect is used again, resulting in illumination that is corresponding to the weak development effect. Furthermore, after the illumination corresponding to the crack effect has finished, the illumination that does not primarily consist of white light will be performed in a manner corresponding to the display of the Super Reach α background image (weak S-reach effect image 006SG088) by using the illumination data table for the Super Reach α background image.

In this embodiment, the weak development sequence is illustrated by an example in which the background image is updated from the weak development sequence background image to the super reach α background image at the timing when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the background image is updated from the weak development sequence background image to the super reach α background image, the image display device 5 may display a whiteout image 006SG303 to make the update from the weak development sequence background image to the super reach α background image difficult or impossible for the player to see. Furthermore, when the image display device 5 displays a whiteout image 006SG303 when the background image is updated from the weak development sequence background image to the super reach α background image, the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated using a whiteout light emission data table corresponding to the display of the whiteout image 006SG303. Furthermore, the whiteout image 006SG303 may be displayed before the end of the fragment image display period (for example, 500ms before the end). In this case, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 will begin before the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed out of frame.

As shown in Figures 71, 79, and 63, in the strong development sequence A, first, as a preliminary operation, the movable body 32 is lowered for 1000 ms (movable body lowering period). Upon completion of the movable body 32's lowering operation (after 1000 ms has elapsed), the timing for the glass plate image 006SG301A to break occurs.

Next, when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the Super Reach α background image (weak S-reach animation image 006SG088) corresponding to the Super Reach α reach animation that was displayed up to that point is updated to the Strong Development Animation A background image (background effect image 006SG322) corresponding to the Strong Development Animation A, and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 1500ms (fragment image display period).

Furthermore, from the moment the movable body 32 falls, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 1500ms to conceal the aforementioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player (early whiteout display period). Following this, a whiteout image 006SG303 with higher transparency than the early whiteout display period is displayed for 500ms (late whiteout display period). Therefore, in the strong development effect A of this embodiment, during the 1500ms early whiteout display period from the moment the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the player is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302 because it is obscured by the whiteout image 006SG303. On the other hand, during the 500ms late whiteout display period after the early whiteout display period, the fragment image 006SG302 is visible to the player.

Furthermore, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the strong development sequence A are transparent, allowing the player to see other images (for example, background images, etc.) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302.

Then, when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends, the background image for the strong development sequence A that was displayed up to that point is updated to the background image for the super reach β sequence that corresponds to the reach sequence of the super reach β sequence. The movable body 32 that fell in the preceding operation is positioned at the fall location during the fragment image display period described above, and rises to its initial position over a period of 1500ms from the end of the fragment image display period (movable body rise period). From the start of the rise of the movable body 32 (start of the movable body rise period), the speakers 8L and 8R output sound corresponding to the strong development sequence A (strong development sequence A sound). In addition, unlike the weak development sequence, the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking is not output in the strong development sequence A, so you can enjoy the unique breaking effect of the strong development sequence A. Furthermore, in the strong development sequence A, a sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking may be output. In this case, the output of the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking may be limited by setting a higher priority for the sound effect of the strong development sequence A.

Furthermore, regarding the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, until the timing of the movable body 32's fall, the illumination data table for the Super Reach α background image is used, resulting in illumination that is not primarily white, corresponding to the display of the Super Reach α background image (weak S-reach effect image 006SG088). From the timing of the start of the movable body 32's fall until the end of the fragment image display period, the illumination data table for the Strong Development Effect A is used for 2500ms, resulting in illumination that is not primarily white, corresponding to the Strong Development Effect A. From the timing of the start of the movable body 32's rise (the end of the fragment image display period), the illumination data table for the Super Reach β background image is used, resulting in illumination that is not primarily white, corresponding to the display of the Super Reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084).

Furthermore, in the powerful development effect A of this embodiment, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 is exemplified as a whiteout display pre-show period of 1500 ms from the timing of the movable body 32's fall. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the whiteout display pre-show period of the powerful development effect A may be a period of 500 ms or 400 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A's breakage, during which the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed.

As shown in Figures 71, 80, 64, and 65, in the strong development effect B, cracks are first displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 for 1500 ms without any movement of the movable body 32 or character action (crack display period). From the start of this crack display period, small fragment images 006SG302A, which are smaller in size than the fragment images 006SG302 displayed from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A, are displayed for 200 ms. Note that the small fragment images 006SG302A in strong development effect B and the small fragment images 006SG302A in reach suggestion effects etc. have different "intensity" and "repetition" parameter values as shown in Figure 84, so the scattering speed, size of each small fragment image, and number are designed to be different.

After 1500ms has elapsed and the crack display period has ended, it is time for the glass plate image 006SG301A to break. When the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the Super Reach α background image (weak S-reach effect image 006SG088) that was previously displayed, corresponding to the Super Reach α reach effect, is updated to the Strong Development Effect B corresponding to the Strong Development Effect B. Furthermore, from the time the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 3000ms (fragment image display period). Furthermore, from the moment the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 500ms to conceal the aforementioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player (early whiteout display period). Following this, a whiteout image 006SG303 with higher transparency than the early whiteout display period is displayed for another 500ms (late whiteout display period). Therefore, in the strong development effect B of this embodiment, during the 500ms early whiteout display period from the moment the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the player is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302 because it is obscured by the whiteout image 006SG303. On the other hand, during the 2500ms period including the late whiteout display period after the early whiteout display period, the fragment image 006SG302 is visible to the player.

Furthermore, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the strong development sequence B are transparent, allowing the player to see other images (e.g., background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302. Also, the fragment images 006SG302 in the strong development sequence B begin to be displayed at normal movement speed, normal rotation speed, and normal falling speed, and then are displayed in slow motion.

Then, when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends, the background image for the strong development sequence B (background effect image 006SG322), which had been displayed up to that point, is updated to the background image for the super reach β (fourth background image 006SG084), which corresponds to the reach sequence of the super reach β. In addition, in the strong development sequence B, from the start of the crack display period described above, cracking sounds corresponding to the display of the cracks are output from speakers 8L and 8R for 1500ms (cracking sound output period), and from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking until the end of the fragment image display period, sounds corresponding to the strong development sequence B (strong development sequence B sound) are output from speakers 8L and 8R for 3000ms. Note that in the strong development sequence B, unlike the weak development sequence, the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking is not output, so you can enjoy the cracking effect unique to the strong development sequence B. Furthermore, in the strong development sequence B, a sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking may be output. In this case, the output of the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking may be limited by setting a higher priority for the sound effect of the strong development sequence B sequence.

Furthermore, regarding the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, until the start of the crack display timing, the illumination data table for the Super Reach α background image is used, resulting in illumination that is not primarily white, corresponding to the display of the Super Reach α background image (weak S Reach effect image 006SG088). From the start of the crack display timing to the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, for 1500ms, the illumination data table for the Strong Development Effect B is used, resulting in illumination that is not primarily white, corresponding to the Strong Development Effect B. From the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, for 1000ms, until the end of the late whiteout display period, the illumination data table for the breaking effect (whiteout 1000ms) is used, resulting in illumination that is primarily white, corresponding to the breaking effect. From the end of the late whiteout display period to the end of the fragment image display period, for 2000ms, the illumination data table for the Strong Development Effect B is used, resulting in illumination that is corresponding to the Strong Development Effect B. Furthermore, after the illumination in the manner corresponding to the strong development effect B has finished, illumination other than primarily white illumination will be performed in a manner corresponding to the display of the Super Reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) by using the illumination data table for the Super Reach B background image.

In this embodiment, the strong development sequence B is illustrated by an example in which the background image is updated from the strong development sequence B background image to the super reach β background image at the timing when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the background image is updated from the strong development sequence B background image to the super reach β background image, the image display device 5 may display a whiteout image 006SG303 to make the update from the strong development sequence B background image to the super reach β background image difficult or impossible for the player to see. Furthermore, when the image display device 5 displays a whiteout image 006SG303 when the background image is updated from the strong development sequence B background image to the super reach β background image, the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated using a whiteout light emission data table corresponding to the display of the whiteout image 006SG303. In this case, both the light emission data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000ms) and the light emission data table for the whiteout are light emission data tables that primarily execute white light emission. However, the white light emission based on the light emission data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000ms) is executed with a flashing pattern that alternates between high-brightness and low-brightness white light emission, whereas the white light emission based on the light emission data table for the whiteout is executed without a flashing pattern. Furthermore, although the crack display period for the strong development effect B is set to 1500ms, the crack may be displayed for a longer period than 1500ms until the crack timing. For example, the crack may be displayed so that it gradually expands at the first, second, and third timings between the start timing of Super Reach α and the crack timing.

As shown in Figures 71, 81, and 66, the cut-in animation first features an operation prompt animation. This animation displays an operation prompt image in the display area of the image display device 5 for 3000 ms, prompting the player to operate the push button 31B (operation prompt animation execution period). In particular, during the execution period of this embodiment, the operation prompt image is displayed as a pre-operation image, showing the push button 31B in its protruding state before being operated by the player (pre-operation image display period).

If the player operates the push button 31B during the execution of the action prompting animation, or if the execution period of the action prompting animation ends, this timing is considered the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, and the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, breaks, and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 2500ms (fragment image display period). Furthermore, from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking until the end of the cut-in animation (for 5000ms from the breaking timing), suggestive images according to the animation pattern are displayed, and after a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 500ms to conceal the aforementioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player (early whiteout display period), a whiteout image 006SG303 with higher transparency than the early whiteout display period is displayed for 500ms (late whiteout display period). Therefore, in the cut-in animation of this embodiment, during the 500ms whiteout display period starting from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, the player is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302 and the suggestive image due to the whiteout image 006SG303 obstructing their view. On the other hand, during the 2000ms period including the later whiteout display period after the initial whiteout display period, the fragment image 006SG302 is visible, allowing the player to see both the fragment image 006SG302 and the suggestive image. Furthermore, the background effect image 006SG322 is displayed along with the fragment image 006SG302 for 5000ms starting from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking.

Furthermore, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the cut-in animation are transparent, allowing the player to see other images (e.g., background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302. Additionally, the fragment images 006SG302 in the cut-in animation begin to be displayed at normal movement speed, normal rotation speed, and normal falling speed, and then are displayed in slow motion.

Furthermore, from the moment the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, a post-operation image is displayed for 1000ms, showing the state after the push button 31B has been operated by the player (post-operation image display period). Since the post-operation image is displayed with priority over the whiteout image 006SG303, the player can view this post-operation image for 1000ms from the moment the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks.

Furthermore, during the cut-in animation, for 3000ms from the moment the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, speakers 8L and 8R output a cut-in animation sound corresponding to the cut-in animation (cut-in animation sound output period). Unlike weak development animations, the cut-in animation does not output a sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, allowing players to enjoy the unique breaking effect of the cut-in animation. Alternatively, the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking may be output during the cut-in animation. In this case, the output of the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking may be limited by setting a higher priority for the cut-in animation sound.

Furthermore, regarding the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, until the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, the illumination data table for the Super Reach β background image is used to perform illumination that is not primarily white, in a manner corresponding to the display of the Super Reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084). From the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking until the end of the late whiteout display period, for 1000ms, the illumination data table for the breaking effect (whiteout 1000ms) is used to perform illumination that is primarily white, in a manner corresponding to the breaking effect. From the end of the late whiteout display period until the end of the suggestive image display period, the illumination data table for the cut-in effect is used to perform illumination that is not primarily white, in a manner corresponding to the cut-in effect. Furthermore, after the illumination in the manner corresponding to the cut-in animation has finished, the illumination data table for the Super Reach β background image is used again to perform illumination that is not primarily white, in a manner corresponding to the display of the Super Reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084).

As shown in Figures 71, 82(A), 67, and 68, the result notification display for the successful pattern first involves a preliminary operation in which the movable body 32 is dropped for 500 ms (movable fall resistance period). Once the drop operation of the movable body 32 is completed (after 500 ms), cracks are displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 for 500 ms (crack display period). During this crack display period, from the start timing of the crack display period, an operation effect corresponding to the drop of the movable body 32 is displayed for 100 ms, and a small fragment image 006SG302A, which is smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A, is displayed for 200 ms. Furthermore, the small fragment image 006SG302A in the result notification sequence (success pattern/failure pattern) and the small fragment image 006SG302A in the reach indication sequence, etc., have different values for the "intensity" and "repetition" parameters shown in Figure 84. Therefore, they are designed to have different scattering speeds, sizes, and numbers of individual fragments. Similarly, the small fragment image 006SG302A in the result notification sequence (success pattern) and the small fragment image 006SG302A in the result notification sequence (failure pattern) also have different values for the "intensity" and "repetition" parameters, resulting in different scattering speeds, sizes, and numbers of individual fragments.

Next, when the glass plate image 006SG301A is about to break, the Super Reach α background image (weak S-reach animation image 006SG088) or the Super Reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) corresponding to the Super Reach α reach animation that had been displayed up to that point is updated to a jackpot notification background image (fifth background image 006SG085) indicating that the variable display result is a jackpot, and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 1500ms (fragment image display period). Although not specifically shown in Figure 82(A), the jackpot notification background image is displayed for 10,000 ms from the time the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks. After 10,000 ms (before the variable display stops), it is updated to the normal background image (first background image 006SG081). Subsequently, from the time the variable display stops, it is updated to the jackpot game background image corresponding to the jackpot game state.

Furthermore, from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A's breakage, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 500ms to conceal the aforementioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player (early whiteout display period). Subsequently, a whiteout image 006SG303 with higher transparency than that of the early whiteout display period is displayed for another 500ms (late whiteout display period). Therefore, in the result notification presentation of the successful pattern of this embodiment, during the early whiteout display period of 500ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A's breakage, the player is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302 because it is obscured by the whiteout image 006SG303. On the other hand, during the 1000ms period including the late whiteout display period after the early whiteout display period, the fragment image 006SG302 is visible to the player during this period.

Furthermore, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the result notification sequence for successful patterns are transparent, allowing the player to see other images (e.g., background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302.

Furthermore, the upward movement of the movable body 32 to its initial position occurs over a period of 1500 ms from the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A (movable body upward movement period).

Furthermore, in the result notification sequence for the successful pattern, a jackpot confirmation sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R for 1500ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking (jackpot confirmation sound output period). Note that, unlike the weak development sequence, the result notification sequence (successful pattern) does not output the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, thus effectively notifying the player that a jackpot has been confirmed. Alternatively, the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking may be output in the result notification sequence (successful pattern). In this case, the output of the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking may be limited by setting a higher priority for the jackpot confirmation sound.

Furthermore, regarding the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, until the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, the illumination data table for the Super Reach α background image or the Super Reach β background image is used to illuminate the lamp in a manner corresponding to the display of the Super Reach α background image (weak S-reach effect image 006SG088) or the Super Reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084), with illumination not primarily consisting of white light. From the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking until the end of the late whiteout display period of 1000ms, the illumination data table for the breaking effect (whiteout 1000ms) is used to illuminate the lamp in a manner corresponding to the breaking effect, with illumination primarily consisting of white light. After the illumination corresponding to the breaking effect ends, the illumination data table for the jackpot notification background image is used to illuminate the lamp in a manner corresponding to the display of the jackpot notification background image. Furthermore, from the moment the variable display stops, the display will primarily emit rainbow-colored light in a manner corresponding to the display of the jackpot game background image, using the jackpot game light emission data table.

As shown in Figure 82(B), in the failure pattern result notification, the falling of the movable body 32 and the cracks resulting from the falling of the movable body 32 are not displayed. Instead, cracks are displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 for 5500 ms from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A in the success pattern (crack display period). Furthermore, from the start of the crack display period, the Super Reach α background image (weak S Reach effect image 006SG088) or Super Reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084), which had been displayed in color until then, is updated to a monochrome failure notification background image, which indicates that the variable display result is a failure. The display of the failure notification background image continues until the end of the crack display period, at which point it is updated to a color eye-catching image. The display period for the eye-catching image is, for example, 1000 ms. After the display period for the eye-catching image ends, the display of a normal background image (first background image 006SG081), which is also in color, begins. In other words, in the failure pattern result notification display in this embodiment, after the variable display result is notified by the display of a monochrome failure notification background image, the color eye-catching image and the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) are displayed.

Furthermore, in the failure pattern result notification sequence, a crack-related sound effect corresponding to the crack is output from speakers 8L and 8R for 500ms from the start of the crack display period described above (crack sound effect output period).

Furthermore, regarding the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, until the start of the crack display period, the illumination data table for the Super Reach α background image or the Super Reach β background image is used to illuminate the lamp in a manner corresponding to the display of the Super Reach α background image (weak S-reach effect image 006SG088) or the Super Reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084), with illumination not primarily consisting of white light. From the start of the crack display period to the stop of the variable display, the illumination data table for the miss notification background image is used to illuminate the lamp in a manner corresponding to the display of the miss notification background image, with illumination primarily consisting of white light. From the stop of the variable display onwards, the illumination data table for the normal background image is used to illuminate the lamp in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081), with illumination not primarily consisting of white light. Furthermore, while both the light emission data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000ms) and the light emission data table for the misalignment notification background image are light emission data tables that primarily execute white light emission, the white light emission based on the crack effect (whiteout 1000ms) light emission data table is executed with a flashing pattern that alternates between high-brightness and low-brightness white light emission, whereas the white light emission based on the whiteout light emission data table is executed without a flashing pattern.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the first consecutive cracking effect, the second consecutive cracking effect, the dialogue予告 effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo-consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect are illustrated as starting the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 from the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A (the display start timing of the fragment image 006SG302). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the whiteout image 006SG303 in each effect may start displaying from a timing earlier than the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A (the display start timing of the fragment image 006SG302).

(Shard speed during the cracking animation)
Next, we will explain the display speed of the fragment images 006SG302 of the glass plate image 006SG301A that are displayed when the cracking effect is executed as described above, such as the first consecutive cracking effect, the second consecutive cracking effect, the dialogue予告 effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo-consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect.

As shown in Figure 83(A), the fragment images 006SG302 of the glass plate image 006SG301A, which are displayed during the execution of the first consecutive cracking effect, the second consecutive cracking effect, the dialogue予告 effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo-consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, and the cracking effect as a result notification effect, are displayed moving at a constant speed V1 (normal motion) throughout the fragment image display period, which includes the early whiteout display period and the late whiteout display period.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 83(B), the fragment image 006SG302 of the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed when the strong development effect B and the breakage effect as a cut-in effect are executed, moves and is displayed at speed V1 for 1000 ms between the early and late whiteout display periods. However, during the fragment image display period after the late whiteout display period (2000 ms for strong development effect B, and 1500 ms for the cut-in effect), it moves and is displayed at speed V0 (slow motion), which is slower than speed V1. Furthermore, while Figure 83 shows the strong development sequence B and the cut-in sequence as examples of sequences where the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at speed V0, the background change sequence B and the strong development sequence A also display the fragment image 006SG302 at speed V0, as described later. When suggesting a high probability of a big win to the player, it is decided that the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change sequence B and the strong development sequence A will be displayed at speed V0 at a higher rate than speed V1.

(Details of the cracking effect)
Next, the details of the cracking effect will be explained based on Figures 84 and 85. Figure 84 is a diagram showing the cracking patterns in the cracking effect. Figure 85 is a diagram showing examples of each cracking pattern.

As shown in Figures 84 and 85, in the cracking animations performed in various effects, at a predetermined cracking timing, the cracking begins when some kind of impact (force) is applied from the rear to approximately the center of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area. A cracking image is then animated and displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area where the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed, with multiple fragment images 006SG302, each resembling at least a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A, scattering. In other words, the cracking animation is an effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area changes into fragment images 006SG302, thereby displaying the glass plate image 006SG301A in a cracked (fragmented) state. In this embodiment, the cracking is initiated when a sphere collides from the rear to approximately the center of the glass plate image 006SG301A.

Furthermore, the animation display of a glass plate shattering and scattering fragments is actually composed of a number of still images corresponding to the duration of the fragment display (for example, approximately 30 to 100 frames). However, in Figure 85, five still images are extracted from the multiple still images that make up the shatter animation display of fragments from the start to the end of the shattering effect and arranged in chronological order. Also, in Figure 85, the five images for each shattering pattern are not consecutive; in reality, multiple fragment images not shown are placed between each frame.

The glass plate image 006SG301A can break in various ways, and multiple types of break patterns (for example, break patterns A to G) are pre-set. The CPU 120 for controlling the effects can execute the break effect based on the pre-set break pattern according to the type of effect to be executed.

Specifically, pattern A corresponds to background change effect A and reach suggestion effect; pattern B corresponds to background change effect B and strong development effect B; pattern C corresponds to pseudo-consecutive effect and result notification effect (jackpot); pattern D corresponds to first consecutive split effect, second consecutive split effect and dialogue予告 effect; pattern E corresponds to weak development effect; pattern F corresponds to strong development effect A; and pattern G corresponds to cut-in effect.

Each crack pattern A through G differs in at least one of the following items: "Aggressor," "Crack Type," "Crack Range," and "Fragment Image Display Pattern." The display period and timing are explained in Figures 70 and 71, and therefore will not be explained further below.

"Aggressor" indicates the entity acting on the glass plate image 006SG301A. Crack patterns A and E execute the crack effect in accordance with the movement of the "character," crack patterns C and F execute the crack effect in accordance with the movement of the "movable body," and crack patterns B and D execute the crack effect at a predetermined timing regardless of the aggressor. "Crack pattern" indicates whether or not the glass plate image 006SG301A changes to a crack pattern before cracking. Crack patterns A to D execute the crack effect after the "crack pattern" is displayed, and crack patterns E to G execute the crack effect without the "crack pattern" being displayed. Note that "crack pattern" includes multiple types of patterns that differ in display position, number of displays, and crack shape on the display screen. "Crack range" is the range in which the glass plate image 006SG301A cracks. Crack patterns A to C and E to G are the "entire" display screen, while crack pattern D is a "part." The "Fragment Image Display Mode" indicates whether the fragment image 006SG302 is transparent or not. Parts of crack pattern B and crack pattern E are "opaque," while the other crack patterns are "transparent."

In this embodiment, the glass plate image 006SG301A, the glass plate image 006SG301, and the fragment image 006SG302 are set to be illuminated by light (illumination) from the front of the approximate center of the display screen. Therefore, the "non-transparent" fragment image 006SG302 reflects light, making it difficult to see the lower layer image rendering area. The "transparent" fragment image 006SG302 does not reflect light and is easily transmitted at a first angle (for example, a large angle where the incident angle of the irradiated light to the glass surface is 45 to 90 degrees), making it easier to see the lower layer image rendering area. On the other hand, at a second angle (for example, a small angle where the incident angle of the irradiated light to the glass surface is less than 45 degrees), it reflects light and is difficult to transmit, making it difficult to see the lower layer image rendering area (see Figure 94). For example, at a specific timing within the fragment image display period, among multiple fragment images 006SG302, the first fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at a first angle, and the second fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at a second angle. Subsequently, as the multiple fragment images 006SG302 move and are displayed over time, the first fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at a second angle, and the second fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at a first angle. Furthermore, the type, intensity, color, up/down/left/right position, and depth position of the light can all be changed, and the values of the light settings may be varied depending on the crack pattern.

Furthermore, the multiple fragment images 006SG302 displayed when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks include multiple fragment images 006SG302 with different shapes, sizes, thicknesses, etc. Each fragment image 006SG302 moves while rotating in various directions at various speeds and orientations during the display period from the start of display until it is hidden. Specifically, some are displayed moving in the X-axis direction (left-right direction), others in the Y-axis direction (up-down direction), and others in the Z-axis direction (front-back direction), and these may differ in movement speed, rotation speed, rotation count, display period, etc. Note that the movement direction includes not only movement in one of the X, Y, and Z axes, but also movement in multiple axes (for example, XY axis direction or XY axis direction).

In other words, each crack pattern A to G differs in at least one of the following aspects when the fragment images 006SG302 are scattered: shape, size, rotation speed, rotation count, direction of movement [X-axis (left-right direction), Y-axis (up-down direction), Z-axis (front-back direction)], movement speed, and display period.

Furthermore, crack patterns A through G are animations of cracks created, for example, using the shutter function of a specific animation creation software. The created crack patterns A through G differ in the numerical values of at least some of the parameters shown below.

To briefly explain each parameter shown in Figure 84, "Gravity" allows you to adjust the gravity setting and control the acceleration of the falling fragments. Since it is gravity, it is not constant but gradually increases in speed downwards. "Direction of gravity" allows you to set the direction in which gravity acts, and you can specify up, down, left, and right directions with 0 degrees (up) as the reference. "Gravity gradient" allows you to adjust gravity in the Z-axis direction (forward and backward direction), and the value set with this parameter is combined with "Direction of gravity". You can specify all directions in 3D space: forward, backward, up, down, left, and right. Note that with values of "-90" and "90", it becomes the Z-axis direction, so "Direction of gravity" is effectively ignored. "Intensity" allows you to adjust the force of the flying fragments, and increasing the value makes the fragments fly faster. "Variability" adjusts the degree to which the size of the fragments affects the animation. In the real world, when the same physical impact is applied, larger and heavier objects require more energy to move, so smaller objects move and rotate faster, while larger and heavier objects move slower. The difference in physical animation due to the size of the fragments can be adjusted from 0 to 100%. At 0%, size and weight are not considered, so small and large fragments move the same way without distinction. The default setting of 30% is considered to be close to the laws of physics in nature. "Repeat" adjusts the size of the fragments that break. Increasing the value makes each fragment smaller and increases the number of fragments. "Viscosity" sets the resistance to the movement of the fragments. Increasing the value makes the movement and rotation stop faster due to the resistance. Resistance to gravity is also applied, as if the fragments were stuck to something sticky, so the falling speed is also slowed. In other words, if the value of "Viscosity" is adjusted to be large, the movement of the fragments will be in slow motion. Furthermore, while Figure 84 shows crack patterns B, E, and F as examples of crack patterns where the "viscosity" value is adjusted to be higher than normal, as will be explained later, crack pattern G also has a "viscosity" value adjusted to be higher than normal.

The above parameters are merely examples. Other parameters may also be set, such as "Force," which indicates the force applied at the moment the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks; "Position," which allows adjustment of the X and Y axis directions where the force is applied; "Depth," which allows adjustment of the Z axis direction (depth direction) of the force; "Rotation Speed," which allows setting the speed at which each fragment image 006SG302 can rotate; and "Randomness," which allows setting the degree of randomness in the movement of each fragment image 006SG302.

Next, we will briefly describe the main characteristics of the movement (primarily the scattering pattern) of the fragment image 006SG302 in each crack pattern.

For example, in crack patterns A, C to F, the "gravity direction" value is set to "180°," so the fragment image 006SG302 breaks and scatters outwards before naturally falling downwards. In contrast, in crack patterns B and G, the "gravity direction" value is set to "0°," so the fragment image 006SG302 breaks and scatters outwards, but is less likely to fall downwards compared to crack patterns A, C to F.

Thus, by setting the "gravity direction" differently for crack patterns A, C-F (first pattern) and crack patterns B, G (second pattern), crack patterns A, C-F have a "180°" setting, resulting in different directions of movement when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed. This allows for the construction of a variety of patterns, enhancing the overall appeal.

Furthermore, in crack patterns A, C, and F, the "variation amount" value is set to "30%", resulting in smaller fragment images 006SG302 moving and rotating quickly, while larger, heavier fragment images 006SG302 move and rotate slowly. In contrast, in crack patterns B and G, the "variation amount" value is set to "0%", so small and large fragments in the fragment image 006SG302 behave identically without distinction, resulting in crack patterns with a high degree of animation.

In other words, fragment patterns A, C, and F differ in how they are affected by animation depending on their size. Smaller fragment images (006SG302) fly faster, while larger fragment images (006SG302) fall somewhat slower and more quickly. These patterns can be used when you want to show realistic movement. Fragment patterns B and G, regardless of size, are affected by animation in a similar way, resulting in similar flight and fall patterns. This allows you to select the appropriate fragment pattern depending on the scene.

Furthermore, while the "gravity direction" setting is the same for crack patterns A and C (first patterns) and crack patterns D through F (second patterns), the "gravity value" setting differs, resulting in different falling speeds for the fragment images 006SG302. By varying the "gravity value" parameter in this way, and thus altering the falling speed of the fragment images 006SG302, a variety of patterns can be constructed, enhancing the overall interest. More specifically, crack patterns D through F have higher values, resulting in faster falling speeds for the fragment images 006SG302.

Furthermore, in crack patterns A-C, E, and G, the "gravity gradient" value is set to "0" or greater, causing the fragment image 006SG302 to move in the X and Y directions while simultaneously moving in the Z direction, i.e., towards the viewer. In contrast, in crack patterns D and F, the "gravity gradient" value is set to "0," causing the fragment image 006SG302 to move only in the X and Y directions, without moving in the Z direction. In addition, in crack patterns A-C, E, and G, when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed moving towards the viewer, it is displayed in a manner that gradually enlarges, emphasizing that it is approaching the viewer. In particular, in crack patterns B and G, the "gravity gradient" value is set to "90," resulting in the fragment image being displayed as moving even further towards the viewer.

Furthermore, in crack patterns A (first pattern), B (second pattern), and C (third pattern), the first parameter of "gravity" is common to all three, set to "0," while the second parameter of "strength" differs: "5" for crack pattern A, "3" for crack pattern B, and "7" for crack pattern C. In this way, by fixing the first parameter and creating common parts for the fragment image 006SG302, while varying the second parameter, a diverse range of patterns can be constructed, resulting in the creation of stable and diverse display patterns for the fragment image 006SG302.

Furthermore, crack patterns E (first pattern), F (second pattern), and G (third pattern) share a common first parameter of "gravity" of "0" with crack pattern E (first pattern) and crack pattern F (second pattern), while their second parameters of "strength" differ: crack pattern E has "3" and crack pattern F has "5". Crack pattern F (second pattern) and crack pattern G (third pattern) differ in that their first parameter of "gravity" is "5" for crack pattern E and "2" for crack pattern F, while their second parameter of "strength" is a common "5". In this way, by creating common parts for each pattern relative to the fragment image 006SG302 while using different parameters, it is possible to construct stable and diverse display patterns for the fragment image 006SG302.

In this embodiment, multiple types of crack patterns A to G with different numerical values for various parameters are pre-stored, and a crack animation is executed based on crack pattern A to G corresponding to the type of animation to be performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the type of animation to be executed by the animation control CPU 120 is determined based on the start of the variable display, the numerical values of various parameters are determined according to the determined type of animation and the expected probability of a big win, and crack animation data is created based on the determined numerical values. Based on the created crack animation data, an animation display of a glass plate cracking may be displayed.

(Example of crack pattern display)
Next, based on Figures 86 to 92, we will explain in detail the display examples of crack patterns A to G. Figure 86 shows display examples of crack pattern A with and without a whiteout image. Figure 87 shows display examples of crack pattern B with and without a whiteout image. Figure 88 shows display examples of crack pattern C with and without a whiteout image. Figure 89 shows display examples of crack pattern D with and without a whiteout image. Figure 90 shows display examples of crack pattern E with and without a whiteout image. Figure 91 shows display examples of crack pattern F with and without a whiteout image. Figure 92 shows display examples of crack pattern G with and without a whiteout image.

In Figures 86 to 92, (A1) to (A5) are examples of crack patterns displayed with the whiteout image 006SG303, while (B1) to (B5) are examples of crack patterns corresponding to (A1) to (A5), but without the whiteout image 006SG303. In other words, these figures compare the cases where the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed and not displayed at the start of the crack effect. Specifically, in (A1) of each figure, the transmittance of the whiteout image 006SG303 is set to 0%, and the transmittance of the whiteout image 006SG303 gradually increases in the order of (A1), (A2), and (A3), reaching 100% in (A4).

As shown in (B1) to (B5) of Figures 86 to 92, in the animation display of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, in the initial frame (for example, (B1)), the setting is that the breaking begins when an impact (force) is applied as if a sphere were to collide with the approximate center of the glass plate image 006SG301A from behind. Therefore, the fragments begin to scatter from the fragment image 006SG302 near the approximate center of the glass plate image 006SG301A, but the numerous fragment images 006SG302 surrounding it have not yet begun to scatter. In other words, when the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed across the entire display screen in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 that was hidden at the time of the breakage, begins to change into a broken state, numerous fragment images 006SG302 are displayed, filling almost the entire display screen. Therefore, images displayed in the display layer image rendering area below the glass plate image 006SG301A and fragment images 006SG302 become almost impossible to see.

Therefore, at the start of the cracking animation, as shown in (B1), the glass plate image 006SG301A, which was displayed to fill almost the entire display screen for several frames, changes to a cracked state and numerous fragment images 006SG302 are displayed, making it difficult to see the image that was displayed before the cracking animation started. In particular, as in cracking patterns A to D, it is still acceptable when the cracking animation starts after the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in a cracked state. However, as in cracking patterns E to G, when the cracking animation starts abruptly without the glass plate image 006SG301A being displayed in a cracked state, the glass plate image 006SG301A, which was displayed to fill the display screen, suddenly changes to a cracked state and numerous fragment images 006SG302 are displayed, seemingly erasing the image that was displayed before the cracking animation started. This may give the player a more unnatural impression.

Therefore, at the beginning of the cracking process, as shown in the early whiteout display period of (A1), displaying the whiteout image 006SG303 in the display layer 7 image rendering area above the fragment image 006SG302 hides a large number of fragment images 006SG302, thereby reducing the unnatural appearance when the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed.

Furthermore, as shown in the later stages of the whiteout display in (A2) and (A3), by gradually increasing the transparency of the whiteout image 006SG303 through a fade-out display, rather than abruptly hiding it, the fragment image 006SG302 becomes visible only after it has moved somewhat away from the center of the display screen. This allows the fragment image 006SG302 to break and scatter naturally and without any unnatural appearance.

As shown in Figure 86, in crack pattern A, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area begins to crack from the center of the screen (see Figure 86(B1)), and the fragment images 006SG302 scatter radially in the X-axis direction (e.g., left-right), Y-axis direction (e.g., up-down), and Z-axis direction (e.g., forward) (see Figure 86(B2)), before falling downwards and being displayed mainly from the bottom edge out of the frame (see Figures 86(B3) to (B5)).

As shown in Figure 87, in crack pattern B, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area begins to crack from the center of the screen (see Figure 87(B1)). The fragment images 006SG302 then scatter radially in the X-axis direction (e.g., left-right), Y-axis direction (e.g., up-down), and Z-axis direction (e.g., forward) during normal motion movement (see Figure 87(B2)). Because they are less likely to fall downwards, they move radially in slow motion from the center and are displayed off-frame from the top, bottom, left, and right edges (see Figures 87(B3) to (B5)).

As shown in Figure 88, in crack pattern C, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area begins to crack from the center of the screen (see Figure 88(B1)), and the fragment images 006SG302 scatter radially in the X-axis direction (e.g., left-right), Y-axis direction (e.g., up-down), and Z-axis direction (e.g., forward) (see Figure 88(B2)), before falling downwards and being displayed mainly from the bottom edge out of the frame (see Figures 88(B3) to (B5)).

In this embodiment, a common background effect image 006SG322 is displayed as the background image when a pseudo-consecutive win animation, a weak development animation, a strong development animation A, and a cut-in animation are performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and although not specifically shown, for example, different background images with different display modes depending on the type of animation may be displayed.

As shown in Figure 89, in crack pattern D, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area begins to crack from the center of the screen (see Figure 89(B1)), and the fragment images 006SG302 scatter radially in the X-axis direction (e.g., to the right) and the Y-axis direction (e.g., to the left) (see Figure 89(B2)), before falling downwards and being displayed mainly from the bottom edge out of the frame (see Figures 89(B3) to (B5)).

As shown in Figure 90, in crack pattern E, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image rendering area begins to crack from the center of the screen (see Figure 90(B1)), and after the fragment images 006SG302 scatter radially in the X-axis direction (e.g., left and right), Y-axis direction (e.g., up and down), and Z-axis direction (e.g., forward) during normal motion movement (see Figure 90(B2)), they fall downwards during slow motion movement and are mainly displayed off-frame from the bottom edge (see Figures 90(B3) to (B5)). Note that the value of the "viscosity" parameter in crack pattern E is adjusted to "0.4", which corresponds to the value in Figures 90(B3) to (B5). More specifically, the value of the "viscosity" parameter corresponding to Figures 90(B1) and (B2) is adjusted to "0.1". Furthermore, in Figure 90(B1), the movable body 32 is intentionally omitted to make the beginning of the crack in the glass plate image 006SG301A easier to see. Also, the fragment image 006SG302 in crack pattern E is displayed moving in slow motion from Figure 90(B3), and since it takes time for it to appear out of frame, to avoid disrupting the tempo of the performance, the Super Reach α performance may be performed by whiteout while the fragment image 006SG302 is visible to the player in slow motion.

As shown in Figure 91, in crack pattern F, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area begins to crack from the center of the screen (see Figure 91(B1)). During normal motion movement, the fragment images 006SG302 scatter radially in the X-axis direction (e.g., to the right) and Y-axis direction (e.g., to the left) (see Figure 91(B2)). Then, during slow motion movement, they fall downwards, mainly from the bottom edge, and are displayed out of frame (see Figures 91(B3) to (B5)). Furthermore, smaller fragment images 006SG302 fall earlier and are displayed out of frame because they move and rotate faster, while larger, heavier fragment images 006SG302 are slower and are displayed out of frame later than the smaller fragment images 006SG302.

Furthermore, if a cracking effect occurs during a strong S-reach animation, the reduced decorative symbol in the upper right corner of the reach animation display screen may be temporarily hidden and redisplayed when the fragment image 006SG302 in the cracking effect becomes hidden. This minimizes the display of elements unrelated to the cracking effect, thereby enhancing its visual impact. Additionally, this method may be applied not only to strong S-reach animations but also to other reach animations, such as weak S-reach animations, if a cracking effect occurs during their execution. The reduced decorative symbol in the reach animation may be temporarily hidden and redisplayed when the fragment image 006SG302 in the cracking effect becomes hidden.

As shown in Figure 92, in crack pattern G, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the Layer 5 image rendering area begins to crack from the center of the screen (see Figure 92(B1)). The fragment images 006SG302 then scatter radially in the X-axis direction (e.g., left-right), Y-axis direction (e.g., up-down), and Z-axis direction (e.g., forward) during normal motion movement (see Figure 92(B2)). Because they are less likely to fall downwards, they move radially in slow motion from the center and are displayed off-frame from the top, bottom, left, and right edges (see Figures 92(B3) to (B5)). Note that the "viscosity" parameter value in crack pattern G is adjusted to "0.1," which corresponds to Figures 92(B1) and (B2). More specifically, the "viscosity" parameter value corresponding to Figures 92(B3) to (B5) is adjusted to "0.4."

(Details of the fragment images)
Next, the details of the fragment images will be explained based on Figures 93 and 94. Figure 93 shows the fragment images displayed in (A) the pseudo-consecutive effect and (B) the cut-in effect. Figure 94 shows the fragment images displayed in (A) the background change effect A and (B) the strong development effect B. In Figure 94, the fragment images shown with dotted lines indicate that they are not displayed.

As shown in Figure 93(A), the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the pseudo-consecutive effect is an opaque image (e.g., 0% transparency) that makes it difficult to recognize at least a portion of the superimposed background effect image 006SG322. In contrast, as shown in Figure 93(B), the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect is a transparent image (e.g., 100% transparency) that allows recognition of at least a portion of the superimposed background effect image 006SG322 and the text image 006SG307. This allows for the creation of distinctly different impressions even in effects where the same fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 93(B), in the cut-in effect, the display mode of the fragment images is varied for each effect. This allows for different display modes for each effect, thereby enhancing the effect of each effect.

Next, as shown in Figure 94(A), in background change effect A, all fragment images 006SG302 are hidden by moving downwards toward the outside of the display screen of the image display device 5 and appearing out of frame. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 94(B), in strong development effect B, the first fragment image 006SG302 is hidden by moving up, down, left, and right toward the outside of the display screen and appearing out of frame. The second fragment image 006SG302, which is different from the first fragment image 006SG302, is hidden before moving toward the outside of the display screen of the image display device 5. This creates a difference in how the fragment images 006SG302 are presented between background change effect A and strong development effect B, thereby enhancing the viewing experience.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 94(A), when the fragment image 006SG302 rotates to a first angle (for example, a large angle where the angle of incidence of the irradiated light on the glass surface is between 45 and 90 degrees, such as when the plane faces the front), it becomes possible to recognize at least a portion of the background image superimposed on the fragment image 006SG302. When the fragment image 006SG302 rotates to a second angle smaller than the first angle (for example, a small angle where the angle of incidence of the irradiated light on the glass surface is less than 45 degrees, such as when the end face faces the front), it becomes difficult to recognize at least a portion of the background image superimposed on the fragment image 006SG302. This enhances the visual effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 94(A), when the first fragment image among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 is at a first angle, the second fragment image is at a second angle, thereby enhancing the visual effect when the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed.

(Effects of each form)
[Form 1-1]
As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, special symbols and decorative symbols are displayed variably, and when a combination of symbols corresponding to a jackpot is derived as a result of the variable display of these special symbols and decorative symbols, it is possible to control the machine to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player. Furthermore, the pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5 for displaying images, and a performance control CPU 120 which is a control means for executing performances that suggest that the machine is controlled to a jackpot game state during variable display, such as a first consecutive break performance, a second consecutive break performance, a dialogue予告 performance, a background change performance A, a background change performance B, a pseudo-consecutive performance, a reach suggestion performance, a weak development performance, a strong development performance A, a strong development performance B, a cut-in performance, a result notification performance, etc. In addition, as shown in Figures 3 to 5, the pachinko game machine 1 has layer 1 to layer 10 image drawing areas in the VRAM area of the display control unit 123 for drawing images to be displayed on the image display device 5, each for drawing images with different display priorities.

For example, the VRAM area consists of a Layer 1 image rendering area for rendering and arranging background images, a Layer 2 image rendering area for rendering and arranging decorative patterns as Layer 2 images, a Layer 3 image rendering area for rendering and arranging object images such as characters as Layer 3 images, a Layer 4 image rendering area for rendering and arranging crack warning images (glass plate image 006SG301, etc.) as Layer 4 images, a Layer 5 image rendering area for rendering and arranging glass plate image 006SG301A and fragment image 006SG302 (glass fragments, etc.) as Layer 5 images, and a Layer 6 The layer includes a Layer 6 image drawing area for drawing and arranging action effect images, a Layer 7 image drawing area for drawing and arranging the whiteout image 006SG303, a Layer 8 image drawing area for drawing and arranging operation prompt images, a Layer 9 image drawing area for drawing and arranging variable display compatible displays (hold display and active display), and a Layer 10 image drawing area for drawing and arranging small symbols (fourth symbol), the first hold memory count, the second hold memory count, and right-hand shooting notification images. Furthermore, a Layer 11 image drawing area for drawing and arranging error displays may also be included.

Furthermore, unless the Layer 11 image rendering area is further allocated in the VRAM area, the image rendered in the Layer 10 image rendering area has the highest display priority in the image display device 5, the image rendered in the Layer 9 image rendering area has a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than the image rendered in the Layer 10 image rendering area, the image rendered in the Layer 8 image rendering area has a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than the image rendered in the Layer 9 image rendering area, the image rendered in the Layer 7 image rendering area has a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than the image rendered in the Layer 8 image rendering area, and the image rendered in the Layer 6 image rendering area has a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than the image rendered in the Layer 7 image rendering area. Images are of lower quality, and images drawn in the Layer 5 image drawing area have a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than images drawn in the Layer 6 image drawing area, images drawn in the Layer 4 image drawing area have a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than images drawn in the Layer 5 image drawing area, images drawn in the Layer 3 image drawing area have a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than images drawn in the Layer 4 image drawing area, images drawn in the Layer 2 image drawing area have a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than images drawn in the Layer 3 image drawing area, and images drawn in the Layer 1 image drawing area have a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than images drawn in the Layer 2 image drawing area. Furthermore, although it has been explained that there is a Layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging background images, instead of the Layer 1 image drawing area, there may be a Layer 1-1 image drawing area, a Layer 1-2 image drawing area, and a Layer 1-3 image drawing area. In this case, the Layer 1-1 image drawing area can display normal background images (first background image 006SG081, sixth background image), the Layer 1-2 image drawing area can display chance background images (second background image 006SG082, seventh background image), normal reach background image, super reach α background image (weak S reach effect image 006SG088), super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084), and the Layer 1-3 image drawing area can display background effect images (background effect image 006SG322) and jackpot notification background images. An image (fifth background image 006SG085) can be drawn. Images drawn in the Layer 1-3 image drawing area have a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than images drawn in the Layer 2 image drawing area. Images drawn in the Layer 1-2 image drawing area have a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than images drawn in the Layer 1-3 image drawing area. Images drawn in the Layer 1-1 image drawing area have a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than images drawn in the Layer 1-2 image drawing area.

Here, as shown in Figures 44 to 47, background change effect A and strong development effect A are effects that can be executed at different times. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 74, background change effect A has a crack display period in which cracks are displayed when a character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a fragment image display period in which the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, breaks and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed. As shown in Figure 79, strong development effect A is an effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in a shorter period than in the background change effect due to the operation of the movable body 32.

Furthermore, background change effect A is an effect that causes the background image displayed on the image display device 5 to be different before the crack is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 and after the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks and the display of the fragment image 006SG302 begins. Strong development effect A is an effect that causes the background image displayed on the image display device 5 to be different before the strong development effect A is executed and after the display of the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect A begins. In other words, in this embodiment, the background change effect A, which displays cracks and fragment images 006SG302 in the display area of the image display device 5, and the strong development effect A, which displays fragment images 006SG302 without cracks being displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301, can be executed at different timings. This allows for surprising the player at various timings. Furthermore, since the type of background image displayed before and after the display of fragment images 006SG302 differs in both background change effect A and strong development effect A, even though both effects display fragment images 006SG302, they can give the player suitably different impressions, enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 1-2]
Furthermore, if background change effect A and strong development effect A are made executable during variable display 1, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot state may be higher when background change effect A is not executed but strong development effect A is executed than when background change effect A is executed and strong development effect A is executed (see, for example, Figures 44 to 47). By doing so, attention can be drawn to the execution status of background change effect A and strong development effect A, thereby increasing the excitement.

[Form 1-3]
Furthermore, when the background image changes from a normal background image (first background image 006SG081) to a chance background image (second background image 006SG082), in addition to the case where the background image changes via background change effect A, there may also be a case where the background image changes via a chance background prompting effect different from background change effect A (Figure 41). Also, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot state may be higher when the background image changes from a normal background image (first background image 006SG081) to a chance background image (second background image 006SG082) via background change effect A than when the background image changes from a normal background image (first background image 006SG081) to a chance background image (second background image 006SG082) via the chance background prompting effect. In this way, attention can be drawn to whether the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) is displayed via background change effect A or the chance background prompting effect, thereby increasing the excitement.

[Form 1-4-1]
Furthermore, if background change effect A and strong development effect A are made executable during the variable display of 1, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot state may be higher when background change effect A is executed before strong development effect A than when background change effect A is not executed before strong development effect A (see, for example, Figures 44 to 47). By doing so, the excitement can be enhanced by making the player anticipate that both background change effect A and strong development effect A will be executed during the variable display of 1.

[Form 1-4-2]
As shown in Figures 74 and 79, during variable display, background change effect A is an effect that is executed before the reach timing of the decorative symbols, while strong development effect A is an effect that is executed after the reach timing of the decorative symbols. Furthermore, the images displayed as background images in the display area of the image display device 5 include a normal background image (first background image 006SG081), a chance background image (second background image 006SG082) that suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot state before the reach, a super reach α background image (weak S reach effect image 006SG088) that indicates that the reach effect of super reach α is being executed, and a super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) that indicates that the reach effect of super reach β is being executed. Furthermore, the fragment image 006SG302 in background change effect A is displayed together with the chance background image (second background image 006SG082), and the fragment image 006SG302 in strong development effect A is displayed together with the super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084). Therefore, the relationship between these background change effect A and strong development effect A can draw the player's attention and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 1-4-3]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 70 and 71, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in background change effect A is transparent, so the player can recognize at least a part of the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) which is superimposed on the fragment image 006SG302 through the fragment image 006SG302. In contrast, the background image displayed in strong development effect A is not transparent, so the player cannot recognize at least a part of the super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) which is superimposed on the fragment image 006SG302 through the fragment image 006SG302. Thus, the display of the fragment image 006SG302 in background change effect A and the effect of strong development effect A can be enhanced.

[Form 1-4-4]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 100, when the fragment image 006SG302 is rotated, the player may be able to recognize at least a part of the background image through the fragment image 006SG302 when the fragment image 006SG302 is at a first angle due to the rotation, while it may be difficult for the player to recognize at least a part of the background image through the fragment image 006SG302 when the fragment image 006SG302 is at a second angle due to the rotation. By doing so, the visual effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be enhanced.

[Form 1-4-5]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 100, when rotating the fragment image 006SG302, the second fragment image 006SG302 may be positioned at a second angle when the first fragment image 006SG302 is at a first angle. This enhances the visual effect when displaying the fragment image 006SG302.

[Form 1-5]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 95, when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in a manner that moves in multiple directions, including the X-axis and Z-axis directions, the time required for the fragment image 006SG302 moving in the Z-axis direction to disappear from the display area of the image display device 5 may be made longer than the time required for the fragment image 006SG302 moving in the X-axis direction. By doing so, the visual effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be enhanced.

[Form 1-6]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 83, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in strong development effect A are both displayed moving without any change in speed from the start to the end of display. Therefore, the fragment image 006SG302 can be displayed naturally and without any sense of incongruity in these background change effect A and strong development effect A.

[Form 1-7-1]
The fragment image 006SG302 in background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 in strong development effect A are both displayed in a manner that moves in multiple directions, including at least a predetermined direction (e.g., the X-axis direction) and a specific direction (e.g., the Z-axis direction) (see Figures 86 and 91). The time required for the fragment image 006SG302 in background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 in strong development effect A to disappear from the display screen is the same, thereby increasing the relationship between background change effect A and strong development effect A and enhancing the effects of both.

[Form 1-7-2]
The fragment image 006SG302, which is displayed moving in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction), has different visibility when it is first displayed and before it disappears from view on the display screen (see Figures 86 and 91). Specifically, it is difficult to see when it is first displayed and easy to see before it disappears, thereby enhancing the visual effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form 1-7-3]
By making it so that the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed moving in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction) takes longer to disappear from the display screen in the background change effect A than the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed moving in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction), the fragment image 006SG302 can be displayed more naturally.

[Form 1-8]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 100, when the fragment image 006SG302 is rotated in background change effect A and strong development effect A, the number of rotations from when the first fragment image 006SG302 among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the image display device 5 in background change effect A may be the same as the number of rotations from when the second fragment image 006SG302 among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the image display device 5 in strong development effect A. By doing so, the relationship between background change effect A and strong development effect A is increased, and the effects of both effects can be enhanced.

[Form 2-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 74 and 79, in both background change effect A and strong development effect A, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed from the moment the display of the fragment image 006SG302 begins. The display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 in these background change effect A and strong development effect A consists of an early whiteout display period in which the player cannot see the fragment image 006SG302 through the whiteout image 006SG303, and a late whiteout display period in which the player can see the fragment image 006SG302 through the whiteout image 006SG303. This allows background change effect A and strong development effect A to be executed at different timings, providing surprises to the player at various times. In addition, it reduces the sense of incongruity when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed by the whiteout image 006SG303, allowing these background change effect A and strong development effect to be executed more effectively.

[Form 2-2]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 74 and 79, the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 in background change effect A (early whiteout display period and late whiteout display period) is 1000 ms, whereas the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 in strong development effect A (early whiteout display period and late whiteout display period) is 2500 ms. Therefore, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 increases the connection between background change effect A and strong development effect A, and because the display periods of the whiteout image 006SG303 differ between background change effect A and strong development effect A, the effects of both background change effect A and strong development effect A can be enhanced.

[Form 2-3]
Furthermore, with respect to the background change effect A shown in Figure 74, the crack display period may be longer than the fragment image display period in the background change effect A, and the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 (the early whiteout display period and the late whiteout display period) may be shorter than the crack display period and the fragment image display period. In this way, the display of the fragment image 006SG302 can be started without any sense of incongruity by the whiteout image 006SG303.

[Form 2-4]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 56 and 63, the whiteout image 006SG303 displayed from the start of display timing of the fragment image 006SG302 in background change effect A and the whiteout image 006SG303 displayed from the start of display timing of the fragment image 006SG302 in strong development effect A are images displayed in the same manner. Therefore, the relationship between background change effect A and strong development effect A, in which the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed in the same manner, can be enhanced, thereby increasing the effect of both effects.

[Form 3-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 76 and 81, the pseudo-consecutive display and the cut-in display in this embodiment are displays with different execution timings in the variable display, so it is possible to surprise the player at various timings during the variable display. Moreover, as shown in Figure 83, the fragment image 006SG302 in the pseudo-consecutive display moves and is displayed at speed V1 regardless of the progress of the display, while the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in display changes speed from speed V1 to a slower speed V0 in accordance with the progress of the display. Therefore, even though the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the same display, it is possible to give the player a suitably different impression, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 3-2]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 44 to 47, if the variable display allows for multiple executions of the pseudo-consecutive performance while the cut-in performance can only be executed once, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot state is higher when the pseudo-consecutive performance is executed multiple times than when the pseudo-consecutive performance is executed only once, and the probability of being controlled to a jackpot state is higher when the cut-in performance is executed only once than when the pseudo-consecutive performance is executed multiple times. By doing so, attention can be drawn to the execution status of the pseudo-consecutive performance and the cut-in performance, thereby increasing the excitement.

[Form 3-3]
In the pseudo-consecutive-shot sequence, a whiteout image 006SG303 (an effect image of a specific color) can be displayed in common at the first timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 transitions from a cracked state to a broken state (glass plate image 006SG301A), and at the second timing when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the cut-in sequence. The display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 differs between the first and second timings. Specifically, at the first timing, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed spreading from the center of the display screen outwards, while at the second timing, it is displayed across the entire display screen (see Figures 59(C) and 66(C)). This allows for a difference in the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 between the pseudo-consecutive-shot sequence and the cut-in sequence, enhancing the overall entertainment value.

[Form 3-4-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 83, the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect is displayed at speed V1 during the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 (early whiteout display period and late whiteout display period), and from the moment the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends, it is displayed at speed V0, which is slower than speed V1. This enhances the effect of displaying the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect.

[Form 3-4-2]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 81, when displaying the fragment image 006SG302 in a cut-in animation and displaying the whiteout image 006SG303, as shown in Figure 83, the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 may overlap with the period during which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed moving at speed V1, but may not overlap with the period during which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed moving at speed V0. Doing so can prevent a decrease in the effectiveness of the cut-in animation.

[Form 3-5]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 100, when the fragment image 006SG302 in the pseudo-consecutive effect and the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect are made rotatable, the number of rotations performed from the time the first fragment image 006SG302 among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 in the pseudo-consecutive effect is displayed until it disappears from the display area of the image display device 5 may be greater than the number of rotations performed from the time the second fragment image 006SG302 among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 in the cut-in effect is displayed until it disappears from the display area of the image display device 5. By doing so, the effect of the effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be enhanced.

[Form 4-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 76 and 81, the pseudo-consecutive spin animation and the cut-in animation in this embodiment are animations with different execution timings in the variable display, so it is possible to surprise the player at various timings during the variable display. Moreover, as shown in Figures 70 and 71, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as pseudo-consecutive spin animations are not transparent, so the player cannot see the background image displayed on the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302, whereas the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as cut-in animations are transparent, so the player can see the background image displayed on the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302. Therefore, even though the pseudo-consecutive spin animation and the cut-in animation both display the same fragment images 006SG302, they give the player a suitably different impression, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 4-2]
In the pseudo-consecutive effect, the first fragment image 006SG302 among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 is a transparent image that allows recognition of at least a portion of the background effect image 006SG322, the second fragment image 006SG302 is a transparent image that allows recognition of at least a portion of the text image 006SG307, and in the cut-in effect, the third fragment image 006SG302 among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 is a transparent image that allows recognition of at least a portion of the background effect image 006SG322 and at least a portion of the text image 006SG307 (see Figure 93). By changing the display mode of the fragment image 006SG302 for each effect in this way, the effect of each effect can be enhanced.

[Form 4-3-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 100, when the fragment image 006SG302 in the pseudo-consecutive effect and the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect are made rotatable, if the rotation brings the first fragment image 006SG302 to a first angle, it becomes possible to recognize at least a portion of the background image superimposed on the fragment image 006SG302. If the rotation brings the first fragment image 006SG302 to a second angle, it may become difficult to recognize at least a portion of the background image superimposed on the fragment image 006SG302. In this way, the effect of the effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be enhanced.

[Form 4-3-2]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 100, when the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect is rotatable, the cut-in effect may be such that when the first fragment image 006SG302 among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 is at a first angle, the second fragment image 006SG302 among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 is at a second angle. By doing so, the effect of the effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be enhanced.

[Form 5-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 76 and 81, the pseudo-consecutive win animation and the cut-in animation in this embodiment are animations with different execution timings in the variable display, so it is possible to surprise the player at various timings during the variable display. Furthermore, regarding these pseudo-consecutive effects and cut-in effects, the cut-in effect is designed to start displaying multiple fragment images 006SG302 for a shorter period than the crack display period in the pseudo-consecutive effect, from when a crack appears on the glass plate image 006SG301 until a fragment image 006SG302, which imitates at least a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, is displayed. The fragment images 006SG302 in the pseudo-consecutive effect and the fragment images 006SG302 in the cut-in effect are both displayed in a manner that moves in multiple directions, including at least the X-axis and Z-axis directions (see Figure 95). The fragment images 006SG302 displayed in a manner that moves in the Z-axis direction may take longer to disappear from the display area of the image display device 5 than the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in a manner that moves in the X-axis direction.

[Form 5-2]
The fragment image 006SG302, which is displayed moving in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction), has different visibility when it is first displayed and before it disappears from view on the display screen (see Figures 88 and 92). Specifically, it is difficult to see when it is first displayed and easy to see before it disappears, thereby enhancing the visual effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form 5-3]
By making it so that the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed moving in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction) takes longer to disappear from the display screen in the background change effect A than the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed moving in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction), the fragment image 006SG302 can be displayed more naturally.

[Form 5-4]
In the pseudo-consecutive animation, all of the fragment images 006SG302 are hidden in a manner that moves away from the display screen (see, for example, Figure 94(A)), and in the cut-in animation, the first fragment image 006SG302 is hidden in a manner that moves away from the display screen, and the second fragment image 006SG302, which is different from the first fragment image 006SG302, is preferably hidden before moving away from the display screen (see, for example, Figure 94(B)). By doing so, it is possible to create a difference in how the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed in the pseudo-consecutive animation and the cut-in animation, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 6-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 77 and 78, the reach suggestion effect and the weak development effect in this embodiment are effects with different execution timings in the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various timings during the variable display. Moreover, for these reach suggestion effect and weak development effect, the right crack display period in the reach suggestion effect may be longer than the preceding operation period in the weak development effect, and the length of the fragment image display period in the reach suggestion effect and the fragment image display period in the weak development effect may be different (see Figures 77 and 78). In this way, even if the effects display the same fragment image 006SG302, they can give suitably different impressions and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 6-2]
Furthermore, in the reach indication sequence, the period for displaying the right crack may be longer than the period from the left crack display sequence until the right crack display sequence begins (see Figure 77). Doing so prevents the reach indication sequence from becoming less interesting due to a monotonous sequence structure.

[Form 6-3]
Furthermore, in this embodiment, the reach indication performance can be executed in a successful pattern in which the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks after the crack is displayed, or in a failure pattern in which the glass plate image 006SG301A does not break as the glass plate image 006SG301A does not break after the crack is displayed. When the reach indication performance is executed in the failure pattern, the crack is displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R and the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L for a period of 6000ms, which is longer than the display period of 2000ms of the fragment image 006SG302 (fragment image display period) when the reach indication performance is executed in the successful pattern. This allows the player to be shown that the reach indication performance will not be executed in the successful pattern, that is, that the glass plate image 006SG301A will not break.

[Form 6-4-1]
Furthermore, while the reach-indicating effect, when executed in a successful pattern, notifies the player that a reach will occur, when executed in a failed pattern, it indicates that a reach will not occur, meaning that the probability of being controlled to a jackpot state is lower than when a reach occurs. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the reach-indicating effect is executed and whether or not it is executed in a successful pattern, thereby increasing the excitement of the game.

[Form 6-4-2]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 44 to 47, when both a reach suggestion effect and a weak development effect can be executed during the variable display of 1, the weak development effect may be made executable after the display of the fragment image 006SG302 in the reach suggestion effect has started, and the probability of being controlled to a jackpot state is higher when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 in the reach suggestion effect starts before the execution of the weak development effect than when it does not. By doing so, attention can be drawn to the display of the fragment image 006SG302 in the reach suggestion effect, thereby increasing the excitement.

[Form 6-5]
In the reach-indicating演出 (reach suggestion effect), a whiteout image 006SG303 (an effect image of a specific color) can be displayed in common at the first timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 transitions from a cracked state to a shattered state, and at the second timing when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the weak development effect. The display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 differs between the first and second timings. Specifically, at the first timing, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed so as to spread from the center of the display screen outwards, while at the second timing, it is displayed across the entire display screen (see Figures 60(G) and 62(D)). This allows for a difference in the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 between the reach-indicating effect and the weak development effect, thereby increasing the excitement.

[Form 6-6]
In the reach indication演出 (reach suggestion effect), it is possible to highlight the decorative symbols in the reach state, and by making the period during which the reach state symbols are highlighted longer than the display period of the fragment image 006SG302 (see Figures 61(I) to 61(K)), it is possible to suitably indicate that the reach state has been reached.

[Form 6-7-1]
In the reach indication effect, the motion effect image 006SG323 can be displayed in the layer 6 image rendering area, which is higher than the fragment image 006SG302, in response to the movement of the character image 006SG305. By displaying the motion effect image 006SG323 at the same time as the display of the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 begins (see Figure 60(D)), the glass plate image 006SG301 can be changed to a cracked state without any sense of incongruity.

[Form 6-7-2]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 77, in the reach suggestion effect, depending on the character's actions, the timing at which a crack appears in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L of the glass plate image 006SG301, and the display of the small fragment image 006SG302A from the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R of the glass plate image 006SG301 for a longer period than the operation effect image 006SG323, allows for a favorable indication to the player that a crack has appeared in the glass plate image 006SG301.

[Form 6-7-3]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 77, in the reach suggestion effect, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 begins when the character acts on the "center" decorative pattern display area 5C in the glass plate image 006SG301. However, the motion effect image 006SG323 is not displayed when the character acts on the "center" decorative pattern display area 5C in the glass plate image 006SG301. Therefore, depending on the character's action, there is a difference in the presentation of the reach suggestion effect depending on whether cracks are displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L or the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R in the glass plate image 006SG301 or whether the character acts on the "center" decorative pattern display area 5C in the glass plate image 006SG301, thus preventing the reach suggestion effect from becoming monotonous.

[Form 6-7-4]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 77, in the reach suggestion effect, the period during which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed (fragment image display period) is longer than the period during which the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed (minor fragment image display period). This allows for a difference in the presentation of the reach suggestion effect between when cracks are displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L and the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R of the glass plate image 006SG301 and when the character interacts with the "center" decorative pattern display area 5C of the glass plate image 006SG301, thus preventing the reach suggestion effect from becoming monotonous.

[Form 6-8]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 70 and 71, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as a reach suggestion effect are transparent, allowing players to see the background image through these fragment images 006SG302. On the other hand, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as a weak development effect are not transparent, preventing players from seeing at least a portion of the background image through these fragment images 006SG302. This allows for differences in the display of the fragment images 006SG302 between reach suggestion effects and weak development effects, thereby enhancing the player's enjoyment.

[Form 6-9]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 83, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a reach suggestion effect and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a weak development effect both move and are displayed without changing speed from the start of display to the end of display. Therefore, these fragment images 006SG302 can be displayed naturally in the reach suggestion effect and the weak development effect.

[Form 6-10]
Furthermore, the display period for fragment images in the weak development sequence may be longer than the display period for fragment images in the reach suggestion sequence (see Figures 77 and 78). By doing so, differences can be created between the reach suggestion sequence and the weak development sequence, and the entertainment value can be enhanced through a variety of presentations.

[Form 7-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 74 and 81, the background change effect A and the cut-in effect of this embodiment are effects that have different execution timings in the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various timings during the variable display. Moreover, as shown in Figure 81, when the cut-in effect is executed, first, as an operation prompting effect, an image of the state before operation of the push button 31B is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and the cut-in effect is executed when the push button 31B is operated by the player or when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks. During the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303, the image of the state after operation of the push button 31B is displayed with priority over the whiteout image 006SG303. Here, the display period for the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in animation is 2500ms, the display period for the image of the push button 31B before operation is 3000ms, and the display period for the image of the push button 31B after operation is 1000ms, the same as the display period for the whiteout image 006SG303. In other words, the display period for the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in animation (cut-in image display period) is shorter than the display period for the image of the push button 31B before operation (pre-operation image display period), and longer than the display period for the image of the push button 31B after operation (post-operation image display period). This prevents the cut-in animation from becoming monotonous and reducing its appeal.

[Form 8-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 74 and 76, the background change effect A and the pseudo-consecutive effect of this embodiment are effects with different execution timings in the variable display, so that players can be surprised at various timings during the variable display. Background change effect A is an effect in which the background image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 is different before the crack display period and during the fragment image display period. Furthermore, the pseudo-consecutive effect may be an effect in which the combination of decorative symbols displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 is different before the crack display period and during the fragment image display period (for example, before the crack display period the decorative symbols temporarily stop in a random combination, but after the start of display of the fragment image 006SG302 the decorative symbols temporarily stop in a combination corresponding to the pseudo-consecutive effect). In this way, even if the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the same effect, it is possible to give a suitably different impression and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 8-2]
Furthermore, regarding the background change effect A and the pseudo-continuous effect shown in Figures 74 and 76, if it is possible to display the first stage of cracks on the glass plate image 006SG301 and then change the first stage of cracks to the second stage of cracks, the length of the period during which the first stage of cracks changes to the second stage of cracks in the background change effect A and the length of the period during which the first stage of cracks changes to the second stage of cracks in the pseudo-continuous effect may be different. By doing so, the effect of the effect when displaying cracks on the glass plate image 006SG301 can be enhanced.

[Form 9-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 74 and 76, the background change effect A and the pseudo-consecutive effect of this embodiment are effects with different execution timings in the variable display, so it is possible to surprise the player at various timings during the variable display. Moreover, the period during which cracks are displayed in background change effect A (crack display period) is 2000 ms, while the period during which cracks are displayed in the pseudo-consecutive effect (crack display period) is 1500 ms, so the lengths are different. In both the background change effect A and the pseudo-consecutive display effect, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 begins at the same time as the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 begins. The display period of these whiteout images 006SG303 consists of an early whiteout display period in which the player cannot see the fragment image 006SG302 due to the whiteout image 006SG303, and a later whiteout display period in which the player can see the fragment image 006SG302. This reduces the sense of incongruity when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, allowing the background change effect A and the pseudo-consecutive display effect to be executed effectively.

[Form 9-2]
Furthermore, with respect to the background change effect A and the pseudo-continuous effect shown in Figures 74 and 76, if it is possible to display the first stage of cracks on the glass plate image 006SG301 and then change the first stage of cracks to the second stage of cracks, the length of the period during which the first stage of cracks changes to the second stage of cracks in the background change effect A and the length of the period during which the first stage of cracks changes to the second stage of cracks in the pseudo-continuous effect may be different. By doing so, the effect of the effect when displaying cracks on the glass plate image 006SG301 can be enhanced.

[Form 10-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 74 and 80, the background change effect A and the strong development effect B of this embodiment are effects with different execution timings in the variable display, so that players can be surprised at various timings during the variable display. Moreover, as shown in Figure 83, the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A is displayed moving without changing speed from the start to the end of the display, while the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect B is displayed moving at speed V1 from the start to the end of the display of the whiteout image 006SG303, and the transition is displayed moving at a slower speed V0 than speed V1. Therefore, even though the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the same effect, it can give a suitably different impression and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 10-2]
In background change effect A, a whiteout image 006SG303 (an effect image of a specific color) can be displayed in both the first timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 transitions from a cracked state to a shattered state, and the second timing when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in strong development effect B. The display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 differs between the first and second timings. Specifically, in the first timing, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen, while in the second timing, it is displayed spreading from the center of the display screen outwards (see Figures 56(G) and 64(H)). This creates a difference in the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 between background change effect A and strong development effect B, thereby enhancing the entertainment value.

[Form 10-3-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 83, the period during which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at speed V0 in the strong development effect B is longer than the period during which it is displayed at speed V1. Therefore, it is possible to create a difference in how the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed between the background change effect A and the strong development effect B, thereby increasing the level of interest.

[Form 10-3-2]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 83, the period during which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at speed V1 in the strong development sequence B is the same as the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303. Since the whiteout image 006SG303 is not displayed during the period when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at speed V0, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the effect of the strong development sequence B.

[Form 10-4]
In background change effect A, all of the fragment images 006SG302 are hidden in a manner that moves away from the display screen (see Figure 94(A)), and in strong development effect B, the first fragment image 006SG302 is hidden in a manner that moves away from the display screen, and the second fragment image 006SG302, which is different from the first fragment image 006SG302, is hidden before moving away from the display screen (see Figure 94(B)). In this way, the way the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed is made different between background change effect A and strong development effect B, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 10-5]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 70 and 71, since both the fragment image 006SG302 in background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 in strong development effect B are transparent images, the effect of displaying the fragment image 006SG302 can be enhanced.

[Form 10-6-1]
The fragment image 006SG302 in background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 in strong development effect B are both displayed in a manner that moves in multiple directions, including at least a predetermined direction (e.g., the X-axis direction) and a specific direction (e.g., the Z-axis direction) (see Figures 86 and 87). It is preferable that the time required for the fragment image 006SG302 in background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 in strong development effect B to disappear from the display screen is the same. By doing so, the relationship between background change effect A and strong development effect B is enhanced, and the effects of both effects can be improved.

[Form 10-6-2]
It is preferable that the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302, which is displayed moving in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction), differs between the time the display starts and the time before it disappears from view on the display screen (see Figures 86 and 87). Specifically, it is preferable that the fragment image 006SG302 is difficult to see when the display starts and easy to see before it disappears, thereby enhancing the visual effect when it is displayed.

[Form 10-7-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 100, when rotating the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in strong development effect B, the number of rotations performed from the time the first fragment image 006SG302 among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 displayed in background change effect A is displayed until it is no longer visible in the display area of the image display device 5 may be greater than the number of rotations performed from the time the second fragment image 006SG302 among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 displayed in strong development effect is displayed until it is no longer visible in the display area of the image display device 5. By doing so, the effect of the display when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be enhanced.

[Form 10-7-2]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 100, when the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in strong development effect B are rotated, if the fragment image 006SG302 reaches a first angle due to the rotation, it may be possible to make it possible to recognize at least a part of the background image that is superimposed on the fragment image 006SG302, and if the fragment image 006SG302 reaches a second angle due to the rotation, it may be possible to make it difficult to recognize at least a part of the background image that is superimposed on the fragment image 006SG302. In this way, the effect of the display of the fragment image 006SG302 can be enhanced.

[Form 10-7-3]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 100, when rotating the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in strong development effect B, when the first fragment image 006SG302 is at a first angle, the second fragment image 006SG302 among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 may be at a second angle. In this way, when the first fragment image 006SG302 is at a first angle, the second fragment image 006SG302 among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 will be at a second angle.

[Form 10-8]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 44 to 47, if both background change effect A and strong development effect B are possible during the variable display of 1, the background change effect may be made possible at the timing before the reach, and strong development effect B at the timing after the reach, and the probability of being controlled to a jackpot state is higher when background change effect A is performed before strong development effect B is performed than when it is not performed. By doing so, attention can be drawn to the execution of background change effect A, and the excitement can be enhanced.

[Form 10-9]
Furthermore, with respect to the background change effect A and the strong development effect B shown in Figures 74 and 80, if it is possible to display the first stage of cracks on the glass plate image 006SG301 and then change the first stage of cracks to the second stage of cracks, the length of the period during which the first stage of cracks changes to the second stage of cracks in background change effect A and the length of the period during which the first stage of cracks changes to the second stage of cracks in pseudo-consecutive effect may be different. By doing so, the effect of the effect when displaying cracks on the glass plate image 006SG301 can be enhanced.

[Form 11-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 74 and 76, the background change effect A and the pseudo-consecutive effect of this embodiment are effects with different execution timings in the variable display, so it is possible to surprise the player at various timings during the variable display. Moreover, as shown in Figure 70, the fragment image 006SG302 in the pseudo-consecutive effect is not transparent, while the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A is transparent. Therefore, even though the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the same effect, it is possible to give a suitably different impression and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 12-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 74 and 80, the background change effect A and the strong development effect B of this embodiment are effects with different execution timings in the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various timings during the variable display. In addition, the length of the crack display period in background change effect A and the crack display period in strong development effect B may be made different, and the fragment image 006SG302 in background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 in strong development effect B may be displayed in a manner in which they move in at least multiple directions in the X-axis direction and the Z-axis direction, so that the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed moving in the Z-axis direction takes longer to disappear from the display area of the image display device 5 than the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed moving in the Z-axis direction, and the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed moving in the Z-axis direction in strong development effect B takes longer to disappear from the display area of the image display device 5 than the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed moving in the Z-axis direction in background change effect A. In this way, even when the same fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, a suitably different impression can be given, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 13-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 74 and 77, the background change effect A and the reach suggestion effect of this embodiment are effects with different execution timings in the variable display, so it is possible to surprise the player at various timings during the variable display. Moreover, the right crack display period is 4000ms in the reach suggestion effect, while the crack display period is 2000ms in the background change effect A, and the display period (fragment image display period) of the fragment image 006SG302 in the reach suggestion effect is 1500ms, while the display period (fragment image display period) of the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A is 20000ms. As a result, even though the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the same effect, it is possible to give a suitably different impression and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 13-2]
In the first predetermined part, the glass plate image 006SG301 can be displayed in a first crack pattern in accordance with the operation of the character image 006SG305, and in the fourth predetermined part, the glass plate image 006SG301 can be changed from a third pre-crack pattern to a third crack pattern and displayed (see Figures 60 and 56), thereby enhancing the visual effect when displaying the glass plate image 006SG301 in a crack pattern.

[Form 14-1]
Furthermore, the first and second consecutive crack effects in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 72, are effects with different execution timings in the variable display, so they can surprise the player at various timings during the variable display. Moreover, the second consecutive crack effect can be executed after the first consecutive crack effect, and the length of the crack display period and the length of the fragment image display period are the same for both the first and second consecutive crack effects. When the second consecutive crack effect is executed after the first consecutive crack effect, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the first consecutive crack effect is temporarily hidden before the crack display period of the second crack effect begins. This prevents a decrease in the effect of the effect due to new cracks being displayed even though the fragment image 006SG302 is already displayed.

[Form 14-2]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 95, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the first continuous cracking effect and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the second continuous cracking effect may both be displayed in a manner that moves in multiple directions, including at least the X-axis and Z-axis directions. Moreover, the starting position for displaying the fragment image 006SG302 may differ between the first and second continuous cracking effects. By doing so, differences in how the fragment image 006SG302 is presented between the first and second continuous cracking effects can be created, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 14-3]
In both the first and second consecutive cracking effects, a character image 006SG305 (special image) can be displayed together with the fragment image 006SG302. In the first consecutive cracking effect, the character image 006SG305 is displayed in a first form (for example, a character image of Jam), while in the second consecutive cracking effect, the character image 006SG305 is displayed in a second form different from the first form (for example, a character image of Mumu) (see Figures 53(F) and 54(F)). This allows for differences in how the special image is presented between the first and second predetermined effects, thereby enhancing the entertainment value.

[Form 14-4]
Furthermore, while the length of the fragment image display period differs between the first and second cracking effects shown in Figure 72, the length of the display period for the character image 006SG305, which is displayed as a result of these first and second cracking effects, may be the same. By doing so, it is possible to create differences in how the fragment image 006SG302 is presented between the first and second cracking effects, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 14-5]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 38, in this embodiment, there are two patterns: one in which the second consecutive break effect is performed after the first consecutive break effect is performed, and another in which the second consecutive break effect is not performed after the first consecutive break effect is performed. The case in which the second consecutive break effect is performed after the first consecutive break effect has a higher probability of being controlled to a jackpot state than the case in which the second consecutive break effect is not performed after the first consecutive break effect is performed. Therefore, the performance of the second consecutive break effect can draw attention to the game and enhance its appeal.

[Form 14-6]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 83, the fragment images 006SG302 in both the first and second consecutive cracking effects are displayed moving without changing speed from the start to the end of the display, thereby increasing the connection between the first and second consecutive cracking effects and enhancing their appeal.

[Form 14-7-1]
Furthermore, for the first and second consecutive cracking effects shown in Figure 72, a white whiteout image 006SG303 can be displayed in common from the start timing of the display of the fragment image 006SG302, and the display patterns of the whiteout image 006SG303 displayed in the first consecutive cracking effect and the whiteout image 006SG303 displayed in the second consecutive cracking effect may be the same. By doing so, the relationship between the first and second consecutive cracking effects is increased, and the effect of both effects can be enhanced.

[Form 14-7-2]
Furthermore, since the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 (the early whiteout display period and the late whiteout display period) is the same for both the first and second consecutive crackling effects shown in Figure 72, the relationship between the first and second consecutive crackling effects is enhanced, and the effects of both can be improved.

[Form 15-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 74 and 82, the background change effect A and the result notification effect of this embodiment are effects with different execution timings in the variable display, so it is possible to surprise the player at various timings during the variable display. In addition, as a result notification effect when the game is not controlled to a jackpot state, a crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 in the display area of the image display device 5. The time required for the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A to disappear is different from the time required for the image with the crack on the glass plate image 006SG301 to disappear in the result notification effect when the game is not controlled to a jackpot state, so it is possible to appropriately inform the player that the game is not controlled to a jackpot state.

[Form 15-2]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 74, the fragment image 006SG302 in background change effect A takes 2500ms to disappear, and in the result notification effect when the game is not controlled to a jackpot state, it takes 5500ms for the image of the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 to disappear, so the player can be properly notified that the game is not controlled to a jackpot state.

[Form 15-3]
In background change effect A, there is a fragment image 006SG302 (first fragment image 006SG302) with the largest display size among the multiple fragment images 006SG302, and in result notification effect (miss), there is a small fragment image 006SG302A (second fragment image 006SG302) with the largest display size among the multiple fragment images 006SG302, and it is preferable that the fragment image 006SG302 (first fragment image 006SG302) has a larger display size than the small fragment image 006SG302A (second fragment image 006SG302) (see, for example, Figures 57(J) and 69(D)). By doing so, it is possible to create differences in how the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed and enhance interest.

[Form 15-4]
In background change effect A, the fragment image 006SG302 is a transparent image that allows recognition of at least a portion of the superimposed background image, and in result notification effect (miss), the small fragment image 006SG302A is a transparent image that allows recognition of at least a portion of the superimposed background image (see Figure 84). This allows for differences in how the fragment image 006SG302 is presented, thereby enhancing the viewing experience.

[Form 15-5]
It is preferable that the fragment image 006SG302 in background change effect A and the small fragment image 006SG302A in result notification effect (miss) are both displayed in a manner that moves in multiple directions, including at least a predetermined direction (e.g., the X-axis direction) and a specific direction (e.g., the Z-axis direction) (see, for example, Figures 86 and 88). By doing so, the way the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be made related and the entertainment value can be increased.

[Form 15-6]
In background change effect A, a whiteout image 006SG303 (an effect image of a specific color) can be displayed in common at the first timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 transitions from a cracked state to a broken state (display of glass plate image 006SG301A), and at the second timing when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the result notification effect (miss). The display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 differs between the first and second timings. Specifically, at the first timing, the whiteout image 006SG303 may be displayed across the entire display screen, while at the second timing, it may be displayed spreading from the center of the display screen outwards (see Figures 56(G) and 69(C)). By doing so, the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 can be differentiated between background change effect A and the result notification effect (miss), thereby increasing interest.

[Form 16-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 74 and 82, the background change effect A and the result notification effect of this embodiment are effects with different execution timings in the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various timings during the variable display. In addition, during the crack display period in background change effect A, the game effect lamp 9 may light up in a manner corresponding to background change effect A, and during the crack display period in the result notification effect of the failure pattern, the game effect lamp 9 may light up in a manner corresponding to the result notification effect of the failure pattern. Moreover, the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a manner corresponding to background change effect A continues until the display of the fragment image 006SG302 begins, while the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a manner corresponding to the result notification effect of the failure pattern may continue until predetermined conditions are met, such as the stop of the variable display after the end of the result notification effect of the failure pattern, or the start of the next variable display. In this way, the player can be notified that they are not being controlled to an appropriately advantageous state.

[Form 17-1]
When the result notification sequence indicates that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot state, the glass plate image 006SG301 can be displayed in a second crack pattern. The type of background image differs between before the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a crack pattern during background change sequence A and when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed during the break sequence (see Figures 56(A) to 56(F) and Figures 57(I) and 57(K)). The display pattern of the background image also differs between before the result notification sequence indicates whether or not the game will be controlled to a jackpot state and when the fragment image 006SG302A is displayed after it is announced that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot state (see Figures 69(A) to 69(B) and 69(D)).

By doing so, it is possible to execute background change effect A, which displays the glass plate image 006SG301 in a cracked pattern, thereby surprising the player. Furthermore, by using the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 and changing the display pattern of the background image before the notification of whether or not the game is controlled to a jackpot state, it is possible to appropriately notify the player that the game is not controlled to a jackpot state.

[Form 18-1]
Background change effect A is an effect that includes a first predetermined part that displays a character image 006SG305, a second predetermined part that displays a glass plate image 006SG301 in a first crack pattern in accordance with the movement of the character image 006SG305, and a third predetermined part that displays multiple fragment images 006SG302 that mimic at least a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A that is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, and a pseudo-continuous effect that includes a fourth predetermined part that displays the glass plate image 006SG301 in a second crack pattern, and the falling movement of the movable body 32 The performance includes a fifth predetermined part to start and a sixth predetermined part to display multiple fragment images 006SG302 that mimic at least a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301. The execution timing differs between background change performance A and pseudo-continuous performance. In the cracking performance of the pseudo-continuous performance, the movable body 32 starts a second operation different from the first operation, and the second operation of the movable body 32 ends after the fragment images 006SG302 are hidden from the display screen of the image display device 5 (see Figures 56, 57, and 59).

By doing so, the background change effect A, which displays the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302, and the pseudo-consecutive effect can be executed at different timings, allowing for surprises to be given to the player at various times. Furthermore, by displaying the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 and then operating the movable body 32 to display the fragment image 006SG302, a more impactful effect can be provided.

[Form 18-2]
Furthermore, for the background change effect A and the pseudo-consecutive effect shown in Figures 74 and 76, it is possible to display the first stage of cracks on the glass plate image 006SG301, and then change the first stage of cracks to the second stage of cracks. In this case, the length of the period from when the first stage of cracks is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 to when the first stage of cracks changes to the second stage of cracks in the background change effect A and the length of the period from when the first stage of cracks is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 to when the first stage of cracks changes to the second stage of cracks in the pseudo-consecutive effect may differ. By doing so, the effect of the effect when displaying the crack pattern in the crack image can be enhanced.

[Form 18-3-1]
In background change effect A, a whiteout image 006SG303 (an effect image of a specific color) can be displayed in common at the first timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 transitions from a cracked state to a shattered state, and at the second timing when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the pseudo-consecutive effect. The display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 differs between the first and second timings. Specifically, at the first timing, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen, while at the second timing, it is displayed spreading from the center of the display screen outwards (see Figures 56(G) and 59(C)). This creates a difference in the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 between background change effect A and the pseudo-consecutive effect, enhancing the overall appeal.

[Form 18-3-2]
The first action is a falling motion in which the movable body 32 moves from the origin position toward the performance position, and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 begins when the movable body 32 is positioned toward the performance position (see Figure 59(C)). By linking the movement of the movable body 32 with the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 in this way, a sense of unity is created and the performance effect of the pseudo-consecutive performance can be enhanced.

[Form 18-3-3]
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 76, in the pseudo-consecutive effect, the period during which the movable body falls is longer than the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 (the early whiteout display period and the late whiteout display period). Here, the display period of the fragment image may also be longer than the period during which the movable body falls. By doing so, the effect of the pseudo-consecutive effect can be enhanced.

[Form 18-4]
Furthermore, as a different effect from the pseudo-consecutive win effect shown in Figure 76, a movable body suggestion effect may be made possible, which suggests that the game is controlled to a jackpot state by operating the movable body 32 during the execution of the variable display. When such a movable body suggestion effect is made possible, a movable body emphasis image that emphasizes the movable body 32 may be displayed in the display area that overlaps with the movable body 32 when the movable body suggestion effect is executed. On the other hand, when the movable body operates as a pseudo-consecutive win effect, the movable body emphasis image that emphasizes the movable body 32 may not be displayed in the display area that overlaps with the movable body 32. This prevents the effect of the pseudo-consecutive win effect from being diminished by the movable body emphasis image.

[Form 19-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 74 and 82, the background change effect A and the result notification effect of this embodiment are effects with different execution timings in the variable display, so it is possible to surprise the player at various timings during the variable display. Moreover, as shown in Figure 82, the result notification effect of the success pattern is an effect in which a crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 as the movable body 32 falls, and then a fragment image 006SG302 is displayed. The movable body 32 starts to rise during the fragment image display period and ends the rise before the end of the fragment image display period. Therefore, by operating the movable body 32 and displaying a crack on the glass plate image 006SG301, it is possible to provide an impressive effect.

[Form 19-2]
Furthermore, for the background change effect A and the result notification effect shown in Figures 74 and 82, it is possible to display the first stage of cracks on the glass plate image 006SG301, and then change the first stage of cracks to the second stage of cracks. In this case, the length of the period from when the first stage of cracks is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 in background change effect A until the first stage of cracks changes to the second stage of cracks, and the length of the period from when the first stage of cracks is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 until the first stage of cracks changes to the second stage of cracks in result notification effect may differ. By doing so, the effect of the effect when displaying the crack pattern in the crack precursor image can be enhanced.

[Form 19-3-1]
In the background change effect A, a whiteout image 006SG303 (an effect image of a specific color) can be displayed in common at the first timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 transitions from a cracked state to a shattered state, and at the second timing when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the result notification effect (jackpot). The display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 differs between the first and second timings. Specifically, at the first timing, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen, while at the second timing, it is displayed spreading from the center of the display screen outwards (see Figures 56(G) and 67(E)). This creates a difference in the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 between the background change effect A and the result notification effect (jackpot), thereby enhancing the entertainment value.

[Form 19-3-2]
The second action involves the movable body 32 moving from the performance position towards the origin position, and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 begins when the second action starts (see Figure 67(F)). By linking the movement of the movable body 32 with the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 in this way, a sense of unity is created, and the effect of the pseudo-consecutive performance can be enhanced.

[Form 19-3-3]
Furthermore, in the result notification presentation shown in Figure 82, the period during which the movable body rises is longer than the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 (the early whiteout display period and the late whiteout display period), and the display period of the fragment image is longer than the period during which the movable body rises, thus enhancing the effect of the result notification presentation.

[Form 19-4]
Furthermore, as a different effect from the result notification effect shown in Figure 82, a movable body suggestion effect may be made possible, which suggests that the game is controlled to a jackpot state by operating the movable body 32 during the execution of the variable display. When such a movable body suggestion effect is made possible, a movable body emphasis image that emphasizes the movable body 32 may be displayed in the display area that overlaps with the movable body 32 when the movable body suggestion effect is executed. On the other hand, when the movable body 32 operates as a result notification effect, the movable body emphasis image that emphasizes the movable body 32 may not be displayed in the display area that overlaps with the movable body 32. This prevents the effect of the result notification effect from being diminished by the movable body emphasis image.

[Form 20-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 74 and 79, the background change effect A and the strong development effect A of this embodiment are effects with different execution timings in the variable display, so that players can be surprised at various timings during the variable display. Moreover, the strong development effect A is an effect that displays a fragment image 006SG302 in response to the fall of the movable body 32, and the fragment image display period for displaying the fragment image 006SG302 is shorter than the fragment image display period in the background change effect A. Furthermore, in the strong development effect A, the movable body 32 can rise towards the position above the image display device 5, which is the origin position, after the fall, and the movable body 32 starts rising after the fragment image display period ends, so that an impressive effect can be provided.

[Form 20-2-1]
The first action is the movement of the movable body 32 from the origin position toward the performance position, and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 begins when the first action starts (see Figure 63(B)). By linking the movement of the movable body 32 with the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 in this way, a sense of unity is created, and the performance effect of the strong development performance A can be enhanced.

[Form 20-2-2]
As shown in Figure 79, the strong development sequence A includes a whiteout pre-display period and a whiteout post-display period. Here, the length of the whiteout pre-display period and the movable body 32 fall period (movable body fall period) are made approximately the same, and the fragment image display period may be made longer than the movable body fall period. By doing so, the effect of the strong development sequence can be enhanced.

[Form 20-3]
Furthermore, as a different effect from the strong development effect A shown in Figure 79, a movable body suggestion effect may be made possible, which suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot state by operating the movable body 32 during the execution of the variable display. When such a movable body suggestion effect is made possible, a movable body emphasis image that emphasizes the movable body 32 may be displayed in the display area that overlaps with the movable body 32 when the movable body suggestion effect is executed. On the other hand, when the movable body 32 operates as strong development effect A, the movable body emphasis image that emphasizes the movable body 32 may not be displayed in the display area that overlaps with the movable body 32. This prevents the effect of the strong development effect A from being diminished by the movable body emphasis image.

[Form 21-1]
In background change effect A and background change effect B, even if the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked pattern, the background image can be seen together with the glass plate image 006SG301, and the images displayed in the layer 1 to 3 image drawing area, which has a lower priority than the glass plate image 006SG301 when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed in a cracked pattern, are displayed with first visibility, and the first background image 0 when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked pattern in background change effect A Image 06SG081 is displayed with a second level of visibility that is lower than the first level of visibility. Images displayed in layers 1 to 3 image drawing areas that have a lower priority than the predetermined display layer when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked pattern in background change effect B are displayed with a second level of visibility over a predetermined range, and images displayed with a first level of visibility over a specific range different from the predetermined range (for example, the crack display area 006SG324) (see Figures 56(E), (F), and 58(C)).

By doing so, background change effects A and B, which display the glass plate image 006SG301 with different crack patterns, can be executed at different timings. This allows for surprising the player at various times, and furthermore, because the visibility of the background image visible along with the glass plate image 006SG301 differs depending on the type of crack pattern, even effects that similarly display the glass plate image 006SG301 can give suitably different impressions, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 21-2]
The boundary between a predetermined range and a specific range can be displayed with a third level of visibility that is more visible than the first and second levels of visibility (see enlarged view in Figure 58(C)), thereby enhancing the effect of background change effect B.

[Form 21-3]
In the layer 9 image drawing area, which has a higher priority than the glass plate image 006SG301, it is possible to display a first reserved display 006SG101 (second reserved display) or an active display 006SG103 (corresponding image) that supports variable display. When the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the corresponding image is displayed superimposed over a predetermined range, but not over a specific range (see Figure 58(C)). This allows the corresponding image to be displayed appropriately even while the background change effect B is being executed.

[Form 21-4]
Furthermore, for background change effect B shown in Figure 75, the period for displaying the second stage of cracks may be made longer than the period for displaying the first stage of cracks. By doing so, it is possible to create a difference in how the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed between background change effect A and background change effect B, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 22-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 73 and 74, the background change effect A and the dialogue予告 effect of this embodiment are effects with different execution timings in the variable display, so they can surprise the player at various timings during the variable display. For these background change effect A and dialogue予告 effect, the visibility of the background image may differ between the crack display period in background change effect A and the crack display period in dialogue予告 effect. Moreover, the crack display period in dialogue予告 effect may be made longer than the crack display period in background change effect A, and multiple types of crack patterns may be provided for the dialogue予告 effect (see Figures 56 and 55), such that the probability of being controlled to a jackpot state is higher when the glass plate image 006SG301 of the first type second crack pattern is displayed than when the glass plate image 006SG301 of the second type second crack pattern is displayed. In this way, players will be drawn to the glass plate image 006SG301 in the dialogue予告演出 (preview/announcement) sequence, and even in sequences where the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in the same way, a suitably different impression can be given, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 22-2]
When the glass plate image 006SG301 of the first type of second crack pattern is displayed, and when the glass plate image 006SG301 of the second type of second crack pattern is displayed, the visibility of the background image displayed below the predetermined display layer differs (see Figures 56 and 55). In this way, the way the glass plate image 006SG301 is presented can be varied, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 22-3]
It is possible to display a whiteout image 006SG303 of a specific color in both the background change effect A and the dialogue予告 effect, and it is preferable that the display patterns of the whiteout image 006SG303 differ between the background change effect A and the dialogue予告 effect (see, for example, Figures 56 and 55). By doing so, it is possible to create differences in the display patterns of the whiteout image 006SG303 and enhance the entertainment value.

[Form 23-1]
The image display device 5 is capable of displaying corresponding images that support variable display (for example, the first reserved display 006SG101 (second reserved display) and the active display 006SG103) in a special display layer (for example, the layer 9 image drawing area), and can display the glass plate image 006SG301 in a first predetermined display layer (for example, the layer 9-1 image drawing area) which has a higher priority than the special display layer, and can display the glass plate image 006SG301 in a second predetermined display layer (for example, the layer 4 image drawing area) which has a lower priority than the special display layer, and the first predetermined display Special display layers with higher priority than the layers (for example, the image drawing area of layer 10) can display special information related to variable display (for example, small patterns), and when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed on the first predetermined display layer in background change effect A, the visibility of the corresponding image is reduced, and when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed on the second predetermined display layer in background change effect B, the visibility of the corresponding image is not reduced, and the change effect is not executed when background change effect A is executed, and the change effect is executed when background change effect B is executed (see Figure 102).

By doing so, background change effects A and B can be executed at different timings, allowing for surprises to be given to players at various points in time. Furthermore, even in effects where the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, the display layer and whether or not the change effect is executed differ, creating distinctly different impressions and enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 23-2-1]
The transformation effect involves displaying a character image 006SG305 and having the character image 006SG305 act on a corresponding image to change the display mode of that image. The character image 006SG305 can be displayed on a display layer with a lower priority than a predetermined display layer (for example, the layer 3 image drawing area) (see Figure 102). In this way, the transformation effect can be executed without significantly reducing the effect of the background transformation effect B.

[Form 23-2-2]
In response to the operation of the character image 006SG305, a change-enhancing image (for example, effect image 006SG330) can be displayed on a display layer higher than the special display layer so as to be superimposed on the corresponding image (see Figure 102), thereby enabling the change effect to be suitably executed even while the background change effect B is being executed.

[Form 24-1]
The fragment image 006SG302 in background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 in strong development effect A have different display modes. The fragment image 006SG302 in strong development effect A includes images in a suggestive mode that indicate that a strong S reach effect (special effect) will be performed (for example, fragment images 006SG302, 006SG342M, 006SG342J, 006SG342N), and the display period of the fragment image 006SG302 in strong development effect A is longer than the display period of the fragment image 006SG302 in background change effect A (see Figures 56, 103, and 104).

By doing so, the background change effect A and the strong development effect A can be executed at different timings, allowing for surprises to the player at various points. Furthermore, since the display patterns of the fragment image 006SG302 differ between the background change effect A and the strong development effect A, and the relationship between the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect A and the effect executed afterward can be enhanced, even effects in which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the same way can give suitably different impressions, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 24-2]
The special effects include a first special effect (for example, strong S reach effects J and N) and a second special effect (for example, strong S reach effects A and B). When the second special effect is executed, the expectation of being controlled to a jackpot state is higher than when the first special effect is executed. The suggestion form includes a first suggestion form that suggests the first special effect will be executed and a second suggestion form that suggests the second special effect will be executed (see Figures 103, 104, and 105). In this way, the degree of attention paid to the fragment image 006SG302 (for example, fragment images 006SG302, 006SG342M, 006SG342J, and 006SG342N) in strong development effect A can be increased.

[Form 24-3-1]
In the strong development sequence A, the fragment image 006SG302 includes a suggestive form and a transparent form that allows at least a portion of the background image displayed on a layer lower than the specific display layer to be visible, with the transparent fragment image 006SG302 being displayed more often than the suggestive fragment image 006SG302 (see Figure 105). This increases the level of attention paid to the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development sequence A.

[Form 24-3-2]
The fragment image 006SG302 can be rotated, and in the strong development sequence A, it is preferable that the transparent fragment image 006SG302 rotates more than the suggestive fragment image 006SG302 (see Figure 105). This increases the level of attention given to the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development sequence A.

[Form 24-4]
The strong development sequence A includes a first predetermined part and a second predetermined part, in which multiple fragment images 006SG302 in suggestive form and multiple fragment images 006SG302 in transparent form are displayed, and in the second predetermined part, one fragment image 006SG302 in suggestive form and multiple fragment images 006SG302 in transparent form are displayed (see Figure 104). In this way, the degree of attention paid to the fragment images 006SG302 in the strong development sequence A can be increased.

[Form 25]
Furthermore, the cut-in effect shown in Figure 81 is an effect that makes the glass plate image 006SG301A (and fragment image 006SG302) invisible by the whiteout image 006SG303, then makes the whiteout image 006SG303 a transparent image, and further makes it visible by ending the display of the whiteout image 006SG303. The period during which the operation-prompting effect is executed before the cut-in effect is longer than the initial whiteout display period during which the glass plate image 006SG301A (and fragment image 006SG302) becomes invisible in the cut-in effect. Therefore, by creating a build-up to the cracking effect with the operation-prompting effect and creating a sense of speed during the fragment image display period, a suitable cracking pattern can be achieved.

[Form 26]
Furthermore, the cut-in effect shown in Figure 81 is an effect that makes the glass plate image 006SG301A (and fragment image 006SG302) invisible with a whiteout image 006SG303, then makes the whiteout image 006SG303 a transparent image, and further makes it visible by ending the display of the whiteout image 006SG303. Note that the fragment image display period during which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the cut-in effect may be longer than the execution period of the operation promotion effect. In this way, the crack pattern can be made more impressive.

[Form 27]
As shown in Figures 72 to 82, in the first consecutive break effect, second consecutive break effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, at least a portion of the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 and the display period of the fragment image overlap, and the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 is shorter than the display period of the fragment image. Furthermore, the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 consists of an early whiteout display period and a late whiteout display period. Note that the late whiteout display period may be longer than the early whiteout display period. In this way, the whiteout image 006SG303 hides the beginning of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, and the fragment image 006SG302, which has just started to be displayed, while preventing the whiteout image 006SG303 from being emphasized more than the fragment image 006SG302.

[Form 28]
As shown in Figures 72 to 82, in the first consecutive cracking effect, second consecutive cracking effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed to conceal the beginning of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, and the fragment image 006SG302 that has just started to be displayed, making it invisible to the player. Here, the whiteout image 006SG303 may be hidden once a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of display and the fragment image 006SG302 has moved sufficiently, so that the player can see the fragment image 006SG302. This prevents the player from feeling any discomfort when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 begins.

[Form 29]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 72 to 82, in the first consecutive cracking effect, second consecutive cracking effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed, thereby obscuring the beginning of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 during the early whiteout display period, and the fragment image 006SG302, which has just started to be displayed, from being visible to the player. In the later whiteout display period, when the transparency of the whiteout image 006SG303 is increased, the fragment image 006SG302 becomes visible to the player. Therefore, in the later whiteout display period, the effect of the fragment image 006SG302, which has moved and been displayed after a sufficient amount of time has passed since the start of display, can be enhanced.

[Form 30]
Furthermore, in the background change effect A and the weak development effect shown in Figures 74 and 78, the display of the fragment images 006SG302 is started from the execution timing of the cracking effect, and these fragment images 006SG302 can be displayed in a moving manner. Here, the transparency of the whiteout image 006SG303 may differ between the late whiteout display period in background change effect A and the late whiteout display period in the weak development effect. By doing so, the effect of the fragment images 006SG302 that are displayed in a moving manner during the late whiteout display period of background change effect A and the fragment images 006SG302 that are displayed in a moving manner during the late whiteout display period of the weak development effect can be enhanced.

[Form 31]
Furthermore, in the background change effect A and the weak development effect shown in Figures 74 and 78, the display of the fragment images 006SG302 is started from the execution timing of the cracking effect, and these fragment images 006SG302 can be displayed in a moving manner. Here, background change effect A may be an effect that can be executed when the game state is the normal state, and the weak development effect may be an effect that can be executed when the game state is the time-saving state or the probability change state. Moreover, the transparency of the whiteout image 006SG303 may be different in the later whiteout display period of background change effect A and the later whiteout display period of the weak development effect. By doing so, the effect of the fragment images 006SG302 that are displayed in a moving manner during the later whiteout display period of background change effect A and the fragment images 006SG302 that are displayed in a moving manner during the later whiteout display period of the weak development effect can be enhanced.

[Form 32]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 72 to 82, in the first consecutive cracking effect, second consecutive cracking effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, the effect control CPU 120 controls the illumination of the game effect lamp 9 using the cracking effect illumination data table for the duration of the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303, and from the timing of the end of the display of the whiteout image 006SG303, the effect control of the game effect lamp 9 uses the illumination data table corresponding to the background image of each effect, so that the illumination control of the game effect lamp 9 when the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks can be suitably performed.

[Form 33]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 72 to 82, in the first consecutive cracking effect, second consecutive cracking effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 and the display period of the fragment image overlap at least partially. Speakers 8L and 8R output cracking effect sounds corresponding to the display of the fragment image 006SG302 from the timing of the start of the display of the whiteout image 006SG303, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form 34]
As shown in Figures 72 to 82, the cracking animation patterns (crack patterns of the glass plate image 006SG301A) in the first consecutive cracking animation, second consecutive cracking animation, dialogue予告 animation, background change animation A, background change animation B, pseudo-consecutive animation, reach suggestion animation, weak development animation, strong development animation A, strong development animation B, cut-in animation, and result notification animation include a first pattern in which a crack is displayed before the glass breaks, and a second pattern in which the glass breaks without any cracks being displayed. Here, the output of sounds corresponding to the cracking animation (sounds corresponding to the display of fragment images 006SG302) from speakers 8L and 8R may differ depending on whether the cracking animation is performed using the first pattern or the second pattern. In this way, different impression patterns can be provided for each cracking animation.

[Form 35]
As shown in Figures 72 to 82, the cracking animation patterns (cracking patterns of the glass plate image 006SG301A) in the first consecutive cracking animation, second consecutive cracking animation, dialogue予告 animation, background change animation A, background change animation B, pseudo-consecutive animation, reach suggestion animation, weak development animation, strong development animation A, strong development animation B, cut-in animation, and result notification animation include a first pattern in which a crack is displayed before the glass breaks, and a second pattern in which the glass breaks without any cracks being displayed. Here, if the cracking animation for the result notification animation of the successful pattern is to be implemented using the second pattern, the cracking animation for the result notification animation of the successful pattern may output sounds from speakers 8L and 8R that correspond to the state of the jackpot game. In this way, different cracking animation patterns can be provided depending on the state.

[Form 36]
As shown in Figures 72 to 82, the cracking animation patterns (cracking patterns of glass plate image 006SG301A) in the first consecutive cracking animation, second consecutive cracking animation, dialogue予告 animation, background change animation A, background change animation B, pseudo-consecutive animation, reach suggestion animation, weak development animation, strong development animation A, strong development animation B, cut-in animation, and result notification animation include a first pattern in which a crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 before the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks, and a second pattern in which the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks without any crack being displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301. Here, when the cracking effect is performed in the first pattern described above, cracking sound effects are output from speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the display of glass plate image 006SG301A, which is an image that replaces the glass plate image 006SG301, and fragment image 006SG302. On the other hand, when the cracking effect is performed in the second pattern described above, glass plate image 006SG301A, which is an image that replaces the glass plate image 006SG301, is not displayed, and cracking sound effects are not output from speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the display of fragment image 006SG302. In this way, cracking patterns with different impressions can be provided.

[Form 37]
As shown in Figures 72 to 82, for the first consecutive cracking effect, second consecutive cracking effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, a sound effect corresponding to the display of the glass plate image 006SG301 is output from speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, a sound effect corresponding to the display of the fragment image 006SG302 (crack effect sound) may be output at a louder volume than the sound effect corresponding to the display of the glass plate image 006SG301. By doing so, a distinction is made between when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed and when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, making the crack pattern more memorable.

[Form 38]
As shown in Figure 99, in the background change effect A and the reach suggestion effect, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, the speaker 8L and 8R may output a character voice as a sound corresponding to the displayed character, and when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, the speaker 8L and 8R may output a cracking effect sound as a sound corresponding to the display of the fragment image 006SG302. In this way, a distinction is made between when the crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 and when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, making the cracking pattern more memorable.

[Form 39]
There are two display patterns for the fragment image 006SG302: a first pattern (e.g., crack patterns A, C to F) and a second pattern (e.g., crack patterns B, G). In the first pattern, the amount of variation is a specific value (e.g., "30%)", so the operation speed of the first-size fragment image 006SG302 and the second-size fragment image 006SG302, which is smaller than the first size, are different. In the second pattern, the amount of variation is 0 (e.g., "0%)", so the operation speed of the third-size fragment image 006SG302 and the fourth-size fragment image 006SG302, which is smaller than the third size, are the same (see Figures 84 and 85).

In this way, the first pattern exhibits different animation effects depending on size; smaller fragment images 006SG302 fly faster, while larger fragment images 006SG302 fall somewhat slower, resulting in a more realistic breakage pattern. This can be used when a realistic movement is desired. The second pattern, regardless of size, exhibits the same flying and falling patterns for all fragments, allowing for the selection of the most suitable breakage pattern for each scene.

[Form 40]
The fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in a manner that it gradually falls after the display starts. There are two display patterns for the fragment image 006SG302: a first pattern (e.g., crack patterns A and C) and a second pattern (e.g., crack patterns D to F). The first and second patterns differ in their gravity settings, resulting in different falling speeds for the fragment image 006SG302 (see Figures 84 and 85). By varying the parameters in this way and thus changing the falling speed of the fragment image 006SG302, a variety of patterns can be constructed, enhancing the overall enjoyment.

[Form 41]
There are two display patterns for the fragment image 006SG302: a first pattern (e.g., crack patterns A, C to F) and a second pattern (e.g., crack patterns B, G). The setting of the gravity direction differs between the first and second patterns, resulting in different directions of movement when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed (see Figures 84 and 85). By varying the parameters in this way and changing the direction in which the fragment image 006SG302 moves, a variety of patterns can be constructed, enhancing the overall appeal.

[Form 42]
There are three display patterns for the fragment image 006SG302: a first pattern (e.g., crack pattern A), a second pattern (e.g., crack pattern B), and a third pattern (e.g., crack pattern C). For crack pattern A, crack pattern B, and crack pattern C, the first parameter, "gravity," is common to all three, set to "0." However, the second parameter, "strength," differs: crack pattern A is set to "5," crack pattern B to "3," and crack pattern C to "7" (see Figures 84 and 85). In this way, by fixing the first parameter and creating common parts for the fragment image 006SG302, while varying the second parameter, a variety of patterns can be constructed, thereby creating stable and diverse display patterns for the fragment image 006SG302.

[Form 43]
There are three display patterns for the fragment image 006SG302: a first pattern (e.g., crack pattern E), a second pattern (e.g., crack pattern F), and a third pattern (e.g., crack pattern G). For example, crack pattern E (first pattern) and crack pattern F (second pattern) share the first parameter of "gravity" as "0," while the second parameter of "strength" differs, with crack pattern E being "3" and crack pattern F being "5." Crack pattern F (second pattern) and crack pattern G (third pattern) differ, with the first parameter of "gravity" being "5" for crack pattern E and "2" for crack pattern F, while the second parameter of "strength" is common to both (see Figures 84 and 85). In this way, by creating common parts for each pattern while using different parameters, it is possible to construct stable and diverse display patterns for the fragment image 006SG302.

[Form 44]
There are two display patterns for the cracked image (e.g., fragment image 006SG302): a first pattern (e.g., crack pattern A) and a second pattern (e.g., crack pattern A). The cracked image using the first pattern can be displayed in the normal state, while the cracked image using the second pattern can be displayed in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state (e.g., a time-saving state, a probability-changing state). It is preferable that the type of background image displayed in the display layer with a lower priority than the specific display layer differs before and after the cracked image using the first pattern, and that the type of background image displayed in the display layer with a lower priority than the specific display layer differs before and after the cracked image using the second pattern (see, for example, Figures 56 and 57). In this way, different impressions can be given when using crack patterns A to G in the normal state and when using crack patterns A to G in the special state, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 45]
Background change effect A is an effect that includes displaying a broken image (for example, a fragment image 006SG302) in a first mode and then changing it to a second mode. The image display device 5 displays an effect image (for example, a whiteout image 006SG303) when displaying the broken image in the first mode, in common with the normal state and special states that are more advantageous than the normal state (for example, a time-saving state, a probability change state), and hides the effect image at the timing before displaying the broken image in the second mode (see, for example, Figures 56 and 57). In this way, the whiteout image 006SG303 hides the initial display portion of the broken image, preventing it from appearing unnatural.

[Form 46]
As shown in Figures 72 to 82, the cracking animation patterns (cracking patterns of glass plate image 006SG301A) in the first consecutive cracking animation, second consecutive cracking animation, dialogue予告 animation, background change animation A, background change animation B, pseudo-consecutive animation, reach suggestion animation, weak development animation, strong development animation A, strong development animation B, cut-in animation, and result notification animation include a first pattern in which a crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 before the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks, and a second pattern in which the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks without any crack being displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301. Here, the first pattern of the cracking effect can be executed in the normal state, and the second pattern of the cracking effect can be executed in the time-saving state or the probability-changing state. The fragment images 006SG302 displayed by the first pattern of the cracking effect and the fragment images 006SG302 displayed by the second pattern of the cracking effect may both be displayed in a manner that moves in multiple directions, including at least the X-axis and Z-axis directions. Furthermore, the speed at which the fragment images 006SG302 displayed by the first pattern of the cracking effect and the fragment images 006SG302 displayed by the second pattern of the cracking effect move may differ. In this way, the effect of the effect during the time-saving state or probability-changing state can be enhanced by using cracking patterns that do not disrupt the tempo of the time-saving state or probability-changing state.

[Form 47]
As shown in Figures 72 to 82, the cracking animation patterns (cracking patterns of glass plate image 006SG301A) in the first consecutive cracking animation, second consecutive cracking animation, dialogue予告 animation, background change animation A, background change animation B, pseudo-consecutive animation, reach suggestion animation, weak development animation, strong development animation A, strong development animation B, cut-in animation, and result notification animation include a first pattern in which a crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 before the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks, and a second pattern in which the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks without any crack being displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301. Here, the first pattern of the cracking animation can be executed in the normal state, and the second pattern of the cracking animation can be executed in the time-saving state or the probability variation state, and the proportion of when the game is controlled to a jackpot state may be different depending on whether the first pattern of the cracking animation is executed or the second pattern of the cracking animation is executed. In this way, since the proportion of when the game is controlled to a jackpot state differs depending on the cracking pattern, attention can be drawn to each cracking pattern.

[Form 48]
Multiple first type fragment images 006SG302 (e.g., large fragment images 006SG302) can be displayed on a predetermined display layer (e.g., layer 5-1 image drawing area), multiple second type fragment images 006SG302 (e.g., small fragment images 006SG302) can be displayed on a specific display layer with higher priority than the predetermined display layer (e.g., layer 5-2 image drawing area), and on a special display layer with higher priority than the specific display layer (e.g., layer 10 image drawing area) Special information related to variable display (e.g., small patterns) can be displayed, and the display period of the first type of fragment image 006SG302 and the display period of the second type of fragment image 006SG302 overlap in at least part, the first type of fragment image 006SG302 is a form in which a character is drawn, and the second type of fragment image 006SG302 is a transparent form in which at least part of the background image displayed on a display layer lower than a specific display layer can be recognized (see Figure 105). In this way, by overlapping the display periods of two types of fragment images 006SG302 with different display forms, it is possible to provide an impressive effect.

[Form 49]
Multiple first type fragment images 006SG302 (e.g., large fragment images 006SG302) can be displayed on a predetermined display layer (e.g., layer 5-1 image drawing area), and multiple second type fragment images 006SG302 (e.g., small fragment images 006SG302) can be displayed on a specific display layer with higher priority than the predetermined display layer (e.g., layer 5-2 image drawing area), and a special display layer with higher priority than the specific display layer (e.g., layer 10 image drawing area) can be displayed. Special information related to variable display (e.g., small patterns) can be displayed in the image rendering area, and the display period of the first type of fragment image 006SG302 and the display period of the second type of fragment image 006SG302 overlap at least partially, and the display modes of the first type of fragment image 006SG302 and the second type of fragment image 006SG302 are different, with the display period of the first type of fragment image 006SG302 being longer than the display period of the second type of fragment image 006SG302 (see Figure 105). In this way, by overlapping the display periods of the two types of fragment images 006SG302 with different display modes, it is possible to provide an impressive effect.

[Form 50]
Multiple fragment images 006SG302 can be displayed in specific display layers (for example, the Layer 5-1 image drawing area and the Layer 5-1 image drawing area), special information related to variable display (for example, small patterns) can be displayed in a special display layer with a higher priority than the specific display layers (for example, the Layer 10 image drawing area), the movable body 32 can perform an operation to superimpose on the image display device 5, the display period of the fragment images 006SG302 and the operation period of the movable body 32 overlap at least partially, and the amount of fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the first display area L1, which is a display area on which the movable body 32 does not superimpose, is greater than the amount of fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the second display area L2 on which the movable body 32 superimposes (see Figure 105). In this way, the fragment images 006SG302 can be suitably displayed while the movable body 32 is superimposed on the display screen.

[Form 51]
Multiple fragment images 006SG302 can be displayed on a specific display layer (for example, the Layer 5-1 image drawing area or the Layer 5-1 image drawing area), special information related to variable display (for example, a small pattern) can be displayed on a special display layer with a higher priority than the specific display layer (for example, the Layer 10 image drawing area), the movable body 32 can perform an operation to superimpose on the image display device 5, and the display period of the fragment image 006SG302 and the movement of the movable body 32 The display period is such that at least a portion of it overlaps, and the first fragment image 006SG302 of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 is displayed in a manner that it moves from the first display area L1 where the movable body 32 does not overlap to the second display area L2 where the movable body 32 overlaps, and the second fragment image 006SG302 of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 is displayed in a manner that it moves within the first display area L1 so as not to enter the second display area L2 (see Figure 105). In this way, by providing fragment images 006SG302 that pass through the area where the movable body 32 overlaps, while allowing the viewer to recognize that the object has broken by using fragment images 006SG302 that do not enter the area where the movable body 32 overlaps, a dynamic presentation can be provided.

[Form 52]
Multiple fragment images 006SG302 can be displayed on specific display layers (for example, the Layer 5-1 image drawing area and the Layer 5-1 image drawing area), special information related to variable display (for example, small patterns) can be displayed on a special display layer with a higher priority than the specific display layers (for example, the Layer 10 image drawing area), the movable body 32 can perform an operation to superimpose on the image display device 5, the display period of the fragment images 006SG302 and the operation period of the movable body 32 overlap at least partially, and the fragment images 006SG302 continue to be displayed even after the movable body 32, which is superimposed on the display screen of the image display device 5, has moved to a position where it is no longer superimposed on the display screen (see Figure 105). In this way, the fragment images 006SG302 can be displayed appropriately so as not to be missed while the movable body 32 is superimposed on the display screen of the image display device 5.

[Form 53]
In the reach suggestion effect, the image display device 5 can display multiple second-type fragment images 006SG302 (for example, small fragment images 006SG302A) when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked pattern, and the second-type fragment images 006SG302 have a shorter duration of time before disappearing from the display screen than the first-type fragment images 006SG302 (see Figures 60 and 61). In this way, the effect of the effect using crack pattern A can be enhanced.

[Form 54]
There are two display patterns for the cracked image (for example, fragment image 006SG302): a first pattern (for example, crack pattern A) and a second pattern (for example, crack pattern E). The first pattern displays a first type of cracked image in conjunction with the operation of the character image 006SG305, and the second pattern displays a second type of cracked image in conjunction with the operation of the character image 006SG305. The type of background image displayed on display layers with lower priority than the specific display layer differs before the first type of cracked image is displayed by the first pattern and after the first type of cracked image is displayed by the first pattern, and the type of background image displayed on display layers with lower priority than the specific display layer differs before the second type of cracked image is displayed by the second pattern and after the second type of cracked image is displayed by the second pattern (see Figures 56, 57, 60-62). In this way, a specific character (for example, character image 006SG305) appears in common across multiple cracked patterns, thus increasing the degree of attention given to the specific character.

[Form 55]
There are two display patterns for the broken image (for example, fragment image 006SG302): a first pattern (for example, broken pattern A) and a second pattern (for example, broken pattern E). The first pattern is a pattern that displays a first type of broken image in conjunction with the operation of the character image 006SG305, and the second pattern is a pattern that displays a second type of broken image in conjunction with the operation of the character image 006SG305. When the image display device 5 displays a broken image using the first pattern, it is linked to the operation of the character image 006SG305. When displaying a broken image using the second pattern, an effect image (for example, a whiteout image 006SG303) is displayed in conjunction with the operation of the character image 006SG305, and the effect image (for example, a whiteout image 006SG303) is hidden at a specific timing after the second type of broken image 006SG302 is displayed (see Figures 56, 57, 60-62). In this way, the whiteout image 006SG303 hides the initial display portion of the broken image 006SG302, preventing it from appearing unnatural.

[Form 56]
There are two display patterns for the broken image (for example, fragment image 006SG302): a first pattern (for example, broken pattern E) and a second pattern (for example, broken pattern A). The first pattern displays multiple first-type broken images in conjunction with the movement of the character image 006SG305, and the second pattern displays multiple second-type broken images in conjunction with the movement of the character image 006SG305. The first-type fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in a manner that changes from a first speed to a second speed and moves over the display period of the first-type fragment image 006SG302, while the second-type fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in a manner that moves without a change in speed over the display period of the second-type fragment image 006SG302 (see Figures 60, 61, 56, and 57). In this way, the speed at which the fragment image 006SG302 moves can be changed according to the type of crack pattern, thereby enhancing the visual effect.

[Form 57]
There are two display patterns for the cracked image (for example, fragment image 006SG302): a first pattern (for example, crack pattern A) and a second pattern (for example, crack pattern E). The first pattern displays a first type of cracked image in conjunction with the operation of the character image 006SG305, and the second pattern displays a second type of cracked image in conjunction with the operation of the character image 006SG305. The expected level of control to a jackpot state differs depending on whether the cracked image is displayed by the first pattern or the second pattern (see Figures 56, 57, 60, and 61). This increases the sense of anticipation for the character image 006SG305 and enhances interest by drawing attention to the type of cracked pattern displayed after the character image 006SG305 is shown.

Although embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configurations are not limited to these embodiments, and any modifications or additions that do not depart from the spirit of the present invention are also included.

(Variation 1)
For example, in the above embodiment, an example was given in which the speed of the fragment images 006SG302 after the initial whiteout display period of each effect is constant (V1 for the first consecutive break effect, second consecutive break effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, and result notification effect, and V0 for strong development effect B and cut-in effect). However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and as a modified example 1, the multiple fragment images 006SG302 displayed as break effects in the first consecutive break effect, second consecutive break effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect may have different movement speeds (display speeds) in the left-right direction (also called the X-axis direction), up-down direction (also called the Y-axis direction), and towards the player (Z-axis direction) within the display area of the image display device 5.
The degrees may be different.

For example, as shown in Figure 95(A), the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as fragment effects for the first consecutive fragment effect, second consecutive fragment effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, and result notification effect may include fragment images 006SG302A that move at a speed Vx1 in the X-axis direction, a speed 0 in the Y-axis direction, and a speed 0 in the Z-axis direction; fragment images 006SG302B that move at a speed 0 in the X-axis direction, a speed Vy1 in the Y-axis direction, and a speed 0 in the Z-axis direction; and fragment images 006SG302C that move at a speed 0 in the X-axis direction, a speed 0 in the Y-axis direction, and a speed Vz1 in the Z-axis direction. In addition, there may also be fragment images 006SG302 that move in two directions out of the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis directions, and fragment images 006SG302 that move in three directions out of these three directions.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 95(B), the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as the strong development effect A, strong development effect B, and the breakage effect of the cut-in effect may include fragment images 006SG302A that move at a speed of Vx2 in the X-axis direction, 0 in the Y-axis direction, and 0 in the Z-axis direction; fragment images 006SG302B that move at a speed of 0 in the X-axis direction, Vy2 in the Y-axis direction, and 0 in the Z-axis direction; and fragment images 006SG302C that move at a speed of 0 in the X-axis direction, 0 in the Y-axis direction, and Vz2 in the Z-axis direction. In addition, fragment images 006SG302 that move in two directions out of the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis directions, and fragment images 006SG302 that move in three directions may also be included.

Furthermore, since movement of the fragment image 006SG302 in the Z-axis direction means enlarging the fragment image 006SG302, the speed of movement of the fragment image 006SG302 in the Z-axis direction is also called the enlargement speed.

Comparing the fragment images 006SG302A, 006SG302B, and 006SG302C in each presentation, which progress only in the X-axis direction, as shown in Figure 95(C), in this modified example 1, unlike fragment images 006SG302A and 006SG302B, fragment image 006SG302C is only displayed enlarged toward the player, so the period from the start to the end of display is set to be longer than that of fragment images 006SG302A and 006SG302B. In other words, in each cracking effect, the enlarged fragment image 006SG302C is displayed, creating a sense of depth for the player. Furthermore, since the fragment image 006SG302A continues to create a sense of depth even after the display of fragment image 006SG302B has finished, the effect of the cracking effect when fragment image 006SG302 is displayed is enhanced.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 95(D), the first consecutive crack effect, second consecutive crack effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, and result notification effect are designated as effect group X, and the strong development effect A, strong development effect B, and cut-in effect are designated as effect group Y. The fragment images 006SG302C displayed as crack effects in effect group X and the fragment images 006SG302C displayed as crack effects in effect group Y are then used. In comparison, in this modified example 1, the Z-axis movement speed Vz1 of the fragment image 006SG302C in the performance group X is set to be faster than the Z-axis movement speed Vz2 of the fragment image 006SG302C in the performance group Y (Vz1 > Vz2), resulting in a longer display period from start to finish for the fragment image 006SG302C in the performance group Y than for the fragment image 006SG302C in the performance group X. Therefore, in this modified example 1, the first consecutive crack effect, the second consecutive crack effect, the dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, the pseudo-consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the result notification effect can be executed at different timings for background change effect A and strong development effect B, respectively. This allows for surprising the player by drawing their attention to these effects at various timings. Furthermore, since the time required for the fragment image 006SG302C to disappear differs between the effects included in effect group X and the effects included in effect group Y, even effects that execute the same crack effect and display the fragment image 006SG302 can give the player a suitably different impression depending on the effect, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

In particular, in this modified example 1, the duration required for the fragment image 006SG302C to disappear is set longer for the effects included in effect group Y than for the effects included in effect group X. Therefore, when the cracking effect is executed as an effect included in effect group Y, the effect of displaying the fragment image 006SG302C can be enhanced compared to when the cracking effect is executed as an effect included in effect group X.

Furthermore, in this modified example 1, a form was exemplified in which fragment images 006SG302 are provided as fragment images 006SG302 that move and are displayed toward the player (enlarged) for the first consecutive break effect, second consecutive break effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fragment images 006SG302 that move and are displayed toward the player (enlarged) may be made to change in visibility by enlarging from the display start timing to the display end timing. By doing so, the effect of the effect when the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed can be further enhanced.

Furthermore, in this modified example 1, when comparing the fragment image 006SG302A which progresses only in the X-axis direction, the fragment image 006SG302B which progresses only in the Y-axis direction, and the fragment image 006SG302C which progresses only in the Z-axis direction, in the first consecutive breakage effect, the second consecutive breakage effect, the dialogue予告 effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo-consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect, as shown in Figure 95(C), the fragment image 006SG302C progresses from the start of display. While an example has been given where the display period is set to be longer than that of fragment images 006SG302A and 006SG302B, the present invention is not limited to this. The display period from start to finish of fragment image 006SG302C, which progresses only in the Z-axis direction in a specific effect (e.g., a cut-in effect), may be longer than the display period from start to finish of fragment images 006SG302A and B, which move only in the X-axis or Y-axis direction in a predetermined effect different from the specific effect (e.g., a pseudo-sequential effect). By doing so, differences can be created in the display patterns of fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the specific effect and the predetermined effect (in the above example, a cut-in effect and a pseudo-sequential effect), thereby enhancing the appeal of these specific and predetermined effects.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment and this modified example 1, fragment images 006SG302 are displayed in the first consecutive break effect, second consecutive break effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, and these fragment images 006SG302 are hidden by moving them, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and fragment images displayed as predetermined effects (for example, pseudo-consecutive effect or background change effect A) may be used as examples. Regarding image 006SG302, all fragment images 006SG302 are hidden by completely moving them outside the display area of the image display device 5. For fragment images 006SG302 displayed as part of a specific effect (e.g., a strong development effect B or a cut-in effect), some fragment images 006SG302 are hidden by completely moving them outside the display area of the image display device 5, while other fragment images 006SG302 may be hidden while moving outside the display area of the image display device 5. This allows for differences in the display patterns of fragment images 006SG302 displayed in a predetermined effect and a specific effect, thereby enhancing the appeal of these specific and predetermined effects.

In this modified example 1, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as part of the first consecutive break effect, second consecutive break effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, and result notification effect are shown as moving in multiple directions along the X, Y, and Z axes. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the starting position of the display of the fragment images 006SG302 may differ between the first consecutive break effect and the second consecutive break effect. By doing so, differences in how the fragment images 006SG302 are presented between the first and second consecutive break effects can be created, enhancing the entertainment value.

(Variation 2)
Furthermore, in the above embodiment, a configuration in which a glass plate image 006SG301A breaks as part of the cracking effect for each effect, thereby displaying multiple fragment images 006SG302, was illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of fragment images 006SG302 displayed as part of the cracking effect for each effect may vary depending on the timing.

For example, as shown in Figure 96(A), the period from the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A to the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 is defined as the early whiteout display period, and the period following the early whiteout display period, in which a whiteout image 006SG303 with higher transmittance than that of the early whiteout display period is displayed, is defined as the late whiteout display period (L2 > L1).

Furthermore, the fragment image display period is comprised of a first fragment image display period of length L3 (L3 > L1 + L2), which is the period from the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A and is longer than the sum of the early whiteout display period and the late whiteout display period; and a second fragment image display period of length L4 (L3 + L4 > L1 + L2), which is a period adjacent to the first fragment image display period.

Here, as shown in Figure 96(B), by displaying more fragment images 006SG302 during the second fragment image display period than during the first fragment image display period, the enjoyment of the gameplay involving the breaking effect can be enhanced. Furthermore, in this modified version 2, during the first fragment image display period, the player cannot see the fragment image 006SG302 due to the whiteout image 006SG303 during the period that overlaps with the early whiteout display period, while the player can see the fragment image 006SG302 through the whiteout image 006SG303 during the period that overlaps with the late whiteout display period. Since the length L3 of the first fragment image display period is longer than the total length of the early whiteout display period and the late whiteout display period (L1 + L2), the fragment image 006SG302 is made invisible to the player during the early whiteout display period, preventing the player from feeling any discomfort with the cracking effect due to the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A. In addition, during the late whiteout display period, the whiteout image 006SG303 is emphasized more than the fragment image 006SG302, which prevents a decrease in the enjoyment of the cracking effect.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as the fragment effects for the first consecutive fragment effect, second consecutive fragment effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, reach suggestion effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect are transparent, while the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as the fragment effects for the pseudo-consecutive effect and weak development effect are not transparent. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the fragment effects for the first consecutive fragment effect, second consecutive fragment effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect may all be transparent, or none of them may be transparent.

(Variation 3)
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 97 as a third modification, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the first consecutive breakage effect, second consecutive breakage effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect changes its transparency according to the progress of the effect (in this third modification, the transparency of the fragment image 006SG302 may be 0 at the timing of the display of the fragment image 006SG302, T1 (T1>0) at the timing of the end of the whiteout display period, T2 (T2>T1) at the timing of the end of the later whiteout display period, and T3 (T3>T2) at the timing of the end of the display of the fragment image 006SG302). By doing so, for example, the effect of the effect can be enhanced when the fragment image 006SG302 has been sufficiently scattered on the display area of the image display device 5 just before the timing of the end of the display of the fragment image 006SG302.

In particular, in this modified example 3, the transmittance of the fragment image 006SG302 increases as time passes from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking. Therefore, the player can easily see the image displayed as the result of the breaking effect through the fragment image 006SG302, thus preventing a decrease in the effect of the effect due to the image being obscured by the fragment image 006SG302 and becoming difficult to see.

Furthermore, in this modified example 3, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the cracking effect is shown to have increasing transparency as the effect progresses. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the cracking effect may also have decreasing transparency as the effect progresses.

(Variation 4)
Furthermore, in Modification 3, as a cracking effect for the first consecutive cracking effect, second consecutive cracking effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, an example was given in which the transmittance of the fragment image 006SG302 increases as time passes from the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and as Modification 4 is shown in Figures 98(A) and 98(B), it can be implemented as follows. The transparency of the fragment image 006SG302 may differ depending on whether the effect is a first consecutive break effect, a second consecutive break effect, a dialogue予告 effect, a background change effect A, a background change effect B, a pseudo-consecutive effect, a reach suggestion effect, a weak development effect, a strong development effect A, a strong development effect B, a cut-in effect, or a result notification effect. Furthermore, even for the same effect, the transparency of the fragment image 006SG302 may differ depending on the game state (Figure 98 illustrates the transparency of the fragment image 006SG302 in background change effect A and a weak development effect).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 98, in background change effect A and weak development effect, after the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks as a breaking effect and the display of the fragment image 006SG302 begins, the fragment image 006SG302 becomes visible to the player when the whiteout display period ends. Here, since the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the cracking effect in background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the cracking effect in weak development effect have different transparency levels when visible to the player, even though both effects involve the glass plate image 006SG301A cracking, it is possible to create differences in the content of the effects. Therefore, the effect of the effects can be enhanced when the glass plate image 006SG301 cracks and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed as the cracking effect in background change effect A, and when the glass plate image 006SG301A cracks and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed as the cracking effect in weak development effect.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 98, when comparing the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the cracking effect as background change effect A when performed in the normal state with the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the cracking effect as a weak development effect when performed in the time-saving state or probability-changing state, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the cracking effect as background change effect A when performed in the normal state with the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the cracking effect as a weak development effect when performed in the time-saving state or probability-changing state Since the transparency differs between 02 and 02 when visible to the player, even though both depict the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, differences in the animation content can be created. This enhances the visual effect when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed as a background change animation A in the normal state, and when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed as a weak development animation in the time-saving or probability-changing state.

(Variation 5)
Furthermore, in the above embodiment, examples were given in which a cracking effect is executed as an effect within the background change effect A or the reach suggestion effect as a result of a character acting on the glass plate image 006SG301A as a background change effect A or a reach suggestion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301A as a background change effect A or a reach suggestion effect, a sound corresponding to the displayed character (for example, a character voice) may be output. In this way, the cracking effect can be made more distinct when a crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301A and when a fragment image 006SG302 is displayed. In particular, as shown in Figure 99 as Modification 5, when a character voice corresponding to the character is output when a character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301A as a background change effect A or a reach suggestion effect, the character voice and the cracking sound should be output at the same volume (Vol 1 in the example of Figure 99) so that at least a portion of the output period of the character voice and the output period of the cracking sound overlap.

Furthermore, in this modified example 5, as shown in Figure 99, the cracking sound output when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed may be output at a louder volume (Vol. 2 in the example of Figure 99) than the cracking sound output when the crack is displayed. This allows for a clearer distinction between the cracking effect when the crack appears on the glass plate image 006SG301 and when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed. Moreover, the cracking effect is executed as part of background change effect A or reach suggestion effect, meaning that these background change effect A and reach suggestion effects were executed in a successful pattern, and the cracking pattern of these cracking effects can be clearly perceived by the player.

(Variation 6)
Furthermore, in the above embodiment, as a cracking effect for the first consecutive cracking effect, second consecutive cracking effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, an example was given in which the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A is moved and displayed until the end of the display. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a cracking effect for these effects may be rotated in addition to being moved during the period from the start to the end of the display. Moreover, the number of rotations of the fragment image 006SG302 from the start to the end of the display may differ depending on which effect the cracking effect is performed in.

For example, as shown in Figure 100 as Modification 6, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the first consecutive breakage effect, the second consecutive breakage effect, and the dialogue予告 effect rotates R3 times from the start to the end of display. The fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, and strong development effect A rotates R2 (R3 > 2) times, which is fewer than R3, from the start to the end of display. The fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect rotates R1 (R2 > R1) times, which is fewer than R2, from the start to the end of display.

Thus, in this modified version 6, even between effects with different timings that can be executed during variable display, having an effect where the number of rotations from the start to the end of display of the fragment image 006SG302 is the same increases the correlation within each combination of effects, such as the combination of the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, and the dialogue予告 effect; the combination of background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, and strong development effect A; and the combination of strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect. Therefore, the effect of the effects within these combinations can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as described above, in this modified version 6, the number of rotations from the start to the end of display of the fragment image 006SG302 differs depending on which type of cracking effect is being displayed. In particular, for example, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a cracking effect in a pseudo-consecutive effect has a greater number of rotations from the start to the end of display than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a cracking effect in a cut-in effect. Therefore, the variations of cracking effects that are executed as a first consecutive cracking effect, a second consecutive cracking effect, a dialogue予告 effect, a background change effect A, a background change effect B, a pseudo-consecutive effect, a reach suggestion effect, a weak development effect, a strong development effect A, a strong development effect B, a cut-in effect, and a result notification effect can be increased, and the effect of the display of the fragment image 006SG302 can be enhanced.

In this modified example 6, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as a first consecutive break effect, a second consecutive break effect, a dialogue予告 effect, a background change effect A, a background change effect B, a pseudo-consecutive effect, a reach suggestion effect, a weak development effect, a strong development effect A, a strong development effect B, a cut-in effect, and a result notification effect are shown as examples of rotating displays. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. While the fragment images 006SG302 are rotating, when the fragment images 006SG302 reach a first rotation angle, the player can view the background image through the fragment images 006SG302, and when the fragment images 006SG302 reach a second rotation angle, at least a part of the background image may be made invisible to the player through the fragment images 006SG302. By doing so, the effect of the display when these fragment images 006SG302 are shown can be enhanced. Furthermore, as described above, if the transparency of the fragment image 006SG302 changes depending on the rotation angle of the fragment image 006SG302, instead of rotating all fragment images 006SG302 synchronously, at least some of the fragment images 006SG302 may be rotated at a different angle from the other fragment images 006SG302. For example, when fragment image 006SG302 has the first rotation angle described above, some of the other fragment images 006SG302 may have the second rotation angle described above, thereby enhancing the visual effect when the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed.

(Variation 7)
Furthermore, while the above embodiment exemplifies a pseudo-consecutive effect in which a crack is displayed in the image display area of the image display device 5 and then a crack effect is executed in accordance with the movement of the movable body 32, the present invention is not limited thereto. As a modified example 7, as shown in Figure 101(A), the pseudo-consecutive effect may be such that, after a preliminary operation period in which a character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, or the movable body 32 falls, a crack is displayed as part of the crack display period. Moreover, as shown in Figure 101(B), the crack display period may be composed of a pre-crack display period and a post-crack display period, as in the background change effect A of the above embodiment, so that the crack is displayed in two stages before the crack effect is executed.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 101(B), the length of the pre-crack display period in the pseudo-continuous effect may be made different from the pre-crack display period in the background change effect A of the above embodiment. By doing so, even though the glass plate image 006SG301 cracks in two stages in both the background change effect A of the above embodiment and the pseudo-continuous effect of this modified example 7, by differentiating the period until the second stage of cracks is displayed between the background change effect A and the pseudo-continuous effect, the number of effect patterns until the crack effect is executed can be increased, thereby enhancing the effect when cracks are displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301.

Furthermore, in this modified example 7, the pseudo-consecutive effect is exemplified as an effect in which cracks are displayed in two stages in the display area of the image display device 5 after a preliminary operation period in which the character's actions and the movable body 32 operate, as in the background change effect A in the above embodiment. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the reach suggestion effect may also be an effect in which cracks are displayed in two stages in the display area of the image display device 5 after a preliminary operation period in which the character's actions and the movable body 32 operate, as in the background change effect A in the above embodiment. In this case as well, the crack display period in the reach suggestion effect may consist of a pre-crack display period and a post-crack display period, and the length of the pre-crack display period in the reach suggestion effect may be different from the pre-crack display period of the background change effect A in the above embodiment. In this way, even though the background change effect A of the above embodiment and the reach suggestion effect of this modified example 7 both involve cracking the glass plate image 006SG301 in two stages, by differentiating the time until the second stage of cracking is displayed between background change effect A and reach suggestion effect, the number of effect patterns until the cracking effect is executed can be increased, thereby enhancing the effect when cracks are displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301.

(Variation 8)
In the above embodiment, the glass plate image 006SG301 and glass plate image 006SG301A, which serve as images indicating impending breakage, are shown in the Layer 4 image drawing area and Layer 5 image drawing area, which are lower than the active display area 5F and the special feature hold storage display area 5U. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the glass plate image 006SG301, which serves as an image indicating impending breakage, and the glass plate image 006SG301A, which serves as an alternative image to the glass plate image 006SG301, may be displayed not only in the Layer 4 image drawing area, which is lower than the active display area 5F and the special feature hold storage display area 5U, but also in the Layer 4 image drawing area, which is higher than the active display area 5F and the special feature hold storage display area 5U.

For example, in this modified example 8, as shown in Figures 102(A1) to (A5), in background change effect A, the glass plate image 006SG301 can be displayed in a layer image rendering area higher than the active display area 5F and the special feature hold memory display area 5U. Furthermore, in response to the character image 006SG305 kicking toward the foreground, cracks are displayed radiating outwards from a position slightly to the right of the approximate center of the glass plate image 006SG301. After the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in the pre-crack state (see Figure 102(A2)), when the cracks gradually radiate outwards and change into the crack state, a portion of the cracks can be displayed superimposed on the active display area 5F and the special feature hold memory display area 5U (see Figure 102(A3)).

If a portion of the crack overlaps the active display area 5F and the special symbol hold memory display area 5U in this manner, the visibility of the first hold display 006SG101 (second hold display) and the active display 006SG103 may be reduced if they are already displayed. Therefore, in this case, the execution of the active change effect, which changes the display color of the active display 006SG103, is restricted, and the display color of the active display 006SG103 does not change.

On the other hand, as shown in Figures 102(B1) to (B5), in background change effect B, as explained in the above embodiment, the glass plate image 006SG301 and the character image 006SG305 can be displayed in a layer image drawing area lower than the active display area 5F and the special feature hold memory display area 5U. Furthermore, in response to the character image 006SG305 appearing in the upper right of the screen, a crack display area 006SG324 consisting of cracks including a small fracture area is displayed in the lower left position of the glass plate image 006SG301 (see Figure 102(B1)). Then, in response to the character image 006SG305 beginning to descend, two new crack display areas 006SG324 are displayed in the upper right position of the existing crack display area 006SG324, thereby gradually changing the crack pattern of the glass plate image 006SG301 (see Figure 102(B2)).

However, in this case, since the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a layer 4 image rendering area lower than the active display area 5F and the special feature hold memory display area 5U, even if the crack were to extend and extend into the active display area 5F and the special feature hold memory display area 5U, the crack would not be displayed superimposed on the active display area 5F and the special feature hold memory display area 5U.

Furthermore, even when the character image 006SG305 moves across the active display area 5F and the special symbol hold memory display area 5U, the effect image 006SG330 may be displayed in a layer image rendering area higher than the active display area 5F and the special symbol hold memory display area 5U, rather than overlapping the character image 006SG305 (see Figure 102 (B3)). Subsequently, the active change effect is executed, and the display color of the active display 006SG103 changes (see Figure 102 (B4)).

Thus, in background change effect A, where the visibility of the active display area 5F and the special symbol hold memory display area 5U may decrease when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the execution period overlaps with the active change effect (an effect using a changing character), thereby restricting the execution of the active change effect that changes the display mode of the active display 006SG103. On the other hand, in background change effect B, where the visibility of the active display area 5F and the special symbol hold memory display area 5U does not decrease when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the execution of the active change effect that changes the display mode of the active display 006SG103 is enabled. Therefore, even though both effects display a cracked premonition image, the display layer and the presence or absence of the active change effect execution differ, creating a suitably different impression and enhancing the enjoyment of the game. Note that the target of the change effect may also be the first hold display 006SG101 or the second hold display.

Furthermore, in background change effect A, a portion of the cracks is displayed superimposed on the active display area 5F and the special symbol hold memory display area 5U, reducing the visibility of these areas. In such a situation, if the display pattern of the hold display or active display changes, it becomes difficult to determine whether the change is due to the effect or the crack pattern, potentially causing distrust among players. Therefore, it is preferable to enable the background change effect in background change effect B, where the visibility of the active display area 5F and the special symbol hold memory display area 5U does not decrease even when the crack pattern is present.

Furthermore, in this modified example 8, while the execution of the active change effect is restricted when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state during background change effect A, the active change effect can be executed after, for example, the cracking effect is executed, the fragment image 006SG302 scatters, and the whiteout image 006SG303 becomes invisible. In other words, it may be executed at a timing different from the original execution timing (for example, at the start of the variation or during a reach). Alternatively, the active change effect may be executed in a simplified form (for example, without displaying the change character, subtly changing the active display at the timing shown in Figure 102 (A3)). By performing the change effect during a period that does not overlap with the period when the active display becomes difficult to see due to the cracking effect, the effects of both the cracking effect and the change effect can be enhanced.

(Variation 9)
Furthermore, while the above embodiment illustrates a form in which it is determined that when strong development performance A is performed, it will develop into strong S reach performance A, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the multiple fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the break performance may include fragment images 006SG342M, 006SG342J, 006SG342N, etc., which suggest that one of multiple types of strong S reach performances A, B, J, and N with different levels of expectation will be performed.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 103(A) to (F), during the strong development sequence A, a cracking sequence is executed. After the whiteout image 006SG303 finishes displaying, and before the fragment image 006SG302 finishes displaying and disappears, fragment image 006SG342M, suggesting that strong S-reach sequence A or strong S-reach sequence B will be executed, fragment image 006SG342J, suggesting that strong S-reach sequence J will be executed, fragment image 006SG342N, suggesting that strong S-reach sequence N will be executed, and multiple fragment images 006SG302 are displayed (see Figure 103(G)).

Then, if fragment image 006SG342M remains displayed alone while fragment images 006SG342J and 006SG342N remain hidden, and multiple transparent fragment images 006SG302 are displayed, it is announced that Strong S Reach Performance A or Strong S Reach Performance B will be executed (see Figure 104 (A1), (A2), (A2')), and fragment image 006SG342J remains displayed alone while the other fragment images 006SG If fragments 342M and 006SG342N are hidden and multiple transparent fragment images 006SG302 are displayed, the player is notified that the Strong S Reach演出 J will be executed (see Figures 104 (B1) and (B2)). If fragment image 006SG342N is displayed alone while other fragment images 006SG342M and 006SG342J are hidden and multiple transparent fragment images 006SG302 are displayed, the player is notified that the Strong S Reach演出 N will be executed (see Figures 104 (C1) and (C2)).

By doing so, the correlation between the fragment image in the strong development sequence A and the strong S-reach sequence that follows can be enhanced. Therefore, even in sequences where the same fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, a distinctly different impression can be created, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In this modified version, the type of strong S-reach animation being performed is indicated by non-transparent fragment images 006SG342M, 006SG342J, and 006SG342N, which display the faces of characters of the type appearing in various strong S-reach animations. However, the indication is not limited to the above; various fragment images can be used as long as they allow for the identification of the type of strong S-reach animation being performed. For example, fragment images displaying relevant information such as the reach title name or background image that allows for the identification of the type of strong S-reach animation may also be used.

Furthermore, the type of execution is indicated by the display of one of the multiple fragment images 006SG342M, 006SG342J, and 006SG342N while others remain hidden. However, this indication may also be conveyed by, for example, displaying one of the fragment images 006SG342M, 006SG342J, or 006SG342N in a larger size, in a different color, displaying an effect image, or displaying it in an emphasized manner. Alternatively, the strong S-reach animation may be executed while two or more fragment images remain displayed.

(Variation 10)
Furthermore, although the above embodiment illustrates a configuration in which multiple fragment images 006SG302 are displayed in a single layer 5 image drawing area, the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be displayed in two or more layer image drawing areas.

For example, in this modified example 10, as shown in Figure 105, among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 that can be displayed in the crack pattern F used in the strong development effect A, the larger fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in a transparent manner in the layer 5-1 image drawing area, and the smaller fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in an opaque manner in the layer 5-2 image drawing area, which is higher than the layer 5-1 image drawing area. In this case, the glass plate image 006SG301, which is displayed as a crack premonition image, is displayed in both the layer 5-1 and layer 5-2 image drawing areas at the crack timing. Furthermore, one of the larger fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the layer 5-1 image drawing area is depicted with the face of a character corresponding to the type of strong S reach effect, as explained in modified example 9.

Thus, one of the larger fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the Layer 5-1 image rendering area depicts a character, while the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the Layer 5-2 image rendering area is transparent, allowing at least a portion of the background image displayed in the Layer 1 image rendering area, which is lower than the Layer 5-2 rendering area, to be recognized. By overlapping the display periods of the two fragment images 006SG302 with different display modes, a memorable effect can be provided.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 105(B), the layer 5-1 image rendering area and the layer 5-2 image rendering area consist of a first display area L1 that does not overlap with the movable body 32 when the movable body 32 moves to the performance position, and a second display area L2 enclosed by a dashed line representing the movable body 32. When the movable body 32 moves to the performance position, the amount of fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the first display area L1 is greater than the amount of fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the second display area L2. This allows for the optimal display of the fragment image 006SG302 even when the movable body 32 overlaps with the display area of the image display device 5.

Furthermore, one of the multiple fragment images 006SG302, specifically the first fragment image 006SG302, is displayed in a manner that it moves from the first display area L1 into the second display area L2, while one of the multiple fragment images 006SG302, specifically the second fragment image 006SG302, is displayed in a manner that it moves within the first display area L1 without entering the second display area L2. In this way, by providing fragment images 006SG302 that pass through the first display area L1, while simultaneously conveying the idea of breakage through fragment images 006SG302 that do not enter the second display area L2, a dynamic and engaging presentation can be achieved.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment illustrates a form in which a glass plate image 006SG301, which mimics a glass plate, is applied as an example of a crack precursor image, the present invention is not limited to this, and crack precursor images mimicking objects other than glass, such as panels, doors, or rocks, may also be applied. Also, when displaying the glass plate image 006SG301, the transmittance may be displayed at 100% or less than 100%. Additionally, the crack precursor images may be displayed in multiple layer image rendering areas, allowing for individual crack effects to be displayed.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, as an example of a fragment image, a configuration was shown in which a glass fragment image 006SG302, which mimics a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A that replaces the glass plate image 006SG301 as a pre-breakage image, can be displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as an image that mimics at least a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A that replaces the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, a fragment image that mimics an image different from the glass plate image 006SG301 may also be displayed in part. Also, although the fragment image is displayed on a higher display layer than the pre-breakage image, it may also be displayed on a lower display layer than the pre-breakage image.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment specified crack patterns A to G as the crack patterns for the crack effect, the present invention is not limited to these, and it may be possible to perform crack effects based on other types of crack patterns.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment exemplifies a configuration in which the crack effect can be executed during the execution of a pre-announcement effect or other effect that suggests the likelihood of a big win, the present invention is not limited to this, and the crack effect may be executed independently and separately from other effects. In this case, the likelihood of a big win may differ depending on the type of crack pattern, so that the crack effect may be executed as one of the pre-announcement effects, or it may be executed as a change effect when the effect stage, effect mode, or game state changes.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the cracking effect was illustrated by setting that some kind of impact (force) is applied from the rear to approximately the center of the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed as a cracking precursor image, thereby initiating the cracking. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the cracking may be initiated by setting that some kind of impact (force) is applied from the front to a predetermined position in the cracking precursor image. Also, the force may be applied to multiple locations in the cracking precursor image at predetermined timings, or at multiple timings.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment illustrates two types of pre-cracking effects, one in which the glass plate image 006SG301, serving as a pre-cracking image, changes to a cracked pattern before the cracking begins, and another in which the cracking begins immediately without changing to a cracked pattern, the present invention is not limited to these examples. Regardless of the type of pre-cracking effect, all cracking effects may begin after the glass plate image 006SG301, serving as a pre-cracking image, changes to a cracked pattern, or all cracking effects may begin immediately without changing to a cracked pattern.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked pattern, object images (such as characters), decorative patterns, and background images displayed in the layer image drawing area below the glass plate image 006SG301 are displayed with first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, while when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, they are displayed with a second visibility that is less visible than the first visibility. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked pattern, the various images displayed in the layer image drawing area below the glass plate image 006SG301 may be displayed with first visibility without reducing their visibility, and for example, the cracks may be made more noticeable by displaying a colored effect image in the area representing the cracks.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment primarily uses character image 006SG305 as an example of an object image, the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of character may be other than those described above. Also, it is possible to change the character to a person, an object such as an iron ball or rock, or a target object, among other things.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment exemplifies forms in which the cracking effect can be initiated in response to the movement of an object image, in response to the movement of the movable body 32, or independently of the movement of either the object image or the movable body 32, the present invention is not limited to these forms. In all effects, the cracking may be initiated in response to the movement of an object image, in all effects, in response to the movement of the movable body 32, or in all effects, independently of the movement of either the object image or the movable body 32. Also, while the movable body 32 is used as an example of a movable body (logo), a movable body on the game board 2 located elsewhere may be used, or a movable body on the game machine frame 3 other than the game board 2 may be used. Furthermore, the cracking effect may be initiated in response to the movement of a movable body such as the special variable prize ball device 7.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, when the cracking effect begins, a whiteout image 006SG303 with 0% transparency is displayed as an effect image on a display layer higher than the glass plate image 006SG301, thereby making it difficult to see the fragment image 006SG302 during the period immediately following the start of the cracking effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is not necessary to display the whiteout image 006SG303 at the start of the cracking effect to make it difficult to see the fragment image 006SG302.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment illustrates a configuration in which a whiteout image 006SG303 with 0% transmittance is displayed on a display layer above the glass plate image 006SG301, making it difficult to see the fragment image 006SG302 at the start of the cracking effect, the present invention is not limited to this. The transmittance of the fragment image 006SG302 may be increased at the start of the cracking effect, that is, the fragment image 006SG302 may be faded in, making it difficult to see the fragment image 006SG302 at the start of the cracking effect.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment exemplifies a configuration in which a glass plate image 006SG301 for displaying cracks is drawn and arranged in the Layer 4 image drawing area, and a glass plate image 006SG301A is drawn and arranged in the Layer 5 image drawing area as an image of the glass plate actually breaking (changing to a fragment image 006SG302), the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the glass plate image 006SG301 may be drawn and arranged in the Layer 4 image drawing area, and a fragment image 006SG302 may be drawn and arranged in the Layer 5 image drawing area as an image of the broken glass plate image 006SG301, without drawing or arranging the glass plate image 006SG301A.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment exemplifies the display of glass plate image 006SG301 and glass plate image 006SG301A in the first consecutive cracking effect, second consecutive cracking effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, the present invention is not limited thereto. The transmittance of glass plate image 006SG301 for displaying the cracked pattern and the transmittance of glass plate image 006SG301A for displaying the cracked pattern may be different. For example, by making the transmittance of glass plate image 006SG301A for displaying the cracked pattern higher than that of glass plate image 006SG301 for displaying the cracked pattern (making glass plate image 006SG301 an opaque image), the timing of the crack display and the execution timing of the cracking effect can be made clearer than in the above embodiment.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, an example was given in which the display of the glass plate image 006SG301A, which changes to a cracked pattern, is started in the layer 5 image drawing area at the same time that the glass plate image 006SG301, displayed in a cracked pattern, is hidden in the layer 4 image drawing area. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display timing of the glass plate image 006SG301, displayed in a cracked pattern, and the display timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A, which changes to a cracked pattern, may overlap at least partially.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed in a cracked pattern was exemplified as a crack precursor image in the present invention. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the crack precursor image may be any image other than the cracked glass plate image 006SG301, as long as it suggests that the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 will crack.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, as a cracking effect for background change effect A, reach suggestion effect, and weak development effect, the glass plate image 006SG301A is shown to crack when a character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 with a kick (see Figure 56), hammer (see Figure 60), punch (see Figure 62), etc. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a cracking effect for background change effect A, reach suggestion effect, and weak development effect, the glass plate image 006SG301A may be cracked by the action of a slashing attack such as a sword, in addition to the kick, hammer, punch etc. described above. In particular, as background change effects in this embodiment, in addition to background change effect A, in which the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks when a character acts on it with a kick (breaks due to the impact of the kick), and background change effect B, in which the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks without any action from the character or movable body 32 (see Figure 41), as described above, background change effect C can be executed in which the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks when a character acts on it with a sword (breaks due to the slash of the sword). The proportion to which the game is controlled to a jackpot state may be varied depending on whether or not the character acts on the glass plate 006SG301 and the manner in which the character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301. By doing so, the number of possible glass plate 006SG301A breaking effects can be increased, and the player's attention to the breaking effects can be further enhanced.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, in the first consecutive cracking effect, second consecutive cracking effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, a form was illustrated in which the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A cracks, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable when the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the whiteout image 006SG303 may not be displayed from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in place of the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 (the timing when the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A begins). By doing this, the sense of speed from the display of the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 to the actual breakage of the glass plate image 006SG301A is enhanced, providing a dynamic and memorable breakage effect.

Furthermore, if the whiteout image 006SG303 is not displayed as part of the cracking effect as described above, instead of displaying the glass plate image 006SG301A in place of the cracked glass plate image 006SG301, the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 itself may be displayed as if it were cracking. By doing so, the glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, thus preventing the player from feeling uneasy due to the display of the glass plate image 006SG301A in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 during the cracking effect.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment illustrates a configuration in which a transparent fragment image 006SG302 is displayed when a cracking effect is executed as background change effect A and background change effect B, the present invention is not limited to this. When a cracking effect is executed as background change effect A and background change effect B, a non-transparent fragment image 006SG302 may also be displayed. In particular, when a transparent fragment image 006SG302 is displayed when a cracking effect is executed as background change effect A and background change effect B, a portion of the background image that was displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 immediately before the execution of the cracking effect may be displayed in the fragment image 006SG302.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment exemplifies a form in which the crack effect can be performed as a first consecutive crack effect, a second consecutive crack effect, a dialogue予告 effect, a background change effect A, a background change effect B, a pseudo-consecutive effect, a reach suggestion effect, a weak development effect, a strong development effect A, a strong development effect B, a cut-in effect, and a result notification effect, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the crack effect may also be performed as an effect other than the first consecutive crack effect, the second consecutive crack effect, a dialogue予告 effect, a background change effect A, a background change effect B, a pseudo-consecutive effect, a reach suggestion effect, a weak development effect, a strong development effect A, a strong development effect B, a cut-in effect, and a result notification effect. For example, during a variable display, after it has been announced that the game is controlled to a less advantageous jackpot state for the player (for example, a non-probability-changing jackpot that is controlled to a time-saving state after the jackpot ends, or a probability-changing jackpot C with 2 rounds), or after the jackpot state following the end of the variable display, an upgrade animation may be performed to announce that the game is controlled to a more advantageous jackpot state for the player (for example, a probability-changing jackpot A with 10 rounds that is controlled to a probability-changing state after the jackpot ends). Alternatively, during a variable display, after it has been announced that the game is not controlled to a jackpot state, a revival animation may be performed to announce that the game is controlled to a jackpot state.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, when executing crack effects as a first consecutive crack effect, a second consecutive crack effect, a dialogue予告 effect, a background change effect A, a background change effect B, a pseudo-consecutive effect, a reach suggestion effect, a weak development effect, a strong development effect A, a strong development effect B, a cut-in effect, and a result notification effect, the example given was that the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 and the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A are executed after the actions of the character or movable body 32 and the display of cracks are performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and cases may be provided in which the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 and the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A are executed without the actions of the character or movable body 32 or the display of cracks. By doing so, a sense of surprise can be given to the player by executing the crack effect, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the crack effects for the first consecutive crack effect, the second consecutive crack effect, the dialogue予告 effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo-consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect were exemplified as using the glass plate image 006SG301 (and the glass plate image 006SG301A) as the target of the crack effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and images other than the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A may be used as the target of the crack effect (for example, the operation prompt image 006SG310 in the case of the dialogue予告 effect or the cut-in effect).

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, in the crack effects of the first consecutive crack effect, second consecutive crack effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed as an image higher than the glass plate image 006SG301A and the background image, thereby temporarily making at least a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A, the fragment image 006SG302, and the background image invisible to the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in these crack effects, the whiteout image 006SG303 may be displayed as an image between the glass plate image 006SG301A and the background image.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the background change effect A and the break effect of the reach indication effect were exemplified as having the character act on the glass plate image 006SG301 from the back to the front of the display area of the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and these break effects may also be achieved by drawing and arranging the character image in a drawing area higher than the glass plate image 006SG301 (see Figures 3 and 4), so that the character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 from the front to the back of the display area of the image display device 5.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, while examples were given of displaying the fragment image 006SG302 as a normal planar image in the fragment effects of the first consecutive fragment effect, second consecutive fragment effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, the present invention is not limited thereto. In fragment effects of effects that, by their execution, suggest a higher probability of being controlled to a jackpot state than when other effects are executed, such as the strong development effect and cut-in effect, the fragment image 006SG302 may be displayed as a stereoscopic 3D image. In this way, when the strong development effect or cut-in effect is executed, the display of the 3D fragment image 006SG302 as a fragment effect can make the player recognize that there is a high probability of being controlled to a jackpot state.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, examples were given of displaying the fragment image 006SG302 in the first consecutive breakage effect, second consecutive breakage effect, dialogue予告 effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the movement and display speed of the fragment image 006SG302 may be different for breakage effects in effects that, by being executed, suggest a higher probability of being controlled to a jackpot state than when other effects are executed, such as the strong development effect and cut-in effect, and for breakage effects in effects other than these strong development effect and cut-in effect. By doing this, for example, by making the movement speed of the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a strong development or cut-in animation slower than the movement speed of the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a first consecutive break animation, second consecutive break animation, dialogue予告 animation, background change animation A, background change animation B, pseudo-consecutive animation, reach suggestion animation, weak development animation, and result notification animation, it is possible to make the player aware that the probability of being controlled to a jackpot state is high when strong development animations or cut-in animations are being executed, based on the movement speed of the fragment image 006SG302.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, as shown in Figures 70 and 71, the fragment images 006SG302 with transparency are displayed as the fragment images for the first consecutive fragment effects, second consecutive fragment effects, dialogue予告 effects, background change effects A, background change effects B, reach suggestion effects, weak development effects, strong development effects A, strong development effects B, cut-in effects, and result notification effects, while the fragment images 006SG302 without transparency are displayed as the fragment images for the pseudo-consecutive effects and weak development effects. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the presence or absence of transparency in the fragment images 006SG302 may be differed between fragment effects in effects that suggest a higher probability of being controlled to a jackpot state than when other effects are executed, such as strong development effects and cut-in effects, and fragment effects in effects other than these strong development effects and cut-in effects. In this way, the transparency of the fragment image 006SG302 displayed by the execution of the cracking effect allows the player to recognize whether or not there is a high probability of being controlled to a jackpot state.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment used spherical game balls (pachinko balls) as an example of a game medium, it is not limited to spherical game media; for example, non-spherical game media such as tokens may also be used.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment used a pachinko machine as an example of a gaming machine, it can also be applied to slot machines, for example, where a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using game value, and one game ends when a variable display result is derived from a variable display device capable of displaying multiple types of identifiable symbols, and a prize can be awarded according to the variable display result derived from the variable display device. In the case of slot machines, the normal state corresponds to the non-AT state, the advantageous state corresponds to Big Bonus, Regular Bonus, Assist Time (AT), and the special state corresponds to Assist Time (AT), etc.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment exemplifies a configuration in which a jackpot game state is considered advantageous because it allows game balls to enter the large prize slot, resulting in more prize balls being dispensed than when game balls enter the starting prize slot or the general prize slot 10, the present invention is not limited to this. Any game state that is advantageous to the player, such as making it easier for game balls to enter the prize slots or making it easier to control the game into a jackpot state, may be considered an advantageous state, including a time-saving state or a probability variation state.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to enclosed gaming machines and slot machines that enclose a gaming medium and award points based on the occurrence of winnings. Moreover, a gaming machine capable of gameplay only needs to be one that allows for gameplay, and is not limited to pachinko machines or slot machines; it may also be a general-purpose game machine.

1. Pachinko game machine 2. Game board 4A 1st special symbol display device 4B 2nd special symbol display device 5 Image display device 9 Game effect lamp 11 Main board 12 Performance control board 31B Push button 31B
32 Movable body 100 Microcomputer for game control 120 CPU for performance control

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs variable display of specific identification information, and as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, is capable of controlling the player to an advantageous state,
Game control means,
A means of controlling the performance,
Display means and
It comprises a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means ,
The aforementioned game control means is
Based on the fact that the game medium has entered the starting area, it is determined whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state.
The aforementioned specific identification information can be displayed in a variable manner.
Based on the result of the above determination, it is possible to determine one of a plurality of variation patterns, including a first variation pattern which is controlled to the advantageous state, a second variation pattern which is not controlled to the advantageous state, a third variation pattern which is controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth variation pattern which is not controlled to the advantageous state.
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command can be sent to the performance control means.
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command can be sent to the performance control means.
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command can be sent to the performance control means.
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command can be sent to the performance control means.
The aforementioned performance control means is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will be controlled to the advantageous state in the first reach.
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach will not control the advantageous state.
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the system will be controlled to the advantageous state in the second reach.
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach will not control the advantageous state,
The execution time of the title display corresponding to the first reach and the execution time of the title display corresponding to the second reach are different,
The title display corresponding to the first reach and the title display corresponding to the second reach are:
The first part is from the start of the title display corresponding to the first reach or the title display corresponding to the second reach until it is displayed in a specific area,
A second part in which a title display corresponding to the first reach or a title display corresponding to the second reach is displayed in the specific area,
It consists of a third part which terminates the display of the title corresponding to the first reach or the title corresponding to the second reach,
The aforementioned display means is
In the title display corresponding to the first reach, the title display corresponding to the first reach is displayed such that the second part is longer than the first part and the third part, and the first part is longer than the third part.
In the title display corresponding to the second reach, the title display corresponding to the second reach is displayed such that the second part is longer than the first part and the third part, and the first part is longer than the third part .
After notification that the system will be controlled to the aforementioned advantageous state, it is possible to display the name of the advantageous state corresponding to the controlled advantageous state.
The aforementioned advantageous state name display is displayed larger than the title display corresponding to the first reach and the title display corresponding to the second reach.
In the first reach, the light-emitting means is controlled using a first reach luminance data table composed of luminance data.
In the second reach, the light-emitting means is controlled using a second reach luminance data table composed of luminance data.
When the title display corresponding to the first reach is executed, the title display brightness data table corresponding to the first reach is used.
In the introductory part following the title display corresponding to the first reach, the brightness data table for the first reach introductory part is used.
When the title display corresponding to the second reach is executed, the title display brightness data table corresponding to the second reach is used.
In the introductory part following the title display corresponding to the second reach, the brightness data table for the second reach introductory part is used.
It is possible to display fragment images and perform predetermined effects that suggest that the system is controlled to the advantageous state,
The display patterns for the fragment images in the aforementioned predetermined performance include a first pattern in which the fragment images are displayed after the image indicating impending breakage is displayed, and a second pattern in which the fragment images are displayed without displaying the image indicating impending breakage.
In the first pattern, when the fragment image is displayed, a predetermined sound corresponding to the fragment image is output, whereas in the second pattern, when the fragment image is displayed, the predetermined sound is not output.
In the first pattern, the object image can be displayed before the fragment image is displayed.
The effect image can be displayed before the object image is displayed.
There are cases where the object image is displayed after the effect image is displayed, and cases where the object image is not displayed.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
When an error occurs, the light-emitting means is controlled using an error brightness data table.
If the error occurs while the light-emitting means is being controlled using the first reach brightness data table, the light-emitting means is controlled using the error brightness data table, and the timer value corresponding to the first reach brightness data table is updated.
A gaming machine that, when the light-emitting means is controlled using the second reach brightness data table, controls the light-emitting means using the error brightness data table and updates the timer value corresponding to the second reach brightness data table if the error occurs .